The Unified Manual for Public Procurement

The Unified Manual
for Public Procurement

Four procurement Manuals merged into one continuous text. Where they agree, the provision is stated once. Where they differ, the divergence is set out openly, with the position of each Manual identified. Nothing has been dropped in the merging.

G Goods, 2024 W Works, 2025 C Consultancy Services, 2025 NC Non-Consultancy Services, 2025
Show Common text always stays visible

Front Matter

How to Use this Manual

How to read the colours
Plain white — common to all four Manuals Goods only Works only Consultancy only Non-Consultancy only Two or three Manuals

Anything on a tinted background appears in the named Manual or Manuals alone, and cannot be inferred from the others. Text on plain white applies to all four. A tinted section carries a label in its top-left corner; a single tinted paragraph, list item or table row carries a coloured spine on its left. Grey callouts are ordinary notes — they carry no colour, so colour never means two different things.

0.1Purpose and Scope of this Manual

This Manual consolidates, into a single continuous text, the four procurement Manuals issued by the Department of Expenditure, Ministry of Finance, Government of India. It is written for officers preparing for departmental promotion and competitive examinations, and for practitioners who must work across more than one category of procurement.

Each of the four source Manuals is complete in itself, and each is written as though the other three did not exist. In practice they overlap heavily, diverge sharply at particular points, and use different chapter numbers for the same subject matter. A candidate who studies them separately must hold four parallel structures in mind and reconcile them under examination conditions.

This Manual removes that burden. Where the four Manuals agree, the provision is stated once. Where they differ, the divergence is stated openly, with the position of each Manual identified. Nothing has been dropped in the process of merging: every provision of every source Manual appears somewhere in this text.

0.2The Four Source Manuals

TagManualEdition
GManual for Procurement of GoodsSecond Edition, 2024
WManual for Procurement of WorksSecond Edition, 2025
CManual for Procurement of Consultancy ServicesSecond Edition, 2025
NCManual for Procurement of Non-Consultancy Services2025

0.3How to Read this Manual

Untagged text applies to all four categories. Where a provision is confined to one or more categories, the relevant tag appears against the heading or in the body of the text:

TagCategoryMeaning of the tag
GGoodsThe provision appears only in the Goods Manual
WWorksThe provision appears only in the Works Manual
CConsultancy ServicesThe provision appears only in the Consultancy Manual
NCNon-Consultancy ServicesThe provision appears only in the Non-Consultancy Manual

Tags may be combined. A heading marked G + W is common to Goods and Works but absent from the two services Manuals.

Shaded panels carry three kinds of material: a divergence between the Manuals that a reader must not merge in the mind; a passage from a source Manual reproduced because its exact wording matters; or a caution that the source Manual itself states in emphatic terms.

Bold within the running text marks the operative words of a provision — the words on which its legal effect turns. It is used sparingly and deliberately.

Every chapter closes with a table of points of difference between the four Manuals. That table is the single most useful revision aid in this Manual, and should be read before and after the chapter body.

0.4Contents

ChapterTitleWhat it covers
1Introduction — Principles and PoliciesApplicability, categorisation, the Five R's, Value for Money, the five Fundamental Principles, Canons of Financial Propriety, procurement infrastructure, and the whole body of preferential and restricted purchase policy — MSE, Make in India, land border restrictions, Start-ups and DMI&SP
2Need Assessment, Formulation of the Requirement, and Procurement PlanningThe indent, the Perspective Plan and the Procurement Proposal; cost estimation; and the four different instruments by which a requirement is described — Technical Specifications, the DPR sequence, the Terms of Reference, and the Services and Activities Schedule
3Participation of Bidders, Vendor Relationship Management and GovernanceEligibility and legal status of bidders, the Code of Integrity, the Integrity Pact, grievance redressal, conduct of public servants, registration and enlistment, debarment, and Indian agents
4Bidding Design (Parts A and B)Agency for procurement, admeasurement, types of contract, systems of selection including QCBS, tendering systems, channels of procurement; and the full range of modes of procurement from Open Tender to Direct Procurement
5Bid Invitation ProcessModel Tender Documents, the contents and sections of the tender document, the REoI and RfP, e-publishing, amendment and extension, pre-bid conferences, bid submission, and bid opening
6Forms of Securities, Prices, Payment Terms and Price VariationsBid security and performance security, Security Deposit, Insurance Surety Bond and e-BG, payment terms, advance payments, price variation, Exchange Rate Variation, taxes, and Incoterms
7Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract (Parts A and B)Shortlisting and EoI, the Tender Committee and the CEC, preliminary examination, techno-commercial and financial evaluation, LCS, QCBS, SSS and FBS, abnormally low bids, cartels, negotiations, and award
8Special and Unique Types of ProcurementEmergencies and disaster management, buy back, capital goods, AMC, Net Present Value, turnkey; and the special engagements — individual consultants, NGOs, procurement agents, auditors, IT projects, security and manpower services
9Contract Management (Parts A, B and C)Contract administration and quality assurance; time control, cost control, logistics and closure; and breach, termination and the whole dispute resolution apparatus

0.5Master Concordance — Chapter Numbering across the Four Manuals

The single most frequent source of error in examination is that the same subject carries a different chapter number in each Manual. This table should be memorised before anything else in this book.

SubjectThis ManualGWCNC
Introduction, principles and policies11111
Need assessment and procurement planning22222
Bidders, governance and debarment33833
Bidding design and modes of procurement44344
Bid invitation process55455
Securities, prices and payment terms66566
Shortlisting of consultants (EoI)7A7
Bid evaluation and award of contract77687
Special and unique types of procurement88none98
Contract management and monitoring997109

Three consequences follow, and each has been the subject of examination questions:

  1. The Works Manual runs one chapter behind the others from Bidding Design onwards, because it places governance and debarment at the end, as Chapter 8, rather than early, as Chapter 3.
  2. The Consultancy Manual runs one chapter ahead from Bid Evaluation onwards, because it inserts an entire chapter on Shortlisting of Consultants, which has no counterpart anywhere.
  3. The Works Manual has no chapter on special types of procurement at all. Its variants — EPC, PPP, piece Work and stalled contracts — are dealt with inside its Bidding Design chapter.

0.6Master Concordance — Where the Four Manuals Stand Alone

A provision found in only one Manual cannot be inferred from the others. The following are the principal bodies of material that exist in a single Manual, and they account for most of the difference in length between the four.

Body of materialOnly inWhere in this Manual
Reservation of Khadi, pharmaceuticals and 358 MSE-reserved itemsG1.11.1
Right to Information and proactive disclosuresG1.16
Basic principles of undertaking works; administrative controlW1.17, 1.18
Law of AgencyW + C + NC1.15
Technical Specifications, Ecomark, BEE star ratingsG2.4
The PPR, DPR, technical Sanction and Reference Documents sequenceW2.5
Terms of Reference, activity-based and position-basedC2.6
Services and Activities Schedule, Method Statement, KPIsNC2.7
Agency for Procurement — PWO, PSU, works CommitteeW4.1
Admeasurement of services, input and outputNC4.2
Types of contract — Item Rate, Percentage Rate, Piece Work, EPC, PPPW4.3.3
Fixed Budget based SelectionC4.4.5, 7.22
Quality Oriented Procurement and the Special Technical CommitteeW + NC4.4.4
Rate Contract, Approved Vendor List, Proprietary Article CertificateG4.10, 4.13, 4.16
Award of work through quotations; stalled contractsW4.20, 4.21
Accessibility standards under the RPwD ActW5.3.5
Fixed days for issue of NIT and tender openingW5.6
Incoterms, Exchange Rate Variation, Letter of Credit, customsG6.12, 6.15, 6.17
Mobilisation, plant and secured advancesW6.13.2
Evaluation of the quality of technical proposals; the A–E rating scaleC7.17
Splitting of contracts; the option clause; variation of quantitiesG7.26 – 7.28
Emergencies, buy back, capital goods, AMC, Net Present ValueG8.1 – 8.6
Logo design competitions; Digital India; financial advisors; auditorsC8.14 – 8.18
Housekeeping, manpower, private security, vehicle hiring, HaaSNC8.20 – 8.24
Logistics — transport, title, receipt, storage, GRIRG9.30
Compensation Events; Time at Large; the three closure reconciliationsW9.26, 9.27, 9.31
Contract Monitoring Committee; post-contract reviewC + NC9.2, 9.32
The AMRCD mechanism for CPSE disputesW9.47

0.7Master Concordance — The Principal Numerical Divergences

Where the four Manuals prescribe different figures for the same thing, the difference is almost always examinable. These are collected here for revision; each is dealt with in its place in the text.

ProvisionGWCNCSee
Open Tender Enquiry applies aboveRs 50 lakhRs 10 lakhRs 50 lakhRs 50 lakh4.8
Special Limited Tender Enquiry aboveRs 50 lakhRs 10 lakhRs 50 lakhRs 50 lakh4.15
QCBS — weight of qualitynot usednot above 30%70%not above 30%4.4.3, 7.20
Performance security3 – 5%3 – 10%3 – 5%6.2
Firm price contracts up to12 months18 months12 months12 months6.14.2
Consequence under a Bid Securing Declarationsuspendeddebarredsuspendedsuspended6.1
Exemption from bid securityMSEs and Start-upsStart-ups only6.1
Liquidated damages per week0.5%1% for repair works up to Rs 20 lakh, otherwise 0.5%9.24.2
Debarment for breach of the Code of Integritynot less than 6 monthsnot less than 6 monthsnot exceeding 2 yearsnot less than 6 months3.5.5
Reference to the Competition Commission signed byJoint SecretaryJoint SecretaryCompetent AuthorityJoint Secretary3.5.5

0.8A Note on the Source Texts

Two errors in the source Manuals have been retained and flagged rather than silently corrected, because a candidate may be examined on the text as printed:

  1. The Goods Manual states the threshold below which performance security is not necessary as "Rupees 50 (twenty-five) lakh" — the figure and the word do not agree.
  2. The Goods and Consultancy Manuals cite the rule on enlistment of Indian agents as "Rule 52"; the Works and Non-Consultancy Manuals correctly cite Rule 152 of the General Financial Rules, 2017.

A third point of substance should also be noted. The Consultancy Manual assigns 70% weight to the technical score and 30% to cost, and then states two paragraphs later that "the weightage of the cost element adopted in Consultancy services is as high as 70 per cent." That sentence is correct in the Non-Consultancy Manual, where cost does carry 70%, but is internally inconsistent in the Consultancy Manual. Both sentences are reproduced in this Manual at paragraph 7.20.

Chapter 1

Introduction — Principles and Policies

How to read the colours
Plain white — common to all four Manuals Goods only Works only Consultancy only Non-Consultancy only Two or three Manuals

Anything on a tinted background appears in the named Manual or Manuals alone, and cannot be inferred from the others. Text on plain white applies to all four. A tinted section carries a label in its top-left corner; a single tinted paragraph, list item or table row carries a coloured spine on its left. Grey callouts are ordinary notes — they carry no colour, so colour never means two different things.

1.1Procurement Rules and Regulations; and this Manual

  1. Various Ministries, Departments, attached and subordinate offices, local urban bodies, public sector enterprises, and other Government (including autonomous) bodies (hereinafter referred to as 'Procuring Entities') spend a sizeable amount of their budget on the Procurement of goods, works and services to fulfil their stated objectives, assigned duties/ obligations/ responsibilities/ functions, and activities in alignment with desired policy outcomes.
  2. GCNC The Ministries/ Departments have been delegated full powers to make their own arrangements for the procurement of goods and services that are not available on the Government e-Marketplace (GeM). These powers must be exercised as per the Delegation of Financial Power Rules and in conformity with the 'Procurement Guidelines' described below. Common use Goods and Services available on GeM are required to be procured mandatorily through GeM as per Rule 149 of GFR, 2017.

W The Ministries/ Departments have been delegated powers to make their own arrangements for procurement of works under the Delegation of Financial Power Rules, which have to be exercised in conformity with the 'Procurement Guidelines' described below.

  1. To ensure that these procurements are made by following a uniform, systematic, efficient and cost-effective procedure, and also to ensure fair and equitable treatment of suppliers/ bidders/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers, there are guidelines comprising a hierarchy of Statutory framework, Rules and Regulations, Manuals of Procurement and Procurement Documents as detailed in Annexure 1 of the Manual for Procurement of Goods, Second Edition, 2024 (hereinafter referred to as 'Procurement Guidelines').
  1. At the apex of the Statutory framework governing public Procurement is Article 299 of the Constitution of India, which stipulates that contracts legally binding on the Government must be executed in writing by officers specifically authorised to do so. The Constitution also enshrines Fundamental Rights — in particular Article 14 (Right to Equality before Law) and Article 19(1)(g) (Right to practise any profession, or to carry on any occupation, trade, or business) — which have implications for Public Procurement.

Further:

  • GCNC The Indian Contract Act, 1872 and the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 are significant legislations governing contracts of sale/ purchase of goods in general.
  • W The Indian Contract Act, 1872 is a significant legislation governing contracts in general.

There are other mercantile laws that may be attracted in Public Procurement transactions:

  • Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996
  • Mediation Act, 2023(in G, W, NC)
  • Competition Act, 2002
  • Information Technology Act, 2000
  • Indian Stamp Act, 1899 (in W, C, NC)

— all as amended from time to time.

  1. In the Central Government, there is no law exclusively governing public procurement. However, comprehensive Rules and Regulations in this regard are available in:
  2. General Financial Rules (GFR), 2017 — especially [G, C, NC] Chapters 6 to 9; W Chapters 5 to 9;
  3. Delegation of Financial Powers Rules (DFPR) — [W, C, NC] cite DFPR, 2024;
  4. Government orders regarding purchase preference/ restrictions, such as the Public Procurement (Preference to Make in India) Order, 2017; facilities to Micro and Small Enterprises and Start-ups; Restrictions on Entities from a Class of Countries (Rule 144(xi), GFR 2017); and W relaxation of the conditions of prior turnover and prior experience for start-up enterprises.
  5. Without purporting to be a comprehensive compendium of all such 'Procurement Guidelines', this Manual is intended to serve as a portal to enter this vast area and draw attention to basic norms and practices governing public procurement.

1.2Clarification, Amendments and Revision of this Manual

The Procurement Policy Division, Department of Expenditure, Ministry of Finance would be the nodal authority for this Manual's revision, interpretation, and clarification.

1.3Applicability of this Manual

1.3.1Category of Procurements

G The Goods Manual applies to the Procurement of all "Goods" as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section. What is unique about the Procurement of goods (as compared to services and works) is the ability to precisely describe the technical specification and scope of the requirement. The other Manuals (Consultancy Services, Non-consultancy Services and Works) are generically based on the Goods Manual. Hence, for any topic for which guidance cannot be found in those Manuals, the Manual for Procurement of Goods shall apply mutatis mutandis. For the sake of brevity, those Manuals refer to some of the sections of the Goods Manual without reproducing them.

W The Works Manual applies to procurement of all "Works" as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section.

C The Consultancy Manual applies to procurement of "Consultancy Services" as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section. For any circumstances not covered, the Procuring Entity may refer to the Manual for Procurement of Goods, 2024.

NC The Non-Consultancy Manual applies to procurement of "Non-consultancy Services" (including "Outsourcing of Services") as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section. For any circumstances not covered, the Procuring Entity may refer to the Manual for Procurement of Goods, 2024 (Rule 206 of GFR, 2017).

1.3.2Classification of WorksW

The civil works are classified in GFR 2017 (Rule 130) into three categories:

CategoryMeaning
(a) Original WorksAll new constructions, site preparation, additions and alterations to existing works. Also includes special repairs to newly purchased or previously abandoned buildings or structures, including remodelling or replacement.
(b) Minor WorksWorks which add capital value to existing assets but do not create new assets.
(c) Repair WorksWorks undertaken to maintain building and fixtures. Expenditure on Repair Work does not add to the value of the asset and only restores the functionality of the asset.

Repair Work can be further categorised as:

  1. Annual repairs — covering routine and yearly operation and maintenance work on buildings and fixtures;
  2. Special repairs — undertaken as and when required, covering major repairs to existing buildings or structures. Some types of Special repairs may qualify to be categorised as 'Original Work' as mentioned above.

1.3.3Procuring Entities

  1. This Manual shall apply to all Procuring Entities covered by Rule 1 of GFR, i.e., all Central Government Ministries/ Departments, attached and subordinate bodies. These provisions shall also apply, as per the same rule, to autonomous bodies except to the extent that the bye-laws of an autonomous body provide separate procurement guidelines* that the Government has approved.
  1. W — additional provisions on addressees:
  2. This Manual inter alia covers fundamental provisions relating to the Constitution; Government instructions relating to Preferential Procurement Policies; GTE; Land Border restriction; and General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management (No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 20.10.2021), which are mandatory for all entities of Central Government.
  3. This Manual is addressed to Ministries/ Departments, their attached and subordinate offices, and autonomous bodies whose in-house capabilities are limited to repair works of up to Rs 60 lakh and who assign larger repair works (and original works) to third parties (Public Works Organisations or CPSEs) — Rule 133 of GFR, 2017 (as amended). Refer para 3.1 of the Works Manual for further details.
  4. This Manual may also be useful for Ministries/ Departments, their attached and subordinate offices, and autonomous bodies who have in-house capabilities for direct execution of larger works but may not have their own detailed procurement guidelines.
  5. The Manual does not purport to address procurement of larger works for which major works procuring Ministries/ Departments — like the Central Public Works Department (CPWD); Military Engineering Service (MES); Border Roads Organisation (BRO); Ministries of Railways; Information & Broadcasting; and Departments of Posts and Space, etc. — already have their own detailed guidelines tailored to unique individual requirements. They may, however, ensure that their procurement guidelines comply with the mandatory provisions mentioned in sub-para (a) above.

1.3.4Statutory Bodies and CPSEs

These guidelines shall also be applicable to bodies substantially owned or controlled by, or receiving substantial financial assistance from, the Central Government — inter alia:

  • Central Public Sector Enterprises (CPSEs or undertakings, including their subsidiary companies/ Ventures);
  • Public Sector Banks (PSBs);
  • Public Sector Insurance Companies (PSICs);
  • Public Sector Financial Institutions (FIs);
  • Constitutional or Statutory Bodies;
  • Public Academic Institutions (National/ Central institutes); and
  • Commissions created under the Constitution of India or specific legislations

— except to the extent of deviations that have been approved by their competent authority (e.g., Board of Directors in CPSEs).

1.3.5Indian Missions and CPSE Units Abroad

While the applicability of the Manual in the case of Indian Missions abroad and CPSE Units abroad shall be as per paras 1.3.3 and 1.3.4 above respectively, the following is clarified:

a) Adopting Financial Limits/ Thresholds in Local Currency: For procurements done and for use outside India, in the host country's local currency, Indian Missions and CPSE units abroad may adopt General Financial Rules (GFR) financial limits/ thresholds of procurements (as mentioned in this Manual at various instances, e.g., selection of mode of Procurement etc.) by using the latest INR-PPP conversion rates for the local currency as published by the IMF (International Monetary Fund). For convenience, such converted limits/ thresholds may be reviewed annually. Even if the Procurement is to be done in a currency other than the local currency, the applicable financial limits/ thresholds of procurements shall be in terms of the INR-PPP conversion rate for the local currency only. If the IMF does not publish the PPP conversion rate for local currency, then the conversion may be done to the currency most relevant to that mission/ unit in consultation with the Financial Adviser.

b) Exemptions: For exemptions from restrictions relating to Global Tenders, bidders from Land-border countries, and eProcurement for bona fide procurements and use outside India by Indian Missions and CPSE Units abroad, please refer to paragraphs 4.3.2-4-g)(W cites 4.3.2-4-h), 1.11.4-3-f)ii), and 4.17.1-4(W cites 4.17.1-5) respectively, in the Manual for Procurement of Goods, 2024.

1.3.6Portals

  • G GeM portal, GePNIC portal (Government e-Procurement of NIC, eproc.gov.in), and various such platforms of different Organisations carry out a substantial proportion of Public Procurement. Hence, the procedures for such platforms should conform to these 'Procurement Guidelines'.
  • W Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP of NIC, eproc.gov.in), and various such platforms.
  • CNC GeM portal, CPPP (Central Public Procurement Portal), and various such platforms — the procedures for such platforms should generally conform to these 'Procurement Guidelines'.

1.3.7Outsourced Procurement

These procurement guidelines would continue to apply if these procuring entities:

  • outsource the procurement process, or
  • bundle the procurement process with other contractual arrangements, or
  • utilise the services of a procurement support agency or procurement agents to carry out the Procurement on their behalf.

1.3.8Customisation

This Manual is to be taken as generic guidelines, which are necessarily broad in nature. (CNC add: Subject to the observance of these generic guidelines,) Procuring Entities are advised to customise these Manuals, with the approval of competent authority and financial concurrence, to suit their local/ specialised needs by issuing their own detailed Manuals (including customised formats); Model Tender Documents; Schedule of Procurement Powers; and Checklists — to serve as practical instructions for their officers and to ensure completeness of examination of cases.

For procuring organisations that have their own detailed manuals or procedure orders, the initiation, authorisation, Procurement, and execution of contracts undertaken by them shall be regulated by detailed rules and orders contained in their respective regulations and by other special orders applicable to them.

1.3.9Exemptions

These procurement guidelines would not apply to procurements by procuring entities mentioned above for their own use from their subsidiary companies, including Joint Ventures, where they have a controlling share.

Moreover, by a general or special notification, the Government may permit certain 'Procuring Entities' mentioned above, considering unique conditions under which they operate, for all or certain categories of procurement, to adopt detailed approved guidelines for procurement which may deviate in some respects but conform with all other essential aspects of these 'Procurement Guidelines'.

1.3.10Procurements financed by Loans/ Grants extended by International Funding Agencies

  1. For projects funded by the World Bank, Asian Development Bank, and other International Funding Agencies (IFA), the Articles of Agreement, with the approval of the Ministry of Finance, stipulate either the Indian (or State) Government's own procurement procedures or the IFA's specific procurement procedures to be followed by the borrowers.
  2. These guidelines would not be applicable to projects funded by the World Bank using the Investment Project Financing (IPF) instrument and similar instruments of other IFAs, as stipulated under Articles of Agreement as mentioned under sub-para (a) above. IFA's specific procurement procedures shall be applicable as permitted under Rule 264 of GFR, 2017.
  3. However, for projects financed using instruments such as Program-for-Results (PforR) of the World Bank, and Results-based Lending (RBL) of the Asian Development Bank, and similar instruments of other IFAs, the application of these guidelines as expressly agreed in the legal agreements shall be followed.

1.4Categorisation of Procurements

1.4.1Categories

Categorisation of Procurements helps prepare guidelines for Procurements and Model Tender Documents, which cater to peculiar contractual conditions of the categories of procurements. G These categories may be further sub-categorised, e.g., Capital Equipment procurement in Goods.

Following are the categories of procurements (please refer to their definitions in the 'Procurement Glossary' section):

  • a) Goods
  • b) Services
  • i) Consultancy Services, and
  • ii) Non-consultancy services (NC services)
  • c) Works

1.4.2Distinctive Features

Normally, such categorisation is evident from their definition, and Procurement should be done accordingly, following the relevant guidelines and Model Tender Documents. The boundaries between such categorisation may not be clear-cut and may overlap. It may neither be possible nor necessary to distinguish precisely between the categories in overlapping areas. Though simplistic, the main distinguishing factors between these are:

  1. While both Goods and Works lead to tangible outputs (with some exceptions like IPR materials), the main difference between goods and works is that the manufacture of goods is done on the supplier's own premises (other than installation/ commissioning), whereas 'Works' is executed on the premises of the procuring entity (other than pre-fabricated components). Works may include incidental 'Goods' and vice versa.
  2. The main difference between 'Goods' or 'Works' on the one hand and 'Services' on the other is the intangibility of the outputs of Services.
  3. The main difference between Consultancy and Non-consultancy services is the level of intellectual input, which is predominant in Consultancy and not central to Non-consultancy. Another difference is that non-consultancy services are repetitive routines with measurable and standardised outputs, while consultancy services are one-off and non-routine, with outputs that are neither precisely measurable nor standardised.

1.4.3In Case of Doubt

Procurement in cases of doubts about categorisation may be handled as follows:

a) Simpler procedure rule: In the case of blurred border lines and grey areas, a simpler procurement procedure should be followed. In case of doubt between:

  • i) Goods and works/ NC services/ consultancy → process as Procurement of Goods;
  • ii) Works and NC service/ consultancy → process as Procurement of Works;
  • iii) Non-consultancy and Consultancy services → process as Procurement of Non-consultancy services.

b) IT Projects: The Procurement of IT projects should usually be carried out as a procurement of Consultancy services, as the outcomes/ deliverables vary from one service provider to another. The IT Projects may include:

  • i) tailor-made/ bespoke software development;
  • ii) cloud-based services;
  • iii) composite IT system integration services involving the design, development, deployment and commissioning of IT systems, including hardware supply, software development, bandwidth, and operation/ maintenance of the system for a defined period after going live, etc.

c) Composite Contracts(PPD's OM No. F6/2/2023-PPD dated 13.01.2023): Composite contracts may involve mixed elements of Goods, Works, and Services. For example, in the Procurement of large machinery, some works and services like Installation, Commissioning, Training, Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) or a Comprehensive Maintenance Contract (CMC), and so on, may be incidental to the supply of goods. The relationship of primacy between the goods element and the works/ services element may be examined, irrespective of the relative values.

  • If the primary intention/ objective is the Procurement of goods with services/ works being incidental to it, it may be processed as Procurement of Goods.
  • However, if the primary intention/ objective is Procurement of Works/ Services with Procurement of goods being incidental, then it should generally be processed as Procurement of Works/ Services (as the case may be), irrespective of the relative values.
  • A possible alternative approach could be to have separate but linked contracts for such elements of Goods, Works, and Services, but implementation may become challenging.

WCNC — further refinements:

  • i) Procurement of "new product" viz. Mechanical, Electrical or ICT assets etc. of the nature of Machinery and Plant, with incidental works/ services like fabrication, installation, erection, commissioning, AMC/CMC, should be handled as procurement of Goods — except for procurement of IT Projects as specified above.
  • ii) AMC/ CMC of existing Mechanical, Electrical or ICT assets of the nature of Machinery and Plant should be treated as procurement of Non-Consultancy Services.

d) Consultancy vs Non-Consultancy — the "primary objective" test WCNC: It is possible that, depending on the nature and complexity of the assignment, a task could be dealt with either as a consultancy or a non-consultancy service. In essence, if the intellectual and advisory part of services is the primary objective (irrespective of the relative value of this component), the selection needs to be dealt with in Consultancy mode.

1.5Authorities Competent to Incur Expenditure on Procurements and Consultation with Financial Advisers

  1. The first step in procurement is the decision to procure something — goods, services, works, etc. — involving a formal decision to procure along with the exact or approximate expenditure to be incurred. A Competent Authority that is competent to incur expenditure may accord administrative sanction/ approval to incur expenditure on a specific procurement in accordance with the Delegation of Financial Powers Rules (DFPR) by following the 'Procurement Guidelines' (Rule 145 of GFR 2017).

Each 'Procuring Entity' may issue a Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP), adding further details to the broad delegations in the DFPR based on assessing risks involved in different decisions/ approvals at various stages of the Procurement Cycle.

  1. Being a decision with a financial bearing, it invariably requires consultation of the Financial Adviser (unless validly re-delegated within permissible limits or otherwise permitted by DoE through specific orders). The extent of involvement of the Financial Adviser and the Integrated Finance Division (IFD) in subsequent stages of procurement matters may be based on one of the following procedures (Para 19, Charter for Financial Advisers, 2023):

a) Normal Procedure: Under this procedure, the concurrence of the Financial Adviser/ IFD shall be required on all procurement matters, except for matters where re-delegation has been done within the permissible limits under the rules/ general orders/ general instructions of DoE. Unless the Secretary of the Department approves a special procedure with the concurrence of DoE, this procedure shall be followed.

b) Special Procedure: With the prior concurrence of Secretary (Expenditure), the Secretary of the Department may decide on a different level of involvement of the Financial Adviser/ IFD specific to the Department. The procedure shall lay out the types/ classes of cases where the Financial Adviser/ IFD consultation would be required, which may be in terms of:

  • threshold financial limits,
  • stages in Procurement, or
  • types of Procurement and contracts, viz. consultancy (NC adds: / non-consultancy), goods and works contracts, etc.,
  • or any permutation thereof.

G clarification: It is further clarified that this system will be applicable only to Ministries/ Departments etc. covered under the FA Charter. All other organisations, including CPSEs, are free to devise their own system.

  1. In all procedures, payments under approved contracts shall not require IFD consultation, except in cases where the payments are in relaxation/ variation to approved contract conditions.

1.6Basic Aims of Procurement — the Five R's of Procurement

In every Procurement, public or private, the basic aim is to achieve just the right balance between costs and requirements with respect to five parameters called the Five 'R's of Procurement. The entire process of Procurement — from the time the need for an item, facility or service is identified till the need is satisfied — is designed to achieve such a right balance. The word 'Right' is used in the sense of 'optimal balance'.

The Five R's are: 1. Right Quality; 2. Right Quantity; 3. Right Price; 4. Right Time and Place; and 5. Right Source.

1.6.1Right Quality

Procurement aims to buy just the right quality that will suit the needs — no more and no less — with precise specifications of the procuring entity's requirements, a proper understanding of the functional value and cost, and an understanding of the bidder's quality system and quality awareness. The concept of the right balance of quality can be further refined to the concept of utility/ value (refer para 1.7 below). Technical specifications and quality assurance plans are the most vital ingredients for the right quality. In public procurement, it is essential to give due consideration to value for money while preparing the specifications.

1.6.2Right Quantity

There are extra costs and systemic overheads involved with both procuring a requirement too frequently in small quantities and buying significant quantities for prolonged use. Hence, the right quantity should be procured (in the appropriate size of the contract), which balances extra costs associated with larger and smaller quantities.

1.6.3Right Price

It is not correct to aim at the cheapest materials/ facilities/ services available. The price should be just right for the quality, quantity, and other factors involved — or should not be abnormally low for facilities, works, or services, which could lead to a situation of non-performance or failure of contract. The concept of price can be refined further to consider not only the initial price paid for the requirement but also other costs such as maintenance costs, operational costs, and disposal costs (also termed life cycle costing — refer para 1.7 below).

1.6.4Right Time and Place

If an organisation needs the material (or facility or services) in three months, it will be costly to procure it too late or too early. Similarly, if the vendor delivers the materials/ facilities/ services in another city, extra time and money would be involved in logistics. An unrealistic time schedule for completion of a facility may lead to delays, claims, and disputes.

1.6.5Right Source

The source of delivery of Goods, Works and Services must have just the right financial capacity and technical capability for our needs — demonstrated through satisfactory past performance of contracts of the same or similar nature. Buying a few packets of printer paper directly from a large manufacturer may not be the right strategy. On the other hand, if our requirements are large, buying such requirements through dealers or intermediaries may also not be right.

1.7Refined Concepts of Cost and Value — Value for Money

The concept of price or cost has been further refined into:

  • Total Cost of Ownership (TCO),
  • Life Cycle Cost (LCC), or
  • Whole-of-Life (WOL) cost

— to consider not only the initial acquisition cost but also the cost of operation, maintenance, and disposal during the lifetime of the external resource procured.

Similarly, the concept of quality is linked to the need and is refined into the concept of utility/ value.

These two, taken together, are used to develop the concept of Value for Money (VfM) — also called Best Value for Money in certain contexts.

VfM means the effective, efficient, and economical use of resources, which may involve the evaluation of:

  • relevant costs and benefits, along with
  • an assessment of risks,
  • non-price attributes — e.g., goods and/or services that contain recyclable content, are recyclable, minimise waste and greenhouse gas emissions, conserve energy and water, minimise habitat destruction and environmental degradation, are non-toxic, etc., and/or
  • life cycle costs, as appropriate.

Price alone may not necessarily represent VfM.

In public Procurement, VfM is achieved by attracting the widest competition by way of:

  • optimal description of need;
  • development of value-engineered specifications/ Terms of Reference (ToR);
  • appropriate packaging/ slicing of requirement;
  • selection of an appropriate mode of Procurement and tendering system.

1.8Fundamental Principles of Public Procurement

General Financial Rules, 2017 (Rule 144) lay down the Fundamental Principles of Public Procurement. These principles and other additional obligations of procuring authorities in public Procurement can be organised into five fundamental principles of public Procurement, which all procuring authorities must abide by and be accountable for:

  1. Transparency Principle
  2. Professionalism Principle
  3. Broader Obligations Principle
  4. Extended Legal Responsibilities Principle(C terms it "Extrinsic legal principle"; W terms it "Extended legal principle")
  5. Public Accountability Principle

1.8.1Transparency Principle

All procuring authorities are responsible and accountable for ensuring transparency, fairness, equality, competition, and appeal rights. This involves simultaneous, symmetric, and unrestricted dissemination of information to all likely bidders, sufficient for them to know and understand the availability of bidding opportunities and the actual means, processes and time-limits prescribed for completion of registration of bidders, bidding, evaluation, grievance redressal, award, and management of contracts.

It implies that such officers must ensure:

  • consistency (absence of subjectivity),
  • predictability (absence of arbitrariness),
  • clarity,
  • openness (absence of secretiveness), and
  • equal opportunities (absence of discrimination) in processes.

In essence, the Transparency Principle also enjoins upon the Procuring Authorities to do only that which they professed to do as pre-declared in the relevant published documents, and not to do anything that had not been so declared.

As part of this principle, all procuring entities should ensure that offers are invited following a fair and transparent procedure and ensure publication of all relevant information on the Government e-Marketplace (GeM) and GeM-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP).

1.8.2Professionalism Principle

  1. As per these synergic attributes, the procuring authorities have a responsibility and accountability to ensure professionalism, economy, efficiency, effectiveness, and integrity in the procurement process. They must avoid wasteful, dilatory, and improper practices violating the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP). They should, at the same time, ensure that the methodology adopted for Procurement is reasonable and appropriate for the cost and complexity and that it effectively achieves the planned objective of the Procurement. As part of this principle, the Government may prescribe professional standards and specify suitable training and certification requirements for officials dealing with procurement matters.
  2. In reference to the above two principles — Transparency and Professionalism — it may be useful to refer to the following provision in the General Financial Rules, 2017:
  1. The procedure to be followed in making public Procurement must conform to the following yardsticks (Rule 144, GFR 2017):
  2. offers should be invited following a fair, transparent, and reasonable procedure;
  3. the procuring authority should be satisfied that the selected offer adequately meets the requirement in all respects;
  4. the procuring authority should satisfy itself that the price of the selected offer is reasonable and consistent with the quality required.

1.8.3Broader Obligations Principle

  1. Over and above transparency and professionalism, the procuring authorities also have the responsibility and accountability to conduct public Procurement in a manner that facilitates the achievement of the broader objectives, social policies and programme objectives of the Government — for example, economic growth, strengthening of local industry (Make in India), Ease of Doing Business, job and employment creation, and so on — to the extent these are specifically included in the 'Procurement Guidelines'. These policies are detailed in para 1.11 below.
  2. To support social policies — reservation of Procurement of specified goods from MSEs, weaker sections, backward regions, and reservation of Procurement of certain goods from MSEs.
  3. To strengthen local industry and job/ employment creation — preferential Procurement of locally manufactured goods or services (Rule 153(iii) of GFR, 2017) and support to Start-up enterprises (Rule 170(i), 173(i) of GFR, 2017).
  4. To achieve programme objectives — reservation of Procurement of a specified class of goods from or through certain nominated CPSEs or Government Organisations.
  5. On grounds of defence of India or matters directly or indirectly related thereto, including national security — impose restrictions, including prior registration and/or screening, on Procurement from bidders from, or bidders having commercial arrangements with an entity from, a certain country or countries, or a class of countries — Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017.
  6. Facilitating broader objectives of other Departments of Government — for example, ensuring tax or environmental compliance by participants, Energy Conservation, accessibility for People with Disabilities, etc. Procurement policies and procedures must comply with accessibility criteria that the Government may mandate from time to time.

1.8.4Extended Legal Responsibilities Principle

Procuring authorities must fulfil additional legal obligations in public Procurement, over and above mere conformity to the mercantile laws (which even private sector procurements must comply with).

The Constitution of India has certain provisions regarding fundamental rights and public Procurement. Courts have, over time, taken a broader view of public Procurement as a function of the 'State', interpreting these to extend the responsibility and accountability of public procurement authorities. Courts in India thus exercise additional judicial review (beyond contractual issues) over public Procurement in relation to the manner of decision-making with respect to fundamental rights, fair play, and legality.

Similarly, procuring authorities also have the responsibility and accountability to comply with the laws relating to Governance Issues like the Right to Information (RTI) Act and the Prevention of Corruption Act, and so on.

1.8.5Public Accountability Principle

  1. Procuring authorities are accountable for all the above principles to several statutory and official bodies in the Country — the Legislature and its Committees, Central Vigilance Commission, Comptroller and Auditor General of India, Central Bureau of Investigation and so on — in addition to administrative accountability. As a result, each individual public procurement transaction is liable to be scrutinised independently and in isolation, besides judging the overall outcomes of the procurement process over a period. Procuring authorities thus have responsibility and accountability for compliance with rules and procedures in each individual procurement transaction, as well as the achievement of overall procurement outcomes.
  2. The procuring authority, at each stage of Procurement, must therefore place on record, in precise terms, the considerations that weighed with it while making the procurement decision — from need assessment to fulfilment of need (Rule 144(viii), GFR 2017).
  3. Such records must be preserved, retained in easily retrievable form, and made available to such oversight agencies on demand. The procuring entity shall therefore maintain and retain audit trails, records and documents generated or received during its procurement proceedings in chronological order. The files shall be stored in an identified place and retrievable for scrutiny whenever needed without wasting time.

1.9Standards (Canons) of Financial ProprietyGW

Public Procurement, like any other expenditure in Government, must conform to the Standards (also called Canons) of Financial Propriety. It may be useful to refer to the relevant provisions in the General Financial Rules, 2017:

1.10Public Procurement Infrastructure at the Centre

Public Procurement is a complex function, and the infrastructure needed to execute it is equally complex. In India, the following administrative, oversight, and digital infrastructure exists for Public Procurement:

  1. Procurement Policy Division (PPD)
  2. Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP)
  3. Government e-Marketplace (GeM)
  4. Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India
  5. Lokpal/ Lokayukta — Anti-corruption Ombudsman
  6. Central Vigilance Commission (CVC)
  7. Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)

1.10.1Procurement Policy Division (PPD)

The Procurement Policy Division (PPD) in the Department of Expenditure, Ministry of Finance has been created to encourage uniformity and harmonisation in public procurement processes by:

  • disseminating best practices,
  • providing guidance, oversight and capacity building,
  • issuing procurement manuals and Model Tender Documents.

However, centralisation of Procurement or involvement in procurement processes is not the intended purpose of the creation of PPD.

1.10.2Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP)

The Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) has been designed, developed and hosted by the National Informatics Centre (NIC, Ministry of Electronics & Information Technology) in association with the Department of Expenditure to ensure transparency in the public procurement process.

  • Primary objective: to provide single-point access to the information on procurements made across various Ministries and Departments.
  • The CPPP has e-publishing and e-procurement modules.
  • It is mandatory for all Ministries/ Departments of the Central Government, CPSEs, and Autonomous and Statutory Bodies to publish on the CPPP all their tender enquiries and information about the resulting contracts.
  • CPPP provides access to information on documents relating to pre-qualification, bidders' registration, Tender Documents, details of bidders, their pre-qualification, registration, exclusions/ debarments, decisions taken regarding pre-qualification and selection of successful bids.
  • Implementing end-to-end e-procurement for all procurements is now mandatory — either through the CPPP portal or any other suitable GCQE-compliant portal.

1.10.3Government e-Marketplace (GeM)

GeM is the 'National Public Procurement Portal', serving as an end-to-end online marketplace for various entities.

  • The Procurement of Goods and Services available on GeM (as per Rule 149 of GFR, 2017) is mandatory for Ministries/ Departments (including attached/ subordinate offices), CPSEs, autonomous bodies and local bodies.
  • GeM facilitates the Procurement of common-use goods and services by such entities.
  • The portal aims to enhance efficiency, transparency, and speed in public Procurement.
  • Through this paperless, contactless, and cashless platform, registered government buyers can seamlessly procure goods and services from registered sellers.

1.10.4Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India

  1. The CAG of India, established under Articles 149–151 of the Constitution of India, holds a pivotal role as the Supreme Audit Institution of India (SAII). CAG plays a crucial role in promoting accountability, transparency, and good governance through high-quality auditing and accounting. It provides independent and timely assurance to the legislature, the public, and the executive that public funds are being collected and utilised effectively and efficiently.
  2. The CAG's mandate encompasses a wide spectrum of audit and reporting responsibilities:
  3. Government Departments and Entities;
  4. Government Companies and Corporations;
  5. Autonomous Bodies and Authorities that receive government funding (e.g., municipal bodies, IIMs, IITs, state health societies);
  6. Special Requests and Initiatives — the CAG can audit the accounts of any other body or authority upon request of the President/ Governor, or on its own initiative.
  7. CAG conducts multiple types of audits, namely:
  8. Compliance Audits
  9. Financial Audits
  10. Performance Audits
  11. Thematic Audits
  12. IT Audits

These audits, especially the performance audits, are noted to cover Procurement, but only with the perspective of identifying if any wastage, malpractice, and fraud have occurred.

  1. To carry out its extensive audit mandate effectively, the CAG is endowed with significant powers:
  2. Inspection Authority — power to inspect any office or organisation subject to its audit.
  3. Transaction Examination — can examine all transactions and question the executive regarding financial matters.
  4. Record Access — can call for records, papers, and documents from any audited entity.
  5. Audit Extent and Manner — authority to decide the extent and manner of audit to ensure thorough scrutiny.

1.10.5Lokpal/ Lokayukta — Anti-corruption Ombudsman

  1. The Lokpal and Lokayukta Act, 2013 and its amendment in 2016 (the Act) provides for a Lokpal in the Central (Union) Government and Lokayukta in the State Governments as the statutory anti-corruption Ombudsman to inquire into allegations of corruption against public servants and for related matters. Once appointed — by the President in the case of Lokpal, or the Governor in the case of Lokayukta — they cannot be transferred or removed except by impeachment proceedings undertaken by Parliament or the State legislatures respectively.
  2. The Act outlines the Lokpal's and Lokayuktas' roles, powers, and responsibilities. It has a broad scope regarding the individuals it covers — extending to:
  3. Union Ministers (including the serving and former Prime Ministers),
  4. Members of Parliament, and
  5. various categories of public servants, including those in Group 'A', 'B', 'C', or 'D' positions as defined in the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988.
  6. All entities (NGOs) receiving donations from foreign sources under the Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA)above Rs 10 lakh per year are also under the jurisdiction of Lokpal.

The Act grants Lokpal powers to sanction prosecution against public servants.

  1. There are exceptions in matters related to international relations, external and internal security, public order, atomic energy, and space. To initiate an inquiry into such cases, at least two-thirds of Lokpal members must approve. The Act emphasises confidentiality — if Lokpal concludes a complaint is baseless, the inquiry records remain undisclosed to the public or any party involved.
  2. One significant aspect of the Act is the requirement for public servants to declare their assets in a specified manner. This transparency measure aims to deter corruption and promote accountability.
  3. Composition: One Chairperson and a maximum of eight other members.
  4. The age of Lokpal (Chairperson or member) on the date of assuming office should not be under 45 years.
  5. Of the eight members, four are judicial members who are or have been judges of the Supreme Court or a Chief Justice of a High Court.
  6. The remaining four are non-judicial members — people of impeccable integrity and outstanding ability, having special knowledge and expertise of not less than twenty-five years in matters relating to anti-corruption policy, public administration, vigilance, finance including insurance and banking, law, and management.
  7. Fifty per cent of the Members shall be from Scheduled Castes/ Scheduled Tribes/ Other Backward Classes/ Minorities and women.
  8. Selection Committee: The Chairperson and Lokpal members are selected through a selection committee consisting of:
  9. the Prime Minister,
  10. the Speaker of Lok Sabha,
  11. the Leader of Opposition in Lok Sabha,
  12. the Chief Justice of India (CJI) or a sitting Supreme Court judge nominated by CJI, and
  13. another eminent jurist nominated by the President of India based on the recommendations of the first four members of the selection committee "through consensus".
  14. Lokpal may refer complaints for investigation to the CBI. For such cases, CBI would work under Lokpal's supervision. It envisages a 'Directorate of Prosecution' under the overall control of the Director, CBI, with a fixed tenure of two years. The appointment of the Director of Prosecution is to be based on the recommendation of the Central Vigilance Commission. Transfer of CBI officers investigating cases referred by Lokpal shall be with the CVC's approval.
  15. The Act lays down clear timelines for preliminary enquiry, investigation and trial and has provisions for attachment and confiscation of property acquired by corrupt means, even while prosecution is pending.

1.10.6Central Vigilance Commission (CVC)

  1. Under the Central Vigilance Commission Act, 2003, the CVC is a statutory body headed by the Central Vigilance Commissioner and comprising not more than two Commissioners. It is conceived to be the apex oversight institution, independent from any executive authority. There are two Chief Technical Examiners (CTE) who oversee public procurement.
  2. All Central (Union) Government entities appoint a Chief Vigilance Officer (CVO) in consultation with the CVC. CVOs undertake system audits and preventive/ forensic investigations in the Entity and report them to the CVC.
  3. CVC only investigates and recommends punitive and follow-up actions to the concerned entity but has no punitive powers by itself. The recommendations are not binding on the entities, but CVC may report any deviations from recommendations to Parliament. It has an advisory role in Discipline and Appeal cases arising from its investigations. It plays a role in sanctioning prosecutions related to corruption and consultations in key appointments. CVC also has a role in the appointment of Independent External Monitors (IEM) under the Integrity Pact (wherever applicable) for Central (Union) Government Entities. CVC submits an annual report to Parliament regarding its investigations.
  4. CVC has superintendence over the functioning of the CBI regarding the investigation of offences related to corruption in Central (Union) Government Agencies. CVC has jurisdiction over cases under the Lokpal and Lokayukta Act, Whistle Blowers Act, and Money Laundering Act.
  5. It has the powers of a civil court when conducting any inquiry. CVC and CVOs do not have the powers of Police to arrest, seize properties, and enforce compliance from non-government agencies. Therefore, cases requiring such action are entrusted to the CBI.
  6. To avoid conflict of interest, CVO and vigilance officers shall not associate with decision-making that may have vigilance sensitivities. Some organisations have a system wherein executive work — like the shortlisting of arbitrators or the debarment of firms — is entrusted fully/ partially to vigilance. The same is not appropriate and is also against the CVC Vigilance Manual.
  7. The following levels/ categories of officials are covered under the jurisdiction of the CVC:
CategoryCoverage
a) All India Services & Central GovernmentMembers of All India Services serving in connection with the affairs of the Union, and Group 'A' officers of the Central Government. Officers of central services, even those working in state governments, are also under its jurisdiction.
b) Schedule 'A' and 'B' PSUs of the Central GovernmentChief Executives and Executives on the Board and other officers of level E-8 and above
c) Schedule 'C' and 'D' PSUs of the Central GovernmentChief Executives and Executives on the Board and other officers of level E-7 and above
d) Public Sector BanksOfficers of the rank of Scale V and above
e) Reserve Bank of India, NABARD and SIDBIOfficers in Grade 'D' and above
f) General Insurance CompaniesManagers and above
g) Life Insurance Corporation of IndiaSenior Divisional Managers and above
h) Societies and local authorities owned or controlled by the Central GovernmentOfficers drawing a salary of Rs 8,700/- per month and above

1.10.7Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)

  1. Under the Delhi Special Police Establishment Act, 1946, the CBI — a police organisation under the Department of Personnel, Ministry of Personnel, Pension & Public Grievances — is the only oversight agency with police powers. It investigates and prosecutes corruption cases (including those related to public procurement) requiring arrest, seizure of properties and enforcement of compliance from non-government agencies. The prosecutions are carried out under, inter alia, the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988. It takes up cases based on complaints received from stakeholders or the general public.

Jurisdiction: Though its jurisdiction is restricted to Delhi and UTs, under sections 5 & 6 of the Act, the Central Government can extend its powers and jurisdiction to a State with the consent of the government of that State for investigation of specified offences (generally related to All India Services or Members of Parliament). High Courts and the Supreme Court can also order the CBI to investigate cases outside its normal jurisdiction, for which no consent is required from the State.

  1. The Delhi Special Police Establishment (DSPE), which forms a part of the CBI, has two Divisions:
DivisionInvestigates
(i) Anti-Corruption Division (ACD)All cases registered under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988. If an offence under any section of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 (replaced by the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS), 2023 from 1st July 2024) or any other law is committed along with the offence of bribery and corruption, it shall also be investigated by the ACD. The ACD also investigates cases of serious irregularities allegedly committed by public servants.
(ii) Special Crimes Division (SCD)All cases of Economic offences and all cases of conventional crime, such as offences relating to internal security, espionage, sabotage, narcotics and psychotropic substances, antiquities, murders and dacoities/ robberies, cheating, criminal breach of trust, forgery, dowry deaths, suspicious deaths, etc.
  1. While the superintendence of DSPE, as far as it relates to investigation of offences under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, vests in the CVC; for all other matters, the superintendence of DSPE vests in the Central Government.
  2. The administration of DSPE vests in the Director of the CBI, who is appointed on the recommendations of a committee headed by the Central Vigilance Commissioner. He holds office for a period of not less than two years. The Director of CBI exercises, in respect of DSPE, powers exercisable by an Inspector General of Police regarding the police force in a State.
  3. DSPE cannot conduct any inquiry or investigation into any offence alleged to have been committed under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, except with the prior approval of the Central Government, where such allegation relates to employees at the level of Joint Secretary and above in the Central Government, or corporations established by or under any Central Act, Government companies, societies, and local authorities owned or controlled by it.
  4. No such approval, however, is necessary for cases involving the arrest of a person on the spot on the charge of accepting or attempting to accept any gratification other than legal remuneration.

1.11Preferential / Mandatory / Restricted Purchase from Certain Sources

The Central Government may, by notification, provide for mandatory procurement of any goods or services from any category of bidders, or provide for preference to bidders on the grounds of promotion of locally manufactured goods or locally provided services (General Financial Rules, 2017, Rule 153).

WPresently the following policies are in vogue.

1.11.1Reservation of Procurement of Certain Class of Products from Certain AgenciesG

1.Khadi Goods / Handloom Textiles

Out of the total procurement of handloom origin textiles required by Central Government departments throughout the year, it shall be mandatory to make procurement of at least 20% from:

  • the Khadi & Village Industries Commission (KVIC), and/or
  • Handloom Clusters such as Co-operative Societies, Self Help Group (SHG) Federations, Joint Liability Groups (JLG), Producer Companies (PC), Corporations etc., including Weavers having Pehchan Card.

(Notified vide OM No. F.10/2/2019-PPD(Pt.) issued by Department of Expenditure dated 17.02.2020.)

Khadi and Handloom goods are also available on GeM. (GFR Rule 153(i).)

2.Pharmaceuticals from Pharmaceutical CPSEs

a) The Pharmaceuticals Purchase Policy, 2013(Department of Pharmaceuticals, Ministry of Chemicals and Fertilizers, OM 50(9)/2010-PI-IV dated 10.12.2013) is intended to ensure:

  • i) Optimum utilisation of the installed capacity and the provision of a necessary fillip in reviving these ailing pharmaceutical CPSEs;
  • ii) Availability of quality medicines at low prices to the masses;
  • iii) Drug security of the nation.

b) Salient features of this policy:

  • i) The Policy in respect of 103 medicines, originally valid for a period of five years, has now been renewed and extended(as approved by the Union Cabinet in its meeting held on 20.11.2019)till the final closure/ strategic disinvestment of the Pharma PSEs mentioned below.
  • ii) The Policy extends only to CPSEs under the administrative control of the Department of Pharmaceuticals, such as:
  • Indian Drugs and Pharmaceuticals Limited (IDPL)
  • Hindustan Antibiotics Limited (HAL)
  • Bengal Chemicals and Pharmaceuticals Limited (BCPL)
  • Karnataka Antibiotics and Pharmaceuticals Limited (KAPL)
  • Rajasthan Drugs and Pharmaceuticals Limited (RDPL)

and their subsidiaries where the Government of India owns 51% or above shares.

  • iii) Applicable to purchases by Central Government Departments, their PSUs, Autonomous Bodies, etc. Also applicable to the purchase of medicines by State Governments under health programmes funded by the Government of India, such as the National Rural Health Mission.
  • iv) Pricing of the products would be done by the National Pharmaceutical Pricing Authority (NPPA) using the cost-based formula, as mentioned in the Drugs Price Control Order, 1995. A uniform discount of 16% would be extended to all products. All taxes, whatsoever, would have to be passed on to buyers.
  • v) Annual revision of prices would be linked to the Wholesale Price Index, as per provisions contained in the Drugs Prices Control Order, 2013.
  • vi) The procuring entity would purchase from pharma CPSEs and their subsidiaries subject to their meeting Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) norms as per Schedule 'M' of the Drugs & Cosmetics Rules.
  • vii) In case pharma CPSEs and their subsidiaries fail to supply the medicines, the procuring entity would be at liberty to make purchases from other manufacturers. If the pharma CPSEs or their subsidiaries fail to perform as per the purchase order, they would also be subject to payment of liquidated damages or any other penalty as per the terms of the contract.
  • viii) The list of medicines (Annexure 29 of the Goods Manual) may be reviewed and revised by the Department of Pharmaceuticals as per requirement.

3.Reservation of specific items for procurement from Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE)

To enable wider dispersal of enterprises in the country, particularly in rural areas, the Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ Public Sector Undertakings shall continue to procure items reserved for procurement exclusively from MSE — presently 358 items (including eight items of Handicrafts), which have been reserved for exclusive purchase from them. The latest list can be found on the MSME Ministry's website.

The Ministry of MSME has clarified that laminated paper Gr. I, II and III are not covered under the paper conversion product (Sl. No. 202) of the Public Procurement Policy (Policy Circular No. 21(6)/2016-MA dated 26.05.2016).

NSIC may be contacted to locate the sources of such reserved items.

1.11.2Public Procurement Policy for Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs)

(Rule 153(ii) of GFR 2017)

1.The Policy

From time to time, the Government of India lays down procurement policies to help inclusive national economic growth by providing long-term support to micro, small and medium enterprises, and to disadvantaged sections of society(C adds: "and to address environmental concerns").

The Procurement Policy for Micro and Small Enterprises, 2012 [amended 2018 and 2021] has been notified by the Government in exercise of the powers conferred in Section 11 of the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development (MSMED) Act, 2006, which is mandatory to be followed by Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ Public Sector Undertakings. Details of the policy, along with the amendments issued in 2018 and 2021, are available on the MSME website.

2.Eligibility

  1. Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) registered under Udyam Registration are eligible to avail the benefits under the policy.
  2. This Policy provides preferential procurement of goods produced and services rendered by MSEs. Traders/ distributors/ sole agents/ Works Contracts are EXCLUDED from the purview of the policy.
  3. i) (Notified by MSME Ministry vide S.O. 4926(E) dated 18.10.2022) In case of an upward change in terms of investment in plant and machinery or equipment or turnover or both, and consequent re-classification, an enterprise shall continue to avail of all non-tax benefits of the category (micro, small, or medium) it was in before the re-classification, for a period of three years from the date of such upward change.
  • ii) MSEs would be treated as owned by SC/ST or Women entrepreneurs where:
  • In the case of a proprietary MSE — the proprietor(s) are SC/ST or Woman;
  • In the case of a partnership MSE — the SC/ST or Women partners hold at least 51% shares in the unit;
  • In the case of Private Limited Companies — SC/ST or Women promoters hold at least 51% share.

3.Applicability and Exemptions

  1. The policy is applicable to Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ Public Sector Undertakings.
  2. The policy is not applicable to State Government Ministries/ Departments/ State PSEs, but they have similar policies applicable in their state.
  3. Exemptions: Given their unique nature, defence armament imports shall not be included in computing the 25% goal for the Ministry of Defence. In addition, defence equipment like weapon systems, missiles, etc., shall remain out of the purview of such a reservation policy. Monitoring of goals set under the policy will be done, as far as they relate to the Defence sector, by the Ministry of Defence itself, in accordance with suitable procedures to be established by them.

4.Facilities for MSE

a) Reduced Transaction Costs: To reduce the transaction cost of doing business, MSEs will be facilitated by:

  • providing them tender documents free of cost,
  • exempting MSEs from payment of Earnest Money Deposits, and
  • adopting e-procurement to bring transparency in the tender process.

However, exemption from paying Performance Bank Guarantee/ Security Deposit is not covered under the policy.

b) Relaxation in Prior Turnover and Experience: The Procuring Entity may relax the condition of prior turnover and prior experience for start-up enterprises recognised by DPIIT, subject to meeting quality & technical specifications. Start-ups may be MSMEs/ MSEs or otherwise. Such relaxation can be provided in the case of procurement of works as well.

It is further clarified that such relaxation is not optional but normally has to be ensured, except in the case of procurement of items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, etc., where adequate justification exists for the Procuring Entity not to relax such criteria (Notified vide OM No. F.20/2/2014-PPD(Pt.) issued by Department of Expenditure dated 29.09.2016). The decision of the Procuring Entity in this regard shall be final. (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017.)

c) Timely Payments:Chapter V of the MSMED Act, 2006 has provisions for ensuring timely payments to MSE suppliers:

  • The period agreed upon for payment must not exceed forty-five (45) days from the deemed acceptance of the materials supplied by the MSEs.
  • In case of any discrepancies in the supplies, the Procuring Entity shall raise an objection to the MSE supplier within 15 days from the date of receipt of materials. If such objection is not raised, then it will be taken as deemed acceptance.
  • For delays in payment, the buyer shall be liable to pay compound interest to the supplier on the delayed amount at three times the bank rate notified by the Reserve Bank.
  • For arbitration and conciliation regarding the recovery of such payments and interest, the Micro and Small Enterprises Facilitation Council has been set up in various states.

5.Purchase Preference

a) The 25% annual target: Under the amended Public Procurement Policy for MSEs, Order 2012, the Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ PSUs shall procure a minimum of 25 per cent of their annual value of goods or services from MSEs (in accordance with GFR 2017, Rule 153(ii)).

  • i) The annual goal of procurement from MSEs also includes sub-contracts to MSEs by large enterprises and consortia of MSEs formed by the National Small Industries Corporation. If a sub-contract is given to MSEs, it will be considered as procurement from MSEs.
  • ii) CNC — important clarification: The annual target of 25% procurement from MSEs is only a MINIMUM. The MSE purchase preference is mandatory for all procurements (except for exemptions as per sub-para 3-c above), even after this target is achieved. For example, it is not permissible for organisations to earmark only some goods/ services to be procured exclusively from MSEs to achieve the annual target and not apply MSE procurement preferences to the rest of the goods/ services.

b) The L1+15% price band: In a tender, if the L1 price is from someone other than an MSE, participating MSEs quoting prices within a price band of L1 + 15% shall be allowed to supply up to 25% of the total tendered value by bringing down their price to the L1 price. If there is more than one eligible MSE within such price band who agrees to match the L1 price, the 25% quantity is to be distributed proportionately to them.

  • i) Non-divisible items: In case the tender item cannot be split or divided, etc., the MSE quoting a price within the band L1+15% may be awarded for full/ complete supply of the total tendered value, considering the spirit of the Policy for enhancing Government procurement from MSEs.
  • ii) Sub-targets: Out of the target of 25% of annual procurement from MSEs (not in the specific tender):
  • a sub-target of 4% of annual procurement is earmarked for procurement from MSEs owned by SC/ST entrepreneurs, and
  • 3% of annual procurement is earmarked for procurement from MSEs owned by women entrepreneurs.

However, in the event of failure of such MSEs to participate in the tender process or to meet tender requirements and L1 price, the 4% sub-target (SC/ST) and 3% (women) will also be met from other MSEs.

6.Developing MSE Vendors

The Central Ministries/ Departments/ PSUs shall take necessary steps to develop appropriate vendors by organising:

  • Vendor Development Programmes (VDP), or
  • Buyer-Seller Meets

focused on developing MSEs for procurement through the GeM Portal.

To enhance the participation of MSEs owned by SCs/ STs/ Women in Government procurement, Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ CPSEs should conduct Special Vendor Development Programmes/ Buyer-Seller Meets for SC/ST and Women MSEs.

7.Policy Implementation

  1. A Review Committee has been constituted under the Chairmanship of the Secretary, Ministry of MSME, to monitor and review the Public Procurement Policy for MSEs. M/o MSME will review and/or modify the composition of the Committee as and when required. This Committee will, inter alia:
  2. review the list of 358 items reserved for exclusive purchase from MSEs on a continuous basis,
  3. consider requests from Central Government Departments/ CPSEs for exemption from the 25% target on a case-to-case basis, and
  4. monitor achievements under the Policy.
  5. To monitor the progress of procurement by Central Government Ministries/ Departments and CPSEs from MSEs, the Ministry of MSME launched the MSME 'Sambandh' Portal on 8th December 2017 for uploading procurement details by all CPSEs on a monthly and annual basis, which the Ministry regularly monitors.
  1. To redress the grievances of MSEs related to non-compliance with the policy, a Grievance cell named "CHAMPION Portal" has been set up in the Ministry of MSME.
  2. G A National SC/ST Hub (NSSH) scheme was launched in October 2016 to provide handholding support to SC/ST entrepreneurs, and it is being coordinated/ implemented by the NSIC under this Ministry.
  3. Clarifications: The Office of the Development Commissioner (Micro, Small & Medium Enterprises) issued an FAQ on the Public Procurement Policy for MSE Order, 2012.

1.11.3Procurement Preference to Make in India (MII Policy)

(Rule 153(iii) of GFR, 2017)

1.Purpose

To encourage 'Make in India' and promote manufacturing and production of goods and services in India with a view to enhancing income and employment, the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT), Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Government of India, issued the Public Procurement (Preference to Make in India) Order, 2017.

The Order is issued pursuant to Rule 153(iii) of GFR, 2017 and is applicable to the procurement of Goods, Works, and Services.

2.Definitions

For the purpose of this Order:

  1. 'L1' means the lowest tender or lowest bid, or the lowest quotation received in a tender, tender/ bidding process or other procurement solicitation, as adjudged in the evaluation process as per the tender or other procurement solicitation.
  2. 'Local Content' means the amount of value added in India, which shall — unless otherwise prescribed by the Nodal Ministry — be:

Explanatory notes for calculation of local content:

  • i) Imported items sourced locally from resellers/ distributors shall be EXCLUDED from calculation of local content.
  • ii) The license fees/ royalties paid/ technical charges paid out of India shall be EXCLUDED from local content calculation.
  • iii) Procurement/ supply of repackaged/ refurbished/ rebranded imported products, as commonly understood, shall be treated as reselling of imported products and shall be excluded from calculation of local content. Definitions:
  • 'Refurbishing' means repair or reconditioning of an imported product — this does not amount to manufacture because no new goods come into existence.
  • 'Repackaging' means repacking of imported goods from bulk pack to smaller packs — this would not ordinarily amount to manufacture of a new item.
  • 'Rebranding' means relabelling or renaming or change in symbol or logo/ makes or corporate image of a company/ organisation/ firm for an imported product — this would amount to rebranding.
  • iv) To ensure that imported items sourced locally from resellers/ distributors are excluded from calculation of local content, procuring entities are to obtain from bidders the cost of such locally-sourced imported items (inclusive of taxes) along with a break-up on license/ royalties paid/ technical expertise cost etc. sourced from outside India. For items sold by a bidder as reseller, an OEM certificate for country of origin is to be submitted.
  • v) For contracts involving supply of multiple items, a weighted average of all items is to be taken while calculating the local content.
  • WCNC — Class definitions (these definitions appear in the Chapter 1 text of the Works, Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals; in the Goods Manual they are in the Procurement Glossary):
TermDefinition
'Class-I local supplier'A supplier or service provider whose goods, services or works offered for procurement meets the minimum local content as prescribed for 'Class-I local supplier' under this Order.
'Class-II local supplier'A supplier or service provider whose goods, services or works offered for procurement meets the minimum local content as prescribed for 'Class-II local supplier' but less than that prescribed for 'Class-I local supplier' under this Order.
'Non-Local supplier'A supplier or service provider whose goods, services or works offered for procurement has local content less than that prescribed for 'Class-II local supplier' under this Order.
  1. 'Margin of purchase preference' means the maximum extent to which the price quoted by a "Class-I local supplier" may be above the L1 for the purpose of purchase preference. It has been fixed as 20 per cent.
  2. 'Nodal Ministry' means the Ministry or Department identified pursuant to this Order with respect to a particular item of goods or services or works.
  3. 'Procuring entity' means a Ministry or Department or attached or subordinate office of, or autonomous body controlled by, the Government of India, and includes Government companies as defined in the Companies Act.
  4. 'Works' means all works as per Rule 130 of GFR 2017 and will also include 'turnkey works'.

2A. Special Treatment for Items Covered under the PLI Scheme

The manufacturers manufacturing an item under the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme shall be treated as deemed Class-II local supplier for that item, unless they have minimum local content equal to or higher than that notified for Class-I local supplier for that item, provided the manufacturer has received incentive from the concerned PLI Ministry for the item. The above shall be applicable for the specific time period only, as notified by the concerned PLI Ministry.

3.Eligibility of 'Class-I local supplier' / 'Class-II local supplier' / 'Non-local suppliers' for Different Types of Procurement

  1. In the procurement of all goods, services or works in respect of which the Nodal Ministry/ Department has communicated that there is sufficient local capacity and local competition, only a 'Class-I local supplier' shall be eligible to bid, irrespective of purchase value.
  2. Only 'Class-I local supplier' and 'Class-II local supplier' shall be eligible to bid in procurements undertaken by procuring entities, except when a Global Tender Enquiry has been issued. In global tender enquiries, 'Non-local suppliers' shall also be eligible to bid along with Class-I and Class-II local suppliers.

In procurement of all goods, services or works not covered by sub-para (a) above, and with estimated value of purchases less than Rs. 200 Crore, in accordance with Rule 161(iv) of GFR, 2017 (W cites Rule 161(iv)(b)), a Global Tender Enquiry shall not be issued except with the approval of the competent authority as designated by the Department of Expenditure.

  1. For the purpose of this Order, works include Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) contracts, and services include System Integrator (SI) contracts.

3A. Mandatory Sourcing of Items with Sufficient Local Capacity and Competition, from Class-I Local Suppliers in SI/ EPC/ Turnkey Contracts/ Service Tenders

  1. The items notified as having sufficient local capacity and competition shall mandatorily be sourced from Class-I local suppliers in si/ EPC/ turnkey Contracts/ Services tenders. This provision will be applicable only for those items which have been notified by the Nodal Ministry as Class-I — i.e., having sufficient local capacity and competition, with specific HSN codes.
  2. Notwithstanding the above, if in any project it is considered that it is not practically feasible to source such items from Class-I local suppliers, it may take relaxation from such stipulation with the approval of the Secretary of the administrative Ministry/ Department concerned, or with the approval of the Competent Authority specified by the Administrative Ministry/ Department, on a case-specific basis.

4.Purchase Preference

  1. Subject to the provisions of the Order and to any specific instructions issued by the Nodal Ministry, purchase preference shall be given to 'Class-I local supplier' in procurements undertaken by procuring entities in the manner specified hereunder.
  2. Divisible procurements: In the procurements of goods or works covered by para 3(b) above which are DIVISIBLE in nature, the 'Class-I local supplier' shall get purchase preference over 'Class-II local supplier' as well as 'Non-local supplier', as per the following procedure:
  • i) Among all qualified bids, the lowest bid will be termed L1. If L1 is a 'Class-I local supplier', the contract for the full quantity will be awarded to L1.
  • ii) If the L1 bid is not a 'Class-I local supplier':
  • 50% of the order quantity shall be awarded to L1.
  • Thereafter, the lowest bidder among the 'Class-I local suppliers' will be invited to match the L1 price for the remaining 50% quantity, subject to the Class-I local supplier's quoted price falling within the margin of purchase preference (L1+20%), and the contract for that quantity shall be awarded to such Class-I local supplier subject to matching the L1 price.
  • In case the lowest eligible Class-I local supplier fails to match the L1 price or accepts less than the offered quantity, the next higher Class-I local supplier within L1+20% shall be invited to match the L1 price for the remaining quantity, and so on, and the contract shall be awarded accordingly.
  • In case some quantity out of the 50% (for the eligible Class-I Local Suppliers) is still left uncovered, then such balance quantity may also be ordered on the L1 bidder.
  • Non-divisible procurements and services evaluated on price alone: In the procurements of goods or works covered by para 3(b) above which are not divisible in nature, and in the procurement of services where the bid is evaluated on price alone, the 'Class-I local supplier' shall get purchase preference over 'Class-II local supplier' as well as 'Non-local supplier', as per the following procedure:
  • Among all qualified bids, the lowest bid will be termed L1. If L1 is a 'Class-I local supplier', the contract will be awarded to L1.
  • If L1 is not a 'Class-I local supplier', the lowest bidder among the 'Class-I local suppliers' will be invited to match the L1 price, subject to the Class-I local supplier's quoted price falling within the margin of purchase preference (L1+20%), and the contract shall be awarded to such Class-I local supplier subject to matching the L1 price.
  • In case the lowest eligible Class-I local supplier fails to match the L1 price, the Class-I local supplier with the next higher bid within L1+20% shall be invited to match the L1 price, and so on, and the contract shall be awarded accordingly. In case none of the Class-I local suppliers within the margin of purchase preference matches the L1 price, the contract may be awarded to the L1 bidder.
  • "Class-II local supplier" will not get a preference for any procurement undertaken by procuring entities.

4A. Applicability in Tenders where the Contract is to be Awarded to Multiple Bidders

In tenders where the contract is awarded to multiple bidders, subject to matching of L1 rates or otherwise, the 'Class-I local supplier' shall get purchase preference over 'Class-II local supplier' as well as 'Non-local supplier', as per the following procedure:

  • i) In case there is sufficient local capacity and competition for the item to be procured, as notified by the Nodal Ministry, only Class-I local suppliers shall be eligible to bid. As such, the multiple suppliers who would be awarded the contract should be all and only 'Class-I Local suppliers'.
  • ii) In other cases, 'Class-II local suppliers' and 'Non-local suppliers' may also participate in the tender process along with 'Class-I local suppliers' as per provisions of the Order.
  • iii) If 'Class-I Local suppliers' qualify for the award of contract for at least 50% of the tendered quantity in any tender, the contract may be awarded to all the qualified bidders as per the award criteria stipulated in the tender documents.
  • iv) However, in case 'Class-I Local suppliers' do not qualify for the award of contract for at least 50% of the tendered quantity, purchase preference should be given to the 'Class-I local supplier' over Class-II local suppliers/ Non-local suppliers, provided their quoted rate falls within the 20% margin of purchase preference of the HIGHEST quoted bidder considered for award of contract — so as to ensure that the Class-I Local suppliers, taken in totality, are considered for award of contract for at least 50% of the tendered quantity.
  • v) Only those 'Class-I local suppliers' whose quoted rates fall within the 20% margin of purchase preference would be eligible for purchase preference, subject to meeting the prescribed criteria for award of contract as also the constraint of maximum quantity that can be sourced from any single supplier.
  • First, purchase preference must be given to the lowest quoting eligible 'Class-I local supplier'.
  • If the lowest quoting Class-I local supplier does not qualify for purchase preference because of the aforesaid constraints, or does not accept the offered quantity, an opportunity may be given to the next higher eligible Class-I local supplier, and so on.
  • In case the quantity thus allocated to eligible Class-I local suppliers is short of 50% of the tendered quantity, then this shortfall quantity may be distributed among all other qualified bidders as per the award criteria stipulated in the tender documents.
  • vi) To avoid any ambiguity during the bid evaluation process, the procuring entities may stipulate their own tender-specific criteria for the award of contracts amongst different bidders, including the procedure for purchase preference to 'Class-I local supplier', within the broad policy guidelines stipulated in the sub-paras above.

5.Exemption of Small Purchases

Notwithstanding anything contained above, procurements where the estimated value to be procured is less than Rs. 5 lakh shall be EXEMPT from the Order. However, it shall be ensured by procuring entities that procurement is not split for the purpose of avoiding the provisions of this Order.

5A. Exemption in Sourcing of Spares and Consumables of Closed Systems

Procurement of spare parts, consumables for closed systems, and Maintenance/ Service contracts with the Original Equipment Manufacturer/ Original Equipment Supplier/ Original Part Manufacturer shall be exempted from this Order.

6.Minimum Local Content

CategoryMinimum Local Content
Class-I local supplier50%
Class-II local supplier20%

The Nodal Ministry/ Department may prescribe only a higher percentage of the minimum local content requirement to categorise a supplier as Class-I/ Class-II local supplier. For items for which the Nodal Ministry/ Department has not prescribed a higher minimum local content notification under the Order, it shall be 50% and 20% for Class-I and Class-II local supplier respectively.

7.Requirement for Declaration/ Specification in Advance

The minimum local content, the margin of purchase preference, and the procedure for preference to Make in India shall be declared in the Notice Inviting Tenders or other forms of procurement solicitation, and shall not be varied during a particular procurement transaction.

8.Government e-Marketplace

In respect of procurement through GeM, GeM shall, as far as possible, specifically mark the items that meet the minimum local content while registering the item for display, and shall, wherever feasible, make provision for automated comparison with purchase preference and without purchase preference, and for obtaining consent of the local supplier in those cases where purchase preference is to be exercised.

9.Verification of Local Content

  1. The Class-I/ Class-II local supplier shall, at the time of tender, bidding or solicitation, be required to indicate the percentage of local content and provide self-certification that the item offered meets the local content requirement for Class-I/ Class-II local supplier, as the case may be. They shall also give details of the location(s) at which the local value addition is made.
  2. In cases of procurement for a value more than Rs. 10 crore, the Class-I/ Class-II local supplier shall be required to provide a certificate from the statutory auditor or cost auditor of the company (in the case of companies), or from a practising cost accountant or practising chartered accountant (in respect of suppliers other than companies), giving the percentage of local content.
  3. The bidder shall give self-certification for local content in the quoted item (goods/ works/ services) at the time of tendering. However, at the time of execution of the project, for all contracts above INR 10 Crore, the contractor/ supplier shall be required to give local content certification duly certified by a cost/ chartered accountant in practice.

For cases where it is not possible to provide certification by Cost/ Chartered Accountant at the time of execution of the project, the supplier shall be permitted to provide the certificate after completion of the contract, within the limit acceptable to the procuring entity.

In case the contractor/ supplier does not meet the stipulated local content requirement and the category of the supplier changes from Class-I to Class-II/ Non-local, or from Class-II to Non-local — a penalty up to 10% of the contract value may be imposed. However, the contract once awarded shall not be terminated on this account.

  1. Decisions on complaints relating to the implementation of this Order shall be made by the competent authority empowered to investigate procurement-related complaints relating to the procuring entity.
  2. Nodal Ministries may constitute committees with internal and external experts for independent verification of self-declarations and auditor's/ accountant's certificates — on a random basis and in the case of complaints.
  3. Nodal Ministries and procuring entities may prescribe fees for such complaints.
  4. False declarations will be in breach of the Code of Integrity under Rule 175(1)(i)(h) of the GFR, for which a bidder or its successors can be DEBARRED for up to two years as per Rule 151(iii) of the GFR, along with such other actions as may be permissible under law. The Department of Expenditure shall issue suitable instructions for the effective and smooth operation of this process, so that:
  5. i) The fact and duration of debarment for violation of the Order by any procuring entity are promptly brought to the notice of the Member-Convenor of the Standing Committee and the Department of Expenditure through the concerned Ministry/ Department or in some other manner;
  6. ii) On a periodical basis, such cases are consolidated, and a centralised or decentralised list of such suppliers with the period of debarment is maintained and displayed on the website(s);
  7. iii) With respect to procuring entities other than the one that has carried out the debarment, the debarment takes effect PROSPECTIVELY from the date of uploading on the website(s), in such a manner that ongoing procurements are not disrupted;
  8. iv) A supplier who has been debarred by any procuring entity for violation of the Order shall not be eligible for preference under the Order for procurement by any other procuring entity for the duration of the debarment. The debarment for such other procuring entities shall take effect prospectively from the date on which it comes to the notice of other procuring entities in the manner prescribed above.

10.Specifications in Tenders and Other Procurement Solicitations

  1. Every procuring entity shall ensure that the eligibility/ qualification conditions with respect to previous experience fixed in any tender or solicitation do not require proof of supply in other countries or proof of exports.
  2. Procuring entities shall endeavour to see that eligibility/ qualification conditions — including on matters like turnover, production capability, and financial strengthdo not result in unreasonable exclusion of Class-I/ Class-II local suppliers who would otherwise be eligible, beyond what is essential for ensuring quality or creditworthiness of the supplier.
  3. Procuring entities shall review all existing eligibility norms and conditions with reference to sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) above.
  4. Specifying foreign certifications/ unreasonable technical specifications/ brands/ models in the tender document is a restrictive and discriminatory practice against local suppliers. If foreign certification is required to be stipulated because of the non-availability of Indian Standards and/or for any other reason, the same shall be done only after written approval of the Secretary of the Department concerned, or any other Authority designated such power by the Secretary of the Department concerned.
  5. GC "All administrative Ministries/ Departments whose procurement exceeds Rs. 1000 Crore per annum shall notify/ update their procurement projections every year, including those of the PSEs/ PSUs, for the next five years on their respective website."

11.Reciprocity Clause

  1. When a Nodal Ministry/ Department identifies that Indian suppliers of an item are not allowed to participate and/or compete in procurement by any foreign government due to restrictive tender conditions which have the direct or indirect effect of barring Indian companies — such as registration in the procuring country, execution of projects of specific value in the procuring country, etc. — it shall provide such details to all its procuring entities, including CMDs/ CEOs of PSEs/ PSUs, State Governments and other procurement agencies under their administrative control, and GeM, for appropriate reciprocal action.
  2. Entities of countries identified by the Nodal Ministry/ Department as not allowing Indian companies to participate in their Government procurement for any item related to that Nodal Ministry shall not be allowed to participate in Government procurement in India for all items related to that Nodal Ministry/ Department, except for the list of items published by the Ministry/ Department permitting their participation.
  3. The stipulation in (b) above shall be part of all tenders invited by the Central Government procuring entities stated in (a) above. All purchases on GeM shall also necessarily have the above provisions for items identified by the Nodal Ministry/ Department.
  4. State Governments should be encouraged to incorporate similar provisions in their respective tenders.
  5. The term 'entity' of a country shall have the same meaning as under the FDI (Foreign Direct Investment) Policy of DPIIT, as amended from time to time.

12.Action for Non-Compliance with the Provisions of the Order

In case restrictive or discriminatory conditions against domestic suppliers are included in tender documents, an inquiry shall be conducted by the Administrative Department undertaking the procurement (including procurement by any entity under its administrative control) to fix responsibility for the same. Thereafter, appropriate action — administrative or otherwise — shall be taken against erring officials of procuring entities under relevant provisions. Intimation on all such actions shall be sent to the Standing Committee.

13.Assessment of Supply Base by Nodal Ministries

The Nodal Ministry shall keep in view the domestic manufacturing/ supply base and assess the available capacity and the extent of local competition while identifying items and prescribing the higher minimum local content or the manner of its calculation — with a view to avoiding cost increase from the operation of this Order.

14.Increase in Minimum Local Content

The Nodal Ministry may annually review the local content requirements with a view to INCREASING them, subject to the availability of sufficient local competition with adequate quality.

15.Manufacture under Licence/ Technology Collaboration Agreements with Phased Indigenisation

  1. While notifying the minimum local content, Nodal Ministries may make special provisions for exempting suppliers from meeting the stipulated local content if the product is being manufactured in India under a licence from a foreign manufacturer who holds intellectual property rights, and where there is a technology collaboration agreement/ transfer of technology agreement for indigenous manufacture of a product developed abroad with clear phasing of increase in local content.
  2. In the procurement of all goods, services or works in respect of which there is a substantial quantity of public procurement, and for which the Nodal Ministry has not notified that there is sufficient local capacity and local competition, the concerned Nodal Ministry shall notify an upper threshold value of procurement beyond which foreign companies shall enter into a JOINT VENTURE with an Indian company to participate in the tender. Procuring entities, while procuring such items beyond the notified threshold value, shall prescribe in their respective tenders that foreign companies may enter into a joint venture with an Indian company to participate in the tender. The procuring Ministries/ Departments shall also make special provisions to exempt such joint ventures from meeting the stipulated minimum local content requirement, which shall be increased in a phased manner.

16.Powers to Grant Exemption and to Reduce Minimum Local Content

  1. The Administrative Department undertaking the procurement (including procurement by any entity under its administrative control), with the approval of their Minister-in-charge, may — by written order, for reasons to be recorded in writing:
  2. i) reduce the minimum local content below the prescribed level; or
  3. ii) reduce the margin of purchase preference below 20 per cent; or
  4. iii) exempt any item or supplying entities from the operation of this Order or any part of the Order.
  5. The Administrative Department, while seeking exemption under this para, shall certify that such item(s) has not been notified by the Nodal Ministry/ Department concerned.
  6. A copy of every such order shall be provided to the Standing Committee and the concerned Nodal Ministry/ Department. The Nodal Ministry/ Department will continue to have the power to vary its notification on Minimum Local Content.

17.Directions to Government Companies

With respect to Government companies and other procuring entities not governed by the General Financial Rules, the administrative Ministry or Department shall issue policy directions requiring compliance with this Order.

18.Standing Committee

  1. A Standing Committee is constituted with the following membership:
PositionMember
ChairmanSecretary, Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT)
MemberSecretary, Commerce
MemberSecretary, Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology
MemberJoint Secretary (Public Procurement), Department of Expenditure
Member-ConvenorJoint Secretary (DPIIT)
  1. The Secretary of the Department concerned with a particular item shall be a member in respect of issues relating to such item. The Chairman of the Committee may co-opt technical experts as relevant to any issue or class of issues under its consideration.

19.Functions of the Standing Committee

The Standing Committee shall meet as often as necessary, but not less than once every six months. The Committee:

  1. shall oversee the implementation of this Order and the issues arising from it, and make recommendations to Nodal Ministries and procuring entities;
  2. shall annually assess and periodically monitor compliance with this Order;
  3. shall identify Nodal Ministries and the allocation of items among them for the issue of notifications on minimum local content;
  4. may require the furnishing of details or returns regarding compliance with this Order and related matters;
  5. may, during the annual review or otherwise, assess issues where the manner of implementation of the Order results in any restrictive practices, cartelisation, or increase in public expenditure, and suggest remedial measures;
  6. may examine cases covered by para 15 above relating to manufacture under licence/ technology transfer agreements, with a view to satisfying itself that adequate mechanisms exist for enforcement of such agreements and for attaining the underlying objective of progressive indigenisation;
  7. may consider any other issue relating to this Order that may arise.

20.Removal of Difficulties

Ministries/ Departments and the Boards of Directors of Government companies may issue such clarifications and instructions as may be necessary for the removal of any difficulties arising in the implementation of the Order.

21.Ministries Having Existing Policies

Where any Ministry or Department has its own policy for preference to local content approved by the Cabinet after 1st January 2015, such policies will PREVAIL over the provisions of the Order. All other existing orders on preference to local content shall be reviewed by the Nodal Ministries and revised as needed(W adds: "to conform to this Order, within two months of the issue of this Order").

22.Faqs

Please refer to the FAQs related to the PPP-MII Order issued by DPIIT.

1.11.4Restrictions/ Prior Registration on Entities from a Class of Countries

(Rule 144(xi), GFR 2017 — the "Land Border" Order)

1.Requirement of Registration

Rule 144 of GFR, 2017 has been amended to include a new sub-para (xi) as follows:

2.Detailed Provisions

(Notified by the Department of Expenditure's OM No. F.7/10/2021-PPD(1) dated 23.02.2023)

  1. Any bidder from a country that shares a land border with India will be eligible to bid in any procurement — whether of goods, services (including consultancy services and non-consultancy services) or works (including turnkey projects) — only IF the bidder is REGISTERED with the Competent Authority (see sub-para 10 below).
  2. Any bidder (including an Indian bidder) who has a Specified Transfer of Technology (ToT) arrangement with an entity from a country that shares a land border with India will be eligible to bid in any procurement — whether of goods, services (including consultancy and non-consultancy services) or works (including turnkey projects) — only if the bidder is registered with the Competent Authority. (See also sub-para 5 below.)
  3. Effective dates:
ProvisionApplicable from
Registration for bidders under para (a)23.07.2020
Registration for bidders under para (b) — ToT arrangementsAll procurements where tenders are issued/ published after 01.04.2023
  1. In tenders issued after 23.07.2020 or 01.04.2023, as the case may be, the requirements for registration of bidders and other relevant provisions of this Order shall be incorporated in the tender conditions.

3.Applicability

Apart from Ministries/ Departments, attached and subordinate bodies, notwithstanding anything contained in Rule 1 of the GFRs 2017, the Order shall also be applicable:

  1. to all Autonomous Bodies;
  2. to public sector banks and public sector financial institutions;
  3. to all Central Public Sector Enterprises;
  4. to all procurement in Public Private Partnership projects receiving financial support from the Government or public sector enterprises/ undertakings;
  5. to Union Territories, the National Capital Territory of Delhi, and all agencies/ undertakings thereof.

f) The Order is not applicable:

  • i) In projects that receive international funding with the approval of the Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), Ministry of Finance — the procurement guidelines applicable to the project shall normally be followed, notwithstanding anything contained in this Order and without reference to the Competent Authority. Exceptions to this shall be decided in consultation with DEA.
  • ii) On procurements made by Indian missions and by offices of government agencies/ undertakings located outside India.
  • iii) On bidders (or entities) from those countries — even if sharing a land border with India — to which the Government of India has extended lines of credit, or in which the Government of India is engaged in development projects. Updated lists are given on the Ministry of External Affairs' website.
  • iv) On procurement of spare parts and other essential service support like AMC/ CMC, including consumables for closed systems, from Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) or their authorised agents — exempted from the requirement of registration as mandated under Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017 (Notified vide OM No. F.12/1/2021-PPD(Pt.) dated 02.03.2021).
  • v) A bidder is permitted to procure raw materials, components, sub-assemblies, etc. from vendors from countries that share a land border with India. Such vendors will not be required to be registered with the Competent Authority, as it is not regarded as "sub-contracting". However, if a bidder proposes to supply FINISHED GOODS procured directly/ indirectly from vendors from countries sharing a land border with India, such vendors WILL be required to be registered with the Competent Authority (Notified vide OM No. F.18/37/2020-PPD dated 08.02.2021).

4.Definitions

a) "Bidder" — for the purpose of the Order (including the terms 'bidder', 'consultant', 'vendor' or 'service provider' in certain contexts) means any person, firm or company, including any member of a consortium or joint venture (that is, an association of several persons, or firms or companies), every artificial juridical person not falling in any of the descriptions of bidders stated hereinbefore, including any agency, branch or office controlled by such person, participating in a procurement process.

b) "Tender" — for the purpose of the Order will include other forms of procurement, except where the context requires otherwise.

c) "Transfer of Technology" — means dissemination and transfer of all forms of commercially usable knowledge, such as transfer of know-how, skills, technical expertise, designs, processes and procedures, and trade secrets, which enables the acquirer of such technology to perform activities using the transferred technology independently.

d) "Specified Transfer of Technology" — means a transfer of technology in the sectors and/or technologies specified in sub-para 5 below, occurring on or after 23.07.2020.

e) "Bidder (or entity) from a country which shares a land border with India" — means:

  • i) An entity incorporated, established, or registered in such a country; or
  • ii) A subsidiary of an entity incorporated, established, or registered in such a country; or
  • iii) An entity substantially controlled through entities incorporated, established, or registered in such a country; or
  • iv) An entity whose beneficial owner is situated in such a country; or
  • v) An Indian (or other) AGENT of such an entity; or
  • vi) A natural person who is a citizen of such a country; or
  • vii) A consortium or joint venture where any member of the consortium or joint venture falls under any of the above.

f) "Agent" — for the purpose of the Order, is a person employed to do any act for another, or to represent another in dealings with third persons.

g) "Beneficial owner" — for the purposes of point (e)(iv) will be as follows:

  • i) In the case of a company or Limited Liability Partnership, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s) who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical person(s), has a controlling ownership interest, or who exercises CONTROL through other means.
  • ii) In the case of a partnership firm, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s) who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical persons, has ownership of/ entitlement to more than fifteen per cent (15%) of capital or profits of the partnership.
  • iii) In the case of an unincorporated association or body of individuals, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s) who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical persons, has ownership of or entitlement to more than fifteen per cent (15%) of the property or capital or profits of such association or body of individuals.
  • iv) Where NO natural person is identified under (i), (ii) or (iii) above, the beneficial owner is the relevant natural person who holds the position of senior managing official.
  • v) In the case of a TRUST, the identification of beneficial owner(s) shall include identification of:
  • the author of the trust,
  • the trustee,
  • the beneficiaries with fifteen per cent (15%) or more interest in the trust, and
  • any other natural person exercising ultimate effective control over the trust through a chain of control or ownership.
  • vi) To determine nationality while assessing the beneficial ownership of the bidder, the nationality mentioned in the beneficial owner's PASSPORT should be considered. In case of the possibility of dual citizenship, nationality on all the passports should be considered through a suitable declaration. If nationality in any of the passports of the person whose beneficial ownership is being assessed is recorded to be from a country sharing a land border with India, the provisions contained under this Order shall apply.

5.Sensitive Sectors/ Technologies

(Relevant only for the provisions on ToT arrangements — refer sub-para 2(b) above)

  1. Certain sectors and technologies have been identified as sensitive from the national security point of view:
  2. Sectors listed in Schedule I → Category-I sensitive sectors
  3. Sectors listed in Schedule II → Category-II sensitive sectors
  4. Technologies listed in Schedule III → sensitive technologies

List of Category-I Sensitive Sectors (Schedule-I)

S. No.Sector
1Atomic Energy
2Broadcasting/ Print and Digital Media
3Defence
4Space
5Telecommunications

List of Category-II Sensitive Sectors (Schedule-II)

S. No.Sector
1Power and Energy (including exploration/ generation/ transmission/ distribution/ pipeline)
2Banking and Finance, including Insurance
3Civil Aviation
4Construction of ports and dams & river valley projects
5Electronics and Microelectronics
6Meteorology and Ocean Observation
7Mining and extraction (including deep sea projects)
8Railways
9Pharmaceuticals & Medical Devices
10Agriculture
11Health
12Urban Transportation

List of Sensitive Technologies (Schedule-III)

S. No.Technology
1Additive Manufacturing (e.g., 3D Printing)
2Any equipment having electronic programmable components or autonomous systems (e.g., SCADA systems)
3Any technology used for uploading and streaming data, including broadcasting, satellite communication, etc.
4Chemical Technologies
5Biotechnologies, including Genetic Engineering and Biological Technologies
6Information and Communication Technologies
7Software
  1. For Category-I sensitive sectors, bidders with a ToT arrangement in any technology with an entity from a country that shares a land border with India shall require registration.
  2. For Category-II sensitive sectors, bidders with a ToT arrangement in the sensitive technologies listed in Schedule III with an entity from a country that shares a land border with India shall require registration.
  3. In Category-II sensitive sectors, the Secretary (or an officer not below the rank of Joint Secretary to the Government of India, so authorised by the Secretary) of the Ministry/ Department of the Government of India is empowered, after due consideration, to WAIVE the requirement of registration for a particular item/ application or a class of items/ applications, even if included in Schedule III. The Ministry/ Department concerned shall INFORM DPIIT and the National Security Council Secretariat (NSCS) of their decision to waive the requirement of registration. Ministries/ Departments are not required to consult DPIIT/ nscs before deciding, and are only required to inform DPIIT/ nscs of the decision. If DPIIT/ NSCS raises any point, it should be considered in future procurements, and the ongoing procurement for which the waiver was granted need not be interrupted or altered.
  4. Based on security considerations, a Ministry/ Department in a Category-II sensitive sector, or other Ministries/ Departments, may recommend to DPIIT the inclusion of any other technology in the list of sensitive technologies — either generally or for their Ministry/ Department.

6.Sub-contracting in Works Contracts

In works contracts, including turnkey contracts, contractors shall not be allowed to sub-contract works to any contractor from a country that shares a land border with India unless such contractor is REGISTERED with the Competent Authority. The definition of "contractor from a country which shares a land border with India" shall be as in sub-para 4(e) above. This shall not apply to sub-contracts already awarded on or before the date of the Order (i.e., 23rd July 2020).

7.Model Clauses/ Certificate Regarding Compliance

An undertaking/ certificate shall be taken from bidders in the tender documents that the extant guidelines for participation in the tenders (which should include conditions for implementation of this Order) have been complied with. If such a certificate is given by a bidder whose bid is accepted and is found to be FALSE, this would be grounds for DEBARMENT and further legal action in accordance with law.

Model Clauses and Model Certificates, which may be inserted in tenders/ obtained from Bidders, are given in the Annexures. While adhering to the substance of the Order, procuring entities are free to appropriately modify the wording of these clauses based on their past experience, local needs, etc.

8.Validity of Registration

  • With respect to tenders, registration should be valid at the time of SUBMISSION of bids AND at the time of ACCEPTANCE of bids.
  • With respect to supplies other than by tender, registration should be valid at the time of placement of the order.
  • If the bidder was validly registered at the time of acceptance/ placement of the order, registration shall not be a relevant consideration during contract execution.

9.Government e-Marketplace

GeM shall REMOVE non-compliant entities from GeM unless/ until they are registered in accordance with this Order.

10.Competent Authority and Procedure for Registration

  1. The Competent Authority for the purpose of registration under this Order shall be the Registration Committee constituted by DPIIT(Notified vide OM No. F.6/18/2019-PPD issued by Department of Expenditure dated 23.07.2020).
  1. The Registration Committee shall have the following members:
  2. i) An officer not below the rank of Joint Secretary, designated for this purpose by DPIIT, who shall be the Chairperson;
  3. ii) Officers (ordinarily not below the rank of Joint Secretary) representing the Ministry of Home Affairs, Ministry of External Affairs, and those Departments whose sectors are covered by applications under consideration;
  4. iii) Any other officer whose presence is deemed necessary by the Chairperson of the Committee.
  5. DPIIT has laid down the method of application, format, etc. for such bidders as covered by the Order.
  6. On receipt of an application seeking registration from a bidder covered by sub-para 2(a) and 2(b) above, the Competent Authority shall first seek POLITICAL and SECURITY CLEARANCES from the Ministry of External Affairs and Ministry of Home Affairs, as per guidelines issued from time to time. Registration shall not be given unless political and security clearance have both been received.
  7. The Ministry of External Affairs and Ministry of Home Affairs may issue guidelines for internal use regarding the procedure for scrutiny of such applications.
  8. The decision of the Competent Authority to register such bidder may be for all kinds of tenders or for a specified type(s) of goods or services, and may be for a specified or unspecified duration of time, as deemed fit. The decision of the Competent Authority shall be final.
  9. Registration granted by the Competent Authority of the Government of India shall be valid not only for procurement by the Central Government and its bodies specified in sub-para 3 above, BUT also for procurement by State Governments and their agencies/ public enterprises, etc. No fresh registration at the State level shall be required.
  10. The Competent Authority is empowered to CANCEL the registration already granted if it determines that there is sufficient cause. Such cancellation by itself, however, will not affect the execution of contracts already awarded. Pending cancellation, it may also SUSPEND the registration of a bidder, and the bidder shall not be eligible to bid in any further tenders during the period of suspension.
  11. For national security reasons, the Competent Authority shall not be required to give reasons for rejection/ cancellation of registration of a bidder.

11.Clarifications Regarding Applicability of the Restrictions under Rule 144(xi)

  1. Proprietary purchases are not excluded from the provisions of Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017.
  2. The rule is applicable to all purchases irrespective of the order value.
  3. Sub-contracting is not permitted by any contractor to a contractor from a country sharing a land border with India unless registered with the competent authority. However, it is to be noted that procurement of raw materials, components, sub-assemblies, etc. does not constitute sub-contracting. In case a bidder has proposed to supply finished goods procured directly/ indirectly from vendors from countries that share a land border with India, such vendor will be required to be registered with the Competent Authority.
  4. There is NO bar on the contractor from procuring raw material from a firm that has been ACQUIRED by another firm belonging to a country that shares a land border with India.
  5. Contract Manufacturing outside India: If the bidder is getting the subject product manufactured outside India, this is treated as contract manufacturing, and the beneficial ownership of the actual manufacturing entity must be verified. If the actual manufacturer does not meet the beneficial ownership criteria — then the bidder must submit DPIIT registration of such manufacturer to participate in the procurement.
  6. The Hiring of Services: Suppose a Bidder (Indian/ Foreign) who is not from a country sharing a land border with India offers services to a procuring entity by arranging equipment from another company. Then the following scenarios may appear:
S. No.ScenarioApplicability of Rule 144(xi)
a)The equipment/ goods have been purchased or will be purchased from a company (manufacturer) from a country that shares a land border with India.The bidder has procured certain goods to offer the requisite services to a procuring entity. In such case, the bidder does not fall within the definition of the term "bidder" as defined under para 4(e) above. Hence, the provisions of Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017 do not apply to this case.
b)By entering into an MOU/ lease agreement with the company (who OWNS the equipment/ goods) from a country that shares a land border with India.Here, the bidding vendor proposes to hire services from a company that belongs to a country that shares a land border with India. This prima facie becomes a case of INDIRECT SUPPLY of services by a company that owns the equipment/ goods by introducing an intermediary. The intermediary merely acts as an AGENT to the company providing services of the equipment. In such a case, the company owning the equipment and indirectly supplying the services shall be required to be registered with the competent authority — thereby requiring the fulfilment of the provisions of Rule 144(xi).
c)By entering into an MOU/ lease agreement with company 'X' (the present owner of the equipment) from a country that does not share a land border with India. The equipment has been purchased from the manufacturer company 'Y', which is from a country that SHARES a land border with India.In this case, the actual supplier of services, prima facie, shall be 'X'. The status of 'X' in this case does not attract the provisions of Rule 144(xi).

12.Illustrative Examples of the Applicability of Restrictions under Rule 144(xi)

a) The "sister company / offshore production unit" example:

A vendor, say 'Party A' from India, is procuring an item from their sister company 'Party B', which is registered in a country that does not share a land border with India. Both Party A and Party B are owned by an entity, say 'Party C'. Party C does not belong to a country sharing a land border with India. However, Party B has its production facility in a country sharing a land border with India, and the manufactured item will be procured by Party A from Party B from that production facility. The production unit is wholly owned by Party B.

Party A claims that Rule 144(xi) does not apply to it because neither Party A nor Party B is:

  • i) An entity incorporated, established or registered in such a country — as Party A is registered in India and Party B is registered in a country not sharing a land border with India;
  • ii) A subsidiary of an entity incorporated, established or registered in such a country — as they are 100% owned subsidiaries of Party C, which is incorporated, registered and established in a country not sharing a land border with India;
  • iii) An entity controlled through entities incorporated, established or registered in such a country — as they are 100% owned by Party C;
  • iv) An entity whose beneficial owner is situated in such a country — as their beneficial owner is Party C;
  • v) An Indian (or other) agent of such an entity;
  • vi) A natural person who is a citizen of such a country;
  • vii) A consortium or joint venture where any member falls under any of the above — though it has a wholly owned subsidiary in a country that shares a land border with India, it is not a JV or consortium (a subsidiary does not qualify as a JV or consortium);
  • viii) In addition, Party A claims that they are not procuring finished goods directly/ indirectly from vendors from countries sharing land borders with India, as the item is being manufactured in their own production units.

b) IT goods and services examples:

ScenarioPosition
i) The contractor is only supplying the servers as-is from an OEM that belongs to a country sharing a land border with India, and there is NO value addition done by the contractorThe contractor acts as an AGENT for the OEM, and registration of both the OEM and the agent (contractor) is required as per Rule 144(xi) of GFR 2017.
ii) The contractor supplies value-added services on hardware and the contractor outsources the procurement of hardwareOEM registration is not required.
iii) There is deployment of IT services that includes both hardware and software customisation, and the contractor has sourced hardware which is made in the country sharing a land border with IndiaThe requirement of registration as per Rule 144(xi) is not applicable.

1.11.5Support to Start-up Enterprises

1.Definition of Start-up Enterprises

  1. As defined by DPIIT, an entity shall be considered a 'Start-up':
  2. i) Up to a period of ten YEARS from the date of incorporation/ registration, if it is incorporated as a private limited company (as defined in the Companies Act, 2013) or registered as a partnership firm (registered under section 59 of the Partnership Act, 1932) or a limited liability partnership (under the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008) in India; and
  3. ii) Turnover of the entity for any of the financial years since incorporation/ registration has not exceeded one hundred crore rupees; and
  4. iii) The entity works towards INNOVATION, DEVELOPMENT, or IMPROVEMENT of products, processes, or services, or a scalable business model with a high potential for EMPLOYMENT GENERATION or WEALTH CREATION.
  5. Provided that an entity formed by SPLITTING UP or RECONSTRUCTING an existing business shall not be considered a 'Start-up'.
  6. Provided further that, in order to obtain benefits, a Start-up so identified under the above definition shall be required to be RECOGNISED as a Start-up by DPIIT.

2.Support to Start-ups

The Government of India has ordered the following support to Start-ups (as defined by DPIIT):

a) Exemption from submission of Bid Security: Such Start-ups shall be EXEMPTED from payment/ submission of Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security.

b) Relaxation in Prior Turnover and Experience: The Procuring Entity reserves its right to relax the condition of prior turnover and prior experience for start-up enterprises recognised by DPIIT, subject to meeting quality & technical specifications. Start-ups may be MSMEs/ MSEs or otherwise. Such relaxation can be provided in the case of procurement of works as well.

It is further clarified that such relaxation is not optional but normally has to be ensured, except in the case of procurement of items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, etc., where adequate justification exists for the Procuring Entity not to relax such criteria. The decision of the Procuring Entity in this regard shall be final. (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017.)

1.11.6Domestically Manufactured Iron & Steel Products (DMI&SP) PolicyGW

PART A — DMI&SP POLICY, 2019 (as reproduced in the Goods Manual, 2024)G

1. Background: The DMI&SP policy provides a preference for Domestically Manufactured Iron and Steel Products in Government procurement. By promoting domestically manufactured iron and steel products as well as capital goods used for manufacturing iron and steel products, the Policy contributes to the growth of the Indian iron and steel industry. It was first notified in May 2017, revised in May 2019, and further amended in December 2020. The Ministry of Steel notified on March 8, 2024 the extension of this Policy till November 2024.

2. Applicability:

a) Iron & Steel Products:

  • i) The Policy applies to the government procurement of iron & steel products (listed in Appendix A of the Policy, produced in compliance with prescribed quality standards) by every Ministry or Department of Government and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control, and to projects funded by these agencies. All Central Sector Schemes (CS)/ Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS) for which States and Local Bodies make procurement would come within the purview of this Policy if the Government of India fully/ partly funds that project/ scheme.
  • However, this Policy shall not apply to purchasing iron & steel products with a view to COMMERCIAL RESALE or to use in producing goods for COMMERCIAL SALE.
  • The Policy also applies to private agencies' purchase of iron & steel products to fulfil an EPC contract and/or any other requirement of the Ministry or Department of Government or their PSEs.
  • ii) The Policy shall apply to projects where the procurement value of iron and steel products exceeds Rs. 5 lakh. The Policy shall also be applicable for other procurements (non-project) where the ANNUAL procurement value of iron and steel products for that Government organisation is more than Rs. 5 lakh. However, it shall be ensured by procuring entities that procurement is not SPLIT to avoid the provisions of this Policy.

b) Capital Goods for Manufacturing Iron & Steel Products:

  • i) For government procurement of capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products listed in Appendix B of the Policy (produced in compliance with prescribed quality standards, as applicable), the policy is applicable — irrespective of the project size — to all public sector steel manufacturers and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control, but not for commercial resale. The Policy also applies to the purchase of capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products by private agencies for fulfilling an EPC contract and/or any other requirement of public sector steel manufacturers and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control.
  • ii) NO Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of Capital Goods for manufacturing iron & steel products (Appendix-B) having estimated value UP TO Rs. 200 Crore, except with the approval of the competent authority as designated by the Department of Expenditure.

3. Waivers: Waivers shall be granted by the Ministry of Steel, subject to the conditions below. The exclusion requests shall be submitted to the Standing Committee along with sufficient proof of unavailability of domestically manufactured iron & steel products: a) Where specific grades of steel are not manufactured in the country; or b) Where the quantities as per the demand of the project cannot be met through domestic sources.

4. Purchase Preferences: a) NO Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of iron and steel products (Appendix-A). The procurement process shall be open only to the manufacturers/ suppliers capable of meeting/ exceeding the domestic value-addition targets. Manufacturers/ suppliers not meeting the domestic value addition targets shall not be eligible to participate in the bidding. b) Purchase preference shall be provided to domestically manufactured capital goods listed in Appendix B if their quoted price falls within 20% of the price quoted for corresponding imported capital goods. If the procuring company considers that the procured quantity cannot be divided in the prescribed ratio of 50:50, they shall have the right to award the contract to the eligible domestic manufacturer for a quantity not less than 50%, as may be divisible. The contract can be awarded to the eligible domestic manufacturer for the entire quantity if the tendered capital goods are NON-DIVISIBLE. If none of the eligible manufacturers meets domestic value addition requirements and matches the L1 bid, the original bidder holding the L1 bid shall secure the order for the entire procurement value.

5. Clause in Tender Document: The tender document for procurement of both Goods as well as for EPC contracts should explicitly outline the eligibility/ qualification criteria for adherence to minimum prescribed domestic value addition by the bidder for iron and steel products and capital goods (as indicated in Appendix A and Appendix B).

6. Standing Committee: A Standing Committee under the Ministry of Steel (MoS), chaired by the Secretary (Steel), shall be constituted to oversee implementation. The Committee shall comprise experts from Industry/ Industry Association/ Government Institution or Body/ Ministry of Steel. Its mandate: a) Monitoring the implementation of the Policy; b) Review and notify the Iron & Steel products list and the domestic value addition requirement criteria mentioned in Appendix A and Appendix B; c) Issue necessary clarifications for implementation of the Policy, including grant of exclusions to procuring agencies as per section 3; d) Constitute a separate committee to carry out grievance redressal; e) The Standing Committee shall submit its recommendations for approval to the Ministry of Steel.

7. Certification of Local Content: a) To qualify as domestically manufactured iron and steel products/ capital goods for purchase preference under this Policy, a minimum domestic value addition of 20% to 50% is specified in Appendix A (domestically manufactured iron and steel products) and 50% for Appendix B (capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products). The domestic value-addition is based on SELF-CERTIFICATION. b) For products in Appendix A, each domestic manufacturer shall furnish the Affidavit of self-certification in the prescribed format to the procuring agency declaring that the iron & steel products are domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed. It shall be the responsibility of the domestic manufacturer to ensure that the products supplied are indeed domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed for the product. c) For capital goods in Appendix B, the bidder shall furnish the certification issued by the STATUTORY AUDITOR of the domestic manufacturer declaring that the capital goods are domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed. The bidder shall also be required to provide a domestic value addition certificate on a HALF-YEARLY basis (September 30 and March 31), within 60 days of commencement of each half-year, duly certified by the Statutory Auditors of the domestic manufacturer, to the concerned procuring agencies till the completion of the supply — that the claims of domestic value addition made for the product during the preceding 6 months are in accordance with the Policy. d) Bidders who are selling agents/ authorised distributors/ authorised dealers/ authorised supply houses of the domestic manufacturers of iron & steel products are ELIGIBLE to bid on behalf of the domestic manufacturers under the Policy. However, this shall be subject to the following conditions:

  • i) The bidder shall furnish the authorisation certificate issued by the domestic manufacturer for selling domestically manufactured iron & steel products;
  • ii) In case the procurement is covered under Appendix A, the bidder shall furnish the Affidavit of self-certification issued by the domestic manufacturer to the procuring agency;
  • iii) In case the procurement is covered under Appendix B, the bidder shall furnish the certification issued by the statutory auditor to the domestic manufacturer;
  • iv) The bidder shall be responsible for furnishing other documents required to be issued by the domestic manufacturer to the procuring agency as per the Policy.

8. Complaints and Penalties: a) Complaints relating to mis-declaration made to the procuring agency or Ministry of Steel shall be dealt with in the prescribed time frame by examining the documents at the bidder's cost. A refundable cautionary deposit is required for complaints to the Ministry of Steel. b) Each procuring agency shall define the penalties in the tender document in case of wrong declaration by the bidder of the prescribed domestic value addition. The penalties may include forfeiting the EMD, other financial penalties, and debarment of the manufacturer/ service provider.

9. Specifications in Tenders and Other Procurement Solicitations: a) Every procuring entity shall ensure that the eligibility conditions with respect to previous experience do not require proof of supply in other countries or proof of exports. b) Procuring entities shall endeavour to see that eligibility conditions — including on turnover, production capability and financial strengthdo not result in unreasonable exclusion of local suppliers who would otherwise be eligible, beyond what is essential for ensuring quality or creditworthiness. c) Procuring entities shall review all existing eligibility norms and conditions with reference to (a) and (b) above. d) Reciprocity: If the Ministry of Steel is satisfied that Indian suppliers of iron and steel products are not allowed to participate and/or compete in procurement by any foreign government due to restrictive tender conditions which have the direct or indirect effect of barring Indian companies — such as registration in the procuring country, execution of a project of specific value in the procuring country, etc. — it may, if deemed appropriate, RESTRICT or EXCLUDE bidders from that country from eligibility for procurement of that item and/or other items relating to the Ministry of Steel. e) For the purpose of (d) above, a supplier or bidder shall be considered to be from a country if:

  • (i) the entity is incorporated in that country, or
  • (ii) a majority of its shareholding or effective control of the entity is exercised from that country, or
  • (iii) more than 50% of the value of the item being supplied has been added in that country.

Indian suppliers shall mean those entities that meet any of these tests with respect to India. The term 'entity' of a country shall have the same meaning as under the FDI Policy of DPIIT, as amended from time to time. f) In case restrictive or discriminatory conditions against domestic suppliers are included in tender documents, an inquiry shall be conducted by the Administrative Department undertaking the procurement to fix responsibility. Thereafter, appropriate action — administrative or otherwise — shall be taken against erring officials. Intimation on all such action shall be sent to the Standing Committee under the DMI&SP Policy.

PART B — DMI&SP POLICY (REVISED), 2025 — as applicable to EPC tendersW

1. Background: a) This policy, issued by the Ministry of Steel vide notification no. G.S.R. 341(E) dated 26th May 2025, provides preference for Domestically Manufactured Iron and Steel Products (DMI&SP) in Government procurement. b) The policy applies to procurement of iron & steel products notified in Appendix A. In Appendix B, the minimum domestic content and an exempted list of capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products which can be imported have been listed. Appendix C contains the policy for promoting the procurement of technology from indigenous technology suppliers.

2. Definitions:

TermDefinition
BidderMay be a domestic/ foreign manufacturer of iron & steel, or their selling agents/ authorised distributors/ authorised dealers/ authorised supply houses, or any other company engaged in the bidding of projects funded by Government agencies.
Domestically Manufactured Iron & Steel ProductsThose iron and steel products that are manufactured by entities that are registered and established in India, INCLUDING in Special Economic Zones (SEZs).
Domestic ManufacturerA manufacturer of iron & steel products conforming to guidelines in section 7 and the definition of 'manufacturer' as per the Central Excise Act.
Domestic value additionThe amount of value added in India = total value of the item to be procured (excluding net domestic indirect taxes) MINUS the value of imported content in the item (including all customs duties), as a proportion of the total value of the item to be procured, in percent. The definition shall be in line with DPIIT guidelines and shall be suitably amended in case of any future changes by DPIIT. For the purpose of this policy document, "domestic value addition" and "local content" have been used INTERCHANGEABLY.

% Domestic value addition = {Total value of the item to be procured (excluding net domestic indirect taxes) − Value of imported content in the item (including all customs duties)} × 100 ÷ {Total value of the item to be procured}
Finished SteelFlat and long products, which can be subsequently processed into manufactured items.
GovernmentFor the purpose of the Policy, means Government of India.
Government agenciesInclude Government PSUs, Societies, Trusts, and Statutory bodies set up by the Government of India.
Indigenous TechnologyA technology shall be deemed to be Indigenous technology if at least 51% of the entity's equity is held by Indian residents, AND the IPR is owned or co-owned by an Indian entity or licensed exclusively to them, AND the core engineering R&D and project execution capabilities reside in India.
L1The lowest tender or the lowest bid, or the lowest quotation received in a tender, bidding process, or other procurement solicitation, as adjudged in the evaluation process.
MoSMinistry of Steel, Government of India.
Margin of purchase preferenceThe maximum extent to which the price quoted by a domestic supplier may be above L1 for the purpose of purchase preference. In the case of DMI&SP policy, the margin of purchase preference shall be 20% for items in Appendix B.
Melt & PourThe steel that has been produced in a steel-making furnace and poured into its first solid shape. The location where this process takes place is called the country of melt and pour (COM). The COM is the original location where crude steel is first produced in a liquid state and poured into its first solid shape. The first solid shape can be a semi-finished product — like a slab, billet, ingot — or a finished steel mill product.
Net Selling PriceThe invoiced price excluding net domestic taxes and duties.
Semi-Finished SteelIngots, billets, blooms, and slabs, which can be subsequently processed into finished steel.

3. Exclusions: a) Waivers may be granted by the Ministry of Steel to all such Government procurements subject to the below conditions: b) Where specific grades of steel are not manufactured in the country, or c) Where the quantities as per the demand of the project cannot be met through domestic sources. d) Exemption requests shall be submitted to the Standing Committee along with sufficient proof of unavailability of iron & steel products domestically.

4. Standing Committee: a) A Standing Committee chaired by the Secretary (Steel) shall oversee the implementation of the policy. b) The Committee shall comprise experts drawn from Industry/ Industry Association/ Government Institution or Body/ Ministry of Steel. Mandate:

  • i) Monitor the implementation of the policy;
  • ii) Review and notify the list of Iron & Steel products, the domestic content requirement criteria and policy directives as mentioned in Appendix A, Appendix B and Appendix C;
  • iii) Issue necessary clarifications for implementation of the policy, including grant of exclusions to procuring agencies as per Para 3;
  • iv) Constitute a grievance redressal committee for preliminary examination of complaints related to implementation of this policy;
  • v) Issue directions for suitable action to Ministries/ Departments concerned in case of non-compliance with this policy by the procuring agency, and advise.
  • Wherever a procuring entity concludes that an unreasonably high price has been quoted by the SOLE bidder/ manufacturer, the matter may be referred to the committee. In such cases, the procuring entity would be required to substantiate its case with complete and thorough documentation.
  • Specifying foreign certifications/ unreasonable technical specifications in the bid document is a restrictive and discriminatory practice against local suppliers. If foreign certification is required to be stipulated because of non-availability of Indian Standards and/or for any other reason, the same shall be done only after written approval of the Committee.

5. Applicability: a) The policy applies to every Ministry or Department of Government and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control, and to projects funded by these agencies, for the purchase of iron & steel products for government projects. All Central Sector Schemes (CS)/ Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS) for which procurement is made by States and Local Bodies come within the purview of this Policy if that project/ scheme is fully/ partly funded by the Government of India. b) The policy applies to public sector steel manufacturers and agencies/ entities under their administrative control for purchase of capital goods (Appendix-B) for manufacturing iron & steel products. c) Appendix-B contains the exemption list of capital goods used in manufacturing iron & steel products which can be imported, and the minimum domestic content requirement for respective packages. The domestic value addition for Capital Goods, as indicated, is subject to change; for example, if some capital goods components can be manufactured in the country, the domestic value addition percentage may go up. d) A purchase preference of 20% is applicable for capital goods used in steel manufacturing.

  1. Appendix-C contains directives and methodology for steelmaking CPSEs to procure from indigenous technology suppliers.
  2. The policy shall apply to projects AND non-projects where the total procurement value of iron and steel products (Appendix-A) in a contract is greater than rs. 5 lakh, on an ITEMISED BASIS.
  3. NO Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of iron and steel products (Appendix-A). NO GTE shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of Capital Goods for manufacturing iron & steel products (Appendix-B) having estimated value UP TO Rs. 200 Crore, except with the approval of the competent authority as designated by the Department of Expenditure.
  4. The policy applies to the purchase of iron & steel products by PRIVATE agencies for fulfilling an EPC contract and/or any other requirement of a Ministry or Department of Government or their PSUs.

6. Tender Procedure for Procurement: a) Procuring agencies shall follow standard procurement procedures, in accordance with instructions of the Ministry of Finance and CVC, while adhering to DMI&SP policy. b) The tender document, for procurement of both Goods as well as for EPC contracts, should explicitly outline the qualification criteria for adherence to the requirement as mentioned in Appendix A and Appendix B. c) Domestic manufacturers of products under Appendix-A and Appendix-B shall SELF-CERTIFY the local content as per Form-1 placed in the policy, at the time of bidding. d) Bidders who are selling agents/ authorised distributors/ authorised dealers/ authorised supply houses of the domestic manufacturers of iron & steel products covered by Appendix-A are eligible to bid with self-certification on behalf of the domestic manufacturers under the policy, subject to the bidder furnishing an authorisation certificate issued by the domestic manufacturer at the time of delivery. e) For products covered under Appendix B, the bidder shall furnish certification issued by the statutory auditor or cost auditor of the company (in the case of companies), or from a practising cost accountant or practising chartered accountant (in respect of suppliers other than companies), declaring that the capital goods to be used in the iron & steel industry are domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed. f) If Indian suppliers of an item are not allowed to participate and/or compete in procurement by any foreign government, due to restrictive tender conditions which have the direct or indirect effect of barring Indian companies — such as registration in the procuring country, execution of projects of specific value in the procuring country, etc. — it shall provide such details to the procuring entities for appropriate RECIPROCAL action. g) Entities of countries identified by the Ministry of Steel as not allowing Indian companies to participate in their Government procurement for any item related to the Ministry of Steel shall not be allowed to participate in Government procurement in India for all items related to the Ministry of Steel, except for the list of items published by the Ministry of Steel permitting their participation. h) The stipulation above shall be part of all tenders, including those on the GeM portal, invited by the Central Government procuring entities. i) In case restrictive or discriminatory conditions against domestic suppliers are included in bid documents, an inquiry shall be conducted by the Administrative Department undertaking the procurement to fix responsibility. Thereafter, appropriate action — administrative or otherwise — shall be taken against erring officials. Intimation on all such action shall be sent to the Standing Committee under the DMI&SP policy. j) A supplier DEBARRED by any procuring entity for violation of this Order shall not be eligible for preference under this Order for procurement by any OTHER procuring entity for the duration of the debarment. The debarment for such other procuring entities shall take effect prospectively from the date on which it comes to the notice of other procurement entities. k) Grievance redressal timelines: In case the matter is referred to the Ministry of Steel, the grievance redressal committee set up under the MoS shall dispose of the complaint within 4 WEEKS of its reference and receipt of all documents from the bidder, after taking into consideration the view of the Government Agency. The bidder shall be required to furnish the necessary documentation in support of domestic value addition claimed in iron & steel products to the grievance redressal committee under MoS within 2 WEEKS of the reference of the matter. l) The procuring agency shall define the penalties in the tender document in case of a wrong declaration by the bidder of the prescribed domestic value addition. The penalties may include forfeiting of the EMD, other financial penalties, and BLACKLISTING of such manufacturer/ service provider, etc., in terms of extant rules.

7. Implementation Monitoring by the Ministry of Steel: a) The policy provisions shall be applicable for 5 YEARS from the date of publication and may further be extended at the discretion of the Ministry of Steel. b) MoS shall be the NODAL MINISTRY to monitor the implementation of the policy. c) Agencies covered under the DMI&SP policy shall send a declaration on a QUARTERLY basis indicating the extent of compliance to the policy and reasons for non-compliance thereof, during the preceding financial year.

8. Conclusion — Applicability to EPC Tenders W:

Para 6(b) of the policy above makes it explicitly applicable to both Goods and EPC tenders. Except for the rare cases of EPC tenders for setting up of Steel Manufacturing facilities (where Appendix B and C shall also be applicable), normally only Appendix A shall be applicable in EPC tenders, and these products can only be procured from domestic sources. Purchase preference of 20% is applicable only to capital goods as per Appendix B and not to Appendix A.

1.12When is Procurement of Services JustifiedCNC

1.12.1Consultancy ServicesC

Rules 178 & 180 of GFR 2017 permit Ministries/ Departments to hire external professionals, consultancy firms or consultants (referred to as 'consultant' hereinafter) for a specific job, which is well defined in terms of content and time frame for its completion.

Engagement of consultants may be resorted to in situations requiring high quality services for which the Procuring Entity does not have the requisite expertise. Approval of the competent authority should be obtained before engaging consultant(s).

The need for Procurement of Consultancy Services may be justified on consideration of:

  1. The assignment should be well defined in terms of content and time frame for its completion;
  2. The inadequacy of Capability or Capacity of required expertise IN-HOUSE;
  3. The need to have qualified consultants for providing a specialised high-quality service;
  4. Need for impartial advice from a consultant (acting independently from any affiliation) to avoid conflicts of interest;
  5. The need, in some cases, for Transfer of Knowledge/ Training/ Capacity and capability building as a by-product of such engagement;
  6. Need to acquire information about/ identifying and implementing new methods and systems;
  7. Need for planning and implementing ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE;
  8. There may be internal capacity/ capability to do the job, BUT there are considerations of ECONOMY, SPEED, and EFFICIENCY in relation to additional requirement/ commitment/ usage of:
  9. i) Staff/ Management/ Organisation;
  10. ii) Technological and Material Resources;
  11. iii) Money; and
  12. iv) Time/ Speed of execution.

1.12.2Non-Consultancy ServicesNC

In the interest of economy, efficiency and to provide more effective delivery of public services, Rule 198 of GFR, 2017 permits Ministries/ Departments to procure/ outsource NC services (e.g. non-core, auxiliary and support services). Approval of the competent authority should be obtained before engaging service providers.

The need for Procurement of NC services may be justified on consideration of:

  1. Economy, speed and efficiency and more effective delivery of public services relating to additional requirement/ commitment/ usage of:
  2. Staff/ Management/ Organisation;
  3. Technological and Material Resources;
  4. Money; and
  5. Time/ Speed of execution.
  6. An administrative policy decided by the Ministry/ Department to outsource specific (or a class of) services.

1.13Principles for Public Procurement of ServicesCNC

Other principles of Public Procurement as mentioned in para 1.8 above are also equally applicable to Procurement of Consultancy and Non-consultancy services. To ensure value for money during procurement of services, the following additional principles shall be considered:

#Consultancy Services CNon-Consultancy Services NC
aServices to be procured should be justifiable in accordance with para 1.12 aboveServices to be procured should be justifiable in accordance with para 1.12 above
bTerms of Reference — a document covering well-defined scope of work/ description of services and the time frame for which services are to be availed — should be consistent with the overall objectives of the Procuring EntityIn Non-consultancy Services, the Activities Schedule — a document covering well-defined scope of work/ description of services and the time frame for which services are to be availed — should be consistent with the overall objectives of the Procuring Entity
cEqual opportunity to all qualified Consultants to compete should be ensuredEqual opportunity to all qualified service providers to compete should be ensured
dEngagements should be economical and efficientEngagements should be economical and efficient
eTransparency and integrity in the Consultancy process — that is, proposed, awarded, administered, and executed according to the highest ethical standardsTransparency and integrity in the selection process — that is, proposed, awarded, administered, and executed according to the highest ethical standards
fAdditionally, in procurement of consultancy services, consultants should be of HIGH QUALITY, in line with the justification as per para 1.12 above (Rule 180 of GFR 2017)

C — the two-stage requirement: In Procurement of Consultancy, these considerations can be best addressed through unrestricted competition among qualified shortlisted firms or individuals, in which selection is based on the QUALITY of the proposal and, where appropriate, on the COST of services to be provided. Hence Procurement of Consultancy needs to be done in a two-STAGE PROCESS.

1.14Legal Aspects Governing Public Procurement

A public procurement contract, besides being a commercial transaction, is also a legal transaction. There are several laws that may affect various commercial aspects of public procurement contracts. A public procurement professional is expected to be generally aware of the implications of the following basic laws affecting procurement; however, he or she is not expected to be a legal expert. In different contexts of the scope of work, an additional set of laws may be relevant.

W — the list of applicable laws, as enumerated in the Works Manual:

  1. The Constitution of India
  2. Indian Contract Act, 1872
  3. Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, as amended by the Arbitration and Conciliation (Amendment) Acts, 2015, 2019 and 2021
  4. Competition Act, 2002, as amended by the Competition (Amendment) Acts, 2007 and 2023
  5. The Information Technology Act, 2000 (IT Act — regarding e-procurement and e-auction, popularly called the Cyber Law), as amended by the Information Technology (Amendment) Acts 2008 and 2015, and as modified by the Jan Vishwas (Amendment of Provisions) Act, 2023
  6. Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005
  7. Central Vigilance Commission Act, 2003
  8. Delhi Special Police Establishment Act, 1946 (DSPE — basis of the Central Bureau of Investigation)
  9. Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, as amended by the Prevention of Corruption (Amendment) Act, 2018
  10. Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita, 2023 (BNSS) — replaces the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973; Section dealing with sanction for prosecution — §218
  11. Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, as amended by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Acts 2018, 2019, 2020 and 2021 — governs insolvency and liquidation of business enterprises — and other allied laws applicable to business entities participating in works contracts
  12. Various labour laws applicable at the works' site
  13. Various building and safety acts, codes, standards applicable in the context of the scope of work; and
  14. Various environmental and mining laws, codes, standards applicable in the context of the scope of work.

1.15The Law of AgencyWCNC

In addition to the laws applicable to Public Procurement referred to above, the Law of Agency (Sections 182 to 238 of the Indian Contract Act, 1872) implies that the contractor/ consultant/ service provider would be an AGENT of the Procuring Entity, acting as a 'Principal', to execute the works/ carry out the service on its behalf.

Hence, there exists a PRINCIPAL/ EMPLOYER and AGENT relationship between the Procuring Entity and such contractor/ consultant/ service provider.

As per this law, the principal/ employer (i.e., the Procuring Entity) is vicariously, legally and financially liable for the actions of its Agents.

The Procuring Entities need to be AWARE of such eventualities. Standard/ Model Bidding/ Tender Documents should take care of this aspect.

1.16Right to Information and Proactive Information DisclosuresG

Section 4(1)(b) of the RTI Act lays down the information to be disclosed by public authorities on a SUO-MOTU or PROACTIVE basis, and Section 4(2) and Section 4(3) prescribe the method of its dissemination — to enhance transparency and also to reduce the need for filing individual RTI applications.

The Department of Personnel & Training, Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances & Pensions, Government of India, has issued "Guidelines on suo motu disclosure under Section 4 of the RTI Act" vide their OM No. 1/6/2011-IR dated April 15, 2013. The relevant guidelines relating to information disclosure relating to procurement are reproduced below:

1.17The Basic Principles of Undertaking WorksW

  1. No new works should be sanctioned without:
  2. Careful assessment of the assets or facilities already available, and the time and cost required to complete the new works;
  3. A concept plan/ preliminary drawing having been approved by the Authority competent to accord sanction. While designing projects, to the extent possible, principles of life cycle costing may also be considered.
  4. As budgetary resources are limited and granted on an annual basis, adequate provisions should be ensured for works and services already in progress before new works are undertaken.
  5. NO project or work will be SPLIT UP to bring it within the sanctioning powers of a lower authority.
  6. (Rule 137, GFR 2017) For the purpose of approval and sanctions, a group of works which forms one PROJECT shall be considered as one WORK. The approval or sanction of the higher authority for such a project consisting of a group of works should not be circumvented by resorting to approval of individual works using the powers of approval or sanction of a lower authority.
  7. (MoF OM No. F.1(26)-E-II(A)/66 dated 04.01.1967 & 27.10.1967)If the component parts of a project are MUTUALLY INDEPENDENT of each other and are not dependent on the execution of one or more such component parts, each such part should be treated as a SEPARATE PROJECT.
  8. In case the functioning of a project is DEPENDENT on the execution of one or more other projects, the entire group of such projects should be taken as a SINGLE scheme/ project and provision made accordingly.

If, however, a scheme consists of revenue component, capital expenditure and loan content, etc., the provision for which is required to be exhibited separately under respective Heads of Account, there is no objection to the provision being made in the relevant Heads of Account; but the authorities concerned should ensure that the sanction of the Competent Authority is obtained for the integrated scheme as a whole, depending on the total COST of the scheme. It will not be permissible in such cases to split up a scheme, treating each part as a scheme, in order to avoid the sanction of a higher authority.

  1. (Rule 138, GFR 2017) Any anticipated or actual SAVINGS from a sanctioned estimate for a definite project shall not, without special authorisation, be applied to carry out ADDITIONAL WORK not contemplated in the original project.
  2. (Rule 136(3), GFR 2017) Any development of a project considered necessary while a work is in progress, which is not contingent on the execution of the work first sanctioned, shall have to be covered by a SUPPLEMENTARY ESTIMATE.
  3. The construction period and sanctioned cost stipulated in the sanction of the Project will not be exceeded as far as possible.
  4. (Rule 135(2), GFR 2017) Ministry or Department shall put in place, as far as possible, empowered project teams for all large value projects, and these teams should be tasked only with project execution and not given other operational duties.
  5. The competent financial authority according the administrative approval should be KEPT INFORMED of the physical and financial progress of the work till their completion, through regular periodical reports.
  6. (Rule 135(1) and 139(i), GFR 2017) Subject to the observance of general rules (Rules 130–141, Rule 144 of GFR, 2017), the initiation, authorisation, procurement and execution of works allotted to a particular Ministry or Department shall be regulated by detailed rules and orders contained in the respective departmental regulations and by other special orders applicable to them. The detailed procedure relating to expenditure on such works shall be prescribed by departmental regulations framed in consultation with the accounts officer, generally based on the procedures and the principles underlying the financial and accounting rules prescribed for similar works carried out by the Central Public Works Department (CPWD).
  7. (Rule 136(1) and 139(vi), GFR 2017) NO works shall be commenced or liability incurred in connection with it until:
  8. Feasibility Study Report/ Preliminary Project Report (PPR) has been prepared in case of works of substantial value;
  9. A proper Detailed Project Report (DPR) has been prepared by a competent agency;
  10. Administrative Approval (A/A) has been obtained from the appropriate authority, in each case;
  11. Expenditure Sanction (E/S) to incur expenditure has been obtained from the competent authority;
  12. Technical approval has been obtained of the detailed and coordinated design of all the Architectural, Civil, Electrical, Mechanical, Horticulture and any other services included in the scope of the sanction, and of the Detailed Cost Estimates containing the detailed specifications and quantities of various items prepared on the basis of the schedule of rates maintained by CPWD or other Public Works Organisations;
  13. Funds to cover the work, which will be executed at least during the current year, have been provided by competent authority;
  14. Tenders have been invited and processed in accordance with rules;
  15. Award of work and execution of Contract Agreement;
  16. A work order has been issued;
  17. Statutory and other clearances: Time taken in the grant of statutory and other clearances also contributes to the time and cost overrun in public projects. These clearances are required to achieve specific objectives like concern for the environment, aviation safety, preservation of national heritage, conservation of forest and wildlife, etc. Public Authorities/ Project Executing Authorities should plan for obtaining all necessary clearances quickly and proper efforts be made for the same, which also should be duly recorded. The progress regarding follow-up of obtaining the statutory clearances should be closely monitored.
  18. Land acquisition: The process of land acquisition shall be started by the Procuring Entity well ahead and completed entirely, or at least substantially, before the work is started. Availability of auxiliary services has been ensured — like roads/ access, power, water, solid & liquid waste disposal system, street lighting and other civic services.
  19. It is desirable to have 100% of the required land in possession before award of contract; however, it may not always be possible to have the entire land due to prevailing circumstances.
  20. Also, it may not be prudent to put the entire process of award of contract on hold for want of the remaining portion of land, which — in the assessment of the public authority or project executing authority — could possibly be acquired in a targeted manner after award of the contract, without affecting progress.
  21. Minimum necessary encumbrance-free land should be available before award of contract. The minimum may be determined based on the circumstances of each case or general guidelines issued by the concerned authorities. Such land, non-availability of which will prevent essential components of work from execution, should be insisted upon.
  22. Public Authorities/ Project Executing Authorities should plan for acquiring balance land quickly and proper efforts be made for the same, which also should be duly recorded. The progress regarding land acquisition should be closely monitored.

1.18Administrative Control and Powers to SanctionW

1. Administrative control of works includes (Rule 131, GFR 2017): a) Assumption of full responsibility for construction, maintenance and upkeep; b) Proper utilisation of buildings and allied works; c) Provision of funds for execution of these functions.

2. Powers to Sanction Works (Rule 132, GFR 2017): The powers delegated to various subordinate authorities to accord administrative approval, sanction expenditure and re-appropriate funds for works are regulated by the Delegation of Financial Powers Rules (DFPR) and other orders contained in the respective departmental regulations. The powers of the Department relating to works are detailed in Rule 133(1) and 133(2) of GFR, 2017.

3. Work under the administrative control of the Public Works Departments (Rule 134, GFR 2017): Works not specifically allotted to any Ministry or Department shall be included in the Grants for Civil Works to be administered by the Central Public Works Department. NO such work may be financed partly from funds provided in the departmental budget and partly from the budget for civil works.

1.19Public Procurement Cycle

The procurement process for goods, works and/or services typically involves the following cycle of activities, undertaken in the order stated below. Details and procedures of the various stages of the procurement cycle are described in the subsequent Chapters.

Common four-stage spine (all four Manuals):

Need Assessment → Bid Invitation Process → Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract → Contract Management

1.19.1GoodsG

StageContent
a) Need AssessmentNeed assessment, formulation of Specifications and Procurement Planning (including market consultation, if required)
b) Bid Invitation ProcessPreparing tender documents, publication, receipt and opening of bids
c) Bid Evaluation and Award of ContractEvaluation of bids and award of contract
d) Contract ManagementContract management and closure
e) Disposal of ScrapDisposal of Scrap through various modes of disposal

1.19.2WorksW

Following are the stages in planning, sanctioning and execution of work:

1. Need Assessment: a) Perspective Planning for works; b) Preparation of Preliminary Project Report (PPR) or Rough Cost Estimate; c) Acceptance of necessity and issue of in-Principle Approval; d) Preparation of Detailed Project Report (DPR) or Preliminary Estimate (PE); e) Administrative Approval and Expenditure Sanction (A/A & E/S) or 'Go ahead' Approval; f) Detailed Design, Estimate and Technical Sanction; g) Appropriation/ re-appropriation of funds.

2. Bid Invitation Process: Preparation of Bid documents, Publication, Receipt and Opening of Bids.

3. Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract: a) Preliminary Examination and Evaluation of technical proposals — consideration of quality; b) Evaluation of financial proposals; c) Selection of winning proposal and award of the contract to the selected firm.

4. Contract Management: Execution and Monitoring of works and Quality Assurance.

1.19.3Consultancy ServicesC

The entire process of procurement and implementation of Consultancy services shall include the following steps:

1. Need Assessment: a) Preparation of Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) and obtaining in-principle approvals; b) Preparation of the Terms of Reference (ToR), cost estimate and seeking administrative and budgetary approval; c) Developing a Procurement Plan.

2. Shortlisting of Qualified Consultants — EOI process.

3. RfP Invitation Process: Preparing 'Request for Proposal (RfP) Document', publication, receipt and opening of bids.

4. Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract: a) Preliminary Examination and Evaluation of technical proposals — consideration of quality; b) Evaluation of financial proposals; c) Selection of winning proposal; NEGOTIATIONS and award of the contract to the selected firm.

5. Contract Management: Execution and Monitoring of Consultancy Assignments.

1.19.4Non-Consultancy ServicesNC

The entire process of procurement and implementation of Non-consultancy services shall include the following steps:

1. Need Assessment: a) Preparation of Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) and obtaining in-principle approvals; b) Preparation of the Services and Activities Schedule, cost estimate and seeking administrative and budgetary approval; c) Developing a Procurement Plan.

2. Bid Invitation Process: Preparing tender documents, publication, receipt and opening of bids.

3. Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract: a) Preliminary Examination and Evaluation of technical proposals — consideration of quality; b) Evaluation of financial proposals; c) Selection of winning proposal and award of the contract to the selected firm.

4. Contract Management: Execution and Monitoring of Service Contract.

1.20Nomenclature Conundrum

  1. There is NO standardised nomenclature in Public Procurement in India, and a mix of American, European, and British/ Indian nomenclature has become common.

'Tender' is taken to mean:

  • (i) the 'Tender Document' or 'Tender Process', as well as
  • (ii) the 'Bid' submitted by the 'bidders'.

The Tender Document floated by the Procuring Entity is also called a Bid (or Bidding) Document. Similarly, participants in a 'tender' are alternatively called BIDDERS and TENDERERS. This duality is reflected in "Notice Inviting Tenders" and "Instructions to Bidders", etc.

  1. An attempt is made in these Manuals to standardise:
  2. the term 'Tender' for the 'Tender Document' (document prepared and published by the Procuring Entity — instead of bid/ bidding document) or the 'Tender Process'; and
  3. 'Bid' for the bid submitted by the bidders — and hence 'bidder' is used instead of 'tenderer'.

Similar attempts are made to standardise other nomenclature in these documents without DISTURBING the nomenclature (e.g., 'Pre-qualification Bidding') already embedded in the CPPP or GeM portals.

Appendix to Chapter 1 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

A ready-reckoner of every place in Chapter 1 where the four Manuals genuinely differ, rather than merely rename.

#Point of differencePosition
1Delegation of powers for procurementG/C/NC: "full powers" for goods and services not on GeM; GeM mandatory under Rule 149. W: "powers" under DFPR only — no GeM mandate stated
2Relevant GFR chaptersG, C, NC: Chapters 6 to 9. W: Chapters 5 to 9
3Sale of Goods Act, 1930Cited in G, C, NC; NOT in W
4Mediation Act, 2023Cited in G, W, NC; NOT in C's para 1.1 list
5Indian Stamp Act, 1899Cited in W, C, NC; NOT in G
6Classification of Works (Original/ Minor/ Repair — Rule 130)W only
7Rs 60 lakh in-house repair-work thresholdW only
8Portals namedG: GeM + GePNIC. W:CPPP only. C/NC: GeM + CPPP ("generally conform")
9Composite contract refinements (new product vs AMC/CMC; Notes 1–3)W, C, NC; G has only the shorter version
10Consultancy-vs-NC "primary objective" test (dam safety example)W, c, nc; Not in G
11FA Charter applies only to Ministries/ Departments; CPSEs free to devise own systemG only
12Standards (Canons) of Financial ProprietyG, W only — absent from C and NC
13Rule 21 clause (v) — allowances not a source of profitW only
14National SC/ST Hub (NSSH)G only
15"25% is only a minimum; MSE preference mandatory for all procurements"C, NC only
16Non-tax benefits explained (schemes, delayed payments)C only
17Definitions of Class-I / Class-II / Non-local supplier in Chapter 1W, C, NC; in G these are in the Glossary
18"Rs 1000 Crore per annum → five-year procurement projections on website"G, C
19Start-up benefits limited to the DPIIT-registered industry/ sectorW, C
20"Relaxation can be partial — e.g. 25%" footnoteW, C, NC
21DMI&SP PolicyG: 2019 version. W:Revised 2025 version (G.S.R. 341(E) dated 26.05.2025), framed for EPC tenders. Absent from C and NC
22"When is procurement justified"C, NC only
23"Principles for Public Procurement of Services"C, NC only
24Two-stage process mandated for ConsultancyC only
25Enumerated list of 14 applicable lawsW only (G places them in Appendix 2; C/NC cross-refer)
26Law of AgencyW, c, nc; Not in G
27RTI and Proactive DisclosuresG only
28Basic Principles of Undertaking Works (13 principles)W only
29Administrative Control and Powers to SanctionW only
30Procurement Cycle — fifth stage "Disposal of Scrap"G only
31Procurement Cycle — Shortlisting/ EoI as a separate stage; RfP in place of Bid Invitation; Negotiations namedC only
32Procurement Cycle — Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) as first stepC, NC
33Repair works up to Rs 60 lakh — expenditure sanction on PPR aloneW only

end of Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Need Assessment, Formulation of the Requirement, and Procurement Planning

Merging: Goods Ch. 2 (Need Assessment, Formulation of Specifications and Procurement Planning) · Works Ch. 2 (Need Assessment and Procurement Planning) · Consultancy Ch. 2 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 2

The Central Idea of this Chapter

This is the chapter where the four Manuals genuinely diverge the most. Chapter 1 was largely common text; Chapter 2 is not. The reason is simple:

CategoryInitiating documentDescription-of-requirement instrumentApproval architecture
GoodsIndent / Purchase Requisition (Annexure 5)Technical Specifications (TS)Technical + Administrative + Budgetary sanction; signing of Indent
WorksRequisition → Perspective PlanPPR/ Rough Cost Estimate → DPR/ Preliminary Estimate → Detailed Designs & Detailed EstimatesIn-Principle Approval → A/A and E/S → Technical Sanction → Appropriation of funds
ConsultancyProcurement Proposal (Concept Paper) (Annexure 3)Terms of Reference (ToR) (Annexure 4)In-principle approval → Final Administrative and Budgetary Approval
Non-ConsultancyProcurement Proposal (Concept Paper) (Annexure 3)Services and Activities Schedule (Annexure 4)In-principle approval → Final Administrative and Budgetary Approval

Everything else in this chapter — cost estimation principles, procurement planning, packaging/slicing, cartel mitigation, annual procurement plans, risks and mitigations — is largely common and is stated once below.

Concordance for Chapter 2

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
2.1Need Assessment and the Initiating Document2.12.12.1, 2.22.1, 2.2
2.2Matters decided during Need Assessment2.1-2
2.3Estimation of Cost2.1-2-f)2.2, 2.42.42.3.2
2.4Formulation of the Requirement — Goods: Technical Specifications2.2
2.5Formulation of the Requirement — Works: PPR, DPR, designs, Estimates, Sanctions2.2–2.8
2.6Formulation of the Requirement — Consultancy: Terms of Reference2.3
2.7Formulation of the Requirement — NC: Services and Activities Schedule2.3.1
2.8Obtaining Sanctions/ Approvals2.32.3, 2.5, 2.72.52.3.3
2.9Need Assessment & Formulation — Risks and Mitigations2.42.62.3.4
2.10Procurement Planning2.5.12.92.7.12.4.1
2.11Procurement Planning — Risks and Mitigations2.5.22.4.2

2.1Need Assessment and the Initiating Document

2.1.1Goods — the IndentG

  1. Procurements should be initiated only on the basis of an INDENT (please refer to Annexure 5 — Purchase Requisition (Indent) for Goods (Non-stock)) from the user Department.
  2. The authority in the user Department initiating the indent for procurement shall first determine the need (including anticipated quantum) for the subject matter of the procurement.
  3. Description and Specification of Need assessment is of FUNDAMENTAL IMPORTANCE in ensuring value for money, transparency, competition, and a level playing field in procurement.
  4. The user department shall maintain all documents relating to the determination and technical/ financial/ budgetary approvals needed for procurement.

2.1.2Works — Perspective Planning for WorksW

  1. Each Ministry/ Department shall prepare a perspective plan for undertaking different types of works. There shall also be a provision for ANNUAL REVIEW of the plan for making modifications, if any.
  2. During procurements, in place of considering only the initial acquisition cost, other costs like cost of operation, maintenance, and disposal during the lifetime of the external resource procured should also be considered. This practice refers to the concept of Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) or Life Cycle Cost (LCC) or Whole-of-Life (WOL), as mentioned under para 1.7 above.

2.1.3Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Services — the Procurement ProposalCNC

  1. Procurement Proposal: A critical part of the procurement of Services process is preparing an appropriately staffed and budgeted Procurement Proposal/ Concept Paperwhich serves the function that an INDENT serves in procurement of Goods. The authority in the user Department initiating the procurement proposal shall first determine the need (including anticipated quantum) for the subject matter of the procurement.

Purpose/ Objective Statement of Services, Service Outcome Statement, and justification for the procurement of Services are important parts of the procurement proposal.

  1. The description instrument:
  2. CTerms of Reference containing Scope of Work, Time-frame, Key Staff, Deliverables/ Milestones is of fundamental importance in ensuring value for money, transparency, competition, and a level playing field in procurement of Consultancy Services.
  3. NCServices and Activity Schedule containing Service Outcomes, Description/ Scope of Services, Quantum and Length (Duration/ Frequency/ Shifts) of activities is of fundamental importance in ensuring value for money, transparency, competition, and a level playing field in procurement of NC Services.

The user Department shall maintain all documents relating to the determination and technical/ financial/ budgetary approvals of the need for procurement.

2.1.3.1Preparing the Procurement Proposal/ Concept PaperCNC

As a first step towards procurement of services, a formal written brief Proposal and Justification for the Services should be prepared (suggested format at Annexure 3: Format of Procurement Proposal). It is akin to the Indent for Materials/ Material Requisition in the case of Procurement of Goods.

The User should prepare, in simple and concise language, the requirement, purpose/ objectives and the scope/ outcomes of the assignment/ Services, and justify the procurement based on analysis of in-house available capacity/ capability.

  • CThe eligibility and PRE-QUALIFICATION criteria to be met by the consultants should also be clearly identified at this stage.
  • NCThe eligibility and QUALIFICATION criteria to be met by the service providers should also be clearly identified at this stage.

Justifications for procurement of Services as given in para 1.12 may be kept in view. It is the basic document for initiating procurement of services. It is also the document from which the subsequent detailing of the ToR C / Services and Activities Schedule NC is drawn up.

A procurement proposal should contain:

1. Purpose/ Objective Statement of Services: The user should prepare a "Purpose/ Objective Statement of Services". One of the important contents of this statement is the description of service to describe the subject matter of procurement, which would be used in all subsequent documents. Bringing out the background and context, this should justify how the proposed procurement of services would fit in with the short-term and strategic goals of the Procuring Entity. Making such a statement is important to put the need for services in clear perspective. It may seem elementary or academic, but is a necessary and critical first step in properly designing a procurement proposal.

2. Service Outcome Statement: Once the "Purpose/ Objective of Services" has been clearly defined, the next step is to formulate a 'Service Outcome Statement'. This should list out QUALITATIVELY and QUANTITATIVELY the outcomes expected from the Procurement of Services, as well as the expected Time-frame and a rough estimate of cost of Procurement of services (including related costs to be incurred by the organisation).

At this stage, it is not necessary to go into details of all the activities required to achieve the service outcomes, but it should list at least the BROAD activities, which would help in putting a rough estimate to the cost of the assignment.

A 'Service Outcome Statement' should provide a concrete basis for subsequently defining the type and amount of work that needs to be done by the Consultant/ service provider, and the time-frame within which the output needs to be received by the user. The estimated cost is needed to ascertain the level of administrative/ financial approvals necessary as per the SoPP.

3. Justification for the Procurement of Services: The Concept Paper/ Procurement Proposal should analyse the capabilities/ capacities REQUIRED to carry out the assignment. It should also analyse the AVAILABLE IN-HOUSE capabilities/ capacities and COMPARE these with the ones required for the assignment. Based on this assessment, the Procurement should be justified in the light of para 1.12.

2.1.3.2In-principle Approval for initiating procurement of ServicesCNC

Based on the justification contained in the Procurement Proposal, in-principle administrative approval and BUDGETARY SANCTION for initiating procurement of such services should be accorded by the Competent Authority (CA) as laid down in the SoPP.

Further stages May be proceeded with only after such approvals. (C cites Rule 180 of GFR 2017.)

2.2Matters Decided During Need AssessmentGof general application

During need assessments, the following matters are decided to comply with the 'Procurement Guidelines':

a) Expression/ Description of the Need

The expression/ description of the need is an important determinant of Value for Money (VfM) and wide competition. Therefore, to the extent practicable, it should be:

  • i) Unambiguous, complete, using common terminology prevalent in the relevant trade;
  • ii) In accordance with the guidelines prescribed, if any, in this regard;
  • iii) Except in the case of proprietary purchase from a selected single source, reference to trademark, brand/ trade names, catalogue numbers, or other details that limit any materials or items to specific manufacturer(s) should be AVOIDED as far as possible. Where unavoidable, such item descriptions should always be followed by the words "or substantially equivalent."

b) Method of Satisfying the Need

The method of satisfying the need — owning/ leasing/ hiring/ outsourcing or through Public Private Partnership (PPP), and so on — may be determined:

  • as per policies declared in this regard, or
  • based on a techno-economic evaluation (using life cycle cost if feasible) of various alternative methods of satisfaction of the need, and compatibility and inter-operability with existing infrastructure or systems.

There are now new procurement approaches like:

  • Hardware as a Service (HaaS), also known as Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)it allows customers to outsource their IT infrastructures, such as servers, networking, processing, storage, virtual machines, and other resources. Customers access these resources on the Internet using a pay-as-per-use model.
  • Software as a Service (SaaS)the SaaS provider is responsible for operating, managing, and maintaining the application software hosted on the cloud and the infrastructure on which it runs. The customer simply creates an account, pays a fee and uses the software over an internet connection by way of a web browser, mobile app or thin client.

c) Quantity of the Subject Matter of Procurement, Commensurate with Economy

  • i) Care should be taken to avoid purchasing quantities in excess of the requirement to avoid inventory carrying costs. Where scales of consumption or usage limits of requirements have been laid down by the Competent Authority, the officer signing the indent should also CERTIFY that the prescribed scales or limits are not exceeded. It is also necessary to round off the calculated quantity to the nearest wagon load/ truckload/ package to economise on transportation.
  • ii) An appropriate size of the tender has a great impact on value for money and the level of competition. A balance is achieved by judicious packaging requirements of different users or slicing requirements into smaller tenders (see para 2.10 below on the merits and demerits of packaging and slicing).
  • iii) units of quantity are an important parameter. Some items may be manufactured in metric tons but used in units of numbers or units of length (for example, steel sheets/ structurals). For the sake of transparency, it is important to buy an item in units of manufacture. For example, it is better to buy steel/ structurals in units of WEIGHT, since it has a tolerance in weight per unit of length; this usually works to the disadvantage of the buyer if it is bought in units of length. The buying and issuing units of an item may be different — but should be standardised.

d) Time-schedule and Place of Product/ Work/ Service Delivery

Need assessment and generation of indent for procurement should be done sufficiently in advance of the time when goods are required. Delays in need assessment have an ADVERSE IMPACT on value for money and transparency.

Great care is required to be exercised in filling up REALISTIC DATES for the requirement of material. The procuring entity should be allowed time in accordance with the established lead times.

In urgent cases, the procuring entity may entertain indents providing shorter periods, but such urgencies must be approved by the authority empowered to grant administrative approval for the indent, and must be accompanied by PROPER JUSTIFICATION.

e) Formulation of Specifications

Formulation of Specifications ensures value for money, transparency, a level playing field, and the widest competition. (Detailed at paras 2.4 to 2.7 below, category-wise.)

f) Estimation of Cost

(Detailed at para 2.3 below.)

2.3Estimation of Cost

2.3.1Why the Estimate MattersGof general application

The estimated cost in the indent is a VITAL ELEMENT in:

  • various procurement processes,
  • approvals, and
  • the establishment of reasonable prices at the time of evaluation of the bids.

Therefore, it should be worked out REALISTICALLY and OBJECTIVELY.

Following are some suggested methods of cost estimates. These are neither mandatory nor comprehensive nor in any order of preference. These methods are not mutually exclusive, and TRIANGULATION from different methods would give a more accurate estimate of cost.

A. Where historical cost data IS available

Last purchase price (or estimated rate in past indents) of this or similar or nearly equivalent requirements — after due updation as per D below.

B. Where NO historical cost data is available — Costing Analysis

Costing analysis through internal or external expert costing agencies provides a reliable estimate of cost.

C. Where NO historical cost data is available AND Costing Analysis is NOT feasible

In such situations, a rough assessment of cost can be arrived at — but should be used with CAUTION for evaluation of the reasonableness of bids:

  1. Rough assessment from the price of the assembly/ machine of which the item is a part, or vice versa;
  2. Published catalogues/ Maximum Retail Price (MRP) printed on the item is the main source for establishing the estimated cost of items. It may be noted that MRPs usually include SIGNIFICANT MARGINS for distributors, wholesalers, and retailers;
  3. As a LAST RESORT, a rough assessment of the opportunity cost of not using this item at all;
  4. Market Survey: For commercially available goods, a formal market survey online (GeM portal or other commercial market apps) or a physical survey of the market can provide a reasonable estimate of cost;
  5. Budgetary Quotes: For equipment/ craft that are custom-built to the buyer's specifications, the best way to get a rough assessment of costs is by obtaining budgetary quotes from potential parties.
  6. Ideally, there should be three quotes.
  7. However, there is a need to have a time schedule for receipt of quotes to ensure some timeframe for this activity.
  8. An attempt should be made to obtain as many budgetary quotes as possible from reputed/ potential firms, and a time (if feasible, ten to twenty-one days) should be indicated.
  9. In the event of receipt of less than three budgetary quotes, two EXTENSIONS (if feasible, of five days each) may be considered.
  10. In the event of the non-availability of three quotes within the above extended period, the estimates should be prepared based on the number of budgetary quote(s) received — which May even be one.
  11. Where more than one budgetary quote is received, the estimate should be framed on an AVERAGE of the quotes, which will reduce variations and fluctuations.
  12. CAUTION: Budgetary quotes are not exact estimates — the bidder who EXPECTS to be short-listed may quote HIGH rates, and the bidder who does not expect to be shortlisted may quote ABNORMALLY LOW prices to queer the pitch for others.

D. Updation of Historical Data

Historical cost data can be supplemented with escalations to cater for inflation, price increases of raw materials, labour, energy, statutory changes, price indices, and so on, to make them usable in conditions prevailing currently. In the case of foreign currencies, the rate should be reduced to a common denomination of Indian Rupees.

Price indices can be obtained from the following websites(some may require prior free registration, and some have paid subscriptions):

PurposeSource
Price indices of indigenous itemshttp://www.eaindustry.nic.in/home.asp.in — Ministry of Industry
Metals and other mineralshttp://www.mmronline.com/ · http://www.metalprices.com/index.asp · http://www.asianmetal.com/
Price trends of non-ferrous metalsLondon Metal Exchange — https://www.lme.com/ (often show volatile trends)
General economic/ trade intelligencehttp://www.tradeintelligence.com/ · http://www.cmie.com/ (Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy)
Price trends of different countrieshttp://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2015/01/ — International Monetary Fund
Industry chamberswww.ieema.org — Indian Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers' Association
Commodity PricesMulti Commodity Exchange of India Limited (MCX) — https://www.mcxindia.com/home
Cross-commodity price reporting agency (PRA)Fastmarkets — https://www.fastmarkets.com/

2.3.2Cost Estimation for Consultancy ServicesC

Preparation of a well-thought-through cost estimate is ESSENTIAL if realistic budgetary resources are to be earmarked.

a) Categories: Costs shall be divided into Two broad categories:

  • (a) fee or remuneration (according to the type of contract used); and
  • (b) reimbursable costs.

Depending on the nature of the assignment, cost estimates may be prepared either in local currency or with a combination of local plus foreign currencies. Cost estimate should provide for forecast of inflation during the period of assignment.

b) Estimated Resources: The cost estimate shall be based on the Procuring Entity's assessment of the resources needed to carry out the assignment:

  • i) Staff time;
  • ii) Logistical support (City, National and International Travels/ Trips and durations); and
  • iii) Physical inputs (for example, vehicles, laboratory equipment);
  • iv) Miscellaneous (Support services, contingencies, and Profit element, taxes, and duties).

c) Rates: Costs are normally estimated using UNIT RATES (staff remuneration rates, reimbursable expenses) and quantities (exceptionally, some items may be estimated on a lump-sum basis or percentage basis — Contingencies and support services). Rates of payment should be identified (including applicable taxes, if any) in LOCAL and FOREIGN currency for Staff Time, Logistics Costs and Costs of various physical inputs/ support services.

d) Staff Costs: The estimate of staff cost is based on an estimate of the personnel time (staff-months or staff-hours) required for carrying out the assignment, taking into account the time required by each expert, his or her BILLING RATE, and the related DIRECT COST component.

In general, staff remuneration rates include: Basic salary, social charges, overheads, fees or profit, and ALLOWANCES.

It is useful to prepare a bar chart indicating:

  • the duration of each main activity (WORK SCHEDULE), and
  • time to be spent by different members of the consultancy team (STAFFING SCHEDULE),

distinguishing tasks to be carried out by FOREIGN and LOCAL consultants. Due consideration should be given to the expected breakdown of a consultant's time in the home office and client's countries, and away-from-home-office allowance.

e) Logistic Costs: The number of trips required should be estimated as required to carry out various activities. Travel costs may be included for city travel, National and International travel and stay.

f) Physical Inputs Costs: Assessment of such costs would depend on the technical requirements of equipment.

g) Miscellaneous costs: Support services may be taken as a percentage of staff costs. Contingencies and Profit elements are usually taken as a percentage of the total cost of the Consultancy. To this would be added the taxes and duties likely to be incurred by the consultants.

Cost categories for breaking down an assignment C: Although assignments vary in size, length, and nature, it is possible to make a cost estimate by breaking down the assignment's activities into the following cost categories: a) Professional and support staff; b) Travel, Hotel, and transport; c) Mobilisation and demobilisation; d) Office rent, Furniture/ Equipment, supplies, Utilities, IT equipment and communication; e) Assignment-related surveys, training programmes; f) Translation, report printing; g) Contingencies: miscellaneous, insurance, shipping; and h) Indirect local taxes and duties in connection with carrying out the services.

2.3.3Cost Estimation for Non-Consultancy ServicesNC

Preparation of a well-thought-through cost estimate is essential if realistic budgetary resources are to be earmarked. The cost estimate shall be based on the Procuring Entity's assessment of the resources needed to carry out the services: managerial and staff time and physical inputs (for example, materials, consumables, tools and machines).

Costs shall be divided into three broad categories.Profit element, Taxes and duties should be ADDED to the estimated costs: a) Remunerations for Personnel deployed; b) Reimbursable: Travel, logistics, Consumables, Materials, Tools, Hiring of third-party services, etc.; c) Administrative and Miscellaneous: Mobilisation, demobilisation, Temporary Structures, Administrative expenses, office and IT equipment, contingencies, financing costs, Costs for hiring/ depreciation/ financing of machinery and equipment, etc.

Rates: Costs are normally estimated using unit rates (staff remuneration rates, reimbursable expenses) and quantities (exceptionally some items may be estimated on a lump-sum basis or percentage basis — Contingencies and support services).

Staff Costs: The estimate of staff cost is based on an estimate of the personnel time (staff-months/ weeks/ days) required for delivering the services, considering the time required by each staff, his remuneration rate (or the minimum wage rate, if applicable), and the related direct cost component. In general, staff remuneration rates include basic salary, social charges, overheads, fees or profit and allowances.

2.3.4Cost Estimation for WorksW

(Works cost estimation is embedded in the PPR → DPR → Detailed Estimates sequence — see para 2.5 below, and the reference documents at para 2.5.7.)

2.4Formulation of the Requirement — GOODS: Technical Specifications (TS)G

2.4.1Value for Money and Technical Specifications

The procuring authority should ensure that specifications are developed to ensure VfM, a level playing field and wide competition in procurement [Rule 173(ix) of GFR 2017].

The TS constitute the BENCHMARKS against which the procuring entity will verify the technical responsiveness of bids and, subsequently, evaluate the bids. Therefore, well-defined TS will facilitate:

  • the preparation of responsive bids by bidders, as well as
  • the examination, evaluation, and comparison of the bids by the procuring entity.

It would also help in ensuring the QUALITY of the supplied goods.

The procuring authority should ensure that the specification should:

1. Ensure a level playing field and the widest competition;

2. Be unambiguous, precise, objective, functional, broad-based/ generic, standardised (for items procured repeatedly) and measurable. TS should be broad enough to avoid restrictions on workmanship, materials and equipment commonly used in manufacturing similar kinds of goods;

3. Set out the required technical, qualitative and performance characteristics to meet just the bare essential specific needs of the procuring entity, without including SUPERFLUOUS and NON-ESSENTIAL features, which may result in unwarranted expenditure;

4. Standards:

  • Normally, these standards should be based on national technical regulations or recognised national standards (Bureau of Indian Standards — BIS) or building codes, wherever such standards exist. Preference should be given to procure the goods which carry the BIS mark.
  • In the absence of national standards, TS may be based on the relevant INTERNATIONAL standards.
  • Provided that an indenting authority may, for reasons to be recorded in writing, base the TS on equivalent international standards even in cases where BIS standards exist.
  • For any deviations from Indian standards or for any additional parameters for better performance, specific reasons for deviations/ modifications should be duly recorded with the approval of the Competent Authority.
  • Where the technical parameters are only MARGINALLY different, Indian standards may be specified, and the Departmental specifications could cover only such additional details as packing, marking, inspection, and so on, as are specially required for a particular end use.

5. Units: All dimensions incorporated in the specifications shall be indicated in metric units. If, for some unavoidable reason, dimensions in FPS units are to be mentioned, the corresponding equivalents in the metric system must also be indicated. In the case of Government of India funded projects ABROAD, the technical specifications may be framed based on the requirements and standards of the host beneficiary Government, where such standards exist — provided that a procuring entity may, for reasons to be recorded in writing, adopt any other technical specification;

6. Make use of best practices: Examples of specifications from successful similar procurements in other organisations or sectors may provide a sound basis for drafting the TS;

7. Avoid obsolescence: Commensurate with VfM, avoid procurement of obsolete goods, and require that all goods and materials be NEW, UNUSED and of the most recent or current models, and that they incorporate all recent improvements in design and materials, unless provided for otherwise in the tender documents;

2.4.2Environmental Issues, Green Procurement, Sustainable Development GoalsG

a) Comply with sustainability criteria and legal requirements of environment or pollution control and other mandatory and statutory regulations or internal guidelines, if any, applicable to the goods to be purchased.

b) While specifying packaging requirements in the supply of Goods/ Works/ Services, the procuring entity may emphasise packaging that has minimal impact on the environment without compromising on safety and security.

c) Ecomark: The procuring Entity may include a requirement for the Ecomark Label, to the extent feasible, in their Description/ Specification of the goods being procured.

The Government of India has promulgated the Ecomark Certification Rules, 2023 for:

  • labelling environmentally friendly products that meet the approved environment criteria, and
  • ensuring environmental performance of such products with respect to resource efficiency, circular economy and environmental impacts — in particular the impact on climate change, the impact on nature and biodiversity, generation of waste, emissions to all environmental media, pollution through physical effects, and use and release of hazardous substances

— thereby supporting the principles of 'LiFE (Lifestyle for Environment)'.

Objective: to encourage consumers to adopt such products and the manufacturers to transition to the production of Ecomark-certified products to promote sustainability. It shall be applicable to any product that is produced or supplied for distribution or use in the market, unless otherwise excluded under the Ecomark Certification Rules. It would also prevent misleading information on the environmental aspects of products.

d) Efficiency factors: Specifications should emphasise factors such as efficiency, optimum fuel/ power consumption, use of environmentally friendly materials, reduced noise and emission levels, low maintenance cost, and so on.

i) Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE): The Government of India set up the BEE (https://beeindia.gov.in/en) on 1 March 2002, under the provisions of the Energy Conservation Act, 2001, with the primary objective of reducing the energy intensity of the Indian economy. The Bureau initiated the Standards & Labelling Programme for equipment and appliances in 2006 to provide the consumer with an informed choice about energy saving and, thereby, the cost-saving potential of the relevant marketed product.

ii) Coverage: The scheme is invoked for 34 equipment/ appliances, out of which labelling is mandatory for 11 equipment/ appliances, i.e.:

The other appliances are presently under the VOLUNTARY labelling phase.

iii) Star ratings: The energy efficiency labelling programmes under BEE are intended to reduce the energy consumption of appliances without DIMINISHING the services they provide to consumers. The higher the stars, the more EFFICIENT the appliance. The threshold ratings prescribed by the Ministry of Finance are:

ApplianceThreshold Star Rating
Split Air Conditioners5 Star (under normal conditions where annual usage is expected to be more than 1000 Hrs)
3 Star (where usage of AC is limited, e.g., in conference rooms)
Frost Free Refrigerators4 Star
Ceiling Fans5 Star
Water Heaters5 Star

iv) Building it into the TS: The procuring Entity should try to build either the BEE Star rating, where applicable, and minimum energy efficiency, where such star ratings are not yet available, into the TS (in accordance with Rule 173(xvii) of GFR 2017). Such benchmarking illustrates the use of neutral and dependable benchmarking in the procurement of sustainable, environmentally favourable goods by way of appropriately formulated Technical Specifications.

In a similar fashion, to implement sustainability goals, TS may include an Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) as defined by ISO 14025 as a Type III declaration that "quantifies environmental information on the life cycle of a product to enable comparisons between products fulfilling the same function". Voluntary environmental standards can also be used to specify environmental sustainability criteria.

2.4.3Discourage Procurement Involving Evaluation of Samples/ Demonstration of EquipmentG

According to the existing guidelines on public procurement of goods, purchase in accordance with a sample, or requiring demonstration of equipment, should not be usually undertaken.

a) Calling for a sample along with the tender, or requiring a demonstration of equipment after bid opening, and deciding based on evaluation of the sample/ demonstration of equipment should not be done.

b) Built-in sample clauses: In certain specifications, there may be a built-in sample clause. Usually, such clauses are stipulated to illustrate INDETERMINABLE CHARACTERISTICS such as shade/ tone, make-up, feel, finish, workmanship, and so on. In some specifications there may not be a sample clause, but such indeterminable characteristics are left to be agreed between the seller and buyer. One way to procure/ indigenise certain spares whose drawings/ specifications are not available is to procure in accordance with an available sample of the part. In such cases, the supply must conform to an agreed reference sample only, whereas the remaining characteristics must conform to the drawings/ specifications.

c) The reference-sample procedure: However, NO sample should be called for or evaluated along with the bids. If desired:

  • Three COPIES of the purchaser's REFERENCE SAMPLE with seal/ label may be DISPLAYED for prospective bidders to illustrate the desired indeterminable characteristics, which final supplies from successful bidder(s) will have to meet in addition to the specifications/ drawings.
  • If required, in addition to the purchaser's reference sample, the provision for the submission of a PRE-PRODUCTION SAMPLE matching the purchaser's sample by the successful bidder(s) may be stipulated for indeterminable characteristics before giving clearance for bulk production of the supply.
  • On placement of the contract, the three copies of the purchaser's reference sample are distributed as follows:
  • One copy → to the CONTRACTOR for preparing pre-production sample/ supplies;
  • One copy → to the CONSIGNEE for matching with the pre-production sample/ supplies;
  • One copy → kept secure under lock and key in the SAMPLE ROOM of the procuring entity.
  • The Indent for items that are to be procured in accordance with a sample must be accompanied by three sealed reference samples, as far as possible.

d) Demonstration: If a demonstration of equipment (say, entirely newly developed equipment) is considered necessary, it may be planned only during the PRE-BID stage — but the evaluation of tenders should not be based on this.

2.4.4Essential Technical ParticularsG

The essential Technical particulars to be specified in the tender document shall include the following, to the extent applicable for a particular purchase:

  1. Scope of supply and END USE of the required goods;
  2. All essential technical, qualitative, functional, environmental and performance characteristics and requirements — such as material composition, physical dimensions and tolerances, workmanship, and manufacturing process wherever applicable; test schedule, if any — including guaranteed or acceptable MAXIMUM or MINIMUM values, as appropriate.
  1. Drawings;
  2. Requirement of the BIS mark, where applicable — mentioning all parameters where such a specification provides options;
  3. Requirement of a PRE-PRODUCTION SAMPLE, if any, at the post-contract stage before bulk production;
  4. Specific requirements of PRESERVATION, PACKING and MARKING, if any;
  5. INSPECTION PROCEDURE for goods ordered and criteria of conformity;
  6. Requirements of SPECIAL TESTS or type test certificate or TYPE APPROVAL for compliance of statutory requirements with reference to pollution, emission, noise, if any;
  7. Other additional work and/or related services required to achieve full delivery/ completion, installation, commissioning, training, technical support, after-sales service, and Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) requirements, if any;
  8. WARRANTY requirements;
  9. QUALIFICATION CRITERIA of the bidders, if any;
  10. Any other aspects PECULIAR to the goods in question — such as the shelf life of the equipment, and so on.

2.5Formulation of the Requirement — WORKS: PPR, DPR, Designs, Estimates and SanctionsW

2.5.1Preparation of Preliminary Project Report (PPR) or Rough Cost Estimate

WHO prepares it:

  • If the work is to be executed under its OWN arrangement by the Ministry/ Department — a PPR or Rough Cost Estimate shall be prepared by the WORKS COMMITTEE, based on Land, Site Details, functional and space requirements (or Various Facilities, Special Requirements/ Features and Broad Specifications for specialised Equipment and Plants), Layout Plans etc. — with the technical details/ documents mentioned below being prepared by (or under the guidance of) the TECHNICAL MEMBER(S) of the Works Committee.
  • If the Work is executed through a Public Works Organisation (PWO) or a Public Sector Undertaking (PSU) — on requisition from the Ministry/ Department for procurement of works, the PWO or PSU to whom the work is entrusted for execution shall prepare such PPR or Rough Cost Estimate and submit it to the requiring Department/ Ministry.

WHAT it triggers: Based on the PPR and Rough Cost Estimate, the competent authority in the Administrative Ministry/ Department grants IN-PRINCIPLE APPROVAL, indicating approval of the CONCEPT and SCOPE of the project at the ROUGH COST assessed.

The Preliminary Project Report shall provide the following details:

  1. Background of the work/ project justifying the NEED for the work;
  2. Details of SCOPE of the project;
  3. EXCLUSIONS (if any) — this will cover part of the work which is not included in this particular project estimate;
  4. Availability of LAND — there should be a clear indication about the availability of land required for completion of the whole project. The land shall be made available free of all encumbrances;
  5. Availability of AUXILIARY SERVICES — like roads, power, water, solid & liquid waste disposal system, street lighting and other civic services shall be ensured;
  6. Reference to Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings, if any, and their acceptance — this shall indicate the details of Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings prepared and their approval by the requisitioning authority;
  7. AGENCY of Procurement — through direct procurement, outsourcing to PWO/ PSUs or otherwise;
  8. Rough Cost Estimate: Ministries/ Departments may carefully assess alternative technological options, their area requirements, and obtain Rough Cost on the basis of prevailing plinth area rates (or any other reliable basis) without preparation of drawings, to enable the competent authority to accord in-principle approval;
  9. If relevant, cost benefit analysis of the project, including evaluation of options for cost sharing/ recovery (user charges) for infrastructure/ services. Principles of Life Cycle Cost may also be considered, to the extent feasible;
  10. CASH FLOW — this will show year-wise requirement;
  11. Source & availability of funds — the manner of transferring the fund to the executing agency to be spelt out;
  12. Appendices:
  13. i) Requisition of the Department/ Ministry;
  14. ii) Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings;
  15. iii) Reference to approval of Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings;
  16. Any other relevant documents;
  17. PRESENTATION on the findings of the feasibility study/ PPR: As directed in the Department of Expenditure's General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management (OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021), a presentation may be made by a team (which may include engineers/ consultants/ outside experts, finance officers etc.) before the public authority/ designated competent authority. This is to provide an opportunity to the public authority to have an overall assessment of the situation, appraisal of various options, as well as likely challenges and mitigation measures. In the case of VERY LARGE projects, such presentation may be made to the HEAD of the public authority. The record of discussions during the presentation may become part of the DPR and tender file/ project record.

2.5.2Acceptance of Necessity and Issue of In-Principle Approval

Approval of the competent financial authority for accepting the necessity of works and its SCOPE should be sought on the basis of the PPR or Rough Cost Estimate, and In-Principle Approval of the concerned Ministry/ Department shall be made available for preparation of the Detailed Project Report or Preliminary Estimates.

2.5.3Preparation of Detailed Project Report (DPR)/ Preliminary Estimates (PE)

1. On receipt of In-Principle Approval of the project, the procuring entity shall finalise the Detailed Project Report with due care and accuracy, using the latest technological tools, collecting all relevant ground information, including consultation with the field units wherever applicable, giving reference to the documents mentioned below. The DPR should provide a level playing field to the bidders and should ensure, as far as feasible, the widest possible competition.

The DPR shall contain:

  1. Reference to Concept plan/ preliminary drawings and their acceptance;
  2. Details of SCOPE of the project, indicating clearly the list of Engineering Services (Mechanical/ Electrical/ Plumbing) as well as Operation and Maintenance — included or not included in the DPR/PE;
  3. Preliminary estimated cost — this will also include the expected ESCALATION for the period of completion of the project, and also the departmental or lump sum charges to be paid to the executing agency (PWO or PSUs). Cash flow projection should show year-wise requirement. While designing the projects, if and to the extent possible, principles of Life Cycle Cost may also be considered;
  4. Time of completion — this will consist of two PARTS: one for PRE-CONSTRUCTION activity till award of the work, and the other for the EXECUTION;
  5. Details of LAND required along with land plan Schedule to implement timely land acquisition procedures;
  6. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of the project and approval thereof, wherever applicable;
  7. Social Impact Assessment and Resettlement and Rehabilitation: Social Impact Assessment needs to be done, based on baseline socio-economic survey and census survey data, to identify the Project Affected People (PAPs). A Resettlement and Rehabilitation Plan should be prepared for the PAPs in accordance with the LARR Act 2013 or the National Policy on Resettlement and Rehabilitation (NPRR), and State Governments' framework of resettlement policies and other social safeguard policies designed to protect the rights of the affected persons and communities as applicable;
  8. List of Approvals of STATUTORY BODIES required;
  9. Annual plan allocation and cash flow;
  10. Systems to be adopted for PROJECT MONITORING;
  11. Works accounting system;
  12. QUALITY ASSURANCE system/ mechanism;
  13. Bidding systems — Single, two parts, pre-qualification, Post-qualification;
  14. WHO prepares: In case the work is being executed by the Ministry/ Department themselves, DPR and PE will be prepared by the Ministry/ Department itself. In case the Work is assigned to a PWO or PSU, that agency shall prepare the DPR and PE;
  15. EXEMPTION: For repair works costing up to rs. 60 (SIXTY) LAKH, preparation of DPR and pe May be dispensed with, since repair work does not need detailed designing. Sanction may be accorded by the competent authority based on the PPR itself.

2. The consultant-quality problem: A major reason for problems in works contracts — in particular relating to construction of roads, highways, ports, runways, dams etc. on item-rate or percentage rate basis — is the OUTSOURCING of preparation of Detailed Project Reports to consultants without sufficient relevant experience, or without giving them sufficient TIME to do so.

  • It is therefore essential to STIPULATE & ENSURE successful project design/ supervision experience while selecting consultants, especially for large works contracts.
  • DPR in such contracts is required to be based on proper ground investigation at each specified stretch (normally 50 METRES), called a "REACH", and the Consultant be directed to exercise such due diligence.
  • Wherever consultants are appointed for preparation of DPR, field units of the public authorities should also be associated with the process. The inputs from these field units can be useful in proposing best solutions for design and execution of the work, as they are the custodian of legacy data, which may not be available with the consultants, as they may not be operating regularly in that geographical region.

3. Involvement of the Ministry/ Department: The involvement of the Ministry/ Department in providing proper inputs, including USER REQUIREMENTS, during the preparation of the DPR and before accepting the draft DPR, is PARAMOUNT in ensuring successful implementation.

  • Proper FIELD SURVEYS and INVESTIGATIONS of ground conditions are CRITICAL in preparation of a reliable DPR.
  • Providing scientifically valid data to bidders will depend on the quality of the investigations done by the DPR consultant.
  • As a corollary, the Ministry/ Department must INSIST on a qualified team of engineers with experience for carrying out DPR studies.
  • It is also essential that the Ministry/ Department insists that the Consultant offers them TECHNOLOGY OPTIONS at the EARLY stage of preparation of the DPR, so that a cost-efficient choice may be made using principles of life cycle costing.

4. Consequences of a defective DPR: In case the deviations between the actual ground situation and the situation recorded in such DPR result in significant COST and TIME OVER-RUNS, the Engineer, while doing valuation of variations, must bring to the Procuring Entity's notice the reach-wise differences, and the Ministry/ Department May consider stringent action against the consultant who has prepared such DPRs — including debarment from future consultancy contracts, after following due procedure. Such clauses May be included in the contracts for preparation of DPR.

5. Presentation on the DPR: A presentation may be made about the DPR before the public authority, for projects above a THRESHOLD VALUE as decided by Project Executing Authorities. The presentation may include:

In the case of very large projects, such presentation may be made to the HEAD of the public authority. The record of discussions during the presentation shall become part of the tender file/ project record.

2.5.4Administrative Approval and Expenditure Sanction (A/A and E/S)

1. A/A and E/S will be accorded to the execution of work by the competent financial authority in the Ministry/ Department after due examination of the Detailed Project Report and Preliminary Estimates.

POST-SANCTION CHANGES in scope and specification lead to delay, loss of quality and contractual penalties. Therefore, such A/A and E/S shall be accorded after carefully assessing their requirements.

The estimates framed by a PWO or other engineering organisation May be modified for such sanction only with their concurrence.

2. The sanction order should contain:

  • SCOPE of work,
  • estimated cost, and
  • TIME SCHEDULE for completion of work, and
  • funding sources along with the break-up of the share of each funding agency.

3. A Department of Government of India may sanction expenditure on any scheme or project as per the powers delegated from time to time by the Finance Ministry (DoE's O.M. No. 24(35)/PF-II/2012 dated 05.08.2016), subject TO its outlay having been APPROVED by the Competent Authority in accordance with the appraisal and approval process prescribed by the Finance Ministry from time to time. (Rule 16, DFPR 2024)

2.5.5Detailed Designs, Detailed Estimates and Technical Sanction

1. Except where the work is to be undertaken in the EPC (Turnkey) mode, on receipt of sanction of the project (based on DPR or PE) and assurance of funds, the procuring entity, in consultation with the Works Committee, shall prepare and accord TECHNICAL SANCTION to:

  • the detailed and coordinated DESIGN of all the Architectural, Civil, Electrical, Mechanical, Horticulture and any other services included in the scope of the sanction, and
  • the detailed cost estimates containing the detailed SPECIFICATIONS and QUANTITIES of various items, prepared on the basis of the Schedule of Rates maintained by CPWD or other Public Works Organisations

— so as to ensure that proposals are STRUCTURALLY SOUND and that the estimates are accurately calculated based on adequate data.

In case the work is to be executed through a PWO or PSU, preparation of detailed design/ estimates and technical sanction shall be done/ accorded by that organisation.

2. Architectural and structural drawings: Architectural and structural drawings ("fit for construction") are among the CORE REQUIREMENTS for projects.

  • Finalisation of these drawings at the EARLIEST — preferably at the time of preparation of the cost estimate itself — can help to determine quantities of various items of the work.
  • Adverse consequences of not preparing these drawings before invitation of tenders may manifest in the form of delay in execution of the work and deviations in quantities of the items of work.
  • Hence, APPROVED architectural and structural drawings should be available before invitation of tenders.
  • "Fit for construction" (sometimes called "Good for construction") drawings means the architectural and structural drawings approved by the project executing authority as well as by the authority governing the extant Rules/ laws, including byelaws, such as local authorities.

3. Enlarging the Schedule of Rates: Endeavour may be made to enlarge the base of the 'Schedule of Rates' published by various organisations, to bring a maximum number of items under its ambit. For NON-SCHEDULED ITEMS, rates may be finalised by a COMMITTEE constituted by the organisation concerned/ consultants, as the case may be.

2.5.6Appropriation of Funds

Before taking up the execution of work, it shall be ensured that proper funds are available to meet the expenditure on the work.

It should also be emphasised that the DPR CONSULTANT is able to provide realistic year-wise requirement of funds. This information is necessary so that concerned Ministries/ organisations may be intimated regarding the same, which will enable them to include such funds projection in their BUDGET.

2.5.7Reference Documents Used in Preparation of Estimates

For preparation of estimates and during execution of work, the following reference documents are used by PWOs. These may be SEPARATE for different regions, and for various types of works — Building, Electrical and Mechanical.(Annexure 12 of the Works Manual lists further resources regarding Procurement of Works.)

#DocumentPurposeExample
1Plinth Area RatesProvide a quick but fairly accurate method of estimation of cost of buildingsCPWD DPAR — Delhi Plinth Area Rates
2Schedule of RatesFor each kind of work commonly executed, to facilitate the preparation of estimates, and also to serve as a guide in settling rates in connection with contract agreements — maintained up to dateCPWD DSR — Delhi Schedule of Rates
3Analysis of RatesBy taking market rates of labour, materials, cartage etc. and their quantities for each kind of work commonly executedCPWD Analysis of Rates
4SpecificationsDescribing inputs, processes, tests and mode of measurement for each kind of work commonly executedCPWD Specifications

2.6Formulation of the Requirement — CONSULTANCY: Terms of Reference (ToR)C

2.6.1What the ToR Is and Why It Matters

1. The ToR is akin to description, Quantity and Technical Specification in Procurement of Goods. This is the first STEP in the selection of the consultants once a need has been identified.

It explains:

  • the purpose/ objectives of the assignment,
  • scope of work,
  • activities,
  • tasks to be performed,
  • respective responsibilities of the Procuring Entity AND consultant,
  • expected results, and
  • deliverables of the assignment.

It is important for an understanding of the assignment and its correct execution to ensure that the objectives of the assignment are achieved.

  • It reduces the risk for the PROCURING ENTITY of unnecessary extra work, delays, and additional expenses.
  • In addition, it helps reduce for the bidders the risk of ambiguities during the preparation of bidders' proposals, contract negotiation, and execution of Consultancy.

2. The balance to strike: Hence the ToR should be COMPREHENSIVE and UNAMBIGUOUS. HOWEVER, it should not be too detailed and inflexible, so that competing consultants may be in a position to propose their own methodology and staffing. Bidders shall be encouraged to comment on the ToR in their proposals.

2.6.2Contents of the ToR

The ToR shall include:

  1. Procuring Entity's organisation background and Project background;
  2. Purpose and Service Outcomes Statement of the assignment;
  3. Detailed scope of work Statement, including schedule for completing the assignment;
  4. Expected requirement of KEY PROFESSIONALS and kind of EXPERTISE;
  5. Capacity-building programme and transfer of knowledge, if any;
  6. Deliverables — List of reports (or documents, data, maps, surveys, designs, drawings), schedule of deliveries, and period of performance;
  7. Background material — Data, reports, records of previous surveys, and so on — available and to be provided to the consultant;
  8. FACILITIES such as local conveyance, office space, office machines, secretarial assistance, utilities, local services, etc., which would be provided to the consultant by the Procuring Entity;
  9. Institutional and organisational arrangement; and
  10. Procedure for REVIEW of the work of the consultant after award of contract.

(A template for developing a ToR is given at Annexure 4 of the Consultancy Manual. Rule 185 of GFR 2017.)

2.6.3Detailed Guidance on Key ToR Elements

a) Detailed Scope of Work

As part of the ToR, at its simplest, the 'Detailed Scope of Work' will contain:

  • the TYPE and VOLUME of activity to be undertaken, and
  • the TIME-FRAME of activity involved

to achieve the Purpose and Service Outcomes as envisaged in the 'Brief Proposal and Justification of the Services'.

Method: Starting from END-OUTCOMES BACKWARDS, the process to achieve the outcomes is BROKEN DOWN into a discrete number of interrelated tasks, which the consultant will have to undertake.

After the tasks are identified, a LOGICAL SEQUENCING of the tasks must be determined. Usually a simple BAR CHART (or GANTT CHART) is the best way to illustrate required outputs over time and their relationship to each other. The 'Detailed Scope of Work' contains such a sequence of tasks over a timeline, and also tangible outputs and activities such as reports, workshops, or seminars.

b) Expected Requirement of Key Professionals and Kind of Expertise

Except in very complex consultancies, it is DESIRABLE not to distinguish the tasks of individual experts, but instead to prepare a longer and more detailed description of what the consultancy team, as a whole, will provide — without splitting up tasks.

The ToR would list a range of tasks without regard to who will have the responsibility to undertake them. In most cases, where the number of experts is small, the work to be done is not clearly defined, and a degree of flexibility is required — this is ACCEPTABLE.

In consultancy services, key professionals are usually named, and their credentials carry weightage in technical evaluation.

c) Deliverables and Reports Requirements

The assignment's deliverables and reporting should be clearly specified. In particular, for inception and progress reports, there should be a BALANCE between keeping the Procuring Entity well informed and not forcing consultants to spend an excessive amount of time preparing minor reports.

The ToR should indicate: the FORMAT, FREQUENCY, and CONTENT of reports, as well as the number of copies, the LANGUAGE, and the names of the prospective recipients of the reports.

Depending on the assignment, the following reports are usually required:

ReportTimingPurpose and Content
i) Inception ReportAbout six WEEKS after the commencement dateAny major inconsistency in the toR, STAFFING PROBLEMS, or deficiency in the Procuring Entity's assistance that have become apparent during this period should be included. The inception report is designed to give the Procuring Entity confidence that the assignment can be carried out as planned and as agreed upon in the contract, and should bring to its attention major problems that might affect the direction and progress of the work.
ii) Progress ReportsMonthly or bimonthly, depending on the assignment.
• Feasibility studies and design assignments → two-month intervals is satisfactory
• Technical assistance and implementation supervision (e.g. construction) → best submitted MONTHLY
Keep the Procuring Entity regularly informed about the progress of the assignment. They may also provide WARNINGS of anticipated problems or serve as a reminder for payment of invoices due. Progress reports may include a BAR CHART showing details of progress and any changes in the assignment schedule. Photographs with time-stamping are a quick and easy way of conveying the status of a project, and their use in progress reports should be encouraged. For technical assistance services, progress reports also serve as a means of setting out the WORK PROGRAM for the following months. Each team member usually contributes to the preparation of the monthly report.
iii) Interim ReportsIf the assignment is PHASEDRequired to inform the Procuring Entity of preliminary results, alternative solutions, and major decisions that need to be made. Since the recommendations of an interim report may affect later PHASES of the assignment and even influence the results of the project, the Procuring Entity should DISCUSS the draft interim reports with consultants in the field. The Procuring Entity should not take more than 15 (FIFTEEN) DAYS to review and approve draft interim reports.
iv) Final ReportDue at the COMPLETION of the assignmentThe Procuring Entity and consultants should DISCUSS the report while it is still in draft form. The consultants alone are responsible for their findings; although changes may be SUGGESTED in the course of the discussions, consultants should not be forced to make such changes. If the consultants do not accept comments or recommendations from the Procuring Entity, these should be noted in the report. The consultants should include in the report the reasons for not accepting such changes.

d) Background Material and Records of Previous Surveys

This would vary from project to project, but TRANSPARENCY DEMANDS that such information should be transparently and equitably shared with all prospective bidders.

e) Facilities to be Provided by the Procuring Entity

Facilities such as local conveyance, office space, secretarial assistance etc. which can be provided to the consultant.

f) Procedure for Review of the Consultancy after Award of Contract

In consultancy services, the contract Monitoring Committee (CMC), and the procedure for review and approval of the work of the consultant after the award of contract, should also be declared and adhered to.

2.7Formulation of the Requirement — NON-CONSULTANCY: Services and Activities ScheduleNC

2.7.1What the Services and Activities Schedule Is

1. The Services and Activities Schedule is akin to description, Quantity and Technical Specification in Procurement of Goods. This is the first STEP in the selection of the Service Provider once a need has been identified.

It explains:

  • the background and context,
  • purpose/ objectives of the services,
  • scope, quantum, duration/ frequency of activities/ tasks to be performed,
  • respective responsibilities of the Procuring Entity and service provider,
  • expected outcomes, and
  • deliverables of the Service.

It is important for an understanding of the service requirement and its correct execution to ensure that the outcomes of the service are achieved. It reduces the risk for the Procuring Entity of unnecessary extra work, delays, and additional expenses. In addition, it helps reduce for the bidders the risk of ambiguities during the preparation of bidders' proposals and contract execution. Hence, the Services and Activities Schedule should be COMPREHENSIVE and UNAMBIGUOUS.

The OBJECTIVES of the Services and Activities Schedule are:

  • a) To provide sufficient information on the quantum, scope, duration/ frequency and TIMELINES of Services to be performed, to enable bids to be prepared efficiently and accurately; and
  • b) When a Contract has been entered into, to provide a PRICED Services and Activities Schedule for use in the PERIODIC VALUATION of Services executed.

2.7.2Contents of the Services and Activities Schedule

Besides detailing the activities, quantum and time frame, the Services and Activities Schedule should contain the following sections also:

a) Background

  • i) Procuring Entity's organisation and Project background;
  • ii) Purpose and Service Outcomes Statement;
  • iii) Short Description and Scope of Services (including any incidental works/ goods) that would help the bidders understand the service requirement;
  • iv) Contract period (and provision of extension, if any), duration/ frequency/ timeline of outcomes/ deliverables;
  • v) Type of Contract/ BOQ — Time-based, Unit-Rate, Indefinite delivery, Lumpsum or Percentage-Based;
  • vi) Expected requirement of RESOURCES: Man-power, Materials, Equipment;
  • vii) FACILITIES such as office space, office machines, utilities, local services, etc., which would be provided to the Service Provider by the Procuring Entity;
  • viii) INSURANCES required, if any;
  • ix) Statutory and Contractual OBLIGATIONS to be complied with by the Service Providers;
  • x) Institutional and organisational arrangement for Services — Counterpart Contract Management Team, Chain of Command, Interim/ ultimate beneficiaries/ stakeholders of Services; and
  • xi) Procedure for REVIEW of the Service delivery after award of contract, including service Level Agreement, if any.

b) Description of Services

A brief description of the service required is important information that would help the bidders understand the service requirement. It should cover background about the Procuring Entity's organisation and about the project/ service. The Purpose and Service Outcome statement should be INCLUDED in the description of services (as finalised for initiating the procurement) to help the service providers understand the requirement.

c) Services and Activities Schedule

In order to attain the objectives, Services should be itemised in sufficient detail to DISTINGUISH:

  • between the different CLASSES of Services, or
  • between Services of the same NATURE carried out in different LOCATIONS or in other circumstances which may give rise to different considerations of cost.

There may be more than one schedule of Services, based on grouping similar services in one Schedule. Each Service should be described and broken down into DISCRETE ACTIVITIES required to deliver the service.

The description/ Scope of Service and Activities should indicate WHAT IS — and, more important, what is not — included in the scope, and the conditions under which services are to be performed.

Consistent with these requirements, the layout and content of the Services and Activities Schedule should be as simple and brief as possible. All information relevant for the bidder to quote a price may be included — e.g., the location, frequency/ shifts/ length and quantum, and time-frame/ duration of completion of activities to be performed.

d) Performance Standards and Quality Assurance

Performance standards/ Service Levels; functional/ materials/ technical specifications (indicating QUANTITATIVE and QUALITATIVE parameters/ limits/ thresholds for performance) should be specified OVERALL for the Service AND for each activity, materials, tools and machines to be used in the activity.

It should also include:

  • i) Any reporting requirement, periodic meetings or other submissions;
  • ii) Any service Level Agreement, if required — say, for the outsourcing of services;
  • iii) key performance indicators indicating how MEASUREMENT, REPORTING, and TRACKING of performance parameters would be done for Quality Assurance and Monitoring of Service (indicate procedure for quality assurance and monitoring of services, including institutional or third-PARTY arrangements for this purpose);
  • iv) Procedure for RESOLUTION and ESCALATION procedures in case of DEFICIENCY in performance/ quality/ service levels;
  • v) METHOD STATEMENT (Sequencing and inter-dependencies of activities), methodology, Service Level Agreement, arrangements to ensure environmental, social, gender, health, and SAFETY requirements if relevant. The Method Statement must be supplemented by information in sub-schedules for work plan; and
  • vi) Schedule for Forms of BOQ/ Contract based on INPUT-ADMEASUREMENT — Key Inputs deployments (Personnel Deployment, Critical Equipment Deployment and Critical Materials Deployment) May not be essential — but list these if required to achieve the performance standards and quality. If the service is not dependent on any of the key inputs, that May be omitted.

e) Labour/ Personnel Schedule

If labour/ personnel are used in the activity, these may be QUANTIFIED, specifying PLACE, SHIFTS and frequency of utilisation in the Services and Activities Schedule.

In case any KEY PROFESSIONALS or PROJECT MANAGER is required, their qualification and experience required may also be mentioned.

f) Critical Material Schedule

In case any Materials/ Consumables/ tools of trade are to be consumed/ deployed, a SEPARATE Materials Schedule should be included, indicating the specification and quantity of such materials/ consumables/ tools to be consumed/ deployed per unit activity/ day/ location/ per manpower deployed.

The price of all these materials/ tools etc. is to be shown as a separate lump-sum cost in the financial bid by the bidder.

g) Critical Equipment Schedule

Any ESSENTIAL equipment or machinery — Trucks, Cranes, Washing Machines, Vessels/ crafts, plant and machinery, etc. — that the service provider must HAVE and should DEPLOY as a QUALIFYING REQUIREMENT must be mentioned, along with specifications, capacity, age of equipment etc.

It should be ensured that OPERATORS for such equipment must be mentioned in the Labour/ Personnel Schedule.

In case of INPUT ADMEASUREMENT, indicate only Critical Equipment (not others) required to carry out the Services to required standards and quality. CATEGORISE the equipment — IT Equipment/ Motor Vehicles, Cranes, Washing Machines, vessels/ crafts, plant & machinery etc. Give estimated number LOCATION-WISE, CATEGORY-WISE.

h) Statutory and Contractual Obligations to be Complied with by the Contractor

The service provider mostly works within the premises of the Procuring Entity, along with the staff of the Procuring Entity.

Many services are subject to various STATUTORY PROVISIONS relating to:

The bidder must have:

  • a Service Tax Number,
  • ESI registration,
  • EPF Registration Certificate,
  • Registration Declaration of ownership under the Indian Registration Act, 1908,
  • a Labour Licence, and
  • PAN (Income Tax).

Moreover, the Procuring Entity itself may have its OWN regulations about safety, security, confidentiality, etc. All such statutory and contractual obligations must be listed, so that price implications and compliance are taken care of by the bidder.

i) Facilities and Utilities to be Provided by the Procuring Entity at the Site

It should be mentioned if any facility/ utility — IT/ Communication Services, Emergency Medical, Room, Furniture, Electricity connection, Water connection, etc. — would be made available to the successful bidder to carry out the service.

In case it is proposed to CHARGE for the Electricity/ Water supplied to the service provider, the same may be mentioned, including the rate of charges.

SPECIALLY MENTION facilities and utilities which WILL not be provided, or the facilities which would be provided on a CHARGEABLE basis.

It should be clearly MENTIONED that the service provider will not be allowed to use any of the Procuring Entity's facility/ area which are not LISTED in this section.

j) Institutional Arrangements and Procedure for Review of Work of Service Provider after the Award of Contract

Institutional arrangements like the placement in a Department, name of Project Manager, and chain of command for reporting may be specified. The process of Review of Service Outcomes and deployment of personnel and resources should be clearly brought out.

(A template for the Services and Activities Schedule is given in Annexure 4 of the Non-Consultancy Manual.)

2.8Obtaining Technical, Administrative and Budgetary Sanctions/ Approvals

2.8.1Goods — Sanctions and Signing of IndentsG

Procuring Entities may lay down a Schedule of powers for administrative and budgetary approval of indents generated for the procurement of goods (please refer to Annexure 4 for the suggested Structure of SoPP).

Before granting such approvals, it should be CERTIFIED that:

  • Funds in the budget are available, and
  • liability for this indent is noted against the total available budget.

In case the delivery schedule is URGENT (or shorter than the usual lead time), an URGENCY CERTIFICATE should be recorded to JUSTIFY the urgency.

The indenting authority may submit an indent in the form of a PURCHASE REQUISITION (Annexure 5) to the procuring entity, giving it ADEQUATE TIME for procurement.

Monitoring registers:

RegisterMaintained byFormat
Progress of Indents submittedIndentorsIndentors should monitor the progress of the Indents they submitAnnexure 6 — Purchase Requisition Register for Indentors
Progress of Indents receivedProcuring authorityon receipt from the indenting authority, the progress of such Indents should be monitoredAnnexure 7 — Purchase Requisition Register for Procuring Entity

2.8.2Works — the Sanctioning SequenceW

(See paras 2.5.2, 2.5.4, 2.5.5 and 2.5.6 above — In-Principle Approval → A/A and E/S → Technical Sanction → Appropriation of Funds.)

2.8.3Consultancy and Non-Consultancy — Final Administrative and Budgetary ApprovalsCNC

1. Compatibility with budget and iteration:

  • C The scope of the work described in the ToR shall be compatible with the available budget.
  • NC The Services and Activities Schedule shall be compatible with the available budget.

The most important step is to determine whether all TASKS required to achieve the desired output have been INCLUDED.

The NEXT STEP is to determine whether an ADEQUATE BUDGET has been ALLOCATED to implement the ToR/ services as designed/ proposed.

The Competent Authority's approval may be taken for the ToR/ the Procurement before proceeding ahead.

After administrative approval, provision May be made in the budget; or, if that is not feasible, additional confirmation at the time of seeking Administrative approval may be taken from the CA for inclusion in the revised estimate stage of budget.

Procurement May be initiated only after such budgetary provisions/ confirmations.

2. Schedule of powers: Procuring Entities may lay down a Schedule of powers for administrative and budgetary approval of procurement proposals for services. Before granting such approvals, it should be CERTIFIED that funds in the budget are available and liability for this procurement proposal is noted against the total available budget.

2.9Need Assessment and Formulation of the Requirement — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1The need is either ARTIFICIALLY CREATED or EXAGGERATED, with the intention to channel benefits to an individual or an organisation. For example, demand is created for a good that is not needed, simply to benefit the company's owner.Keep records and involve stakeholders: Records of decision-making and data used should be kept. Involve PROCUREMENT and FINANCE functions at this stage also. END-USER and STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS should be part of the process.
2DELAYS in the Assessment of Need and generation of the Indent/ Purchase Proposal for Procurement may lead to SHORTCUT procurement procedures that DILUTE TRANSPARENCY and PREVENT the achievement of value for money. It may also lead to delays in the delivery of goods/ services.Need assessment should be done sufficiently in advance of the time when goods/ services are required. In the case of URGENT requirements, the URGENCY CERTIFICATE should be approved by an authority empowered to grant administrative approval for the indent, RECORDING JUSTIFICATION — why the need could not be formulated earlier.
3The estimate of the costs may be INADEQUATE. This may lead to an inadequate response from the bidders and may delay the finalisation of procurement. It may also adversely affect the QUALITY of supplies.Estimates of procurement should be prepared with DUE DILIGENCE, keeping inflation, technology changes, profit margins, etc., in view.
4GNeed Description/ Specifications involving SUBJECTIVITY: Procurements where samples are asked to be submitted along with the offer, and the evaluation is based on the SUBJECTIVE EVALUATION of samples — which may lead to allegations of corruption.If required, a STOCK SAMPLE for INDETERMINABLE PARAMETERS — such as shade/ tone, size, make-up, feel, finish, and workmanship — may be DISPLAYED during procurement, to which the offers must conform. If necessary, provide for submission of a PRE-PRODUCTION SAMPLE by the successful bidder(s) before giving clearance for bulk production of the supply. (See para 2.4.3.)
5Need Description/ Specifications/ Terms of Reference/ Activity Schedule are DISPROPORTIONATE to the need identified, or made to tilt in favour of one or a group of vendor(s) or contractor(s) to artificially restrict competition.Use a formal market discovery tool: A pre-bid conference and/or well-publicised EoI may be used to discover the market. Otherwise, encourage and invite comments on the technical and commercial conditions in the tender document, or hold a pre-bid conference.
6ASYMMETRIC DISSEMINATION of vital need information: Dialogue for determining solutions available in the market is held only with SELECTED prospective bidders, giving them an UNDUE ADVANTAGE in preparing for the bidding. Selected prospective bidders get access to INSIDE INFORMATION that has not been disclosed, or DISCLOSED LATE, to others.(Same mitigation as Risk 5 above — formal market discovery tool.)

2.10Procurement Planning

2.10.1The Requirement is Usually Part of a Larger ProjectWCNC

The Works/ Consultancy Services/ NC Services may be part of a LARGER PROJECT in which there may be other components of Work, Goods, or Consultancy/ NC services.

Once a project or a programme is identified, the Procuring Entity needs to develop a synchronised procurement plan for all the various components of the project/ programme. This will also require:

  • planning of the SEQUENCE and CONTENTS of the different components,
  • adoption of the most appropriate method of selection and type of contract, and
  • ensuring that selection of the contractor/ consultant/ service provider is initiated and completed in a timely manner to meet the overall requirements of project implementation.

Procurement planning is a crucial stage of decision-making for a better outcome and for VfM considerations.

2.10.2Critical Review of the IndentG

Within 10 (ten) working days of receipt of the indent from the user Department, the procuring authorities should CRITICALLY REVIEW the description and TS enclosed with the indent for:

  • completeness/ approvals/ funding,
  • VfM, and
  • possibility of the widest competition

— and seek clarifications from the indenting officer, if needed, before initiating such procurement.

2.10.3Reassessment of Quantity and Packaging/ Bundling/ Slicing of Requirement

i) The general rule (Rule 157 of GFR 2017): The procuring authority shall normally neither package nor divide its procurement, or take any other action to LIMIT COMPETITION among bidders, or to avoid the necessity of obtaining the sanction of a higher authority required with reference to the estimated value of the total demand.

ii) the exception: Provided that — in the interest of efficiency, economy, timely completion or supply, wider competition, or access to MSEs (W says: access to SMALLER CONTRACTORS) — a procuring authority May, for reasons to be recorded in writing, divide its procurement into APPROPRIATE PACKAGES, or club requirements of other users for procurement.

iii) Market-facing considerations: Packaging of the contract and procurement planning should be done while keeping in view:

  • Market conditions and availability,
  • the possibility of eliciting the interest of the qualified firms,
  • EFFECTIVE COMPETITION for the type and size of the contract, and
  • access to MSEs(W: smaller contractors).

iv) Mixed-category requirements:

  • G Some requirements, e.g., IT Systems, may have elements of Goods, Works, and Services. It could be either SLICED into separate Goods, Works and Services elements, or COMBINED into a single package.
  • WCNC For example, for a particular contract, material to be procured may constitute more THAN 50 (fifty) per cent of the total cost of works, or there are services which are a mix of consultancy services with a substantial element of goods, such as procurement of an IT system. Such procurement could be done as a single composite contract comprising all components, or divided into separate procurements/ contracts for each category of procurement.

v) The test to apply: In all such situations, the DOMINANT ASPECT of the requirement, and the value for Money aspects of a composite all-inclusive contract versus dividing the contract into respective categories, should be carefully examined at the time of need assessment/ procurement planning. This is a crucial stage of decision-making in procurement planning for a better outcome and for VfM considerations.

2.10.4Eligibility for Participation in Tender

Determine and declare in documents any limitation on the participation of bidders as per the Government's procurement policy regarding preference for certain sections of industry, if any.

The procuring entity shall not establish any requirement aimed at LIMITING the participation of bidders in the procurement process that discriminates against or amongst bidders, or against any category thereof — except to lay down a reasonable and justifiable eligibility or pre-qualification criteria for the bidders.

2.10.5Type of Contract, System of Tendering and Mode of Procurement

a) Type of Contract [W only]: Decide upon the type of contract suitable to the procurement requirement — Lump sum; Item Rate; Percentage Rate; Piece Work; EPC or PPP.

b) Selection of a system of tendering: single/ two stage; single/ two bids; suitability for e-procurement or reverse auction.

c) Select the mode of procurement: open tenders, limited tenders, single tenders, and so on.

2.10.6Time Frame

Decisions on the TIMEFRAME for completing various stages of procurement — from the date of issuing the tender to the date of issuing the contract — which should be DECLARED in the pre-qualification/ bidder registration or tender documents. (Rule 144(ix), GFR 2017)

The procuring entity should endeavour to adhere to the time limit so decided, and RECORD REASONS for any modification of such limits.

2.10.7Availability of Land and Statutory ClearancesW

  1. It is DESIRABLE to have 100% of the required land in possession before award of contract; however, it may not always be possible to have the entire land due to prevailing circumstances. Also, it may not be prudent to put the entire process of award of contract ON HOLD for want of the remaining portion of land, which in the assessment of the public authority or the project executing authority could possibly be acquired in a targeted manner after award of the contract, without affecting progress.
  2. Minimum necessary encumbrance-free land should be available before award of contract. The minimum may be determined based on the circumstances of each case, or general guidelines issued by the concerned authorities. Only such land, non-availability of which will prevent essential components of work from execution, should be INSISTED UPON.
  3. Time taken in the grant of statutory and other clearances also contributes to the time and cost of public projects. These clearances are required to achieve specific objectives like concern for the environment, aviation safety, preservation of national heritage, conservation of forest and wildlife, etc. Public Authorities/ Project Executing Authorities should PLAN for obtaining all necessary clearances QUICKLY and CLOSELY MONITOR the progress.

2.10.8Architectural and Structural DrawingsW

Architectural and structural drawings ("fit for construction") are among the CORE REQUIREMENTS for projects. Finalisation of these drawings at the EARLIEST — preferably at the time of preparation of the cost estimate itself — can help to determine QUANTITIES of various items of the work.

ADVERSE CONSEQUENCES of not preparing these drawings before invitation of tenders may manifest in the form of delay in execution of the work and deviations in quantities of the items of work.

Hence, APPROVED architectural and structural drawings should be available before invitation of tenders.("Fit for construction", sometimes called "Good for construction", drawings means the architectural and structural drawings approved by the project executing authority as well as by the authority governing the extant rules/ laws, including byelaws, such as local authorities.)

2.10.9Annual Procurement Plans

WCNC — the mandatory 30-day rule:GFR 2017 [Rule 144(x)] mandates that all ministries/ departments shall prepare an annual procurement plan within 30 (thirty) days of budget approval, before the commencement of the year, and the same should also be placed on their website.

[All four] — publication: The procuring entity shall/ may publish information regarding the planned procurement activities for the forthcoming year or years on:

  • G the Government e-Marketplace (GeM), GeM-Central Public Procurement portal, and the website/ e-procurement portal used by the procuring entity;
  • WNCCPPP and website/ e-procurement portal used by the procuring entity;
  • C the central public procurement portal and website/ e-Procurement portal used by the procuring entity

— with a caveat that such publication shall not be construed as an initiation of a procurement process, and shall not cast any obligation on the Procuring Entity to issue the tender document or confer any right on prospective bidders. (Rule 144(x), GFR 2017)

[All four] — the integrated plan: An integrated annual procurement plan should be prepared for goods, works and services for the ensuing financial year, based on:

  • The latest cost estimates, and
  • a realistic time Schedule for procurement activities and contract implementation

— and thus Schedule and stagger the procurements over the year, with a view to:

  • Ensure an even load on the Procuring Entity and the market, and
  • Co-ordinate matching procurements of Goods, Works, and Services for a project.

2.10.10Mitigating Cartel Formation

a) Inadequate competition due to an inadequate number of suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers in the list/ panel of registered vendors — may empower bidders to conspire against the Procuring Entity:

  • i) new firms May be encouraged to register themselves for the subject goods/ category/ services.
  • ii) Review the description of requirement:
  • G A review of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (especially TAILOR-MADE specifications) may be done to examine why a commercially available alternative cannot be used instead, or at least review its features so that more suppliers become eligible. Consider using SUBSTITUTE ITEMS or new developments in the market.
  • W Various items in the BOQ May be reviewed (using packaging/ slicing) so that more contractors become eligible. Insisting on costly machinery to be used May reduce competition and encourage cartel formation.
  • CNC Various services and activities in the Services and Activities Schedule may be reviewed so that more consultants/ service providers become eligible. Insisting on costly machinery to be used may reduce competition and encourage cartel formation.

b) Pre-bid conferences: Processes — e.g., PRE-BID CONFERENCES, where a considerable number of competing bidders come together on a platform — May facilitate such cartel formation. This may be AVOIDED as far as feasible, or be held only VIRTUALLY.

HOWEVER, a pre-bid conference May be advantageous in the case of:

G adds:Pre-bid conferences must be done wherever necessary.

c) Varying quantity and conditions: Tendering similar quantities/ works/ services with similar conditions, year on year, provides a stable conspiring environment for the bidders to come to an agreement for quoting prices and quantities. Therefore, the following action can be considered to vary quantity and conditions to make it difficult for cartels:

  • i) change the mode of procurement — OTE instead of LTE, or GTE instead of OTE; or bypass the pre-qualification stage and vice versa.
  • ii) change the quantity/ packaging:
  • G Change the quantity to be procured by PACKAGING/ SLICING the tendered quantity, or by clubbing more than one similar item in a tender (or vice versa).
  • W Change the packaging/ slicing by clubbing/ slicing WORKS in a tender.
  • CNC Change the packaging/ slicing by clubbing/ slicing SERVICES/ ACTIVITIES in a tender.
  • iii) change the pre-qualification criteria, especially in the case of slicing/ packaging, to broaden the target bidders.

2.10.11Strategising Large ProcurementGW

Large procurements warrant strategies to achieve competition and VfM. Large procurements require the application of mind during need assessment, cost estimation and procurement planning — where the blind application of Rules May not bring VfM.

Formal market research can reveal important parameters of the market that can be used for designing optimal procurement strategies — alternative methods of procurement, slicing/ packaging, mitigating cartels, optimising various features/ specifications of the item/ work — to maximise VfM and competition.

Some of the market parameters to look for are:

#ParameterG — GoodsW — Works
aCapacity vs demandTotal Production Capacities and total demand for the ITEM in the country and abroad. Is there an unbalanced demand/ supply?Total Production Capacities and total demand for similar works in the region or the State. Is there an unbalanced demand/ supply?
bVolumes of procurementHow SIGNIFICANT is our requirement vis-à-vis the market? Would CLUBBING DEMANDS increase BARGAINING POWER? Can we COLLABORATE with another large public-sector buyer? Has there been a recent major procurement that may CONSTRICT available capacity?(same)
cLevel of competitionLocation-wise number of SUPPLIERS, co-ordination/ cartelisation among them, major suppliers/ buyers CONTROLLING the marketLocation-wise number of CONTRACTORS, co-ordination/ cartelisation among them, major contractors/ buyers controlling the market
dBottlenecksSUPPLY CHAIN constraints, RAW MATERIALS bottlenecks, LOGISTICS, GEOPOLITICAL issuesMANPOWER constraints, SKILLS/ MANPOWER bottlenecks, LOGISTICS, GEOPOLITICAL issues
eSpecifications/ statutory constraintsSpecifications and variations: Patents, manufacturing processes, pollution, and other LEGAL RESTRICTIONS, etc. Should we tinker with specifications to get VfM?Statutory Constraints: Patents, construction processes, pollution, and other legal restrictions, etc. Should we tinker with specifications to get VfM?
fPricing Trends [G only]seasonality of prices — is it the appropriate time to enter the market?

2.11Procurement Planning — Risks and MitigationsGNC

RISKMITIGATION
Packaging, bundling, and slicing of requirements are done to avoid open competition or reduce competition. Or it is TOO LARGE to make it difficult for MSEs to participate. Possible CLUBBING/ COLLABORATION among different units having the same NEEDS has not been explored.Lay down a clear policy for packaging and bundling of requirements. In LARGE PACKAGES, the affordability of EMD and the resultant restriction on competition may be kept in view, and bidders May be allowed to bid for slices of the package by depositing proportional EMD.

Appendix to Chapter 2 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter titleG:Need Assessment, Formulation of Specifications and Procurement Planning · W:Need Assessment and Procurement Planning · C/NC:Need assessment and Procurement Planning
2Number of sectionsG: 5 · W: 9 (the most) · C: 7 · NC: 4 (the fewest)
3Initiating documentG: Indent/ purchase Requisition (Annexure 5) · W: Requisition + Perspective Plan · C/NC: Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) (Annexure 3)
4Description-of-requirement instrumentG: Technical Specifications (TS) · W: PPR → DPR/PE → Detailed Designs & Detailed Estimates · C: Terms of Reference (ToR) · NC: Services and Activities Schedule
5Perspective Plan with annual reviewW only
6"Matters decided during need assessment" (method of satisfying need, HaaS/ SaaS, units of quantity, wagon-load rounding)G only
7Detailed cost-estimation methods (last purchase price, costing analysis, MRP, market survey, budgetary quotes with 3-quote/ 10–21 day/ two 5-day extension rule, price-index websites)G only
8Cost categoriesC:TWO (fee/ remuneration + reimbursable) · NC:THREE (Remuneration + Reimbursable + Administrative & Miscellaneous), with profit, taxes and duties added on top
9Minimum wage rate referenced in staff costingNC only
10Green procurement — Ecomark Rules 2023, BEE star ratings table, EPD/ISO 14025G only
11Samples and demonstration of equipment — three-copy reference-sample procedureG only
12Essential Technical Particulars (12-item list)G only
13PPR / Rough Cost Estimate with 14-item content listW only
14In-Principle Approval as a distinct sanction stepW only (C/NC have an in-principle approval on the Concept Paper, but not the works sequence)
15DPR/PE with 15-item content list; EIA; Social Impact Assessment & LARR Act 2013W only
1650-metre "reach" ground investigation rule; debarment of DPR consultantsW only
17A/A and E/S; sanction order contents; Rule 16 DFPR 2024W only
18Technical Sanction; "fit for construction" drawings; Schedule of Rates enlargementW only
19Appropriation of funds as a distinct stepW only
20Reference documents (Plinth Area Rates, Schedule of Rates, Analysis of Rates, Specifications)W only
21Rs 60 lakh repair-works exemption from DPR/PEW only
22Activity-based vs position-based ToR; four report types (Inception/ Progress/ Interim/ Final); 6-week inception; 15-day interim review; "consultants alone are responsible for their findings"C only
23Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC)C only
24Performance Standards & QA, KPIs, SLA, Method StatementNC only
25Labour/ Personnel Schedule; relievers and leave reserve not separately payableNC only
26Critical Material Schedule; Critical Equipment Schedule; input- vs output-admeasurementNC only
27Statutory obligations list (ESI, EPF, labour Licence, PAN, Private Security Agency licence)NC only
28"Borrow the Works SoR + percentage above/below" simplification for large activity schedulesNC only
2910 working days for critical review of indentG only
30Access to MSEs vs access to smaller contractors (packaging exception)G/C/NC: MSEs · W: smaller contractors
31Type of contract decision in planning (Lump sum/ Item Rate/ Percentage Rate/ Piece Work/ EPC/ PPP)W only
32Land availability & statutory clearances in procurement planningW only
33Annual Procurement Plan — express 30-day-from-budget-approval mandateW, C, NC (G states the publication obligation under Rule 144(x) but not the 30-day deadline)
34Strategising Large Procurement (market research parameters)G + W only
35"Pricing Trends / seasonality" as a market parameterG only
36Procurement Planning — Risks and Mitigations tableG + NC only
37Need Assessment — Risks and Mitigations tableG, C, NC — absent from W
38Subjectivity-of-samples risk row in the risk tableG only

end of Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Participation of Bidders, Vendor Relationship Management and Governance Issues

Merging: Goods Ch. 3 (Supplier Relationship Management) · Works Ch. 8 (Registration/ Enlistment of Contractors and Governance Issues) · Consultancy Ch. 3 (Participation of Bidders and Governance Issues) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 3 (Participation of Bidders and Governance Issues)

Structural Warning for Students

This block of subject matter is CHAPTER 3 in the Goods, Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals — but CHAPTER 8 in the Works Manual.

The Works Manual moves the entire vendor-governance block to the END of the Manual (after Contract Execution), whereas the other three place it before Bidding Design. The content is substantially the same; only the location differs. Any exam question citing "para 8.2" of Works corresponds to "para 3.2" of Goods.

Concordance for Chapter 3

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
3.1Supplier/ Contractor Relationship Management3.18.1
3.2Eligibility Criteria for Participation in Tender Process3.13.1
3.3Legal Status of Bidders3.23.2
3.4Governance Issues — Canons of Financial Propriety; RTI3.3.1, 3.3.23.3.1, 3.3.2
3.5Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP)3.28.23.3.33.3.3
3.6Integrity Pact (IP)3.38.33.43.4
3.7Grievances and its Redressal3.48.43.53.5
3.8Conduct of Public Servants — Risks and Mitigations3.58.53.63.6
3.9Development of New Sources and Registration/ Empanelment/ Enlistment/ Pre-qualification3.68.63.73.7
3.10Debarment3.78.73.83.8
3.11Enlistment of Indian Agents3.88.83.93.9

3.1Supplier/ Contractor Relationship ManagementGW

Supplier Relationship Management G / Contractor Relationship Management W comprises the following three functions:

  1. Ensuring COMPLIANCE of suppliers/ contractors to the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement and Integrity Pact (CIPP), if stipulated in Tender/ Bid Documents;
  2. REMOVAL from the list of registered/ enlisted suppliers/ contractors, and DEBARMENT of firms;
  3. Development of new sources and registration/ enlistment of suppliers/ contractors.

3.2Eligibility Criteria for Participation in Tender ProcessCNC

1.Normally, participation in the Tender Process should be open to all bidders. However, the procuring entity should lay down 'Eligibility' criteria, based on the requirement of the procurement and Government Policies.

Timing rule: The bidder should meet the eligibility criteria as of the date of his bid submission — AND should continue to meet these till the award of the contract. Otherwise, his bid would be rejected as non-responsive and would not be evaluated for award of contract.

The bidder shall be required to DECLARE FULFILMENT of Eligibility Criteria in his bid document.

Some of the eligibility criteria relate to the following issues (for details refer to the relevant Model Tender Documents):

a) Legal status of the bidder: a natural person, or a private entity, or a public entity (State-owned enterprise or institution), or a Joint Venture/ Consortium (an association of several persons, firms, or companies — hereinafter JV/C).

b) Participation of demerged entities [NC only]: (by virtue of a corporate restructuring exercise etc.) Tender documents must clearly mention if — and under what conditions — the demerged entity will be permitted to use the credentials of the original/ parent entity (for the initial five years from the incorporation of the demerged entities) to satisfy the eligibility criteria, or not, in the specific tender.

c) Requirement of various REGISTRATIONS/ LICENCES from various statutory authorities required for the subject matter of procurement: GSTIN, PAN, EPF, ESI, labour, Private Security Agencies (PASARA), etc.

d) Submission of requisite BID SECURITY (or Bid Security Declaration, if allowed) or proof of exemption therefrom.

E) free from financial insolvency, debarment or convictions.

F) a consistent history of litigation or arbitration by the bidder May result in disqualification.

g) Free from 'conflict of interest' with other bidders, which may affect fair competition.

h) Restriction on participation as per Government Policies:

  • i) For Class-II Local Suppliers and Non-Local bidders as per the Make-in-India policy;
  • ii) Any bidder from a country sharing a land border with India (but not in development partnership with India), or any bidder (INCLUDING INDIAN) with a Specified Transfer of Technology (ToT) arrangement with such a country, shall be eligible subject to certain conditions.

3.3Legal Status of BiddersCNC

3.3.1Individual Persons

1. Individual consultants C / Individual service providers NC:

Individual consultants/ service providers are recruited for similar activities as Consultancy firms/ Service providing firms when a full team is not considered necessary.

They may be:

  • independent experts not permanently associated with any particular firm, or
  • employees of a firm recruited on an INDIVIDUAL basis, or
  • employees of an agency, institution, or university.

They are normally recruited for:

They are not normally recruited for PROJECT PREPARATION, unless the proposed project is simple and, generally, a repeat of an already established and successful project.

As with firms, individual consultants/ service providers are classed as either INTERNATIONAL or NATIONAL, depending on their level of EXPERTISE and their international experience and exposure.

2. Retired Government Servants:

C — the GFR bar:Rule 177 of GFR, 2017 says that consulting services do not include direct engagement of retired Government servants.They should not be engaged as consultants against regular vacant posts under this rule. Such engagements should be handled as a PERSONNEL MATTER.

CNC — the permitted mode: As Consultants/ Service Providers, retired Government servants CAN be hired/ engaged only:

  • for a SPECIFIC TASK, and
  • for a specific duration.

They should be assigned clear output-related goals.

Remuneration:

Type of engagementRemuneration
Full-TIME basis (when they are not allowed to concurrently do any other assignment), on a monthly basisLast pay drawn minus pension, as per extant DOPT guidelines
PART-TIME, NON-EXCLUSIVE engagementsThe Procuring Ministry/ Department may fix remuneration on a per day/ month or lump-sum basis

3.3.2Private and Public Entities

1. Consultancy Firms C / Service Providing Firms NC: The MAIN SOURCE of consultants/ service providers is firms of diverse specialisations that provide consultancy/ non-consultancy services. Such firms are normally classified as either:

  • INTERNATIONAL — firms that have international experience and are capable of undertaking work at international level at international rates; or
  • NATIONAL — firms that may not have international exposure and normally undertake assignments only within that country, usually at significantly lower rates.

2. Non-Governmental Organisations (NGO): There may be a DISTINCT ADVANTAGE in the use of NGOs in Projects which emphasise experience in community participation and in-depth local knowledge — for example, Projects related to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) or Government Social Initiatives like 'Swachh Bharat Abhiyan', etc.

3. Specialised Agencies and Institutions: Specialised agencies or institutions — including Government/ Semi-Government agencies, universities, research and professional institutions — may also from time to time be recruited to provide Consultancy/ Non-consultancy services.

These services may be provided by INDIVIDUALS (as discussed above) or by TEAMS. Nonetheless, there are at times DISTINCT ADVANTAGES to using such agencies. Experts and teams from such agencies and institutions may undertake a variety of roles across the whole field of possible services — these may range from PROJECT PREPARATION through PROJECT SUPERVISION and POLICY ADVICE to project benefit monitoring and evaluation.

3.3.3Association of Several Bidders

1.Sub-contracting

A bidder who is capable of being selected for award of contract on his own credentials may propose to sub-contract a PART of the contract for SPECIALISED ITEMS of services, as a financial or technical strategy.

  • The names and details of the sub-contracts are to be clearly stated in the bid submitted by the Bidder.
  • Provided further that such sub-contractor should not circumvent the eligibility criteria.
  • Qualifications of these sub-contractors shall not be considered in evaluation of qualification criteria for the bid.
  • DESPITE any approval granted by the Procuring Entity for such arrangements, the bidder/ contractor shall be solely and directly responsible for executing sub-contracted portions of the contract.
  • The total VALUE of the sub-contracting portion of services must not exceed the per cent of the contract price as specified in the Tender Document/ Contract — if not so specified, 25 (twenty-five) per cent.
  • Sub-contracting by the contractor without the approval of the Procuring Entity shall be a breach of contract.

2.Consortium of Consultants C / Consortium of Service ProvidersNC

a) Why consortia form: In large and complex assignments, consultants/ service providers may associate with each other to form a consortium:

  • to COMPLEMENT their respective areas of expertise,
  • to INCREASE the technical responsiveness of their proposal, and
  • to make larger pools of experts available, or for other reasons.

Such an association may be for the LONG TERM (independent of any particular assignment) or for a SPECIFIC assignment.

b) Legal character: Such associations are called Consortium or Joint Ventures (JVs) for the purpose of this Manual.

  • In case of consortium or JVs, all members shall sign the contract and shall be jointly and severally liable for the entire assignment.
  • HOWEVER, the Procuring Entity only deals with the lead member of consortiums/ JVs for all purposes.
  • After the short list is finalised and the Request for Proposal (RfP) is issued, any association in the form of a consortium/ JV or sub-consultancy among the short-listed firms shall be PERMISSIBLE in accordance with provisions stated in the RfP. Under such circumstance, one of the shortlisted consultants must become the lead member of the consortium/ JV.

c) What the bid document must specify: Bid documents should clearly specify whether consortiums/ JVs are ALLOWED to bid — in the case of complex and large assignments, say above certain values (say Rs. 5 crore).

  • Maximum number of partners in a consortium/ JV shall be LIMITED (say — three).
  • In case consortiums/ JVs are permitted to bid, it should be clarified:
  • WHAT qualifications are to be met COLLECTIVELY (clubbed together) by the consortium/ JV partners — say, experience of similar consultancy/ non-consultancy service; and
  • WHAT each partner has to meet individually and separately — say, financial capacity.
  • In the case of each member meeting credentials individually, it should also be specified that:

d) Ensuring the consortium actually performs: If consortiums/ JVs are allowed, measures should be taken to ensure that all the consortium/ JV partners are present and deliver services all through the contract period.

  • An IMPLEMENTATION BOARD with participation of all consortium/ JV partners may be provided for, wherein the project Manager from the Procuring Entity shall also be ALLOWED AUDIENCE when required.
  • MEETING of consortium/ JV partners with the project executing authority for quarterly progress review may be made a criterion linked to achievement of key dates or even payment.

3.4Governance Issues in Procurement — Financial Propriety and RTICNC

3.4.1Standards (Canons) of Financial Propriety

Public Procurement, like any other expenditure in Government, must conform to the Standards (also called Canons) of Financial Propriety — Rule 21 of GFR, 2017.

3.4.2Right to Information and Proactive Information Disclosures

Section 4(1)(b) of the RTI Act lays down the information to be disclosed by public authorities on a suo-motu or proactive basis, and Section 4(2) and Section 4(3) prescribe the method of its dissemination — to enhance transparency and to reduce the need for filing individual RTI applications.

The DoPT has issued "Guidelines on suo motu disclosure under Section 4 of the RTI Act" vide OM No. 1/6/2011-IR dated April 15, 2013. The relevant guideline relating to procurement:

3.5Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP)

(Rule 175 of GFR 2017)

3.5.1Introduction

Public Procurement is perceived to be prone to corruption and ethical risks. To mitigate this, the officials of Procuring Entities involved in procurement AND the bidders/ suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers must abide by the following Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP).

Declarations by officials: All Procuring officials May be asked to sign declarations to this effect PERIODICALLY and in various procurement decisions.

  • [G, C, NC] — including Need Assessment
  • Wincluding Preparation of Estimates

Declarations by bidders: The bidders/ suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers should be asked to sign a declaration about abiding by the CIPPW adds: including sub-contractors engaged by themin registration/ enlistment applications AND in tender/ bid documents, with a WARNING that, in case of any transgression of this code:

  • Git would be liable for punitive actions as detailed below;
  • Wits name is not only liable to be removed from the list of enlisted contractors, but it would be liable for other punitive actions such as cancellation of contracts, debarment or action in Competition Commission of India, and so on;
  • CNCits name is not only liable to be removed from the list of registered suppliers/ contractors/ service providers, but it would be liable for other punitive actions as detailed below.

3.5.2The Code — Seven Prohibited Practices

Procuring authorities, as well as bidders, suppliers, contractors, consultants and service providers, should observe the highest standard of ethics and should not INDULGE in the following PROHIBITED PRACTICES — either directly or indirectly — at any stage during the procurement process or the execution of resultant contracts:

#PracticeDefinition
i"CORRUPT practice"making offers, solicitation or acceptance of a BRIBE, REWARDS or GIFTS or any material benefit, either directly or indirectly, in exchange for an unfair advantage in the procurement process, or to otherwise INFLUENCE the procurement process or contract execution
ii"FRAUDULENT practice"any OMISSION or MISREPRESENTATION that may mislead or attempt to mislead so that financial or other benefits may be obtained, or an obligation avoided. This includes making FALSE DECLARATIONS or providing FALSE INFORMATION for participation in a procurement process, or to secure a contract, or in the execution of the contract
iii"ANTI-COMPETITIVE practice"any collusion, bid rigging or anti-competitive arrangement, or any other practice coming under the purview of the Competition Act, 2002, between two or more bidders — with or without the knowledge of the procuring entity — that may IMPAIR the transparency, fairness and progress of the procurement process, or to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels
iv"COERCIVE practice"any COERCION or any threat to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or its property, to influence the procurement process or affect the execution of a contract
v"Conflict of interest" (coi)any PERSONAL, FINANCIAL, or BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP between the BIDDER and any personnel of the Procuring Entity who are directly or indirectly related to the procurement or execution process of the contract, which can affect the decision of the procuring entity directly or indirectly
vi"Undue advantage"Improper use of information obtained by the bidder from the procuring entity with an intent to gain an unfair advantage in the procurement process or for personal gain. This also includes if the bidder (or his allied firm) provided services for the need assessment/ procurement planning of the tender process in which he is participating
vii"OBSTRUCTIVE practice"MATERIALLY IMPEDE the procuring entity's INVESTIGATION of a procurement process — either by deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering; or by concealing evidence material to the investigation; or by making false statements; or by THREATENING, HARASSING or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to such investigation or from pursuing the investigation; or by impeding the Procuring Entity's rights of audit or access to information

3.5.3Obligations for Proactive Disclosures

Whether asked or not, in a tender document:

a) Declaration of Conflict of Interest: Procuring authorities, as well as bidders, suppliers, contractors, consultants and service providers, should suo-moto proactively declare any conflict of interest as per item (v) above — PRE-EXISTING or as soon as these arise at any STAGE in any procurement process or execution of a contract.

b) Declaration of previous transgressions: Bidders must DECLARE any PREVIOUS TRANSGRESSIONS with respect to the prohibited practices above with any entity in any country during the last three years, or of being debarred by any other Procuring Entity.

c) Declaration of commissions/ fees to agents: The bidder/ contractor must disclose any commissions or fees that may have been paid or are to be paid to AGENTS, REPRESENTATIVES, or COMMISSION AGENTS concerning the selection process or execution of the Contract. The information disclosed must INCLUDE:

  • the name and address of the agent, representative or commission agent,
  • the AMOUNT and CURRENCY, and
  • the purpose of the commission or fee

— in a format given in the tender document.

3.5.4Professionalism and Unfair Competitive Advantage [C ONLY]

A) professionalism: The consultant is required to provide professional, objective, and impartial advice — at all times holding the Procuring Entity's interest paramount above his/ its own corporate interests and above any consideration for future work — strictly avoiding any conflicts of interest.

b) Unfair Competitive Advantage: Fairness and transparency in the selection process require that the consultants or their affiliates competing for a specific assignment do not derive an unfair competitive advantage from having provided consultancy services related to the assignment in question.

Such unfair competitive advantage is BEST AVOIDED by full TRANSPARENCY and by providing equal opportunity, so that all firms or individuals interested or involved have full INFORMATION about a service assignment and its NATURE, SCOPE, and background information. To that end, the request for proposals and all information should be made available to all short-listed consultants simultaneously.

c) The three disqualification rules: Therefore, without limitation on the generality of the foregoing, and unless stated otherwise in the RfP document, Consultants (including their experts and sub-consultants) or their allied firm shall not be eligible for any assignment that:

  • i) by its NATURE, may be in conflict with another assignment of the consultant or its allied firm — for the same or for another procuring Entity;
  • ii) a consultant or any of its affiliates/ allied firms that has been engaged by the client to provide goods, works, or non-consultancy services for a project, shall be disqualified from providing consultancy service resulting from or directly related to those goods, works, or non-consultancy services;
  • iii) conversely, a consultant or any of its affiliates/ allied firms hired to provide consultancy services for the preparation or implementation of a project shall be disqualified from subsequently providing goods or works or non-consultancy services resulting from or directly related to the consultancy services for such preparation or implementation.

3.5.5Punitive Provisions

(Rule 175(2) of GFR, 2017)

Without prejudice to — and in addition to — the rights of the procuring entity to other penal provisions as per the tender/ bid documents or contract, IF the procuring entity CONCLUDES that a (prospective) bidder/ supplier/ contractor/ consultant/ service provider, directly or through an agent, has violated this code of integrity in COMPETING FOR the contract or in EXECUTING a contract, the procuring entity May take appropriate measures including one or more of the following:

1.If his bids are UNDER CONSIDERATION in any procurement

  1. Forfeiture and/ or encashment of Bid Security;
  2. Calling off of any pre-contract negotiations; And
  3. REJECTION and EXCLUSION of the bidder from the procurement process.

2.If a contract has ALREADY BEEN AWARDED

  1. CANCELLATION of the relevant contract and recovery of compensation for loss incurred by the procuring entity;
  2. FORFEITURE and/ or ENCASHMENT of any other security or bond relating to the procurement;
  3. Recovery of payments — including advance payments, if any — made by the procuring entity, along with interest thereon at the prevailing rate.

3.Provisions IN ADDITION to the above

  1. REMOVAL from the list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors and/ or DEBARMENT of the bidder from participation in FUTURE PROCUREMENTS of the procuring entity:
  2. [G, W, NC] — for a period not less than six months;
  3. Cfor a period not exceeding two years.
  1. In case of ANTI-COMPETITIVE PRACTICES, information for further processing May be filed with the Competition Commission of India:
  2. [G, W, NC] — under the signature of a joint Secretary level officer;
  3. Cby the Competent Authority.
  4. Initiation of suitable disciplinary or criminal proceedings against any individual or staff found responsible.

3.6Integrity Pact (IP)

1. What it is: The pre-bid Integrity Pact is a tool to help governments, businesses, and civil society fight corruption in public contracting.

It binds both buyers and sellers to ethical conduct and transparency in all activities — from:

This removes the insecurity of bidders that, while they themselves May abjure bribery, their competitors May resort to it and win contracts by unfair means.

2. Who must incorporate it, and at what threshold: Ministries/ Departments and their attached/ subordinate offices (including autonomous bodies) should incorporate the Integrity Pact (OM No. 14(12)/2008-E-II(A) dated 19th July 2011) in the procurements/ contracts:

  • of the NATURE and of a THRESHOLD VALUE,
  • decided by the ministries/ departments,
  • with the approval of the minister in charge.

Format and customisation:

  • [G, W] — The procuring entities May make suitable changes in the format, wherever required, based on the specific situation in which the pact is to be used. The pact May also be updated, wherever necessary, to incorporate latest procurement instructions.
  • [C, NC] — Ministries/ Departments including their attached/ subordinate offices AND CPSEs may use this format of Integrity Pact, with the suitable changes specific to the situations in which the pact is to be used.

3. Extension to PSBs, PSICs and FIs: CVC issued a revised standard operating procedure (CVC Circular No. 04/06/23 — 015/VGL/091 dated 14.06.2023) and has further stated (CVC Circular No. 06/05/21 — 015/VGL/091 dated 03.06.2021) That, in view of the increasing procurement activities of public sector banks (PSBs), public sector insurance companies (PSICs) and public sector financial institutions (FIs), they shall also adopt and implement the suggested format of Integrity Pact.

3.7Grievances and its Redressal

1. Procuring Entities shall provide a suitable clause in their tender documents for the redressal of grievances of bidders. The following is a suggested mechanism of redressal.

2. Who may apply, and within what time:

Any supplier, contractor, or consultant that claims to have suffered or is likely to suffer loss or injury as a result of a decision/ action/ omission of the Procurement Entity May make an application for its review:

  • Within a period of five (5) days from its date,
  • to the DESIGNATED OFFICER named in the tender documents in this regard (or the head of the Procuring Entity, if not so specified),
  • specifying the ground(s) and the relevant clauses of the tender documents.

De-briefing: Unsuccessful bidders May seek de-briefing regarding the rejection of their bid — in writing or electronically — within five (5) days of the declaration of techno-commercial or financial evaluation results.

3. Only a directly affected bidder can represent:

  1. Only a bidder who has participated in the concerned procurement process — i.e., pre-qualification, bidder registration or bidding, as the case may be — can make such representation.
  2. In case the PRE-QUALIFICATION bid has been evaluated before the bidding of Technical/ financial bids, an application for review in relation to the technical/ financial bid may be filed only by a bidder who has qualified in the pre-qualification bid.
  3. In case the TECHNICAL bid has been evaluated before the opening of the FINANCIAL bid, an application for review in relation to the financial bid may be filed only by a bidder whose technical bid is found to be acceptable.

D) decisions not subject to review: The following decisions of the procuring entity, in accordance with the provisions of internal guidelines, shall not be subject to review:

  • i) determination of the need for procurement;
  • ii) selection of the mode of procurement or tendering system;
  • iii) choice of selection procedure;
  • iv) complaints against specifications — except under the premise that they are either VAGUE or too specific to limit competition, which may be permissible;
  • v) provisions limiting the participation of bidders in the procurement process in terms of government policies;
  • vi) provisions regarding purchase preferences to specific categories of bidders in terms of policies of the Government;
  • vii) the decision to enter into negotiations with the L1 bidder;
  • viii) cancellation of the procurement process — except where it is intended to SUBSEQUENTLY RE-TENDER the same requirements;
  • ix) issues related to ambiguity in contract terms shall not be taken up after a contract has been signed; all such issues should be HIGHLIGHTED before the vendor/ contractor consummates the contract.

4. This grievance redressal is BESIDE the avenue of complaints to the vigilance Department of the procuring organisation.

5. If received DURING the processing of the tender: The designated officer shall FORWARD the application to the tC/ convener of TC for its examination on merits and action as considered necessary.

  • An interim reply May be sent that the application will be kept in view in the tender evaluation, and a final response shall be given only after the declaration of the award of the contract.
  • The Tender Committee shall place the application on record — including its analysis and action taken thereon — in the TC minutes/ report to the Competent Authority.
  • After the award, the TC convener shall respond to the aggrieved party.

6. If received after the declaration of the award of the contract: The designated officer shall FORWARD the application to the COMPETENT AUTHORITY of the tender for his examination on merits and action as considered necessary.

If the Competent Authority finds the complaint to have substance, appropriate and feasible remedial measures should be initiated.

7. If the grievance is resolved, or if the grievance is found to be unwarranted, the aggrieved party shall be informed by the TC convener of the final decision — without disclosing confidential details.

8. Remedial actions available: Based on such representation, if the Competent Authority is satisfied that there has been a contravention of procurement guidelines in the case, he May initiate such action as, in his opinion, is necessary to rectify the contravention — INCLUDING:

  1. If the grievance is due to inadequacy of procurement guidelines or a lack of understanding of the staff — remedial action to address such lacunae May be initiated without repercussions to the concerned staff;
  2. Annulment or reconsideration of the procurement proceedings;
  3. Cancellation of the resultant procurement contract, if legally feasible;
  4. In case any individual staff is found responsible — suitable disciplinary proceedings should be initiated against such staff under the conduct Rules;
  5. In case the complicity of any bidder is proved:
  6. i) REMOVAL of the concerned firm from the list of registered firms;
  7. ii) DEBARMENT of the bidders, if warranted;
  8. iii) reporting the matter to the Competition Commission of India (CCI) in case of anti-competitive actions by the bidder;
  9. Handing over the case to the CVO if there are aspects that require INVESTIGATIONS.

3.8Conduct of Public Servants in Public Procurement — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1HOSPITALITY: Hospitality — including facilitation of travel, lodging, boarding and ENTERTAINMENT during official or unofficial programs — from suppliers/ contractors may tend to cross the limits of ethical/ occasional/ routine/ modest/ normal business practice. Officials sent to the firm's premises for INSPECTIONS/ MEETINGS may mistakenly presume entitlement to hospitality from the firm, even if other arrangements are available at the location.Hospitality must never be solicited, directly or indirectly. The frequency, scale and number of officials availing hospitality should not be allowed to identify the recipient in a public way with any particular contractor, supplier or service provider, or raise doubts about its neutrality. It should not involve significant travel, overnight accommodation, or trips abroad. Particular care should be taken in relation to offers of hospitality from firms (say, participating in current or imminent tenders or their execution) who stand to derive a personal or commercial benefit from their relationship with the recipient.
2GIFTS: Gifts from suppliers/ contractors may tend to cross the limits of ethical/ occasional/ routine/ modest/ normal business practice — especially during the festive season. Since the VALUE of the gift May not be known to the recipient, it may cause an inadvertent violation of conduct Rules.Gifts must never be solicited, directly or indirectly. An official should not accept and retain gifts that are more valuable than the limit as laid down in the conduct Rules. Cash, gift cheques or any vouchers that May be exchanged for cash May not be accepted, regardless of the amount. Particular care should be taken in relation to gifts from firms (say, participating in current or imminent tenders or their execution) who stand to derive a personal or commercial benefit from their relationship with the recipient. Any gift received inadvertently in violation of the above must immediately either be returned, or else reported and deposited in toshakhana/ treasury.
3Private purchases from official suppliers: Procuring Officials may mistakenly consider it innocuous to seek discounts in private procurements from suppliers/ contractors having OFFICIAL DEALINGS or its ALLIED FIRMS — G adds: especially from rate Contract holders.Officials involved in Public Procurement must never indulge in any non-official pecuniary transaction with the contractors, suppliers, or service providers with whom they have official dealings — including seeking or accepting special facilities or discounts on private purchases (G adds: particularly the same items that are being ordered officially on rate contracts).
4sponsorship of events: Procuring officials May mistakenly consider it innocuous to seek financial favours — donations, advertisements for souvenirs, and contributions in cash or kind — in relation to sponsoring cultural, social, charitable, religious, or sporting events, in the false belief that, since they are personally not benefitted, it would not be a violation of CIPP.Officials involved in Public Procurement must never indulge in any non-official pecuniary transaction with the contractors, suppliers, or service providers with whom they have official dealings — including soliciting of sponsorship for unofficial and private cultural, social, sporting, religious, charitable, or similar organisations or events.
5conflict of interest (coi): The CIPP defines COI as "…any personal, financial, or business relationship between the bidder and any personnel of the procuring entity who are directly or indirectly related to procurement or execution process of the contract, which can affect the decision of the procuring entity directly or indirectly……"There may be DILEMMAS regarding which officers are 'RELATED' to the tender or execution process, and even in respect of minor, routine transactions.(See detailed mitigation below the table.)

3.8.1Detailed Mitigation for Conflict of Interest

a) which OFFICERS are 'related' to the tender or execution process: This would depend on the ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE and the sensitivity of their role in procurement. It may cover KEY OFFICIALS (and any external consultants/ advisors) involved in:

  • making a RECOMMENDATION,
  • various APPROVALS, or
  • making a MAJOR DECISION

at any STAGE in procurement — i.e., during:

B) illustration — coi (actual, potential, or perceived) can arise if such officers (or his close family) have:

  • i) substantial business interests in the firm — e.g., shares more than 0.1% of market cap — or have taken a loan or other FINANCIAL OBLIGATION (say DISCOUNTS) from the firm or its personnel, etc.;
  • ii) business relationships with the firm — say, previously worked for the firm, or availed hospitality/ gifts beyond the limits laid down in the Code of Conduct of the organisation, etc.;
  • iii) FAMILIAL RELATIONSHIP with the personnel of the firm;
  • iv) close personal friendships or REGULAR (say, more than once in a quarter) social interactions — e.g., clubs, games, social associations — with the Firm's personnel, etc.

C) resolution of coi:

It shall be the responsibility of such officials to declare coi — to the extent he is aware of it in normal course — with reference to a procurement process, to the Competent Authority/ next higher officer.

The competent officer may EVALUATE:

  • the level of coi, and
  • the sensitivity of the function assigned to the official.

He may then EITHER DETERMINE:

  • I) that the coi is insignificant enough to influence the type of function performed by the official — and ask the officer to continue his function; Or
  • ii) that if the coi or the type of function is significant — nominate any alternative officer to perform the function (partly or fully) of this official in that procurement process.

3.9Development of New Sources and Registration/ Empanelment/ Enlistment/ Pre-qualification

(Rule 150 of GFR 2017)

3.9.1The Three (or Two) Concepts Distinguished

A. The Goods/ CS/ NC formulation — THREE conceptsGCNC

Normally, in open tendering, there should be no restriction of prior registration. Entities may provide for registration after selection in unrestricted open tendering.

Differences may be noted between REGISTRATION, EMPANELMENT and PRE-QUALIFICATION:

ConceptPurpose
A) registrationTo establish GENUINE IDENTIFICATION of the firm — e.g., for e-procurement portals, preferential procurement, and so on
b) empanelmentTo establish PRIMA-FACIE CAPABILITY for RESTRICTED TENDERING (not open tendering) — e.g., limited tendering panels (CNC add: also useful in special limited tenders). (It means maintaining a CLASSIFIED LIST of firms based on their EXPERIENCE, usually required in case of limited tenders.)
c) pre-qualificationwherever the nature of the requirement dictates competition only among prequalified bidders (without vitiation of prices offered by unqualified bidders), prequalification May be done with open tendering in the prequalification bidding stage
d) approved list/ multi-use listIf there are FREQUENT REQUIREMENTS of such nature, prequalification may be done through an OPEN PROCESS with an EXTENDED VALIDITY of the Shortlist of Qualified Bidders — called the List of Approved Sources in some organisations (e.g., Ministry of Railways) — for example, one year or longer. The use of a List of Qualified Bidders is also known as a MULTI-USE LIST in many countries — as distinct from empanelment (e.g., Limited Tender Panel, which does not undergo a formal open tender pre-qualification/ EoI process). In such long-term multi-use lists or approved lists, if any competent bidder applies for inclusion at any time, it should be examined as per the criteria of the original multi-use list.

However, since in common parlance "registration" is a word used interchangeably by most departments for all the above three concepts, this usage is being retained — though the distinction would be clear from the context of usage.

B. The Works formulation — TWO conceptsW

The terms 'ENLISTMENT' and 'REGISTRATION' may be differentiated as follows:

TermMeaning
A) registrationsimply registering the contractor, without any verification
b) enlistmentincluding the name of the contractor in the list after verification of credentials

3.9.2Registration — General Provisions

a) Who may register, and why GCNC: For goods and services not available on GeM, and for Works, the head of Ministry/ Department May periodically register suppliers of goods and services that the Department or Office SPECIFICALLY REQUIRES.

Ensuring an up-to-date and current list of registered, capable and competent suppliers/ consultants/ service providers facilitates efficiency, economy, and promotion of competition in public procurement — especially while floating a limited tender/ local purchase/ direct contracting.

For such tenders, it May be possible to skip bidder qualification, to avoid unnecessary repetition/ duplication of efforts — thereby saving time, especially in the case of emergency procurement.

Registration of the supplier/ consultant/ service provider should be done following a fair, transparent, and reasonable procedure and after giving due publicity.

Such registered suppliers should be on-boarded on GeM as and when the item or service gets listed on GeM (Amended vide DoE OM No. F.1/26/2018-PPD dated 02.04.2019).

The list of registered firms for the subject matter of procurement should be exhibited on the websites of the Procuring Entity/ their e-procurement portals.

b) Registration on e-procurement portals W: All the Ministries/ Departments shall register the prospective contractors on their e-procurement portal or in the CPPP (in case they do not have their own e-procurement portal) before submitting their bids.

The contractor May be an individual, sole proprietorship firm, partnership firm, limited liability partnership, private or public limited company.

For registration, the Ministries/ Departments/ CPSUs shall capture at least: a) Name of contractor; b) Address and Contact details; c) Permanent Account Number (PAN); d) Details of Digital Signature Certificate (DSC); and e) GSTIN.

Depending on the requirement of the respective procurement portal, the Ministries/ Departments can capture any other information as may be considered necessary.

c) Enlistment practice in works departments W: Some departments — such as the Central Public Works Department (CPWD) and Military Engineering Services (MES) — are enlisting the contractors after verification of their credentials.

  • Public authorities May empanel/ register contractors of those specific types of work which are required by them regularly.
  • PERFORMANCE of such empanelled contractors should be reviewed periodically.
  • The list of empanelled/ registered contractors shall be updated on a regular basis.
  • The category/ Class of contractors May be upgraded/ downgraded, or contractors May be de-listed, based on their performance.
  • Empanelment of contractors shall be done in a fair and equitable manner, preferably online, after giving due publicity.
  • The practice of inviting bids for works tenders only from empanelled contractors May be confined to tenders up to a certain threshold value (say Rs 20 crore), as decided by the project executing authorities.
  • It is expected that ministries/ departments will also develop their own enlistment process — as has been done by CPWD, Ministry of railways (MoR) and Ministry of road transport & highways (MoRTH) — to reduce the time required for verification of credentials of the contractors after opening of the bids.
  • The lists of such enlisted contractors can be used by any Ministry/ Department/ cpsu.

d) Sharing of information through CPPP W: The ministries/ departments will also share the information of registered and enlisted contractors with each other through the Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP).

  • They will also ensure that whenever a contractor is debarred, the information regarding the same is made available immediately to all the ministries/ departments through the CPPP.
  • The reasons for the debarment and the order of such debarment May also be displayed on the CPPP.
  • NIC/ MeitY shall make appropriate changes in the CPPP so that each contractor can be uniquely identified by PAN.
  • All the Ministries/ Departments May take cognizance of the information regarding debarment of contractors and use it as an input for the decision-making process as per their own procurement policies.

e) Entities with their own policies: Ministries/ Departments with a significant volume of procurements May follow their own policies and procedures for registration/ enlistment of vendors/ contractors, if they already exist. The policies and procedures described below are for the non-mandatory generic guidance of Ministries/ Departments that DO not have their own policies/ procedures.

The Ministry/ Department shall notify the authorities competent to deal with the applications and grant registrations/ enlistments, along with their jurisdictions.

The appellate authority shall be at least one level above the registering authority, or as designated by the Ministry/ Department.

f) Cross-use of lists and EMD exemption: All Ministries/ Departments May use such lists prepared by other ministries/ departments as and when necessary.

Registered suppliers/ firms are ordinarily exempted from furnishing earnest money deposit/ Bid Security with their tenders for items and monetary limits for which they are registered.

3.9.3Categories for Registration/ Enlistment

G — Categories for Registration of Suppliers of Goods

In case of procurement of goods, the Administrative Department shall register firms as suppliers of goods in different trade groups of goods in the following BROAD CATEGORIES: a) MANUFACTURERS who supply INDIGENOUS items; b) AGENTS/ DISTRIBUTORS of such manufacturers who desire to market their production only through their agents; c) FOREIGN MANUFACTURERS with/ without their accredited agent in India; d) stockists of imported spares or other specified items; e) suppliers of imported goods having REGULAR ARRANGEMENTS with foreign manufacturers.

W — Categories for Enlistment of Contractors

In case of procurement of works, the Administrative Department shall enlist firms as contractors in different types/ categories of works — civil, electrical, horticulture, nursery, etc.

The contractor may be a private, partnership, pvt ltd, corporate, PSU or a JOINT VENTURE company.

3.9.4Registration of ManufacturersG

One of the main prerequisites for registration as a manufacturer is that the firm should possess its own in-house testing facilities.

Before the manufacturer is included in the list of registered suppliers, the Procuring Entity shall verify the bona fides and standing of the firm. The procuring Entity May also seek assistance from the inspection wing of other inspecting agencies.

Iso-certified firms: In the case of firms that have an established quality maintenance system with ISO 9001-2000 certification (latest version) from authorised agencies, the Procuring Entity May consider the registration of such firms without carrying out a capacity assessment.

3.9.5Grades/ Classes (Monetary/ Tendering Limits)

Registration/ enlistment should be done by grading the firms (grade a, b, and so on) based on their capability to execute contracts/ orders of different monetary limits in the relevant category of requirements.

The monetary limits should be carefully fixed while keeping in view:

  • The banker's reports,
  • the capacity and capability of the firm, and
  • other FINANCIAL INFORMATION indicated in the BALANCE SHEETS, such as profit and loss statements.

G — Example of gradation for Goods (NOT mandatory)

GradeMonetary Limit
Grade ARs. 25 (Rupees twenty-five) lakh AND above
Grade BRupees five lakh to Rs. 25 (Rupees twenty-five) lakh
Grade CRupees one lakh and up to Rupees five lakh

Additional rule G: The firms that are registered for the supply of orders valued above rupees five lakh should invariably be manufacturers or their authorised agents.

Wherever practical, the Procuring Entity shall register the manufacturers and not agents or intermediaries.

A sole selling agent/ authorised agent could be considered for registration, subject to the conditions that:

  • The Procuring Entity is satisfied that he is the sole selling agent of the manufacturers;
  • The Procuring Entity ascertains the financial and technical capabilities of the manufacturers;
  • The availability of a suitable arrangement with the sole selling agent for after-sales service shall also be ensured; And
  • the Procuring Entity shall also satisfy itself that a valid legal agreement exists between the applicant unit and its sole selling agent during the period for which he is registered.

W — Class of Enlistment (Tendering Limits) for Works

(A sample classification — Source: Rules for Enlistment of Contractors in CPWD, 2024)

ClassTendering LimitClassTendering Limit
Class-I (Super)Rs 650 croreClass-IIRs 15 crore
Class-I (AAA)Rs 260 croreClass-IIIRs 4 crore
Class-I (AA)Rs 130 croreClass-IVRs 1.30 crore
Class-I (A)Rs 75 croreClass-VRs 40 lakh
Class-IRs 50 crore

3.9.6Procedure for Registration/ Enlistment

a) Fair procedure and publicity: Registration/ enlistment of the suppliers/ contractors should be done following a fair, transparent, and reasonable procedure and after giving due publicity.

Details of the procedure for registration/ enlistment of new firms May be uploaded on the website and published in the form of a booklet for information of the suppliers/ contractors. Timeframes and criteria for registration/ enlistment of new suppliers/ contractors May be clearly indicated.

b) Identifying possible sources: Possible sources for any category/ group of requirements can be identified based on internal and external references. Data on new suppliers/ contractors can be obtained from:

The e-procurement and GeM portals pre-register suppliers online. Such data can be a source of information on prospective suppliers/ contractors.

c) Updating the list and inviting EoI: The list of registered/ enlisted contractors shall be updated on a regular basis (ANNUALLY) G. New supplier(s)/ contractor(s) May be considered for registration/ enlistment at any time, provided they fulfil all the required conditions.

For any larger-scale or critical registration or development of new suppliers/ contractors, the Procuring Entity should call for eoI by publicising its need for the development of sources.

D) CIPP undertaking: While registering the firms, an undertaking May be obtained from them that they will abide by the CIPP enclosed with the application, with a clear warning that, in case of transgression of the Code of Integrity, their names are likely to be deleted from the list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors — besides any other penalty or more severe action as deemed fit.

E) GCC undertaking: Along with the new/ renewal application for registration/ enlistment, the suppliers/ contractors should also be asked to declare that, if awarded a contract in any LTE in which they participate, they bind themselves to abide by the Procuring Entity's general conditions of contract (GCC). Such GCC should be part of the application.

F) the participation Rule: Registered vendors/ enlisted contractors must participate in relevant limited tenders. In case they do not respond to at least three (3) tenders in a year on being invited to do so — if there were at least 6 invitations to them — they May be removed from the list of registered vendors/ enlisted contractors.

g) Eligibility for registration/ enlistment:

  • i) any firm situated in India or abroad that is in the business of providing goods/ works/ services of specified categories of interest shall be eligible for registration/ enlistment;
  • ii) Gwhere registration is granted based on partly outsourced arrangements/ agreements, it shall always be the responsibility of the registered unit to keep such arrangements/ agreements renewed/ alive, and to keep their registration valid for the period for which it has been granted.Any failure in this regard May make the registration null and void/ ineffective retrospectively from any such dates which the registering authority considers appropriate;
  • iii) Suppliers/ contractors should possess a valid digital signature certificate (DSC) Class III with the company name at the time of registration/ enlistment/ renewal, to enable them to participate in e-PROCUREMENTS;
  • iv) the firm should also have good internal governance — such as a whistleblower policy, commitment to esg (environmental, social, and governance) code of conduct, code of business ethics, etc.;
  • V) the firm against whom punitive action has been taken shall not be eligible for re-registration/ re-enlistment during the currency of the punitive action. Registration/ enlistment requests May not be entertained from firms (or their allied firms) who are de-registered/ banned (W Phrasing: "From such firms, stakeholders of whom have any interest in de-enlisted/ banned firms").

H) assessment of capacity and capability: The application form, complete in all respects and accompanied by the requisite processing fee and prescribed documents, shall be submitted by the firms to the registering/ enlisting authority.

The application form, duly filled in, when received from the firms, shall be scrutinised carefully to assess the capacity and capability of the firms — INCLUDING:

  • References shall be made to other firms of the standing of whom the applicant firm claims to be a supplier/ contractor.
  • Likewise, the applicant firm's bankers May also be requested to advise about the firm's financial standing.

i) If registration cannot be granted: In cases where the firm is not considered capable and registration/ enlistment cannot be granted, the concerned authority shall communicate the deficiencies and shortcomings directly to the firms, under intimation to the appellate authority.

Where a request for re-verification and review is made by the firm — along with any fee as prescribed and within the period prescribed by the Department — a review shall be undertaken.

Requests for re-verification after the expiry of the said period would be treated as a fresh application, and a processing fee, if any is prescribed, charged accordingly.

j) Grant of registration/ enlistment: If considered to be CAPABLE after carefully assessing and verifying credentials, the firm May be granted registration/ enlistment with the approval of the ca.

k) Scope of registration:

  • G Registration should be for specific trade groups of goods/ works/ services. For this purpose, all goods/ works/ services should be divided into trade groups, and the information published on the relevant portals/ websites.
  • W Enlistment should be for a specific category of works.

l) Validity period and provisional status:

G — GoodsW — Works
Validitya specified period (one to three years)A specified period (say three years), and would be considered for EXTENSION (on application by the contractor/ service provider) based on satisfactory performance of the firm
RenewalAt the end of this period, the registered supplier(s) willing to continue with registration is to apply afresh for renewal of registration
Provisional statusthe registration would be initially treated as provisional, and it would be treated as confirmed only after the firm has satisfactorily executed one order of the relevant category and value from the Procuring EntitySame rule, but "one CONTRACT of the relevant category and value"
Extension not a rightthe extension of validity of registration is not a matter of right, and the Procuring Entity reserves the right not to extend such registration without assigning any reason(same)
New entrantsNew supplier(s) May also be considered for registration at any time, provided they fulfil all the required conditions

m) Unique number and website display: All registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors should be allocated a unique registration/ enlistment number.

The list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors — indicating the names and addresses with details of the requirements and monetary value they will supply/ execute, as well as the VALIDITY PERIOD, and so on, for which they are registered/ enlisted — shall be exhibited on the websites of the Procuring Entity.

n) EMD exemption and its limits G: Within the monetary limits so prescribed, and also for the category of registration, the registered firm May be exempted from depositing the earnest money deposit (EMD).

In other categories and higher monetary limits, the supplier would be treated as any unregistered supplier and not be entitled to the privileges of a registered supplier.

O) monitoring performance and removal: The performance and conduct of every registered supplier/ enlisted contractor are to be monitored/ watched by the relevant Department.

The Procuring Entity should also reserve the right to remove firms who do not perform satisfactorily — even during the validity of registration/ enlistment (after giving due opportunity to the supplier/ contractor to make a representation) — if they:

  • Fail to abide by the terms and conditions of the registration/ enlistment, or
  • fail to execute contracts on time, or
  • supply substandard goods G / do substandard work W, or
  • make any false declaration to any Government agency, or
  • G For on public interest considerations / W For any ground which, in the opinion of the Government, is not in public interest.

P) right of reassessment: The Procuring Entity shall retain its option to reassess firms already registered/ enlisted at any later date, to satisfy itself with:

  • The current financial soundness/ creditworthiness,
  • facilities available, and so on.

Thereafter, the Procuring Entity May decide to retain them as registered suppliers for the requirements and monetary limit that were earlier considered, or with necessary changes as deemed fit.

In case of adverse reports from the team of Procuring Entity officers who reassess the firm, the Procuring Entity shall:

  • GWDELETE such firm from the registered suppliers'/ enlisted contractors' list;
  • CNC — delete or downgrade such firm from the registered suppliers'/ service providers' list.

3.10Debarment

(Rule 151 of GFR 2017)

3.10.1GFR Provisions

Registration of suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers AND their eligibility to participate in a Procuring Entity's procurements is subject to:

  • Compliance with the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement, and
  • satisfactory performance in contracts.

Rule 151 of GFR, 2017 states the following regarding 'debarment from bidding':

3.10.2Current Guidelines on Debarment

1. Origin: PPD, DoE did consultations on the issue of Debarment with major procuring Ministries/ Departments and issued the following 'debarment guidelines' in supersession of all earlier instructions on this subject (Notified vide OM No. F.1/20/2018-PPD issued by Department of Expenditure dated 02.11.2021).

Public Procurement organisations who have existing guidelines for debarment (by any name) should revise their guideline in conformity with these guidelines issued by PPD, DoE.

2. Two types of debarment:

TypeWho issues the order
I) debarment limited to a single MinistryThe Ministry itself can issue the appropriate Orders, thereby banning all its business dealing with the debarred firm
ii) Debarment EXTENDING beyond the jurisdiction of the Ministry — i.e., covering all Central ministries/ departmentsthe requisite orders shall be issued by the Department of Expenditure (DoE), Ministry of Finance (MoF)

3. Definitions:

TermDefinition
"Firm" / "bidder"have the same meaning for the purpose of these guidelines, which includes an individual or person, a company, a cooperative society, a hindu undivided family, and an association or body of persons — whether incorporated or not — engaged in trade or business
"Allied firm"All concerns which come within the sphere of effective influence of the debarred firms shall be treated as allied firms. In determining this, the factors listed in its definition in the 'Procurement Glossary' section may be kept in view
"Banning of a firm", "suspension", "black-listing"convey the same meaning as "debarment"

4. Alignment obligation: All ministries/ departments must align their existing debarment guidelines with these guidelines. Further, tender/ bidding documents must also be suitably amended, if required.

3.10.3Debarment by a SINGLE Ministry/ Department

Orders for Debarment of a firm(s) shall be passed by a Ministry/ Department, keeping in view the following:

a) Grounds and duration: A bidder (including its successors/ allied firms) May be debarred from participating in any procurement process for a period not exceeding two years (along with such other actions as may be permissible under law) for the following reasons:

  • i) If it is determined that the bidder has breached the Code of Integrity as per Rule 175 of GFRs 2017.
  • ii) false declaration of local content by Class-I/ Class-II local suppliers under the Public Procurement (Preference to Make in India) Order 2017, dated 16/09/2020 or later — shall also be treated as a breach of the Code of Integrity. A supplier who has been debarred by any procuring entity as per this sub-para:
  • The fact and duration of debarment for this reason by any procuring entity must be promptly brought to the notice of the member-convenor of the standing committee (joint Secretary, DPIIT, under the Make in India order) and the Department of Expenditure, through the concerned Ministry/ Department or in some other manner;
  • The standing committee shall consolidate such cases, and a centralised list or decentralised list of such suppliers with the period of debarment must be maintained on a periodical basis and displayed on the website(s);
  • Such suppliers — though debarred by a single Ministry/ Department — shall not be eligible for preference under the Make in India order for procurement by any other Procuring Entity for the duration of the debarment. This shall be effective from the date of uploading such debarment to the website(s).
  • iii) for any other actions or omissions by the firm that, in the opinion of the Ministry/ Department, warrants debarment.

B) jurisdiction of the order: The debarment order shall not be circulated to other ministries/ departments. It will only be applicable to all the attached/ subordinate offices, autonomous bodies, Central public sector undertakings (CPSEs), etc., of the Ministry/ Department issuing the debarment order.

c) Reasonable opportunity: The concerned Ministry/ Department, before ISSUING the debarment order against a firm, must ensure that reasonable opportunity has been given to the concerned firm to represent against such debarment — including a personal hearing if requested by the firm.

d) Competent Authority: The Secretary of the Ministry/ Department May nominate an officer at the rank of Joint Secretary/ Additional Secretary as Competent Authority (ca) to debar the firms.

e) List maintenance: The Ministry/ Department will maintain a list of such debarred firms, which will also be displayed on its website. Such a list on the website shall be automatically binding on the departments, subordinate and attached offices, autonomous bodies, and CPSEs under the Ministry — but in case of doubt, it can be confirmed by the issuing authority.

F) concurrent debarments: More than one Ministry/ Department May concurrently debar the same firm.

G) not a vigilance function: Debarment is an executive function and should not be allocated to the vigilance Department.

H) timeline for the debarment process: The period of debarment starts from the date of issue of the debarment order; Therefore, the process of debarment should be conducted expeditiously.

Considering the QUASI-JUDICIAL NATURE of such proceedings and the need to afford a fair hearing to the firm, the following timeline is SUGGESTED — which May be suitably modified considering the specifics of an organisation:

StepActivityTime
iNoticing of delinquency of the firm by the Procuring Entityzero-day
iiEvaluation of evidence and proposal to ca for debarment of the firm2 WEEKS
iiiIssue of show cause notice to the firm, calling for written and oral submission1 WEEK
ivtime for submission, including reminders, etc.3 WEEKS
vevaluation of firm's submission and giving oral hearing to the firm3 WEEKS
viFinal ORDER, indicating an opportunity to the firm — 2 weeks — to appeal to the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department as APPELLATE AUTHORITY2 WEEKS
total from zero-day, after which the debarment period starts12 WEEKS
viireceipt of appeal and disposal of the same by the appellate authority4 WEEKS

3.10.4Debarment by CPSEs, Attached Offices/ Autonomous Bodies, and GeM

ministries/ departments, at their option, May also delegate powers to debar bidders to their CPSEs, attached offices/ autonomous bodies, etc.

In such cases, the broad principles for debarment in para 3.10.3(a) to (h) above are to be kept in mind.

Debarments by such bodies shall be applicable only to the procurements made by such bodies.

Similarly, the Government E-marketplace (GeM) can also debar bidders for up to two years on its portal.

3.10.5Debarment ACROSS ALL Ministries/ Departments

In the following situations, the Ministry/ Department May consider debarring the firm from taking part in any tendering procedure floated by ALL The Central Government ministries/ departments:

a) Ground — conviction (Rule 151(i) of GFRs, 2017), for debarment up to three years:

  • i) under the prevention of Corruption Act, 1988; or
  • ii) the IPC, 1860/ Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita, 2023, or any other law for the time being in force, for causing any loss of life or property, or causing a threat to public health, as part of the execution of a Public Procurement contract.

B) the reference to DoE: The Ministry/ Department concerned should, after obtaining the approval of the Secretary concerned, forward to DoE a self-contained note setting out all the facts of the case and the justification for the proposed debarment, along with all the relevant papers and documents.

C) prior opportunity is mandatory: The Ministry/ Department, before forwarding the proposal to DoE, must ensure that reasonable opportunity has been given to the concerned firm to represent against such debarment — including a personal hearing if requested by the firm.

D) interim debarment: The firm shall remain debarred during the interim period till the final decision is taken by DoE — only in the Ministry/ Department forwarding such proposal.

For this purpose, the proposing Ministry shall issue an interim order debarring the firm from taking part in tendering procedures floated by their Ministry/ Department, following the procedure laid down in para 3.10.3 above.

Such order inter alia must mention that the Government reserves its right to further debar the firm from taking part in any tendering procedure floated across all the Central Government ministries/ departments, following due procedure.

E) doe's powers and timeline: DoE can also give additional opportunity, at their option, to the firm to represent against proposed debarment. DoE can also take suo-moto Action to debar the firms in certain circumstances.

DoE shall complete the process of debarment within 12 weeks after receiving the proposal from the concerned Ministry/ Department.

F) doe's order: DoE will issue the necessary orders for debarment for a period not exceeding three years for offences mentioned in Rule 151(i) of gfrs, 2017 — after satisfying itself that the proposed debarment across all the ministries/ departments is in accordance with the said Rule. This scrutiny is intended to ensure uniformity of treatment in all cases.

G) the Central list: DoE will maintain a list of such debarred firms, which will be displayed on the gem-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP). This list on CPPP shall be applicable to all ministries/ departments, attached and subordinate offices, CPSEs, and autonomous bodies — but in case of doubt, they May confirm it from the issuing authority.

H) absolute bar: No contract of any kind whatsoever shall be placed on the firm debarred by DoE — including its allied firms — during the period of debarment, by any Ministry/ Department/ attached/ subordinate offices of the Government of India, including autonomous bodies, CPSEs, etc., after the issue of a debarment order.

3.10.6Review and Revocation of Orders

A) automatic revocation on expiry: An order for debarment passed shall be deemed to have been automatically revoked on the expiry of the period of debarment specified therein — and it will not be necessary to issue a specific formal order of revocation.

b) Early review/ revocation: The AUTHORISED ENTITY (DoE, Ministry/ Department, or CPSEs, Attached Offices/ Autonomous Bodies, GeM, etc.) that ISSUED the order of debarment can review or revoke the debarment order before the period of debarment is over:

  • Suo-moto (based on new facts that come to light), or
  • on an appeal by the debarred bidder.

After a review, an order for modification of the period of debarment or revocation of debarment — if there is adequate justification for the same — can be issued.

Approval levels:

  • Ordinarily, such modification/ revocation of the Order should be done with the approval of the Secretary concerned of doE or the Ministry/ Department that issued such orders.
  • In case of debarments done by CPSEs, attached offices/ autonomous bodies, GeM, etc., such modification/ revocation of the debarment orders should be done only with the approval of at least a board-level officer.

3.10.7Other Provisions (Common to BOTH Types of Debarment)

a) Contents of the order: The debarment order shall MENTION:

  • The reason(s) in brief that led to the debarment of the firm,
  • The jurisdictional extent to which the order shall be applicable, and
  • The validity period of debarment.

B) the bar on contracts, and the two cut-off dates: No contract of any kind whatsoever shall be placed with a debarred firm — including its allied firms — after the issue of a debarment order by the entities in the jurisdiction mentioned in the order.

Bids from only such firms shall be considered for placement of contract which are:

  • Neither debarred on the date of opening of tenderopening of the first bid, normally called the technical bid, in case of two-packet/ two-stage tendering
  • nor debarred on the date of contracti.e., date of issue of the Letter of Acceptance.

Even in the cases of risk purchase, no contract should be placed on such debarred firms.

C) treatment of a debarred firm's bid: If any debarred firm submits the bid, it will be ignored. In case such firm is lowest (L-1), the next lowest firm shall be considered as L-1. Bid Security submitted by such debarred firms shall be returned to them.

d) No retrospective effect on existing contracts: Contracts concluded before the issue of the debarment order shall not be affected by the debarment orders.

E) automatic extension to allied firms and JV partners: The debarment shall be automatically extended to all its allied firms. In case a joint venture/ consortium is debarred, all partners will also stand debarred for the period specified in the debarment order. The names of partners should be clearly specified in the "debarment order".

F) no impact on other legal rights: Debarment in any manner does not impact any other contractual or other legal rights of the procuring entities.

g) Commencement — two different dates:

  • For the issuing entity: The period of debarment shall start from the date of issue of the debarment order.
  • For other procuring entities: The debarment takes effect prospectively from the date of uploading on the website(s), in such a manner that ongoing procurements are not disrupted.

H) minimum period: Ordinarily, the period of debarment should not be less than six months.

i) GeM Suspension under the Incidence Management Policy [W + C + NC — not in G]:

The GeM portal also has a provision for suspension — debarring vendors'/ service providers' participation in procurements of ALL The buyers — under its incidence management policy.

the reasons and periods for suspension are different than in the provisions mentioned above.

However, if a Procuring Entity feels that the period of suspension by GeM is not adequate, it May also debar the firm as per the procedure mentioned in this section for a more appropriate period — but such debarment shall be applicable ONLY To procurements by that Procuring Entity.

j) Undertakings from bidders on debarment status [G — not in W/C/NC]:

It is noticed that many procuring entities take undertakings from the bidders with respect to their debarment status/ period. Such undertakings, if taken, must be in conformity with the debarment guidelines, as above, to avoid any possible confusion.

k) Alignment obligation WCNC: All ministries/ departments must align their existing debarment guidelines in conformity with these guidelines. Further, bidding documents must also be suitably amended, if required.

3.10.8Safeguarding the Procuring Entity's Interests during Debarment

Suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers are important assets for the procuring entities, and punishing delinquent suppliers should be the last resort.

  • It takes a lot of time and effort to develop, register and mature a new supplier.
  • In case of a shortage of suppliers in a particular group of materials/ equipment/ services, such punishment May also hurt the interest of the Procuring Entity.

Therefore:

  1. The Procuring Entity May always seek the views of the concerned Department regarding the repercussions of such punitive action on the continuity of procurements.
  2. The Procuring Entity May give due weightage to the past performance of the supplier/ consultant/ service provider.
  3. In case of a shortage of suppliers and in cases of less serious misdemeanours, the Procuring Entity May:
  4. Pragmatically analyse the circumstances,
  5. reform the supplier, and
  6. get a written commitment from the supplier that his performance will improve.
  7. If this fails, efforts should be made to see if:
  8. [G, c, nc] — a shorter period of debarment can serve the purpose;
  9. W — A temporary Debarment can serve the purpose.

3.11Enlistment of Indian Agents

(Rule 152 of GFR 2017)

ministries/ departments, if they so require, May enlist Indian agents who desire to quote directly on behalf of their foreign principals.

Detailed guidelines on Indian Agents of foreign suppliers are contained in Annex-1 to the Integrity Pact Annexure of each Manual — "Guidelines for Indian Agents of Foreign Suppliers".

Appendix to Chapter 3 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 3 (before Bidding Design) · w: Chapter 8 (after Contract Execution)
2Chapter titleG:Supplier Relationship Management · W:Registration/ Enlistment of Contractors and Governance Issues · C/NC:Participation of Bidders and Governance Issues
3Relationship Management sectionG (3.1) + W (8.1) only — absent in C/NC
4Eligibility Criteria for ParticipationC (3.1) + NC (3.1) only — absent in G/W
5Legal Status of Bidders (individuals, firms, NGOs, specialised agencies, sub-contracting, consortium/ JV)C (3.2) + NC (3.2) only
6JV/C discouraged in QCBS/ QOP procurementNC only
7Demerged entities — five-year use of parent credentials (DoE OM F.8/78/2023-PPD dated 12.10.2023)NC only
8Rule 177 GFR bar on direct engagement of retired Government servants as consultantsC only (NC states the substance without citing Rule 177)
9Canons of Financial Propriety re-stated in this chapterC (3.3.1) + NC (3.3.1) — in G/W it is at para 1.9
10RTI and Proactive Disclosures re-stated in this chapterC (3.3.2) + NC (3.3.2) — in G it is at para 1.12; absent from W entirely
11CIPP broken into four numbered sub-sections (Introduction; the Code; Proactive Disclosures; Punitive Provisions)W only (8.2.1–8.2.4)
12CIPP declaration signed at "Need Assessment" vs "Preparation of Estimates"G/C/NC: Need Assessment · W: Preparation of Estimates
13CIPP declaration expressly extended to SUB-CONTRACTORS engaged by the bidderW only
14Professionalism and Unfair Competitive Advantage; the three consultancy disqualification rulesC only
15Punitive debarment period under CIPPG/w/nc: Not less than six months (a floor) · c: Not exceeding two years (a ceiling)
16CCI reference filed by whomG/W/NC: Joint Secretary level officer · C: the Competent Authority
17"Recovery of payments including advance payments"G, W, NC — C omits "including advance payments"
18Integrity Pact — tri-partite arrangement with sub-contractorsC only
19IP format may be updated to incorporate latest procurement instructionsG + W · C/NC instead say Ministries and CPSEs may use the format with suitable changes
20Annex-2 to Integrity PactG:Extract of Standard Operating Procedure · W/C/NC:Appointment and Role of IEMs
21Grievance redressal — "ambiguity in contract terms" placed as a separate paragraphW (para 4) · G/C/NC place it as item (ix) within the "not subject to review" list
22Rate Contract holders named in the "private purchases" risk rowG only
23Registration/ Empanelment/ Pre-qualification — three concepts distinguishedG, C, NC
24Registration vs Enlistment — two concepts distinguishedW only
25Mandatory pre-bid registration on e-procurement portal/ CPPP with five data fields (Name, Address, PAN, DSC, GSTIN)W only
26CPWD/ MES enlistment practice; MoR and MoRTH cited; Rs 20 crore ceiling on empanelled-only tenderingW only
27Sharing of registered/ enlisted/ debarred contractor data through CPPP; unique identification by PAN by NIC/ MeitYW only
28Five categories for registration of suppliers of goods (manufacturers, agents, foreign manufacturers, stockists, importers)G only
29Categories of works for enlistment (Civil, Electrical, Horticulture, Nursery)W only
30In-house testing facility prerequisite; MSE relaxation; ISO 9001-2000 treatmentG only
31Grade A/B/C monetary limits (Rs 25 lakh / Rs 5–25 lakh / Rs 1–5 lakh)G only
32CPWD Class-I(Super) to Class-V tendering limits (Rs 650 crore down to Rs 40 lakh)W only
33Sole selling agent registration conditions; above-Rs-5-lakh manufacturers-or-authorised-agents ruleG only
34Partly outsourced arrangements — registration void retrospectivelyG only
35Re-verification request permitted only after six MONTHSC + NC state it expressly · W says "say, within six months" · G silent
36Validity of registrationG: one to three years, apply afresh for renewal · W: say three years, extension on application based on satisfactory performance
37EMD exemption within monetary limit; treated as unregistered beyond it; security deposit insteadG only
38Adverse reassessment consequenceG/W: DELETE from list · C/NC: DELETE or downgrade
39Full registration procedure reproducedG (16 sub-paras) + W (17 paras) · C/NC reproduce an abridged version and cross-refer to para 3.6 of the Goods Manual
40Debarment section titleG: Suppliers · W: Contractors · C: "Suppliers" (apparent template carry-over) · NC: Service Providers
41Rule 151(a)(ii) statute citedG: IPC 1860 (with BNS footnote) · W/C/NC: Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita directly
42"Ministry/ Department will maintain such list … displayed on their website" added to Rule 151(c)W + NC
43Footnote that "now two years is applicable" against the three-year period in Rule 151(b)W only
44GeM Suspension under Incidence Management PolicyW + C + NC — absent from G
45Undertakings from bidders regarding debarment status must conform to the GuidelinesG only
46Closing safeguard — remedy if reform failsG/C/NC: a SHORTER PERIOD of debarment · W: a TEMPORARY debarment
47Rule number cited for Indian Agents footnoteG + C print "Rule 52" (evident typo) · W + NC correctly print "Rule 152"

end of Chapter 3

Chapter 4 — Part a

Bidding Design

Part IContracts, Selection Systems and Channels

Agency for Procurement · Admeasurement · Types of Contracts · Systems of Selection · Tendering Systems · Channels of Procurement

Merging: Goods Ch. 4 (Modes of Procurement and Tendering Systems) · Works Ch. 3 (Bidding Design for Works) · Consultancy Ch. 4 (Bidding Design for Consultancy Services) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 4 (Bidding Design for Non-Consultancy Services)

Structural Warning for Students

This block is CHAPTER 4 in Goods, Consultancy and Non-Consultancy — but CHAPTER 3 in Works.

(The reverse of the trap in the previous chapter, where governance was Ch. 3 in three Manuals but Ch. 8 in Works.)

This is also the chapter of greatest substantive divergence between the four Manuals. Three whole apparatus exist in only one Manual each:

ApparatusExists only in
Agency for Procurement (pWO/ PSU/ works Committee)Works
Admeasurement of Services (input vs output)Non-Consultancy
Rate Contract / Framework Agreement, Approved Vendor List, Proprietary Article Certificate, Direct ProcurementGoods(covered in Part B)

And "Types of Contracts" does not exist at all in the Goods Manual — goods procurement has no contract-type taxonomy, because it uses Rate Contracts and supply orders instead.

Because of the volume, this chapter is issued in two parts:

  • PART A (this document) — Agency, Admeasurement, Types of Contracts, Systems of Selection, Tendering Systems, Channels of Procurement.
  • PART B — Modes of Procurement (OTE, GTE, rc/fa, eRA, PQB, AVL, LTE, SLTE, PAC, STE, direct Procurement, Quotations, Stalled Contracts).

Concordance for Chapter 4 — Part A

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
4.1Agency for Procurement3.1
4.2Admeasurement of Services4.1
4.3Types of Contracts — (none)3.24.14.2
4.4Systems of Selection — (none)3.34.24.3
4.5Tendering Systems4.14–4.163.44.44.5
4.6Channels of Procurement4.173.54.54.6
Part BModes of Procurement4.1–4.133.6–3.144.34.4

4.1Agency for Procurement [W ONLY]

1. The three routes (Rule 133 of GFR, 2017): Rule 133 permits Ministries/ Departments at its discretion to assign execution of their original and repair works as follows: a) directly by the Ministry/ Department; b) public works organisations (PWO); c) public sector undertaking (PSU)/ Organisations set up to execute Works.

2. Directly by the Ministry/ Department: A Ministry or Department at its discretion May directly execute repair works estimated to cost up to rupees sixty (60) LAKH, after following the due procedure 'laid down for Execution of Works' (Rules 139, 159 and 160 of GFR 2017).

4.1.1Public Works Organisations (PWO)

A Ministry or Department May, at its discretion, assign:

  • REPAIR WORKS estimated to cost above Rupees SIXTY (60) LAKH, and
  • original/ minor works of any value

to any public Works Organisation (PWO) such as:

4.1.2Public Works PSU/ Organisations

As an alternative, a Ministry or Department May assign repair works estimated to cost above rupees sixty (60) lakh and original works of any value to: A) any public sector undertaking (PSU) set up by the Central or State Government to carry out civil or electrical works; Or b) to any other Central/ State Government organisation/ PSU which May be notified by the Ministry of housing and urban affairs (MoHUA) for such purpose, after evaluating their financial strength and technical competence.

4.1.3Procedure for Assigning Work to PWO or PSU/ Organisations

1. Competition among PSUs — and the PMC characterisation: For the assignment of work to PSUs, the Ministry/ Department shall ensure competition among all such eligible PSUs/ ORGANISATIONS.

This competition shall be essentially on the lump sum service charges to be claimed for execution of work.

The award of work to a PSU should be taken as project management consultancy (pmc), and the concerned PSU shall be treated as a consultancy firm. Relevant methods (QCBS, LCS etc.) for procurement of consultancy will be applicable.

2. Nomination basis: In exceptional cases, for assignment of work on nomination basis to a PSU, the conditions for nomination basis would apply. The work under these circumstances shall also be assigned only on a lump sum basis.

3. Sanctions and execution(Rule 140, GFR 2017): For original works and repair works entrusted under paras 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 above, the administrative approval and expenditure sanction shall be accorded and funds allotted by the concerned authority in accordance with the sanctioning sequence of Chapter 2.

The PWO or the PSU or any organisation allotted work shall then execute the work entrusted to it in accordance with the Rules and procedures prescribed in their own organisation.

4. Memorandum of Understanding (MoU): An MoU May be drawn with the PWO or the PSU for proper execution of work.

The MoU should spell out:

  • the OBLIGATIONS on the part of the PWO or PSU regarding execution of works as per proper specifications, and
  • for maintaining proper quality and speed of execution of works;
  • Different stages at which funds shall be released to the PWO should also be clearly spelt out.

Such MoU would normally be for a specific standalone work, but could also be for a project consisting of a collection of related works.

5. Long-term framework MoU: In case of MoU with PWOs, it could also be a long-term framework moU.

6. The Works Committee: For execution of any work under Paras 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 above, the Ministry/ Department shall constitute a "Works Committee" — whether on an ad hoc or standing basis — comprising:

  • representatives of the ADMINISTRATIVE WING,
  • representatives of the FINANCE WING, and
  • an officer possessing technical skills and experience of framing estimates and execution of works.

If need be, members May be co-opted from: the User Department; CPWD/ PWOs/ PSUs; or any technically sound Government agency such as a relevant National Institute of Technology (NIT)/ Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) or a relevant National Research Institute, etc.

The Works Committee shall:

  • Ensure observance of due process in the planning and execution of works;
  • Check the reasonability of the estimates and other technical details; And
  • monitor the execution of the works.

4.2Admeasurement of Services [NC ONLY]

Non-consultancy services are bid and contracted on the total price (UNIT RATE × quantum) of the delivered services (of requisite performance standards) — much like procurement of goods and works.

The QUANTUM of services can be ascertained by EITHER:

  • measuring the INPUTS DEPLOYED by the service provider → INPUT ADMEASUREMENT; or
  • measuring the output of services delivered → output admeasurement.

4.2.1Input Admeasurement

1. The quantum of services can be ascertained by measurement of the inputs — personnel, equipment, materials, and miscellaneous inputs — deployed during a period (say per month) by the service provider.

2. What the contract specifies:

  • the UNIT RATE, and
  • the ESTIMATED QUANTUM (per period — say per day/ month) of various inputs required to be deployed to deliver the required quantum of services of requisite performance standards.
  • The contract would also specify the SERVICE CHARGES (including profits, overheads, etc.) and taxes over and above such input unit rates.

Financial evaluation is based on the total price of the indicated quantum of various inputs at the contracted unit rate, plus service charges and taxes.

3. The monitoring burden: Input admeasurement requires more vigilant and constant monitoring of inputs deployed. The Procuring Entity must also monitor the performance standards, methodology employed and productivity of inputs to ensure Value for Money.

4. Where used: Input admeasurement is frequently used in time-based and indefinite delivery types of contracts for Services like:

5. Input Admeasured Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) The quality and scope of the Output/ deliverables is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the service provider to IGNORE the quality and scope of the services. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of contract.The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality, methodology and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payments should be released only against such certificates. Therefore, the service Level Agreement (SLA) becomes very important in such contracts.
b) productivity of inputs deployed is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the service provider to use paid staff in a dilatory and un-productive manner. This may lead to time and cost over-runs.Such contracts need to be closely monitored and administered by the Procuring Entity to ensure that the progress of the contract is commensurate with the time spent, and that the resources for which payment is claimed have actually efficiently and productively been deployed on the contract during the period. It may be worthwhile to lay down productivity linkage between the quantum of the output of services and input deployed in a period (say, cleaning of a quantum of area per day per cleaner deployed) as part of Performance Standards. A system of MONTHLY REPORTING of payouts and the quantum of work achieved by the service provider to the CA should be instituted to enable supervision. Such contracts should include an upper limit of total payments to be made to the service providers, to safeguard against excessive prolonging of time and payments. After this limit is reached — or the period of completion is exceeded — the ca should review the justification for the extension of the contract.

4.2.2Output-Admeasurement

1. Alternatively, the quantum of services can be ascertained by measurement of the quantum of outputs delivered of the required performance standards — numbers, length, area, volume, weight, value, etc., or a combination thereof — say, the area of office cleaned, or tonne-kilometre of transportation, or value of goods inspected.

2. Financial evaluation: The contract specifies a unit rate of the output of services, and the financial evaluation is done based on the total price of the indicated quantum of service at the contracted unit rate plus taxes.

3. Why it is preferred: Output admeasurement contracts are simpler to administer, since the Procuring Entity will only ascertain performance standards and the quantum. It need not monitor the inputs deployed and the methodology employed. Therefore, wherever feasible, output admeasurement should be the preferred choice.

4. However, in many services, it May be part of the quality assurance plan and SLA to ensure that a specified quantum of inputs is deployed for the services — although payments are still based on output admeasurement.

5. Where used: Depending on the situation, output admeasurement may be suitable mainly for lump-sum and percentage-based types of contracts, and in special circumstances for time-based and indefinite delivery types.

Suitable for Services like:

6. Output Admeasurement Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) insufficient deployment of resources: Service Provider may not deploy sufficient resources, which may lead to POOR QUALITY and TIME OVER-RUN.Stipulate in the tender document that the quantum of input deployments (personnel, equipment, materials, etc.) shall also be quoted — but shall be used only to monitor performance standards.
b) The QUALITY of the Output/ deliverables is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the service provider to Cut corners on quality of the output/ deliverables by saving on resources employed. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of Output/ deliverables.Such contracts should be used mainly for contracts in which the quality and scope of the required output are clearly defined and are measurable. The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payment should be made only against certificate of acceptance of deliverables. It's important to include a service Level Agreement in such contracts.
c) time and cost over-run: As time is not linked to the payment, there may be a tendency for the service provider to save on deployment of resources, which may result in time-over-run.While the payments are not linked to time, the contract should be monitored per month to ensure that the output per month is in line with planned and estimated time-line. This type of contract should include an upper limit of total payments to safeguard against excessive prolonging of time and payments. After this limit is reached, or the period of completion is exceeded, the CA should review the justification for the extension of the contract.

4.3Types of Contracts

4.3.1The Common Opening PropositionWCNC

1. There are various alternative bases for linking payments to the performance of a contract (called types of contracts) — each having different risks and mitigation measures.

  • Bids are called and evaluated based on the type of contract.
  • CNC add:The BOQ of the financial bid is designed specifically for each type of contract.
  • The choice of the type of contract should be based on value-for-money (VfM), with due regard to the nature of work/ requirement.
  • Adoption of an inappropriate type of contract could lead to a situation of lack of competition, contractual disputes and non-performance/ failure of the contract.
  • W adds:Standard forms for all the types of contracts mentioned below are available with public works organisations like CPWD, and the same May be used for calling the tenders.

4.3.2The Three Taxonomies Compared

W — WORKS (7 types)C — CONSULTANCY (5 types)NC — NON-CONSULTANCY (4 types)
a) Lump sum (Firm Fixed Price) contracta) Lump sum (Firm Fixed Price) contracta) Lump sum (Firm Fixed Price) contract
b) Item Rate (Unit Rate) contractb) Time based (Retainer-ship) contractb) Time based contract
c) Percentage Rate contractc) Percentage (Success Fee) contractc) Percentage (Success Fee) contract
d) Piece Work contractd) Retainer-ship cum Success fee-based contractd) Indefinite delivery contract
e) Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) contracte) Indefinite delivery contract
f) Public Private Partnership (PPP)

4.3.3WORKS — the Seven TypesW

A. Lump Sum (Fixed Price) Contract

1. In this type of contract, bidders are required to quote a lump sum fixed price figure for completing the works in accordance with the given designs, specifications and functional requirements.

  • Bidder's price is deemed to include all elements of cost — no arithmetical correction or price adjustments are allowed during evaluation and execution.
  • Lump sum contracts are easy to administer because it is a fixed price for a fixed scope, and payments are linked to clearly specified outputs/ milestones.

2. Quality risk: There may be a tendency for the Contractor to cut corners on quality and scope of work by saving on resources employed. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of work. The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of work, and a certificate for its acceptability May be recorded.

3. Time risk: As time is not linked to the payment, there may be a tendency for the Contractor to save on deployment of resources, which may result in time over-run. While the payments are not linked to time, the assignment should be monitored per month to ensure that the progress of work per month is in line with the planned and estimated timeline.

4. Where suitable: Lump sum service contracts should be used mainly for assignments in which the quality, scope and timing of the work are clearly defined.

Lump sum contracts May be used where the works can be defined in their full physical and qualitative characteristics, and risk for change in quantity or specification, and unforeseen difficulties and site conditions (for example, hidden foundation problems) are minimal.

Thus suitable for:

In the latter case, the Department shall spell out the requirements in detail to enable the contractor to prepare his designs and drawings accordingly and submit them to the Procuring Entity for check and approval before construction.

5. Schedule of Rates still relevant: A Schedule of Rates (sor) May still be specified in order to regulate the amounts to be added to or deducted from the fixed sum on account of additions and alterations to drawings, designs and specifications not covered by the contract.

6. Payment: The contractor shall be paid from time to time as per the Schedule specified in the contract, or the full amount on completion of the work. The billing Schedule shall be commensurate with the actual work done, and the risk of front-loading strictly guarded against.

7. Measurements: Detailed measurements of work done in a lump sum contract are not required to be recorded — except in respect of additions and omissions. No reference is made in the contract to the departmental estimate of the work, prevailing sor, or the quantities of work to be done. Payment of additions and omissions is regulated by the prevailing sor as agreed upon while approving the tender or the rates.

B. Item Rate (Unit Rate) Contract

1. For item rate tenders, contractors are required to quote a rate for each individual item (detailed sub-activity) comprising a work, on the basis of the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) provided by the Procuring Entity in the bid documents.

This is the most commonly used contract type for civil works.

2. Payment and variations: The payment is made at the rate set out in the contract for the measured quantity.

Extent of variation in BOQ quantitiesTreatment
REASONABLE variations — typically ±10% to ±15%Can be allowed during the execution in terms of the contract
SLIGHTLY LARGER variation — typically ±25% to ±30%competent Authority's sanction is required
Where the variation exceeds the prescribed limitThe contract generally provides that either (a) the Procuring Entity May revise the rate with mutual agreement (often based on analysis of current market rates), or (b) the work beyond the limit May be treated as a new item, requiring approval at appropriate levels

3. Where suitable: Suitable for all types of major works such as buildings, bridges, culverts, roads, sewer lines, irrigation works — and carries the least risk of uncertainty for the parties.

4. Prerequisite: Specifications, design, drawings and contract conditions — including availability of land, forest clearance, social and environmental impact assessment, where applicable — have to be critically appraised before the initiation of the procurement process, in order to minimise the incidence of internal inconsistencies, variations, and situations of claims/ disputes or contract failure.

C. Percentage Rate Contract

1. For percentage Rate Contract, the contractors are required to quote a rate as an overall percentage above or below the total estimated cost.

2. Where suitable: This type works best when the work does not involve major design process and directions, and simple drawings are sufficient for execution. It saves on the time and effort of detailed design before the procurement process.

Can be used for:

3. Billing: Bills for percentage rate contracts shall be prepared at the estimated rates for individual items only, and the percentage excess or less shall be added or subtracted from the gross amount of the bill. The payment is made for the measured quantity.

Contract provisions are made to determine the price of the items not included in sor. In the absence of a standard Schedule of Rates, a project-specific Schedule of items and their rates is drawn.

D. Piece Work Agreement

1. In a piece work agreement, bidders quote and are paid for each piece (or unit) of a work element — neither the complete work as in lump-sum contract, nor as granular a work element as in item Rate Contract — without necessarily providing detailed quantities upfront.

The Procuring Entity has flexibility to put an end to the piece work agreement at his option at any time. It incentivises productivity of the contractor and cost control for the Procuring Entity.

2. Two main uses:

A) anticipatory work commencement: In cases where it is necessary to start the work in anticipation of formal acceptance of a detailed contract, a piece work agreement May be drawn — and the agreement May be cancelled as soon as the regular contract is signed.

b) for ongoing requirements: For ongoing requirements — i.e., pipes, laying of sewerage, maintenance of colonies/ facilities etc. — quotations are called periodically, and a running piece work agreement is drawn up as a result of those quotations, usually for a period of one year. The agreement provides for payment of stipulated rates only when it refers to such quantity of time, and also stipulates that the Procuring Entity May put an end to the agreement at his option at any time.

3. Important provisions of such contracts:

A) quality assurance: Contractor might prioritise speed over quality to maximise earnings. Therefore, the contract must clearly define the quality standards each unit of work must meet to be acceptable. Implement processes for inspecting and approving completed work before payment. Define the scope of work meticulously to prevent misunderstandings. Maintain open lines of communication with contractors to address issues promptly. Establish KPIs to monitor progress and quality.

B) payment terms: Specify the payment rate per unit of work and any conditions that might affect this rate. Outline when payments will be made (e.g., upon completion of each unit, weekly, monthly).

C) termination clauses: Include a clause that allows the Procuring Entity to terminate the contract at their option at any time. Specify any notice period required and obligations upon termination.

D) labour laws: There's a potential for unfair labour practices if not properly managed. Therefore, the contract must stipulate strict compliance with local labour regulations, including minimum wage requirements and worker protections.

E) documentation: Keep thorough records of work completed and payments made for transparency and legal purposes.

E. Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contracts

1. What it is: The EPC approach — also called 'design & build' contracts — relies on assigning the responsibility for investigations, design and construction to the contractor for a lump sum price determined through competitive bidding.

The objective is to ensure implementation of the project to specified standards with a fair degree of certainty relating to costs and time, while transferring the construction risks to the contractor.

2. Policy push: On the recommendations of niti aayog, the cabinet committee on economic affairs (ccea) has recommended that item rate contracts May be substituted by EPC contracts wherever appropriate (NITI Aayog OM No. N-14070/14/2016-PPPAU dated September 05, 2016).

3. Output specifications, not construction specifications: Unlike the normal practice of construction specifications, the technical parameters in the EPC agreement are based mainly on output specifications/ performance standards.

The Procuring Entity specifies only the core requirements of design and construction that have a bearing on the quality, durability, reliability, maintainability and safety of assets — and enough room is left for the contractor to add value. The contractor has full freedom to design and plan the construction Schedule using best practices.

4. Risk allocation:

RiskBorne by
Soil conditions and weather; Commercial and technical risks relating to design and constructionthe contractor
delays in handing over the land · approvals from local authorities · environment clearances · shifting of utilities · approvals in respect of engineering plansthe Procuring Entity

5. Selection, price and the 10% variation ceiling: Selection of the contractor is based on open competitive bidding. All project parameters — contract period, price adjustments and technical parameters — are to be clearly stated upfront, and short-listed bidders are required to specify only the lump sum price for the project. The bidder who seeks the lowest payment is awarded the contract.

The contract price is subject to adjustment on account of price variation during the contract period as per a specified formula.

It also lays down a ceiling of 10 (ten) per cent of contract price to cater for any changes in the scope of project, the cost of which the Procuring Entity will bear.

  • Once this ceiling is reached, no further variations shall be issued under the existing contract.
  • Any additional requirement beyond this limit must be procured separately through a competitive bidding process, so as to preserve transparency, fairness, and Value for Money.
  • In exceptional cases where continuity of work demands that the existing contractor execute such additional scope, this shall be permitted only through a formally approved supplemental agreement, with revised price and timelines duly concurred by the Competent Authority and finance.
  • The original contractor shall, however, be required to extend reasonable cooperation to ensure coordination with any other agency engaged for excess works.

Suggested eligibility criteria for EPC tenders:

A) technical capacity: The bidder has received payments for construction of eligible projects over the past five financial years preceding the bid due date. The payment amounts should be at least:

  • i) 60% of the estimated project cost from one eligible project; or
  • ii) 40% of the estimated project cost from each of two eligible projects; or
  • iii) 30% of the estimated project cost from each of three eligible projects.

b) financial capacity: The bidder should possess a minimum net worth of at least 15% of the estimated project cost at the close of the preceding financial year. If the bid due date falls within three months of the closing of the latest financial year, that year can be ignored for calculation purposes.

C) eligible works for EPC tenders specifically refer to construction projects directly awarded by either a Government Ministry or Department, or by a public listed company. The latter should be listed on major Indian stock exchanges, such as the nse or the bse.

In the case of awards from public listed companies, the tender documents need to clearly outline specific financial requirements. This includes detailing the average annual turnover of the company over a defined period — typically the past three or five years. Additionally, the tender should specify a minimum duration for which the company must have been registered — for example, a period of five years. This stipulation is aimed at ensuring that the awards considered for eligibility come from established and financially sound entities.

6. Design review process: The selected Contractor carries out survey and investigations and also develops designs and drawings in conformity with the specifications and standards laid down in the Agreement.

The Procuring Entity's engineer (also called owner's engineer) reviews the design and drawings to ensure that these conform to the scope of the project, design standards and specifications.

Any comments by the Procuring Entity on the design proposals submitted by the contractor are to be communicated in totality once, in a time-bound manner as indicated in the Schedule. The contractor is free to proceed with construction after the expiry of the specified period, in case no remarks/ clearances are given by the Procuring Entity.

7. Shifting of utilities: The contractor is also responsible for shifting of any utility (electric lines, water pipes, telephone cables etc.) to an appropriate location or alignment — if the utilities are under the purview of the Procuring Entity and adversely affect or infringe the execution of works.

This requirement should be part of the tender document, so as to avoid such a requirement at a later stage that May lead to amending the scope of work.

For utilities not owned by the Procuring Entity, the concerned organisation under whose ambit such utilities fall shall be intimated by the Procuring Entity for shifting, and the price of shifting shall be paid to the organisation by the Procuring Entity. If there is delay in shifting of the utilities for which the contractor is not accountable, reasonable time extension May be given to the contractor.

8. Liquidated Damages and bonus: The contractor is liable to pay Liquidated Damages (LD) for each day of delay beyond the specified date of completion — subject to the total amount of damages not exceeding 10 (ten) per cent of the contract price.

However, the contractor is entitled to time extension arising out of delays on account of change of scope and Force Majeure, or delays caused by or attributable to the Procuring Entity.

If so provided in the Bid Document, the Procuring Entity is also liable to pay a bonus (normally should not exceed ten per cent) to the Contractor for completion of the project before the scheduled completion date.

If delays have happened in achieving the individual milestones but the overall project completion is within time, then LD deducted should be refunded (without any interest).

9. Supervision: Monitoring and supervision of construction are undertaken through the Procuring Entity's engineer — a qualified firm selected through a transparent process — acting as a single window for coordination with the contractor.

10. Staged payment, defects liability and grace period: Each item of work is further sub-divided into stages, and payment based on output specifications and performance standard is to be made for each completed stage of work.

  • A defects liability period of two years May be specified in the agreement in order to provide additional comfort to the Procuring Entity.
  • A grace period of say 30 days for achieving the individual project milestones as per payment schedule May be provided in the tender document, so that any unavoidable delay may be covered during the grace period. The applicability of Liquidated Damages would be beyond the grace period.

11. Model documents: FIDIC (Fédération Internationale Des Ingénieurs-Conseils — an International Federation of Consulting Engineers, known by its French acronym) has also published such contractual frameworks.

Model EPC contract documents have been developed for highways and railways and published by the erstwhile planning commission. NHAI has already adopted these documents, and all construction contracts are currently being structured on this model. The Ministry of railways has also started using such documents. Model bidding documents and Model EPC contracts, suitably revisited or modified wherever required to suit the requirements of particular sectors, may be adopted.

12. Capability of the Owner's Engineer: The selected Procuring Entity's Engineer (Consultant) has to have good experience in design, project supervision and works management.

The Procuring Entity organisation must have an experienced team (Works Committee) to super-check the quality of supervision exercised by the owner's engineer — including quality of design review, site supervision, quality audits, etc. Periodic audits of the Procuring Entity's engineer's functioning are desirable.

13. Third-party consultant: In complex projects, a third-party consultant be deployed for specific tasks like design audit, quality audits, safety audits, etc., to cross-check the Procuring Entity's engineer's diligence in the process.

14. Change of Scope and the right to match: The tender document should consist of provisions of change of scope in terms of specifications, omission of any work from the Scope of the Project, or any additional work. However, the total value of all change of scope orders should be limited (SAY 10%) of the contract price.

In the event the parties are unable to agree to the proposed change of scope, the Procuring Entity May award such works or services to any other party — preferably on the basis of open competitive bidding.

The contractor should have the option of matching the first-ranked bid in terms of the selection criteria, subject to payment of a certain percentage (say 2%) of the bid amount to the Procuring Entity. Such an option is possible when the contractor also participated in the bidding process and its bid did not exceed the first-ranked bid by more than 10%.

15. Sub-contracting: Sub-contracting by the EPC contractor must be limited and should not exceed 50% of the contract price. Any work to be sub-contracted by the main contractor must be brought to the notice of the Procuring Entity.

16. Qualification of sub-contractor: Preceding 3 years, at least one work of a similar nature with a contract value exceeding 40% of the value of the sub-contract to be awarded, and received payments in respect thereof for an amount equal to at least 80% of such contract.

Provided, however, that in any event the contractor shall communicate the name and particulars to the Procuring Entity for any sub-contract, including the relevant experience, prior to entering into any such sub-contract. Overall responsibility of all works lies on the contractor.

17. General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management on EPC (OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021):

  1. In EPC contracts, since primary responsibility to execute the work lies with the EPC contractor, success of the project also depends upon the quality of the tender document — wherein enough clarity on the broad framework for execution of the work and the obligations of the contractor needs to be built in.
  2. Milestones for payment to the contractor should be fixed in a manner that facilitates smooth cash flow for the contractor as well as for progress of the work. Milestones fixed should avoid excessive front loading or back loading — i.e., amount of payment should be commensurate with stage-wise quantum of work/ cost incurred. Milestones for payment should also be linked with the deliverables.
  3. In case of EPC contracts, only general arrangement drawings and architectural control parameters should be part of the EPC tender document. Timelines for submission of drawings by the contractors and approval thereof by the Competent Authority should be clearly prescribed in the tender document, wherein damages for non-adherence of such timelines May also be incorporated.
  4. EPC contracts shall specify broad technical specification and key output parameters. Over-specification of design May lead to increase in cost. Technical specifications shall be framed in such a manner as to allow sufficient freedom to the contractor to optimise design. Provisions on the following should be included in commercial conditions:
  5. i) limitation of liability for procuring entity as well as contractor;
  6. ii) deviation limits and procedure for change of scope;
  7. iii) contract closing timelines and procedure to ensure timely closing of contract;
  8. iv) performance parameters and Liquidated Damages for shortfall in performance;
  9. v) RISK MATRIX and RESPONSIBILITIES of the contractor and the procuring entity.
  10. In addition, a latent defect period beyond the defect liability period May be included to protect the procuring entity and public authority interest in case of any design/ engineering defect after the defect liability period is over, wherever appropriate.
  11. To mitigate the risk involved in the methodology proposed by the contractor, the project executing authority shall either have an in-house engineering, quality assurance and project management expert, or alternatively hire an experienced engineer to intensively examine the proposal submitted by the contractor. Project executing authorities are to ensure that optimal technological solutions are provided by the contractor.
  12. To ensure quality, regular inspection and quality checks must be carried out. The project executing authority shall carry out stage inspections in manufacturing of critical equipment/ critical activities of the project.

F. Public Private Partnership (PPP)

PPP means an arrangement between:

  • A Government/ statutory entity/ government-owned entity on one side — the Sponsoring (PPP) Authority, or simply the Authority; and
  • A private sector entity on the other — a legal entity in which 51% or more of equity is with the private partner/s — the concessionaire

— for the creation and/ or management of public assets and/ or public services, through investments being made and/ or management being undertaken by the concessionaire, for a specified period of time (concession period) on commercial terms, where:

  • there is a well-defined allocation of risk between the concessionaire and the Authority; and
  • the concessionaire — who is chosen on the basis of a transparent and open competitive bidding — receives performance-linked payments that conform (or are benchmarked) to specified and pre-determined performance standards, measurable by the authority or its representative.

G. Comparison of Types of ContractsW

Contract TypePayment StructureScope FlexibilityRisk to ContractorCommon Use Cases
Lump Sum ContractFixed price for the entire projectLowHigh (if costs are underestimated)Simple, well-defined projects
Item Rate ContractPayment based on rates for units of work/ materialsHighMediumProjects with variable quantities
Percentage Rate ContractPayment based on a percentage of a standard scheduleMediumMediumProjects with standardised rates
Piece Work ContractFixed rate per unit of work completedMediumDepends on productivityDiscrete unit work, as in repair works
EPC ContractPayment for design, procurement, and constructionLow (complete facility delivery)High (responsible for entire project)Large, complex projects
PPP ContractPayment based on performance and availability of servicesMediumShared between public and private entitiesInfrastructure projects, public services

4.3.4CONSULTANCY and NON-CONSULTANCY — the Service Contract TypesCNC

A. Lump Sum (Firm Fixed Price) Contract

1. The lump sum (firm fixed price) contract is the simplest/ simpler form of contract, and wherever feasible the Procuring Entity shall use this form of contract.

Consultants/ service providers are required to quote a lump sum fixed price figure for completing the services in accordance with:

  • C the given Terms of Reference;
  • NC the given activity and services Schedule.

The proposal is deemed to include all prices — no arithmetical correction or price adjustments are allowed during evaluation.

The Terms of Reference/ Schedule of Requirement shall indicate the scope and quantum of services required.

2. Why easy to administer: Lump sum contracts are easy to administer because there is a fixed price for a fixed scope, and payments are linked to clearly specified outputs/ milestones/ deliverables — Csuch as reports, documents, drawings, bills of quantities, software programs and so on.

Bidders quote a lump sum price for the required quantum of services. They May also be asked to quote a unit rate for the consultancy output/ service, to be used in case of variation, etc.

3. The Schedule of requirement shall indicate the quantum of the outputs/ services, its performance standards, and the timeline/ milestones of its delivery. Contract May specify parts of payments to be released at specified timelines/ milestones.

4. Where used:

  • C Widely used for simple planning and feasibility studies, environmental studies, detailed design of standard or common structures, preparation of data processing systems, and so forth.
  • NC Not many services are amenable to lump-sum type of contracts. Depending on the situation, such contracts may be used for transport services, logistics, clearing and forwarding, courier services, drilling, aerial photography, satellite imagery, mapping, and similar operations.

5. Lump Sum Contracts — Risks and Mitigations C(NC cross-refers to its Output Admeasurement risk table):

RISKMITIGATION
1. The quality and scope of the Output/ deliverables is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the consultant to Cut corners on quality and scope of the output/ deliverables by saving on resources employed. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of assignment.Lump sum service contracts should be used mainly for assignments in which the quality, scope, and timing of the required output are clearly defined. The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payment should be made only against certificate of acceptance of deliverables.
2. Time over-run: As time is not linked to the payment, there may be a tendency for the consultant to save on deployment of resources, which may result in time-over-run.While the payments are not linked to time, the assignment should be monitored per month to ensure that the output per month is in line with the planned and estimated timeline.

B. Time-Based Contract — "Retainer-ship" C / "Unit-rate"NC

1. C In Time-based (Retainer-ship) contracts, payments are based on agreed hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates for staff (who in consultancy contracts are normally named) and on reimbursable items using actual expenses and/ or agreed unit prices.

The rates for staff include: Salary, social costs, overhead, fee (or profit), and — where appropriate — special allowances.

1. NC In Time-based (unit-rate) contracts, payments are based on agreed unit prices.This type of contract can be based either on input (more often) or output admeasurement.Payments are usually released every month for the quantum of inputs/ output actually performed.

2. C The Schedule of requirement shall indicate the quantum of inputs required — man-hours of different key and non-key personnel — qualifications of key personnel, reimbursable items, and the timeline/ milestones of its deliverables.

3. When to use time-based rather than lump sum — and the key distinction from Indefinite Delivery C:

Both time-based contracts AND indefinite delivery contracts are used when a lump sum contract is not feasible, due to difficulties in specifying:

  • the SCOPE/ LENGTH of consultancy services, or
  • the quantum of individual activities

— either because the inputs required for attaining the objectives of the requirement is difficult to assess, or because the services are tied up to contracts/ activities by others for which the completion period May vary.

4. Where used C: Widely used for complex studies, supervision of construction, advisory services, and most training assignments, etc.

5. Time-Based Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
1. The quality and scope of the Output/ deliverables — as in Lump-sum Contracts — is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the consultant to cut corners on quality, scope, and timing of the output/ deliverables by saving on resources employed.The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payments should be released only against such certificates.
2. Performance in each time period is not linked to the payment. There May be a tendency for the consultant to use paid staff in a dilatory and un-productive manner.Contracts need to be closely monitored and administered by the Procuring Entity to ensure that the progress of assignment is commensurate with the time spent, and that the resources for which payment is claimed have actually efficiently and productively been deployed on the assignment during the period. A system of MONTHLY REPORTING of payouts and quantum of work achieved by the consultant to the CA should be instituted to enable supervision.
3. Time and cost over-run is a major risk in Time-based contracts, as the payment is based on time, and delay May result in unanticipated benefit to the consultant and the assignment may get delayed.This type of contract should include an upper limit of total payments to be made to the consultants for the assignment, to safeguard against excessive prolonging of time and payments. After this limit is reached, or the period of completion is exceeded, the ca should review justification for extension of the contract.

C. Percentage (Success/ Contingency Fee) Contract

1. Percentage (success/ contingency fee) contracts directly relate the fees paid to the consultant/ service provider to the estimated or actual project cost, or actual value of assets/ transactions to be handled — e.g., project cost, or the cost of the goods procured or inspected.

The payment is made based on the value of assets/ transactions handled during the period.

2. The Schedule of Requirement shall indicate the estimated value of assets/ transactions to be handled, as well as the contract period (one year, unless otherwise stipulated) over which such volume shall be availed.

However, there shall be no firm commitment to avail the entire value of transactions within the contract period.

The final selection is made among the technically qualified consultants who have quoted the lowest percentage, while the notional value of assets is fixed.

3. Where used C: Commonly used for appropriate architectural services; Procurement and inspection agents.

4. Percentage Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
Quality and Scope not linked to payment (as in Lump-sum)Contract should include provision for evaluation of quality, scope and the timing of deliverables, and certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payment should be made only against certificate of acceptance of deliverables.
Time over-run — time not linked to paymentAssignment should be monitored per month to ensure output per month is in line with planned and estimated timeline.
Bias against economic solutions: Since the percentage payment is linked to the total cost of the project, in the case of architectural or engineering services, percentage contracts implicitly lack incentive for economic design and are hence discouraged.Therefore, the use of such a contract for architectural services is recommended only if it is based on a fixed target cost and covers precisely defined services.

D. Retainer and Success (Contingency) Fee Contract [C ONLY]

1. In Retainer and Success (Contingency) fee contracts, the remuneration of the consultant includes:

  • A retainer (time-based, monthly payment), and
  • a success fee (percentage-based) — the latter being normally expressed as a percentage of the estimated or actual project cost.

2. Where used: Widely used when consultants (banks or financial firms) are preparing companies for sales or mergers of firms — notably in privatisation operations. It can also be used for assignments related to organisational restructuring/ change.

3. Risks and Mitigations: All RISKS as applicable to both Percentage Contracts AND Time-Based contracts are encountered in this case. The same mitigation strategies as in both Percentage and Time-Based contracts may be adopted.

E. Indefinite Delivery Contract (Price Agreement)

1. These contracts are used when the Procuring Entity needs to have "on call" specialised services, the extent and timing of which cannot be defined in advance.

C adds:There is no commitment from the Procuring Entity for the quantum of work that May be assigned to the consultant.

The Procuring Entity and the firm agree on the unit rates to be paid, and payments are made periodically on the basis of the time/ quantum of service actually used during the period.

NC adds:This type of contract can be based either on input (more often) or output admeasurement.

2. Schedule of requirement: Shall indicate only a tentative estimate of the volume of required service/ outputs/ inputs, as well as the contract period (one year, unless otherwise stipulated) over which such volume is likely to be availed.

The services shall be availed on-call, as and when needed by the Procuring Entity, without any commitment regarding the volume of services.

The consultant/ service provider shall be selected based on the total price (unit rate multiplied by indicative volume) of such services/ inputs — including service charges and taxes — over the period of contract.

3. NC — the cross-monitoring rule: In case of OUTPUT ADMEASUREMENT contracts, if expressly STIPULATED in the Tender Document, the quantum of input deployments (Personnel, equipment etc.) shall also be called for — but shall be used only to monitor performance standards.

Similarly, in case of input admeasurement contracts, the quantum of services to be delivered per quantum of inputs deployed per day/ month May also be called for, to evaluate the quality and productivity of deployed inputs.

4. Where used: Commonly used to RETAIN "ADVISERS" or avail services 'ON-CALL' — for example:

5. Indefinite Delivery Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
1. Quality and Scope of the Output/ deliverables not linked to paymentContract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, with certificate for acceptability; Payments released only against such certificates.
2. Performance in each time period not linked to payment — tendency to use resources in a dilatory and un-productive mannerClose monitoring and administration; Monthly reporting of payouts and quantum of work achieved to the CA.
3. Time and cost over-run is a major risk, as the output may not be achieved in the estimated timeUpper limit of total payments; after the limit is reached or the period exceeded, CA should review justification for extension.
4. Risk of over-utilisation C: Indefinite Delivery Contracts are at risk of being over-utilised in excess of actual need, since the scrutiny of service need May not be as intense as in case of other types of contracts.The need assessment of utilised services should be subject to some scrutiny, to ensure that there is no abnormal unexplainable trend in utilisation. Such contracts need to be closely monitored to ensure that there is no indiscriminate or unwarranted usage, and a maximum contract value May be laid down to keep control over usage, with approval of ca obtained to extend beyond such limit. A system of MONTHLY REPORTING to CA should be instituted. In the report, a monthly payout benchmark May be kept, above which the report May be required to be sent to a level above ca.

4.4Systems of Selection

4.4.1The Common RationaleWCNC

1. Why different systems exist: The relative importance of quality and price aspects May vary from contractor to contractor/ assignment to assignment, depending on:

  • The complexities/ criticality of quality requirements;
  • The internal capability of the Procuring Entity to engage and supervise the contract; As well as
  • the value of procurements.

Hence different systems of selection are designed to achieve appropriate relative importance (weightage) of quality and price aspects.

The decision on the system of selection is normally preceded by an assessment of the capacity of the user to engage and supervise the implementation of the proposed contract. The selection method chosen depends to some extent on this assessment. Selection of the system of selection should also consider the likely field of bidders.

2. The four systems:

W — WorksC — ConsultancyNC — Non-Consultancy
a)Price based System — Least Cost Selection (LCS)Price based System — LCSPrice based System — LCS
b)Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)QCBSQCBS
c)Fixed Budget based Selection (FBS) (C only)
d)Direct Selection: Single Source Selection (SSS)Direct Selection: SSSDirect Selection: SSS

3. The default rule — and it differs by category:

  • W In the procurement of WORKS, the NORMAL system of selection used is PRICE-BASED — least Cost Selection (L1) — as in the procurement of Goods, for technically responsive offers. Under VERY SPECIAL circumstances, Single Source Selection may also be used. HOWEVER, the QCBS method has been ALLOWED to be used for procurement of Works for highly technically complex and critical assignments where it is justifiable to pay appropriately higher prices for a higher quality proposal.
  • C — the two-stage rule:Since the quality and scope of a consultancy assignment are not tangibly identifiable and consistently measurable, the technical and financial capability of consultants becomes an important — though indirect — determinant for quality and scope of performance. In such a situation, value for Money is achieved by encouraging wide and open competition among equally competent consultants.

Thus, selection of consultants is normally done in a two-stage process:

  • First stage: Likely capable sources are shortlisted, on the basis of qualification and experience requirements for the given assignment — if need be, through an 'Expression of Interest' (EoI) through advertisement.
  • Second stage: The shortlisted consultants are invited to submit their technical and financial (RfP) proposals, generally in separate sealed envelopes. Evaluation of the technical proposal is carried out by evaluators without access to the financial part of the proposal. Financial proposals are opened after evaluation of quality.

4.4.2Price Based System — Least Cost Selection (LCS)

(Rule 193 of GFR 2017)

1. How it works: In this method of selection, bidders submit both a technical proposal and a financial proposal at the same time.

  • Minimum qualifying marks for the quality of the technical proposal are prescribed as a benchmark — normally 75 (seventy-five) out of a maximum of 100 (hundred) — and indicated in the tender document/ RfP, along with a scheme for allotting marks for various technical criteria/ attributes.
  • Alternatively — since in LCS selection, technical offers do not require to be ranked (or to have weighted technical score added to financial score, as in QCBS) — it would suffice in appropriately simple cases if the evaluation criteria is only a fail/ pass criteria prescribing only the minimum qualifying benchmark.
  • The technical proposals are opened first and evaluated, and the offers that qualify as per these technical evaluation criteria will only be considered as technically responsive; the rest will be considered technically non-responsive and will be dropped from the list.
  • Financial proposals are then opened for only eligible and responsive offers (financial bids of other unresponsive bidders remain unopened) and ranked.
  • The L-1 offer out of the responsive offers is selected on price criteria alone, without giving any additional weightage to marks/ ranking of the technical proposal.

This system of selection is roughly the same as the price-based selection of an l-1 OFFER (among the technically responsive offers) in the procurement of goods/ works.

2. Where suitable W: LCS is considered suitable for engaging contractors in most works procurement assignments that are of a standard or routine nature — such as construction works or non-complex engineering projects — where well-established practices and standards exist.

3. The default Rule: It is the simplest and the quickest system of selection, and under normal circumstances this method of evaluation shall be used as default, since it allows for minimum satisfactory technical efficiency with economy. Justification must be provided if a selection method other than LCS is to be used.

4. LCS — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) technical criteria May not be relevant to the realisation of the quality of the assignment.Technical criteria selected should be relevant and proportional to the requirement of quality of the assignment, and the selection process should be rigorous enough to ensure that — on the one hand — no technically unsatisfactory bids should be able to get past a loose criterion, and — on the other hand — no technically satisfactory offer should get ruled out by tight criteria.
b) marking subjectivity: The scheme of marking or its application may be subjective.It is important to lay down as objective a scheme of marking as possible. Cases where subjectivity is unavoidable (as in evaluation of methodology etc.) — a system of grading responses and their marking May be laid down in the bidding documents. The Procuring Entity should also have a system of conciliation and moderation of widely disparate markings by different members of the evaluation committee. W adds: *As mentioned above, in most works procurement a fail/ pass criteria is sufficient, and it avoids subjectivity.*

4.4.3Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)

(Rule 192 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: In the QCBS system of selection, both the quality of the proposal and the cost are considered as deciding factors. This approach is employed when the quality of deliverables is crucial, but the cost of service or work cannot be ignored.

2. The mechanics:

  • Quality/ technical scores are assigned to proposals based on specified quality criteria.
  • Minimum qualifying marks — normally 70–80 (seventy to eighty) out of a maximum of 100 (hundred) marks — as a benchmark for the quality of the technical proposal is prescribed, and proposals below this benchmark are not considered for financial evaluation.
  • The financial proposals are also given a cost-score based on the relative ranking of prices — with 100 (hundred) marks for the lowest and pro-rated lower marks for higher-priced offers.
  • The total score shall be obtained by weighting the quality and cost scores and adding them.
  • The proposed weightings for quality and cost shall be specified in the RfP/ tender document.
  • The firm obtaining the highest total score shall be selected.
  • It May be noted that, theoretically, a QCBS system with a weight of 100% (hundred percent) for the 'cost' approximates the price-based LCS system.
  • This method of selection shall be used for highly technically complex and critical assignments where it is justifiable to pay an appropriately higher price for a higher quality of proposal.

3. The suggestive weighting table [C only]:

DescriptionRemarksQuality/ Cost Score Weighting (%)
Highly complex/ downstream consequences/ specialised assignmentsUse QCBS with higher technical weightage80/20
Moderate complexityMajority of cases will follow this range75–65 / 25–35
Assignments of a standard or routine nature, such as auditors/ procurement agents handling the procurementUse of LCS is appropriate60–50 / 40–50

4.4.4The Quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) FrameworkWNC

A. When QCBS may be used

Procuring entities are ALLOWED to use QCBS for procurement of works and non-consultancy services in the following cases:

A) where the procurement has been declared to be a Quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) by the Competent Authority; Or

b) [NC only — the value route]: For procurement of non-consulting services, where the estimated value of procurement (including all taxes and option clause) does not exceed rs 10 CRORE — this method of selection shall be used for highly technically complex and critical assignments where it is justifiable to pay an appropriately higher price for higher quality of proposal.

C) the prohibitions: QCBS shall not be used in procurements planned to be done:

  • Wthrough two-STAGE BIDDING(where the Procuring Entity is unable to define the technical specifications or performance parameters with adequate clarity), or through REVERSE AUCTION, or through LIMITED TENDERS;
  • NC through REVERSE AUCTION or through LIMITED TENDERS.

The PRINCIPLES of QCBS shall be as provided in RULE 192(i), (ii), and (iii) of the GFR. (Refer to the Manual for Procurement of Consultancy Services for such principles.) However, the maximum weight of the non-financial parameters shall in no case exceed 30%.

B. The Competent Authority for allowing QCBS

A) for declaring a procurement as QOP:

i) Where the procuring entity/ project executing authority is covered by RULE 1 OF GFR (as amended by OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 08.03.2024):

  1. Secretary of the Ministry/ Department to which the procuring entity belongs; or
  2. Secretary of the public authority, with the concurrence of the Procuring Entity/ project executing authority;
  1. Where the public authority is any Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) or Indian Institute of Science (IISc) — the director of such IIT/ IISc. (This provision is applicable for procurement declared as QOP on or before 31.03.2027 and will be reviewed thereafter.)

ii) where the Procuring Entity is a CPSE — the board of directors of the CPSE.

iii) in case the authority to approve procurement on a nomination basis is lower than the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department (or board of directors in case of CPSEs), such authority will also be competent to approve the procurement as QOP.

B) [nc only] for non-consulting services not exceeding Rs. 10 crore in value: where the procuring entity/ project executing authority is covered by Rule 1 of GFR(i.e., Central Government Ministries/ Departments, attached/ subordinate bodies, and Autonomous Bodies — except those Autonomous Bodies with separate Financial Rules approved by the Government)by the officer or authority so designated.

C. The Special Technical Committee (STC)

a) Composition — in all cases of QOP, an STC shall be constituted with the following composition:

  • I) two or more persons who have expert knowledge and/ or long experience relevant to the procurement in question;
  • ii) one or more persons with extensive experience in handling public projects and/ or public finance in the Government or State/ Central public sector;
  • iii) one or more persons with experience in financial management/ financial administration/ audit/ accountancy;
  • iv) not more than one member representing the Procuring Entity, who May inter alia provide administrative support to the committee;
  • V) any person who is a member of the STC shall not associate himself in any manner with any bidder for the procurement concerned.

B) appointment: The names of members of the STC shall be decided either by the Competent Authority specified above, or by any other authority to whom such power is delegated by the Competent Authority. However, powers shall not be delegated to the officer or authority competent to finalise the particular procurement.

Sitting fee May be paid to the members of the STC. Incidental costs, including travel, shall be paid by the Procuring Entity.

C) mandate — the STC shall make specific recommendations on the following matters:

  • I) the weight to be given to non-financial parameters (not exceeding 30%). However, the weight for the "technical" shall be chosen considering the complexity of the assignment and the relative importance of quality. The proposed weightings for quality and cost shall be specified in the Tender Document.
  • ii) the specific quality/ technical parameters, their weights, their scoring methodology, the minimum qualification score, etc., and other relevant criteria necessary for ensuring fair and transparent quality/ technical evaluation of the bids.

D) binding force: The recommendations of the STC shall be followed, except where there are special grounds in public interest for deviating from them. However, every case of deviation from the recommendations of the STC shall require approval of the Competent Authority who approved the declaration of the procurement as QOP.

D. Grounds for Declaring a Procurement to be QOP

A procurement should be declared as a QOP only if there is enough justification in terms of:

  • Value addition, or
  • enhancement of delivery, or
  • paramount importance of quality.

Reasons for not adopting two-cover/ pre-qualification-based/ least-cost system shall be documented.

E. Tender Documents — Fixing/ Selection of the Evaluation/ Qualification Criteria

To ensure quality, some of the criteria used in marking May be made mandatory — and if a bidder does not meet those, then bids shall not be evaluated further.

Weightage May also be given for the timely completion of past projects of a similar nature by the bidder.

F. Pre-bid Meeting

In all cases of QOP, a pre-bid meeting shall be held, in which the technical criteria — including the marking scheme — shall be discussed with the potential bidders.

If any changes in the criteria are necessitated by such consultation, such changes shall require the recommendation of the STC.

G. Fixing of Scoring/ Marking Criteria

A) objectivity: The scoring should not be a variable that relies on the subjective opinion of the evaluating panel. The marking scheme should enable the achievement of almost similar scores irrespective of the persons/ experts involved in the evaluation process. When the outcomes are consistent with the available information, the QCBS parameters are more reliable. Unambiguous descriptions and criteria help to avoid grey areas, so as to ensure that there is only one possible score for the item. As far as possible, the criteria should be so specific and clear that bidders can self-mark their own bids.

B) the minimum threshold and why it must be set high: It is better to specify minimum marks for meeting the qualifying criteria specified. In QCBS selection, minimum qualifying marks (normally 70–80 out of a maximum of 100 marks) as a qualifying benchmark shall be prescribed and indicated in the tender document, along with a scheme for allotting marks for various technical criteria/ attributes. Bids scoring less than the minimum threshold shall not be considered for further evaluation.

C) fixed vs relative parameters: Examples of fixed quality parameters that ought not to be considered for relative scoring include organisations' ISO/ standards' accreditation, etc. These are required to establish the credentials of the contractor but cannot be used for relative comparison between various bidders.

D) past performance: Bidders should be asked to produce certificates for past performance. A format May be given in the tender itself outlining the contract details, completion, sustainability etc., and bidders May be asked to fill it and give evidence to that effect.

E) presentations: Bidders May be asked to submit a detailed presentation on their proposals in the form of a soft copy along with the bid, so as to facilitate better understanding of their proposal and to ensure commitment.

F) KPIs: Besides the BOQ output criteria for payment, key performance indicators (KPIs) May be specified with minimum achievement levels for payment, so as to ensure quality compliance.

H. Caution against Joint Ventures/ Consortium in QCBS ProcurementsWCNC

A) since quality is given weightage in the evaluation itself, in QCBS procurement, therefore, JVs May be avoided as far as possible. JVs could, however, become necessary in high technology or innovative projects where a single entity May not be able to execute the work alone.

B) if JVs are allowed, measures should be taken to ensure that all the JV partners are present and execute work all through the contract period. An implementation board with the participation of all JV partners May be provided for, wherein the Project Manager from the Procuring Entity shall also be allowed an audience when required. Meeting of JV partners with the project executing authority for quarterly progress review May be made a criterion linked to the achievement of key dates or even payment.

I. QCBS — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
A) inappropriate selection of QCBS: There is a possibility that the QCBS system is selected where LCS or other systems would have been more appropriate, considering the quality requirements or the capability of the Procuring Entity to monitor the assignment.The selection of QCBS should be justified and applied only under the circumstances mentioned above.
b) weightage of technical: Cost may not be proportional to quality requirements.Weightage different from 70:30 (seventy: Thirty) should be adequately examined and justified.
c) technical criteria May not be relevant to the realisation of the quality of the assignment.Technical criteria selected should be relevant and proportional to the requirement of quality of assignment, and the selection process should be rigorous enough to ensure that no technically unsatisfactory bids get past a loose criterion, and no technically satisfactory offer gets ruled out by tight criteria.
D) marking subjectivity: The scheme of marking or its application may be subjective.Lay down as objective a scheme of marking as possible. Where subjectivity is unavoidable (as in evaluation of methodology etc.), a system of grading responses and their marking may be laid down in the bidding documents. The Procuring Entity should also have a system of conciliation and moderation of widely disparate markings by different members of the evaluation committee.

4.4.5Fixed Budget based Selection (FBS) [C ONLY]

1. Its status: GFR 2017 provides three methods for selection/ evaluation of consultancy proposals — viz. QCBS, LCS and SSS. The Fixed Budget Based Selection (FBS) method is now also allowed for selection of consultants (General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management — DoE's OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29 October 2021).

2. How it works: In FBS, the selection process considers both the quality of proposals and the cost. FBS is a competitive method, encouraging consultants to provide high-quality services within the defined budget constraints:

A) fixed budget: In the Request for Proposal (RfP) document, a specific fixed budget is specified. Consultants must adhere to this budget, and their proposed cost cannot exceed it.

b) quality assessment: Consultants submit their proposals, and the evaluation considers the quality of these proposals. The proposal that scores the highest in quality — and is within the specified budget — is selected for award of contract. This assessment ensures that the selected consultant meets the project's requirements effectively, within the stipulated budget.

3. FBS May be used when: A) the type of consulting services required is simple and/ or repetitive and can be precisely defined; And b) the budget can be reasonably estimated, and set based on credible cost estimates and/ or previous selections which have been successfully executed; And c) the budget is sufficient for the consultant to perform the assignment.

4.4.6Direct Selection: Single Source Selection (SSS)

(Rule 194 of GFR 2017)

1. When permissible: Under some special circumstances, it May become necessary to select a particular contractor/ consultant/ service provider where adequate justification is available for such single-source selection, in the context of the overall interest of the Procuring Entity.

The selection by SSS/ nomination is permissible under exceptional circumstances such as:

  1. Tasks that represent a natural continuation of previous work carried out by the firm;
  2. In case of an emergency situation; Situations arising after natural disasters; Situations where timely completion of the assignment is of utmost importance;
  3. Situations where execution of the assignment May involve the use of proprietary techniques, or only one contractor/ consultant has the requisite expertise;
  4. At times, other PSUs or Government organisations are used to provide technical expertise. It is possible to use the expertise of such institutions on an SSS basis;
  5. Under some special circumstances, it may become necessary to select a particular contractor/ consultant where adequate justification is available in the context of the overall interest of the Ministry or Department. Full justification for Single Source Selection should be recorded in the file, and approval of the Competent Authority obtained before resorting to such single-source selection.

2. Safeguards: The Procuring Entity shall ensure fairness and equity, and shall have a procedure in place to ensure that: A) the prices are reasonable and consistent with market rates for tasks of a similar nature; And b) the required work/ services are not split into smaller-sized procurement.

3. Mandatory reporting of nomination awards: All works/ purchase/ consultancy/ non-consultancy contracts awarded on a nomination basis should be brought to the notice of the following authorities for information: a) THE SECRETARY, in the case of Ministries/ Departments; b) the board of directors or equivalent managing body, in case of Public Sector Undertakings, Public Sector Banks, Insurance companies, etc.; c) the chief executive of the organisation where such a managing body is not in existence.

  • I) the report relating to such awards on a nomination basis shall be submitted to the Secretary/ board/ chief executive/ equivalent managing body every quarter.
  • ii) the audit committee or similar unit in the organisation May be required to check at least 10% of such cases.

4. SSS — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) inappropriate selection of SSS: There is a possibility that the SSS system is selected where LCS or other systems would have been more appropriate, considering the quality requirements or the capability of the Procuring Entity to monitor the assignment. The assignment May be split into parcels to avoid competitive selection systems, or to avoid obtaining higher-level approvals for SSS.Full JUSTIFICATION for single source selection should be recorded in the file, and approval of the Competent Authority obtained — the Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) should severely restrict powers for SSS selection. In direct selection, the Procuring Entity should ensure fairness and equity, and the required work/ services are not split into smaller-sized procurement to avoid competitive processes.
b) cost May be unreasonably high: The single contractor/ consultant is likely to charge unreasonably high prices.The Procuring Entity must have a procedure in place to ensure that the prices are reasonable and consistent with market rates for tasks of a similar nature. If necessary, negotiations May be held with the contractors/ consultants to examine reasonableness of quoted price.

4.5Tendering Systems

4.5.1The Common Rationale

Tendering systems are designed to achieve an appropriate balance between the countervailing needs for the 'right quality' and the 'RIGHT PRICE' — while the mode of procurement addresses the 'RIGHT SOURCE', and the TENDER DOCUMENT addresses the 'RIGHT QUANTITY' and 'right time and place' — under different complexities/ criticality of Technical requirements and value of procurements.

please note that the selection of a tendering system has to be based on the two factors mentioned above; Hence, just a value threshold for their use is discouraged. Selection should be based on professional judgement of the two factors mentioned above. (Stated expressly in G, W and NC.)

4.5.2The Systems Listed

G GoodsW WorksC ConsultancyNC Non-Consultancy
1. Single-Stage Tendering System
— a) Single Stage Single Envelope System
— b) Single Stage Two Envelopes System (Two Bid System) (Rule 163 of GFR 2017)
— c) Single Stage Two Envelopes System with PRE-QUALIFICATION[C ONLY]
2. Two Stage Bidding — Expression of Interest Tenders — Market Exploration/ Short-listing (Rule 164 of GFR 2017)

4.5.3Single-Stage Tendering System

In single-stage tendering, bids are invited at a single stage of submission. The bids can be stipulated to be either in a single envelope or in multiple envelopes.

A. Single Stage Single Envelope System

1. In a single-stage single-envelope system, eligibility, technical/ commercial details, and financial details are submitted together in the same envelope.

Evaluation is in the sequence of evaluated responsive prices (from L1 onwards), and their technical/ commercial compliance is checked.

The lowest-priced bid that meets the eligibility/ qualification criteria, technical and commercial conditions laid down in the tender documents is declared as successful.

2. Where suitable: This tendering system is SUITABLE where:

  • The technical requirement is simple or moderately complex;
  • The capability of the source of supply is not too crucial; And
  • the value of procurement is not too high.

This is the simplest and the quickest tendering system and should be the default system of tendering.

B. Single Stage Two Envelopes System (Two Bid System)

(Rule 163 of GFR 2017)

1. When used: In technically complex requirements — but where the capability of the source of supply is still not critical, and the value of procurement is not high — a Single-stage two-envelopes system may be followed.

2. Composition of the two envelopes (off-line tenders): Bidders should be asked to bifurcate their quotations into two separately sealed envelopes:

  • The first envelope — called the techno-commercial bid — contains the eligibility, technical quality and performance aspects, commercial terms and conditions and documents sought in the tender, except the price and relevant financial details.
  • The second envelope — called the financial bid — contains the price quotation along with other financial details.
  • Both the envelopes are to be submitted together in a sealed outer envelope.
  • In e-procurement, the bidder would be asked to upload two files, mutatis mutandis.

3. First opening: The techno-commercial bids are to be opened in the first instance on the pre-announced bid opening date and time, and scrutinised and evaluated by the TC with reference to parameters prescribed in the tender documents; And responsive, eligible, and technically compliant bidders are decided.

4. Second opening: Thereafter, the financial bids of ONLY The techno-commercially compliant offers are to be opened on a pre-announced date and time for further scrutiny, evaluation, ranking and placement of the contract.

  • In e-procurement, financial bids of technically non-compliant offers would remain encrypted and unopened.
  • In off-line tenders, the financial bids of technically non-compliant bidders should be returned unopened to the respective bidders by registered acknowledgement due/ reliable courier, or any other mode with proof of delivery.

4.5.4Two-Stage Bidding — Expression of Interest (EoI) Tenders — Market Exploration

(Rule 164 of GFR 2017)

1. The problem it solves: In the case of green-field/ blue-sky projects, where the equipment/ plant to be procured is COMPLEX, the procuring organisation May not possess the full knowledge of either the various technical solutions available or the likely sources for such products in the market.

To meet the desired objectives of a transparent procurement that ensures value for money and simultaneously ensures the upgradation of technology & CAPACITY BUILDING, it would be prudent to invite an Expression of Interest (EoI) bids as a first stage of the two-stage tendering system — to explore the market and finalise specifications based on technical discussions/ presentations with the experienced manufacturers/ suppliers in a transparent manner.

2. The four situations in which EoI bids May be invited: A) it is not feasible for the Procuring Entity to formulate detailed specifications or identify specific characteristics for the subject matter of procurement without receiving inputs regarding its technical aspects from bidders; B) the character of the subject matter of procurement is subject to rapid technological advances, market fluctuations, or both; C) the Procuring Entity seeks to enter into a contract for research, experiment, study, or development — except where the contract includes the production of requirements in quantities sufficient to establish their commercial viability or to recover research and development costs; Or d) the bidder is expected to carry out a detailed survey or investigation and undertake a comprehensive assessment of risks, costs and obligations associated with the particular procurement.

A. The Procedure of Two-Stage Bidding

1. First stage: The Procuring Entity shall invite EoI bids containing the broad objectives, technical and financial qualification criteria, terms and conditions of the proposed procurement, etc. — without a bid price.

On receipt of the Expressions of Interest, manufacturers/ suppliers which are prima facie Considered technically and financially capable of supplying the material or executing the proposed work shall be shortlisted.

2. Technical discussions: Thereafter, technical discussions/ presentations May be held with the short-listed manufacturers/ suppliers — giving equal opportunity to all such bidders to participate in the discussions.

During these technical discussions, the procurement agency May also add other stakeholders who could add value to the decision-making on the various technical aspects and evaluation criteria.

A proper record of discussions/ presentations and the process of decision-making should be kept.

3. Framing specifications: Based on the discussions/ presentations so held, one or more acceptable technical solutions could be decided upon — by laying down detailed technical specifications for each acceptable technical solution, quality benchmarks, warranty requirements, delivery milestones, etc. — in a manner consistent with the objectives of transparent procurement.

At the same time, care should be taken to make the specifications generic in nature, to provide equitable opportunities to the prospective bidders.

4. The limit on revision: In revising the relevant terms and conditions of the procurement, if found necessary because of discussions with the shortlisted bidders, the Procuring Entity shall not modify the fundamental nature Of the procurement itself.

5. Second stage: The Procuring Entity shall invite only those bidders whose bids at the first stage were not rejected, to participate in a two-envelope tendering in response to a revised set of terms and conditions of the procurement.

6. Right of withdrawal without penalty: Any bidder invited to bid but not in a position to supply the subject matter of procurement due to modification in the specifications or terms and conditions May withdraw from the tendering proceedings without forfeiting any Bid Security That he May have been required to provide, or being penalised in any way — by declaring his intention to withdraw from the procurement proceedings with adequate justification.

7. 'Non-committal' EoI: If the Procuring Entity is of the view that after the EoI stage there is a likelihood of further participation by many more bidders — and to avoid getting trapped into a legacy technology — the second-stage tendering May not be restricted only to the shortlisted bidders of the EoI stage, and it May be so declared in the EoI document ab initio.

Thereafter, in the second stage, normal OTE/ GTE tendering May be performed. Such a variant of EoI is called a 'non-committal' EoI.

Instances of 'non-committal EoI' should be rare, since it May de-incentivise the participants from giving a diligent/ sincere EoI. There should not be any bid-security requirement in such non-committal EoI.

B. Invitation of EoI Tenders

In EoI tenders, an advertisement inviting Expression of Interest should be published. The invitation to the EoI document should contain: a) a copy of the advertisement; b) objectives and scope of the requirement — a brief description of objectives and the broad scope of the requirement; it may also include the validity period of empanelment; c) instructions to the bidders — including the nature of supply, fees for empanelment (if EoI is for empanelment), last date of submission, place of submission and any other related instructions; d) formats for submission — the format in which the bidders are expected to submit their EoI; e) QUALIFICATION CRITERIA — the invitation to EoI should clearly lay down the qualification criteria that should be applied for shortlisting. The required supporting documents need to be clearly mentioned.

C. Evaluation of EoI

The bidders should be evaluated for shortlisting — inter alia — based on their past experience of performance in a similar context, financial strength, and technical capabilities, among others.

Each bidder should be assigned scores based on the sum of marks obtained for each parameter multiplied by the weightage assigned to that parameter.

All bidders who secure the minimum required marks (normally 60 (sixty) per cent) should be shortlisted. The minimum qualifying marks should be specified in the EoI document.

ALTERNATIVELY, instead of weighted evaluation, the EoI document May specify a 'FAIL-PASS CRITERIA' with the minimum qualifying requirement for each of the criteria — such as minimum years of experience, minimum number of assignments executed and minimum turnover. Under such circumstances, all bidders who meet the minimum requirement as specified should be shortlisted.

The shortlist should normally comprise at least four firms.

An example of EoI Qualification criteria G:

CriteriaSub-criteriaWeightage*Break-up of Weightage
Past experience of the firm with similar requirementsA\*
Financial strength of the vendorB\*
Turnover figures for the last three yearsB1\*
Net profit figures for the last three yearsB2\*
Quality accreditations, licensing requirementsC\*
Manufacturing capabilities/ tie-upsD\*
After-sales support infrastructureE\*
Product supportF\*

4.6Channels of Procurement

Public Procurement can be performed/ channelled by way of:

4.6.1Electronic Procurement (e-Procurement)

(Rule 160 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: Electronic procurement (e-procurement) is the use of information and communication technology (especially the internet) by the buyer (through a third-party e-procurement portal) in conducting procurement processes with the vendors/ contractors for the acquisition of goods (supplies), works and services — aimed at open, non-discriminatory, and efficient procurement through transparent procedures.

2. The mandate — and its two exceptions: It is mandatory for ministries/ departments to receive all bids through e-procurement portals that are gcqe compliant, for all procurements.

This condition will NOT Be applicable for:

  • the procurement made without QUOTATION (under RULE 154 of GFR, 2017); or
  • through PURCHASE COMMITTEE (under RULE 155 of GFR, 2017).

3. No mixing of Manual and electronic bids: Normally, in e-procurement, no physical/ off-line tender documents are provided, nor are any Manual bids accepted. It is not a good practice to call both electronic and Manual bids in the same tender.

4. Exemption — Global Tender Enquiry: In Global Tender Enquiry (by any mode — open tender, limited tender or single tender), e-procurement May not be mandatorily insisted upon. However, e-publishing would still be mandatory.

5. Exemption — national security and missions abroad: In individual cases where national security and strategic considerations demand confidentiality, ministries/ departments May exempt such cases from e-procurement — after seeking the approval of the concerned Secretary and with the concurrence of financial advisers.

In case of tenders floated by Indian missions and CPSE units abroad, the Competent Authority for deciding the tender May exempt such cases from e-procurement.

6. The portals: Note the different names used by the four Manuals for the NIC portal:

  • G"The National Informatics Centre (NIC) has an e-Procurement portal called Government e-procurement of NIC (gepnic)."
  • C"National Informatics Centre (NIC) has an eProcurement portal called the Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP)."

There are other service providers in the public sector (e.g., MSTC) and private sector that can be utilised for e-PROCUREMENT. Details about the process of e-procurement are available from the service providers.

7. Which portal a Ministry should use: Ministries/ departments that do not have a large volume of procurement, or carry out procurements required only for the day-to-day running of offices, and have not initiated e-procurement through any other solution so far — May use the e-procurement solution developed by NIC.

Other ministries/ departments May either use the e-procurement solution developed by NIC, or engage any other service provider — G adds: (Gcqe compliant) — following due process.

8. These instructions will not apply to procurements made by ministries/ departments through Government E-marketplace (GeM).

4.6.2Mandatory Procurement of Goods and Services through GeM

(Rule 149 of GFR 2017)

1. What an online marketplace is: An online marketplace (or e-commerce marketplace) is a type of e-commerce site where several sellers offer products or services, and all the buyers can select the product/ services offered by any one of the sellers based on his own criteria.

In an online marketplace, the purchaser's transactions are processed by the marketplace operator, and then products/ services are delivered and fulfilled directly by the participating retailers. Other capabilities might include auctioning (forward or reverse), catalogues, ordering, posting requirements by purchasers, payment gateways, etc.

In general, because online marketplaces aggregate products from a wide array of providers, selection is usually wider, availability is higher, and prices are more competitive than in vendor-specific online retail stores.

2. The mandate: The Government of India has established the Government E-marketplace (GeM) for common-use goods and services. The procurement process on GeM is end-to-end — from placement of contract orders to payment to suppliers. This is to ensure better transparency and higher efficiency. All the processes will be electronic and online.

The procurement of goods and services through the GeM portal by ministries/ departments (including attached/ subordinate offices), CPSEs, and autonomous bodies is mandatory for goods or services available therein, as per Rule 149 of GFR, 2017.

3. Supplier registration: Products and services are listed on GeM by various suppliers, as on other e-commerce portals. Supplier registration on geM is online and automatic, based on:

4. Demand aggregation: The best prices for a user can be available if the same requirements and demands of various organisations are aggregated. This Acts as an incentive for the supplier to quote their best price. For the same products, the demand of various Government departments can be clubbed together, and Reverse Auction can be done based on aggregate demand, which will provide the best prices to the Government.

5. The GeM monetary thresholds — Rule 149 of GFR, 2017:

ValueProcedure
a) UP TO Rs. 50,000/-through any of the available suppliers on the GeM, meeting the requisite quality, specification, and delivery period.
Note 1: In the case of automobiles, direct procurement under this sub-para is permitted without any ceiling limit.
Note 2: In case the item is available on GeM, it is not permitted To purchase the same under Rule 154 of the GFR, 2017.
B) above Rs. 50,000/- and up to Rs. 10,00,000/-through the GeM seller having the lowest price amongst the available sellers, of at least three different manufacturers, ON GeM — meeting the requisite quality, specification, and delivery period.
The tools for online bidding and online Reverse Auction available on GeM can be used by the buyer even for procurements less than Rs. 10,00,000/-.
Note 1: In case the item is available on GeM, it is not permitted To purchase the same under Rule 155 of the GFR, 2017.
c) above Rs. 10,00,000/-through the supplier having the lowest price meeting the requisite quality, specification, and delivery period — after mandatorily Obtaining bids, using online bidding or Reverse Auction tool provided on GeM.

D) the invitation for the online e-bidding/ Reverse Auction will be available to all the existing sellers or other sellers registered on the portal who have offered their goods/ services under the particular product/ service category, as per the terms and conditions of GeM.

E) the above-mentioned monetary ceiling is applicable ONLY for purchases made through GeM. For purchases, if any, outside GeM, relevant GFR Rules shall apply.

F) the ministries/ departments shall work out their procurement requirements of goods and services on either "opex" model or "capex" model as per their requirement/ suitability at the time of preparation of budget estimates (be), and shall project their annual procurement plan of goods and services on GeM portal within 30 (thirty) days of budget approval.

g) it is the responsibility of the Procuring Entity to do due diligence to ensure the reasonableness of rates. The government buyers may ascertain the reasonableness of prices before placing an order using the BUSINESS ANALYTICS (ba) tools available on geM — including the last purchase price on geM, the department's own last purchase price, etc.

H) demand for goods shall not be divided into small quantities to make piecemeal purchases, to avoid procurement through L-1 buying/ bidding/ Reverse Auction on GeM, or the necessity of obtaining the sanction of higher authorities required with reference to the estimated value of the total demand."

6. GeM Portal: https://gem.gov.in — Detailed instructions for user organisation registration, supplier registration, listing of products, terms and conditions, online bidding, Reverse Auction, demand aggregation, call centre, etc., are available on this portal.

7. Uploading of non-availability report — gemar&pts: It is mandatory for a buyer to generate a "GeM availability report and past transaction summary" (gemar&pts) with a unique id on the GeM portal using his login credentials, for procurement outside GeM (for example, for procurement through the Central Public Procurement Portal)(Notified vide OM No. F.6.18.2019-PPD dated 11th June 2021).

The past transaction summary will be provided, where available.

"Gemar&pts" shall be a pre-requisite for arriving at a decision by the Competent Authority for procurement of required goods and services by floating a bid outside GeM, and its unique id would be required to be furnished on the publishing portal along with the tender proposed to be published.

8. Interaction with Rules 154 and 155:

  • Purchase of goods without quotation Can be resorted to for value up to Rs. 50,000/- only on each occasion — without inviting quotations or bids — based on a certificate to be recorded by the Competent Authority, only when the required goods are not available on GeM.
  • In case a certain item is not available on the GeM portal, purchase of goods costing above Rs. 50,000/- and up to Rs. 5,00,000/- on each occasion May be made on the recommendations of a duly constituted local Purchase Committee.

9. Buying outside GeM when the item is on GeM: Where an item is available on GeM, and the Ministry/ Department/ organisation wants to buy outside the GeM in view of any compelling circumstances, the approval of the standing committee of GeM (SCoGeM) And the Secretary concerned Shall be required (OM No. F.6/15/2018-PPD dated 05.02.2020).

10. Receipt of Materials and Payment Procedures: Further details are given in Annexure 36 of the Goods Manual.

11. Push Button Procurement (PBP) on GeM(Notified vide OM No. F.6/7/2022-PPD dated 06.09.2022):

a) The rationale: As per Rule 144(vii) and Rule 149 of GFR, 2017, the procuring entity should satisfy itself that the price of the selected offer is reasonable. SOMETIMES — ESPECIALLY INFREQUENTLY — Government buyers find it difficult to certify the reasonableness of rates. Such users normally do not possess the requisite skills to make procurement decisions. It delays the procurement process.

At the same time, for typically low-value procurements, efforts expended in assessing the reasonability of rates May be disproportionate. Additionally, with developments in technology and e-procurement becoming the norm, the availability of market activities and the capability to analyse them artificially have provided an opportunity to automate decision-making activities, such as the assessment of the reasonability of rates in such cases.

b) The seven conditions of PBP:

  • I) PBP will be made only on GeM through bidding — PBP through direct purchase, L-1, custom-bid, etc., are not permitted.
  • ii) the total procurement value of the specific case is permitted up to rupees five (5) lakh, inclusive of all taxes.
  • iii) this will be an additional Method of procurement, and procuring entities are free to use or not to use this additional method.
  • iv) this method can be used only if at least five bids Are received. In case fewer than five bids are received, the procurement is to restart using the usual procurement modes. However, buyers will have a choice to extend the PBP date once by three (3) days At the time of preparation of the tender document, in case of lesser participation.
  • V) no splitting of requirements is to be done to bring procurement under this method.
  • vi) once a bid is invited on GeM, the contract will be placed directly by GeM without any human intervention [provided condition (iv) above is complied with].
  • vii) GeM will permit this method only for such categories where at least ten sources Are listed.

c) GeM has published a Manual on PBP for buyers on its website.

4.6.3Procurement through Centralised Agencies or other Organisations

Departments/ Organisations that have not built up their own capability for procurement May engage procurement agents — for individual procurement or as outsourcing of service — with the approval of the Competent Authority.

Many canalised agencies authorised by the Government, and some CPSEs, provide end-to-end procurement services — i.e., framing procurement documents, bidding process, evaluation, and contract management.

Possibilities of other ministries/ departments or their attached and subsidiary offices undertaking such procurement may also be explored.

Appendix to Chapter 4 — Part a: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 4 · W: CHAPTER 3
2Chapter titleG:Modes of Procurement and Tendering Systems · W/C/NC:Bidding Design for …
3Agency for Procurement (PWO / PSU / MoHUA notification / Works Committee / Sample MoU)W ONLY
4Rs 60 lakh direct-execution ceiling for repair worksW ONLY
5Award to a PSU treated as project management consultancy; competition on lump sum service chargesW ONLY
6Admeasurement of Services — input vs outputnc only
7"Types of Contracts" sectionabsent from goods entirely; W has 7, C has 5, NC has 4
8Item Rate, Percentage Rate, Piece Work, EPC, PPPW ONLY
9BOQ variation bands (±10–15% allowed; ±25–30% needs CA sanction)W ONLY
10EPC 10% change-of-scope ceiling; LD capped at 10%; bonus ≤10%; 2-year defects liability; 30-day grace period; sub-contracting ≤50%W ONLY
11EPC technical capacity thresholds (60% one project / 40% two / 30% three); net worth 15%W ONLY
12Right of the EPC contractor to MATCH the first-ranked bid on payment of ~2%W ONLY
13Retainer-ship cum Success (Contingency) Fee ContractC ONLY
14"Risk of over-utilisation" as a fourth risk row in Indefinite Delivery contractsC ONLY
15Consultancy staff "normally NAMED" in Time-Based contractsC ONLY
16Percentage contract discouraged for architectural services unless on fixed target costC (NC carries the type but not this caution in the same terms)
17"Systems of Selection" sectionabsent from goods entirely
18QCBS weightage — invertedC: Technical 70% / Cost 30%, technical never more than 80% · W & NC: Cost 80% / Technical 20%, non-financial never EXCEEDING 30%
19QCBS suggestive weighting table (80/20 · 75-65/25-35 · 60-50/40-50)C ONLY
20Fixed Budget based Selection (FBS)C ONLY
21Quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) declaration frameworkw + nc only
22Special Technical Committee (STC) — composition, appointment, mandate, binding forcew + nc only
23IIT/ IISc Director as Competent Authority for QOP, valid up to 31.03.2027w + nc only
24Rs 10 crore value route to QCBS for NC Services, and the "crossing Rs 10 crore" 10% rulenc only
25QCBS prohibited in two-STAGE BIDDINGW ONLY (NC prohibits only Reverse Auction and Limited Tenders)
26Mandatory pre-bid meeting in all QOP cases; changes to criteria need STC recommendationw + nc only
27Consultancy shortlist: Not fewer than 3, not more than 8C ONLY
28EoI shortlist should normally comprise at least four firms; minimum 60% marksG (applied by cross-reference to W/C/NC)
29"Single Stage Two Envelopes System with PRE-QUALIFICATION" listed as a distinct tendering systemC ONLY
30Full text of the tendering systemsG ONLY — W, C and NC all expressly cross-refer to Goods Ch. 4 "for the sake of brevity"
31NIC portal namedg: Gepnic · c: CPPP
32eRA placed under CHANNELSW (3.5.2) + NC (4.6.2) · G places it under MODES (4.5) · absent from c
33GeM monetary thresholds, GeMAR&PTS, SCoGeM approval, Push Button ProcurementG ONLY in full (C/NC reproduce parts; W does not)
34Automobiles exempt from the Rs 50,000 direct-purchase ceiling on GeMG ONLY
35PBP conditions — Rs 5 lakh cap, at least 5 bids, one 3-day extension, at least 10 listed sources, no human interventionG ONLY
36Nomination awards reported QUARTERLY; audit committee to check AT least 10% of such casesW + C + NC (common)
37"Justification must be provided if a selection method other than LCS is used"W (states it as an express default rule)

end of Chapter 4 — part a

Part IIModes of Procurement

Merging: Goods Ch. 4 paras 4.1–4.13 · Works Ch. 3 paras 3.6–3.14 · Consultancy Ch. 4 para 4.3 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 4 para 4.4

The Most Important Caution in this Chapter

The Threshold Divergence Table — the Single Most Examinable Page in this Chapter

ThresholdG GOODSW WORKSC CONSULTANCYNC NON-CONSULTANCY
OTE (Open Tender Enquiry) applies aboveRs. 50 lakhRs. 10 lakhRs. 50 lakhRs. 50 lakh
LTE (Limited Tender Enquiry) is the default up toRs. 5 lakh to Rs. 50 lakhup to Rs. 10 lakhup to Rs. 50 lakhup to Rs. 50 lakh
SLTE (Special LTE) applies for procurements more THANRs. 50 LAKHRs. 10 LAKHRs. 50 lakhRs. 50 lakh
Rule cited for the LTE/SLTE thresholdRule 162Rule 139(v) AND Rule 162Rule 162Rule 162
GTE restrictionNo GTE up to Rs. 200 croreSame — Rs. 200 croreSameSame
Direct Procurement without Quotationup to Rs. 50,000(Rs. 1,00,000 for Scientific Ministries)(subsumed in "Award of Work through Quotations")up to Rs. 50,000up to Rs. 50,000
Direct Procurement by Purchase Committeeabove Rs. 50,000 and up to Rs. 5,00,000(up to Rs. 10 lakh for Scientific Ministries)(not carried)up to Rs. 5 lakhup to Rs. 5 lakh
Award of Work through Quotations(not carried)up to Rs. 5 lakh — works only(not carried)(not carried)
Rate Contract viability thresholdaggregate requirement more than Rs. 50 lakh p.a.(cross-refers)(cross-refers)(cross-refers)

Concordance for Chapter 4 — Part B

UnifiedModeGoodsWorksCSNCS
4.7Modes of Procurement — the taxonomy4.13.64.34.4
4.8Open Tender Enquiry (OTE)4.23.7(listed only)(listed only)
4.9Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) + Rs 200 crore restriction4.33.8(listed only)(listed only)
4.10Rate Contract (RC)/ Framework Agreement (FA)4.4(listed only)(listed only)(listed only)
4.11Electronic Reverse Auction (eRA)4.53.5.2 (under Channels)absent4.4-3-a)-iii + 4.6.2
4.12Pre-qualification Modes — PQB4.63.9(listed only)(listed only)
4.13Approved Vendor List (AVL)4.7(cross-ref only)(cross-ref only)(cross-ref only)
4.14Limited Tender Enquiry (LTE)4.83.10(listed only)(listed only)
4.15Special Limited Tender Enquiry (SLTE)4.93.11(listed only)(listed only)
4.16Proprietary Article Certificate (PAC)4.10absent(listed only)(listed only)
4.17Single Tender Enquiry (STE)/ Selection by Nomination4.113.12(listed only)(listed only)
4.18Direct Procurement without Quotation4.12(listed only)4.4-7
4.19Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee4.13(listed only)4.4-7
4.20Award of Work through Quotations3.13
4.21Award of works in stalled contracts3.14
4.22Mode selection by value — Non-Consultancy Services4.4-5 to 4.4-7

4.7Modes of Procurement — the Taxonomy

1. The balance to be struck: Offers from prospective bidders in Public Procurement must be invited according to a procedure that achieves a balance between the need for the widest competition, on the one hand, and the complexity — GNC Add: Time, effort, and cost — of the procedure, on the other hand.

Different modes of procurement (W, C, NC add: and tendering systems) are used to suit various procurement circumstances to achieve this balance. Various modes of procurement vary the extent of competition (width and specificity of catchment area of bidders) to suit different procurement situations.

Mode of procurement addresses the 'right source' of the 5Rs.

2. Delegation:There are laid-down delegations of powers to approve different modes of procurement to various competent authorities as shown in DFPR(G Annexures 2 and 3 · W, C, NC Annexure 1). Each Procuring Entity May also publish its own Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) delegating such powers within the entity(G Annexure 4 · W, C, NC Annexure 2).

4.7.1The Five (or Six) Families of Modes — Compared Across the Four Manuals

FamilyG GOODSW WORKSC CONSULTANCYNC NON-CONSULTANCY
A) advertised modes(widest possible competition through wide publicity — Rule 161)OTE · GTE · Rate Contracts · eRAOTE · GTEOTE (above Rs 50 lakh) · GTE (restricted below Rs 200 cr)OTE (above Rs 50 lakh) · GTE · eRA
b) pre-qualification modes(restricted to shortlisted pre-qualified bidders; shortlisting itself through wide publicity akin to advertised tenders)PQB · AVLPQB · AVL (cross-ref to Goods para 4.7)PQB · AVL (cross-ref)PQB · AVL (cross-ref)
c) restricted modes(restricted to known, selected bidders; shortlisting based on less rigorous checks of capability and past experience — Rule 162)LTE (up to Rs 50 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 50 lakh)LTE (up to Rs 10 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 10 lakh)LTE (up to Rs 50 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 50 lakh)LTE (up to Rs 50 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 50 lakh)
d) nomination modes(from a single source in special circumstances — Rule 166)PAC · STE without PACSTE or Selection by Nomination only — NO PACPAC · STE without PACPAC · STE without PAC (NC cites RULE 204 GFR, not Rule 166)
e) shopping modes(without tendering or calling for formal bids, for small-value procurements — Rules 154, 155)Direct Procurement without Quotation · Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee"Award of Work through Quotations/ Shopping Modes" — Procurement of Works through QuotationsDirect Procurement without Quotation · by Purchase CommitteeDirect Procurement without Quotation · by Purchase Committee
f) framework agreements/ rate contracts(listed as a SEPARATE family)(RC is under Advertised Modes)listed separately as family (f)listed separately as family (f)listed separately as family (f)

W additional footnote: *"Please also refer to RULE 139 of GFR 2017 regarding the thresholds for modes of procurement pertaining to Works."*

W descriptions of AVL and Framework Agreements:

  • AVL: "Procurement is restricted to contractors who have been pre-approved and included on a long-term multi-use list based on their demonstrated ability to meet the required standards."
  • Framework Agreements: "Also known as RATE CONTRACTS, are agreements with contractors to execute works at pre-agreed rates during a specified validity period."

4.8Open Tender Enquiry (OTE)

(Rule 161 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: In Open Tender Enquiry (OTE) — also known as national competitive bidding (ncb), or simply advertised tender enquiry, but this Manual would stick to OTE — an attempt is made to attract the widest possible competition by publishing the NIT simultaneously on the designated websites.

This is the default mode of procurement and gives the best Value for Money, but the procedure is relatively complex and prolonged. The systemic cost of this procedure May be high enough to be unviable for smaller-value procurements.

2. When OTE procedures — through e-procurement or through traditional tendering — should be adopted:

a) Procurements exceeding the threshold of:

  • [G, C, NC] — Rs. 50 lakh (Rupees Fifty Lakh);
  • W — Rs. 10 lakh (Rupees Ten Lakh) in works procurement;

B) all requirements with clear technical specifications;

c)G For requirements that are ordinarily available in the open market, it is necessary to evaluate competitive offers to decide the most suitable and economical option available;

W For requirements that can ordinarily be fulfilled by the players available in the open market, it is necessary to evaluate competitive offers to decide the most suitable and economical option available;

d) G When requirements are not available from known sources, or sources are presently limited and need to be made broad-based. In such situations, even for procurements below Rs. 50 lakh, the OTE mode May be used if warranted.

W When the requirement cannot be fulfilled from known contractors, or contractors are presently limited and the requirement is to be made broad-based. In such situations, even for procurements below Rs. 10 lakh, the OTE mode May be used if warranted.

4.8.1Terms and Conditions

1. No restriction on participation:

  • G There should be no restriction on participation by prospective bidders who meet the eligibility criteria. Especially, prior registration with the Procuring Entity should not be insisted upon. However, bidders who are already registered are also free to participate.
  • W Participation should not be restricted to only bidders enlisted with the Procuring Entity. Bidders already enlisted are also free to participate. However, a requirement that successful un-enlisted bidders May have to get enlisted with the Procuring Entity before the contract is placed on them May be mentioned in the tender document.

2. Advertisement:

  • G Advertisements in such cases should be given on the GOVERNMENT e-MARKETPLACE (GeM) as well as ON GeM-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) at www.eprocure.gov.in.
  • W Advertisements in such cases should be given on the GeM-Central Public Procurement Portal (GeM-CPPP) at www.eprocure.gov.in. (no separate GeM mention)

an organisation that has its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website. The Procuring Entity should also post the complete tender document on its website and gem-cppp to enable prospective bidders to make use of the document by downloading it. The advertisements for the tender invitations should give the complete web address from which the tender documents can be downloaded.

While it is no longer mandatory to issue advertisements in newspapers, there is no bar to issuing such advertisements if the procuring entities consider them necessary.

To promote wider participation and ease of bidding, no cost of tender documents May be charged for the tender documents downloaded by the bidders.

3. Free availability: The sale/ availability for downloading of tender documents against NIT should not be restricted and should be available freely. Tender documents should preferably be sold/ made available for download up to the date of tender opening (W: "up to the tender closing date and time").

4. Model Tender Document: The tender documents should be prepared based on the relevant approved Model Tender Document (MTD) for the procurement category.(Further details on preparing tender documents are provided in G Chapter 5 · W Chapter 4.)

5. Records in off-line tenders: The Procuring Entity shall maintain proper records about the number of tender documents sold, the list of parties to whom sold, details of the amount received through sale, and the number of unsold tender documents — which are to be cancelled after the opening of the tenders.

6. Currency: In domestic tenders, bids can be submitted only in INR, and any bid in foreign currency should be summarily rejected. Foreign bidders can also participate if they submit a bid in INR. However, purchase preference for local content as per the PPP-MII shall apply.

7. Consortium bidding in domestic open tenders: In the case of a domestic open tender for projects (including turnkey projects) allowing consortium bidding, a foreign bidder can be a consortium member — subject to the condition that the consortium as a whole Meets the minimum local content criteria, as per the Make in India order, 2017.

The leader of the consortium can be a foreign party, and the bids are to be solicited in Indian rupee only — i.e., no payment can be made in foreign currency to the foreign consortium member.

4.8.2OTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. The crux of this mode is attracting bids from all possible prospective bidders. The risk is that this May not be achieved, even after incurring the extra cost of open tendering. This could be due to:
a) Insufficient publicity;
b) Hindrances in the availability of tender documents;
c) Insufficient time for bid preparation; or
d) Due to the onerous cost of tender documents or EMD
it should be ensured that the NIT on the website is easily searchable and visible, not hidden under layers of clicks. The matter should not be left entirely to the website or media publicity alone. Due diligence should be done to locate likely bidders. All registered vendors/ contractors — in particular past successful vendors/ contractors — should be given intimation about forthcoming tenders via sms/ mail/ email.

Further, a limited or open tender that results in only one effective offer Shall be treated as a Single Tender Enquiry situation, with relevant powers of approval, etc.

It should also be ensured that there is no impediment to the issue/ access of tender documents.

Ordinarily, the due date fixed for the opening of the tender shall be a minimum of 21 (twenty-one) days from the date of advertisement, which may vary considering the nature of the material called for and delivery requirements. The due date may be subsequently extended with the approval of the ca only if it is felt necessary to have better competition.

The tender documents shall be priced minimally (if at all priced), keeping in view the value of the tender as well as the cost of preparation and publicity of the tender documents.

EMD should be sufficient to ensure that bidders honour their bids but, at the same time, should not be large enough to reduce competition.
2. Lack of clarity in description/ specification of requirement, or undue stringency in qualifying criteria or other conditionsMitigations of such risks can be addressed at the time of need assessment and procurement planning (please refer to Chapter 2) to attract adequate competition.

4.9Global Tender Enquiry (GTE)

(Rule 161 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: GTE — also known as international competitive bidding (icb), but this Manual would stick to GTE — is like OTE, but through appropriate advertising and provision for payment in foreign currencies through Letter of Credit, it is aimed at inviting the participation of inter alia Foreign firms.

Bids in foreign currency in any other mode of procurement shall be summarily rejected.

Subject to restriction on GTE (Para 4.9.2 below), GTE can ALSO Be in SLTE, LTE or STE mode if justified with proper approvals as per SoPP.

The point of balance between VfM and the cost/ complexity of the procedure is further aggravated as compared to OTE. The development of local industry also needs to be kept in mind.

2. Hence, GTE may be viable only in the following situations:

G GOODSW WORKS
aWhere goods of required specifications/ quality May not be available within the country, and alternatives available in the country are not suitable for the purpose, it is necessary to also look for suitable competitive offers from abroadWhere required technology/ specifications/ quality are not available within the country and alternatives available in the country are not suitable for the purpose
bnon-existence of a local branch of the global principal of the manufacturer/ vendors/ contractorsnon-existence of a local branch of the global principal of the contractors
crequirement for compliance with specific international standards in technical specificationsrequirement for compliance with specific international standards in technical specifications
dabsence of a sufficient number of competent domestic bidders likely to comply with the required technical specifications, and in case of suspected cartel formation among indigenous biddersin case the requirement cannot be executed by indigenous contractors at reasonable rates

4.9.1Terms and ConditionsGreproduced in abridged form in W

1. Advertisement — as in OTE (see para 4.8.1-2 above).

2. Free availability of documents — as in OTE.

3. Pricing of documents — the tender documents shall be priced minimally (if at all priced), keeping in view the value of the tender as also the cost of preparation and publicity of the tender documents.

4. Language and standards: GTE tender documents must be in english and must contain technical specifications that are in accordance with national requirements or else based on an international trade standard.

5. E-procurement: In Global Tender Enquiry, e-procurement May not be mandatorily insisted upon. (But e-publishing remains mandatory — see Part A, para 4.6.1-4.)

6. Notice period: The due date fixed for the opening of the tender shall be a minimum of four weeks From the date of advertisement — which may vary considering the nature of the material called for and the time required to prepare the bids. The due date may be subsequently extended with the approval of the CA to promote better competition and also considering the delivery requirement.

7. Incoterms: Relevant INCOTERMS (presently 2020 version) should be included in the tender.

8. Currency of Bidding G: In GTE, foreign bidders have the flexibility to quote prices and receive payments in either Indian rupees OR Freely convertible currencies such as US dollars, euros, pound sterling, yen, other relevant currencies, or a combination thereof.

However, prices for goods, works, or services (including agency commission) performed or sourced in India Must be quoted and paid for in Indian rupees.

Indian bidders are required to quote in INR only. During the evaluation, all quoted prices are converted into Indian Rupees.

9. Agency Commission G: The amount of agency commission — normally not exceeding five per cent — payable to the Indian agent (who shall provide self-attested documentary evidence about their identity and business details to establish that they are a bona fide business and conform to regulations) should not be more than what is specified in the agency agreement (a certified copy should be submitted along with the financial bid) between the bidder and the Indian Agent.

Agency commission shall be paid by the Procuring Entity in India in equivalent Indian rupees On satisfactory completion of the project or supplies of goods and spares.

The Indian agent will be required to submit a certificate along with their agency commission bill, confirming that the amount claimed as agency commission in the bill has been spent/ will be spent strictly to render services to the foreign principal, in terms of the agency agreement.

The Procuring Entity or their authorised agencies and/ or any other authority of the Government of India shall have rights to examine the books of the Indian agent, and defects or misrepresentations in respect of the afore-indicated confirmation coming to light during such examinations will make the foreign principal (i.e., the contractor) AND Their Indian agent liable to be debarred from having business dealings with the purchaser, following laid-down procedures for such debarment.

10. Delivery Terms G: The delivery terms are to be expressed in terms of INCOTERMS.

As per the revised policy of the Government(Ministry of Shipping's No. SC-18013/1/2013-ASO-I dated 08.09.2015):

  • All Public Procurement import contracts involving ocean freight of dry or liquid bulk cargoes Are to be finalised only on a FOB (free on board)/ FAS (free alongside ship) BASIS, and in case of any departure therefrom, prior approval of the concerned administrative Ministry/ Department May be obtained.
  • However, imports involving ocean freight of general liner cargoes, project cargoes, heavy lift, container, break bulk cargoes, etc., can now be made on FOB/ FAS/ CFR (cost & freight)/ CIF (cost, insurance & freight)/ DDP (delivery duty paid at named place) BASIS.
  • All importing Government departments/ pses can now make their own shipping arrangements without needing to route their requirements through the chartering wing of the Ministry of shipping.
  • As per the extant directive of the Government, airlifting of imported goods from abroad will be done only through an Indian carrier, wherever applicable.

11. Insurance G: Wherever necessary, the goods supplied under the contract shall be fully insured in a freely convertible currency against loss or damage incidental to manufacture or acquisition, transportation, storage and delivery as specified in the contract.

  • If considered necessary, the insurance may be done for coverage on an "all RISKS" basis, including war risks and strike clauses.
  • The amount covered under insurance should be sufficient to cover the overall expenditure incurred by the purchaser for receiving the goods at the destination.
  • Insurance for imported goods/ equipment would need to be arranged very carefully and only for cases where the value of individual shipments is expected to be more than rupees five crore.
  • Procuring entities with substantial import contracts May arrange "open cover (all risk)" annual insurance for all imports during the year with insurance companies, instead of insurance for each import separately.
  • Where delivery of imported goods is required by the purchaser on CIF/ CIP/ DDP Basis, the supplier shall arrange and pay for marine/ air insurance, making the purchaser the beneficiary.
  • Where delivery is on a FOB/ FAS Basis, marine/ air insurance shall be the purchaser's responsibility.

12. Taxes on imports G: Import of goods or services or both attracts integrated tax (IGST). The IGST rate and GST cess shall be applicable on the 'customs assessable value' PLUS The 'basic customs duty applicable thereon'.

Foreign bidders shall indicate the break-up of prices for: Freight, insurance, customs duty, port handling charges, clearing agency charges, related ITC (hs) code, IGST/ GST cess, and related HSN code, as relevant to the quoted price basis.

4.9.2Restrictions on Global Tenders up to Rs. 200 Crore

1. The bar: No Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited up to Rs. 200 crore, or any limit as May be prescribed by the Department of Expenditure from time to time.

2. The relaxation route: In exceptional cases where the Ministry or Department feels that there are special reasons for inviting GTE for tenders below such limit — including those in SLTE/ LTE mode or on a single tender basis — it May record its detailed justification and seek prior approval for relaxation From the Competent Authority specified by the Department of Expenditure.

a) The GTE Portal: The agencies/ subordinate offices under the administrative control of a Ministry/ Department that require to float a GTE for procurement of certain products/ items/ services shall submit their applications and comments online Through the GTE portal under the e-samiksha platform via https://esamiksha.gov.in/GTE_NFEProposalForm.aspx OR https://cabsec.gov.in/more/globaltenderenquiryproposal/ — starting from 5TH May 2022. No physical application will be received.

b) 'GTE portal', a user-friendly IT application under the e-Samiksha platform, was developed by the cabinet secretariat (ID No. 213/2/1/2021-C.A.IV dated 02.05.2022). For more details, refer to GTE Guidelines on the eSamiksha portal.

3. The two mandatory pre-conditions before sending a GTE proposal:

A) a domestic open tender MUST Be floated first to identify the domestic manufacturers/ service providers for the items/ services for which approval is being sought for issuance of Global Tenders.

The proposal must contain the details of domestic open tenders issued after 15.05.2020, covering:

B) the proposal must contain details of deliberations with DPIIT/ relevant industrial bodies regarding the identification of domestic manufacturers/ service providers.

4. The eight exemptions from the Rs. 200 crore restriction:

a) specialised research equipment: For procurement of specialised equipment required for research purposes, and spares and consumables for such equipment, for the use of educational and research institutes — the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department concerned shall be the Competent Authority to approve the issue of GTEs, subject to fulfilment of conditions in sub-para 5 below. The equipment should be of a specialised nature and required for research purposes, not the routine equipment used in offices. (OM No. 4/1/2021-PPD dated 11.06.2021)

b) ICT items: Gtes for procurement of ICT items, software and hardware such as blade servers, SAN storage, LAN switches, mobile testing devices, cloud orchestration & system software, network & web apts, mobile testing tools, integrated backup system (ibs), etc. Can be issued with the approval of the Secretary concerned, instead of Secretary (coordination), until further orders. (OM No. F.4/1/2022-PPD dated 29.08.2022)

c) nomination-basis procurements(as no competitive tenders are invited), inter alia including:

  • I) procurement of spare parts of the equipment/ plants & machinery, etc., on a nomination basis from original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) or original equipment suppliers (OES) or original part manufacturers (opms). (For this purpose, 'Spares' shall be taken to include CONSUMABLES for such equipment.)(OM No. 12/17/2019-PPD dated 29.10.2020)
  • ii) procurement of services like Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) and auxiliary/ add-on components for existing equipment/ plant & machinery, etc., which are procured from OEM/ OES/ OPM on a nomination basis. (OM No. F.4/1/2021-PPD dated 01.09.2021)

d) PRE-15.05.2020 contractual commitments: Where procuring entities need to issue GTEs to fulfil contractual commitments/ obligations entered by them before 15.05.2020 — i.e., a bid has been submitted by them to their clients before 15.05.2020. Similarly, where procuring entities need to issue GTEs in view of existing collaboration agreements they entered with foreign suppliers before 15.05.2020. (OM No. 4/1/2021-PPD dated 12.03.2021)

e) medical devices and drugs: Based on the reference received from the Ministry of Health & Family Welfare (MoH&fw), GTE can be floated for 354 medical devices AND 120 DRUGS (placed in Annexure 31 of the Goods Manual). These exemptions for medical devices and drugs are provided UP TO 31.03.2027 Till further orders. It is further clarified that:

  • I) the machine system includes spare parts and accessories, which May be procured by procuring entities together or separately.
  • ii) the Procuring Entity concerned May frame the detailed technical specifications for the above devices as per their requirement. (OM No. 4/1/2023-PPD(pt.) dated 28.06.2024 for devices; OM No. F.4/1/2023-PPD(pt) dated 07.06.2024 for drugs)

f) mdb/ bfa-funded projects: Projects funded by multilateral development banks (MDBs like The World Bank, Asian Development Bank, etc.)/ bilateral funding agencies (BFAs), where the procurement is governed by the conditions negotiated in the loan agreement, and where the project executing agencies from time to time further award works to various Autonomous Bodies/ CPSEs etc. — the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department responsible for execution of such project shall be the Competent Authority for approval for issuance of GTEs by such autonomous bodies/ CPSEs. (OM No. F.7/12/2021-PPD-I dated 27.07.2021)

g) semiconductor equipment: Procurement of SEMI-CONDUCTOR EQUIPMENT for the purpose of MANUFACTURING ELECTRONICS, and procurements by public-funded semiconductor and display fab facilities (including such facilities in institutes of high learning) — UP TO 31.03.2025. (OM No. F.4/1/2022-PPD-II dated 01.04.2022 and OM No. F.4/1/2023-PPD dated 23.03.2023)

h) procurement abroad for use abroad: GTE restriction up to Rs. 200 crore is not applicable for bona-fide procurements done outside India for use outside India, by CPSEs having international operations or by Indian missions abroad. Such entities should ensure that the bulk of procurement is done in India (and exported for their use abroad), as far as feasible — so as not only to promote Make in India but also to improve export performance.

5. The seven conditions attached to exemption 4(a) — Educational and Research Institutions

Educational, Research institutions, and other units will make full efforts towards reducing imports in the following manner. This will result in substantial effects both within the institutions and through impact on the eco-system:

  1. Efforts should be made to promote technology transfer through agreements, or to encourage technological collaboration with foreign manufacturing in India with the start-ups set up in research parks.
  2. Sharing and updating information about the availability of research equipment across various Indian institutes on a single portal — the I-STEM portal has been developed for this purpose — so that the needy institutes can utilise those.
  3. Without compromising quality, institutes should indicate alternative/ equivalent technical specifications that could suit their requirement, so that there are more chances for local manufacturers to participate in the tender process.
  4. Regular interaction between academia and Indian industry organisations at the level of the institution about the requirement of equipment of foreign origin and for encouraging domestic manufacturing.
  5. Regular requirements of proprietary/ non-proprietary research consumables May be assessed, and domestic alternatives May be explored for use.
  6. The office of psa initiates a national-level programme for indigenous development of scientific equipment.
  7. Without compromising quality, institutes should be flexible with specifications so that domestic manufacturers are encouraged to meet requirements.

6. Guidelines for resorting to GTE (research institutions): a) market assessment should be done by the concerned institution, as certified by the head of the institution. Only after no Indian manufacturer is found Should a GTE be issued. B) in case no Indian manufacturer/ suppliers are found, procurement May be done through GTE, subject to compliance with provisions of GFR and the requirement of procurement through GeM. C) dean (r&d) or an appropriate authority within the institute will issue certificates as per sub-para 7 below before inviting GTE. As a reporting matter in the board of governors, such certificates should be tabled and shared with the office of the psa, DPIIT, and the concerned administrative Ministry. d) The information about the procurement of equipment should be shared across various educational and research institutes through the i-stem portal. This will allow the equipment to be used by other institutions for research purposes too. e) analyse the equipment being procured time and again from abroad and help develop them in India by identifying potential manufacturers and providing them with technical assistance and expertise. This programme will be coordinated by the empowered technology group (constituted by Cabinet and chaired by the principal scientific adviser — psa). Half-yearly reports on this action are to be shared by the institutes with the office of the psa, DPIIT, and concerned administrative Ministry. f) preference for local suppliers over foreign suppliers, as per the existing Government of India guidelines, should be observed as applicable.

7. The three certificates to be issued: A) certification that locally available alternatives with equivalent specifications are not suitable for research purposes. B) the non-availability of such equipment for research purposes with nearby research institutes or within the institute. C) certification of the requirement of proprietary items of foreign origin for research purposes (where applicable).

4.9.3GTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
Risks are the same as in OTEthe same mitigation as in the case of OTE also applies here.
The involvement of foreign bidder agents in GTE procurements is also a major risk area.Procurements should preferably be made directly from the manufacturers. Either the agent on behalf of the foreign principal OR The foreign principal directly could bid in a tender — but not both. Further, in cases where agents participate in a tender on behalf of one manufacturer, they should NOT Be allowed to quote on behalf of another manufacturer along with the first manufacturer. Commissions and scope of services to/ by the agents should be explicit and transparent in the bids/ contracts.

4.10Rate Contract (RC)/ Framework Agreement (FA)Gtext; W/C/NC list it as a separate family and cross-refer

4.10.1Definition

A Rate Contract (commonly known as rc) is an agreement between the purchaser and the supplier for the supply of specified goods (and allied services, if any) at a set price and terms & conditions (as incorporated in the agreement) during the period covered by the Rate Contract.

No quantity is mentioned, nor is any minimum drawable quantity guaranteed in the Rate Contract.

The Rate Contract is a standing offer From the supplier firm. The firm and/or the purchaser are entitled to withdraw/ cancel the Rate Contract by serving an appropriate notice on each other, giving suitable notice (say thirty days).

However, once a supply order (also called withdrawal order) is placed in terms of the Rate Contract, during the validity period of the Rate Contract, on the supplier for the supply of a definite quantity — that supply order becomes a valid and binding contract.

4.10.2The Nine Items Amenable to Rate Contract

The following types of items can be advantageously procured through Rate Contracts:

  1. Goods that are regularly or repetitively required by more than one Procuring Entity/ organisation.
  2. The quantities required cannot be accurately forecast.
  3. Individual requirements of procuring entities may be small, but the total aggregate requirements of all the procuring entities are more than rs. 50 lakh per annum.
  4. The item has detailed specifications, drawings, and descriptions.
  5. Prices of the items are stable — or, if prices are variable, they can be determined through a Price Variation Clause.
  6. Items are not scarce/ critical/ 'perpetually in short supply' goods or services.
  7. Demand for the item is not seasonal, since Rate Contract holders May shy away from supplying the item during high seasonal demands and dump supplies during low demand season.
  8. Spares used for maintenance of expensive equipment/ machines, from OEMs, to facilitate uninterrupted supply of genuine spares.
  9. Consumables used by advanced research, development and scientific institutes/ organisations of the Government of India(e.g., glass wares, plastic wares, chemicals, bio-chemicals etc. — the examples are illustrative, not exhaustive).

4.10.3Merits of Rate Contract

a) Benefits to USERSb) Benefits to SUPPLIERS
I) competitive and economical price due to aggregation of demandsi) reduces marketing costs and efforts
ii) saves time, effort, person-hours, and related costs involved in the time-consuming and repetitive tender process — thus reduces lead time for procurementii) eliminates repetitive tendering and follow-up actions with multiple authorities
iii) availability of quality goods with full quality assurance backupiii) provides single-point contact for govt. Supplies
iv) enables procurement as and when required — thus reduces inventory carrying costiv) aggregation of govt. Demand leads to economic production
V) advantageous even to small users and those located in remote areasV) improves the credentials of the company
vi) provides one single point of contact to procure such itemsvi) promotes quality discipline

4.10.4Terms and Conditions

1.Conclusion of Rate Contracts, including Parallel Rate Contracts

a) any organisation can enter a Rate Contract for items amenable to the Rate Contract for its procuring entities' use (e.g., in different geographical regions/ subsidiaries). A Central purchase organisation can also enter a Rate Contract for several organisations that require the subject goods. No indents are required to enter a Rate Contract; Only an estimate of the annual requirements Of different ultimate users is needed.

Inspection and testing of such goods or services, wherever required, may be arranged by the agency entering into the rate contract.

The agency entering the Rate Contract should post the descriptions, specifications, prices and other salient details of the entire rate-contracted goods or services, appropriately updated, on its website for use by the procuring entities.

B) mode: Rate Contract enquiries should preferably BE THROUGH e-procurement or Open Tender Enquiry — but Limited Tender Enquiry/ Single Tender Enquiry can also be used if justified by the nature of the requirement. Specific special terms and conditions for the Rate Contract should be added to the Tender Documents.

C) past performance review: Performance against earlier/ current rate contracts of past/ current Rate Contract holders shall be critically reviewed Before they are considered for award of new rate contracts. Specific performance and achievement criteria as on a selected cut-off date are to be evolved for this purpose and incorporated in the tender enquiry document. The tenderers will be asked to furnish the relevant details (along with their bids) to enable the purchaser to judge their performance and achievement against the past/ current rate contracts.

d) Evaluation: Procedures stipulated for evaluation of bids and award of contract shall be applicable mutatis mutandis In the finalisation of Rate Contract — including provisions for negotiations/ counter-offer and splitting of contracts (parallel contracts).

E) parallel rate contracts: Depending on the anticipated demand of the item, location of the users, capacity of the responsive bidders, reasonableness of the prices quoted, etc. — parallel rate contracts May be awarded to more than one (preferably at least three) supplier. For transparency and to avoid criticism, all such parallel rate contracts are to be issued simultaneously, as far as feasible.

2.Period of Rate Contract

A Rate Contract should typically be for one year for stable technology products. However, in exceptional cases, a shorter or longer period of not more than two years May be considered.

As far as possible, the validity period of rate contracts should be fixed in such a way as to ensure that new budgetary levies would not affect the price And thereby frustrate the contracts.

Attempts should also be made to stagger The period of rate contracts for different items throughout the year.

3.The Nine Special Conditions Applicable for Rate Contract

A) the Procuring Entity May prescribe the amount of Bid Security in the tender document.

B) no quantity is mentioned in the Schedule of requirement; Only the anticipated drawable quantity is mentioned without commitment.

C) the purchaser reserves the right to conclude one or more than one Rate Contract for the same item.

D) the purchaser and the supplier May short-close The Rate Contract by serving suitable notice to each other. The prescribed notice period is generally fifteen to thirty days.

e) Re-negotiation and repeat bidding: The purchaser can re-negotiate the price with the Rate Contract holders even during the validity If market conditions change significantly — or undertake repeat competitive bidding through open/ advertised tenders on the same terms and conditions, including specifications, during the validity period of existing valid r/cs. In such cases, the existing r/c holders can bid, apart from the new eligible bidders, and equal and fair opportunity would be provided. If the prices received are found lower than the existing r/c prices, new r/cs May be awarded at reduced prices, and existing r/cs at higher prices May be short-closed — giving adequate notice — if they do not match such reduction in prices under the fall clause.

F) in an emergency, the purchaser May purchase the same item through an ad hoc contract with a new supplier.

G) the purchaser and the authorised users of the Rate Contract are entitled to place supply orders up to the last day of the validity Of the Rate Contract — and though supplies against such supply orders will be delivered beyond The validity period of the Rate Contract, the terms & conditions of the Rate Contract will guide all such supplies.

h) the fall clause — the price safety mechanism in rate contracts:

The fall clause provides that if the Rate Contract holder reduces its price, or sells, or even offers to sell The rate-contracted goods or services (following conditions of sale similar to those of the rate contract) at a price lower than the Rate Contract price, to any person or organisation During the currency of the Rate Contract — the Rate Contract price will be automatically reduced with effect from that date for all subsequent supplies under the Rate Contract, and the Rate Contract amended accordingly.

Other parallel Rate Contract holders, if any, are also to be allowed to reduce their price by notifying the reduced price to them, giving 07 (seven) days To intimate their revised prices, if they so desire, in a sealed cover to be opened in public on the specified date and time, and further action taken as per standard practice.

The four exceptions — the provisions of the fall clause will NOT Apply to:

  • I) export/ deemed export by the supplier;
  • ii) sale of goods or services as original equipment At prices lower than the price charged for routine replacement;
  • iii) sale of goods (such as drugs) which have expiry dates;
  • iv) sale of goods or services at lower prices —
  • 1) on or after the date of completion of placement of order of goods by the Procuring Entity, under the existing or previous rate contracts;
  • 2) under any previous contracts entered with the Central or State Government departments, including new undertakings (excluding joint sector companies and/ or private parties) and bodies.

I) the fall clause certificate: The Rate Contract holder shall furnish the following certificate to the concerned paying authority along with each bill for payment of supplies made:

4.Performance Security

Depending on the anticipated overall drawable annual quantity against a rate contract, and the anticipated number of parallel rate contracts to be issued for an item — the Department May consider obtaining Performance Security @ 3% to 5% of the value of supply order In the supply orders issued against rate contracts on the Rate Contract holder.

5.Placement of Supply Orders

a) Who may place them: Procuring entities nominated (CALLED direct demanding officers — DDO) in the Rate Contract can place supply/ withdrawal orders in terms of the rate contract during the validity period of the rate contract on the Supplier for the supply of definite quantities. An indent with required administrative and financial approvals is required before A supply order can be placed.

Alternatively, the organisation managing the Rate Contract can centrally administer the placement of withdrawal orders against indents from the constituents.

b) The mandatory-use rule and its small-value escape: Once a Rate Contract is available, all nominated procuring entities (DDOs) must mandatorily Procure the item only through supply orders on the Rate Contract holders.

In case of an emergency, if a Procuring Entity directly procures rate-contracted goods or services from the suppliers — the prices to be paid for such goods or services shall not exceed Those stipulated in the Rate Contract, and the other salient terms and conditions of the purchase should be in line with those specified in the Rate Contract. However, they May be permitted to procure a small value of their requirements directly — say up to Rs. One lakh at one time and not more than Rs. 5 lakh annually — following relevant procedures.

C) upper threshold on supply orders: The Procuring Entity May stipulate an upper threshold of value for supply orders received against the Rate Contract by the rc holder. Except with prior approval of the Procuring Entity, the contractor shall not comply With the supply orders received from the ddos exceeding such threshold amount.

D) the five criteria for choosing among parallel rc holders: All parallel rcs for an item — even at differential rates — are assumed to be at reasonable rates. The Procuring Entity can select any rc holder, following transparent and equitable criteria. The following factors May be kept in view:

  • I) the Rate Contract price.
  • ii) the past performance of firms with reference to their capacity, quality of supplies, as well as timely delivery of the goods.Procuring Entities should maintain suitable records for past performance with respect to timely delivery and quality.
  • iii) there is a need for reputed brands in the case of sensitive, critical, and vital requirements.
  • iv) the proximity of the Rate Contract holder, where proximity is considered crucial for timely delivery, ease of progressing, and from the point of view of logistics and contract management, etc.
  • v) the delivery dates committed by various Rate Contract holders with respect to the delivery requirements of the Procuring Entities.

E) the delivery-time problem in rate contracts: In rate contracts, if the time FOR delivery is not fixed by mutual agreement, IT IS not the essence of the contract AND IS not binding On the supplier. Therefore, no Liquidated Damages can be levied for non-supply or delay in supply against such orders.

That being so, under section 46 of the contract Act, the goods are only to be delivered within a "Reasonable time" — which is a rather vague concept.

But where there has been an unreasonable delay in delivery, the direct demanding officer (DDO) has the right to give the contractor notice, fixing a reasonable time FOR delivery of the goods and stipulating that delivery within the time specified shall be the essence of the contract. If the goods are not delivered within this period, the supply order can be cancelled by the agency that finalised the Rate Contract (Since he alone, not the DDO, is a party to the Rate Contract), and deficient performance is noted for future rate contracts.

f) The cure — obtaining a prior delivery commitment: However, in cases where the delivery date stipulated in the relevant order has been expressly agreed to by the supplier in writing before placing the relevant order — Liquidated Damages CAN Be recovered (by the agency that entered into the Rate Contract) from the supplier on account of delay in delivery beyond the stipulated delivery date — provided the agency that finalised the Rate Contract has not in any way interfered with the supplier's discretion to meet the said supply order by directing the supplier to give priority to some other supply orders. Therefore, it is advisable that, before placing the supply order On a Rate Contract holder, a commitment is obtained from him for the delivery period.

g) Approval before ordering: Before creating the supply order, approval of the ca (depending on the value of procurement) May be taken by submitting information about all the available parallel rcs And justifying the selection of a particular rc holder.

h) The ten essential details of a supply order:

6.Renewal of Rate Contracts

It should be ensured that new rate contracts are made operative right after the expiry of the existing rate contracts without any gap for all rate-contracted items.

In case it is not possible to conclude new rate contracts for some special reasons, timely steps are to be taken to extend the existing rate contracts with the same terms, conditions, etc., for a suitable period, with the consent of the Rate Contract holders.

Rate contracts of the firms who do not agree To such extension are to be left out.

Also, while extending the existing rate contracts, it shall be ensured that the price trend is not lower.

4.10.5RC — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. A Rate Contract is not the right mode For critical, strategic, and vital requirements, since the buyer-seller relationship is TRIPARTITE, and the timely supply of requirements and penalties thereof cannot be strictly enforced as in other modes.

In situations where items have inadequate annual or seasonal capacities in the market, the rc holders May dump material On the Procuring Entity during the wrong seasons and starve Them during working seasons. This happens in, say, CEMENT — where government buyers are likely to be saddled with huge supplies during the rainy season, but RC holders may divert the bulk of supplies to the private market during the working season.

RC Purchase is not SUITABLE for requirements of dynamic technological and price changes — e.g., PCs, laptops, tablets, servers, and mobile phones — where the price of older models may crash as soon as a new model is announced. RC holders may slow down supplies initially but dump supplies when prices crash in the market.
Rcs May be avoided for critical/ strategic and vital requirements.

For seasonal and short-supply items, procuring entities May monitor and provide clauses to prevent dumping and starving of supplies.

In technologically fast-changing products, the Procuring Entity May keep an eye on market prices and re-negotiate them as soon as market prices fall significantly due to new arrivals.
2. The existence of rcs May not be adequately made known to possible users. Moreover, the reverse risk is that many different offices May keep procuring the same item independently — thus missing the potential benefits of bulk prices and simplified processes if such items were brought under an rc.The descriptions, specifications, and other salient details of all rcs should be appropriately updated and made available on the Procuring Entity website as well as the e-procurement portal. The e-procurement system should be able to offer alerts About the availability of rc if an attempt is made to float a tender for the same item. To derive benefit from bulk prices in rc, all offices should furnish to the rc agency their annual requirement of items to enable the finalising of RCs after inviting quotations.
3. Rc procurements are at risk of being ordered more than actual requirements, since the procurement scrutiny may not be as intense as in the case of other modes of procurement.The quantity being ordered should be subject to the same level of scrutiny As in other modes of procurement, to ensure that there is no abnormal, unexplainable trend in procurement.
4. Wherever there are PARALLEL RCs for the same item from several firms, there May be intense and often unhealthy lobbying (including corrupt practices) from them to seek orders.1. Procuring entities must put in place adequate guidelines to handle rc procurements — including a transparent system of choosing the rc holders by rotation In a transparent manner in case of parallel rcs. (Suggested criteria at para 4.10.4-5-d.) The delegation of powers in this regard should also be restricted, keeping these risks in view.
2. The Procuring Entity should maintain suitable records of rc firms for past performance with respect to timely delivery and quality.
3. Wherever there are FAILURES against the rate contract in terms of timely delivery and quality of goods, such failures should be reported to the agency that entered the Rate Contract, and direct alternate procurement action May be taken to ensure the timely availability of quality materials to meet the needs of the Procuring Entity.

4.11Dynamic Price Discovery — Electronic Reverse Auction (eRA)

(Rule 167 of GFR 2017)

4.11.1What eRA Is

Electronic Reverse Auction (eRA — a type of auction classified as a dynamic procurement mode) is an online real-time purchasing technique used to select a successful bid.

eRA IS AN iterative process with automatic evaluation of bids, where bidders can offer successively more favourable bids to displace the lowest bid at any given moment within the duration of the era.

The following four parameters are announced before the start Of the online Reverse Auction:

if a new lower bid is received within the last few minutes (pre-announced, say five minutes) of closing time, the closing time May get automatically extended by a few minutes (pre-announced, say ten minutes) for others to respond. A maximum number of such extensions May be pre-announced (say 50).

The most favourable bid at the end of the stipulated/ extended time is declared as successful. It has, however, to be ensured that the entire process is conducted transparently and fairly.

4.11.2The Four Reasons Why Caution Is Advised

Electronic reverse auctions can be a powerful tool for procuring goods and services, but they also come with potential risks and drawbacks:

A) quality and supplier relationships: In an era, the focus is on price, and suppliers May be forced to cut corners To win bids — affecting the overall quality of the product or service. Additionally, aggressive bidding can strain supplier relationships, leading to long-term negative effects.

b) value for Money: While reverse auctions can drive down immediate costs, THEY may not optimise Value for Money. Factors like Total Cost of Ownership, lifecycle costs, innovation, reliability, sustainability, and strategic alignment May get overlooked.

C) lack of technology development: Suppliers May hesitate to invest in innovation or process improvements if they are constantly pressured to lower prices. This can hinder long-term competitiveness and limit the introduction of new technologies or ideas in hi-tech goods and services.

D) risk of supplier dropouts: Aggressive bidding can lead to suppliers dropping out of the market segment, reducing competition. If critical suppliers exit, it can disrupt the supply chain and impact availability.

4.11.3Where eRA Is Appropriate, Where Caution Is Needed, and Where It Is Inappropriate

A) a Reverse Auction Would Be Appropriate Where:

  • I) items are commodities, commercially-off-the-shelf items;
  • ii) it is feasible to formulate a detailed description of the subject matter of the procurement;
  • iii) there is a competitive market of bidders (say more than five) anticipated to be qualified to participate in the era, so that effective competition is ensured;
  • iv) the criteria to be used by the Procuring Entity in determining the successful bid are quantifiable and can be expressed in monetary terms.

B) Where Caution is Needed in Using Reverse Auction:

  • i) In the case of repetitive/ regularly procured items, future procurements May be affected, as there may not be the same type of price reduction in future procurements as in the first Reverse Auction. Procuring entities May face a situation of not being able to justify the higher rates received subsequently.
  • ii) where it is proposed to issue parallel orders by splitting the total order quantity among more than one supplier, a Reverse Auction May be avoided. However, in such a case, if the Reverse Auction is resorted to, then there should be adequate suppliers available — i.e., if the quantity is to be split into n parts, then suppliers available should be at least N+3.

C) Reverse Auction Would NOT Be Appropriate For:

  • I) the requirement is not of high enough value to generate competitive pressures on bidders;
  • ii) items of strategic/ critical/ vital/ high technically complex nature; Items that are in short supply in the market;
  • iii)where the QCBS System of selection is used(wherever permissible in case of Consultancy, Non-consultancy Services or Works);
  • iv) where FBS (Fixed Budget Based Selection) System of selection is used in consultancy services, wherein the only parameter for evaluation is quality/ technical criteria;
  • V) in engineered products having complexity in design;
  • vi) EPC contracts and complex works contracts;
  • vii) items where there are only a few suppliers.

4.11.4Terms and Conditions

A. The Procedure

i) STAND-ALONE eRA: The procuring entity shall solicit bids through an invitation to the electronic Reverse Auction, to be published or communicated in accordance with provisions like e-procurement. The invitation shall, in addition to the information as specified in e-procurement, include details relating to:

ii) era preceded by PQB: If the consideration of quality requires competition only among qualified bidders, era May be preceded by a stage of PQB (on the same platform as era) to shortlist qualified bidders, who would only be allowed to participate in the era process that follows.

iii) tender-cum-e-Reverse Auction (the combined procedure): Procuring entities May combine a full two-envelope e-procurement process with Reverse Auction. Then, after an e-procurement process, the e-Reverse Auction process is mandatorily conducted, taking the L1 price as the benchmark (upper limit), after the financial bid opening (declaration of L-1 landed price/s) — provided the number of valid bidders is not less than a stipulated number (3 if not specified).

iv) the shortlisting formula for the combined procedure: Unless otherwise stipulated, the following procedure shall be followed for elimination/ shortlisting of bidders (from among those qualified in the preceding e-Procurement process) eligible to participate in e-Reverse Auction:

1) the bids disallowed from participating in the Reverse Auction shall be the highest bidder(s) In the tabulation of prices in the financial bid. If the highest bidders quote the same rate, the price offer received LAST, as per the time log of the portal, shall be removed first — on the principle of last in, first out By the system.

2) the three bands:

Number of valid biddersConsequence
Less THAN the minimum stipulated number (or 3 if not specified)a Reverse Auction shall NOT Be conducted, and the financial bids from the e-procurement process shall be evaluated and finalised
4 TO 6 valid biddersTHE lowest three (3) Bidders shall be allowed to participate in the Reverse Auction
More THAN 6 valid biddersONLY 50% of the bidders (Rounded up to the next integer) shall be allowed to participate

3) the preference override: However, if MSE bidders or class-i local suppliers Under the Make in India policy do not meet the above criteria, but their prices in financial bids are within the policy's margin of preference, they shall be allowed to participate. Such bidders would be over and above The shortlist mentioned above.

B. The e-Reverse Auction Process (e-RAP)

I) there shall be no participation fees for the e-Reverse Auction.

ii) where pre-qualification precedes the era, an electronic invitation shall be issued, giving sufficient notice period To the successful bidders, so that they can formulate pricing strategies. The starting price shall be decided by the Procuring Entity.

iii) in case of the combined procedure, upon opening the financial bids, a Reverse Auction platform shall be created. The Reverse Auction shall start within the specified period (two hours if not specified) of the bid. Unless modified by the Procuring Entity, THE L-1 landed price In the financial bid (as per the calculation schema based on the Tender Document evaluation criteria) shall be the start bid price On which the auction shall be initiated.

iv) the decrement value: The Procuring Entity shall specify the decrement value before starting THE e-Reverse Auction — or, if not specified, 0.5% of the start bid price, rounded off to the next unit, tens, hundreds, thousands, etc., with a minimum of Rs. 1. The reduction in bids shall have to be made as per decrement value or in multiples thereof.

V) the timing parameters and their defaults:

ParameterDefault if not specified
Initial period of the reverse auctiontwo hours
Last-minute-bidding periodfive minutes before the auction closing time
Auto-extension periodten minutes
Maximum number of auto-extensions50

all times and periods are as per the server time stamp.

vi) service disruption: In case of service disruption at the service provider's end during the Reverse Auction, the Reverse Auction process shall start all over again, with the last recorded lowest price of the prematurely ended e-rap as the 'start bid' price.

The prices quoted in the prematurely ended e-rap shall be binding on all the bidders for consideration if the restarted process does not trigger within the stipulated time (or by 5.00 pm on the same day, if not stipulated).

Disruption and restarting of e-rap shall be intimated to all the bidders through system/ sms/ e-mail through the e-procurement portal.

vii) What is displayed: Bidders must submit only the landed price In the Reverse Auction, and only the item-wise L-1 price shall be displayed, without disclosing the number of bids and names of the bidders. The landed price would not be the same for two bidders, even if any bidder makes such an attempt.

While evaluating the bids, the exchange rate captured by the e-procurement system shall be considered for converting foreign currency into Indian rupees.

viii) Post-closure publication: After the auction's closing time, the bid history Showing all the last valid bids offered, along with the names of the bidders, shall be published. All bidders shall have the facility to see and get a print of the same for their records.

ix) binding force: All electronic bids submitted during the Reverse Auction process shall be legally binding On the bidder. Only the chronologically last bid Submitted by a bidder until the end of the auction shall be considered the valid financial bid of that bidder, and consideration of the same for entering into a contract by the Procuring Entity shall be binding on the bidder.

X) non-participation in the combined procedure: If a bidder does NOT Submit his bid in the Reverse Auction, the price quoted in the financial bid in the preceding e-procurement shall be considered the valid price of that bidder. The status of the bidder (L-1, L-2, etc.) shall be evaluated considering either the bid price submitted in the Reverse Auction, or the price quoted in the financial bid — whichever is lower.

xi) purchase preference: Short-listed MSE or class-i local suppliers, eligible for any purchase preference policy as per the tender document, shall get an opportunity to match the L-1 prices concluded after the Reverse Auction, if their final prices in the Reverse Auction fall within the permitted percentage.

xii) there shall NOT Be any negotiation after the e-Reverse Auction process is closed.

xiii) the breakup of landed price: The successful L-1 bidder, after the Reverse Auction, must upload within a stipulated period (within 2 working days, if not specified) THE breakup of landed prices In the shortfall documents, at which the contract shall be awarded.

While giving the breakup, the bidder shall include the same taxes and duties As quoted while submitting the financial bid. If the L-1 bidder FAILS To submit the breakup of the landed price within the stipulated period, the Procuring Entity shall place an order based on the breakup of the financial bid submitted by the bidder, and the same shall be binding on the bidder.

xiv) Monitoring for abuse: The Procuring Entity shall monitor whether there is improper use Of the Reverse Auction — including, for example, evidence of predatory pricing, collusion, interference with the proper operation of the technology, etc. Bidders (including their subsidiaries) found to have engaged in collusive activities or other improper practices will be treated in accordance with the cartel/ pool-rate provisions of the evaluation Chapter.

4.12Pre-qualification Modes of Procurement

4.12.1Why Pre-qualification Modes Exist

Where the procurement is significantly complex, and the capability of the source of supply is crucial for the successful performance of the contract, it May be necessary to ensure that:

  • There is competition only among bidders equally capable Of performing the contract, and
  • incapable bidders don't queer the pitch By their low-quality/ low-price bids.

In such a situation, a pre-qualification of bidders May be required to shortlist bidders who are equally capable of performing the contract. Evaluation of techno-commercial and financial bids is restricted to this shortlist only.

4.12.2Pre-qualification Bidding (PQB)

1. What it is: In the situations mentioned above, where THE time, effort and money required from the bidder To participate in a tender is high, a two-phase pre-qualification bidding May be considered.

Pre-qualification Bids (PQBs) should meet the norms of transparency, fairness, and maintenance of competition.

2. The two phases:

  • In the first PQB phase, competent, qualified bidders are shortlisted by using a pre-qualification criterion (PQC), covering:

no techno-commercial or financial details are asked for in the first phase of PQB.

  • In the second phase, tender documents (techno-commercial and financial) are issued as usual through e-procurement/ e-publishing; Bids only from shortlisted qualified bidders Are evaluated, and others are rejected.

3. Where PQB is NOT Desirable:

Since the two-phase PQB system May strain the transparency principle, and there is a heightened risk of anti-competitive practices, two-phase PQB should be done only as an exception Under specified circumstances.

Hence, the procuring entities May lay down restricted powers to approve such modes at sufficiently high levels in SoPP. It should NOT Be a routine/ normal mode of procurement, and qualification criteria as part of a single/ two/ multiple envelopes system should suffice in such situations.

PQB bidding as a separate phase is contraindicated In the following circumstances:

  • A) where procurement is being done through limited tender enquiries;
  • B) where the requirement is technically and commercially not complex enough That pre-qualification of the bidder is not crucial for the performance of the contract — for example, commercial off-the-shelf (cots) requirements;
  • C) where the procurement is significantly complex and the time, effort and money required from the bidder to participate in a tender is not significant — clear-cut, fail-pass pre-qualification criteria can be specified in single-stage tendering (Instead of two-phase tendering).

4. Pre-qualification criteria (PQC) — the two-sided test:

(A sample PQC is given in Annexure 12 of the Goods Manual.)

Due consideration should be given while framing PQC to its effect on the adequacy of competition.

PQC should NOT Result in unreasonable exclusion of 'class-i local supplier'/ 'class-ii local supplier' who would otherwise be eligible, beyond what is essential for ensuring the quality or creditworthiness of the supplier.

To encourage MSEs, local bidders and past successful bidders, a call May be taken as to whether PQC should apply to full quantity/ packages OR BE proportional to part quantity/ package quoted By a bidder.

In case the requirement is suddenly multiple times the past procurements, blind adoption of past pqcs (fractions/ percentages) May lead to the disqualification of successful past vendors, leading to inadequate competition.

PQC should, therefore, be carefully decided for each procurement With the approval of ca for acceptance of the tender.

It should be clarified in the PQB documents that bidders have to submit authenticated documents In support of eligibility criteria.

5. Advertisement and Notification — and the notice periods:

The invitation for the first-phase PQB shall be processed (advertised, tender document preparation, publicity, evaluation, and so on) in the same manner as a normal GTE or OTE (As the situation calls for) tender, ensuring the widest possible coverage.

The PQC and evaluation criteria should be clearly noted in the PQB documents.

The PQB documents should also indicate a complete Schedule of requirements for which this PQB is being done, including approximate likely quantities Of requirements.

SituationMinimum period for submission of PQBs
Normal (domestic)3 WEEKS
Where FOREIGN BIDDERS are also involved4 WEEKS
in case of urgency duly approved by camay be reduced to 10 (ten) DAYS

6. Evaluation: At least in high-value and critical procurements, the credentials regarding experience and past performance submitted by the successful bidder May be verified as per PQC — as far as reasonably feasible — from the parties for whom work has been claimed to be done.

The procuring entity shall evaluate the qualifications of bidders only in accordance with the PQC specified, and shall give due publicity to the particulars of the bidders that are qualified On the relevant portals/ websites.

7. Subsequent Procurement Tender — the single-use and six-month rules:

The pre-qualification shortlist shall be for a single subsequent procurement.

In this subsequent procurement, bids are invited from these qualified bidders only, and all other bids May be treated as unsolicited offers, which are normally rejected.

This second phase of the procurement process is handled as a normal two-envelope tender.

The time gap between the pre-qualification approval and the floating of the linked main procurement tender should normally be less than six months.

4.12.3Single Stage Pre-qualification

1. When to use it instead: In the situation described above — i.e., significantly complex procurement; the capability of the source of supply is crucial; the necessity to ensure competition only among equally capable bidders — but where the time, effort and money required from the bidder to participate in a tender is not very high:

Instead of a separate phase of pre-qualification bidding, a clear-cut, fail-pass pre-qualification criteria (PQC) Can be asked to be submitted as the first (additional) envelope in a single-stage three-envelopes system, so that a bidder's risk of having his bid rejected on the grounds of qualifications is remote if he exercises due diligence.

In e-procurement, separate files shall be uploaded by the bidder, mutatis mutandis.

2. The terminological point: Strictly SPEAKING, this is not a pre-qualification but a post-qualification Of bidders (i.e., after the techno-commercial and financial bids have been received).

In respect of pre-qualification, in the first instance on the pre-announced bid opening date, only the PQB envelopes (Also containing the EMD and other eligibility documents) are opened and evaluated to shortlist the responsive bidders who pass the pre-qualification.

3. The rest of the procedure: The rest of the procedure is the same as the two-envelope system (techno-commercial and financial bids) for only qualified bidders.

  • In e-procurement, the other two envelopes of unqualified Bidders would remain encrypted and unopened.
  • In off-line tenders, the other two envelopes of unqualified bidders are returned unopened To the respective bidders by registered acknowledgement due/ reliable courier, or any other mode with proof of delivery.

4.12.4PQB Tendering — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. Pre-qualification criteria: PQB has the potential of getting misused or being applied without considering the restrictive nature of competition. PQC should be relevant to the quality requirements, and neither very stringent nor very lax in restricting/ facilitating the entry of bidders. These criteria should be clear, unambiguous, exhaustive, and yet specific. Also, there should be FAIR COMPETITION.Lay down criteria for when prequalification in single-stage or two-stage tendering is warranted. Also, model PQC criteria for diverse types of procurements should be laid down on the lines of Annexure 12.
2. Dangers of anti-competitive bidding: Since in a two-stage PQB, shortlisted bidders are announced, there is a heightened possibility of these bidders forming a cartel and quoting anti-competitive prices In the second stage of tendering.Two-stage PQB should be done only in appropriately justified situations. Alternatively, a single-stage multiple-envelope system May be used for prequalification — in which the chances of anti-competitive behaviour and cycle time Are significantly lower.
3. Two-phase PQB is a time-consuming process.(as above)
4. Contentious and disputes: Both the successful and unsuccessful bidders tend to view the PQB process as a means for creating rights/ privileges/ entitlement for them — by way of hair-splitting, contentious or viciously legalistic interpretations of PQC criteria, disregarding the very rationale of the PQB and PQC.In the PQC, a caveat against such tendencies May be included — asserting the right of the procuring agency to interpret the PQC on common usage of terminologies and phrases in Public Procurement, instead of legalistic and hair-splitting judgements — and that their decision in this regard would be final.

4.13Approved Vendor List (AVL)Gtext; W/C/NC list it and cross-refer to Goods para 4.7

4.13.1Strategic, Safety and Security Requirements — the Justification

Many organisations have regular and continuous Requirements of tailor-made items (for which the Procuring Entity is the monopoly buyer), which are critical for the safety and security of its operations, and where large investments and gestation periods Are needed for developing manufacturing and quality control infrastructure/ processes for its production.

In view of heavy investments, vendors need regular and sustained offtake for financial viability.

Such procurement needs to be done over an extended period of time only from vendors who have undergone rigorous pre-qualification.

The firms are assessed for requisite infrastructure to produce consistent quality goods up to the assessed production capacity, with regular monitoring of the quality assurance system.

It May even involve, if required, extended field trials of products and inspection of manufacturing/ quality assurance facilities and processes. Such time-consuming pre-qualification would not be feasible for each individual procurement.

4.13.2What an AVL Is

In such situations, a separate phase of PQB tendering is done with a much more stringent PQC — but the resultant shortlist of qualified vendors is kept valid for an extended period (say 2 to 5 years) As stipulated in the PQB documents.

These are called approved vendor lists (AVL). In some countries, these May be referred to as multi-use lists.

4.13.3The Two Categories of Approved Vendors

CategoryBasis of approvalUpgrade path
"Developmental vendors" (may be named 'Temporarily or Provisionally Approved Vendors' in some organisations)Approval is granted based on an assessment of infrastructure facilities available and satisfactory production of samples as per specification — but their capability to consistently produce the quality material giving satisfactory service life in the field Is yet to be establishedafter these development vendors demonstrate a capability to produce consistent quality goods with required service life over a period (say 2 years), they are upgraded
"Approved vendors"(the regular category)Demonstrated consistent quality over the qualifying period

4.13.4Procurement Restricted to AVL — and the 20:80 Split

in all subsequent procurements, eligibility criteria restrict participation to the "Approved Vendor List" (regular and developmental), and all other bids are treated as unsolicited offers, which are normally rejected.

Only a part — say not more than 20% — of the total tendered quantity is distributed among development vendors, provided they quote lower than The regular approved vendors.

The rest of the quantity (say 80% or more) is awarded to 'approved vendors'.

This ensures that development vendors are able to demonstrate their capabilities for upgradation to the regular approved vendor category.

Thus, it should be ensured that development orders are for a viable quantity for production and for the purpose of proving their capability.

4.13.5Benefits of AVL

An AVL is a powerful tool that contributes to cost control, reliability, and overall efficiency In procurement for strategic, safety and security goods.

It ensures that vendors have undergone rigorous vetting And have demonstrated stability and reliability.

Working with approved vendors instils confidence in the quality Of materials and components purchased and reduces the chances of defects. Downtime due to failures and repairs is also minimised.

4.13.6Monitoring and Updation

An AVL is a dynamic tool, and its effectiveness depends on proactive management and adaptability. Updating an AVL over time is crucial to maintain its effectiveness and relevance.

  • If a new vendor applies for inclusion in AVL, it May be added to AVL if it meets the PQC in the original PQB.
  • Key performance indicators (KPIs) for vendors should be part of the PQB document — including on-time delivery, product quality, and responsiveness.
  • These metrics May be used to conduct periodic reviews of the AVL (e.g., annually or biannually), and vendors who consistently fail to meet standards or demonstrate poor performance May be downgraded or removed From the AVL.
  • Audits of existing vendors May be conducted to assess financial stability, production capabilities, and adherence to contractual terms.
  • The procuring Entity should MONITOR industry trends, technological advancements, and new suppliers.
  • Feedback May be gathered from stakeholders who use or maintain the goods. Their insights can highlight areas for improvement or identify potential issues with specific vendors.
  • Vendors May be given support to enhance their capabilities and training, share best practices, and encourage continuous improvement.

4.13.7Where AVL Is Not Desirable

The same contra-indications as in PQB are much more accentuated In the case of AVL, as the list is used over prolonged periods.

Hence, the AVL mode for an item should be approved at the highest level In the procuring organisation.

Since the AVL system strains the transparency principle And there is a heightened risk of cartelisation and collusion, AVL should NOT Be a routine/ normal mode of procurement and should be done only as an exception — otherwise, PQB modes of procurement May be used.

AVL is contraindicated in the following seven circumstances: A) where the requirement is not related to strategic, safety or security. B) where the item is not tailor-made, nor is the Procuring Entity a monopoly buyer. C) where the item is not regularly and continuously procured. D) where the requirement is technically and commercially not complex enough. e) where large investment and prolonged gestation period are not required In developing manufacturing/ quality assurance facilities/ processes. F) where the technology is not stable And is evolving/ changing at a fast pace. G) where procurement can be done through limited tender enquiries.

4.13.8AVL — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. Dependency on vendors: It can shift the balance of power to the hands of the vendor — leading to many disadvantages:

1.1 anti-competitive practices: These approved vendors can easily form a cartel and indulge in anti-competitive practices. This includes a significant risk of collusion due to power in the hands of the procurement entity's personnel who inspect/ monitor the facilities/ quality.

1.2 cost escalation: Over time, vendor costs May increase, affecting overall procurement expenses.

1.3 supplier ethics and compliance: Approved vendors May engage in unethical practices or violate compliance standards.
1. Diversify the AVL by including multiple reliable vendors for critical goods. Maintain a backup list of development vendors To mitigate sudden disruptions. Regularly monitor and update the AVL.

1.1 be alert about cartel/ pool rates. Include a cartel clause And take mitigation measures.
The personnel in such jobs May be rotated frequently And should not be allowed to be in the same position for more than 3 years.
If the same personnel who created The AVL are also given the task of monitoring it, it May create a conflict of interest. So, personnel for these two tasks should be different.
The KPIs and PQC should be objectively measurable.
Every three years, a fresh PQB May be done for new vendors.

1.2 benchmark costs periodically against market trends. Negotiate long-term contracts with price stability clauses.

1.3 conduct due diligence on vendors' ethical practices. Include compliance clauses for the Code of Integrity In contracts and monitor adherence.
2. Lack of monitoring and updation: AVL is a dynamic tool that needs constant monitoring and updating.
2.1 complacency: Once vendors are approved, complacency May set in, leading to reduced performance.
2.2 quality fluctuations: Even approved vendors May occasionally deliver subpar quality due to production issues or changes in their processes.
2. Monitor and update the AVL lists.
2.1 continuously engage with vendors, encourage innovation, and set improvement targets.
2.2 regularly audit vendors to ensure consistent quality.
3. Market dynamics: Market dynamics (e.g., price fluctuations and technological advancements) impact vendor capabilities and competitiveness.
3.1 innovation gap: Sticking to the same vendors May hinder access to innovative solutions. A non-approved vendor offers an innovative solution that could significantly improve operations.
3. Stay informed about industry trends and adjust the AVL accordingly.
3.1 encourage vendors to propose new technologies or approaches. Consider adding emerging vendors to the AVL. Evaluate the benefits and risks. Seek approval for a temporary exception, or consider adding the vendor to the AVL.
4. Inadequate or too-many vendors on AVL: Both an inadequate number of vendors AND too many vendors on AVL may be detrimental to the intended benefits.
Too many vendors May force vendors to cartelise for survival — having invested heavily in creating infrastructure.
Too few vendors May create supply chain disruption and increased prices.
Such situations may be specially monitored. In the PQB document, an upper limit May be indicated for the maximum number of suppliers to be taken on AVL.
A large number of vendors getting cleared for AVL is an indication that this item is not a fit case for AVL mode.
In case of inadequate numbers on AVL, a repeat PQB May be done, and efforts May be made to induce new vendors with technological and preferential help in setting up infrastructure.

4.14Limited Tender Enquiry (LTE)

(Rule 162 of GFR 2017)

4.14.1What LTE Is

LTE is a restricted competition procurement, where a pre-selected panel of vendors is directly approached for bidding.

G GOODSW WORKS
Who is on the panelvendors on the list of registered suppliers For the subject matter of procurement — for goods and services not available on the GeM portalbidders enlisted with the Procuring Entity, along with those enlisted with other public works organisations/ works PSUs

bids from uninvited bidders are treated as unsolicited And are not entertained, except in exceptional circumstances.

However, ministries/ departments should evolve a system by which requests for registration/ enlistment of interested/ unsolicited firms should be decided before the bid in the next round of tendering.

This mode provides a short and simple procedure But May not provide as good a VfM as in the case of open tendering — but it is still a good balance for procurements below a threshold.

4.14.2When LTE Is the Default Mode — THE THRESHOLD DIVERGENCE

ManualThreshold
G GOODSLTE procedures should be the default mode Of procurement when the estimated value of procurement is between Rs. 5 lakh to Rs. 50 lakh (Rupees Five Lakh to Fifty Lakh)
W WORKSLTE procedures should be the default mode of procurement when the estimated value of procurement is up to Rs. 10 lakh (Rupees Ten Lakh) — OR when limited numbers of tenderers are known to possess requisite skills, technology and resources, by reason of their highly complex or specialised nature, OR FOR works of a secret nature
C Consultancy / NC Non-consultancyUsed for procurements up to Rs. 50 lakh

4.14.3Terms and Conditions

1. Prior approval of the panel: The shortlist of vendors/ contractors from the list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors for the subject matter of procurement, to whom it is proposed to send tender documents, shall be approved by the Competent Authority before floating the tender.

2. Rotation where the panel is large: In case the number of registered/ enlisted bidders for an item/ work is large and unwieldy, A transparent system of rotation of invitation to bid May be used to keep the invited shortlist to a manageable number (SAY 8 TO 12).

3. Despatch and mandatory publication: In off-line tendering, copies of the tender documents should be sent free of cost (Except in case of priced specifications/ drawings) directly by speed post/ courier/ e-mail To the panel.

Further, the Procuring Entity should also mandatorily publish its limited tender enquiries:

  • GON GeM as well as ON GeM-CPPP;
  • WON GeM-CPPP.

Apart from that, the organisations should publish the tender enquiries on its own/ the department's or ministry's website.

4. The minimum number Rule: The minimum number of bidders to whom LTE should be sent is more than three.

In case less than three Approved vendors/ contractors are available, LTE May be sent to the available approved vendors/ contractors with the approval of the ca, duly recording the reasons.

Efforts should then be made to identify a higher number of approved suppliers/ contractors By the supplier registration/ enlistment section, to obtain more responsive bids on a competitive basis.

5. Simplified tender document:A simplified tender document with brief terms and conditions Should be used, instead of a detailed tender document.(G Annexure 8 — Limited Tender Form · C Annexure 15 · NC Annexure 9.)

in any case, all registered vendors/ contractors who are normally invited to quote in such limited tenders have already acknowledged acceptance of the "general conditions of contract" as part of the registration application, which is applicable to such procurements — in addition to these brief "terms and conditions" in the LTE tender form.

If necessary, specifications and drawings or any other document May be enclosed with the limited tender form.

6. Currency: In domestic tenders, any bid in foreign currency should be summarily rejected.

7. The security exemption: Since selected bidders are normally registered/ enlisted with the Procuring Entity, bid Security (EMD) and Performance Security are normally not taken in LTE.

4.14.4LTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. A major risk in this mode is that the demand May be artificially split to avoid OTE or higher-level approvals.The e-procurement portal May be programmed to raise an alert If the same item is repeatedly attempted to be procured through LTE.
2. There is a risk that LTE May not attract enough bids, and sometimes there May be a single acceptable offer.
It could be due to tender documents not reaching the targeted bidders — intentionally or otherwise.
It could also be due to bidders not getting adequate time to submit bids.
This could also be due to an insufficient database of registered/ known vendors.
To ensure sufficient response, in addition to mails/ emails to selected vendors, web-based publicity should be given for limited tenders — with suitable clarifications that unsolicited bids shall not be considered.
Sufficient time should be allowed for the submission of bids — say two weeks. A shorter or longer period, if considered sufficient, could be allowed if justified according to the urgency/ complexity of the requirement.
Further, a limited or open tender that results in only one effective offer Shall be treated as a single Tender Enquiry situation, with relevant powers of approval, etc.
3. There is also a risk that the selection of vendors May not be transparent.
At the evaluation stage, some invited bidders May be passed over on the grounds of being ineligible/ unreliable.
On the other hand, unsolicited bidders May also quote, causing a dilemma of transparency regarding the consideration of such offers.
Maintenance of a panel of registered suppliers for each subject matter of procurement is a sine qua non for LTE (Rule 150 GFR 2017). Such panels of vendors should be reviewed every year To ensure an adequate number of registered suppliers.
The panel should not be changed after the LTE tender has been published.
ALL past successful vendors/ bidders should invariably be invited. In case it is proposed to exclude any registered/ approved vendor/ contractor from being shortlisted for inviting LTE, detailed reasons — such as failure in supply — should be duly recorded, and approval of the ca should be taken before exclusion.
Bidders should be selected with due diligence to ensure that bidders who do not meet eligibility criteria are not shortlisted.
At the evaluation stage, in LTE, passing over of a duly shortlisted bidder on grounds of poor past performance or eligibility May raise questions about transparency.

4.15Special Limited Tender Enquiry (SLTE)

4.15.1What SLTE Is and When It May Be Used

LTE/ SLTE mode is permissible in certain special circumstances for values higher than the LTE threshold, where normally OTE should have been done.

Powers to sanction procurement on an LTE/ SLTE basis in such exceptional cases May be laid down in SoPP, based on a certificate of urgency signed by the indentor.

This mode has the merit of being quicker, but the VfM obtained May be less than in the case of OTE; Hence, it should be restricted to the following four situations:

1. Urgency: The Competent Authority in the Ministry/ Department certifies That there is an existing or prospective urgency for operational or technical requirements, and any additional expenditure involved by not procuring through advertised tender enquiry is justified in view of urgency. The Ministry/ Department should also put on record the nature of the urgency and reasons why the procurement could not be anticipated earlier.

2. Public interest: There are sufficient reasons to be recorded in writing by the Competent Authority, indicating that it will not be in the public interest To procure the goods/ works through advertised tender enquiry.

3. Known sources: The sources of supply are definitely known, and the possibility of fresh source(s) beyond those being tapped is remote.

4. Policy: Government policy designates procurement from specific agencies.

4.15.2Terms and Conditions

1. The tender process would be the same as in the case of a normal LTE Described above. However, the tender documents are more detailed, as in the case of OTE.

2. The indentor's certificate: The indentor should certify that there is an existing or prospective urgency for operational or technical requirements, and that any additional expenditure involved by not procuring through an advertised tender enquiry is justified in view of urgency. The indentor should also put on record the nature of the urgency and reasons why the procurement could not be anticipated.

3. Currency: In domestic tenders, any bid in foreign currency should be summarily rejected.

4. The security Rule — the opposite of LTE: Unlike LTE, bid Security and Performance Security are taken in SLTE, as in OTE tenders.

4.15.3SLTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
Risks as applicable in both LTE and OTE Are also applicable here.

In addition, there is a risk that this mode May be used unjustifiably to avoid open tendering (OTE).
All mitigation strategies of LTE and OTE shall also apply here.

In addition, the checks and balances systems should be tighter By way of enhanced and severely restricted delegation of powers for certification of urgency and approval of this mode of procurement.

A system of reports from the authority signing the urgency certificate, AND post facto review of utilisation of received goods/ works/ services to tackle the expressed urgency, May be laid down.

4.16Proprietary Article Certificate (PAC) Procurement

(Rule 166(i) and (iii) of GFR 2017)

4.16.1When PAC May Be Certified

In the procurement of goods, certain items are procured only from original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) or manufacturers having proprietary rights (or their authorised dealers/ stockists) against a PAC certificate. (Format at Annexure 9 of the Goods Manual.)

this mode May be the shortest, but since it May provide lesser VfM than LTE/ OTE AND strains the transparency principle, it should be used only in justifiable situations.

Such situations may arise on the following three grounds where a PAC can be certified:

1. Sole manufacturer: It is in the user department's knowledge that only a particular firm is the manufacturer Of the required goods.

2. Standardisation and warranty: For standardisation of machinery or components or spare parts to be compatible with the existing sets of machinery/ equipment (On the advice of a competent technical expert), or if it is a condition of the manufacturer's warranty that only OEM spares are to be used during the warranty period — the required goods are to be purchased only from a selected firm duly approved by the Competent Authority.

3. Research continuity: In case of advanced educational, research, development and scientific institutes/ organisations of national importance, specialised equipment and their spares/ consumables May have to be procured from the same original vendor — on the advice of a competent technical expert and approved by the project in-charge — to maintain consistency/ reproducibility/ continuity of established/ standardised methods/ protocols to attain objectives of such projects.

4.16.2Terms and Conditions

1. The certificate and its effect on powers: Users should enclose, with their indent, a PAC certificate signed by the appropriate authority as per DFPR/ SoPP, with the concurrence of associated finance, for sourcing an item from OEM or PAC firms or their authorised agents.

Once a PAC is thus signed, the powers of procurement are the same as in normal conditions As per the delegation of powers.

2. Proprietary items shall be purchased only from a nominated manufacturer, or its authorised dealer as recorded in the PAC certificate.

3. In certain unavoidable cases, the procuring authority May have no alternative but to waive payment of EMD/ SD for procurement on a proprietary basis.

4.16.3PAC — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. There is a risk that this mode May get used unjustifiably to restrict competition. Such risks get aggravated in case of secrecy about such procedures, as alternative vendors/ contractors may not even come to know about such opportunities.The delegation of powers should be restricted for signing the PAC.
Even in PAC procurements, the NIT and the award of contract should be put on gem-cppp and Procuring Entity websites.
2. Once approved, there is a risk of a nexus getting developed, and the mode May continue to be used for many years without fresh application of mind.No item should be procured on a PAC basis for more than three years, after which a mandatory OTE mode May be used to test the market.
The procuring entity may also keep an eye on the GeM portal for other vendors Who can supply such items.
3. The bidder May charge a price higher than the market.To the extent feasible, the PAC firm should be asked to accept a "Fall clause" — undertaking that if it supplies or quotes a lower rate to other governments, the public sector, or private organisations, it shall reimburse the excess.
If the price offered is not acceptable, negotiation May be held with the PAC firm.

4.17Single Tender Enquiry (STE) / Selection by Nomination

(Rule 166 of GFR 2017 · NC cites Rule 204)

4.17.1What STE Is and When It May Be Used

G A tender invitation to one firm only without a PAC certificate is called a single tender.

W The selection by direct negotiation/ nomination is called a single tender.

This mode May be the shortest, but since it May provide lesser VfM as compared to LTE/ OTE And May also strain the transparency principle, it should be resorted to only under the following conditions:

G GOODS — ONE ground only (where a PAC cannot be certified)

1. In the case of an existing or prospective emergency relating to operational or technical requirements to be certified by the indentor, the required goods are necessary to be purchased from a particular source — subject to the reason for such decision being recorded and approval of the Competent Authority obtained.

W WORKS — SIX grounds

1. Unforeseeable urgency: There is an urgent need for the work, and engaging in a competitive tendering process would therefore be impractical — provided that the circumstances giving rise to the urgency were neither foreseeable by the Procuring Entity nor the result of dilatory conduct on its part.

2. Natural continuation — and the 25% cap: Works that represent a natural continuation of previous work carried out by the firm, when — considering the limited size of the additional work in relation to the original procurement And the reasonableness of the price — it will be cost-effective to resort to single-source procurement.

3. Emergency/ disaster: In case of an emergency situation, situations arising after natural disasters, situations where timely completion of the work is of utmost importance — subject to the reason for such decision being recorded and approval of the Competent Authority obtained.

4. Proprietary techniques/ sole expertise: Situations where execution of the work May involve use of proprietary techniques, OR only one contractor has the requisite expertise.

5. National defence/ security: The procurement entity engages in procurement involving national defence or national security And determines that single-source procurement is the most appropriate method of procurement.

6. Overall interest: Under some special circumstances, it May become necessary to select a particular agency where adequate justification is available for such single-source selection in the context of the overall interest of the Ministry or Department.

4.17.2Terms and Conditions

1. The restricted-powers Rule: The reasons for an STE AND The selection of a particular firm must be recorded and approved by the ca As per the delegation of powers laid down in DFPR/ SoPP — prior to single tendering. Unlike in PAC, the powers of procurement of STE are more restricted.

2. Gother terms and conditions of PAC procurement mentioned above would also apply in this case.

2. W — Fairness and no-splitting: The Procuring Entity shall ensure fairness and equity And shall have a procedure in place to ensure that:

  • The prices are reasonable and consistent with market rates for work of a similar nature; And
  • the required work is not split into smaller-sized procurements.

3. The mandatory quarterly reporting of nomination awards WCNC:

In case of single tender procurements:

A) a report relating to such awards on a nomination basis shall be submitted every quarter TO:

  • i) THE SECRETARY, in case of Ministries/ Departments;
  • ii) the board of directors or equivalent managing body, in case of Public Sector Undertakings, Public Sector Banks, Insurance companies, etc.;
  • iii) the chief executive of the organisation where such a managing body is not in existence.

b) THE audit committee or similar unit In the organisation May be required to check at least 10% of such cases.

4.17.3STE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
GTHE same but more heightened risks than PAC Are present in this mode. The selection of a single vendor May be non-transparent and unjustified.The same mitigation strategies as in the case of PAC should apply. Procurements on an STE basis should be made from reputed firms after determining the reasonableness of rates. The procurement powers for STE should be severely restricted.
Wrisks as applicable in both LTE and OTE are also applicable here. In addition, there is a risk that this mode May be used unjustifiably to avoid open tendering (OTE), thereby making the selection of the contractor non-transparent and unjustified.All mitigation strategies of LTE and OTE would apply here also. In addition, the systems of checks and balances should be tighter by way of enhanced and severely restricted delegation of powers in this regard for certification of urgency And approval of this mode. A system of reports from the authority signing the urgency certificate, and post facto review of utilisation of executed works and receipt of incidental goods/ services To tackle the expressed urgency, May be laid down. Audit should take up the bulk of such cases for review to judge the genuineness of urgency certification.

4.18Direct Procurement without Quotation

(Rule 154 of GFR 2017)

4.18.1What It Is and When It May Be Used

direct procurement of goods without formal quotations is normally done for the smallest value procurements. This is also called petty purchase.

It should be used for off-the-shelf goods with simple and standard specifications, and when the required goods (of required specification or within the required delivery period, etc.) are not available on GeM.

However, for procurement outside GeM, it is mandatory for a buyer to generate a "GeM availability report and past transaction summary" (gemar&pts) with a unique id on the GeM portal using his login credentials.

The procedure is the simplest and quickest, BUT VfM May be poor; Hence, it is suitable only for low-value, urgent and simple requirements In the following three situations:

1. The value threshold and the scientific-ministry enhancement:

CategoryLimit per case/ occasion
GeneralRs. 50,000 (Rupees Fifty Thousand) for each requirement/ case
scientific ministries/ departments — for scientific equipment and computersENHANCED to Rs. 1,00,000/- (Rupees One Lakh) on each occasion (OM No. F.20/42/2021-PPD dated 20.05.2024)

2. The requirement is urgent but was not covered in the procurement plan.

3. The requirement is for off-the-shelf goods of simple and standard specifications. Examples of procurement are the day-to-day needs of the office and field units, and so on.

4.18.2Terms and Conditions

1. Who does it and the certificate: The competent officer of the Procuring Entity can initiate and complete this purchase after diligent enquiries from the market And filling out the certificate prescribed (G Annexure 10 · C Annexure 13 · NC Annexure 7).

Such powers, to a limited extent, can also be given to various user sections for operational needs.

2. The imprest system: Normally, an imprest amount (with facilities for cheque payments) sufficient for two months' estimated procurements Can be sanctioned, so that officers can handle such procurements. The imprest amount can be recouped on a monthly basis by submission of expense vouchers.

3. Records: IN A summary form, records should be kept of the vendors/ contractors approached and the prices they indicate.

4. The essence of the mode: Selection of sellers by diligent market enquiry is of the essence of this mode of procurement.

5. Where to survey: In larger cities, reputed shopping malls May also be included in the market survey. Reputed internet shopping portals May also be explored.

4.18.3Direct Procurement without Quotations — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. The main risk is the splitting of demand to avoid higher approvals or higher modes of procurement.Supervisors should carry out periodic reviews Of such procurements to ensure that the demand is not split into small quantities for the sole purpose of avoiding the necessity of getting approval from the higher authority, or for avoiding LTE or OTE mode.
AN annual review Of such procurements shall be carried out to ensure that future anticipated requirements are clubbed and procured through LTE/ OTE/ rc.
To keep better control, an annual ceiling May be fixed for each office for such a mode of procurement — say, rupees five lakh for each office per year. Each office should maintain records to monitor such limits.
2. Over a period, intentionally or otherwise, the due diligence of enquiries from the market May degenerate into a mechanical obtaining of quotations, leading to the development of nexus and crony suppliers.
Vendor selection May be manipulated with fake supporting vouchers.
Since such small-value materials do not undergo accounting and inventory control, there is a risk of the development of a nexus, leakages, and fake procurements and payments.
The same set of vendors May get patronised repeatedly for a wide variety of requirements.
Since only cursory visual inspections Are done, quality May be at risk.
Supervisors should cross-check a percentage of cases in the market for prices, fake vouchers, and so on.
Supervisors should also check that the same vendor(s) is not being patronised repeatedly.
for the sake of transparency, payments should be made by cheque or through electronic clearance service — except that cash payment May be allowed up to Rs. 5,000 (rupees five thousand).
Staff involved with such procurements should not continue in the same role for long and should be rotated frequently.

4.19Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee

(Rule 155 of GFR 2017)

4.19.1What It Is and When It May Be Used

this mode of procurement is made by a local Purchase Committee consisting of three members of an appropriate level, constituted by hod.

This procedure is slightly more complex And is likely to provide BETTER VfM Than direct procurement without quotation; Hence, it is suitable for marginally higher thresholds.

It is used in the following conditions:

1. The value band and the scientific-ministry enhancement:

CategoryLimit per occasion
GeneralAbove Rs. 50,000/- and up to rs. 5,00,000/- (Rupees Five Lakh) only, on each occasion
scientific ministries/ departmentsENHANCED to Rs. Ten LAKH (above Rs. 1 lakh, as in para 4.18.1-1 above) on each occasion (same OM and same list of qualifying Ministries as at para 4.18.1)

2. GeM condition: Only in case when a certain item is not available on the GeM portal (of required specification or within the required delivery period, etc.). However, for procurement outside geM, it is mandatory for a buyer to generate a GeMAR&PTS With a unique id on the GeM portal.

3. Extension to small works and services: This mode of procurement is described in the parlance of procurement of goods; However, in principle, it is equally applicable to contingency expenditure on small works/ services.

4.19.2Terms and Conditions

1. The controlling Ministry May lay down an annual ceiling value per office/ unit for such procurements.

2. In case of emergency procurement, the facility for withdrawing the requisite advance cash amount and its subsequent account May also be considered.

3. This is intended to be a fast-track, simple mode Of procurement. The committee will survey the market To ascertain the reasonableness of rate, quality and specifications And identify the appropriate supplier.

4. The essence — market survey, NOT A mini-lte: The selection of suitable products and suppliers by actual market survey (not by calling tenders like a mini-lte) is the essence of this mode.

Therefore, there is no question of obtaining quotations by email or otherwise.

The committee shall survey the market to ascertain the reasonableness of rate, quality and specifications and identify the appropriate supplier. The survey May include online internet shopping portals, besides physical local market surveys.

For organisations in smaller towns/ hinterlands, surveys in nearby bigger cities/ metros May also be included As part of the survey, depending on the ease of logistics.

5. The certificate:Before recommending the placement of the purchase order, members of the committee will jointly record the certificate prescribed(G Annexure 11 · C Annexure 14 · NC Annexure 8).

6. The committee shall survey the market to ascertain the reasonableness of rate, quality, and specifications; Identify the appropriate supplier; And jointly record a certificate before placing the purchase order.

4.19.3Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
Risks are the same as in the case of direct procurement without quotation mentioned above — with mitigation due to the involvement of three members.

Over a period, intentionally or otherwise, the due diligence of enquiries from the market May degenerate into a system of floating and obtaining limited tenders — leading to delays and the development of nexus and crony suppliers.
Mitigation strategies are also the same as in direct procurement without quotation.

4.20Award of Work through Quotations [W ONLY]

1. The threshold and the permitted works: Use of quotations up to Rs. Five lakh in each instance Shall be adopted for procurement of minor civil works LIKE:

— for which there is an established market.

Procuring Entity shall not divide its procurement into separate contracts to bring the amount less than the amount set forth for such purpose.

2. The minimum of three: Procuring Entity shall request quotations from as many contractors as practicable, but positively from at least three contractors.

Each contractor from whom a quotation is requested shall be informed whether any elements other than the charges for the works to be executed — such as transportation and insurance charges, duties and taxes — are to be included in the price.

3. One quotation only, no revision: Each contractor is permitted to give only one price quotation AND IS not permitted to change its quotation.

4. Emergent cases only: Award of work through quotations shall be resorted to only in emergent cases, AND suitable reasons shall be recorded.

4.21Award of Works in Stalled Contracts [W ONLY]

1. The problem: Where a contractor abandons or stops the work mid-way — either due to insolvency or a dispute or other reason — engagement of the new contractor takes considerable time, and in the meanwhile:

  • Public money is locked up in assets which cannot be utilised,
  • apart from inconvenience and loss of amenities to the general public Due to such half-completed works.

2. The solution — and its two conditions: Notwithstanding anything in the GFR or the Manual, procuring entities should devise methods (including limited/ single tenders) to deal with part-completed contracts, wherever the work is abandoned by the contractor mid-way.

However, for issuance of limited/ single tenders in such cases:

  • Condition 1 — the 20% billing test: At least 20% of work should have been billed By the contractor who has abandoned the work.
  • Condition 2 — elevated approval: Procurement approval of such limited/ single tender should be at the next higher level, or such level as May be prescribed.

4.22Mode Selection by Value — Non-Consultancy Services [NC ONLY]

4.22.1Higher Value Non-consultancy Services

(Rule 201(ii) of GFR, 2017)

in procurements of non-consultancy services above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, it should normally be by an advertised mode (i.e., OTE).

Services which are available on GeM have to be mandatorily procured through that portal.

4.22.2Lower Value Non-consultancy Services

(Rules 199 and 201(i) of GFR 2017)

for procurement below Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, LTE can be issued to a selected shortlist of likely service providers.

The three-step shortlisting procedure:

1. The long list: To start with, preparation of a long list of potential service providers May be done on the basis of formal or informal enquiries FROM:

2. The moderated long list: The Procuring Entity should scrutinise the preliminary long list Of likely service providers as identified above, and shortlist the prima facie eligible and capable service providers From the long list.

The number of service providers in this moderated long-list should be more than three.

3. The standing panel: To smoothen this shortlisting of service providers, procuring entities who do frequent procurement OF non-consultancy services May consider the preparation of a panel of qualified service providers, after evaluation of their credentials — on the lines of registration of vendors in the procurement of goods.

Services that are available on GeM have to be mandatorily procured through that portal.

4.22.3Small Value Non-consultancy Services

The rationale: In small-value procurement of non-consultancy services, the service provider May neither be capable of handling the bidding process, nor May procurement be done by shopping mode of procurement.

ValueMode to be used
UP TO Rs. 50,000 (Fifty thousand)THE 'Direct procurement without quotation' Mode of procurement used in procurement of goods May very well be utilised in such cases (certificate at Annexure 7)
UP TO Rs. 5 (Rupees Five) LAKHTHE 'Direct procurement by a Purchase Committee' Mode, as used in procurement of goods, May be utilised (certificate at Annexure 8)

in all such modes of procurement, the procedure prescribed in the Manual for procurement of goods, 2024, May be followed.

Appendix to Chapter 4 — Part B: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1SLTE thresholdG/C/NC: above Rs. 50 LAKH · W: above Rs. 10 LAKH
2OTE thresholdG/C/NC: above Rs. 50 lakh · W: above Rs. 10 lakh
3LTE default bandG: Rs. 5 lakh to Rs. 50 lakh · W: up to Rs. 10 lakh · C/NC: up to Rs. 50 lakh
4Rule cited for LTE/ SLTE thresholdG/C/NC: Rule 162 · W: Rule 139(v) AND Rule 162
5Additional non-monetary grounds for LTE (high complexity/ specialised nature; works of a SECRET nature)W ONLY
6LTE panel drawn also from OTHER Public Works Organisations/ Works PSUsW ONLY
7proprietary Article Certificate (PAC) as a modeg, c, nc — absent from works entirely
8STE groundsG: One ground (emergency, indentor-certified) · W: Six grounds including national defence/ security and natural continuation
925% cap on incremental work under "natural continuation" STEW ONLY
10Rule cited for Nomination modesG/W/C: Rule 166 · NC: Rule 204, with an added requirement of consultation with the Financial Adviser and detailed justification forming an integral part of the proposal
11Award of work through quotations (up to Rs. 5 lakh, at least 3 contractors, one quotation each, emergent cases only)W ONLY
12Award of works in stalled contracts (20% billing test; next-higher-level approval)W ONLY
13Direct Procurement without Quotation / by Purchase CommitteeG (full text), C, NC — not in Works
14Scientific Ministries enhancement (Rs. 1 lakh / Rs. 10 lakh) with the four-part qualifying listG ONLY
15RATE CONTRACT full text — items amenable, merits, fall clause, parallel RCs, DDO, renewalG ONLY (W/C/NC list "Framework Agreements/ Rate Contracts" as a separate sixth family and cross-refer)
16Rate Contract listed under ADVERTISED modes vs as a SEPARATE FAMILYG: under Advertised · W/C/NC: separate family (f)
17Approved Vendor List full text — Developmental vs Approved Vendors, 20:80 split, 3-year rotation rule, fresh PQB every three yearsG ONLY (W/C/NC cross-refer to Goods para 4.7)
18eRA — placementg: A mode (4.5) · w: A channel (3.5.2) · nc: Both (4.4-3-a-iii and 4.6.2) · c: Absent entirely
19eRA expressly stated as inappropriate where QCBS is used in NC servicesnc only (the general eRA text in G also excludes QCBS and FBS)
20GTE viability ground (d)G: absence of sufficient competent domestic bidders AND *suspected cartel formation · W: requirement cannot be executed by indigenous contractors *at reasonable rates
21GTE Terms — Currency of Bidding, Agency Commission (5%), Delivery Terms/ Incoterms, Insurance (Rs. 5 crore threshold, Open Cover), IGST break-upG ONLY
22The eight GTE exemptions (research equipment, ICT items, nomination-basis spares/AMC, pre-15.05.2020 commitments, 354 medical devices + 120 drugs to 31.03.2027, MDB/BFA projects, semiconductor to 31.03.2025, procurement abroad for use abroad)G ONLY
23The seven conditions + six guidelines + three certificates for research-institution GTEG ONLY
24Advertisement portals in OTE/ LTEG: GeM AND GeM-CPPP · W: GeM-CPPP only
25Requirement that successful un-enlisted bidders get enlisted before contract placementW ONLY
26PQB/ Single-Stage Pre-qualification full text — PQC two-sided test, 3/4-week and 10-day notice, single-use shortlist, six-month gapG ONLY
27Mode selection by value bands for NC Services (above Rs 50 lakh → OTE; below → LTE with 3-step shortlisting; small value → Goods shopping modes)nc only
28"More than three" in the moderated long-list of NC service providersnc only
29Quarterly reporting of nomination awards + audit committee to check at least 10% of casesW, C, NC state it in the modes/ SSS sections
30Common footnote: thresholds revised upwards vide PPD's OM No. F.1/3/2014-PPD dated 10.07.2024all four

end of Chapter 4 — part b (and of Chapter 4)

Chapter 5

Bid Invitation Process

Merging: Goods Ch. 5 · Works Ch. 4 · Consultancy Ch. 5 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 5

Structural Notes for Students

1. This is one of only two chapters whose title is word-for-word identical in all four Manuals (the other being Chapter 6, Forms of Securities…). BUT the Works Manual numbers it CHAPTER 4, not Chapter 5.

2. Four common anchors run through all four Manuals, in the same order:

3. But the four Manuals organise the material very differently:

Number of sectionsDistinctive feature
G Goods5The base text; leanest treatment
W Works15the most granularPromotes each sub-topic to a full section; adds fixed NIT/ opening days, accessibility standards, entry window for sub-contractors
C Consultancy8ALONE splits the tender document into two separate documents — REoI (5.2) and RfP (5.3)
NC Non-Consultancy5Places the entire document-composition detail inside 5.1 as sub-paras 5.1.3 to 5.1.12; adds Performance Standards/ Method Statement and minimum-wage restrictions

Concordance for Chapter 5

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
5.1Model Tender Documents5.1.1(in 4.2)5.1.15.1.1
5.2Tender Documents — the fundamental document5.1.24.15.1.25.1.2
5.3Contents/ Sections of Tender Documents5.1.34.2(see 5.4, 5.5)5.1.3
5.3.1Notice Inviting Tender (NIT)5.1.3-24.2.1(RFPL — 5.3.2-2)5.1.4
5.3.2Instructions to Bidders (ITB) and AITB5.1.3-34.2.2(ITC — 5.3.2-3)5.1.5
5.3.3General and Special Conditions of Contract5.1.3-44.2.35.3.2-45.1.6
5.3.4Schedule of Requirements5.1.3-54.2.4(ToR)5.1.7
5.3.5Technical Specifications/ Drawings/ QA5.1.3-64.2.55.1.8
5.3.6Qualification Criteria5.1.3-74.2.65.2.2-65.1.9
5.3.7Evaluation Criteria5.1.2-64.2.75.3.2-6(within 5.1.12)
5.3.8Submission Forms and Formats5.1.3-84.2.85.3.35.1.11
5.3.9Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet)5.1.3-8-b4.2.95.3.3-25.1.10
5.4REoI Document5.2
5.5RfP Document5.3
5.6Mandatory e-Publishing5.1.44.35.45.1.13
5.7Amendment of Tender Documents5.1.54.45.4.25.1.14
5.8Extension of Deadline of Bid Submission5.1.64.55.4.35.1.15
5.9Availability and Cost of Tender Documents5.2.14.6.15.5.15.2.1
5.10Participation of Bidders — Eligibility5.2.24.6.25.5.25.2.2
5.11Pre-NIT and Pre-bid Conferences5.2.34.75.5.35.2.3
5.12Site Visit4.7-35.5.45.2.4
5.13Clarification of Tender Documents5.2.44.85.5.55.2.5
5.14Withdrawal/ Amendment/ Modification by Bidders5.2.54.95.5.65.2.6
5.15Sealing/ Marking of Bids in off-line Tenders5.2.64.105.5.75.2.7
5.16Uploading/ Submission of Bids5.2.74.115.5.85.2.8
5.17Bid Validity5.2.84.125.5.95.2.9
5.18Opening of Bids5.34.135.65.3
5.19Transparency and Third-Party Rights5.44.145.75.4
5.20Risks and Mitigations5.54.155.85.5

5.1Model Tender Documents

the Department of Expenditure (DoE), Ministry of Finance, Government of India, has issued model tender documents (MTD) for:

CategoryDate of issue
Procurement of GOODSOctober 2021
Procurement of NON-CONSULTANCY SERVICESOctober 2021
Procurement of CONSULTANCY SERVICESApril 2023(includes a Model REoI)

procuring entities are URGED To customise the relevant MTD to prepare tender documents for their procurements. Guidance notes annexed to the MTDs Detail the process of customisation of MTD for an organisation and for each procurement.

5.2Tender Documents — the Fundamental Document

1. Why it matters: The tender document is the fundamental document In the Public Procurement process, as — after the award of the contract — it becomes part of the contract agreement.

A carefully prepared tender document avoids delays and complaints. This will also attract more bidders to formulate and submit their competitive bids with confidence.

Hence, it is worth spending time and effort on this — even in cases of urgency.

2. Clarity requirement: Provisions/ clauses in the tender document should be clear, self-contained, and comprehensive without any ambiguity — to avoid differences in interpretation and possible disputes, time overrun, cost overrun and quality compromises.

5.2.1The Essential Aspects Every Tender Document Must Address

(Rule 173 of GFR 2017)

While tender documents should be complete in themselves and may be slightly different for various categories of procurement, these must necessarily address the essential aspects below. Model Tender Documents issued by the DoE — which comply with all these requirements — may be used, with due customisation:

Requirement
a)description of the subject matter of procurement, its specifications/ drawings including the quality/ nature/ quality assurance, quantity, time and place or places of delivery/ completion
W Variant: *…Quantity, time and location where the construction is to be effective, any incidental services to be performed*
a-bis)W Only: The facilities and the inputs which will be provided to the contractor by the Ministry/ Department
b)limitation or preference for participation by bidders in terms of Government policies
c)the procedure, as well as the date, time, and place for obtaining, submitting, and opening of the bids
d)suitable provisions for enabling a bidder to question (W: "Seek clarification/ question") The bidding conditions, bidding process and/ or rejection of its bid. These provisions should include a time frame in which the Procuring Entity will address the bidder's questions
e)criteria for determining the responsiveness Of bids; Criteria as well as factors to be considered for evaluating the bids on a common platform; And the criteria for awarding the contract to the responsive, most advantageous (lowest/ highest as the case May be) bidder — should be clearly indicated
W Footnote on "highest":"Highest, here, refers to the selection of the contractor using the quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS) methodology — wherein the contractor securing the HIGHEST MARKS by combining the technical and financial evaluation scores is identified as the Highest scorer or the h1 BIDDER*, and is eligible for award of contract."*
f)THE eligibility Criteria should take care of the supplier's/ contractor's eligibility to participate in the tender process (W: "to receive such a government contract")
f-bis)W Only: Requirements as to documentary evidence, which must be submitted by contractors to demonstrate their qualifications
g)THE qualification Criteria should consider their capability to perform the resultant contract successfully, balancing considerations of quality, time, and cost
W variant: *…should take care of the contractor's past performance, experience, technical competence, financial strength to handle the contract successfully, compliance with environmental protection regulations/ environment management system and so on*
h)commercial terms and conditions — e.g., payment terms, tax implications, respective obligations of the Procuring Entity and the suppliers, and compliance framework for statutory and other norms. The provision of price variation, wherever considered appropriate, and the methodology for calculation, shall be clearly stipulated
i)the tender document should include a clause that "If a firm quotes nil charges/ consideration, the bid shall be treated as unresponsive and will not be considered."
j)procedures for redressal of grievances or complaints from aggrieved bidders
k)if applicable, the integrity Pact clause and format To be signed shall be included
l)suitable provision for settlement of disputes, if any, emanating from the resultant contract
m)essential terms of the procurement contract, including a suitable clause mentioning that the resultant contract will be interpreted under Indian laws

5.2.2Delegation, Eligibility vs Qualification vs Evaluation, and Time

3. Delegation: Procuring entities May issue instructions regarding the appropriate delegation of authority for approval of the tender documents before these are floated/ uploaded.

4. The three-filter structure — the single most important conceptual point in this chapter:

FilterFunction
Eligibility criteriaspecify the criteria that a bidder should meet to be considered a responsive bid To be evaluated further, beyond the preliminary evaluation/ screening of bids
qualification criteriadetermine the capability of bidders (who have passed the eligibility criteria) to perform the contract. Only those bidders who meet the qualification criteria go to the next step of evaluation for award of contract
evaluation criteriaTHE final filter Used to select the bidders (who have passed the qualification criteria) for the award of the contract

5. Qualification Criteria — the broad-basing rule: Qualification criteria should be clear and fair in regard to the specific circumstances of the procurement. Public authorities should also keep the experience, technical and financial criteria broad-based, so that bidders with experience in items/ goods of a similar nature (W: "in execution of works of a similar nature") Can participate.

Appropriate parameters should be prescribed to enable the selection of the right type of bidders in the public interest, balancing considerations of quality, time, and cost.

6. Evaluation Criteria — the permitted additional criteria: Depending on the requirement and VfM considerations, the Procuring Entity may consider including, besides price, one or more additional criteria:

G GOODSW WORKS
Quality · technical merit · aesthetic and functional characteristics · environmental characteristics · running costs · cost-effectiveness · after-sales service and technical assistance · delivery date and delivery period or period of completionquality of workmanship · technical merit · aesthetic and functional characteristics · environmental characteristics · period of completion

no criteria shall be used for the evaluation of tenders that cannot be verified.

7. Default method: Open online tendering should be the default method To ensure efficiency of procurement.

8. The time-allowed Rule: The Procuring Entity should allow enough time to the bidders to prepare their proposals. The time allowed shall depend on the assignment, but:

SituationMinimum period
Normallynot less than three weeks
Where participation of INTERNATIONAL service providers/ contractors is contemplatednot less than four weeks

9. The four reserved rights: Tender documents should invariably Reserve the Procuring Entity's right — without assigning any reason — to: A) reject any or all of the bids; Or b) cancel the tender process; Or c) abandon the procurement of the goods/ works/ services; Or d) issue another tender for identical or similar goods/ works/ services.

5.3Contents/ Sections of the Tender Document

(Rule 168 of GFR 2017)

5.3.0The Section Structure

SectionG GOODSW WORKS
INotice Inviting Tender (NIT) and its Appendix: Tender Information Summary (TIS)(same)
IIInstructions to Bidders (ITB)(same)
IIIAppendix to Instructions to Bidders (AITB)(same)
IVGeneral Conditions of Contract (GCC)(same)
VSpecial Conditions of Contract (SCC)(same)
VISchedule of Requirements(same)
VIITechnical Specifications and Quality AssuranceDRAWING, Technical Specifications and Quality Assurance
VIIIQualification and Evaluation Criteria(same)
IX / X(i) Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet) then (j) Submission forms and formats(i) Submission forms and formats then (j) Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet) — order reversed

5.3.1Notice Inviting Tender (NIT)

1. Legal importance: NIT is of legal importance, since it is this part of the tender document that solicits offers from the bidders. G adds: *The model NIT format in MTD should be used to publish the tender notice.*

2. Function and alerts: THE NIT (and its Appendix TIS) must contain sufficient information in brief for a prospective bidder to decide whether to participate In the tender and, if he decides to participate, how to go about it.

To ensure competition, the attention of all likely bidders — for example, registered vendors/ contractors, past suppliers/ contractors, and other known potential suppliers/ contractors — should be invited to the NIT through email/ smss/ letters.

In e-procurement, the website May be programmed to generate these alerts automatically.

3. The mandatory note for limited tenders: In case of procurement through a limited tender, the NIT May be uploaded on geM (Goods only) As well as on gem-cppp and the Procuring Entity's website, with a note saying:

4. Audit trails: Time-stamped audit trails for the e-publication shall be maintained by the procurement portal. Printouts May be taken only in case of off-line tenders, if required — apart from ensuring maintenance of time-stamped audit trail of e-publication. The complete details of the dates on which advertisements appeared on the website should be indicated when sending cases to higher authorities.

5.3.2Instructions to Bidders (ITB) and its Appendix (AITB)

ITB contains all relevant information as well as guidance to the prospective bidders regarding:

ITB should NOT Contain information on processes after the announcement of the award, which should be covered in GCC — for example, the arbitration clause, resolution of disputes, and so on.

ITB also contains an introduction/ overview of the contents of the tender document.

the AITB device: Instead of modifying ITB every time, any changes warranted by exceptional circumstances May be indicated — with the prior approval of ca — in a separate Appendix to ITB (AITB), and ITB May be included unchanged in every tender document.

It should also be indicated therein that the provisions in the AITB shall supersede the corresponding provisions in the ITB.

5.3.3General and Special Conditions of Contract (GCC and SCC)

The general conditions of contract (GCC) details the terms and conditions that would govern the resultant contract.

GCC covers all information on aspects after the announcement of the tender award till the closure of the contract and dispute resolution. It should NOT Cover any aspect up to the announcement of the award.

The SCC device: Instead of modifying the GCC every time, any changes warranted by exceptional circumstances May be indicated in a separate section — special conditions of contract (SCC) — with the prior approval of the ca, and GCC May be included unchanged in every tender document.

It is also to be indicated therein that the provisions in the SCC will supersede the corresponding provisions in the GCC.

5.3.4Schedule of Requirements

G Goods

This section describes the list of goods required, quantities, delivery requirements, destination, and scope of supply (Concomitant accessories, spare parts, and incidental works/ services).

If there is no separate section on technical specifications (TS) and quality assurance (QA), then TS and QA May also be included here.

It must be clarified whether the evaluation of eligibility/ qualifications/ financial bids would be done item-by-item in a Schedule OR on the total of all items in a Schedule — and, if there is more than one Schedule, whether the same would be done on a schedule-by-schedule basis Or on the total of all schedules put together.

W Works

1. For works procurement, this section should detail the scope of work, including the description of the works to be undertaken, quantities, quality standards, site location, and delivery requirements/ milestones. If there are no separate sections on TS and QA, these details should be incorporated here, specifying the standards and methodologies to be employed.

2. It should be clarified how the evaluation will be conducted — whether item-by-item, by lot, or for the entire scope of work. Additionally, if the procurement involves multiple lots or sections of work, it should be stated whether evaluations will be done on a lot-by-lot basis Or based on the total of all lots or sections combined.

3. This ensures transparency and clarity, enabling bidders to understand the scope fully and submit their bids accordingly.

4. Identification of milestones May be done in an optimal and sequential manner, and the same May be stipulated in the tender document along with enabling provisions.

NC NON-CONSULTANCY — Schedule of Requirements and Services and Activities Schedule

Schedule of Requirements and its sub-schedule — Service and Activities Schedule — describes the background, purpose/ objectives, description/ scope, deliverables/ outcomes, quantum, timelines of services required, etc.

The requirements May consist of more than one Schedule. Each Schedule May contain more than one service.

In case of multiple schedules of requirement in a tender of services, it should be clarified how bids for multiple schedules would be evaluated for award of contract — either Schedule by Schedule or in total.

Bidders must fill up compliance Regarding these schedules.

5.3.5Technical Specifications, Drawings and Quality Assurance

G Goods

Technical specifications and quality assurance lays down the technical specifications and quality assurance requirements of the goods required. It would also stipulate, if required, any compliance required by Central and State pollution control boards.

W Works — and the Accessibility Mandate

1. Construction drawings, technical specifications and quality assurance plan Lay down the technical specifications and quality assurance requirements of the works to be executed. It would also stipulate, if required, any compliance required by Central and State Pollution Control Boards.

2. The mandatory accessibility clause — W ONLY: "The bidder shall ensure that all products, services, platforms, infrastructure, and other deliverables under contract must comply with applicable accessibility standards and guidelines as notified under the rights of persons with disabilities Act, 2016, and the rights of persons with disabilities Rules, 2017 As amended — including but not limited to:"

a) harmonised guidelines and standards for universal accessibility in India, issued by the Ministry of housing and urban affairs.

b) IS 17802 (PART 1):2021 — Accessibility for ICT Products and Services Part I: Requirements; and IS 17802 (PART 2):2022 — Accessibility for ICT Products and Services Part 2: Determination of Conformance — issued by the bureau of Indian Standards; and

c) any other relevant guidelines, notifications, or instructions from time to time by the Department of empowerment of persons with disabilities, Ministry of social justice and empowerment, Government of India.

NC NON-CONSULTANCY — Performance Standards and Quality Assurance; Method Statement; Work Plan; Critical Material Schedule

1. Performance Standards and Quality Assurance STIPULATES THE quantitative/ qualitative parameters/ limits/ thresholds for performance standards/ service levels and functional/ technical specifications To which the service must be performed.

It shall stipulate procedures for the measurement, reporting and monitoring Of performance parameters — including institutional or third-party arrangements for this purpose.

It shall also stipulate the procedure for resolution and escalation in case of deficiency In performance/ quality/ service levels.

In the case of long-term and complex services, it May stipulate a service-level agreement (SLA) Which must be complied with during delivery of services.

Performance standards shall also include statutory compliance required for occupational safety, health and working conditions Requirements during delivery of services.

2. Procuring Entity May, if considered necessary, specify sub-schedules: Method statement, work plan, and critical material schedules Required for the performance of services to desired quality and standards. Otherwise, these May be left to be quoted by the bidder.

3. Bidders must fill up the relevant forms regarding this Schedule.

5.3.6Qualification Criteria

1. The general Rule (all four): If it is intended to use qualification criteria to evaluate a tender and determine whether a bidder has the required qualifications to perform the contract successfully, this point May be clearly specified in ITB/ AITB or as a separate section OF THE tender document.

The bidder must ensure that he provides convincing proof Of having fulfilled these criteria.

Any criteria not specified in the tender Cannot be used for evaluation or qualification.

2. The content of Pre/ Post Qualification Criteria: PQC shall be based entirely upon the capability and resources required to perform the particular contract satisfactorily, considering:

THE quantity, delivery, and value Of the procurement shall be kept in view while the pre/ post qualification criteria are fixed.

There should be NO Pre/ post qualification criteria that would be advantageous to foreign manufactured goods at the cost of domestically manufactured goods. (C variant: "advantageous to FOREIGN CONSULTANTS at the cost of domestically delivered services".)

3. Relaxation for start-ups (all four): The condition of prior turnover and prior experience May be relaxed for start-ups — only to start-ups recognised by DPIIT — subject to meeting quality & technical specifications And making suitable provisions in the tender document (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017; OM No. F.20/2/2014-PPD (Pt.) dated 20.09.2016).

Start-ups May be MSMEs/ MSEs or otherwise. Such relaxation can be provided in the case of procurement of works as well.

It is further clarified that such relaxation is not optional but has to be ensured — except in case of procurement of items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, etc., where adequate justification exists for the Procuring Entity not to relax such criteria.

4. Demerged entities — W, C, NC ONLY (DoE's OM No. F.8/78/2023-PPD dated 12.10.2023):

W formulation:Demerged entities (by virtue of a corporate restructuring exercise etc.) May be permitted To participate in the tender by using the credentials of the original/ parent entity to satisfy the eligibility criteria — at least for the initial five years from the incorporation of the demerged entities.

Procuring entities may, in suitable cases, consider the credentials based on the merit and circumstances of the cases — like type of procurement, nature of demerger, number of eligible bidders available, etc.

Tender documents must clearly mention If the credentials of the demerged entity will be considered or not in the specific tender, and May give the conditions under which demerged entities May become eligible.

5. Entry window for sub-contractors in smaller contracts — W ONLY:

6. The non-consultancy qualification criteria — NC Only, with its three numbered criteria and worked example:

Unless otherwise stipulated, the Qualification Criteria shall include:

CriterionContent
Criteria 1: Experience and past performancei) Experience of providing similar services
ii) VOLUME of similar services: (1) 3 services > each 40% of the estimated cost; OR (2) 2 services > each 50% of the estimated cost; OR (3) 1 service > 80% of the estimated cost
Criteria 2: PERFORMANCE CAPABILITY — Managerial and Equipmenti) CONTRACT MANAGER — 5 years' experience (3 as a manager)
ii) Ownership/ proposals for acquisition/ hiring the essential equipment
criteria 3: Financial capabilityi) Avg annual turnover AT least 3–7 TIMES the estimated cost
ii) Financial Liquidity

the worked example given in the nc Manual:

a) Past Experience:

  • i) The bidder must have at least three years' experience (Ending month of March prior to the bid opening) of providing similar types of services to Central/ State Government/ PSUs/ nationalised banks/ reputed organisations. Services rendered with a list of such organisations, with duration of service, shall be furnished.
  • ii) the bidder must have successfully executed/ completed similar services (the definition of "similar services" should be clearly DEFINED) Over the last seven financial years Previous to the current financial year:
  • (1) three similar completed services with annualised value not less than 40% (forty per cent) of the estimated annualised cost; OR
  • (2) two similar completed services with annualised value not less than 50% (fifty per cent) of the estimated annualised cost; OR
  • (3) one similar completed service with annualised value not less than 80% (eighty per cent) of the estimated annualised cost.

b) Performance Capability:

  • I) managerial capability: A contract Manager with five years' experience In services of an equivalent nature and volume, including no less than three years as manager.
  • ii) equipment capability: Ownership/ proposals for the timely acquisition (own, lease, hire, etc.) of the essential equipment listed in the tender information summary (TIS).

c) Financial Capability:

  • I) average annual gross billing during the last three years, ending 31ST March of the previous financial year, should be at least 3 times (for 1–3 year contracts) to 7 times (for contracts longer than 3 years) The estimated annual cost — as far as feasible based on the nature of service and market condition.
  • ii) liquid assets and/ or credit facilities — net of other contractual commitments and exclusive of any advance payments Which May be made under the contract — of no less than the amount specified in the tender document.

The upper-cap Rule NC: In higher-value procurements, the minimum annual turnover should not be blindly a multiplier Of the assignment value — but there May be an upper cap on demanded turnover, so as not to restrict competition only to the big or foreign firms.

5.3.7Evaluation Criteria — the Works elaborationW

1. These criteria can include:

and — critically in safeguarding the Procuring Entity's interests:

— ensuring that any defects identified within a specified period post-completion are rectified at the contractor's expense, and that the project's integrity is maintained over time.

It's crucial that the evaluation criteria — including those for the defect liability and warranty periods as well as long-term service commitments — are tangible and verifiable. This ensures a transparent, equitable, and objective assessment process, enabling a holistic evaluation that considers not only the initial project execution but also its long-term sustainability, operational efficiency, and maintenance.

The inclusion of the projected delivery date and completion timeline Ensures the project adheres to strategic planning and timelines.

2. Conditional discounts — W Only: Conditional discounts, or discounts offered post tender opening, if any, shall not be considered during evaluation. However, such discounts shall be availed if the bidder becomes otherwise eligible for award of contract.

5.3.8Submission Forms and Formats

This section contains the relevant forms for tender submission:

5.3.9Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet)

1. Preparation by the Procuring Entity: The Procuring Entity should select an appropriate format of BOQ from the e-procurement portal And upload it after filling up the entries for the complete Schedule of requirements and various price components (W Adds: "/ Schedule of Rates") — to enable the system to automatically calculate the all-inclusive price of a bid and generate a comparative tabulation of all bids.

2. The "not entered = not paid" Rule — C and NC Only: The bidder should fill in rates and prices for ALL Items described in the excel sheet/ services and activities Schedule.

Items for which no rate or price is entered By the bidder will not be paid for By the Procuring Entity when executed, and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices.

The priced schedule contains sections on remuneration for staff deployed, reimbursable expenses and miscellaneous expenses.

All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the consultant/ service provider under the contract — or for any other cause — as in the month prior to the month of the deadline for submission of bids — should be included in the total bid price.

Even in tenders for lump-sum contracts, for the purpose of determining the remuneration due for additional elements of work/ additional services during the contract, the bidder shall provide a breakdown of the lump-sum price.

C adds: *Bidding Documents should include a clause that "if a firm quotes NIL service charges/ consideration, the bid shall be treated as unresponsive and will not be considered".*

3. Uploading discipline (all four): Bidders are to upload only the downloaded BOQ (in excel format) After entering the relevant fields — without any alteration/ deletion/ modification of other portions of the excel sheet.

The quoted price shall be considered to include all relevant financial implications — including inter alia:

4. Restrictions regarding personnel deployed — NC ONLY:

A) the minimum wage floor: The quoted rates shall not be less than the minimum wage fixed/ notified by the Central/ State Government (whichever is higher) — where the service is performed — and shall include all statutory obligations and service charges/ margin (including transaction charges) over such minimum wage.

B) the 'nil' price Rule: Bids without any element of cost over and above such minimum wage Shall be treated as 'Nil' price quotations and would be rejected.

C) LCS for manpower outsourcing: Least cost system (LCS) should be considered for procurement of manpower outsourcing service, wherever appropriate — especially in high-value cases.

D) liability and character verification: The service provider shall be liable for all kinds of dues payable in respect of all personnel Provided under the contract, and the Procuring Entity shall not be liable for any dues for availing the services of the personnel. The service provider should ensure that the persons to be deployed are not alcoholics or drug addicts And do not indulge in any activity prejudicial to the interest of the Procuring Entity. The service provider shall ensure to get the police verification for all the manpower deployed By them, and the contractor should ensure that the manpower deputed should bear good moral character.

5.4Preparation of the Request for Expression of Interest (REoI) Document [C ONLY]

5.4.1Basic Considerations

1. DoE has issued Model Tender Documents for Procurement of Consultancy Services, which includes a MODEL REoI.

2. Why two stages: It is important to hire consultants who have a reputation for relevant quality and competence; hence Procurement of Consultancy is done in a two-stage process:

  • The first stage (expression of Interest Stage) — to shortlist such qualified consultants in a transparent and open Manner.
  • In the next stage (RfP Stage) — there is competition only among qualified shortlisted firms or individuals, in which selection is based on the quality of the proposal And, where appropriate, on the cost of services To be provided.

3. Therefore, the process of shortlisting is one of the most difficult and time-consuming tasks In the selection process of a consultant. This could be eased by writing a clear description of service (objectives and scope) and shortlisting criteria.

5.4.2Contents of the REoI

The EoI document shall contain the following sections:

Part i: REoI process

  • Section I: Request for Expression of Interest (REoI)
  • Section II: Appendix
  • Section III: Qualification Criteria

part II: Schedule of requirements

  • Section IV: Terms of Reference

part III: EoI submission formats

  • Form 1: EoI Form (Covering Letter)Form 1.1: Consultant Information · Form 1.2: Eligibility Declarations
  • Form 2: Qualification Criteria – ComplianceForm 2.1: Performance Capability Statement · Form 2.2: Financial Capability Statements · Form 2.2.1: Financial Statement · Form 2.2.2: Average Annual Turnover
  • Form 3: Checklist for Consultants
  • Other Annexures:Annexure 1: Authorisation to Attend Pre-EoI Conference · Annexure 2: Code of Integrity

Section-wise description:

  • Section I — REoI: A formal invitation for Expression of Interest from interested bidders.
  • Section II — Appendix: Where variable parameters and information related to this specific REoI process Are summarised.

Section III — qualification criteria:

a) This section lays down the qualification criteria which shall be applied by the Procuring Entity for shortlisting the consultants. The REoI should ask for sufficient information So that the Procuring Entity May evaluate the consultant's capabilities and eligibility To undertake the assignment. The Consultants must be asked:

  • I) requisite experience during a specified period (say 5 years) with volume of assignments similar in nature in general and specific sectors relevant to the subject assignment;
  • ii) financial capability: Turnover (overall and from consultancy services).

b) Relaxation for Start-ups(as at para 5.3.6-3 above).

c) Qualification Criteria shall be based entirely upon capability and resources; there should be no qualification criteria advantageous to FOREIGN CONSULTANTS at the cost of domestically delivered services.

d) Qualification of demerged entities(as at para 5.3.6-4 above).

E) what the REoI must NOT ASK FOR — a critical restriction:

Section IV — terms of Reference (ToR): This section describes the background, purpose/ objectives, description/ scope of work, deliverables/ outcomes, inputs to be provided by the Procuring Entity, and timelines of Consultancy Services (hereinafter called the 'Service') required.

The 'service' May include incidental goods, works, and other services If so indicated therein. Any generic reference to the 'Service' shall be deemed to include such incidental Goods, Works, and other Services. This may also include the place of execution of the assignment.

5.4.3Important Provisions of the REoI

1. REoI contains all relevant information and guidance regarding — obtaining tender documents, preparing and submitting a responsive bid, the process of establishing eligibility/ qualification credentials, evaluation and comparison of tenders, code of Integrity in Public Procurement (CIPP), the process of grievance redressal, and declaration of results.

2. Eligibility Criteria: Provisions relating to eligibility criteria, conflict of interest and applicable preferential policies regulate the participation of bidders of various categories and their agents.

  • It mentions the type of entities which may participate, specifically if JV/C are permitted to participate.
  • It shall also mention that the consulting company should be registered under the applicable Act with registered offices in India.
  • It also excludes insolvent, bankrupt, debarred, convicted firms, and firms with conflict of interest from participation. Restriction of participation of bidders from certain countries having land borders with India also applies.
  • In case jv/cs are permitted, it should be made clear if the experience of the bidders as a member of JV/C would be considered or not. If yes, then the manner of aggregating qualifications Of members of JV/C — say, only pro-rata experience proportionate to his percentage share declared in JV/C MoU — May be mentioned.

3. Preferential Procurement Policies: applicable policies are mentioned (MSEs, Start-ups, Make in India etc.).

4. EoI validity: Eois shall remain valid for a period not less than 60 (sixty) days From the deadline for the EoI submission.

5. Qualification Criteria: the qualification criteria for shortlisting the bidders and its scoring/ marking scheme is detailed. It also specifies, if JV/C are permitted, how credentials of members would be considered in evaluation.

6. ToR at the eoI STAGE — the "not yet ready" rule: At the EoI stage, ToR is relevant for bidders to decide whether they are interested in bidding for this assignment. It is also relevant to decide the specific sector of experience required in the qualification criteria.

Normally, ToR should be ready before REoI is floated. However, if a detailed ToR is not ready, at least the following should be included in the REoI: Description/ scope of work, deliverables/ outcomes, inputs to be provided by the Procuring Entity, and timelines Of the required 'service'.

REoI should contain a clause retaining the right to make minor adjustments to ToR at the RfP stage.

5.5Preparation of the Request for Proposals (RfP) Document [C ONLY]

(Rule 186 of GFR 2017)

5.5.1What the RfP Is

the request for proposals (RfP) is the bidding document in which the technical and financial proposals from the consultants are obtained.

For procurement of consultancy services, the RfP is sent only to the short-listed consultants.

It contains the following sections:

  • Section I: Request for Proposal Letter (RFPL) and its Appendix: Tender Information Summary (TIS)
  • Section II: Instructions to Consultants (ITC)
  • Section III: Appendix to Instructions to Consultants (AITC)
  • Section IV: General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
  • Section V: Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
  • Section VI: Terms of Reference (ToR)Section VI-A: List of Key Experts and Required Qualifications
  • Section VII: Evaluation/ Scoring Criteria

5.5.2Section-by-Section

1. Section I — RFPL and TIS: Provides a synopsis of information relevant for a consultant to decide on participating in the RfP. RFPL states the intention of the Procuring Entity to enter into a contract for the provision of consultancy services, details of the Procuring Entity, and date, time, and address for submission of proposals.

It plays the role played by NIT In procurement of goods and services.

2. Section II — ITC and Section III — AITC: Contains all necessary information that would help the consultants prepare responsive proposals.

It shall bring in as much transparency as possible To the selection procedure by providing information on the evaluation process, and by indicating the evaluation criteria and factors and their respective weights and minimum passing quality score.

Standard information includes clauses relating to the procedure of bid submission, pre-bid meeting, seeking clarifications, and so on — BUT should NOT Contain information on processes after the announcement of the award, which should be covered in GCC.

The assignment/ job-specific information in AITC includes: Date and time of bid submission, contact address, qualification criteria, method of selection, evaluation process, factors of evaluation and their respective weights, and so on.

The ITC shall specify the proposal validity period — normally 90 (ninety) days.

3. Sections IV and V — GCC and SCC: (as at para 5.3.3 above).

4. Section VI — ToR and Section VI-A — List of Key Experts:

A) ToR describes the background, purpose/ objectives, description/ scope, deliverables/ outcomes, timelines, Procuring Entity's inputs and counterpart personnel, statutory requirements of services required, etc.

B) the budget-disclosure Rule: Since cost is part of the selection criterion, the ITC shall not indicate the budgetexcept in case of fixed budget system of selection — but shall indicate the expected input of key professionals (staff time).

Section VI-A: 'List of Key Experts and Required Qualifications' describes the team composition, expertise, experience, and professional qualifications required for each key expert. Consultants, however, shall be free to prepare their own estimates of staff time Necessary to carry out the assignment.

C) consultants May be encouraged to provide comments and suggestions On ToR, counterpart staff, key experts and facilities to be provided by the Procuring Entity.

D) simplified technical proposal (stp) vs full technical proposal (ftp):

5. Section VII — Evaluation/ Scoring Criteria: Stipulates the scoring scheme for evaluating various technical criteria. These may cover scoring of criteria relating to:

It may also lay down a minimum technical score to qualify for the next stage of financial evaluation. In a specific evaluation scheme, instead of a scheme of scoring, a scheme may be laid down to evaluate criteria on a pass/ fail basis.

5.5.3Standard Formats for Technical and Financial ProposalsC

1. Technical proposal forms:

FormContent
T-1Proposal Formto serve as a covering letter to BOTH the Techno-commercial and Financial Proposals(T-1A: Consultant's Commercial Information)
T-2Consultant's Organisation and Experience
T-3Comments and Suggestions on Terms of Reference, Counterpart Staff, and Inputs to be Provided by the Procuring Entity
T-4Description of Approach, Methodology and Work Plan in Responding to the Terms of Reference
T-5Work Schedule and Planning for Deliverables
T-6Team Composition, Assignment, and Key Experts' Inputs(Annex to T-6: Key Experts' Curriculum Vitae — CV)
T-7Terms and Conditions – Compliance
T-8Checklist for Consultants
T-9Bank Guarantee Format for Earnest Money Deposit
T-10Integrity Pact

2. Financial proposal (BOQ excel sheet) — (see para 5.3.9 above).

3. OTHER FORMATS — Contract Form and its Appendices:

5.5.4Important Provisions of the ITCC

2. Eligibility to participate — the closed-list rule: As the RfP follows the earlier EoI shortlisting process, this invitation is open only to consultants who have been shortlisted therein or are specifically invited to participate.

IT IS not permissible for the shortlisted consultants to transfer this RfP to any other firm Without the permission of the Procuring Entity.

Proposals from consultants who have not been shortlisted shall not be entertained.

The shortlisted consultant must continue to meet the eligibility criteria prescribed in the EoI document (based inter alia on which they were shortlisted) — including restrictions on consultants from specified countries — as of the date of his proposal submission, and should continue to meet these till the award of the contract. Consultants must provide evidence of their continued eligibility if requested.

3. Association among shortlisted consultants — and the 14-day approval rule:

Unless otherwise stipulated in TIS/ AITC, if a shortlisted Consultant considers that it may enhance its expertise by associating with other consultants in the form of a joint venture or as sub-consultants, it may do so with either:

  • (a) NON-SHORTLISTED Consultant(s), or
  • (b) SHORTLISTED Consultants

— without vitiating the shortlisting criteria of the REoI.

The lead member Rule:

  • The shortlisted consultant shall be the lead member When associating with non-shortlisted Firms as a joint venture.
  • IF shortlisted Consultants associate with each other, any of them can be a lead member.

A shortlisted consultant must obtain the Procuring Entity's written approval not later than 14 days before the RfP submission deadline, in all such cases.

Such approval shall be denied IF:

  • (i) a shortlisted consultant proposes to associate with an ineligible consultant — or, in case of an ineligible joint venture, any of its members;
  • (ii) because of the change, the consultant no longer substantially meets the qualification criteria Outlined in the REoI document; Or
  • (iii) if, in the opinion of the Procuring Entity, a substantial reduction in competition May result.

4. Preferential Procurement Policies: applicable policies are mentioned (MSEs, Start-ups, Make in India etc.).

5. RfP validity: RfP shall remain valid for a period not less than 90 (ninety) days From the deadline for the RfP submission.

6. Evaluation/ scoring criteria — the three heads, and the presentation rule:

Evaluation shall, inter alia, consider the Consultant's:

  • (i) "specific experience of the consultant (as a firm) relevant to the assignment";
  • (ii) "adequacy and quality of the proposed methodology, and work plan";
  • (iii) "key experts' qualifications and competence for the assignment".

It also specifies, if JV/C are permitted, how credentials of members of JV/C would be considered.

The presentation Rule: The Procuring Entity May ask all shortlisted consultants To deliver a presentation on their technical proposals.

  • This presentation shall only cover contents of the technical proposals already submitted By the consultant.
  • Unless otherwise provided, no marks shall be assigned to the presentation.
  • Opportunities for such presentations shall be provided in a manner to provide a level playing field To all shortlisted consultants — including time limits for such presentations.

5.6Uploading of Tender Documents: Mandatory e-Publishing

(Rule 159 of GFR 2017)

1. The mandate and its reach: IT IS mandatory for all ministries/ departments of the Central Government, their attached and subordinate offices, and autonomous/ statutory bodies to publish their tender enquiries, corrigenda thereof, and details of bid awards Online on the gem-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) — and also on their own website.

These instructions apply to ALL Of the following — whether they are advertised, issued to a limited number of parties, or to a single party:

the exclusions differ by Manual:

ManualThese instructions would NOT apply to
G, C, NCthe purchase of goods without quotations, or the purchase of goods by the purchase Committee
Wworks procurement through quotation

2. The national security exemption — and its quarterly reporting obligation:

Individual cases where confidentiality is required for reasons of national security Would be exempted from the mandatory e-publishing requirement.

BodyWho approves the exemption
Ministry/ DepartmentTHE Secretary Of the Ministry/ Department, with the concurrence of the concerned Financial Adviser
Autonomous and Statutory bodiesTHE head of the body, with the concurrence of the head of the finance — in each such case

statistical information on the number of cases in which exemption was granted and the value of the concerned contract Should be intimated on a quarterly basis To the Ministry of Finance, Department of Expenditure.

3. Fixed days for issuance of NIT and tender opening — W ONLY:

Example 1 — fixation of days by CPWD:

RegionDays for Issuance of NITsDays for Tender Opening
DelhiMondayMonday
NorthernTuesdayTuesday
SouthernWednesdayWednesday
EasternThursdayThursday
WesternFridayFriday

5.7Amendment of Tender Documents

(Rule 173(iii) of GFR 2017)

1. At any time prior to the date of submission of bids, the Procuring Entity May — suo motu Or in response to a clarification sought by a prospective bidder (directly or in a pre-bid conference) — amend tender documents by issuing a corrigendum.

Copies of such amendment/ modification should be uploaded on the e-publishing portal and the Procuring Entity's own website.

In case of off-line tenders, the copies of such amendment/ modification are to be simultaneously despatched, free of cost, by registered/ speed post/ courier/ e-mail, to all the parties who have already purchased the tender documents — and copies of such amendments are also to be prominently attached in the unsold sets Of the tender documents.

When the amendment/ modification changes the requirement significantly And/ or when there is not much time left for the bidders to respond and prepare a revised tender, the time and date of submission of tenders are also to be suitably extended (not less than 3 days).

2. The 21-DAY re-publication Rule — W ONLY:

5.8Extension of Deadline of Bid Submission

1. Ordinary extension: To give sufficient time to bidders to prepare and submit their bids, the Procuring Entity may — suo motu, or based on a justifiable request of bidder(s), or due to significant modification of tender documents — extend the time and date of submission of tenders suitably (not less than three (3) days), along with suitable changes in the corresponding time-frames for:

Depending on the situation, such an amendment May also need fresh publication, adopting the same procedure as for publication of the original tender enquiry.

2. Auto-extension of bids in case of lack of response — an important and easily-missed provision:

A) the information blackout: The e-procurement portal/ GeM should not provide anybody — including the Procuring Entity — with the bid count before the tender opening time, even at their request.

b) The set-up: The e-Procurement portal/ GeM May facilitate the Procuring Entity in specifying, at the time of tender upload:

  • THE minimum number of bids Considered sufficient; And
  • THE pre-specified number of days for automatic extension Of bid opening (not less than 7 days).

C) the declaration: The system shall declare in the tender details that in case of low competition (without specifying the number), the tender closing time shall be automatically extended by the specified number of days.

D) the operation: If bids received till the bid opening time are less than the specified minimum bids, the system should automatically extend The tender opening by the specified number of days — without seeking any input from or sharing any information with anyone, including the Procuring Entity.

Purchasers and bidders shall only be informed That "due to less competition, the tender closing time has been extended up to (date and time)."

e) ONCE only — G Only: However, this automatic extension of bid opening shall be done only once, not repeatedly.

f) the 'one' device: If a Procuring Entity wants to go ahead even with low competition (E.g., due to urgency), they May mention 'ONE' As the minimum bid — so that if no bid is received, the tender is automatically extended; Otherwise, it is not.

G) GeM and e-procurement portals shall update their systems accordingly.

5.9Availability and Cost of Tender Documents

(Rule 161(v) of GFR 2017)

1. Availability window: Tender documents should preferably be sold or available for download after the date and time of the start of availability till the deadline for availability As mentioned in the tender document (say up to the date of opening of tenders) — and this should be clearly indicated in the documents.

The organisation should also post the complete tender document on the website (W adds: "and on GeM-CPPP") AND permit prospective bidders to make use of the document downloaded from the website.

W adds: *The advertisement for invitation of tenders should give the complete web-address from where bid documents can be downloaded.*

2. The cost Rule: Normally, no tender document fee should be charged.

In exceptional cases, a Procuring Entity May fix a bare minimum cost Of tender documents to defray the expenses/ effort of preparing documents, drawings, ETC.

The cost of the tender document is to be submitted to the authority nominated therein by the prospective bidder in the form of a demand draft/ banker's cheque/ pay order/ online payment gateway.

3. Who is exempt from the tender document cost — the two Manuals differ:

ManualFirms eligible for exemption
G GOODSMSEs AND The Procuring Entity's registered units(for relevant items and monetary limit)
W WORKSonly the Procuring Entity's registered units (for relevant grades of work and monetary limit) — MSEs are not named

Such firms HAVE TO submit/ upload scanned copies of documents in support of this exemption.

5.10Participation of Bidders — Eligibility Criteria

1. The general rule: The tender document May lay down eligibility criteria For participating in the tender process — e.g., restrictions on participation by bidders relating to:

Except for the eligibility criteria, participation shall be open to all bidders in open/ global tender enquiries.

In the case of the second stage (Of two-stage bidding or PQB) or limited tenders, participation shall be open only to such bidders who have been previously shortlisted or specifically invited.

2. Purchase preference policies: The Procuring Entity May reserve its right to grant preferences to eligible bidders under various Government policies/ directives (policies relating to Make in India, MSME, Start-ups, etc.).

3. The additional works eligibility heads — W ONLY (not in the Goods list):

A) legal status of the bidder: Individual bidder — a natural person, or a private entity, or a public entity (state-owned enterprise or institution), or a joint venture/ consortium (JV/C).

B) the Rs. 10 crore JV threshold: For package size exceeding certain values [say — Rs. 10 (ten) crore], JV/C May be permitted to participate in the procurement of works in specific situations where the credentials required are not likely to be available with an individual bidder.

  • Maximum number of partners in JV shall be limited (say — three).
  • In case of JV, all the partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the successful completion of the work.
  • Participation of JV/C is specifically discouraged In the case of quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) with QCBS evaluation.

C) registrations/ licences: GSTIN, PAN, EPF, ESI, labour, Private Security Agencies (PASARA), etc.

D) submission of requisite bid Security (Or Bid Security declaration, if allowed) or proof of exemption therefrom.

e) FREE FROM financial insolvency, debarment, or convictions.

f) A consistent history of litigation or arbitration By the bidder May result in disqualification.

G) restriction as per Government policies: for Class-II Local Suppliers and Non-Local bidders under Make-in-India; and bidders from land-border countries or with a Specified ToT arrangement.

4. Conflict of interest — the four (or three) situations:

Bidders having a conflict of interest shall not be eligible to participate In the tender process — unless the conflict stemming from such relationship has been resolved in a manner acceptable to the Procuring Entity Throughout the tender process and execution of the contract.

The bidder shall be considered to have a conflict of interest in the following situations:

A) personnel relationship: If its personnel have a close personal, financial, or business relationship With any personnel of the Procuring Entity who are directly or indirectly related to the procurement or execution process of the contract, which can affect the decision of the Procuring Entity directly or indirectly.

B) prior involvement: The bidder (or his allied firm) provided services for the need assessment/ procurement planning Of the tender process in which it is participating.

C) the agency Rule — G Only: A principal can authorise only one agent, and an agent should not represent or quote on behalf of more than one principal. However, this shall not debar more than one authorised distributor (With or without the OEM) from quoting equipment manufactured by an OEM in procurements under a Proprietary Article Certificate.

D) multiple bids — and the two Manuals differ on the consequence:

Consequence of participating in more than one bid
G GOODSparticipation in any capacity by a bidder (including as a partner/ JV member or sub-contractor in another bid or vice versa) in more than one bid shall result in the disqualification of all bids in which he is a party
W WORKS…Shall result in the *disqualification of the bid in which he is a main/ principal/ lead bidder*

HOWEVER (both Manuals): This DOES NOT Limit the participation of an entity as a sub-contractor in more than one bid, if he is not bidding independently in his own name or as a member of a JV/ consortium.

5. OEM/ agents of supplier — G ONLY:

A) the manufacturer's authorisation requirement: Except in the case of commercially-off-the-shelf (cots) Items, when a firm sends a quotation for an item manufactured by some different company, the firm is also required to attach, in its quotation:

  • THE manufacturer's authorisation certificate; and
  • THE manufacturer's confirmation of extending the required warranty support for that product(in addition to the bidder's own confirmation of the required warranty), as per formats given in Tender Documents.

This is necessary to ensure a quotation from a responsible party offering a genuine product backed by a warranty obligation from the concerned manufacturer.

B) tender-specific authorisation for large contracts: In the case of large contracts, especially capital equipment, the manufacturer's authorisation must be insisted upon on a tender-specific basis — not general authorisation/ dealership — by clearly declaring it in the tender documents.

5.11Pre-NIT and Pre-bid Conferences

(Rule 173(x) of GFR 2017)

5.11.1Pre-Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) Conference — Market Consultation

IN complex and innovative procurement cases, or where the Procuring Entity May not have the required knowledge to formulate tender provisions, A pre-nit conference (before finalising/ publishing NIT) May help the Procuring Entity in obtaining inputs from the industry.

Such conferences should be widely publicised So that different potential suppliers/ contractors can attend (DoE's OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021, para 9.2).

All inputs received from the probable bidders in such a conference shall be compiled/ minuted, and requirements finalised (with the approval of the technical committee, if formed, by the Competent Authority).

In a more complex, large, and green-field/ blue-sky project, two-stage tendering (with EoI) would be more appropriate and transparent.

5.11.2Pre-bid Conference

When it must be provided for:

ManualTrigger
G GOODSin case of turnkey contract(s) and sophisticated and costly equipment, large works and complex consultancy assignments
W WORKSin case of turnkey contract(s) or contract(s) of special nature for procurement of sophisticated and costly work/ services/ equipment — or wherever felt necessary'

a suitable provision shall be kept in the tender documents for one or more pre-bid conferences (after the NIT and tender documents have been published) — FOR clarifying issues/ clearing doubts, if any, and for ensuring a level playing field, relating to the specifications and other allied technical/ commercial details.

A) who May attend, and the deemed-no-issue Rule:

  • G Participation in the pre-bid conference May be restricted to prospective bidders who have downloaded the tender document.
  • Participation is not mandatory.
  • However, if a bidder chooses not to (or fails to) participate in the pre-bid conference or does not submit a written query, it shall be assumed that they have no issues regarding the techno/ commercial conditions.

B) the timing Rules:

EventTiming
Date of the pre-bid meetingnormally after 15 to 21 (fifteen to twenty-one) days Of the issue of the tender document — and should be specified therein
Last date for written queries and for registration for participationmentioned in the tender document — 7 days before the date of the conference, if not specified
Modethe pre-bid conference May also be held online At the discretion of the Procuring Entity

c) Timelines to be declared: Timelines for response to the pre-bid conference — E.G., replies to questions, issue of minutes of the pre-bid conference, corrigenda, etc. — should be mandatorily mentioned in the tender document and complied with.

D) identity requirement: Delegates participating in the pre-bid conference must provide a photo identity and an authorisation letter as per the specified format from their company/ principalsotherwise, they shall not be allowed to participate.

E) the seven-day minutes Rule: After the pre-bid conference, minutes of the pre-bid conference shall be published on the Procuring Entity's portal within seven days of the conference.

If required, a clarification letter and corrigendum To the tender document shall be issued, containing amendments to various provisions — which shall form part of the tender document.

To give reasonable time to the prospective bidders to take such clarifications into account in preparing their bids, the Procuring Entity May suitably extend, as necessary, the deadline for the bid submission.

5.12Site VisitWCNCNOT in Goods

The bidder/ consultant, at its own cost, responsibility and risk, MAY visit and examine the site of work/ required services and its surroundings, and obtain all information that May be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a contract for the works/ services.

5.13Clarification of Tender Documents

A prospective bidder requiring clarification on the tender documents May ask questions in writing/ electronically From the office/ contact person as mentioned in the tender document.

The three time limits:

StepTime limit
Questions must be raisedbefore the clarification end date Mentioned in the tender document — or, if not mentioned, before 7 days of the deadline for the bid submission
Holiday rulethis deadline shall not be extended in case of any intervening holidays
Response by the Procuring Entitya response will be sent in writing/ digitally at least 5 days prior to the date of opening of the tenders

ONLY material queries and their responses Shall be uploaded on the website — without revealing the identity of the bidder making the query.

When the response to clarification changes the requirement significantly And/ or when there is not much time left for the bidders to respond, the time and date of submission of tenders May also be suitably extended (not less than 3 days).

5.14Withdrawal/ Amendments/ Modifications to Bids by Bidders

1. What is permitted before the deadline: The bidder, after submitting its bid, is permitted to substitute/ alter/ modify it, superseding the earlier bid — so long as such revised bid is uploaded/ received duly sealed and marked like the original bid, up to the deadline of submission of bids.

Resubmission of a bid shall require uploading all documents, including the financial bid, afresh.

The system shall consider only the last bid submitted As a valid bid.

The bidder May withdraw his bid before the bid submission deadline — and it shall be marked as withdrawn and shall not be opened During the bid opening.

2. What is prohibited after the deadline — and the penalty:

Any such action after the bid-submission deadline is not permitted.

Withdrawal/ amendment/ modification/ alteration/ impairment/ derogation of a bid, in any respect, by its bidder between the deadline for submission of bids and the expiration of the period of bid validityhis Bid Security/ EMD shall be forfeited, besides imposition of any other punitive remedy available to the Procuring Entity.

In such cases, tender evaluation shall be proceeded with in terms of the evaluation chapter.

5.15Sealing/ Marking of Bids in Off-line Tenders

1. The tender document should indicate the manner of submission/ uploading of bids.

2. The double-envelope discipline: In the case of off-line tenders, the total number of bid copies (for example, duplicate or triplicate, and so on) required to be submitted should be specified.

The bidder is to:

  • Seal the original and each copy Of the bid in separate envelopes, duly marking the same as "original", "duplicate", and so on;
  • Print the address of the purchasing office and the tender reference number On the envelopes;
  • Further, the sentence "Not to be opened before (the due date and time of tender opening)" is also to be printed on these envelopes;
  • The inner envelopes are then to be put inside a bigger outer envelope, which will also be duly sealed, marked, and so on, as above.

If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked properly As above, the Procuring Entity does not assume any responsibility for its misplacement, premature opening, late opening, and so on.

5.16Uploading/ Submission of Bids

5.16.1Uploading Bids in e-Procurement

a) the Procuring Entity is neither a party nor a principal In the relationship between the bidder and the organisation hosting the e-procurement portal (hereinafter called the portal).

Bidders must acquaint and train themselves With the Rules, regulations, procedures, and implied conditions/ agreements of the portal. Bidders intending to participate shall be required to register with the portal, and must comply with its conditions — including registration and a compatible digital signature certificate (DSC). In the case of downloaded documents, the bidder must not make any changes to the contents of the documents while uploading — except for filling in the required information.

B) any query/ clarification/ complaint regarding downloading tender documents and uploading bids on the e-procurement portal May be addressed to the portal's help desk.

C) the primacy Rule: In case of conflict between the provisions of the portal and the tender document, provisions of the portal shall prevail.

D) no extension for office closure: Bids must be uploaded by the submission deadline. If the office happens to be closed on the deadline to submit the bids, this deadline shall not be extended.

e) ONLY one copy Of the bid can be uploaded, and the bidder shall digitally sign all statements, documents, and certificates Uploaded by him — owning sole and complete responsibility for their correctness/ authenticity As per the provisions of the IT ACT 2000, as amended.

f) The protected Price Schedule: The Bidder shall write his name in the space provided in the specified location only. Bidder shall type rates in figure only in the rate column of respective item(s) — without any blank cell or zero values in the rate column, and without any alteration/ deletion/ modification of other portions of the excel sheet. If space is inadequate, the Bidder may upload additional documents under "Additional Documents" in the "bid Cover Content".

G) the server clock Rule: The date and time of the e-procurement server clock — which is also displayed on the bidders' dashboard — shall be used as the reference time for deciding the closing time of bid submission. No request on the account that the server clock was not showing the correct time, and that a particular bidder could not submit their bid because of this, shall be entertained. Failure or defects on the internet, or heavy traffic at the server, shall not be accepted as a reason for a complaint. The Procuring Entity shall not be responsible for any failure, malfunction or breakdown of the electronic system Used during the e-tender process.

h) Encryption: The bidder should ensure the correctness of the bid before uploading, and take a printout of the system-generated submission summary to confirm the successful bid upload. All bids uploaded by the bidder to the portal shall be automatically encrypted. The encrypted bid can only be decrypted/ opened by the authorised persons on or after the due date and time.

i) Scanned documents: Bidder must upload scanned copies of originals (or self-attested copies of originals — as specified), and should ensure the clarity/ legibility of the scanned documents. The Procuring Entity reserves its right to call for verification of originals Of all such self-certified documents from the bidders at any stage of evaluation — especially from the successful bidder(s) before the issue of Letter of Award (LoA).

j) physical submission of originals — the one case where the deadline DOES extend: If so specified in the tender document, originals (or self-attested copies) of specified scanned, uploaded documents must be physically submitted before the deadline specified for it (before the bid submission deadline, if not so specified), sealed in double cover, and acknowledgement must be obtained.

Failure to do so is likely to result in the bid being rejected. If the office is closed on the deadline for the physical submission of originals, IT shall stand extended to the next working day At the same time and venue.

k)no Manual bids shall be made available or accepted for submission in e-procurement(except for originals of scanned copies as per sub-para (j) above).

5.16.2Submission of Bids in the Offline Tender Process

A) the technical and financial proposals shall be submitted at the same time. To safeguard the integrity of the process, the technical and financial proposals shall be submitted in separate sealed envelopes and kept in an outer sealed envelope.

b) the tender box and its two locks: The procuring entity shall maintain tender boxes for receiving the bids at suitable locations, which would facilitate security and easy access for bidders.

If required, tender boxes should be separate for each day of the week of tender opening, and should be sealed by the Bid Opening Committee (boc) of the day. The tender box shall have two locks. The key of one lock will be with the head of the office, and the other key with the official nominated by him.

c) Courier and prohibited modes: Bids received by courier Shall be deposited in the tender box by the despatch section Till the date and time of bid opening. Bids sent by telex, cable or facsimile are to be ignored and rejected.

D) bulky/ oversized bids: For bulky/ oversized bids that cannot be dropped into tender boxes, the officials authorised to receive such bids shall maintain proper records and provide a signed receipt with the date and time To the bearer of the bid. He will also sign on the cover, duly indicating the date and time of receipt. Names and designations of at least two such authorised officers Should be mentioned in the tender documents.

5.16.3Bid Security

A self-attested scan of the original Bid Security/ BSD Should be uploaded along with bids. Bids not complying with these provisions shall be rejected.

In off-line tenders, bid Security or — if permitted — bid securing declaration (BSD) must accompany the bid As per instructions in the tender document.

5.17Bid Validity

A bid shall remain valid for the period mentioned in the tender document — 90 days if not so specified.

A bid that is valid for a shorter period shall be rejected as non-responsive.

In case the day up to which the bids are to remain valid falls on — or is subsequently declared — a holiday/ closed day for the Procuring Entity, the bid validity shall automatically be deemed to be extended up to the next working day.

The validity period should not be unreasonably long, as keeping the tender unconditionally valid for acceptance for a longer period entails the risk of getting higher prices from the bidders.

5.18Opening of Bids

1. Timing and the holiday Rule: Immediately after the deadline for bid submission, the Procuring Entity shall proceed to the bid opening.

If the specified date of bid opening falls on — or is subsequently declared — a holiday or closed day for the Procuring Entity, the bids shall be opened at the appointed time on the next working day.

Composition of the Bid Opening Committee (boc): In offline tenders, the boc shall comprise one officer each from the Procuring Entity and associated/ integrated finance.

2. E-procurement: All tenders uploaded by bidders are received, safeguarded, and opened online on the portal.

3. The offline bid-opening procedure — ten steps:

A) letters of authority: The authorised representatives of bidders who intend to attend the tender opening in OTE/ GTE/ SLTE ARE TO bring letters of authority From the corresponding bidder with them. The prescribed format should be given in the tender document. All bid-opening activities should be carried out demonstrably before such a gathering.

(Bid Opening Attendance Sheet cum Report — G Annexure 13 · W Annexure 3 · C Annexure 5 · NC Annexure 5.)

b) opening the tender box — and the treatment of LATE and WRONGLY-DROPPED bids:

  • At a prescheduled date and time, the BOC of the day should get the tender box opened after ensuring and demonstrating that the seal on the box has not been tampered with.
  • All bids should be collected from the tender box. Bids for tenders not opening on that day should be put back into the box and the box resealed.
  • Sometimes, tenders are dropped wrongly Into this tender box. Such wrongly dropped tenders, with appropriate endorsement, should be put into the appropriate box — OR sent to the Tender Committee (TC) concerned if the date of opening is over.
  • The bids for different tenders opening on the day (including oversized bids, which were submitted to designated officers) should be sorted, and a count for each tender should be announced and recorded — particularly noting any modifying/ altering/ withdrawal of bids.
  • Boc should ensure and demonstrate that bid envelopes are duly sealed and untampered.
  • Late bids should be separately counted but kept aside and not opened. In the case of an advertised tender enquiry or Limited Tender Enquiry, late bids (i.e., bids received after the specified date and time for receipt of bids) should not be considered — Rule 165 of GFR 2017.

C) the two-stage opening: The technical bids will be opened on the pre-announced date, and the financial proposals shall remain sealed and shall be opened publicly in due course of time only for those firms that have technically qualified.

D) serial numbering and initialling: After opening, every tender shall be numbered serially (say 3/14 — if it is the third bid out of 14 total), initialled, and dated on the first page By the boc.

  • Each page of the price Schedule or letter attached to it shall also be similarly initialled — particularly the prices, delivery period, and so on, which shall also be circled and initialled along with the date.
  • Any other page containing significant information should also be dealt with similarly.
  • Blank pages, if any, should be crossed out across and marked accordingly By the boc.
  • The original (and duplicate, if any) copies in a tender set are to be marked accordingly by the boc.

e) the alterations protocol — one of the most detailed procedural rules in the Manuals:

  • Erasure/ cutting/ overwriting/ use of whitener/ columns left unfilled in tenders, if any, shall be initialled along with the date and time and numbered By the officials opening the tenders.
  • THE total number of such noticed alterations (or the absence of any alteration) should be explicitly marked on the first page of the bid.
  • Wherever quantity/ amount is written only in figures, the boc should write them in words.
  • ALL rebates/ discounts Should be similarly circled, numbered, and signed.
  • In the absence of any alteration/ overwriting/ whitener/ blanks, the remark "no corrections noted" Should be written. Similarly, the absence of discounts should be marked with "no discounts noted".

F) what the boc announces — and what it May not do: The boc is to announce the salient features of the tenders — such as description and specification of the goods, quoted price, terms of delivery, delivery period, discount (if any), whether EMD furnished or not, and any other distinctive feature — for the information of the representatives attending the tender opening. Clarifications by the bidders shall not be allowed or recorded During the bid opening. The boc has no authority to reject any tender at the tender opening stage.

g) Samples: PROPER sealing and codification Needs to be done on reference samples, as well as for samples that accompany the bid. These should be kept for reference under lock and key. Details should be recorded in the sample register Maintained in the opening section.

h) Financial instruments: Should BE noted in the bid opening report/ register and handed over to the finance section for safe custody and monitoring.

i) The Bid Opening Report: A bid opening report containing the names of the bidders (serial number wise) and salient features of the tenders, as read out during the public opening, will be prepared by the tender opening officers and duly signed by them along with the date and time.

The tenders that have been opened, the list of the representatives attending The tender opening, and the bid opening report are to be handed over to the nominated procuring officer — and an acknowledgement shall be obtained from him.

j) A similar procedure shall later be followed during financial bid opening In case of multiple-envelope bidding.

5.19Transparency and Protecting Third-Party Rights of Bidders

1. The public interest: Objectives of transparency in e-PROCUREMENT ARE amply served if data relating to the tender and award of contract are accessible to the public.

2. The participating bidders' interest: As far as the bidders who have participated in a tender (participating bidders) are concerned — for transparency, a comparative summary of technical (compliance details) and of financial bids (including QCBS calculations, wherever applicable) Should also be accessible to them.

BUT not necessarily to the public at large — unless sought and if permissible under the RTI Act.

3. The trade-secrets concern: Bidders May have genuine concerns about techno-commercial and operational trade secrets If their full technical and financial bids are accessible to their competitors or the public at large.

This concern May get aggravated in complicated EPC/ PPP/ consultancy procurements.

Technical/ financial bids should not be made accessible to the public at large, AND a call needs to be taken based on the sensitivity of details in the bids to restrict access of even participating bidders to full technical/ financial bids of their competitors.

The decision of the Procuring Entity to share or not share the full technical bids with other participating bidders should be clearly brought out in the tender documents.

4. The reserved right: However, a clause May be added to the tender documents reserving the right of the Procuring Entity and the e-procurement portal to provide access to bidders' technical/ financial bids to other participating bidders — in addition to the comparative summary of technical and financial bids of all participating bidders.

5.20Bid Invitation Process — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1exceptions to an open tender process are abused, leading to single-source processes.Rigorously follow the conditions under which open tendering can be dispensed with.
2WHEN short-lists Are used, the process of preparation of short-lists May be non-transparent, AND all eligible firms May not be included, and some ineligible firms May get included.Registration of bidders/ contractors: All major procuring departments must keep a list of registered bidders for use in restricted tendering. Publicise even restricted bids On your website. Bidders for LTE/ SLTE May be transparently selected with the approval of ca.
3pre-qualification criteria: PQB has the potential of getting misused or being applied without considering the restrictive nature of competition. PQC should be relevant to the quality requirements, and neither very stringent nor very lax in restricting/ facilitating the entry of bidders. These criteria should be clear, unambiguous, exhaustive, and yet specific. Also, there should be FAIR COMPETITION.G:Lay down criteria when PQB tendering is warranted. Also, model PQC criteria for diverse types of procurements should be laid down.
W variant:
Lay down criteria when two-stage tendering is warranted. Also lay down model PQC criteria for diverse types of procurements.
4invitation to tender (an open bid) is not well publicised or gives insufficient time — thereby restricting the number of bidders that participate.Publicity and adequate time for bid submission must be ensured. Higher-level approval should be obtained for a shorter bid submission period.
5evaluation criteria are not set from the beginning, OR ARE not objective, OR not clearly stated In the tender documents — thereby making them prone to being abused.Objective, relevant and clearly stated evaluation criteria must be specified in the tender document.

Appendix to Chapter 5 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 5 · W: CHAPTER 4
2Chapter titleIDENTICAL in all four — one of only two such chapters(W spells its risk section "Bidding Invitation Process", as do C and NC; G says "Bid Invitation Process")
3Number of sectionsG: 5 · W: 15 (most granular) · C: 8 · NC: 5
4Model Tender DocumentsG/C/NC cite DoE MTDs (Goods & NCS Oct 2021; Consultancy April 2023) · W refers instead to "relevant standard bidding documents" and says to follow CPWD's if the organisation has none
5Survey & soil investigation report, area grading, mapping of underground facilities to be part of the tender documentW ONLY
6"Facilities and inputs which will be provided to the contractor by the Ministry/ Department" as an essential aspectW ONLY
7"Requirements as to documentary evidence" as an essential aspectW ONLY
8Footnote defining "HIGHEST" bidder as the H1 QCBS scorerW ONLY
9Order of the last two tender-document sectionsG: Financial Bid then Submission Forms · W: Submission Forms then Financial Bid
10Section VII titled "DRAWING, Technical Specifications and Quality Assurance"W (G omits "Drawing")
11The four circumstances warranting an SCC clauseW ONLY
12Evaluation by item/ lot/ entire scope; milestone identification "in an optimal and sequential manner"W ONLY
13ACCESSIBILITY MANDATE — RPwD Act 2016 & Rules 2017; Harmonised Guidelines (MoHUA); IS 17802 Parts 1 & 2W ONLY
14Performance Standards & QA; Method Statement; Work Plan; Critical Material Schedule; SLA; Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditionsnc only
15The three NC Qualification Criteria and the 3×40% / 2×50% / 1×80% volume testnc only
16Contract Manager — 5 years' experience, 3 as managernc only
17Turnover multiple of 3–7 times, with the stated reason that NC needs a higher multiple than Worksnc only
18Upper cap on demanded turnover in higher-value procurementsnc only
19Entry window for sub-contractors — repair contracts up to Rs. 60 lakh; no more than 2 contracts under relaxed credentialsW ONLY
20Demerged entities — five-year use of parent credentialsW, C, NCnot in Goods
21Conditional discounts not considered at evaluation but availed if bidder otherwise eligibleW ONLY
22REoI DOCUMENT — contents, forms, EoI validity 60 days, "do not ask for CVs or approach at EoI stage", right to make minor ToR adjustments at RfP stageC ONLY
23RfP DOCUMENT — rFPL/ ITC/ AITC, rfP validity 90 days, budget not to be disclosed except in FBS, STP vs FTP, 14-day association approval, presentation carries no marksC ONLY
24"Any procurement portal without Excel BOQ facility should endeavour to build it"C + NC
25"Items for which no rate is entered will not be paid for and are deemed covered"; lump-sum breakdown requirementC + NC
26Minimum wage floor; 'NIL' price rejection; LCS for Manpower Outsourcing; police verification and good moral character of deployed manpowernc only
27e-Publishing exclusionG/C/NC: purchase without quotation & by purchase committee · W: works procurement through quotation
28Fixed days for NIT issuance and tender opening; CPWD region-wise table; Rs. 2 crore one-week/ two-week ruleW ONLY
2921-day extension norm and fresh publication where amendment substantially changes requirementsW ONLY
30Auto-extension "only ONCE, not repeatedly"G states it twice; W OMITS the restriction
31Exemption from tender document costG: MSEs and registered units · W: registered units only (for relevant grades of work)
32Legal status of bidder; Rs. 10 crore JV threshold; max 3 JV partners; JV discouraged in QOP/QCBS; PASARA and other licences; litigation history disqualificationW ONLY(in this chapter)
33Consequence of participating in more than one bidg: Disqualification of ALL BIDS in which he is a party · W: disqualification of the bid in which he is main/ principal/ lead bidder
34One-Principal-one-agent rule and the PAC exception for multiple authorised distributorsG ONLY
35OEM authorisation certificate + warranty confirmation; tender-specific authorisation for capital equipmentG ONLY
36Pre-bid conference triggerG: turnkey, sophisticated/ costly equipment, large works, complex consultancy · W: adds "or wherever felt necessary"
37Participation restricted to those who downloaded the Tender DocumentG (W does not state this restriction)
38site visitW, C, NC — absent from Goods
39Bid Opening Committee = one officer each from Procuring Entity and Integrated Financestated in G
40Risk table row 3 mitigationG: "when PQB tendering is warranted" · W: "when Two-STAGE tendering is warranted"

end of Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Forms of Securities, Prices, Payment Terms and Price Variations

Merging: Goods Ch. 6 · Works Ch. 5 · Consultancy Ch. 6 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 6

Structural Notes

1. This is the second and last chapter whose title is WORD-FOR-WORD IDENTICAL in all four Manuals. BUT the Works Manual numbers it CHAPTER 5, not Chapter 6.

2. Despite the identical title, this chapter has the sharpest content divergence of any "common" chapter. Three whole bodies of material exist in one Manual only:

Body of materialExists only in
Terms of Payment for Domestic Goods · Terms of Payment for IMPORTED Goods · Letter of Credit · Air Freight Charges · Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) · INCOTERMS 2020 · Customs Duty · Insurance Surety Bond and e-BG (full text) · Warranty Bank GuaranteeGOODS
Security Deposit/ Retention Money · Insurances and Indemnities · Variations and Measurement Books · Interim Payment Certificates · MOBILISATION ADVANCE · Plant/ Machinery/ Shuttering Advance · SECURED ADVANCE against material at siteWORKS
The multi-year performance-security reduction rule for SERVICE contracts (5–7 years)CS + NC

3. The seven common anchors, present in all four in the same order:

Concordance for Chapter 6

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
6.1Bid Security/ EMD6.1.15.1.16.1.16.1.1
6.2Performance Security/ Guarantee6.1.25.1.26.1.26.1.2
6.3Security Deposit/ Retention Money5.1.3
6.4Insurance Surety Bond (ISB)6.1.3(cross-ref)(cross-ref)(cross-ref)
6.5Electronic Bank Guarantee (e-BG)6.1.4(cross-ref)(cross-ref)(cross-ref)
6.6Warranty Bank Guarantee6.1.5
6.7Verification of Bank Guarantees6.1.65.1.46.1.36.1.3
6.8Safe Custody and Monitoring6.1.75.1.56.1.46.1.4
6.9Insurances and Indemnities5.1.6
6.10Payment Clause / Payment Terms6.25.26.26.2
6.11Terms of Payment — Domestic Goods6.36.3 (generic)6.3 (generic)
6.12Terms of Payment — Imported Goods; LC6.4
6.13Advance Payment6.55.36.46.4
6.14Prices, Firm Price and Variable Price6.65.46.56.5
6.15Exchange Rate Variation (ERV)6.7
6.16Statutory Taxes/ Duties/ Levies6.85.56.66.6
6.17Incoterms 20206.9
6.18Recovery of Public Money from the bill6.105.66.76.7
6.19Payment against Time-Barred Claims6.115.76.86.8

6.1Bid Security / Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)

(Rule 170 of GFR 2017)

1. Purpose and when taken: To safeguard against a bidder's withdrawing or altering its/ his bid during the bid validity period — in the case of advertised (OTE and GTE) tenders or Special Limited Tender Enquiry — Bid Security (also known as earnest money deposit — EMD) is to be obtained from the bidders along with their bids.

2. The amount: The amount of Bid Security should ordinarily range between two (2) to five (5) per cent of the estimated value Of the goods/ works to be procured.

The amount, rounded off to the nearest thousands of rupees, as determined by the Procuring Entity, is to be indicated in the tender documents.

3. Forms of Bid Security — and the issuing-bank divergence:

Bid security may be obtained in the form of:

ManualWhich banks may issue
G GOODSfrom any of the commercial banks
W WORKSissued/ CONFIRMED by any of the scheduled banks (as defined in section 2(e) of the RBI Act 1934)
W Footnote: "a Bank Guarantee merely advised by a scheduled bank is not acceptable, in lieu of being confirmed."

the Rs. 5 lakh threshold: In case the Bid Security is more than a threshold (rupees five lakh), and in case of foreign bidders in GTE tenders, it May be in the form of a bank Guarantee (In equivalent foreign exchange amount, in case of GTE) issued/ confirmed from any of the commercial/ scheduled banks in India in an acceptable form.

4. Validity: The Bid Security is normally to remain valid for a period of 45 (forty-five) days beyond the final bid validity period.

5. Bid securing declaration (BSD) — and the divergence in consequence:

In place of a Bid Security, procuring entities — after seeking approval from the Competent Authority — May consider asking bidders to submit a bid securing declaration (BSD), accepting that:

  • If they withdraw or modify their bids during the period of validity; or
  • if they are awarded the contract and they fail to submit Performance Security, or to sign the contract, before the deadline defined in the tender documents

— it shall be considered as a violation of the Code of Integrity, and they shall be:

ManualConsequence
G, C, NC"…Shall be suspended for the time period specified in the BSD"
W WORKS"…Shall be debarred for the time period specified in the BSD"

— from being eligible to submit bids/ proposals for contracts with the Procuring Entity.

6. Exemptions from Bid Security — and the MSE divergence:

In appropriate cases, submission of the bid security may be exempted with the Competent Authority's (ca's) approval — especially in the case of:

the statutory exemptions:

ManualWho is exempt from payment of EMD
G GOODSBOTH — micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) as defined in the MSE Procurement Policy, ANDregistered startups as recognised by DPIIT
W WORKSONLY — registered startups as recognised by DPIIT (MSEs are not named)

In case the bidder falls into these categories, the bidder should furnish a certified copy of its valid registration details.

The scope of the registered-bidder exemption:

  • G:"except for MSEs, this exemption is valid for the trade group and monetary value Of registration only."
  • W:"This exemption is valid for the monetary value Of registration only."

7. Forfeiture: A bidder's Bid Security shall be forfeited IF:

  • The bidder withdraws or amends its bid, OR impairs or derogates from the tender in any respect, within the period of validity of the tender; Or
  • THE successful bidder fails to furnish the required Performance Security or to sign the contract Within the specified period.

8. Return of bid securities — the three timelines:

SituationWhen returned
UNSUCCESSFUL biddersas soon as possible after the expiry of the final bid validity period — and, at the latest, by the 30TH day after the award of the contract
SUCCESSFUL bidderUPON receipt of Performance Security
In two-packet or two-stage tendering — unsuccessful bidders of the first stagewithin 30 days of declaration of the result of the first stage (i.e., technical evaluation, etc.) (OM No. F.1/2/2022-PPD dated 01.04.2022)

6.2Performance Security / Performance Guarantee

(Rule 171 of GFR 2017)

1. Purpose: TO ENSURE due performance of the contract, Performance Security (or performance Bank Guarantee — PBG, OR security Deposit — SD) is to be obtained from the successful bidder awarded the contract.

2. The quantum — the key numerical divergence(OM No. F.1/2/2023-PPD dated 01.01.2024):

CategoryPerformance Security
GOODSThree (3) TO five (5) PER CENT of the value of the contract
WORKSThree (3) TO ten (10) PER CENT of the value of the contract
non-consultancy servicesThree (3) TO five (5) PER CENT of the contract value(the NC Manual expressly notes "3 to 10% for Works")

3. The upper ceiling — the illustrative example given in G and NC:

Tender valueIllustrative ceiling on Performance Security
Up to Rs. 50 croreRs. 75 LAKH
above Rs. 50 crore but below Rs. 300 croreRs. 3 CRORE
higher than Rs. 300 croreThe Procuring Entity may decide the amount — but not less than Rs. 3 crore mentioned above

however, procuring entities are free to decide their own upper limits/ quantum for Performance Security (NC Adds: "Or dispense with it") — with the approval of Competent Authority and finance concurrence, based on their perception of performance risks vis-à-vis need for competition.

4. Forms of Security: Performance security may be furnished in the form of:

— safeguarding the purchaser's/ Procuring Entity's interest in all respects.

5. GTE contracts and URDG 758: In the case of GTE tenders, the Performance Security should be in the same currency as the contract And must conform to the uniform Rules for demand guarantees (URDG 758) — an international convention regulating international securities.

6. Joint ventures — W and NC: In case of a JV, the BG towards Performance Security shall be provided by all partners in proportion to their participation in the project.

7. The no-retention Rule for goods — G Only: Unlike the procurement of works, in the procurement of goods, the concept of taking part of the performance guarantee as money retained from the first or progressive bills of the supplier is not acceptable.

8. The value threshold below which Performance Security is not needed:

ManualProvision
G GOODS"Submission of Performance Security is not necessary for a tender value up to rupees 50 lakh."
(The Goods Manual prints "Rupees 50 (twenty-five) lakh" — an evident typographical inconsistency between the figure and the word.)
NC Non-consultancy"Submission of Performance Security May not be insisted upon In lower-valued contracts (say up to rupees 50 (fifty) lakh)."
W WORKS(no such threshold stated)

9. Exemption from submission of Performance Security:

Procuring Entity may EXEMPT the following entities (on their specific requests or otherwise): A) govt. Ministries, departments, attached and subordinate offices, autonomous bodies

  1. G and NC ONLY:THE OEM in whose favour PAC is issued, in tenders issued against PAC.

10. When furnished and how long valid:

Performance Security is to be furnished by a specified date — generally 14 (fourteen) to 28 (twenty-eight) days after notification of the award(G and NC add: "depending on the amount").

It should remain valid for a period of 60 (sixty) days — or any other period mentioned in the tender documents — beyond the date of completion of all contractual obligations, including:

  • G, NC:Warranty obligations;
  • W:Defect liability period (DLP)/ warranty period.

11. Multi-year contracts — the proportionate-reduction Rule, and its two versions:

G — GOODS version:In the case of goods contracts (e.g., rate contracts and other long-term contracts) spanning over multiple years, procuring entities May consider proportionately reducing Performance Security in proportion to the balance contract period, wherever feasible — instead of retaining the full Performance Security over the complete contract period, which May be of 2–3 years or more.

C + NC — the SERVICES version, with its stated rationale:

12. Replacement of existing securities — W and NC: Securities in the existing Contracts in the form of Bank Guarantee May be permitted by the Procuring Entity to be replaced by the contractors with insurance surety bonds or e-Bank Guarantee. Adequate safeguards — such as requiring prior submission of new forms of security before releasing the original forms of security — should be ensured.

13. Forfeiture and refund — and the "partial execution" rule:

The Performance Security will be forfeited and credited to the Procuring Entity's account in the event of a breach of contract By the contractor.

It should be refunded to the contractor without interest After he duly performs and completes the contract in all respects…

…BUT not later than 60 (sixty) days Of completion of all such obligations including the warranty (W: "of completion of the Defect Liability Period (DLP)/ warranty period") Under the contract.

14. Monitoring and transparency: The senior officers should monitor the return of bid/ performance securities, and delays should be avoided. If feasible, the details of these securities May be listed in the e-procurement portal/ website of the Procuring Entity to make the process transparent and visible.

6.3Security Deposit / Retention Money [W ONLY]

IN addition To Performance Security, contracts for works usually provide for a percentage — usually five per cent — of each running bill (periodic/ interim payment) to be withheld as Security Deposit/ retention money until final acceptance.

The earnest money, instead of being released, May form part of the Security Deposit.

The contractor's option to replace retention money — at two stages:

The contractor may, at his option, replace the retention amount with an unconditional BG/ Insurance Surety Bond From a bank acceptable to the Procuring Entity at the following stages:

A) after the amount reaches half the value of the limit Of retention money; And

b) after the amount reaches the maximum limit Of retention money.

The two-halves release Rule:

HalfWhen released
One-HALF of the retention money (or BG which replaced it)shall be released on the issue of the taking-over certificate. If the taking-over certificates (TOCs) are issued in parts, then in such proportions as the engineer May determine, having regard to the value of such part or section
the other halfshall be released upon expiration of 60 (sixty) days — or any other period mentioned in the tender document — after the DLP/ warranty period of the works, or final payment, whichever is earlier — ON certification by the engineer

in the event of different defect liability periods/ warranty periods being applicable to different sections or parts or equipment incidental to works, the expiration of defect liability period/ warranty period shall be the latest of such periods.

6.4Insurance Surety Bond (ISB)Gtext; W/C/NC cross-refer to Goods para 6.1.3

An Insurance Surety Bond (isb) is a three-party agreement That provides financial assurance to one party (the beneficiary) by another party (the surety or bonding company) on behalf of a third party (the principal).

Isb ensures that the principal fulfils their contractual obligations.

The three parties:

PartyWho it is
1. PrincipalThe party that obtains the surety bond — typically the contractor or service provider who provides the Bid/ performance security to the Procuring Entity
2. BeneficiaryThe party (procuring Entity) that requires the Insurance surety bond. The beneficiary seeks financial protection in case the principal fails to meet their obligations
3. Surety insurerThe bond-issuing entity (bank or insurance company). They act as a guarantor, assuring the beneficiary that the principal will perform as promised

the default procedure and its two timelines:

If the principal defaults, the surety insurer assesses the extent of default and determines the amount payable Under the bond. If the principal does not pay within 14 DAYS, the surety insurer pays within 45 calendar days Of receiving the necessary documentation.

6.5Electronic Bank Guarantee (e-BG)Gtext; W/C/NC cross-refer to Goods para 6.1.4

1. What it is: Electronic Bank Guarantee is a dematerialised Bank Guarantee processed on national e-governance services limited (NeSL) — AN information utility registered with the insolvency and bankruptcy board of India, under the aegis of the insolvency and bankruptcy code.

It handles all lifecycle events of e-bg — execution by the issuing bank, intimation to and verification by the beneficiary, amendment, invocation or release by the beneficiary, cancellation, etc.

The facility is available 24/7, including non-working days. Beneficiaries and banks can continue to use their own BG templates.

All bidders May be encouraged to submit e-bgs instead of traditional paper-based bank guarantees.

2. Creation of e-BG: The procuring Entity should ensure that the bidder/ contractor is informed (in the tender documents) of its unique identity number (UIN — which can be allotted by its bank) and email id.

A clause regarding e-bgs May be included in the tender, acknowledging and accepting the use of e-bgs as a valid form of Bank Guarantee for the tender process. The Procuring Entity May reserve the right to verify the authenticity of e-bgs And take necessary actions in case of discrepancies.

The UIN and email id of the beneficiary are specified by the issuing bank when creating the e-bg on the NeSL portal, upon being approached by the bidder/ contractor. On creation of e-bg, it is stored on the NeSL portal.

3. Intimation to Beneficiary: NeSL shall send a notification to the email id of the beneficiary provided by the issuing bank (As well as the beneficiary's registered email id) during issuance or subsequent event of e-bg (amendment/ invocation, release/ cancellation, etc.).

The Procuring Entity can receive the email notification without registration — BUT such an email shall not have the e-bg document attachment.

The issuing Bank can also arrange to forward the e-bg to the beneficiary through the applicant or any other mechanism.

4. Registration and login: Beneficiaries and their authorised representatives must register with NeSL using UIN and email id. They must log in to the NeSL portal using the same details to view, download, verify, or release/ invoke THE e-BG.

Integration with Government procurement portals (CPPP, GeM, State govt procurement portals) IS being explored To facilitate e-bg access without needing to log into the NeSL portal.

5. EASY VERIFICATION — the significant benefit: Verification of the e-BG stored in NeSL is sufficient, AND verification with the issuing bank is not required. This is a significant benefit for procuring entities.

6. Invocation and release: The e-bg process through NeSL facilitates beneficiaries submitting requests for invocation or any other consents through digitally signed submission in the NeSL portal — without the need to approach the issuing bank.

6.6Warranty Bank Guarantee [G ONLY]

In the case of works and capital equipment, there is usually a defect liability/ warranty clause Against defects arising from design, material, workmanship, or any omission on the part of the vendor/ contractor During a specified period of months from the date of commissioning or the date of dispatch in case of goods — whichever is earlier.

The general Rule: In such cases, the performance guarantee is to be valid up to 60 (sixty) days beyond the warranty period.

The permitted alternative — the swap:

It is normally permissible in such a situation to allow:

  • THE performance guarantee To be valid up to 60 (sixty) days beyond the delivery/ commissioning period; AND
  • the contractor to submit a fresh warranty Bank Guarantee of 10 (ten) per cent of the value of the goods, in the currency of the contract, valid up to 60 (sixty) days beyond the warranty period.

In such cases, the performance guarantee is to be returned only after satisfactory delivery/ commissioning and receipt of such a warranty Bank Guarantee.

When no warranty clause is called for: In the procurement of goods other than capital equipment — and in the case of low-value capital goods, say up to rupees one lakha warranty clause is not called for.

6.7Verification of Bank Guarantees

1. The general Rule: Bank guarantees submitted by the bidders/ suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers as EMD/ performance securities need to be immediately verified from the issuing bank before acceptance.

There May not be any need to get the Bank Guarantee vetted by legal/ finance authority if it is in the specified format.

The five verification guidelines(for BGs against EMD/ performance security/ advance payments and for various other purposes):

A) BG shall be as per the prescribed formats.

B) the BG contains the name, designation and code number of the bank officer(s) signing the guarantee(s).

c) THE address and other details (including telephone no.) of the controlling officer of the bank Are obtained from the branch of the bank issuing the BG — this should be included in all bgs.

d) the confirmation channels — and the Works addition:

The confirmation from the issuing branch of the bank is obtained in writing Through:

the bank should be advised to confirm the issuance of the bgs — specifically quoting the letter of the Procuring Entity — on the printed official letterhead of the bank, indicating the address and other details (including telephone nos.) of the bank and the name, designation and code number of the officer(s) confirming the issuance.

E) the interim route: Pending receipt of confirmation as above, confirmation can also be obtained with the help of the responsible officer at the field office which is close to the issuing branch of the bank — who should personally obtain the confirmation From the issuing branch and forward the confirmation report To the concerned Procuring Entity.

2. Genuineness: BANK GUARANTEES — either received in physical form or electronic form — should be verified for their genuineness following the prescribed method, and the organisations should do due diligence on the genuineness of the bank guarantees before acceptance.

3. What is not acceptable: Corporate guarantee or indemnity bond shall NOT Be accepted for bid Security (EMD) or Performance Security, or in lieu of any other Bank Guarantee (e.g., for advance payment/ warranty obligations).

4. Please note the ease with which an e-bg can be verified (para 6.5-5 above).

6.8Safe Custody and Monitoring of EMDs, Performance Securities and Other Instruments

1. The mechanism: A suitable mechanism for safe custody and monitoring Of emds, performance securities, and other instruments should be developed and implemented by each Procuring Entity.

The ministries/ departments shall also make institutional arrangements for taking all necessary actions on time FOR:

2. The monthly review Rule: Monitoring should also include a monthly review of all bank guarantees and other instruments expiring in the next three months — along with a review of the progress of the corresponding contracts.

3. The extension Rule and the absolute prohibition: Extension of bank guarantees and other instruments, where warranted, should be sought immediately and implemented within their validity period.

such a system of monitoring of securities and other instruments May be computerised with automatic alerts about lapse of validity, ETC.

6.9Insurances and Indemnities [W ONLY]

6.9.1Insurances

IN works and services contracts, the contractor must take insurances against vicarious liabilities that May arise for the Procuring Entity — i.e., under labour laws and workmen compensation.

6.9.2Indemnity/ Indenture Bonds

a) why they are needed: The Procuring Entity is potentially liable for injury, damage, or loss relating to a third party due to actions by the contractor during execution of the contract.

Violation of laws and regulations (e.g., environmental issues) also May result in liabilities for the Procuring Entity.

The Procuring Entity also needs to be protected against damage to its assets during contract execution. For such potential liabilities, instead of insurance, an indemnity bond May suffice.

B) the statutory definition: Indemnity bonds are defined under section 124 of the Indian Contract Act:

it is also called an indenture bond — especially in the context of secured advance payments in works contracts.

An indemnity bond is a bond intended to provide financial reimbursement to the holder for any actual or claimed harm/ loss caused by the issuer's conduct or another person's conduct.

In many cases this could be an alternative to a BG — especially where the financial implication of default cannot be estimated.

Some government departments (forest, mines, geology, environment, traffic) may also ask for such bonds to allow a Contractor to carry out work related to their jurisdiction.

C) the three parties:

  • i) ISSUER — is legally required to obtain a bond.
  • ii) HOLDER — is the party that imposes the bonding. In some cases, as an added confidence, a third party 'surety provider' (usually a bank) is added.
  • iii) SURETY (say a bank or the holding company of the issuer) — guarantees the financial compensation if the issuer dithers or fails to guarantee.

d) the critical weakness — why a BG is safer:

When getting indemnity bonds, the issuer signs an indemnity agreement with the surety provider, naming the holder as the beneficiary, and submits it to the holder. It states that the full financial responsibility in case of bond claims belongs to the issuer rather than the surety.

In case the issuer does not perform his obligations and dithers or fails to compensate The holder as per the indemnity bond, the only recourse is a civil case in the courts.

Since this is a long-drawn and expensive proposition, a BG is considered a safer option than an indemnity bond.

6.10Payment Clause / Payment Terms

6.10.1Elements of Price

1. What determines the elements: The elements of price included in the quotation of a bidder depend on:

2. The category-specific elements:

G GOODS:

  • Indigenous goods: The main elements May include raw material, production cost, overhead, packing and forwarding charges, margin of profit, transit insurance, excise duty and other taxes and duties as applicable.
  • Imported goods: in addition to elements similar to the above (other than excise duty and taxes), there may be customs duty, import duty, landing and clearing charges, and commission to Indian agents.
  • Further, depending on the nature of the goods, there may be cost elements towards installation and commissioning, operator's training, and so on.

NC Non-consultancy — the admeasurement-driven price structure (unique to nc):

3. C + NC — the necessity of specifying delivery terms: It is therefore necessary that — to enable the bidders to frame their quotations properly in a meaningful manner — the tender documents should clearly specify the desired terms of delivery and also the respective duties and responsibilities to be performed by the consultant/ service provider and the Procuring Entity.

4. Cost break-up (all four): Where the price has several components — such as the price of the goods, cost of installation and commissioning, operators' training, and so on — bidders should be asked to furnish a cost break-up indicating the applicable prices and taxes for each of such components along with the overall price. THE payment Schedule and terms will be linked to this cost break-up.

5. CURRENCY — the general rule (all four):

The tender documents are to specify the currency (currencies) in which the tenders are to be priced.

As a general Rule:

  • Domestic bidders are to quote and accept their payment in Indian currency;
  • Indian agents of foreign suppliers/ consultants/ service providers are to receive their agency commission in Indian currency;
  • Costs of imported goods/ services directly imported against the contract MAY BE quoted in foreign currency (currencies) and paid accordingly in that currency;
  • the portion of the allied work and services to be undertaken in India (like installation and commissioning of equipment) are to be quoted and paid in Indian currency.

G — the additional GTE currency Rule: For domestic bidding, regardless of whether the bidder is foreign or Indian, the currency of the bid and payment should be entirely in Indian rupees. In GTE, foreign bidders have flexibility to quote in INR or freely convertible currencies — but prices for goods, works or services (including agency commission) performed or sourced in India must be quoted and paid for in Indian rupees. Indian bidders are required to quote in INR only.

6.10.2Payment to Suppliers — the Ten ObligationsG

The governing principle: In a supply contract, the delivery of goods is the essence of the contract for the purchaser. Similarly, receiving timely payment for the supplies is the essence of the seller's contract.

A healthy buyer-supplier relationship is based on the twin foundation of timely and quality supply on the one hand, and prompt and full payment to the supplier on the other.

It should be ensured that all payments due to the firm — including the release of the Performance Security — are made on a priority basis without avoidable delay As per the tender/ contract conditions:

A) as far as possible, the payment terms and time Schedule should be given in the contract and must be adhered to. Any foreseeable payment delays should be communicated to the suppliers in advance.

B) the tax certificate obligation: Prompt and timely provision of statutory certificates to the seller for taxes deducted at source is as much a part of the payment as the amount actually released.

A detailed payment advice showing the calculations and reasons for the amounts disallowed and taxes deducted must be issued to the supplier along with payment. As soon as possible — but not later than the date of submission of tax returns — the Procuring Entity must provide the statutory certificates for the taxes deducted, so that he can claim set-offs and refunds From the concerned authorities. As far as MSME suppliers Are concerned, the MSME Act 2006 Has provisions for timely payments within 45 days, AND A levy of penal interest for delayed payment, AND arbitration/ conciliation for related complaints by Micro and Small Enterprises facilitation councils.

C) release of payment and settlement of the final bill should be processed through the associated/ integrated finance As per the terms and conditions of the contract.

D) the absolute bar: No payments to contractors by way of compensation or otherwise — outside the strict terms of the contract or more than the contract rates — should be allowed.

E) before the payment is made, the invoice should be cross-checked with the actual receipt of material/ assets/ services, to ensure that the payment matches the actual performance.

F) the contractor's certificate: While claiming the payment, the contractor must certify on the bill that the payment being claimed is strictly within the terms of the contract, and that all the obligations on his part for claiming this payment have been fulfilled.

There should also be a suitable provision for verification of the authenticity of the person signing the invoice, and so on, to claim the payment.

6.10.3Payment Terms in WORKS [W ONLY]

1. Variations in works contract:

Variations can include:

A written procedure must be part of the contract for issuing variation instructions.

The engineer needs prior approval from the Procuring Entity before instructing a variation — except in certain situations specified in the SCC.

Variations are tracked using a variations register. The register is updated monthly and summarised To keep all involved agencies informed.

The engineer must balance the risks of quick finalisation against the costs of delays.

Variations involving extra costs are valued as per the contract's relevant clauses. The engineer consults with the Procuring Entity and contractor to agree on suitable rates for items beyond the sor.

The financial implications of variations are kept up to date, AND any significant cost and time overruns due to deviations must be reported to the Procuring Entity.

2. Measurement and payment — the Measurement Book regime:

All items with financial value shall be recorded in Measurement Books (mb) or level field books, to maintain a complete record of the work performed Under the contract.

Measurements and levels are taken and signed jointly by the designated official and the contractor.

The contractor shall — without extra charge — provide all assistance with every appliance, labour and other things necessary for measurements and recording levels.

The contractor shall not cover (or place it beyond reach) the work without written consent from the Procuring Entity — otherwise the contractor shall have to uncover it at their own expense, or they will not be paid for that work.

Organisations are encouraged to implement electronic Measurement Books (e-mbs) and integrate them with it-based project monitoring systems.

3. Interim payments and the Interim Payment Certificate (IPC):

Payment provisions — including amounts to be paid, Schedule of payments, and payment procedures — shall be indicated in the tender document and also in the contract.

Payment terms prescribed in the tender document should be such that the payment made to contractors at every stage is commensurate with the quantum of work done — subject to any requirements for initial mobilisation.

Each month, the contractor submits a statement showing the amounts they consider themselves entitled to.

The engineer issues an interim Payment Certificate (IPC) AFTER:

interim monthly payments are made based on the IPC — net of retentions, recovery of advances, and statutory deductions.

4. Delay in payments to contractors — the four hard timelines:

Delays in eligible payments to contractors can lead to project delays, cost overruns, and disputes.

StepTimeline
Ad-hoc payment of at least 75% of the eligible running account billmust be made within 10 working days Of bill submission
The REMAINING paymentshould be made within 28 working days
if payments are delayed beyond 10 working daysA written explanation must be submitted to the next higher authority within three working days
if bills are delayed by more than 30 working dayspublic authorities May include a provision for interest payments — at the rate of interest in general provident fund

5. Final bills: The final bill must be submitted by the contractor in the same manner as interim bills, within a specified time after the physical completion of work and the issuance of the final certificate of completion (FCC) By the Department/ Ministry.

Payment is made after verifying the bill on the personal certificate of the officer-in-charge, who confirms that the work has been executed as per the contract specifications and industry standards.

Final payment should be paid to the contractor within three months after completion of work.

6.10.4Modes of Payment (common to all four)

A) electronic by default: Procuring entities should make payments through the electronic clearance system (ECS) — e.g., real-time gross settlement systems (RTGS), national electronic funds transfer (NEFT), or electronic payment gateways.

As per RBI guidelines, the ECS mandate in rbi's format May be obtained at the time of supplier/ contractor/ consultant/ service provider registration and in the tender document. The Format is available with all Banks.

b) The exception: HOWEVER, if ECS payments are not feasible, payments May be made in exceptional circumstances by cheque/ demand draft drawn on a Government treasury or branch of RBI, or any scheduled bank authorised by RBI for transacting Government business.

C) payment to the supplier's bank — G Only: Such payment can also be made to the supplier's bank, if the bills are endorsed in favour of the bank with a pre-receipt embossed on the bills with the words "received payment", and the supplier authenticates both the endorsement and pre-receipt. In addition, an irrevocable power of attorney is to be granted by the supplier in favour of the bank.

D) TReDS (all four): Trade receivables discounting system (TReDS) is an electronic platform for facilitating the financing/ discounting of trade receivables of MSMEs through multiple financiers.

These receivables can be due from corporates and other buyers, including Government departments and PSUs.

Payments can also be made through this platform to MSE suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers.

6.11Terms of Payment

6.11.1Terms of Payment for DOMESTIC GOODSG

1. The governing consideration: Terms of payment May be decided by the Procuring Entity safeguarding its interest, based on the terms of delivery, nature of goods, type of inspection, mode of transport and risks In such situations.

2. The four standard payment patterns:

Terms of deliveryPayment term
FOR destination/ delivery at site (no installation)100% on receipt and acceptance of goods by the consignee and on the production of all required documents by the supplier
fOR dispatching station(no installation)60 TO 90% ON proof of dispatch And other related documents; Balance on receipt at site and acceptance by the consignee(depending on the value and nature of the goods, mode of transportation, and so on)
fOR dispatching station(with installation and commissioning)60% on proof of dispatch along with other specified documents · 30% on receipt of the goods at the site by the consignee · balance 10% on successful installation and commissioning and acceptance by the consignee
fOR destination/ delivery at site(with installation and commissioning)90% on receipt and acceptance of goods by the consignee at destination and on production of all required documents · balance 10% on successful installation and commissioning and acceptance

3. The six documents for payment for domestic goods:

  1. Supplier's invoiceindicating, inter alia, description and specification of the goods, quantity, unit price, total value;
  2. Packing list;
  3. Insurance certificate;
  4. Proof of dispatch: Railway receipt/ consignment note;
  5. Quality assurance certificates:(a) manufacturer's guarantee certificate or in-house inspection certificate; Or (b) inspection certificate issued by purchaser's inspector;
  6. Any other document(s) as and if required in terms of the contract.

6.11.2Terms of Payment for SERVICESCNC

1. The standard term:

  • C Consultancy:The usual payment term is 100 (hundred) per cent on receipt and acceptance of deliverables by the Procuring Entity, and on production of all required documents by the consultant.
  • NC Non-consultancy:The usual payment term is 100 (hundred) per cent on acceptance of delivered services by the ultimate user, and on production of all required documents by the service provider.

2. Payment provisions — including amounts to be paid, Schedule of payments, and payment procedures — shall be indicated in the RfP/ tender document and also in the contract.

Payments May be made at regular intervals (as under time-based contracts) OR for agreed outputs (as under lump sum contracts).

6.12Terms of Payment for IMPORTED GOODS, and the Letter of Credit [G ONLY]

6.12.1Terms of Payment

Usual payment terms, unless otherwise directed by ca:

SituationPayment
Installation, erection, and commissioning are NOT the responsibility of the supplier100% net price is to be paid against the production of stipulated documents
Installation, erection and commissioning ARE the responsibility of the supplier80–90% of the net price against production of stipulated documents; Balance within 21–30 (twenty-one to thirty) days of successful installation and commissioning at the consignee's premises and acceptance by the consignee
agency commissionTHE entire 100% agency commission is paid (in equivalent non-convertible Indian rupees based on bc selling rate of exchange) after all other payments have been made to the supplier in terms of the contract

6.12.2Modes of Payment for Imported Goods

1. Statutory compliance: It should be ensured that the imports into India conform with the export-import policy in force; FEMA; FEMA (current account transactions) Rules, 2000; And directions issued by RBI under FEMA from time to time.

2. The LC route: For imported goods, payment usually happens through the letter of Credit (LC) Opened by the State bank of India or any other commercial bank As decided by the Procuring Entity.

The amount of LC should be equal to the total payable amount And be released as per the clauses mentioned above. If the LC is not opened, payment can also be made to the seller through a direct bank transfer — for which the buyer has to ensure that payment is released only after the receipt of prescribed documents.

3. LC for domestic bidders too: To have uniform payment clauses in GTE tenders for foreign and domestic bidders, the Procuring Entity May include a provision in its tender conditions — on the merits of the case, especially high-value contracts for sophisticated equipment/ machineryallowing payment through LC to domestic bidders also.

6.12.3Documents for Payment for Imported Goods

The documents needed from the supplier are to be clearly specified in the contract. The paying authority also verifies the documents received from the supplier with corresponding stipulations made in the contract before releasing the payment. Documents are specified in the Letter of Credit but usually are:

  1. Supplier's original invoice giving full details of the goods, including quantity, value, and so on;
  2. Packing list;
  3. Certificate of country of origin Of the goods — to be given by the seller, or a recognised chamber of commerce, or another agency designated by the local Government for this purpose;
  4. Quality assurance certificates:(a) certificate of pre-dispatch inspection by the purchaser's representative; Or (b) manufacturer's test certificate and guarantee;
  5. Certificate of insurance;
  6. Bill of Lading/ airway bill/ rail receipt or any other dispatch document issued by a Government agency (like the Department of Posts) or a duly authorised agency, indicating:

6.12.4Air Freight Charges and Air Freight Consolidators

goods that are required to be airlifted are to be dispatched on a 'charge forward basis'. All air freight charges shown on the relevant consignment note as chargeable to the consignee Are to be paid to the airline in rupees.

The consolidator device: Some organisations need to import sophisticated instruments, tools, and kindred goods. These are small in size and very delicate/ fragile in nature. Such goods invariably need to be airlifted — but, quite naturally, form a small part of the air cargo carried by aircraft.

For such imports, procuring entities May engage air freight consolidators, WHO consolidate the small air cargo of different customers and airlift them from one airport to another.

The hiring of airfreight consolidators' services should be done transparently, following standard principles of Public Procurement.

6.12.5Letter of Credit (LC)

1. The four parties to the LC:

The purchaser forwards a request to its bank (called the issuing bank) in their prescribed format, along with all relevant details, including an authenticated copy of the contract.

Based on this, the issuing bank opens the LC — promising to pay the specified amount to the supplier's (beneficiary's) bank based solely on the documents presented by the supplier as specified in the LC conditions, without physically ascertaining the shipment of goods.

The issuing bank arranges with a bank in the supplier's region (called the advising bank) to notify the supplier and his bank of the availability of the LC.

Since the supplier May not be comfortable with the issuing bank, it May ask a bank he trusts (called the confirming bank) TO add a guarantee to ensure payments by the issuing bank.

2. The five risks involved:

RiskDescription
A) commercial risknon-payment due to buyer's financial distress
b) global riskpolitical instability · currency fluctuations · import/ export restrictions · disruptions in international logistics
c) documentary riskdiscrepancies in submitted documents, or interpretation of documents and LC conditions by various parties involved
d) BANK RISKBANK insolvency or non-performance
e) FRAUDshipment May not be physically dispatched, OR dispatched in damaged condition or with inadequate packaging

3. The four precautions:

A) care should be taken to ensure that all details in the LC — such as product description, quantity, payment terms, documents to be produced, LD clause, and shipping terms — ARE accurate and identical to those shown in the contract, to avoid discrepancies.

B) frequent amendments can lead to delays and complications. Suppliers May use their own delays in supplies by asking for unnecessary amendments to LC (or contract).

C) provisions of uniform customs and practices for documentary credits (UCP 600) Should be adhered to while opening the LC for import into India.

D) the seller must present documents in time within the tenure of the LC To receive payment, and the documents submitted must match the LC requirements.

4. The six charges and who bears them:

ChargeBorne by
A) opening charges(including commitment fees — charged for the LC's validity period — and usance fees, if the LC allows deferred payment)the Procuring Entity
b) advising feepaid by the issuing bank to the advising bank — and is included in charges to the Procuring Entity
c) confirming bank's fee (if applicable)paid to the confirming bank by the supplier
d) extension/ amendment fee(when an LC needs to be extended or amended due to changes in delivery dates, terms, or other conditions)THE party requesting The extension or amendment (purchaser or seller)
e) retirement chargeslevied by the supplier's (beneficiary's) bank on the supplier To handle payment from the issuing bank
f) other chargesreimbursements for foreign trade law-related obligations, if any, to be borne by the party of that country.For example, if there are specific legal requirements related to foreign exchange regulations or documentation in the exporting country, the Seller may need to cover these. If there are specific taxes for foreign exchange remittances, then the purchaser may bear such charges.

5. The seven types of LC:

TypeMeaning
A) revocable LCCAN BE modified or cancelled without notice
b) irrevocable LCcannot be amended, modified, or cancelled after issue without agreement and notice to the seller. Generally, the irrevocable LC is opened, so that the supplier is fully assured of his payment on fulfilling his obligations
c) confirmed LCan intermediate bank in the supplier's country (confirming bank) adds its confirmation at the request of the seller — guaranteeing that payment would be made as per LC conditions, even if the issuing bank or seller's bank demurs
d) unconfirmed LCthere is no additional confirmation beyond the issuing bank
e) transferable LCthe seller can transfer part of the LC to another party (e.g., as a payment to his supply chain)
f) back-to-back LCAN intermediary (second beneficiary) is involved in this
g) revolving LCcovers multiple transactions over an extended period. Specifically used for repeated shipments of the same product between the same buyer (importer) and seller (exporter)

6. Deduction of Liquidated Damages (LD) under the LC:

THE delivery Schedule and LD clause (including the amount of LD) are part of the LC conditions.

If the documents submitted (inspection certificate and dispatch documents) show that these conditions of LC are violated, LD as per the LC conditions is deducted from the payment made to the supplier.

In case the delivery date of the contract is extended to take care of a delay in supply for which the supplier is responsible, THE tenure of the LC is also to be extended — BUT the expense incurred for such an extension (of LC) is to be borne by the supplier.

6.13Advance Payment

(Rule 172(1) of GFR 2017)

6.13.1The Common ConditionsGCNC

1. The governing principle and its economic rationale:

Ordinarily, payments for services rendered or supplies made should be released only after the services have been rendered or supplies made.

However, in exceptional situations where substantial funds are to be sunk by the contractor before payment becomes due — considering the lower cost of funds for the Government entity as compared to the higher cost of funds for the bidder — advance payment with safeguards (BG or Insurance Surety Bond or Letter of Credit) May be considered.

G — the two permitted situations: A) advance payment demanded by firms holding maintenance contracts for servicing of air-conditioners, computers, other costly equipment, etc.; B) advance payment demanded by firms against fabrication contracts, turn-key contracts, or supply of complicated tailor-made goods, and so on.

2. The quantum — the three ceilings:

The quantum of such advance payments should not exceed the quantum of funds to be sunk by the contractor before payment becomes due in the contract. The quantum should not generally exceed the following limits:

RecipientCeiling
Private firmsthirty (30) per cent of the contract value
a State or Central Government agency or pseforty (40) per cent of the contract value
In the case of a MAINTENANCE CONTRACTthe amount should not exceed the amount payable for six months Under the contract

in exceptional cases, the competent Authority May relax the ceilings Mentioned above, with prior concurrence of the associated/ integrated finance.

3. INTEREST-FREE ADVANCE — and the default penalty:

Since the provision of advance payment leverages the difference in interest rate As argued above, and considering the additional cost of Bank Guarantee for advances for the bidderinterest-free advance payments May be considered with the approval of Competent Authority and finance concurrence.

Where an interest-free advance is permitted, a clause in the tender enquiry and the contract May be stipulated that — if the contract is terminated due to default of the contractor — the advance payment would be deemed as an interest-bearing advance at the interest rate prevailing on the date of release of advance payment (e.g., the general provident fund — GPF — rate), plus 2%, to be compounded quarterly.

In appropriate cases, the competent authority may stipulate advance payments with suitable interest rates (e.g., the GPF rate) to be recovered along with the instalments of recovery of advance payment.

4. INSTALMENTS — the minimum-two rule: The advance payment should not be made in less than two instalments, as per the expected infusion of funds required in the contract — except in exceptional circumstances, for the reasons to be recorded. This will keep a check on contractor mis-utilisation of full advance when the contract is delayed considerably.

5. RECOVERY — the "whichever is earlier" rule: ADVANCE PAYMENTS — especially interest-free advances — should be recovered (from either running bills or from the performance/ advance payment bank guarantees) in instalments linked to milestones or specified periods — whichever is earlier.

This would ensure that even if the contractor is not executing the work or executing it at a slow pace, recovery of advance could commence — and the scope for misuse of such advance could be reduced.

6. BANK GUARANTEE — the 110% rule and its exemptions:

While making any advance payment, adequate safeguards in the form of a Bank Guarantee (or e-Bank Guarantee) of at least 110% of the advance should be obtained from the firm.

In case the advances are to be paid/ recovered in instalments, an equal number of part bgs (with proportionate amount and validity) May be taken instead of a lumpsum BG — WITH each BG released after a related recovery is made.

AN indemnity bond is not to be considered in place of a Bank Guarantee.

The two exemptions from the BG requirement:

  • No Bank Guarantee should be insisted on in case advance is being given to Central Ministry/ Department, their attached/ subordinate offices, or the autonomous bodies attached with them;
  • The BG May also not be taken wherever a contract has been placed on a CPSE on nomination basis.

7. What is NOT An advance payment — an important distinction:

"milestone/ stage payments or part payments against proof of dispatch documents should not be considered as advance payments for the purpose of this Para — as these payments are made after the sinking of funds by the contractor for achieving these milestones/ stages/ dispatches." (Rule 172(2) GFR 2017)

these should be provisioned in the tender document/ contract, including Bank Guarantee to be taken, if any, in case of milestone/ stage payments.

8. The pre-declaration Rule: Provision of advance payment should be anticipated at the procurement planning stage.

THE quantum of advance payment and related conditions should be declared in the tender documents — with the approval of Competent Authority and concurrence of associated/ integrated finance.

IF not so declared, the condition of advance payment for a particular bid should not be agreed to.

9. Documents for advance payments: Documents needed from the supplier for advance payment release are to be clearly specified in the contract. The paying authority should also verify the documents received from the supplier with corresponding stipulations made in the contract before releasing the payment.

10. Insurance — G ONLY:

IN every case where advance payment or payment against dispatch documents is to be made, or LC is to be opened, THE condition of insurance should invariably be incorporated in the terms and conditions.

Wherever necessary, the goods supplied under the contract shall be fully insured in a freely convertible currency against loss or damage incidental to manufacture or acquisition, transportation, storage and delivery.

If considered necessary, insurance may cover "All risks", including war risks and strike clauses. The amount covered should be sufficient to cover the overall expenditure incurred by the Procuring Entity for receiving the goods at the destination.

Delivery basisWho arranges and pays for marine/ air insurance
CIF/ CIP/ DDPthe supplier shall arrange and pay — making the purchaser the beneficiary
FOB/ FASmarine/ air insurance shall be the purchaser's responsibility

6.13.2Advance Payments in Works — the Three Distinct Advances [W ONLY]

A. Mobilisation Advance

1. The 10% Rule: If considered justified in certain specialised and capital-intensive works, the contract May provide for an interest-bearing mobilisation advance To be paid to the contractor exclusively for the costs of mobilisation, at 10 (ten) per cent of the contract price, on the provision by the contractor of an unconditional BG.

Such bgs shall remain effective until the advance payment has been fully repaid — but the amount thereof shall be progressively reduced by the amount repaid by the contractor, as indicated in the interim payment certificates.

2. The two instalments of 5% each:

InstalmentWhen paid
FIRST 5%ON commencement of the work And provision by the contractor of the unconditional BG in respect of the advance
second 5%ON certification by the engineer of the contractor's having achieved a financial progress of 10 (ten) per cent of the contract price — as also provision of a BG by the contractor for this part of the advance

3. Need-based: Provision of mobilisation advance should essentially be need-based. Suitable delegation of authority May be done in the organisation To take the decision for grant of the mobilisation advance — whether interest-free or interest-bearing.

4. Interest-free mobilisation advance and the time-based recovery Rule:

Interest-free mobilisation advance May also be given wherever the situation warrants in specific cases — BUT it should be clearly stipulated in the tender document.

AND its recovery should be time-based, not linked with progress of work.

This would ensure that even if the contractor is not executing the work or executing it at a slow pace, recovery of advance could commence, and scope for misuse of such advance could be reduced.

5. Part bank guarantees — one per instalment: Part 'bank guarantees' (bgs) against the mobilisation advance should be taken in as many numbers as the proposed recovery instalments, and should be equivalent to the amount of each instalment.

This would ensure that — at any point of time, even if the contractor's money on account of work done is not available with the organisationrecovery of such advance could be ensured by encashing the BG for the work supposed to be completed within a particular period of time.

6. There should be a clear stipulation of interest to be charged on delayed recoveries — either due to the late submission of bill by the contractor or any other reason, besides the reason giving rise to the encashment of BG.

7. THE amount of mobilisation advance, interest to be charged (if any), its recovery Schedule, and any other relevant detail should be explicitly stipulated in the tender document upfront.

8. Relevant format for BG should be provided in the tender document, which should be enforced strictly — and the authenticity of such bgs should also be invariably verified from the issuing bank, confidentially and independently by the organisation.

9. In case of 'Machinery and equipment advance', insurance and hypothecation to the employer should be ensured.

10. The utilisation certificate Rule: Utilisation certificate from the contractor for the mobilisation advance should be obtained. Preferably, mobilisation advance should be given in instalments — AND subsequent instalments should be released only after getting a satisfactory utilisation certificate from the contractor for the earlier instalment.

B. Plant, Machinery and Shuttering Material Advance

1. The 5% advance and its five conditions:

Another interest-bearing advance of five (5) per cent of the contract price — depending on the merits of the case — May be paid against the new key construction equipment purchased for the work and brought to the site, if so provided in the bid documents and so requested by the contractor.

The advance should normally not be more than 50 (fifty) per cent of the depreciated cost Of such plant and machinery, which should be hypothecated to the govt. Before the payment of advance is released.

This advance shall be subject to the following conditions:

  • (i) the contractor shall produce satisfactory proof of payment;
  • (ii) such equipment is considered necessary by the engineer for the works;
  • (iii) the equipment has been verified to have been brought to site;
  • (iv)the contractor gives an undertaking on stamp paper that the equipment will work only on that job And will not be removed from the site without obtaining written approval from the engineer; and
  • (v) the contractor furnishes a BG to cover the advance.

No advance shall be admissible on equipment purchased under a hire-purchase scheme/ financing arrangement, or on hired equipment.

2. Rate of interest: The rate of interest shall be stipulated in the bid documents (say 10 (ten) per cent per annum), or as May be notified by the procuring agency from time to time.

3. Repayment: The repayment of advances shall be done through proportionate percentage deductions from running bill (periodic/ interim payment). THE time of commencement of repayment, rate of deductions from interim payments, and time by which the advance should be fully repaid Will be as specified in the contract.

4. The misappropriation consequence: All advances shall be used by the contractor exclusively for mobilisation expenditure, including the acquisition of construction-related plant and equipment.

Should the contractor misappropriate any portion of the advance, it shall become due and payable immediately, and no further advance will be made to the contractor thereafter. In such cases, the contractor shall also be liable for appropriate action under the contract.

C. Secured Advance Against Material Brought to Site

1. The 75% Rule and the 90-DAY condition:

Secured advance on the security of materials — which are not combustible, fragile or perishable in naturebrought to the site but not yet incorporated in the works Will be made up to:

— subject to the condition that their quantities are not excessive and shall be used within a period of 90 (ninety) days, and subject to other stipulations in the contract.

The safeguards:

  • The contractor will be required to sign an indenture bond, hypothecating the goods to the Procuring Entity, and also be responsible for their safe custody.
  • Before the advance is released, the Procuring Entity May inspect the site to ensure that the contractor has safeguarded the materials against pilferage and deterioration.
  • It May be ensured that the contractor has not taken any loan/ limit from banks against hypothecation of the materials against which the secured advance is claimed. AN undertaking in this regard May also be taken from the contractor.

2. The "paid stock only" Rule:

Generally, as per the provisions of the contracts, the contractors are required to submit proof of cost of materials and the delivery of material at site while claiming such advances.

THE stock register should be maintained from the commencement of the contract And — unless otherwise prescribed in the contracts — the stock so considered for advance should generally be only paid stock (and not brought on credit).

Where the materials are supplied from a captive source of the contractor, THE reasonableness of the valuation of such materials May be ensured.

3. The 120-DAY absolute recovery Rule:

The advance will be repaid from each succeeding running bill (periodic/ interim payment) to the extent materials for which advance has been previously paid have been incorporated into the works.

6.14Prices, Firm Price and Variable Price

6.14.1Prices and the Bar on Undue Profiteering [G ONLY]

1. Independent pricing: The prices should be arrived at independently — without restricting competition, any consultation, communication, or agreement with any other bidder or competitor.

2. Without undue profiteering — the price ceilings:

A) the price quoted by the bidder shall not be higher than the controlled price fixed by law for the goods, if any.

Where there is no controlled price, it shall not exceed the prices or contravene the norms for fixation of prices, if any, laid down by Government.

Where the Government has fixed no such prices or norms, it shall not exceed the price appearing in any agreement, if any, relating to price regulation by any industry.

B) the disclosure obligation and its consequence: If the price quoted is higher than the controlled price, the bidder shall specifically mention this fact in his bid, giving reasons for quoting a higher price(s). IF HE fails to do so or makes any misstatement, it shall be lawful for the Procuring Entity either:

  • TO revise the price at any stage to bring it in conformity with the sub-clause above; or*
  • TO terminate the contract for default As per the contract, and avail all the remedies available therein — in addition to other punitive actions for violation of Code of Integrity.

3. Price Components: The price Schedule should show all the specified components of prices. The price components for goods offered from India And those offered from abroad should be indicated separately In the applicable price schedules.

  • The components should include, as applicable: GST, transportation, insurance, and price of incidental works/ services as mentioned in the Schedule of Requirements.
  • For goods offered from abroad, the price components (indicating the currency, in the case of GTE) should include: Customs duty, marine insurance, freight, and agency commission, as applicable.

6.14.2Fixed Price — the Threshold Divergence

ManualRule
G GOODS · C Consultancy · NC Non-consultancyshort-term contracts where the delivery period does not extend beyond 12 (twelve) months Should normally be concluded on a firm and fixed price (and not subject to variation on any account) by inviting tenders accordingly
W WORKSshort-term contracts where the delivery/ completion period does not extend beyond 18 (eighteen) months Should normally be concluded with a firm and fixed price

6.14.3Variable Price and the Price Variation Clause (PVC)

1. When a PVC May be provided:

G, C, NC:In tenders with deliveries longer than 12 (twelve) months, a Price Variation Clause (PVC) May be provided to protect the purchaser's interests — particularly for high-value (more than rupees three crore) procurements.

However, even for shorter deliveries or lower value, the PVC May be stipulated for items with inputs (raw material, labour, ETC.) prone to short-term price volatility — especially for critical or high-value items/ services.

W adds the competitive rationale: *"provision of price variation … will deal with rise and fall of the prices in construction materials, labour and other key inputs. … the provision of price variation clauses enables contractors to factor this reduced risk and quote more competitive prices."*

2. The "provide your own formula" Rule: Where it is decided to conclude the contract with a variable price, an appropriate clause incorporating a suitable price variation formula (to take care of the changes in the input cost of labour, material, and fuel/ power Components) should be provided in the tender documents.

3. Sources of indices and weighting: The variations are to be calculated periodically (usually quarterly) By using indices published by:

suitable weights are to be assigned to the applicable elements — i.e., Fixed overheads and various applicable inputs (material/ fuel/ labour — for which reliable indices are available).

If the production of goods/ delivery of services/ works needs more than one raw material, the input cost of material May be further sub-divided into various categories of material, for which cost indices are published.

4. The twelve essential elements of a PVC(common to all four, with minor wording variations):

I) base date & time lag: The price agreed upon should specify the base date — that is, the month and year to which the contract/ bid price is linked — to enable variations to be calculated with reference to the price indices prevailing in that month and year. This base date should be a few weeks/ months (the period is called time-lag) prior to the last date of submission of bids, when the last published price indices would be available. Time lag applies both for the base date and the date of supply/ delivery date, AND must be specified in the tender documents.

ii) ignorable variation: The price variation formula must also stipulate a minimum percentage of variation of the contract price, only above which the price variation will be admissible.

iii) inordinate variation — the ceiling and the frustration route:

In rare cases, prices May go up to such an extent that it May render the contract unviable for either party, thus frustrating the contract. Therefore, the Price Variation Clause should provide for a ceiling — a percentage per annum, or an overall ceiling, or both (say 20%/ 25% of the original price) — on price variations, beyond which the price variation would be capped at this level. As soon as it comes to light that price variations are likely to go beyond this ceiling — and if the supplier/ contractor is not agreeable to the price variation being capped — HE MAY notify the purchaser under 'frustration of contract' provisions in the tender document/ clause, for short-closing the contract.

iv) no PVC on advance/ stage payments: Where advance or stage payments are made, there should be a further stipulation that no price variations will be admissible on such portions of the price, after the dates of such payment.

V) LD is calculated on the varied price: Where deliveries are accepted beyond the scheduled delivery date, subject to levy of Liquidated Damages as provided in the contract — the LD (if a percentage of the price) will be recoverable on the price as varied by the operation of the PVC.

vi) the asymmetric default Rule — the single most important PVC provision:

vii) price variation May be allowed beyond the original scheduled delivery date — BY specific alteration of that date through an amendment to the contract — in cases of force Majeure or defaults by Government.

viii) import/ duty disclosure — W Only: Where contract execution depends on imported (subject to customs duty and foreign exchange fluctuations) and/ or locally sourced and/ or locally manufactured (subject to excise duty and other duties and taxes) Goods/ works/ services — the percentage and element of duties and taxes included in the price should be specifically stated, along with the selling rate of foreign exchange element taken into account in the calculation of the price of the imported item.

ix) the clause should also contain the mode and terms of payment of the price variation admissible.

X) the downward-benefit provision: The buyer should ensure a provision in the contract for the benefit of any reduction in the price in terms of the PVC being passed on to him.

xi) An illustrative PVC clause is available at:G Annexure 18 · W Annexure 5 · C Annexure 16 · NC Annexure 10.

xii) the final-payment certificate — W ONLY:

5. The statutory-regulation adjustment — W ONLY:

  • To the extent that full compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the contractor is not covered by the provisions of the contract, THE unit rates and prices included in the contract shall be deemed to include amounts to cover the contingencies of such uncovered portion of rise or fall of costs.
  • IF any statutory regulations or bye-laws come into force after submission of the bids, which cause additional or reduced cost to the contractor In the execution of the contract — such statutory additional or reduced cost (except which are covered in cost indices) shall be added to or deducted from the contract price.

6.15Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) [G ONLY]

1. The two triggers:

In case of domestic tender contracts Involving:

  • Substantial import content (say > 25% of the total price), AND
  • a long delivery period (exceeding one year from the date of the contract)

— an appropriate exchange Rate Variation (ERV) clause May be formulated by the Procuring Entity in consultation with its associated/ integrated finance, as needed, and incorporated in the tender enquiry document.

In that clause, the bidders are to be asked to indicate:

  • THE import content and the currency(ies) used for calculating the value of import content(s) In their total quoted price;
  • THE base exchange rate for each such foreign currency Used for converting the foreign exchange content into Indian rupees; And
  • THE extent of foreign Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) risk they are willing to bear.

2. The base date, the variation window, and the 2.5% band:

ElementRule
Base dateTHE deadline of bid submission — OR seven days prior to it (the purchase organisation is to adopt a suitable date)
variation windowbetween the above base date and the date of remittance to the foreign principal, OR the mid-point of manufacture of the foreign component (the purchase organisation is to choose the appropriate date)
applicable exchange rateaccording to the "Bill currency selling" Exchange rate as quoted by a source as specified — if not specified, authorised exchange bankers approved by RBI — in the tender document on the dates in question
the dead bandno variation in price in this regard will be allowed if the variation in the rate of exchange remains within the limit of plus/ minus 2.5 per cent (or any other percentage fixed by the Procuring Entity)

ERV shall be applicable only for components used to manufacture supplied goods imported after the contract date.

3. Who bears it — and the asymmetric default Rule:

ANY increase or decrease in the landed price of import content (including customs duty) By reason of the variation in the rate of exchange shall be charged to the buyer's account during the original delivery period.

4. The four documents for claiming ERV: A) a bill of ERV claim enclosing the working sheet; B) banker's certificate/ debit advice detailing the foreign exchange paid and exchange rate; C) copies of the import order placed on the supplier; D) supplier's invoice for the relevant import order.

6.16Statutory Taxes / Duties / Levies

6.16.1Goods and Services Tax (GST)

1. GST registration status and GSTIN (the 15-digit registration number) — the nine rules:

A) all bidders should ensure that they are GST compliant, and that their quoted tax structure/ rates are as per the GST Act/ Rules.

B) bidder should be registered under GST And furnish their GSTIN number and GST registration certificate In their offer — unless they are specifically exempted from registration Under a specific notification/ circular/ section/ Rule issued by statutory authorities.

C) multiple verticals: If the bidder has multiple business verticals in a State and has separate registrations for each vertical, THE GSTIN of each vertical concerned with the supply and service involved — as per the scope of the Schedule of requirements and price Schedule — shall be quoted.

D) multiple states: If the supply/ service is from multiple states, the bidder should mention GST registration numbers for each State separately.

E) composition scheme: If the bidder has opted for a composition levy under section 10 of CGST, he should declare the fact while bidding, along with GSTIN and GST registration certificate.

f) exemption from registration — and the Reverse Charge Mechanism:

If a bidder is not liable to take GST registration (i.e., having turnover below threshold), he shall submit an undertaking/ indemnification against tax liability. The bidder claiming exemption shall submit a valid certificate from a practising chartered accountant (ca)/ cost accountant with the unique document identification number (din), to the effect that the bidder fulfils all conditions prescribed in the notification exempting him from registration.

Such bidder/ dealer shall not charge any GST and/ or GST cess in the bill/ invoice. In such a case, applicable GST shall be deposited under reverse charge mechanism (rcm) — or otherwise as per GST Act — by the Procuring Entity directly to concerned authorities. Bidder should note that his offer would be loaded with the payable GST under the rcm. Further, the bidder should notify and submit to the Procuring Entity within 15 days of becoming liable for registration under GST.

G) bidders must also consider the benefits of input tax credit Under the GST legislation, as amended from time to time, on input goods/ capital goods/ input services While quoting the prices.

H) the jurisdictional assessing officer Rule: In their bids, the bidders shall indicate the details of their GST jurisdictional assessing officers (designation, address, email id). In case of a contract award, the purchaser shall immediately forward a copy of the loa/ purchase order to the jurisdictional assessing officer Mentioned in the bidder's bid.

I) the Procuring Entity's state-wise gstins shall be indicated in tender documents.

2. HSN code and GST rate — the four rules:

a)if provided in the tender document, the HSN (harmonized system of nomenclature) code for the goods is only indicative. The bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that they quote the correct HSN code and corresponding GST rate.

B) the separate-disclosure Rule: As per the GST Act, the bid and contract must show the GST tax rates (and GST cess if applicable) and GST amount explicitly and separately from the bid/ contract price (exclusive of GST).

So, if a bidder asks for GST (and GST Cess if applicable) to be paid extra, the rate and nature of such applicable taxes should be shown separately.

Bidders should quote 'GST' if payable extra on the total basic rate of each cost element, AND quote GST in '%' inclusive of cess.

C) if the price is stated to include GST, the bidder must declare the current GST rate (and GST cess, as applicable) included in the price.

D) the blank-column Rule — a trap for bidders: If GST, other taxes, or duties are not specified, or the column is left blank In the price Schedule, it shall be presumed that no such tax/ levy is applicable or payable by the Procuring Entity. No Statutory Variation in GST shall be paid in such a case.

3. Refund from supplier: Sometimes, the supplier — after claiming and receiving reimbursements for GST from the purchaserapplies to the concerned authorities for refunds, on genuine grounds, of certain portions of such duties and taxes paid by it, and receives the allowable refunds. Such refunds contain the purchaser's share also (Out of the payments already made by the purchaser to that supplier). The tender enquiry document and the contract are to contain suitable provisions for obtaining such refunds from the supplier.

4. The three statutory duties/ taxes/ levies to be entirely borne by the bidder — including any statutory variations thereon, for which the Procuring Entity would not be responsible:

A) personal and corporate tax: Bidder shall bear all personal/ corporate taxes imposed on owners/ company/ joint venture/ subcontractors or their employees.

B) taxes on sub-contractors, vendors: Bidder shall bear all taxes — including GST — as May be imposed on the contractor or supply-chain (sub-contractors, vendors, etc.).

C) duties/ taxes on raw materials: The Procuring Entity is not liable for any claim from the contractor on account of fresh imposition and/ or increase (including statutory increase) of GST, customs duty, or other duties on raw materials and/ or components used directly in the manufacture of the contracted goods, taking place during the pendency of the contractunless such liability is expressly agreed to in terms of the contract.

5. Applicability to imported goods/ services: Following the implementation of GST, the import of commodities shall not be subject to erstwhile applicable duties LIKE safeguard duty, education cess, basic customs duty, anti-dumping duty, ETC. All these supplementary customs duties are subsumed under GST.

If imported into India, the supply of commodities, services, or both shall be considered as supply under inter-state commerce/ trade, and shall attract integrated tax (IGST). THE IGST rate and GST cess shall be applicable on the 'customs assessable value' plus the 'basic customs duty applicable thereon'.

6.16.2Customs Duty on Imported Goods [G ONLY]

1. The disclosure and the import-in-whose-name Rule: Regarding imported goods, the bidder shall specify the rate and the total amount of customs duty payable thereon. Bidder shall also indicate the corresponding Indian tariff classification (ITC-HS) Applicable for the goods. Any material imported directly from the supplier or manufacturer should be under the name of the Procuring Entity. In this regard, all formalities will be completed by the Procuring Entity by engaging a customs house agent (CHA) and bearing the cost thereof.

2. The three customs-duty exemptions: The Government has allowed exemption from payment of customs duty on certain types of goods for use by the following organisations: a) scientific and technical instruments imported by research institutes; B) hospital equipment imported by Government hospitals; C) consumable goods imported by a public-funded research institution or a university.

3. The two certificates required: However, to avail of such exemptions, the organisations are required to produce — at the appropriate time — :

4. The MOOWR scheme 2019:

THE manufacturing and other operations in a warehouse regulations (MOOWR) scheme 2019 Was introduced by the Central board of indirect taxes and customs (CBIC) TO promote India as a global manufacturing hub and bolster the "Make in India" initiative.

This scheme allows importers to bring raw materials and capital goods into the country without paying customs duties.

These imported materials can then be utilised for manufacturing and other operations within private bonded warehouses. Under the MOOWR Scheme: a) import duty is deferred When raw materials and capital goods are imported into India; B) if these materials are used for exports, THE deferred duty is exempt; C) if the inputs are utilised for goods sold in the domestic market (i.e., domestic tariff area), import duty for such inputs used for domestic clearance must be paid; D) import duty on capital goods is paid if they are cleared for the domestic market.

5. THE relevant contemporary instructions covering these aspects should be incorporated in the tender enquiry document and the resultant contract.

6.16.3Deduction of Income Tax, etc., from Payments

If applicable under relevant tax laws and Rules, the Procuring Entity shall deduct from all payments and deposit required taxes to respective authorities.

6.16.4Statutory Variation Clause

Unless otherwise stated in the contract, statutory Variation in applicable GST rateonly during the period from the date of submission of the tender to the date of acceptance of the tender (that is, placement of the contract), and during the original/ re-fixed delivery period of the contractshall be borne by the Procuring Entity.

The benefit of any reduction in the GST rate must be passed on to the Procuring Entity during the original and extended delivery period.

however, GST rate amendments shall be considered for the quoted HSN code only, against documentary evidence — provided such an increase in GST rates is after the tender submission date.

However, the statutory Variation shall not be applicable for any misquotation of the HSN number or incorrect GST rate by the bidder.

6.17Incoterms 2020 — Terms of Delivery [G ONLY]

1. The eleven INCOTERMS — seven for any mode, four for sea/ inland waterway:

A. Rules for Any Mode of Transport (Seven)

IncotermApplicable to
EXW — ex-works(named place of delivery)the seller makes the goods available at their premises or another named place
FCA — free carrier(named place of delivery)the seller delivers the goods — cleared for export — at a named place to a carrier or to another party nominated by the buyer
CPT — carriage paid to(named place of delivery)earlier C&F — Cost and Freightthe seller is responsible for export clearance and freight costs for carriage to the named place of destination
CIP — carriage and insurance paid to (named place of delivery)in addition to CPT responsibilities, the seller is required to obtain *insurance for the goods while in transit for 110% of the contract value under institute cargo clauses (a) of the institute of London underwriters‌
DAP — delivered at place(named place of delivery)the seller delivers the goods — ready for unloading — at the named place of destination
DPU — delivered at place unloaded (named place of delivery)earlier DAT — Delivered At Terminalin addition to DAP responsibilities, the seller is required to unload the goods At the named place of destination
DDP — delivered duty paid(named place of delivery)in addition to DAP responsibilities, the seller is required to clear the goods through customs and pay import duties and taxes

B. Rules for Sea and Inland Waterway Transport (Four)

IncotermApplicable to
FAS — free alongside shipalongside the buyer's vessel at the named port of shipment, the seller is to clear the goods for export. However, if the parties wish the buyer To clear the goods for export, explicit wording should be added to the contract
FOB — free on-boardseller to arrange for export clearance and deliver goods on board a vessel that is to be designated by the buyer
CFR — cost and freightin addition to FOB responsibilities, the seller pays for the carriage of the goods up to the named port of destination
CIF — cost, insurance and freightin addition to CFR responsibilities, the seller is required to obtain *insurance for the goods while in transit for 110% of the contract value under institute cargo clauses (a)*

2. History and the title-of-goods principle:

IN USE SINCE 1936, INCOTERMS have been last revised in 2020. Out of the 11 INCOTERMS options, seven apply to all modes of transportation, whereas four apply only to sea and inland waterway transportation.

Incoterms rules describe the tasks, costs and risks involved in the delivery of goods from the seller to the buyer.

normally, unless otherwise defined, the title of goods passes from the supplier to the purchaser in accordance with the terms of delivery (for, CFR, among others). The terms of delivery, therefore, specify when the ownership and title of goods pass from the seller to the buyer, along with the associated risks.

The four allocations made by terms of delivery: A) control and care of the goods while in transit; B) carrier selection, transfers, and related issues; C) costs of freight, insurance, taxes, duties and forwarding fees; D) documentation, problem resolution and other related issues.

3. The spectrum: The options range from one extreme — the buyer takes full responsibility from the point of departure (EXW) — to the other extreme — the seller is responsible all the way through delivery to the buyer's location (DDP)(Annexure 19 of the Goods Manual).

4. The four special definitions within INCOTERMS:

TermSpecial meaning
DeliveryTHE point in the transaction where the risk of loss or damage to the goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer
FREEseller has an obligation to deliver the goods to a named place for transfer to a carrier
carrierany person who, in a contract of carriage, is nominated by seller/ buyer for transport by any mode
to clear for exportTO file the shipper's export declaration and get an export permit

5. The Indian national-transport terms: Within national transportation, certain terms have assumed acceptance due to usage:

  • Free on rail (for)* has two versions: *For/ dispatching* and *for/ destination(the buyer is responsible from the nominated point mentioned till arrival point, as in DAP above);
  • On similar lines, infrequently, free on truck (fot) is also used in road transport.

6.18Recovery of Public Money from the Supplier's/ Contractor's/ Consultant's/ Service Provider's Bill

Sometimes, requests are received from a different Ministry/ Department FOR withholding some payment from a supplier/ contractor out of the payment or securities due to it against a contract.

Such requests are to be examined by the Procuring Entity (which has received the request) on the merits of the case for further action.

6.19Payment against Time-Barred Claims

1. The three-year Rule: Ordinarily, all claims against the Government are time-barred after a period of three years, calculated from the date when the payment falls dueunless the payment claim has been under correspondence.

2. The admission-of-liability exception: However, the limitation is saved if there is an admission of liability to pay — and a fresh period of limitation starts from the time such admission is made.

3. The procedure: THE drill to be followed while dealing with time-barred claims will be decided by the Procuring Entity concerned, in consultation with the paying authority.

4. The absolute bar on the paying authority: The paying authority is to ensure that no payment against such a time-barred claim is made till a decision has been taken in this regard by the ca.

Appendix to Chapter 6 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 6 · W: CHAPTER 5
2Chapter titleIDENTICAL in all four — the second and last such chapter
3Issuing banks for Bid Securityg: *Commercial banks · W: *SCHEDULED BANKS* (s.2(e) RBI Act 1934), with the footnote that a BG *MERELY ADVISED* is not acceptable in lieu of being *CONFIRMED
4Consequence under a Bid Securing DeclarationG/C/NC: bidder shall be *SUSPENDED · W: bidder shall be *DEBARRED
5Who is EXEMPT from EMDG: *MSEs AND DPIIT-recognised Start-ups · W: *only DPIIT-recognised Start-ups
6Scope of the registered-bidder EMD exemptionG: valid for trade group and monetary value · W: valid for monetary value only
7Upper ceiling on Bid Security in larger tendersW ONLY
8performance Security quantumG: 3–5% · W: 3–10% · NC: 3–5%(NC expressly notes "3 to 10% for Works")
9Lower percentage from the 3–10% band for tenders > Rs 50 croreW ONLY
10Rs 75 lakh / Rs 3 crore illustrative ceiling tableG + NC
11"…or dispense with it" — power to waive performance security entirelync only
12Threshold below which Performance Security not neededG: Not necessary up to Rs 50 lakh (printed as "Rs. 50 (twenty-five) lakh" — a source typo) · nc: May not be insisted upon up to Rs 50 lakh · W: no threshold
13OEM in whose favour PAC issued — exempt from Performance SecurityG + NC(absent from W, consistent with Works having no PAC mode)
14Validity beyond completion of obligationsG/NC: including warranty obligations · W: including defect liability period (DLP)/ warranty
15"Full performance security should be forfeited even IF the Contractor has PARTIALLY EXECUTED the work"G ONLY
16Retention of part of Performance Guarantee from progressive billsG: expressly "not acceptable" for goods · W: this IS the Security Deposit/ Retention Money regime
17Multi-year proportionate reduction of Performance SecurityG: framed for Rate Contracts, 2–3 years · C/NC: framed for service contracts of 5–7 years or more, with the working-capital rationale
18JV — BG in proportion to participationW + NC
19Replacement of existing BGs with ISB/ e-BGW + NC
20Security Deposit/ retention money (5% of each running bill; two-stage replacement; two-halves release)W ONLY
21Insurance Surety Bond full text (three parties; 14-day/ 45-day rule)G ONLY(others cross-refer)
22Electronic Bank Guarantee full text (NeSL, UIN, 24/7, verification without issuing bank)G ONLY(others cross-refer)
23Warranty Bank Guarantee (10% of value; no warranty clause for non-capital goods or capital goods up to Rs 1 lakh)G ONLY
24BG confirmation channel includes the official email-id of the bankW ONLY
25Insurances and indemnities; Indemnity Bond under s.124 Contract Act; "a BG is safer than an indemnity bond"W ONLY
26Price elements driven by INPUT vs OUTPUT admeasurementnc only
27Payment to the supplier's bank on endorsement + irrevocable power of attorneyG ONLY
28Ten payment obligations incl. MSME 45-day rule and statutory tax certificatesG ONLY
29VARIATIONS; variations register; MEASUREMENT BOOKS and e-MBs; Interim Payment CertificateW ONLY
30DELAY-IN-PAYMENT TIMELINES — 75% within 10 working days; balance within 28; explanation within 3; interest at GPF rate beyond 30 working days; final payment within 3 monthsW ONLY
31Acceptance for payment of servicesc: By the *Procuring Entity · nc: By the *ultimate user
32Terms of Payment for DOMESTIC GOODS (the four patterns) and for imported goods; LC; Air Freight ConsolidatorsG ONLY
33Advance payment ceilings — 30% private / 40% Govt agency or PSE / 6 months for maintenance contracts; 110% BG; two-instalment rule; GPF+2% compounded quarterly on defaultG + C + NC
34MOBILISATION ADVANCE (10% in two 5% instalments; time-based recovery if interest-free; part BGs per instalment; utilisation certificates)W ONLY
35Plant, machinery and shuttering advance (5%; not more than 50% of depreciated cost; five conditions; stamp-paper undertaking; no advance on hired/ hire-purchase equipment)W ONLY
36Secured advance against material at site (75% of invoice or BOQ value whichever less; 90-day use; indenture bond; Paid stock only; 120-day absolute recovery)W ONLY
37fixed-price thresholdg/c/nc: *12 months · w: *18 months
38Undue profiteering / MRP ceiling / controlled price disclosureG ONLY
39PVC weightages include POL (Petroleum, Oils and Lubricants)W ONLY
40PVC element on import/ excise duty disclosure and FX selling rateW ONLY
41The final-payment "no decrease in indices" undertaking and the vigilance-about-downward-variation dutyW ONLY
42Relaxing the PVC cap where short-closing is not in the Procuring Entity's interestG + C
43Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) — 25% import content, >1 year delivery, ±2.5% dead band, four claim documentsG ONLY
44GST — full nine-rule registration regime, HSN/ rate rules, refund-from-supplier, three bidder-borne taxesG(fullest); C/W/NC carry shorter versions
45CUSTOMS DUTY, the three exemptions, the two certificates, and the MOOWR Scheme 2019G ONLY
46Statutory Variation Clause reproduced in full with the "re-fixed delivery period" noteC + NC(G and W cross-refer to their contract-management chapters)
47INCOTERMS 2020 — all eleven terms, the title-of-goods principle, the four special definitions, FOR/ FOTG ONLY
48Recovery of Public Money — section titleG: Suppliers' · W: Contractor's · C: Consultant's · NC: Service Provider's
49Payment against Time-Barred Claims — three-year rule, admission-of-liability exception, no payment till CA decidesCOMMON to all four — and the closing section of the chapter in every Manual

end of Chapter 6

Chapter 7 — Part a

Shortlisting, the Evaluation Committee, and Preliminary Examination

Part IShortlisting, Committees and Preliminary Examination

Merging: Goods Ch. 7 (Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract) · Works Ch. 6 (Evaluation of Bids and Award of Work) · Consultancy Ch. 7 (Shortlisting of Consultants, EoI) and Ch. 8 (RfP Evaluation and Award of Contract) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 7 (Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract)

Structural Warnings for Students

1. Three different Chapter numbers for the same block:

ManualChapterTitle
G GoodsChapter 7Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract
W WorksChapter 6Evaluation of Bids and Award of Work
C ConsultancyChapter 8RfP Evaluation and Award of Contract
NC Non-ConsultancyChapter 7Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract

Why consultancy is one Chapter ahead: The Consultancy Manual inserts an entire Chapter 7 — shortlisting of consultants, Expression of Interest (EoI) before its evaluation chapter. That chapter has NO counterpart in any other Manual and is reproduced in full at para 7.1 below.

2. The committee is different in consultancy:

ManualEvaluating body
G, W, NCtender Committee (TC) — also called Tender Evaluation Committee (TEC) in some organisations
Cconsultancy Evaluation Committee (CEC)

3. Because of the volume (423 KB across the four Manuals), this chapter is issued in two parts:

  • PART A (this document) — Shortlisting/ EoI · Bid Evaluation Process · Composition and Role of the Committee · Dissent, Independence and Confidentiality · Timely Processing · Extension of Bid Validity · Lack of Competition · Committee Report · Preliminary Examination.
  • PART B — Techno-commercial Evaluation · Evaluation of Quality (Technical Proposals) · Financial Evaluation · lCS/ QCBS/ SSS/ FBS · Reasonableness of Prices · Abnormally Low Bids · Cartel Formation · Negotiations · Cancellation and Re-tender · Award of Contract · Audit Trails · Risks and Mitigations.

Concordance for Chapter 7 — Part A

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
7.1Shortlisting of Consultants — EoICh. 7 entire
7.2Bid Evaluation Process — importance7.1-16.1.18.1.17.1.1
7.3Evaluation in Different Tendering Systems(in 7.1)6.1.28.1.27.1.2
7.4Preparation and Vetting of Comparative Statement7.26.1.38.1.37.1.3
7.5The Stages of Evaluation6.1.48.1.47.1.4
7.6Contacting Procuring Entity during evaluation7.3.66.1.58.1.57.1.5
7.7Composition of the Committee; SoPP7.1-2, 7.1-36.2.18.2.17.2.1
7.8Role of the Committee7.1-2-c6.2.28.2.27.2.2
7.9Handling Dissent among the Committee7.6.126.2.38.2.37.2.3
7.10Independence, Impartiality, Confidentiality, No COI7.6.136.2.48.2.47.2.4
7.11Timely Processing of Tenders7.6.16.2.58.2.57.2.5
7.12Extension of Bid/ Tender Validity Period7.6.26.2.68.2.67.2.6
7.13Consideration of Lack of Competition7.6.106.2.78.2.77.2.7
7.14Committee Recommendations/ Report7.6.146.2.88.2.87.2.8
7.15Preliminary Examination7.36.38.37.3.1

7.1 Shortlisting of Consultants — Expression of Interest (EoI) [C ONLY]

7.1.1Basic Considerations

1. Why two stages are necessary: Due to the inherent complexities of evaluation of physically non-measurable scope and quality standards of consultancy proposals, IT IS too time-consuming and expensive for the Procuring Entity to invite — as well as for the consultancy firms to prepare — and evaluate proposals from all consultants who want to compete.

Therefore, procurement of consultancy is done in a two-stage process.

2. The first stage: The qualified firms with requisite experience, technical and financial capabilities — who can be trusted to deliver the required services at the desired level of quality — ARE shortlisted transparently. This shortlisting is done through the expression of Interest (EoI) process.

adequate time should be allowed for getting responses from interested consultants. The Procuring Entity shall make available copies of the EoI document to the interested consultants on its website and e-procurement portal (GeM/ CPPP).

3. The second stage: In the second stage — request for proposals (RfP) — proposals containing technical and financial bids Are invited from such shortlisted bidders. Selection of the winning bidder is based on the quality of the proposal and, where appropriate, on the cost of services To be provided.

7.1.2The Four Modes of EoI

A. Open Tender Enquiry (OTE) — Rule 183(ii) of GFR 2017

For procurement above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, shortlisting is done in an openly advertised competitive (OTE mode) shortlisting process called Expression of Interest (EoI) — giving equal opportunity to all interested bidders To be considered for shortlisting.

Under EoI, the "Request for Expression of Interest" (REoI) is advertised on the Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) at www.eprocure.gov.in AND ON Government E-marketplace (GeM).

An organisation having its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website. The advertisements should give the complete web address from where the bidding documents can be downloaded.

A complete ToR should be ready before requesting EoI.

Attention of known reputed consultants May also be separately drawn Wherever possible.

The advertisement must include, among other things:

B. Global Tender Enquiry (GTE)

in case it is felt that likely consultants May not be available in India, the EoI process May be done on global Tender Enquiry (GTE) process — BY sending REoI notice to foreign embassies in India and Indian embassies in relevant countries.

C. Limited Tender Enquiry (LTE) — Rule 183(i) of GFR 2017

In procurements of consultancy services below Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, shortlisting is done without a formal published Expression of Interest — akin to a limited Tender Enquiry (LTE) process.

The three-step procedure:

  1. To start with, the preparation of a long list of potential consultants May be done on the basis of formal or informal enquiries FROM: Other ministries or departments or organisations involved in similar activities · chambers of commerce & industry · association of consultancy firms, etc.
  2. The Procuring Entity should scrutinise the preliminary long list AND shortlist the prima facie eligible and capable contractors From the long list.
  3. The number of consultants in this moderated long-list should not be less than three. In case sufficient consultants cannot be located, then the responses May be called from a lesser number of consultants — but not less than three in any case, after taking ca's approval.

The panel device: To smoothen this shortlisting for projects below Rs. 50 lakh, procuring entities who do frequent procurement of consultancy services May consider preparation of a panel of qualified consultants, after evaluation of their credentials — on the lines of registration of vendors in procurement of goods.

IF THE complexity of the project so justifies, A formal EoI May be advertised even for procurements below Rs. 50 lakh, with the approval of ca.

D. Special Limited Tender Enquiry (SLTE) — Rule 162 of GFR 2017

LTE mode for EoI — even for values higher than Rs. 50 lakh, where normally OTE should have been done — is permissible in certain exceptional circumstances.

Powers to sanction procurement on LTE basis in such exceptional cases May be laid down in SoPP, based on a certificate of urgency signed by the indentor.

This mode has the merit of being quicker, but VfM obtained May be less than in case of OTE; Hence it should be restricted to the following four situations: A) the Competent Authority certifies that there is an existing or prospective urgency for operational or technical requirements, and any additional expenditure involved by not procuring through advertised tender enquiry is justified in view of urgency. The Ministry/ Department should also put on record the nature of the urgency and reasons why the procurement could not be anticipated earlier. b) THE sources of supply are definitely known, and the possibility of fresh source(s) beyond those being tapped is remote. c) THERE ARE sufficient reasons, to be recorded in writing by the Competent Authority, indicating that it will not be in public interest To procure the services through advertised tender enquiry. D) Government policy designates procurement from specific agencies.

7.1.3Evaluation of the REoI

A. General Norms

B. Evaluation of Responsiveness and Eligibility

1. ONLY substantively responsive eois Shall be evaluated for shortlisting. A substantively responsive EoI is complete and conforms to the REoI document's essential terms and conditions.

2. The pass/ fail Rule: The Procuring Entity shall determine whether the consultants are eligible as per laid-down eligibility criteria. The eligibility evaluation shall be on a "pass" or "fail" basis. A consultant must achieve a "pass" on all the criteria to proceed to the next step. Any consultant not achieving a 'pass' in any of the eligibility criteria shall be rejected as non-responsive.

C. Evaluation of Qualification — the Nine Rules

1. The Procuring Entity shall evaluate the consultants for shortlisting, inter alia, based on their past experience of handling general and similar consultancy assignments, and financial capability of the firm.

2. No borrowed credentials: The determination shall not consider the qualifications of other firms — such as the consultant's subsidiaries, parent entities, affiliates, or any other entity different from the consultant. Assignments completed by the consultant's individual experts working privately or through other consulting firmscannot be claimed as the relevant experience of the consultant, or that of the consultant's partners or sub-consultants.

3. The Procuring Entity reserves the right to waive minor deviations in the qualification criteria, if they do not materially affect the capability of a consultant to perform the contract.

4. Key experts are not evaluated at EoI stage — and the reason: The qualification and experience of key experts are not included in the shortlisting criteria but shall be evaluated at the RfP stage.

5. In case a particular certification/ licence is required To perform the assignment, that May also be included in eligibility or qualification criteria.

6. The suggested qualification criteria table and weightages:

Criteria / Sub-criteriaSuggested ValuesSub-criteria weightCriteria weight
Criteria 1 — general and similar experience(Bidders providing Consultancy services for at least the specified period and having completed the specified volume of general and similar consultancy assignments during the specified period)70%
Similar assignmentsdefine based on value, general and specific sector of work, region, key activities/ methodologies/ technologies etc.
Consultants must have at least α years' experience in Consultancy Servicesα = 720%
During the last α years, Consultancy Assignments completed or substantially completed (at least γ payments received) should be at least βα = 7 · γ = 80% · β = 750%
Out of the Consultancy Assignments mentioned above, δ should be similar assignmentsδ = 230%
criteria 2 — financial capability(Overall financial strength of the consultant in terms of turnover, profitability, and cash flow — liquid assets — situation)30%
turnover:Minimum average annual turnover of at least Rs. θ Crores, at least κ of which should be from Consultancy Service Contracts (total payments received for contracts in progress or completed) within the last α yearsθ = 200% of the value of assignment · κ = 50% · α = 770%
financial viability — net worth: The Net Worth of the Bidder firm should not be negative on 'The Relevant Date' and should not have eroded by more than ξ in the last 3 YEARSξ = 30%30%
relaxation for start-ups:Qualification criteria can be relaxed up to λ% for start-ups, subject to meeting the quality and technical specifications during the RfPλ = 20% (twenty per cent)

7. Qualification criteria shall be based entirely upon the capability and resources required to perform the particular contract satisfactorily, considering bidders' experience and past performance, capabilities with respect to personnel, equipment and manufacturing facilities, financial standing and relevant compliance with environmental protection regulations. There should be no qualification criteria that would be advantageous to foreign consultants at the cost of domestically provided consultancy.

8. Demerged entities: Tender documents must clearly mention if (and under what conditions) the demerged entity will be permitted to use credentials of original/ parent entity (for initial five years from the incorporation of the demerged entities) To satisfy the qualification criteria or not.

9. The turnover-multiple caution — an express criticism of prevailing practice:

D. Simplified vs Marking-Scheme Evaluation at EoI

10. The default — simplified criteria: In EoI, simplified evaluation criteria should be used, instead of marking schemes. A fail-pass, minimum benchmark in each criteria/ sub-criteria Can be specified.

11. The complex-case alternative — with a worked example: However, in a complex situation, marks/ scores May be assigned to the response of each consultant based on weightages assigned to each of the criteria in the EoI.

12. The purpose of scoring — not merely disqualification: "this exercise of scoring is not merely for disqualification of firms below a threshold, but to establish the relative strengths and weaknesses of the applicants — in order to arrive at a robust short list of qualified consultants who have the required experience and qualifications to deliver the required services at the desired level of quality."

13. The 75% threshold: The Procuring Entity shall shortlist all the consultants who secure the minimum required marks — normally 75% (seventy-five per cent). THE minimum qualifying requirement shall be specified in the EoI document.

7.1.4The EoI Evaluation Report

1. The shortlist size Rule — minimum three, maximum eight:

The short list of firms is required for the selection of consultancy services in a competitive process with:

If there are a larger number of consultants meeting the evaluation criteria, the shortlist shall be restricted to a specified number of consultantsif not specified, eight (8) consultantsbased on higher average turnover (or any other criteria, if so stipulated therein).

2. National-only shortlists: The short list May comprise only national consultants (firms registered or incorporated in the country and having registered office in India) FOR small assignments — AND indicated in the EoI.

This situation is applicable where:

  • Qualified national firms are available at a competitive cost; Or
  • the nature of the assignment is such that a foreign consultant's inclusion is not justified(for example, a training or outreach to be carried out in local language); or
  • foreign consultants have not expressed any interest.

3. CONCURRENT ASSIGNMENTS — the capacity check: IF THE same firm is considered for concurrent assignments *(for example, a construction supervision consultant for different stretches/ packages of rehabilitation/ reconstruction of a road contract)*, the Procuring Entity shall *assess the firm's overall capacity to perform multiple contracts before including it in more than one short list*. HOWEVER, this needs to be pre-declared in the EoI documents.

4. The evaluation committee May submit its EoI evaluation report to ca for approval. THE tender Committee format at Annexure 6 Can be used mutatis mutandis for this purpose.

7.1.5Declaration of Shortlist and Issue of RfP

1. Provisional shortlisting: Eois of consultants that succeed in the above evaluation shall be shortlisted. Provisionally shortlisted consultants will be informed of the condition(s) that must be met before submitting their proposal in the RfP process.

2. Validity of the shortlist — the six-month rule: Only shortlisted (including provisionally shortlisted) consultants shall be invited to participate in the following RfP process.

Such shortlisting shall remain valid for a period specified in the REoI — six months from the date of declaration, if not so specified.

3. Publication and the advertising bar: After the EoI evaluation report is accepted by the Competent Authority, the name and address of the shortlisted consultant(s) shall be published in the portal and notice board/ bulletin/ website of the Procuring Entity.

All consultants shall be advised about shortlisting of their eois or otherwisewithout disclosing the comparative position of their eois with that of others.

Shortlisted consultants must not advertise or publish the same in any form without the prior written consent of the Procuring Entity.

4. Shortlisting confers no rights: "shortlisting a consultant is an administrative process and does not confer any legal or contractual rights on the shortlisted bidder. Since original documents/ certificates are not being called for and examined at this stage, all shortlisting shall be conditional upon final verification of such documents/ certificates during the RfP process."

7.1.6Shortlisting — Risks and MitigationC

RISKMITIGATION
1. Conflict of interest situations: It is possible that conflict of interest situations are not reported or declared by the participating consultants — or sometimes by members of the evaluation committee.These situations need to be dealt with by signing declarations in specified formatsboth at the EoI bid stage as also in the technical proposal — AND by CEC members before undertaking the evaluation of proposals.
2. "Qualifications leasing":Local bidders with insufficient qualifications May show association with well-qualified (foreign or local) consultants — just to use their qualification documents to get the contract. These well-qualified consultants lease their qualification — but do not, or only minimally, contribute experience or key personnel at the execution stage.This issue needs to be dealt with from the EoI stage BY:
very clearly identifying the qualified applicant; and
putting on record/ contract the guaranteed contribution from the partner with qualification.

7.2 Bid Evaluation Process — the Governing Principle

The evaluation of bids is one of the most significant processes of procurement and must be transparent.

All bids are to be evaluated strictly based on the terms and conditions incorporated in the tender document and those stipulated by the bidders in their bids.

No hearsay information or hitherto undeclared condition should be brought in while evaluating the bids.

Similarly, no tender enquiry condition (especially the significant/ essential ones) should be overlooked/ relaxed while evaluating the bids.

G — the single-vendor caution on preferences: "care should be taken to ensure that preferences provided to any category of bidders on certain specified grounds do not result in a single vendor selection."

W — the permitted evaluation factors: The Contracting Authority may include quality, price, technical merit, aesthetic and functional characteristics, environmental characteristics, running costs, cost-effectiveness, after-sales service and technical assistance, delivery date and delivery period or period of completion, etc. "no criteria shall be used for evaluation of tenders that cannot be verified or [are] not stated in the contract — with the exception of provisions of laws in force."

7.3 Evaluation in Different Tendering SystemsWCNC

1. Single-stage single-envelope tendering: The evaluation of eligibility/ qualification of bidders, technical, commercial, and financial aspects is done simultaneously.

THE lowest-priced bid that meets the eligibility/ qualification criteria and technical and commercial conditions Laid down in the tender documents is declared as successful.

2. Single-stage two-envelope tendering — and the sanctity of the sealed financial bid:

Initially, only the techno-commercial bids would be opened and evaluated for bids which successfully meet the eligibility/ qualification criteria and techno-commercial aspects.

Financial bids of such successful bidders only Would be opened. The TC shall evaluate financial bids with a view to select the lowest (L1) bidder Who meets the eligibility/ qualification criteria and techno-commercial aspects.

Evaluators of technical proposals shall not have access to the financial proposals until the technical evaluation is concluded.

3. Two-stage bids: In two-stage bids, the PQB/ EoI stage would have already been evaluated, AND this second stage is for evaluation of responses to the second-stage two envelopes from the shortlisted qualified bidders, following the procedure described in sub-para 2 above.

7.4 Preparation and Vetting of Comparative Statement

Except in cases up to Rs. 50 lakh (rupees fifty lakh), the Procuring Entity should prepare a comparative statement of quotations (technical and financial) received in the order in which bids were opened.

Type of bidWhat the comparative statement contains
Techno-commercial bidinformation about deciding the responsiveness and eligibility of bids, AND evaluating the technical suitability of offers
financial bidinformation about rates quoted (including taxes), discounts if any, AND any other information that has implications on the ranking of bids

the concerned officers should sign the comparative statement So prepared. It May also be vetted by the associated/ integrated finance for veracity of information.

7.5 The Stages of EvaluationWCNC

the evaluation of the bids shall be carried out in two stages:

AT THE first stage, evaluation of responsiveness and technical bids is taken up.

Evaluators of technical bids shall not have access to the financial bids until the technical evaluation is concluded — AS THE envelope containing the financial bid is not opened till the technical evaluation is complete.

The financial bid of only such bidders will be opened which obtain minimum qualifying marks/ standards prescribed for the technical bid.

The evaluation shall be carried out in full conformity with the provisions of the tender document.

7.6 Contacting the Procuring Entity during the Evaluation

From the time of bid submission to awarding the contract, no bidder shall contact the Procuring Entity on any matter relating to the submitted bid.

If a bidder needs to contact The Procuring Entity for any reason relating to this tender and/ or its bid, it should do so only in writing or electronically.

any effort by a bidder to influence the Procuring Entity during the processing of bids, evaluation, bid comparison or award decisions Shall be construed as a violation of the Code of Integrity — and the bid shall be liable to be rejected as non-responsive, in addition to other punitive actions for violation of the Code of Integrity as per the tender document.

7.7 Composition of the Tender Committee (TC)/ Consultancy Evaluation Committee (CEC), and the SoPP

7.7.1The Direct Acceptance Threshold

There are delegations up to a threshold value — called the direct acceptance threshold — below which the evaluation of the bids May be entrusted solely and directly to the individual Competent Authority, without the involvement of a Tender Committee or any evaluation report.

ManualThe threshold
G GOODSTender Committee required for all cases having financial implications of more than Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh
W WORKS"…direct acceptance threshold — normally LTE threshold of Rs 50 lakhs"
C ConsultancyCEC required for all cases having financial implications of more than Rs. 50 lakh *(including SLTE or Nomination Basis)*; for cases less than Rs. 50 lakh, direct acceptance
NC(same as Goods)

he would carry out all the steps in the evaluation described in this Chapter, instead of the TC/ CEC, AND directly record reasons and decisions in the file itself (or online, where such systems exist).

He May ask for a technical suitability report from user departments if needed.

In procurements above such a threshold — including nomination and SLTE modes — evaluation is to be done by a Tender Committee/ CEC.

7.7.2Composition

1. The three-member norm: TC/ CEC should normally comprise three members, including:

  • A finance member(nominated by the Financial Adviser)C: "Financial Adviser or his representative"; and
  • A representative of the user

— as per soPP.

2. SIZE: "TC/ CEC should not be large/ very large, as it May slow down the evaluation process."

however, suitable domain/ technical experts May be included in the committee to render assistance in the evaluation of the bids(W adds: "from the user department (or otherwise)").

3. The two independence Rules under Rule 173(xxii) of GFR 2017:

4. The convenor: THE representative of the Procuring Entity will work as the convenor (member Secretary) Of the TC/ CEC.

5. Constitution at one level higher, and pre-nomination: "tender committees May be constituted with the approval of one level higher than the Competent Authority."

"it is advantageous for organisations doing procurements regularly to have pre-nominated (by designation) tender committees for various categories and value-slabs of procurements, included in the SoPP."

6. C — the convenor's additional duty at the outset: "he shall distribute the RfP to the CEC members and request them to familiarise themselves with the characteristics and requirements of the assignment, the selection procedures, and the evaluation criteria and sub-criteria. The convenor of the CEC should also call a meeting of the CEC members to review any questions they May have on the evaluation principles, procedures, and objectives."

7.7.3The Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) — the Six Approval Stages

the Competent Authority's written approval must be taken at various stages of procurement, before proceeding ahead — e.g.:

#Stage requiring CA's written approval
iadministrative/ financial sanctions/ issue of tender (G adds: including Tender Documents)
iiapproval of techno-commercial evaluation and opening of price bids In case of a two-packet system (G adds: and similar approvals in case of PQB modes and Two-Stage Tendering)
iiiprice negotiations, if permitted under specified circumstances
ivapproval of financial evaluation and award of contract To the selected bidder(s)
vcancellation of procurement and re-tendering
viin some particular decisions during contract execution — e.g., the exercise of the option clause or any variation beyond the laid-down percentage · forfeiture/ release of performance securities · premature termination/ foreclosure of contract, etc.

The minister/ board-level simplification (in all four):

the Procuring Entity should lay down a Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) detailing such thresholds. It can also lay down the powers, jurisdiction, and composition of various levels of the Tender Committee and corresponding Competent Authority for various categories of procurement and different threshold values.

7.8 Role of the Tender Committee/ CEC

1. Custody: The member Secretary of the TC/ CEC (OR THE competent Authority, in direct acceptance cases) SHALL:

  • Receive the bids opened, along with other documents, from the Bid Opening Committee/ tender opening officials; and
  • BE responsible for the safe custody of the documents and for the processing involved at all steps in finalising the procurement.

2. Scope of responsibility — and note how much wider the CEC's is:

ManualThe Committee shall be responsible for
GALL aspects and stages of the tender evaluation
W, NCall aspects and stages of the evaluation of technical and financial proposals, negotiations, and final award of contract
Call aspects and stages of the consultant selection — that is: Evaluation of EoI · shortlisting of consultants · deciding tors · issuance of RfP · evaluation of technical and financial proposals · negotiations · and final selection of the consultant

3. The personal-discharge Rule — one of the most important governance provisions in the chapter:

4. The four pre-evaluation checks: After the proposals have been opened, the evaluation process can begin. Before starting the evaluation, the TC/ CEC members should ensure that they: A) have no conflict of interest(W adds: "as defined in the tender document"); B) understand the evaluation criteriaC: "understand the rating and scoring system"; C) have been provided with evaluation worksheets; and d) AGREE ON how to evaluate the proposals.

7.9 Handling Dissent among the Tender Committee/ CEC

1. Resolve by discussion, not by correspondence:

in cases where it is not possible to come to a consensus And differences persist amongst TC members:

  • THE reasons for dissent of a member should be recorded in a balanced manner, along with the majority's views on the dissent note;
  • THE final recommendations should be that of the majority view.
  • "however, such situations should be rare."
  • the Competent Authority (ca) can overrule such dissent notes after recording reasons for doing so clearly. His decision would be final.

2. Where the ca disagrees with the committee — the send-back procedure:

7.10 Independence, Impartiality, Confidentiality and 'No Conflict of Interest' at All Stages of Evaluation of Bids

1. No communication with bidders: Members of the TC/ CEC should not have any conflict of interest, and should not directly engage in any communication with bidders — from the date of their appointment to the date on which the contract is awarded.

2. Confidentiality and its one exception:

Information relating to the evaluation of bids and the committee's deliberations Should be confidential, and not be shared with persons not officially connected with the process — until the award of the contract is notified to the successful firm.

3. The declaration requirement — extended to non-members:

"all technical, commercial and finance officials who have contributed to the techno-commercial or financial evaluation of bids — even though they May not be part of the TC — should:

  • Deal with the procurement in an independent, impartial manner;
  • Have no conflict of interest with any of the bidders involved;
  • Maintain confidentiality of the information processed during the evaluation process and not allow it to reach any unauthorised person."

they should sign a declaration at the end of their reports/ notings Stating that:

TC members May also make such a declaration at the end of their reports.

4. Handling external references, grievances and directives during processing:

7.11 Timely Processing of Tenders

(Rule 174(i) of GFR 2017)

1. The 90 → 60 → 75 day Rule:

2. The CPWD example — maximum days for award of contract W:

Procuring OfficerLimit of procurement (Rs. crore)Maximum days for decision for award of contract
Assistant Engineer0.0610 DAYS
Executive Engineer1.0015 DAYS
Superintending Engineer10.0030 DAYS
Chief Engineer30.0045 DAYS
Additional Director General and aboveMore than 30.0060 DAYS

3. The published Schedule and the accountability Rule:

"the complete time Schedule of finalising the tender process — from the date of issuing the tender to the date of issuing the contract — should be published in the bid documents."

4. The fixed weekly TC meeting day:

7.12 Extension of Bid/ Tender Validity Period

(Rule 174(iii) of GFR 2017)

1. The primary obligation: The entire process of scrutiny and evaluation of tenders, preparation of ranking statement and notification of awardmust be done expeditiously and within the original tender validity period.

2. The extension procedure and its five Rules:

If, due to some exceptional and unforeseen reasons, the purchase organisation is unable to decide on the placement of the contract within the original validity period, it May:

  • Preferably request — before expiry of the original validity periodall the responsive tenderers To extend their tenders up to a specified period;
  • While asking for such extension, the tenderers are also to be asked to extend their offers "as it is", without any changes therein;
  • They May also be requested to extend the validity of the EMD for the corresponding additional period (which is to be specified in the request);
  • "a tenderer May not agree to such a request — and this will not lead to forfeiture of its EMD";
  • But the tenderers who do agree to extend the validity are to do so without changing any terms, conditions, and so on, of their original tenders;
  • Reasons for seeking extension of bid validity should be recorded by the procuring officers.

3. TREATMENT OF "not-EXTENDED" AND "WITHDRAWN" BIDS — the three scenarios:

A) if it happens before completion of the techno-commercial evaluation:

B) if it happens after techno-commercial evaluation but before completion of financial bid evaluation:

c) in case of QCBS System of evaluation:

7.13 Consideration of Lack of Competition in OTE/ GTE and LTE

(Rule 173(xx) and (xxi) of GFR 2017)

1. What counts as adequate competition:

"the number of bids received which can indicate adequate competition depends on the parameters of procurement (value, specification, mode of procurement, tendering system, etc.) and the market situation. This has to be judged by the Tender Committee."

2. THE 'single offer' situation — and the express criticism of routine re-tendering:

Sometimes, against advertised/ limited tender cases, the Procuring Entity May not receive a sufficient number of bids And/ or — after analysing the bids — ends up with only one responsive bid — a situation referred to as 'Single offer'.

The pre-retender check: "before re-tendering, the Procuring Entity is first to check whether — while floating/ issuing the enquiry — all necessary requirements and formalities such as standard conditions, industry-friendly specification, wide publicity, sufficient time for bidding, and so on, were fulfilled. If not, a fresh enquiry is to be issued after rectifying the deficiencies."

the three conditions under which a single-bid process is valid:

3. The powers and the fallback: However, as far as delegation/ Schedule of Procurement Powers is concerned, the Competent Authority would be as in single tender mode. In case of price not being reasonable, negotiations (being L1) or re-tender May be considered as justifiable.

4. Unsolicited offers against LTEs — the general rule and its three exceptions:

"unsolicited offers against ltes should be ignored; However, ministries/ departments should evolve a system by which interested firms can enlist and bid in the next round of tendering."

however, under the following exceptional circumstances, these May be considered for acceptance at the next higher level of competency: A) inadequate competition; B) non-availability of suitable quotations from registered contractors; C) urgent demand, and capacity/ capability of the firm offering the unsolicited [offer] being known, etc.

7.14 Tender Committee/ CEC Recommendations and Report

1. What the committee must recommend:

The TC has to make formal recommendations for the award of the contract to the bidder:

  • Whose bid has been determined to be substantially responsive; and
  • THE lowest evaluated bid;
  • Provided further that the bidder is determined to be qualified to perform the contract satisfactorily, and his credentials have been verified.

2. The good-practice Rule on deviations:

"it is a good practice that TC should spell out salient terms and conditions of the offer(s) recommended for acceptance.

these recommendations are submitted for approval to the tender accepting authority.

3. No separate fa consultation — and the four-fold responsibility of the ca:

4. After the acceptance of these recommendations by the tender accepting authority, the letter (notification) of award (LoA) can be issued.

7.15 Preliminary Examination

7.15.1Unresponsive Bids

The definition: "a substantively responsive bid is complete and conforms to the tender document's essential terms, conditions, and requirements — without substantive deviation, reservation, or omission."

"only substantively responsive bids shall be considered for further evaluation. Other bids shall be treated as unresponsive and ignored. All bids received shall first be scrutinised to identify unresponsive bids, if any."

the nine grounds on which a bid May be declared unresponsive:

#Ground
1the bid is not in the prescribed format, OR IS unsigned, OR not signed as per the stipulations In the tender document
2the required EMD has not been provided, OR exemption from EMD is claimed without acceptable proof of exemption
3the bidder is not eligible to participate As per the eligibility criteria laid down (including conflict of interest and other provisions of CIPP). In case procurement is on a limited tender basis, or where procurement is restricted to pre-approved vendors, it should be especially ensured that there is no conflict of interest
4G ONLYthe bidder has *quoted for goods manufactured by a different firm, without the required authority letter from the proposed manufacturer
5the bid departs from the essential requirements Specified in the tender document (for example, the bidder has not agreed to give the required performance security)
6against a Schedule in the list of requirements, the bidder has not quoted for the entire requirement as specified in that Schedule.
Worked example: "in a schedule, it has been stipulated that the bidder will SUPPLY the equipment, INSTALL and COMMISSION it, and also TRAIN the purchaser's operators for operating the equipment. The bidder has, however, quoted only for the supply of the equipment."
7bidder has quoted conditional bids, or more than one bid, or alternative bidsunless permitted explicitly in the tender document
8THE bid validity is shorter than the required period. However, in case of STE/ PAC procurement *(NC: "in case of STE procurement")*, shorter bid validity May be accepted
9non-submission, or submission of illegible scanned copies Of stipulated documents/ declarations(G adds: "if so stipulated in the Tender Document")
10NC ONLYthe bid has unresolved substantive deviations

7.15.2Non-conformities between Figures and Words — the Four Correction Rules

"sometimes, non-conformities/ errors are also observed in responsive tenders between the quoted prices in figures and words. This situation normally does not arise in the case of e-procurement."

#DiscrepancyWhich prevails
1between the unit price And the total price(the total obtained by multiplying the unit price by the quantity)THE unit price shall prevail, and the total price corrected accordingly
2an error in a TOTAL Corresponding to the addition or subtraction of sub-totalsTHE sub-totals shall prevail, and the total shall be corrected
3between WORDS AND figuresTHE amount in words shall prevail
4The procedural consequencesuch a discrepancy in an offer should be conveyed to the bidder, asking him to respond by a target date. If the bidder does not agree to the Procuring Entity's observation, the bid is liable to be rejected

7.15.3Discrepancies between Original and Additional/ Scanned Copies of a Bid

"normally, as far as feasible, no submission of original documents in physical format should be asked for in e-procurement — other than: Cost of tender documents (if any), Bid Security, and statutory certificates (if any)."

in e-procurement, there could be discrepancies between the uploaded scanned copies and the originals submitted by the bidder. In off-line tenders, discrepancies May be observed between the original copy and other copies of the responsive bids.

this issue is also to be addressed with the bidder in the same manner as above, and subsequent actions shall be taken accordingly.

7.15.4Deviations, Reservations and Omissions — Substantive or Minor

1. The three definitions:

TermDefinition
"Deviation"IS A departure from the requirements Specified in the tender document
"Reservation"IS THE setting of limiting conditions, or withholding from complete acceptance Of the requirements specified in the tender document
"Omission"IS THE failure to submit part, or all, of the information or documentation Required in the tender document

2. The three-limb test for a substantive Deviation:

3. The consequence and its one exception: "the decision of the Procuring Entity shall be final in this regard. Bids with substantive deviations shall be rejected as non-responsive."

4. THE "better than asked for" RULE — a provision often missed:

5. Examples of minor issues: During the preliminary examination, some minor infirmity and/ or irregularity and/ or non-conformity May also be found in some bids. Such minor issues could be:

6. Considering minor deviations — and the judicial precedent cited:

the four-fold test for accepting a minor deviation: "the Procuring Entity reserves the right to accept bids with such minor issues — provided they:

  • Do not constitute any substantive deviation;
  • Do not have a fiscal impact;
  • Do not prejudice, or affect the ranking order of the bidders; And
  • do not grant the bidder any undue advantage vis-à-vis other bidders and the Procuring Entity."

wherever necessary, the Procuring Entity shall convey its observation on such 'minor' issues to the bidder. If the bidder does not reply by the specified date, or gives an evasive reply without clarifying the point at issue in clear terms — that bid shall be liable to be rejected as non-responsive.

7.15.5Clarification of Bids / Shortfall Documents

1. The clarification procedure and its three absolute bars:

During the evaluation and comparison of bids, the purchaser May — at his discretion — ask the bidder for clarifications on the bid.

The request for clarification shall be given in writing by registered/ speed post/ courier/ email, asking the bidder to respond by a specified date — mentioning therein that if the bidder does not comply or respond by the date, his tender will be liable to be rejected.

2. The shortfall-documents Rule — the "historical documents" test:

provision May be made by e-procurement portals for requesting shortfall documents from the bidders. The system May further allow shortfall documents to be taken from any bidders only once after the technical bid opening.

The qualification-documents Rule — and the crucial worked example:

7.15.6Evaluation of Eligibility

the Procuring Entity shall determine — to its satisfaction — whether the bidders are eligible as per the eligibility criteria in the tender document To participate in the tender process.

Tenders that do not meet the required eligibility criteria prescribed shall be rejected as unresponsive.

Appendix to Chapter 7 — Part a: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG: Ch. 7 · W: Ch. 6 · C: Ch. 8 · NC: Ch. 7
2Chapter titleG/NC: *Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract · W: *Evaluation of Bids and Award of Worksuffix · C: RfP Evaluation and Award of Contract
3Whole additional Chapter — Shortlisting of Consultants, EoIC only (its Chapter 7)
4the evaluating bodyg/w/nc: *Tender Committee (TC) · c: *Consultancy Evaluation Committee (CEC)
5Scope of the Committee's responsibilityG: all aspects of tender evaluation · W/NC: adds negotiations and final award · C: adds evaluation of EoI, shortlisting, deciding ToRs, and issuance of RfP
6EoI shortlist sizeC only: minimum three (Rule 184 GFR) and generally not more than eight; if more qualify, restrict to eight based on higher Average Turnover
7EoI shortlist validityC only: Six months if not specified; beyond 6 months, better to re-invite EoI
8EoI minimum qualifying marksC only: normally 75%
9Start-up relaxation at EoIC only: up to λ = 20%
10The turnover-multiple criticism (5–10 times "appears high"); upper cap so as not to restrict competition to "the big four or five Consultancy Firms"C ONLY
11Key Experts not evaluated at EoI stageC ONLY
12"Qualifications leasing" riskC ONLY
13Direct acceptance thresholdG/C/NC: Rs 50 lakh · W: "normally LTE threshold of Rs 50 lakhs"
14Rule 173(xxii) extended to the ACCEPTING AUTHORITYW + C(G states it only for committee members)
15Express urging to apply Rule 173(xxii) below the threshold tooG + C
16Convenor's duty to distribute the RfP and call a familiarisation meetingC ONLY
17"Understand the evaluation criteria" vs "understand the rating and scoring system"G/W/NC vs C
18The large-envelope custody safeguard for unopened financial bidsW + C + NC
19Comparative statement — vetting by Finance not required if prepared by the e-Procurement portalW ONLY
20The permitted evaluation factors list, and "no criteria that cannot be verified OR are not stated in the contract"W ONLY
21Caution that preferences must not result in single-vendor selectionG ONLY
22CPWD table of maximum days for award (10/15/30/45/60 days)W ONLY
23"Notify at least one day every week for TC meeting; no leave or tour on such days"W(also in C/NC in similar terms)
24Print the tender schedule on the inside cover of the Procurement FileW
25Withdrawn L-1 bid → must re-tender; and such L1 price not to be taken as precedence for price estimates or reasonablenessCommon — but the QCBS/H-1 variant is in W, C, NC
26Withdrawn/ not-extended H-1 bid in QCBS → must re-tenderW + C + NC(no QCBS in Goods)
27Ground 4 for unresponsiveness — quoting for goods of a different manufacturer without authority letterG ONLY
28Ground 10 — "unresolved substantive deviations"nc only
29Shorter bid validity acceptable in STE/ PACG · NC says only "STE"(consistent with Works and NC treatment of PAC)
30Bids with deviations may be accepted in STE/ PAC with CFA approvalG
31The amendment-Bank-Guarantee judicial precedent on minor irregularityG + W + NC
32Shortfall documents may be taken only ONCE after technical bid openingG(stated expressly)
33"No new supply order should be asked for to qualify the bidder"G + W
34Unsolicited offers against LTE — three exceptional circumstances for acceptance at next higher levelW(fullest statement)
35The express criticism of routine re-tendering on single bids, and the three validity conditionsW(fullest); echoed in G/C/NC

end of Chapter 7 — part a

Part IIEvaluation, Negotiation and Award

Merging: Goods Ch. 7 (paras 7.4–7.8) · Works Ch. 6 (paras 6.4–6.6) · Consultancy Ch. 8 (paras 8.4–8.8) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 7 (paras 7.3.4–7.6)

Concordance for Chapter 7 — Part B

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
7.16Evaluation of Eligible Techno-commercial Bids7.4.26.4.18.37.3.4
7.17Evaluation of the Quality — Technical Proposals8.4
7.18General Norms for Ranking of Financial Bids7.56.4.28.5.17.4.1
7.19Least Cost Selection (LCS)(the default)6.4.38.5.27.4.2
7.20Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)6.4.58.5.37.4.4
7.21Single Source Selection (SSS)6.4.48.5.47.4.3
7.22Fixed Budget Selection (FBS)8.5.5
7.23GTE Tenders — evaluation7.5.26.4.68.5.67.4.5
7.24Concurrent Application of MSE and MII Policies7.5.18.5.87.4.6
7.25Evaluation in Rate Contracts7.5.3
7.26Variation of Quantities at the Time of Award7.6.3
7.27Option Clause7.6.4
7.28Splitting of Contracts/ Parallel Contracts7.6.5
7.29Reasonableness of Prices7.6.66.4.77.4.7
7.30Consideration of Abnormally Low Bids7.6.76.4.88.5.77.4.8
7.31Cartel Formation/ Pool Rates/ Bid Rigging7.6.86.4.98.5.77.4.9
7.32Negotiations for Reduction of Prices7.6.96.4.108.5.77.4.10
7.33Negotiations to Freeze Description of Service8.6
7.34Cancellation of Procurement/ Rejection of All Bids/ Re-tender7.6.116.4.118.5.97.4.11
7.35LoA to Successful Bidder7.7.16.5.18.7.17.5.1
7.36Publication of Award; Return of EMD7.7.26.5.28.7.27.5.2
7.37Performance Security7.7.36.5.37.5.3
7.38Acknowledgement and Execution of Contract7.7.46.5.47.5.4
7.39Framing of Contract7.7.56.5.57.5.5
7.40Audit Trails — Procurement Records7.7.66.5.67.5.6
7.41Risks and Mitigations7.86.68.87.6

7.16 Evaluation of Eligible Techno-commercial Bids

7.16.1Evaluation of Qualification Criteria

1. What is ascertained: In evaluating the techno-commercial bid, conformity to the eligibility/ qualification criteria, technical specifications, and quality assurance; And commercial conditions of the offered goods to those in the tender document is ascertained.

Additional factors incorporated in the tender document shall also be considered in the manner indicated therein.

This determination will, inter alia, consider the bidder's financial, technical, and production capabilities To satisfy all the Procuring Entity's requirements as incorporated in the tender document.

Such determination shall be based upon scrutiny and examination of all relevant data and details submitted by the bidder in its bid, as well as such other allied information as deemed appropriate by the Procuring Entity.

2. Start-up relaxation: The condition of prior turnover and prior experience May be relaxed for start-ups (Only to start-ups recognised by DPIIT), subject to meeting quality & technical specifications and making suitable provisions in the tender document (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017). Such relaxation is not optional but has to be ensured — except for items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, where adequate justification exists.

7.16.2Evaluation of Technical Suitability

THE description, specifications, drawings, and other technical terms and conditions Are examined by the TC in general, and by a technical member of the TC in particular.

the alternative-offers Rule: "the tender document should clearly State whether alternative offers/ makes/ models would be considered or not — and, in the absence of an express statement to the effect, these should not be allowed."

an important document is the exceptions/ deviation form submitted by the bidder. It is important to judge whether an exception/ deviation is minor or major. Minor exceptions/ deviations May be waived following the criteria in part a, Para 7.15.4-6.

7.16.3Evaluation of Bids involving Samples/ DemosG

"evaluation of techno-commercial bids should not be done based on the evaluation of samples or demos — in view of the subjectivity involved."

The permitted alternative — the reference-sample route:

  • IF A purchaser's reference sample has been displayed for prospective bidders to illustrate the desired indeterminable characteristics, the contract should mention that final supplies must meet such characteristics of the reference sample, in addition to the specifications/ drawings.
  • If required, a provision for the submission of a pre-production sample matching the purchaser's reference sample by the successful bidder(s) May be stipulated before giving clearance for bulk production.

There should be a time limit for submission and approval of the pre-production sample.

7.16.4Evaluation of Commercial Conditions — and the SEVEN "CRITICAL PROVISIONS"

bidder must comply with all the commercial and other clauses Of the tender document.

The Procuring Entity shall evaluate the commercial conditions quoted by the bidder to confirm that all terms and conditions stipulated in the tender document have been accepted without substantive omissions/ reservations/ exception/ deviation.

ONLY minor deviations May be accepted/ allowed — provided these do not constitute substantive deviations.

7.16.5Declaration of Successful Bidders

1. Single-envelope tenders: In a single envelope/ cover tender, TC proceeds to evaluate the price aspects without a reference to ca at this stage.

2. Multiple-envelope tenders — the technical evaluation report:

The TC prepares a recommendation for a techno-commercial bid to declare successful bidders.

"for each proposal, the report also should substantiate the results of the evaluation and indicate technical weaknesses or deviations from the terms set out in the tender documents — and comment on their acceptability."

it should review the tc's evaluation of each proposal (On technical, contractual, and other aspects).

The ca should decide how any acceptable deviation in each proposal should be handled during contract formulation, in case that proposal is ranked first.

3. Announcement and the two timelines:

After the approval of ca, the results of the techno-commercial bid evaluation are to be announced (including informing the failed bidders).

EventTimeline
Return of Bid securities of unsuccessful bidders of the first stagewithin 30 days of declaration of result of the first stage (i.e., technical evaluation)
Opening of FINANCIAL BIDSDate/ time and place (or on the portal in e-procurement) ANNOUNCED, in the presence of technically suitable bidders who are willing to attend. Such a date should be two to five (5) days after the announcement

7.17 Evaluation of the Quality — Technical Proposals [C ONLY]

7.17.1Responsiveness to the ToR

The CEC shall evaluate each proposal on the basis of its responsiveness to the ToR.

Proposals not responding to the ToR fully and properly will be summarily rejected as being non-responsivebefore taking up the appraisal of the technical proposal for evaluation of quality.

7.17.2Criteria and Sub-criteria — the Four Heads and the Absolute-Grading Rule

1. The four criteria, totalling 100 marks: CEC shall evaluate the quality of the technical proposal by awarding marks so as to make the total maximum technical score of 100 (one hundred), FOR:

A) the consultant's relevant experience for the assignment;

b) THE quality of the methodology Proposed;

c) THE qualifications of the key staff PROPOSED; and

d) capability for transfer of knowledge (if relevant).

2. The model scheme of maximum/ minimum marks:

Rated CriteriaRange of Percentage for Score
1. Consultancy firm's experience relevant to assignment5–10%
2. Proposed approach, methodology, work plan, and understanding of requirements20–50%
3. Qualification and adequacy of experience of key staff30–60%
4. Transfer of knowledge, if relevant\*0–10%
overall100%

The four explanatory Rules:

  • "the weight given to the firm's experience can be relatively modest — since this criterion has already been considered when short-listing the consultant."
  • "more weight shall be given to the methodology in the case of more complex assignments (for example, multidisciplinary feasibility or management studies)."
  • "evaluation of only the key personnel is recommended. Since key personnel ultimately determine the quality of performance, more weight shall be assigned to this criterion if the proposed assignment is complex."
  • "the CEC shall review the qualifications and experience of proposed key personnel in their curricula vitae — which must be accurate, complete, and signed by an authorised official of the consultant *and* the individual proposed."
  • "the experience criteria mentioned in point 1 above holds true for a consultancy firm and not for an individual consultant."

3. SUB-CRITERIA — kept to the minimum, with worked examples:

"the CEC shall normally divide the above criteria into sub-criteria. However, the number of sub-criteria should be kept to the minimum that is considered essential."

CriterionSuggested sub-criteria and weights
methodologya) understanding of ToR — 30% weightage
b) acceptability and detailing of methodology and work plan — *50% weight

c) innovation, if it is important — 20% weightage*
suitability of the key professionalsa) EDUCATIONAL QUALIFICATIONS — *20% weightage
b) professional experience in the required area of assignment — *80% weight

the simplified alternative: "similar to in LCS and EoI, a simplified evaluation criteria laying down minimum qualifying fail-pass benchmarks for each criteria/ sub-criteria (instead of marking schemes) May also be used in appropriate cases. All offers that pass the qualifying benchmarks are declared as technically qualified and their financial bids are opened."

7.17.3Rating/ Grading Schemes to Mitigate Subjectivity

1. The problem stated:

2. Why slabs rather than a full range:

"precise and exact markings of criteria and sub-criteria specified in technical evaluation — especially of unquantifiable criteria, e.g., evaluation of methodology — May neither be feasible nor warranted, especially when there is bound to be variation among marks by different members of CEC.

3. The five-grade rating scale — reproduced in full:

RatingAssessmentDetailed Evaluation (in case of unquantifiable Criteria)Marks
Avery goodThe consultants have outstanding, advanced expertise in specific problem areas of the assignment, that can promise an excellent execution of the assignment. The consultants' staff includes top experts in the field. The consultants are considered world-class specialists in the approaches and methodologies dealing with specific issues in the assignment. The consultants operate according to well-established quality management (ISO 9002 etc.) procedures.Full marks
BGOODThe consultants have extensive experience in the field of the assignment, and have worked in regions and sectors with similar physical and institutional conditions, including similar critical issues. Permanent staff are adequate and highly qualified. The consultants have experience with advanced approaches and methodologies.80% of full marks
CsatisfactoryThe consultants have experience in the field of assignments similar to the one being considered — but have not dealt with critical issues specific to it(such as, for instance, delicate social or environmental issues). The consultants are experienced in the use of standard approaches and methodologies. The consultants' permanent staff are adequate.60% of full marks
DunsatisfactoryThe consultant has experience which is not considered adequate for the quality needed by the project.30% of full marks
Enot relevantThe consultant's experience has no, or little, relevance to the project under consideration.10% of full marks

4. The first reading — without scoring:

5. The grading system must be defined before The proposals are opened:

After the review, the CEC meets to define the grades of the rating system to be adopted (if not detailed in the RfP), according to the criteria and sub-criteria set out in the rfP.

"to discourage subjectivity and avoid the use of points and fractions of points, the rating system provides a few grades (from three to four) for each criterion and sub-criterion."

"minimum qualifying marks or relative qualifying method for quality of the technical proposal will be prescribed and indicated in the RfP."

the three reasons why undefined grading distorts evaluation:

a) "evaluators May differ, even widely, in their definition, understanding, or interpretation of the same criterion — and also because of their subjective experience and understanding of the ToR";

b) "disparities in evaluators' relative generosity or severity in judgment and ratings can easily be magnified by the lack of common definitions of the requirements to be considered for each criterion and sub-criterion";

c) "large differences in scores caused by inadequate understanding of the ToR or improper use of the evaluation criteria and sub-criteria are difficult to reconcile and explain."

7.17.4Individual Scoring of Proposals

"CEC members should carry out the evaluation independently and score the proposal based on the rating criteria.

The CEC evaluation should be based on the proposal as submitted. Under no circumstances can the CEC request information or clarifications that May change the proposals. Issues to be clarified with the selected consultant will have to be discussed during negotiations.

Individual evaluators' results are recorded on pre-established worksheets.

After each member has independently rated all criteria and sub-criteria, it is good practice to read each proposal again — to ensure that scores reliably reflect the quality of the proposal."

7.17.5Joint Review and Mitigation

1. The reconciliation procedure:

2. The minimum qualifying mark and the debriefing duty:

"eventually, for each of the technical proposals, the CEC should calculate the average of the scores allocated to each criterion by all members, establish the technical ranking of the proposals, identify the best, and propose it for award.

The evaluation also establishes whether a proposal passes the minimum qualifying mark (or technical score — normally 75 (seventy-five)) provided for in the RfP.

If one or more proposals fail to meet the minimum qualifying mark, both individual and joint assessments must be carefully reviewed and justified.

Short-listed consultants are usually discouraged when their proposals are rejected — particularly when they are only a few points below the minimum mark; Therefore, the Procuring Entity should be prepared to debrief consultants to explain the evaluation of their proposals."

7.18 General Norms for Ranking of Financial Bids

1. The basis — total outgo from the buyer's pocket:

Unless otherwise stipulated, evaluation of the financial bids shall be on the price criteria only. Financial bids of all techno-commercially suitable bids are evaluated and ranked to determine the lowest-priced bidder, based on the total outgo from the buyer's pocket — including:

2. Evaluation of multiple schedules/ items/ destinations — the three cases G:

CaseHow ranking is done
a) The list of requirements contains more than one Schedule/ packageresponsive, technically suitable bids shall be evaluated and compared separately for each Schedule. The bid for a Schedule will not be considered if the complete list of goods in that Schedule is not included in the bid. However, bidders have the option to quote for any one or more schedules, and to offer *unconditional discounts for individual schedules*
b) There is only a list of items without grouping into schedulesranking shall be done for each item separately. Bidder has the option to quote for any one or more items and to offer unconditional discounts for individual items. HOWEVER, bidder shall quote for all the destinations included in an item quoted
c) There is only one item with several destinationsranking shall be done separately for each destination included in that item; the Bidder has the option to quote for any one or more destinations, and to offer unconditional discounts for individual destinations

discounts as above shall be considered for deciding the lowest evaluated bid. However, any conditional discounts are not considered for the ranking.

3. No loading unless pre-announced: "unless explicitly announced beforehand in the tender documents, the quoted price should not be loaded based on deviations in commercial conditions. If it is decided to incorporate such clauses, these should be unambiguous and clear — and thereafter, there should be no relaxation during evaluation."

Additionally, while purchasing sophisticated and costly equipment, machinery, and so on, the procuring entity also gives special importance to factors such as high-quality performance, environmentally friendly features, low running cost, low maintenance cost. To take care of this, relevant details, and the criteria adopted to assess the benefit of such features, are to be clearly stipulated in the tender document, so that the bidders are aware of it and quote accordingly.

4. The comparison basis: Unless otherwise stipulated, the comparison of the responsive bids shall be on total outgo from the Procuring Entity's pocket — to be paid to the supplier or any third party, including all elements of costs As per the terms of the proposed contract.

Therefore, it should normally be on a CIF/ FOR destination basis, duly delivered, commissioned, as the case May be: A) goods manufactured in India, or goods of foreign origin already located in India — GST and any other duties/ levies contractually payable (to the bidder) are to be added; B) goods of foreign origin offered from abroad — customs duty and other similar import duties/ taxes contractually payable are to be added.

5. Purchase preferences: As per policies of the Government from time to time, the purchaser reserves his option to give price/ purchase preferences as indicated in the tender document.

6. VARIABLE-PRICE BIDS — the "as on deadline" rule: If the bids have been invited on a variable price basis, they will be evaluated, compared, and ranked based on the position prevailing on the deadline of bid submission — and not based on any future date. If a bidder submits a firm price quotation against the requirement of a variable price quotation, that bid shall be prima facie acceptable and considered further — taking the price variation asked for by the bidder as nil.

7. Tie at the l-1 POSITION — the four-step tie-breaker G:

"rarely, there May be a tie at the lowest bid (L-1) position between two or more start-up/ non-start-up bidders.

it must be first determined whether it is a case of cartel formation or anti-competitive practices — and if so, it shall be dealt with accordingly.

If this is not a case of cartel formation, the decision will be taken in the following manner:"

StepRule
iif one of the L1 bidders is an MSE owned by sc/st or a woman entrepreneur, then the 25% quantity order reserved for MSEs will be placed on that MSE, subject to fulfilment of other tender conditions
iiif one of the L1 bidders is an MSE, other than an MSE owned by sc/st or a woman entrepreneur, then an order shall be placed on such MSE bidders
iiiin all other scenarios, the order shall be placed on the L1 bidder having a higher turnover in the previous financial year. In case there is a tie at L-1 between only start-up bidders and none of them has past turnover, the order will be placed on the start-up that was registered earlier with DPIIT
ivfor tenders issued through the GeM PORTAL: THE tie-breaker methodology available on the GeM portal is to be followed

8. Ambiguous price bids: "if the price bid is ambiguous, so that it May very well lead to two equally valid total price amounts — then the bid should be treated as unresponsive."

9. Suo motu and conditional discounts after bid opening — the two-limbed Rule:

10. C — additional financial-opening Rules for consultancy:

  • The financial proposals shall be opened publicly in the presence of representatives of the technically qualified consultants who choose to attend. The evaluation committee demonstrably verifies that the financial proposals have remained sealed And then opens them.
  • THE name of the consultant, quality scores, and proposed prices shall be read aloud and recorded. No modification to financial proposals is permitted. When electronic submission is used, this information shall be posted online.
  • The arithmetic-correction Rule differs by contract type:
Contract typeRule
Time-based contractANY arithmetical errors shall be corrected, and prices shall be adjusted if they fail to reflect all inputs That are included in the respective technical proposals
lump-sum contractthe consultant is deemed to have included all prices In its financial proposal — so neither arithmetical correction nor any other price adjustment shall be made
  • for the purpose of evaluation, the total cost shall include all taxes and duties for which the Procuring Entity makes payments to the consultant, and other reimbursable expenses — such as travel, translation, report printing, or secretarial expenses.
  • THE GST misclassification Rule: "the offers shall be evaluated based on the GST rate quoted by each bidder… the Procuring Entity shall not be responsible for any misclassification of HSN number or incorrect GST rate if quoted by the bidder. Any increase in GST rate due to misclassification of HSN number shall have to be absorbed by the consultant."
  • if GST is quoted extra, but with the provision that it shall be charged as applicable at the time of delivery, the offer shall be evaluated for comparison purposes by loading the maximum existing rate of GST for the product/ HSN code.

7.19 Least Cost Selection (LCS)

Under the LCS procedures, the financial proposals will be ranked in terms of their total evaluated cost.

THE least cost proposal will be ranked as L-1, and the next higher and so on will be ranked as L-2, L-3, etc.

THE least cost proposal (L-1) will be considered for award of contract.

C:The CEC will put up a report on financial evaluation of the technically qualified consultants to the competent finance authority, along with the recommendation that the least cost proposal (L-1) can be approved/ invited for negotiation and for final award of contract.

7.20 Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)

(Rule 192 of GFR 2017)

7.20.1The Qualifying Benchmark

in QCBS selection, minimum qualifying marks — normally 70–80 (seventy to eighty) out of a maximum of 100 marks — as a qualifying benchmark for quality of the technical proposal shall be prescribed and indicated in the tender document, along with a scheme for allotting marks for various technical criteria/ attributes.

Bids scoring less than the minimum threshold shall not be considered for further evaluation.

7.20.2The Two Scores and the Weighted Total

ScoreHow computed
technical/ quality scorethe proposal with the highest technical marks shall be given a score of 100, and other proposals given technical scores proportional to their marks w.r.t. The highest technical marks
financial scorethe proposal with the lowest cost May be given a financial score of 100, and other proposals given financial scores inversely proportional to their prices w.r.t. The lowest offer

THE total score shall be obtained by weighing the quality and cost scores and adding them up.

The proposal obtaining the highest total combined score will be ranked as H-1, followed by H-2, H-3, etc. THE H-1 proposal shall be recommended for award of contract(C adds: "will be invited for negotiations, if required").

7.20.3The QCBS Formula

AN evaluated bid score (b) Will be calculated for each responsive bid using the following formula — which permits a comprehensive assessment of the bid price and the technical merits of each bid:

SymbolMeaning
Cevaluated bid price
C_lowTHE lowest Of all evaluated bid prices among responsive bids
TTHE total technical score Awarded to the bid
T_highthe technical score achieved by the bid that was scored best Among all responsive bids
XTHE weightage for the price As specified in the bds/ tender document

the bid with the best evaluated bid score (b) among responsive bids shall be the most advantageous bid.

7.20.4the Worked Examples — and How the Same Numbers Produce Different Winners

A. THE CONSULTANCY EXAMPLE — weightage 70 technical: 30 costC

Minimum qualifying marks for technical qualification: 75. Three proposals A, B, C received.

StepABC
Technical marks awarded758090
Technical points (T/T_high)75/90 = 8380/90 = 8990/90 = 100
Quoted priceRs. 100Rs. 104Rs. 106
Financial points (C_low/C)100/100 = 100100/104 = 96100/106 = 94
Combined score (Tech × 0.70 + Fin × 0.30)83×0.70 + 100×0.30 = 88.1089×0.70 + 96×0.30 = 91.10100×0.70 + 94×0.30 = 98.20
RANKH-3H-2H-1

B. THE NON-CONSULTANCY EXAMPLE — same data, weightage 30 technical: 70 costNC

StepABC
Technical marks awarded758090
Technical points8389100
Quoted priceRs. 100Rs. 104Rs. 106
Financial points1009694
Combined score (Tech × 0.30 + Fin × 0.70)83×0.30 + 100×0.70 = 9589×0.30 + 96×0.70 = 94100×0.30 + 94×0.70 = 96
RANKH-2H-3H-1

C. THE WORKS EXAMPLE — weightage 30 technical: 70 cost, with different dataW

Minimum qualifying marks: 75.

StepABC
Technical marks awarded807590
Normalised technical score80×100/90 = 88.8975×100/90 = 83.3390×100/90 = 100.00
Quoted priceRs. 120Rs. 100Rs. 105
Normalised financial score100×100/120 = 83.33100×100/100 = 100.00100×100/105 = 95.24
Combined score (Tech × 0.30 + Fin × 0.70)85.0095.0096.67
RANKH-3H-2H-1

7.20.5Additional QCBS Rules in Non-ConsultancyNC

a) the evaluation committee: "for evaluation, a suitable committee shall be constituted. However, members of the STC [Special Technical Committee] shall not be involved."

b) joint ventures: "joint ventures May be avoided in general in non-consultancy services — and particularly in the QCBS system."

c) the MII disapplication — an important consequence:

7.21 Single Source Selection (SSS)

the single source in case of SSS selection shall be called for further negotiation, if need be — after opening and evaluation of its financial proposals.

7.22 Fixed Budget Selection (FBS) [C ONLY]

Under FBS, the selection of the consultant shall be made by one of the following two methods:

A) the competitive quality-only method: By a competitive selection process, based only on quality, using specific marking criteria for quality in the manner indicated in Rule 192(i) of the GFR.

b) the empanelment method — for repetitive or multiple assignments: BY empanelling consultants for a period, using suitable eligibility/ qualification criteria.

7.23 GTE Tenders — Special Aspects of Financial EvaluationGfullest text

1. Currency of bid and conversion:

In GTE, foreign bidders have the flexibility to quote prices and receive payments in either Indian rupees or freely convertible currencies (US Dollars, Euros, Pound Sterling, Yen, other relevant currencies, or a combination).

However, prices for goods, works, or services (including agency commission) performed or sourced in India must be quoted and paid for in Indian rupees. Indian bidders are required to quote in INR only.

2. The loading sequence to arrive at DDP/ FOR destination cost — a step-by-step calculation:

A) taxes on import: Import of goods or services or both attracts integrated tax (IGST). The IGST rate and GST cess shall be applicable on the 'Customs assessable value' plus the 'basic customs duty applicable thereon'. The offers would be compared based on the principle of the total outgo from the Procuring Entity's pockets.

B) the dual-quotation requirement: "the foreign bidders are normally asked, in the tender documents, to quote both on a FAS/ FOB basis and also on a CFR/ CIF basis — duly indicating the break-up of prices for freight, insurance, and so on — with purchasers reserving the right to order on either basis. They should also indicate the customs tariff number and customs duty applicable in India."

the seven-step loading:

c) the comparison basis — two cases:

  • IF both Indian and foreign bidders have quoted, the comparison would be made based on DDP/ for/ FOT destination, including all applicable taxes and duties (on the principle of the total outgo from the Procuring Entity's pockets).
  • In case there are no domestic bidders, a comparison of offers can be made based on CIF/ landed costs — since the rest of the costs would be the same for all bidders.

7.24 Evaluation of Concurrent Application: MSE and Make in India Policies

"the concurrent application of the two procurement preference orders — i.e., the MSE procurement order of 2012 and the PPP-MII order — May create confusion for the procuring entities on how to evaluate the bids falling within the purview of both policies.

To bring predictability both to the procuring entities and bidders, DoE has issued guidelines in this regard." (OM No. F.1/4/2021-PPD dated 18.05.2023.)

7.25 Evaluation in Rate Contracts [G ONLY]

1. If stipulated in the tender documents that this is a tender process to enter "Rate Contract(s)", THEN additional clauses (including Performance Security, fall clause, etc.) shall be incorporated therein, and the evaluation would be done accordingly.

2. Procedures stipulated in this Chapter shall be applicable mutatis mutandis. The procedure for negotiations/ counter-offers and splitting of contracts (parallel contracts) is slightly different in Rate Contract. One-time or standing approval of the Secretary of the Department May be taken for this procedure.

3. The counter-offer procedure for parallel rate contracts:

A) initially, the Rate Contract would be awarded to the L-1 bidder. Then the price of L-1 shall be counter-offered to the higher-quoting responsive bidders (under intimation to L-1) — asking them to send their revised bids online on the e-procurement portal, to be opened at a specified place, date, and time. The L-1 bidder would be specifically informed that it May, if it desires, reduce its price, and send its revised bid accordingly.

The bidders who accept the counter-offered rate or a rate lower than that would be awarded parallel rate contracts. If L-1 bidder lowers its rate in its revised offer, the same would also be accepted with effect from that date, and its Rate Contract would be amended accordingly.

B) where L-1'S price is not reasonable: "price negotiation with the bidders should be severely discouraged. However, in the case where parallel rate contracts are necessary — even if the lowest responsive bidder (L-1) price is not reasonable — negotiation May be conducted with the L-1 bidder in the first instance.

c) all such parallel rate contracts would be released transparently and simultaneously.

4. The catalogue basis — for products that cannot be equitably compared:

If stipulated in the tender document, in the case of:

— where the design feature, performance parameters, etc., differ significantly among the products of different manufacturers — and even between different models of the same manufacturer — and where equitable comparison of prices is not feasible:

5. Period: A Rate Contract shall be for the period specified in the tender document — or one year if not so specified.

7.26 Variation of Quantities at the Time of Award [G ONLY]

7.27 Option Clause [G ONLY]

1. When and at what percentage:

Normally, for raw materials/ consumables of regular and year-on-year recurrent requirements, all tenders of value above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh — to take care of any change in the requirement during the currency of the contract — a plus/ minus option clause [normally 25 (twenty-five) per cent] May be incorporated in the tender document.

However, the ca May approve the inclusion of such a clause in lower denomination tenders, if such items have a history of frequent disruptions in the continuity of supplies.

The model clause:

2. The hedging caution: "the higher the option limit, the more uncertainty there is for the bidders in formulating their prices — and the more chance of hedging the prices quoted to take care of such uncertainties; Hence, the option limit should be carefully considered only in justifiable requirements."

3. There should be no option clause in development orders.

4. The ca-determination Rule: "the quantum of the option clause will be excluded from the value of tenders for the purpose of determining the level of ca in the original tender."

7.28 Splitting of Contracts / Parallel Contracts [G ONLY]

1. The default: "unless otherwise stipulated in TIS/ AITB, there shall be no parallel orders or splitting quantities among more than one bidder."

7.28.1Case A — Splitting WITHOUT prior declaration

"however, after due processing, if it is discovered that the quantity to be ordered is more than what the L1 bidder alone is capable of supplying, and there was no prior declaration in the tender documents to split the quantities — then the quantity being finally ordered May be distributed among the other bidders in a manner that is fair, transparent and equitable, based on objective data available in the bids (e.g., eligibility criteria, quantity/ delivery):

A) as far as feasible, counter-offer the L1 rate to such firms;

B) if distribution at the counter-offered rate is not feasible, then distribution May be done at the rates quoted by such bidders — if their rates are still within the zone of reasonableness."

7.28.2Case B — Splitting WITH prior declaration, and the 70:30 / 50:30:20 ratios

in case of:

— it May be advantageous to decide in advance to have more than one source of supply.

In such cases, a parallel contract clause should be added to the tender documents, clearly stating that the Procuring Entity reserves the right to split the contract quantity.

THE manner of deciding the relative share of L1 and the rest should be clearly defined, along with the minimum number of suppliers sought.

the variation latitude: "these ratios are approximate, and the Procuring Entity May marginally vary quantities to suit: Capacity/ past performance of the bidder · unit loads of packing or transportation · relative ranking of the bids · delivery period offered · existing load of bidder · and other similar factors affecting smooth supplies."

7.28.3The Five Allocation Guidelines (applicable in BOTH cases)

a) L1 should be awarded at least the percentage mentioned above, or his quoted quantity/ spare supply capacity — whichever is lower.

B) in case the quantity thus allocated for L1 is less than the prescribed percentage — higher percentages than those stipulated for L2 (and L3, and so on) May be considered To cover the entire tender quantity.

C) for the rest of the contract quantity, the lowest rate accepted will be counter-offered to the L2 party. On acceptance, the order will be placed on L2 for the respective (or increased) percentage or the quoted quantity/ spare supply capacity, whichever is lower — and so on to other higher bidders. In case of non-acceptance by L2, a similar offer shall be made to L3 and L4, and so on.

D) in case of shortfalls, the percentage of allocation of bidders in sequence May be proportionately increased — and, if unavoidable, more bidders than the minimum number specified May be considered, keeping the sanctity of ranking of bidders.

e) in case higher-priced bidders do not agree to match the L1 price, action as per case a(b) above May be considered.

7.28.4The Two Pre-conditions Before Splitting

"in either situation, before splitting the quantity, distribution shall be subject to:

I) purchase preference to MSME and 'class-i local supplier' (under Make in India order); And

ii) rates of L1 being considered reasonable — and if it is not reasonable, negotiation (if permissible) with the L1 party May be carried out before splitting of quantities, with the approval of the ca — otherwise there would be no alternative but to re-tender the requirement."

7.29 Reasonableness of Prices

1. The mandatory declaration: "in every recommendation of the TC for an award of contract, it must be declared that the rates recommended are reasonable."

if the rates received are considered abnormally low or unreasonably high, action May be taken as per Paras 7.30 and 7.32 respectively — or, as per Para 7.34, reject any or all bids; Abandon/ cancel the tender process and issue another tender.

2. No blind reliance on the estimate: "in large-value tenders, blind reliance on the cost estimate is not recommended for assessing reasonableness. More than one method of estimation of cost May be used to triangulate a reasonable price."

3. The seven cautions on using last purchase price (lpp):

Where there is no estimated cost, a comparison with the last purchase price (lpp — the price paid in the latest successful contract) is the basis for judging reasonableness. The following points May be kept in mind:

#Caution
aTHE basic price, taxes, duties, transportation charges, packing and forwarding charges should be indicated separately — and the comparison should be on basic price
bwhere the firm holding the lpp contract has defaulted, the fact should be highlighted — and the price paid against the latest contract placed prior to the defaulting lpp contract, where supplies have been completed, should be used
cwhere the supply against the lpp contract is yet to commence (i.e., delivery is not yet due), it should be taken as lpp with caution — especially if the supplier is new; the price paid against the previous contract may also be kept in view
dwhere the price indicated in the lpp is subject to variation, or if it is more than a year old — THE updated basic lpp, as computed in case of the Price Variation Clause (PVC), May also be indicated
ein the case of wholly imported stores, the comparison of the last purchase rate should be made with the net CIF value at the current foreign exchange rate
f"it is natural to have marginal differences in prices obtained at different cities/ offices for the same item, due to their different circumstances. The prices obtained are greatly influenced by quantity, delivery period, and terms of the contract"
g"prices paid in emergencies, or prices offered in a distress sale, are not accurate guidelines for future use. Such purchase orders and TC proceedings should indicate that: "These prices are not valid lpp for comparison in future procurement.""

7.30 Consideration of Abnormally Low Bids (ALB)

1. The definition:

the procedure:

  • The Procuring Entity May seek written clarifications from the bidder — including detailed price analyses of its bid price in relation to:
  • if, after evaluating the price analyses, the Procuring Entity determines that the bidder has substantially failed to demonstrate its capability to deliver the contract at the offered price — the Procuring Entity May reject the bid/ proposal, and evaluate the next higher bidder (and so on).

2. No normative percentage:

"due care should be taken while formulating the specifications [W: "preparing the drawings, formulating specifications"] at the time of preparation of the tender document — to safeguard against the submission of abnormally low bids."

3. Predatory pricing: "in the case of predatory pricing as well, procuring entities May refer to the above consideration of abnormally low bids to assist themselves in the finalisation of tenders." (OM No. F.12/17/2019-PPD dated 06.02.2020.)

4. The additional Security Deposit Rule — a common misconception corrected:

7.31 Cartel Formation / Pool Rates / Bid Rigging

7.31.1The Statutory DefinitionG

"the Competition Act defines bid rigging as agreements that have the effect of eliminating or reducing competition, or adversely affecting or manipulating the process of bidding."

the forms of bid rigging:

7.31.2The Five Tell-tale Signs of a Cartel

Sometimes, a cartel of bidders quotes equal/ marginally different rates (pool rates) Against a tender, whereas possibly:

#G GOODSW WORKS
arates quoted (and breakup thereof) are equal — despite their manufacturing/ logistics costs being different due to their scale of production/ locationquoted prices and scope of works: Prices quoted (and their detailed breakdowns) are suspiciously similar — despite significant differences in the proposed approach to completing the works. *Look for variations in methodologies, materials, or timelines that could justify price differences*
bthe rate manages to be L1the rates quoted by two or more bidders manage to be L1
cin a variation, the rates May not be exactly equal, but May be close enough to make the cartel members L1, L2, L3, etc.(same)
drespective quoted quantities by these bidders are much less than the tendered quantity — leaving no option but to distribute quantities among these bids
etheir bids have other uncanny similarities — i.e., the same layout or typographical errors.
"bids from the same IP address raise suspicion — but by itself May not be a strong indicator of a cartel. In such cases, other factors mentioned in this Para should be assessed to judge cartelisation."
unexplained similarities in bids: Bids from different contractors exhibit unusual similarities beyond pricing — including identical typos, grammatical errors, formatting, or even the use of uncommon terminology

7.31.3Why It Matters Even When Rates Are Reasonable

the evidentiary difficulty G:

the legal characterisation: Such cartel formation/ pool rates abuse the transparency of Public Procurement and are a violation of the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement. Such tactics leading to an "Appreciable adverse effect on competition" (AAEC) is an offence under the Competition Act, 2002, as amended by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2007.

7.31.4The Cartel Formation/ Pool Rates Clause — Two Preventive Measures

To discourage such practices, the Procuring Entity May include in all tender documents a cartel formation/ pool rates clause, reserving its rights to take the following actions without assigning any reasons:

A) the minimum-quantity requirement:

ManualMinimum percentage a bidder must bid for
G GOODS"more than a minimum specified percentage — say 25% — of the tendered quantity; Otherwise, their offer shall be rejected"
W WORKS"for those works procurements where schedules or division of work is possible — more than a minimum specified percentage, say 20% or 30%"

b) the warning: Warn that the Procuring Entity May take any/ all punitive actions available under the Code of Integrity — including removal from the list/ panel of registered sources or debarment — besides reporting the transgression to the competition commission, and concerned trade associations like FICCI, ASSOCHAM, NSIC for suitable punitive action.

c) the negotiation bar — reproduced verbatim in the cartel section:

7.31.5The Four Ways to Decide a Tender Where a Cartel Is Suspected

#Permitted action
ireject all bids from the suspected cartel formation and decide the tender accordingly
iiplace an order on any one or more firms from among the cartel, for any quantity, with the exclusion of the rest — with or without negotiation or counter-offering
NOTE: "the selection of firms for this May be based on a transparent logistics parameter — i.e., quicker delivery, nearer location of source, relatively better past performance, etc."
iiiwhenever a tender is floated for purchase exclusively from an Approved Vendor List [W: pre-qualified/ approved sources], and cartel formation is suspected among all such sources — the Procuring Entity May place orders on bidders who are not in the Approved Vendor List, for any quantity
ivwherever a specified ratio for splitting of quantities among 2/3 sources is stipulated, and cartel formation is suspected among the lower 2/3 bidders — place orders on any number of bids beyond such ratios, or decide the tender as per (i) or (ii) above

W — the additional remedial measures:

7.32 Negotiations for Reduction of Prices

(Rule 173(xiv) of GFR 2017)

7.32.1The General Rule and the Two Absolute Bars

7.32.2The Four Exceptional Circumstances

"price negotiations May not be considered except under the following exceptional circumstances:"

a) where THE L1 price is not considered to be reasonable, AND:

  • I) the procurement is done on a nomination basis; or
  • ii) procurement is from single or limited sources; or
  • iii) in situations where the requirements are urgent, and the delay in re-tendering for the entire requirement due to the unreasonableness of the quoted rates would jeopardise essential operations, maintenance, and safety:

b) where there is suspicion of cartel formation — which should be recorded.

7.32.3Who Decides, and the Recording Duty

"the decision whether to invite fresh tenders or to negotiate (and with whom) should be made by the tender accepting authority, based on the recommendations of the TC.

Convincing reasons must be recorded by the authority recommending negotiations.

The ca should exercise due diligence while accepting a tender, ordering negotiations, or calling for a re-tender — and a definite timeframe should be indicated."

7.32.4What Counts as a Negotiation — and What Does Not

SituationIs it a negotiation?
a counter-offer TO L1 To arrive at an acceptable rateYES — shall amount to a negotiation
A COUNTER-OFFER (at the rates accepted by L1) to L2, L3, and so on, in case of splitting of quantities (and in parallel Rate Contracts)NO — shall not be deemed to be a negotiation
dynamic bids in the reverse Auction ProcessNO — are not to be considered as negotiations

7.32.5The Four-Step Negotiation Procedure

after the ca has decided to call a specific bidder for negotiation:

A) extend validity first: "it must be understood that if the period of validity of the original offer expires before the close of negotiations, the original offer will not be available for acceptance. The period of validity of the original offer must, therefore, be extended — wherever necessary — before negotiations."

b) the invitation letter: The bidder should be addressed as per the prescribed format, so that the rates originally quoted by him shall remain open for acceptance in the event of failure of the contemplated negotiation.

c) the signed declaration: "a negotiation meeting should be started only after obtaining a signed declaration from the negotiating supplier."

d) the revised bid — and the "price only" rule:

7.33 Negotiations to Freeze Description of Service [C ONLY]

1. Why it is called "negotiation" at all:

2. What May be discussed — and the anti-dilution rule:

"negotiations are not an essential part of the selection process. In many cases, however, it is felt necessary to conduct negotiations with the selected consultant for discussions of:

3. FINANCIAL NEGOTIATIONS — the three strict limits:

7.34 Cancellation of Procurement Process / Rejection of All Bids / Re-tender

(Rule 173(xix) of GFR 2017)

1. The right and its limits:

The Procuring Entity has the right to cancel the process of procurement or reject all bids at any time before intimating acceptance of a successful bid.

the six grounds for cancellation:

#Ground
aIF THE quantity and quality of requirements have changed substantially, or there is an un-rectifiable infirmity in the tender process
bWHEN none of the bids is substantially responsive To the requirements of the procurement documents
cnone of the technical proposals meets the minimum technical qualifying score
dIF effective competition is lacking. However, lack of competition shall not be determined solely based on the number of bidders
ethe bids'/ proposals' prices are substantially higher than the updated cost estimate or available budget
fif the bidder whose bid has been found to be the lowest evaluated bid fails to sign the procurement contract, or fails to provide the Performance Security, or otherwise withdraws from the procurement process — the Procuring Entity shall re-tender the case

2. The balancing test — and the irreversibility Rule:

3. Approval and communication: The ca should accord approval for re-tendering based on the reasons/ proper justification in writing.

The decision to cancel shall be immediately communicated to all bidders that participated; Bids, if not opened, would not be opened and, in off-line tenders, be returned unopened. EMD, cost of tender document (if any) etc. Should be promptly returned.

4. The pre-retender check: "before re-tendering, the Procuring Entity is first to check whether — while floating/ issuing the enquiry — all requirements and formalities such as standard conditions, industry-friendly qualification criteria, technical and commercial terms, wide publicity, sufficient time for tendering, and so on, were fulfilled. If not, a fresh enquiry is to be issued after rectifying the deficiencies."

7.35 Letter of Award (LoA) to the Successful Bidder

1. The notification and when the contract is legally formed:

Prior to the expiry of the period of bid validity, the successful bidder will be notified — briefly indicating relevant details such as quantity, specification of the goods ordered, prices, and so on — in writing by a registered letter or any other acknowledgeable and foolproof method That his bid has been accepted.

in the same communication, the successful bidder is to be instructed to furnish the required Performance Security within a specified period (generally 14 to 28 days, depending on the amount).

2. Verification of originals before the LoA:

Before issuing an LoA, the Procuring Entity May — at its discretion — ask the bidder to submit for verification the originals of all such documents whose scanned copies were submitted online.

If so decided, the photocopies shall be verified and signed by the competent officer and kept in the records as part of the contract agreement.

3. The value of the contract should include taxes/ duties/ levies, IF ANY.

4. The no-third-party Rule — a point frequently tested:

5. The GeM seller id requirement: "it shall be mandatory for the successful bidder to register on GeM and obtain a unique GeM seller id — before the placement of LoA or the contract. This id shall be incorporated into the contract."

6. C — the cross-checking duty at RfP stage: "before a final award is announced, the technical and financial credentials of the selected bidders/ consultant should be cross-checked to the extent feasible. This is especially important at RfP stage — since normally such a verification is not done at the EoI stage."

7.36 Publication of Award of Contract and Return of EMD

(Rule 173(xviii) of GFR 2017)

1. Mandatory publication: The details of the award of the contract and the name of the successful bidder should be mentioned mandatorily on the CPPP/ GeM (as relevant), and in the notice board/ bulletin/ website of the concerned Ministry or Department/ e-procurement portal.

2. THE EXCEPTION — and the special CPSE six-month rule:

3. Return of bid securities: Upon the successful bidder furnishing the signed agreement and Performance Security, each unsuccessful bidder will be promptly notified, and their Bid Security shall be returned without interest within 30 (thirty) days of notice of award of contract.

The successful supplier's Bid Security shall be adjusted against the SD, or returned as per the terms of the tender documents.

7.37 Performance Security at the Award Stage

The supplier receiving the LoA is required to furnish the required Performance Security (if it is part of tender conditions) in the prescribed form, within the period prescribed in the tender document (generally 14 to 28 days, depending on the amount).

The escalation sequence on failure:

7.38 Acknowledgement of Contract by the Successful Bidder and Execution

1. After the successful bidder is notified, he will be sent an agreement in duplicate for signature and return — incorporating all agreements between the parties.

2. The acknowledgement timelines and exemptions:

SituationTimeline
OTEacknowledge and unconditionally accept, sign, date and return the agreement within 14 (fourteen) days From the date of issue of the contract
GTEwithin 28 (twenty-eight) days

when acknowledgement is not required:

  • IN low-value contracts below rupees two and a half lakh;
  • When the bidder's offer has been accepted in its entirety without any modifications;
  • "if both parties simultaneously sign the contract across the table — further acknowledgement from the supplier is not required."

if the supplier raises issues: "while acknowledging the contract, the supplier May raise issues and/ or ask for modifications against some entries; Such aspects shall be immediately investigated for necessary action — and thereafter, the supplier's unconditional acceptance of the contract must be obtained."

it should also be made known that if he does not furnish the required Performance Security or does not sign the contract within the stipulated target dates — such non-compliance will constitute sufficient ground for punitive actions.

"the Procuring Entity May also consider getting the contract digitally signed."

3. Who May sign: "all contracts shall be signed and entered into after receipt and verification of the requisite Performance Security — by an authority empowered to do so by or under the orders of the president [Article 299 of the Constitution]."

7.39 Framing of Contract

the contract should be strictly as per the bid conditions and the accepted offer.

7.40 Audit Trails — Procurement Records

1. The obligation: The Procuring Entity must maintain and retain audit trails, records and documents generated or received during its procurement proceedings — in chronological order. The files should be stored in an identified place and retrievable for scrutiny whenever needed, without wasting time.

2. The e-procurement dispensation:

The nine categories of documents to be maintained (electronically or physically): a) documents pertaining to the determination of the need for procurement; B) description of the subject matter Of the procurement; C) statement of the justification for the choice of a mode of procurement other than open competitive tendering; D) documents relating to pre-qualification and registration of bidders, if applicable; e) PARTICULARS OF issue, receipt, opening of the bids and the participating bidders at each stage; f) requests for clarifications and any reply thereto — including the clarifications given during pre-bid conferences; g) bids evaluated and documents relating to their evaluation; h) contracts and contract amendments; i) complaint handling; Correspondence with clients, consultants, and banks.

3. The physical-file structure — and the two-volume practice:

In organisations where physical files are still maintained, the procurement file should start with the indent And related documents, followed by:

in case of bulky bids received, all bids May be kept in a separate volume — with a copy of accepted bids later being put on the main volume.

7.41 Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1evaluation of bids is subjective, or leaves room for manipulation and biased assessments. Some TC members May not be independent or neutral, or May have a conflict of interest (coi).TC should give an undertaking at the appropriate time that none of the members has any coi With the companies/ agencies participating. Any member having a coi should refrain from participating in the TC.
"some members of a TC May be subordinate to, or related to, others in a strictly hierarchical organisation — so that they are not free to express independent views. Such a situation must be avoided when constituting the TC."
2discriminating against a best value bid: "in case a bidder's bid (not in the good books of the Procuring Entity) becomes the best value bid as per the evaluation criteria, some of the following actions May have risks of misuse. There is also a reverse risk in these actions if a favourite becomes the best value bid."(Mitigation for each type is at rows 3–6 below.)
3unwarranted re-tendering: Rejecting all bids and calling for re-tendering on the pretext of prices being high, change of specifications, budget not being available, and so on.Refer to para 7.34 for safeguards. "in case a procurement is re-bid more than once, approval of one level above the ca May be taken." Also see the complaint mechanism.
4sudden quantity reduction/ increase or splitting of quantity/ work at the time of award. "many organisations have provisions for change/ splitting in the bid quantity at the time of award. Some organisations vary quantity even without such provisions."bid conditions must specify a limit beyond which the originally announced quantity/ scope cannot be reduced/ increased.
If parallel contracts are envisaged, clear criteria for the splitting May be specified in the tender documents beforehand.
5unwarranted negotiations: Negotiations are called without justification. Sometimes, a counter-offer is made to discourage the lowest acceptable bidder.Normally, there should be no post-tender negotiations. In certain exceptional situations — procurement of proprietary items · items with limited sources of supply · items where there is suspicion of a cartel formationnegotiations May be held with L-1. In case of L-1 backing out, there should be re-tendering.
6unwarranted delays in finalising or varying the terms of the contract agreement: "even after the TC recommendations are accepted, the signing of the contract is delayed on one pretext or the other. Although there is a standard contract form in the tender documents, the contract May be drafted in a fashion that favours or discourages the successful bidder."A target timeline for the finalisation of procurement should be laid down. Delays and reasons thereof should be brought out before the ca on the file at the time of tc's acceptance or contract signing.
"the contract should be strictly as per the bid conditions and accepted offer."
7anti-competitive practices: "bidders which would otherwise be expected to compete, secretly conspire to frustrate the buyer's attempts to get VfM in a tender process. Anti-competitive conspiracies can take many forms. Sometimes, the officers involved in procurement May be part of such collusion."

(The five named forms are set out below the table.)
"these strategies, in turn, May result in patterns that procurement officials can detect — and steps can be taken to thwart such attempts."
"such anti-competitive activities come under the purview of competition law, which provides stringent penalties."
"regular training should be held for officers involved in procurement — to detect and mitigate such practices, and also to use the competition law against such bidders."

The Five Named Forms of Anti-Competitive ConductG

FormDefinition
1. Bid coordination"the bidders collude to quote the same or similar rates that are much higher than the reasonable price — to force the buyer to settle the procurement at exorbitant prices."
2. Cover bidding"cover bidding is designed to give the appearance of genuine competition, by way of supporting bids for the leading bid-rigger."
3. Bid suppression"bid suppression means that a company does not submit a bid for final consideration, in support of the leading bid-rigger."
4. Bid rotation"in bid-rotation schemes, conspiring firms continue to bid — but they agree to take turns being the winning (i.e., lowest qualifying) bidder in a group of tenders of a similar nature."
5. Market allocation"competitors carve up the market and agree not to give competitive bids for certain customers, or in certain geographic areas."

Appendix to Chapter 7 — Part B: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1QCBS weightage — invertedC: Technical 70% / Cost 30% · W & NC: Technical ≤30% / Cost ≥70%
2The identical sentence "since the weightage of the COST element … is as high as 70 per cent" appears in both C and NCAn evident internal inconsistency in the CS Manual, which has just assigned 70% to TECHNICAL
3QCBS worked example — the winnerC: Proposal C at Rs. 106, the HIGHEST-priced bid · W: Bid C at Rs. 105, the second-lowest bid · NC: same data as C but H-1/H-2/H-3 order changes
4QCBS tie-breakerCommon: the bid with the higher TECHNICAL score becomes H-1
5evaluation of the quality — technical proposals(four criteria; absolute-not-comparative grading; 5-grade A–E rating scale at 100/80/60/30/10%; first reading without scoring; grading defined before opening; individual scoring; joint review and averaging; 75 minimum qualifying mark; debriefing duty)C ONLY
6The model marks scheme (5–10% / 20–50% / 30–60% / 0–10%)C ONLY
7Methodology sub-criteria (30/50/20) and Key Professionals sub-criteria (20/80)C ONLY
8Fixed budget selection (FBS) — the two methodsC ONLY
9negotiations to freeze description of service(and the consequent absence of negotiation annexures in CS)C ONLY
10"In no case should financial negotiation result in an INCREASE in the financial cost as originally quoted"C ONLY
11Arithmetic correction permitted in TIME-BASED contracts but not in LUMP-SUM contractsC ONLY
12"A technical proposal pre-disclosing any material pricing information shall also be rejected"C ONLY
13MII purchase preference not applicable where evaluation uses QCBS or FBSNC(stated expressly)
14"Members of the STC shall not be involved" in the QCBS evaluation committeenc only
15evaluation in rate contracts(counter-offer procedure for parallel RCs; Catalogue basis on NDP/MRP; one-year default period)G ONLY
16variation of quantities at award — 15% defaultG ONLY
17OPTION CLAUSE — 25%, above Rs 50 lakh, none in development orders, excluded from CA determinationG ONLY
18Splitting/ parallel contracts — 70:30 and 50:30:20 ratios; the minimum-quote anti-cartel safeguard; five allocation guidelinesG ONLY
19Tie at l-1 — the four-step tie-breaker (SC/ST or Women MSE → other MSE → higher turnover → earlier DPIIT registration; GeM methodology on GeM)G ONLY
20Evaluation of multiple schedules/ items/ destinations — the three casesG ONLY
21"Net of GST" for CPSEs availing Input Tax CreditG ONLY
22GTE loading sequence — 1% port handling, customs/CVD/surcharges, clearing agency, inland freight, GST, LC charges; CIF comparison where no domestic biddersG ONLY
23Evaluation of bids involving samples/ demos; pre-production sample; cancellation without repercussionG ONLY
24The six "critical provisions" deemed material if deviated fromG(fullest statement)
25"The CA may ask the TC to explain the report but should not request that evaluation be changed"G
26Financial bid opening to be 2–5 days after announcement of techno-commercial resultsG
27Abnormally Low Bids — "resource mobilisation" included in the price-analysis headsW(G omits it)
28ALB — "due care while preparing the drawings, formulating specifications"W(G says only "formulating the specifications")
29Cartel sign — "quoted quantities much less than tendered quantity" and "same IP address raises suspicion but is not by itself a strong indicator"G ONLY
30Cartel sign — "prices suspiciously similar despite significant differences in the proposed approach"W ONLY
31Minimum quote percentage to defeat cartelsG: say 25% · W: say 20% or 30%, where schedules or division of work is possible
32Cartel remedies — detailed cost analysis by experts; encouraging new firms to enlist; switching to post-qualification; packaging/ slicingW ONLY
33Reporting cartels to FICCI, ASSOCHAM, NSIC by nameG ONLY
34Reasonableness — the seven LPP cautions, incl. "these prices are not valid LPP for comparison in future procurement"G ONLY
35The five named forms of anti-competitive conduct (Bid Coordination, Cover Bidding, Bid Suppression, Bid Rotation, Market Allocation)G ONLY
36"Once a Tender is re-tendered, the bids in the old tender cannot be revived, as per the Indian Contract Act"G
37"In case a procurement is re-bid more than once, approval of one level above the ca may be taken"G
38LoA constitutes legal formation of contract if not conditional on performance security; acceptance complete on submission to postal authoritiesG
39Contract cannot be placed on a subsidiary or authorised dealer — only on the bidder in whose name the bid was submittedG
40Mandatory GeM Seller ID before LoAG
41CPSE commercial-resale disclosure and the six-month deferred publication of award detailsG ONLY
42Acknowledgement within 14 days (OTE)/ 28 days (GTE); exemption below Rs 2.5 lakhG
43Audit Trails — the nine document categories and the two-volume file practiceG(also in W and NC)
44Cross-checking credentials before final award "especially important at RfP stage since verification is not done at EoI stage"C ONLY

end of Chapter 7 (parts a and b)

Chapter 8

Special and Unique Types of Procurement

Merging: Goods Ch. 8 (Procurements with Unique Features) · Consultancy Ch. 9 (Special Types of Engagements) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 8 (Special Types of Non-Consultancy Procurements)

Structural Warning — the Works Manual Has No Such Chapter

three of the four Manuals carry a "special types" Chapter. The works Manual does not.

ManualChapterTitleSections
G GoodsChapter 8Procurements with Unique Features7
W Works — NONE —(its Chapter 7 is Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance — which corresponds to the CONTRACT MANAGEMENT chapters of the other three)
C ConsultancyChapter 9Special Types of Engagements10
NC Non-ConsultancyChapter 8Special Types of Non-Consultancy Procurements12

The Three Chapters Barely Overlap

GOODS GCONSULTANCY CNON-CONSULTANCY NC
Organising principletransaction-structure variants(how the deal is shaped)categories of provider(who is engaged)categories of provider + named services (who, and for what)
ContentsEmergencies/ Disaster · Buy Back · Capital Goods · AMC · NPV · Turnkey · Books & Print MediaSSS · Individual Consultants · Specialised Agencies · NGOs · Procurement Consultants · Financial Advisors · Auditors · Logo Design Competitions · Integrated IT Projects · Digital IndiaEoI Shortlisting · SSS · Individual Service Providers · Specialised Agencies · NGOs · Procurement Agents · Inspection Agents · Housekeeping · Manpower Outsourcing · Private Security · Vehicle Hiring · HaaS

the goods Chapter has ZERO Overlap with the other two. Consultancy and non-consultancy share only four topics: SSS · Individual providers · Specialised Agencies/ Institutions · NGOs.

Concordance for Chapter 8

UnifiedTopicGCNC
Part i — goods-only
8.1Handling Procurement in Emergencies and Disaster Management8.1
8.2Buy Back Offer8.2
8.3Capital Goods/ Equipment (M&P, IT Systems)8.3
8.4Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC)8.4
8.5Net Present Value (NPV)8.5
8.6Turnkey Contract8.6
8.7Procurement of Books and Print Media8.7
part II — common to c and nc
8.8EoI for Shortlisting of Service Providers(Ch. 7)8.1
8.9Single Source Selection (SSS)9.18.2
8.10Selection of Individual Consultants/ Service Providers9.28.3
8.11Selection of Specialised Agencies/ Institutions9.38.4
8.12Selection of Non-governmental Organisations (NGO)9.48.5
8.13Procurement Consultants/ Agents9.58.6
part III — consultancy-only
8.14Financial Advisors9.6
8.15Auditors9.7
8.16Public Competition for Design of Symbols/ Logos9.8
8.17Procurement of Integrated IT Projects9.9(8.12.1)
8.18Hiring Consultants for Digital India Projects9.10
part IV — non-consultancy-only
8.19Inspection Agents8.7
8.20Housekeeping Services8.8
8.21Manpower Outsourcing Services8.9
8.22Private Security Manpower Services8.10
8.23Vehicle Hiring for Office Use8.11
8.24IT Hardware as a Service (HaaS)8.12

Part I — Procurements with Unique Features [GOODS ONLY]

8.1 Handling Procurement in Emergencies and Disaster Management

8.1.1Procurements in Emergencies/ Urgencies

"there are sufficient fast-track procurement modes and flexibilities in the procurement guidelines to tackle procurements in operational emergencies/ urgencies. Enhanced delegations of procurement powers May be incorporated in SoPP to handle such situations."

the four modes, in order of speed:

A) procurement through the GeM PORTAL;

b) direct procurement without quotation;

c) direct procurement by Purchase Committee;

d) SLTE/ limited/ Single Tender Enquiry — with reduced time for submission of bids.

8.1.2Procurement in Crisis Situations — Disaster Management/ Pandemic

1. The declaration order: "an order May be issued by the Competent Authority — declaring the crisis, and promulgating the start of procurement procedures under the crisis, with an estimated validity period till which these would apply."

2. NEED ASSESSMENT — the aggregation task: "the most crucial task is to consolidate and aggregate the requirements from all jurisdictions. Specifications should be rationalised considering the market situation. A centralised list May be prepared containing the quantities (unit-wise) and specifications of each item. Such lists May be preserved for future use."

3. Prolonged or endemic crises: "if a crisis is likely to extend over a prolonged period — or if such disasters are endemic to the region (floods/ cyclones) — rate contracts May be entered into to cater to such situations."

4. "this is not the time for complex methods" — the eight dispensations:

a) procurement through the GeM portal — which responds to such situations as COVID-19;

B) direct procurement without quotation;

C) direct procurement by Purchase Committee;

D) SLTE/ limited/ Single Tender Enquiry, with reduced time for submission of bids;

e) "other than these, unlisted but fast modes of procurement — e.g., enhancement of quantity or repeat orders at the same terms in existing contracts — May be pursued. All contracts May be placed with clauses for quantity enhancements and repeat orders.";

f) "all procurement May be done using single-stage, single-envelope tendering systems.";

g) "even if pre-qualification is felt necessary, self-declaration in a single envelope May be called for — instead of a time-consuming pre-qualification bid.";

h) "pre-bid conferences May be replaced by informal market research."

5. Enhanced delegations: "enhanced delegations of procurement powers in SoPP May be considered, with the approval of the Secretary of the Department."

6. "deliveries that suit the urgent/ emergent and disaster management situation May only be allowed."

7. Reasonableness of prices in a crisis: "the reasonableness of prices in such situations May be judged by keeping in mind that prices in such situations May be higher than in normal procurement — to cater to express deliveries/ disruptions, etc."

8. Model documents disapplied: "model tender documents or general conditions of contract should not apply to emergency procurements."

9. Shortened timelines and alternative bid channels: "minimum timelines for bid submission May be shortened (say 1–3 days). Bids by phone, email, and in-person May also be considered."

10. Single offer acceptable, no re-tender: "norms of minimum bids in a tender May be relaxed — and even a single offer May be accepted without re-tendering. No tender should normally be allowed to be discharged or re-invited."

11. The seven norms that May be dispensed with or relaxed:

12. Minimal documentation: "documents required for various stages — bids, qualification, eligibility, inspection, and payment — must be barely minimum."

13. Inspection: "instead of physical inspections, vendors' self-declaration of quality May be accepted."

14. THE GeM exception in a crisis — a rare permitted departure:

15. Ensuring transparency, integrity, and accountability:

A) as far as feasible, procurement May be done on the GeM portal.

B) the separate record-keeping team: "all procuring agencies should constitute a separate team (without hampering people involved in procurement) to keep a record of justification and quantum of emergency procurements — for future accountability."

c) after the crisis is over — the four closing actions:

16. Getting ready for future disasters: "such emergency procurement systems and lists May be formalised for future disasters — e.g., the enhanced delegations May be integrated into the normal SoPP as delegations in defined crisis."

8.2 Buy Back OfferG

(Rule 176 of GFR 2017)

when it is decided to replace an existing old item(s) with a new/ better version, the Department May trade the existing old item while purchasing the new one, by issuing suitable tender documents for this purpose.

What the tender document must incorporate:

8.3 Capital Goods/ Equipment (Machinery and Plant — M&P, IT Systems, etc.)G

8.3.1What Counts as Capital Goods

"capital goods are machinery and plants (m&p) which create new fixed assets/ utility/ functionality or benefits for the organisation, and have a long and useful life.

This also refers to it procurements of IT systems — comprising one or more of: Hardware · networking · tailor-made and customised software · installation/ commissioning · training · AMC/ CMC · cloud services · and other services."

8.3.2The Seven Distinctive Features

1. Investment decision and item-specific budget:

2. The alternatives to outright purchase — with the staff-car illustration:

3. The embedded works and services:

The procurement involves elements of works and services like:

"all such elements have costs that May be quoted explicitly or implicitly.

A suitable warranty clause should indicate the period of warranty and service levels, as well as penalties for delays in the restoration of defects.

Clauses for including essential initial spares for two years' maintenance, to be supplied along with equipment, May be provided.

If necessary, an appropriate number of years — say three to five or more years, depending on the lifespan of the equipment — AMC May be included in the procurement, detailing its conditions."

4. Total Cost of Ownership:

5. When a turnkey contract is better: "in case the plant and equipment (or an IT system) consists of several machines/ components/ systems that work in tandem — or if it includes services/ works to be done by a third party — an all-encompassing turnkey contract May be a better alternative."

6. The evaluation complexity and its three remedies:

7. Fit for pre-qualification bidding: "experience, capacity, and financial strength of a supplier are important determinants of quality and after-sales support for capital goods; Such procurements are a fit for pre-qualification bidding."

8.4 Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC)G

(Rule 169 of GFR 2017)

1. When an AMC starts: "some goods — especially sophisticated equipment and machinery — need proper maintenance for trouble-free service. For this purpose, the purchase organisation May enter into a maintenance contract.

2. With whom: "the maintenance contract May be entered into either with the OEM manufacturer/ supplier of the goods, or with a competent and eligible firm — not necessarily the manufacturer/ supplier of the goods in question. The purchase organisation should decide this aspect on a case-to-case basis on merit."

3. AMC as part of the equipment procurement — the NPV evaluation rule:

4. AMC procured separately — and the OEM-authorisation rule:

"if the maintenance contract is to be entered into with a competent and eligible supplier separately, then a separate tender enquiry is to be floated… here, the OEM supplier of the goods May also quote — and his quotation, if received, is to be considered along with other quotations received.

5. Payment periodicity: "the terms of payment for the maintenance service will depend on the nature of the goods to be maintained as well as the nature of the services desired. Generally, payment for maintenance is made on a half-yearly or quarterly basis."

6. The Service Level Agreement (SLA) — what it must contain:

A SLA May be incorporated in complex and large maintenance contracts. SLA should indicate guaranteed levels of service parameters LIKE:

this would also include:

the maintenance contract May also include penalties (Liquidated Damages) for unacceptable delays in responses and degradation in the performance output of machines — including provisions for terminations.

7. What is included in the maintenance charge — the four ambiguities to resolve:

8. The most-favoured-customer clause: "a suitable provision should be incorporated in the tender enquiry document and the resultant maintenance contract, indicating that the prices charged by the maintenance contractor should not exceed the prevailing rates charged by him from others for similar services. While claiming payment, the contractor is also to give a certificate to this effect in his bill."

9. Performance security: If the goods to be maintained are sophisticated and costly, the tender enquiry document should also have a provision for obtaining Performance Security. The amount will depend on the nature of the goods, the period of maintenance, and so on.

10. Goods taken away for repair — the Rs 1 lakh BG rule:

11. Withdrawal of the maintenance contract — and the model clause:

"sometimes, during the tenure of a maintenance contract — especially with a longer tenure — it May become necessary for the purchase organisation to withdraw the maintenance contract due to some unforeseen reasons.

8.5 Net Present Value (NPV)G

8.5.1The Concept and the Formula

"net Present Value (NPV) — or net present worth (npw) — of equipment procurement is the sum of the present values of the net cash flows for all the years of the equipment's economic life.

The net cash flows are discounted to arrive at the NPV of equipment, by applying a predetermined discount rate."

SymbolMeaning
rTHE discount rate (in fraction)
CF₀THE quoted price
CF₁, CF₂, CF₃ … CFₙTHE Costs in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd … nth YEARS

8.5.2Two Practical Rules

1. Terminal disposal value: "the terminal disposal value of the equipment is also to be taken as negative expenditure — but since these are most likely to be the same for all bidders, and there is uncertainty in estimating this — it is usually not included in calculating NPV in procurement decisions."

2. Calculation: "the above formula for NPV need not be manually calculated; It can be calculated using the NPV function in excel."

8.5.3THE SOLVED EXAMPLE — where the HIGHEST-priced offer becomes L1

RowExpensesOffer 1Offer 2Offer 3
2Initial investment, including costs of initial spares, installation/ commissioning, Training, etc.₹ 4,00,000₹ 5,00,000₹ 6,00,000
3Annual expenditure on operation (fuel, consumables)₹ 1,50,000₹ 1,00,000₹ 50,000
4Free Warranty — 1st Year₹ 0₹ 0₹ 0
5Free Warranty — 2nd Year₹ 0₹ 0₹ 0
6AMC in 3rd Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
7AMC in 4th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
8AMC in 5th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
9AMC in 6th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
10AMC in 7th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
11NPV₹ 13,51,644.26₹ 12,17,992.50₹ 10,84,340.74

The excel formula (for column B; mutatis mutandis for C and D):

8.6 Turnkey ContractG

"in the context of the procurement of goods, a turnkey contract May include:

what the Procuring Entity specifies:

the contractor's four responsibilities:

  1. Supplying the required goods, machinery, equipment, etc., needed for the plant;
  2. Assembling, installing, and erecting the same at the site as needed;
  3. Commissioning the plant to meet the required output, etc., as specified in the tender enquiry documents.

8.7 Procurement of Books and Print MediaG

1. The categories and the selection factors:

"the procurement of print media encompasses various categories such as books, journals, magazines, and newspapers — each serving distinct purposes like knowledge dissemination and education.

the six factors for deciding procurement:

2. The method — net discount over published price:

3. The one-year onboarding and Rate Contract:

Part II — Common to Consultancy and NON-CONSULTANCY

8.8 Expression of Interest (EoI) for Shortlisting of Service ProvidersNC

8.8.1Why NC Normally Does NOT Use EoI — and When It Does

8.8.2The Two-Phase Process

"these considerations can be best addressed through competition exclusively between qualified shortlisted firms or individuals — in which selection is based on the quality of the proposal and, where appropriate, on the cost of services to be provided.

Such procurement needs to be done in a two-phase process:

Care should be taken to avoid formation of unreasonable qualification criteria prior to shortlisting of bidders, that May lead to restricted participation."

8.8.3The Modes — Rule 183(ii) of GFR 2017

for procurement above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, shortlisting is done in an openly advertised competitive shortlisting process called Expression of Interest (EoI).

THE "Request for Expression of Interest" (REoI) is advertised on CPPP and on GeM. An organisation having its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website.

"a complete services and activities Schedule should be ready before requesting EoI. Attention of known reputed service providers May also be separately drawn wherever possible."

GTE route:"in case it is felt that likely service providers May not be available in India — the EoI process May be done on Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) process, by sending REoI notice to foreign embassies in India and Indian embassies in relevant countries."(Subject to the Rs. 200 crore GTE restriction — Chapter 4 Part B, para 4.9.2.)

8.9 Single Source Selection (SSS)CNC

8.9.1The Three Objections to SSS

8.9.2Continuity for Downstream Work — the pre-declaration rule

8.9.3the Two Cases Where SSS is NOT Permitted for Downstream Work

8.9.4The Justification, the Qualification Check and the Monthly Report

4. For selecting a consultant under this method, the Procuring Entity should prepare a full justification and take the approval of the Competent Authority as per the SoPP.

5. The shortlisting-criteria test: "while selecting the consultant under this method, the Procuring Entity shall ensure that the consultant has the requisite qualification and experience to undertake the assignment. Normally the Procuring Entity shall adopt the same short-listing criteria as applied to similar assignments while evaluating the EoI."

6. The monthly reporting duty:

8.10 Selection of Individual Consultants / Individual Service ProvidersCNC

8.10.1The Three Conditions for Employing an Individual

"individual consultants are normally employed on assignments for which:

a) teams of personnel are not required;

b) no additional outside professional support is required; and

c) the experience and qualifications of the individual are the paramount requirement."

8.10.2The Selection Process — Five Steps

"the procedures for selecting individual consultants are similar to, but much simpler than, those for selecting teams of consultants from a firm."

a) the package: Preparing a consultancy services package including:

B) advertising: Advertisement should be given on CPPP AND ON GeM. An organisation having its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website.

c) method of selection — comparison of at least three candidates:

d) DIRECT NEGOTIATION — the three exceptional cases:

e) staff or associates of consultancy firms — the conflict-of-interest extension:

8.10.3Retired Government Servants

a) the GFR bar: "Rule 177 of GFR, 2017 says that consulting services do not include direct engagement of retired Government servants. They should not be engaged as consultants against regular vacant posts under this Rule. Such engagements should be handled as a personnel matter."

b) the governing instruction: "engagement/ hiring of retired Government servants should be regulated as per doe's OM f.no. 3-25/2020-E.IIIA dated 9TH December 2020."

8.11 Selection of Specialised Agencies / InstitutionsCNC

1. Who they are: "from time to time, ministries/ departments May need to recruit a specialised agency or institution to undertake a specific consultancy/ non-consultancy service, for which it is particularly well suited.

2. When SSS is worth considering: "in some cases, the agency or institution has access to special expertise or special back-up and support facilities — that make it worthwhile considering recruitment on an SSS basis.

3. The government-agency Rule: "in cases of Government and semi-government agency, SSS would be an appropriate method of recruitment."

4. "individual consultants recruited from agencies and institutions May be selected in the same way as any other individual consultants."

8.12 Selection of Non-Governmental Organisations (NGO)CNC

1. When an ngo-only shortlist is permitted — and the mandatory QCBS:

the five ngo-unique qualification criteria:

a) history of work with grassroots communities, and evidence of satisfactory performance;

b) familiarity with participatory development approaches and low-cost technologies;

c) experienced staff conversant with the cultural and socioeconomic dimensions of beneficiaries;

d) committed leadership and adequate management;

e) capacity to co-opt beneficiary participation.

2. When SSS May be used for an NGO — with the worked illustration:

8.13 Procurement Consultants / Procurement AgentsCNC

8.13.1Consultancy or Non-Consultancy — THE 30% QUALITY-WEIGHTAGE TEST

"hiring of procurement agents (pas) can either be done as a consultancy service or non-consultancy service — depending on the objectives and scope of assignment."

AS CONSULTANCYAS NON-CONSULTANCY
Whenif the role primarily involves intellectual analysis, strategic planning, spend analysis, cost control, and advisory functionsif their responsibilities are only outsourcing of routine procedures, without intellectual decision-making
Illustration"when they are asked to design/ implement a new system, or improve Value for Money, or develop strategic procurement, or carry out market building/ sourcing""when they only operate the existing procedures, and crucial decisions are made by the client himself"
the testWHERE quality weightage of more than 30% is called forWHERE quality weightage can be 30% or less

8.13.2Procurement of Specific Items

"when procurement consultants are specifically used for handling the procurement of specific items, and generally working from their own offices — they are paid:

C — the cost-weightage cap and its reason:

NC — the shorter version: "Procurement Agents as outsourcing of Non-consultancy services may be hired… they are paid a percentage (either fixed or inversely proportional) of the value of the procurements handled, or a combination of a percentage and a fixed fee. In such cases, they may be selected under QCBS."

8.13.3Outsourcing of the Whole Procurement Function

  • C:"when procurement agents provide services for procurement for a whole project in a specific unit of the Procuring Entity — it is usually a non-consultancy service, unless the intellectual-analysis criterion is met."
  • NC:"when pas provide support for a whole project in a specific unit of the Procuring Entity — they are usually paid based on the staff-months of effort provided, and they shall be selected following the appropriate procedures using QCBS and time-based contracts."

Part III — CONSULTANCY-ONLY Engagements

8.14 Financial Advisors [C ONLY]

8.14.1The Two Types of Assignment

"procuring entities May hire financial institutions to implement two main types of assignment:

a) in the preparation of studies and financial consultancy; or

b) as advisers on financial restructuring, mergers and acquisitions (m&a), or demerger, etc."

8.14.2The Two Different Selection Regimes

TypeSelection method
TYPE (a) — studies and financial consultancythe advisers can be selected under any of the methods (whichever is considered most suitable, depending on the scope of work)
TYPE (b) — restructuring, M&A, demergerQCBS SHALL BE ADOPTED — whereby the RfP specifies technical evaluation criteria similar to those relevant to standard Consultancy assignments

8.14.3The Two-Part Remuneration — Retainer plus Success Fee

in type (b), the financial proposal would include two distinct forms of remuneration:

a) A lump-sum retainer fee — to reimburse the consultant for services made available; and

b) A success fee — which is either fixed or, preferably, expressed as a percentage of the value of the privatisation transaction.

The weighting between them:

8.14.4When a Success Fee Is Appropriate

8.15 Auditors [C ONLY]

1. The fiduciary rationale:

2. What the ToR and the technical qualifications must cover:

"auditors typically carry out auditing tasks under well-defined ToR and professional standards."

ElementWhat it must consider/ cover
THE ToRapplicable statutory, Government, organisational requirements · and applicable auditing and accounting standards
scope of auditthe jurisdiction · type of audit · contract period · and any additional services
technical qualificationslicensing requirement · general and similar experience · quality certifications · quality and adequacy of staffing · financial capability · auditing approach · and scheduling of the auditor

"a presentation or interview also May be part of the RfP process. A pre-proposal conference May also be considered."

3. The QCBS recommendation — with its stated reason:

8.16 Public Competition for Design of Symbols/ Logos [C ONLY]

(Rule 196 of GFR 2017)

1. The three governing principles:

"certain ministries/ departments are required to conduct competitions for the design of logos/ symbols for their use — which should be conducted in a transparent, fair, and objective manner.

The following guidelines shall be followed by all ministries/ departments, as well as their attached/ subordinate offices and the autonomous bodies/ organisations controlled by them:"

a) design competitions should be conducted in a transparent, fair, and objective manner;

b) wide publicity should be given to the competition — so as to ensure that the information is accessible to all possible participants. This should include publication on the website of the Ministry/ Department/ PSU/ organisation concerned, as also the Central Public Procurement Portal. THE existing e-publishing module can be utilised;

C) the two statutes to be kept in view: "Provisions of any applicable laws — including the official languages Act and the emblems and names (prevention of improper use) Act — should be kept in view while conducting the competition";

2. The eleven contents of the detailed competition notice:

"a detailed competition notice should be drawn up and made public. The notice should, inter alia, [give] details on the following:"

#Content of the Competition Notice
iTHE objectives of the design competition, and the key features expected in the proposed design
iiqualification criteria, if any, for participation
iiiTHE process of evaluation and evaluation criteria — whether it would be single or multi-stage.
"for symbols/ logos intended to represent a drive/ project/ entity of national importance — it May be decided to have the selection through public voting. If so, the modalities should be clearly specified."
ivTHE manner of submission of entries, and the format/ details etc. Expected with the design
vwhether one participant can submit multiple designs
viTHE last date and time for submission
viidetails of entry fees, if any, and the manner of submission
viiiexpected date for announcement of results, and the manner in which the results will be intimated
ixTHE number of prizes to be awarded, and the amount payable for the successful design(s)
x"it May be clearly stipulated that the intellectual property rights of the successful design(s) would rest with the sponsoring agency. The status of the unsuccessful designs — and whether it is intended to return them — should be indicated clearly."
xiif the selection is to be done by a jury of experts nominated for the purpose — the composition of the jury May also be notified

3. After the competition: "once the competition is over and the winning entry selected — this again should be notified in the public domain. If the selection has been by a jury of experts nominated for the purpose, the composition of the jury May be notified."

4. The customisation caveat: "it is evident that every competition would have distinct features — and therefore, the aforesaid guidelines should be used as a general principle while preparing the detailed procedure/ Rules for each such competition."

8.17 Procurement of Integrated IT Projects [C, with NC cross-reference]

8.17.1The Consultancy Characterisation and the Three Types

"procurement of integrated IT projects should normally be carried out as procurement of consultancy services — as the outcomes/ deliverables vary from one service provider to another."

the IT projects May include:

a) bespoke software development;

b) cloud-based services; and

c) composite IT system integration services — involving design, development, deployment, commissioning of IT system including supply of hardware, development of software, bandwidth, and operation/ maintenance of the system for a defined period after go-live, etc.

8.17.2QCBS with Quality Weightage up to 80%

8.17.3Caution against Restrictive and Discriminatory Qualification Conditions

The Three Categories of Restrictive and Discriminatory Conditions — with Named Examples

a) restrictive and discriminatory eligibility criteria in tender conditions:

#Example cited
imandatory presence in gartner magic quadrant — IT and Telecom Products
iimandatory USFDA/ European ce — Medical Devices
iiiexcessive turnover requirement — Rs. 1000 cr for procurement of Rs. 70 cr
ivexcessive past experience — 10 YEARS
vexport experience to G8 countries
viadditional requirement of bank Guarantee for local supplier
viidelayed payment terms to local suppliers

b) restrictive and discriminatory specifications — foreign brands specified:

CategoryBrands named in the Manual
Telecom productscisco · nec · alcatel · siemens
IT productshp · dell · lenovo
LIFTSotis · mitsubishi · schindler · kone · johnson

c) restrictive/ discriminatory specifications or pre-approved foreign brands in works/ turnkey projects:

i) local manufacturer not included in pre-approved list;

ii) specification tailor-made to suit foreign products;

iii) foreign technical standards indicated in the specification;

iv) technical parameters to favour foreign productsviz. "(–) 25-DEGREE temperature compatibility — for EPBX equipment being procured for an airport in Central India."

8.17.4Bespoke Software Development

"bespoke software development involves creating customised software solutions tailored to specific organisational needs. Unlike off-the-shelf software, bespoke applications are designed from scratch — considering unique requirements, workflows, and business processes."

a) DEFINING REQUIREMENTS — and the agile mandate: "engage stakeholders, gather functional and non-functional requirements, and define clear objectives. Stipulate an agile development approach that allows iterative development, frequent feedback, and adaptability. Agile ensures alignment with evolving requirements and minimises risks."

b) technical qualifications: Evaluate bidders based on expertise, track record, and ability to deliver custom solutions — considering technical proficiency, domain knowledge, scalability, security, and support and project management capabilities.

8.17.5Cloud-Based Services

A) defining requirements:

  • I) slas and data privacy: Define slas regarding uptime, performance, and support. Address data privacy and compliance requirements — especially if handling sensitive information.
  • ii) migration strategy: "plan the migration process carefully. Assess existing applications for cloud readiness, choose the right migration approach (lift-and-shift, re-architecting, or hybrid), and ensure minimal disruption."

b) the three cloud service models:

ModelMeaning
Software as a service (SaaS)ready-to-use applications hosted by the provider
platform as a service (PaaS)development platforms and tools for building custom applications
infrastructure as a service (IaaS)virtualised computing resources (servers, storage, networking)

c) technical qualifications: Evaluate cloud providers based on reliability, security, compliance, data sovereignty. Consider well-established cloud services providers.

8.17.6Composite IT System Integration Services

"composite IT system integration involves connecting disparate systems, applications, and data sources to create a cohesive ecosystem."

a) defining requirement:

  • I) integration strategy: Define the integration scope — APIs, middleware, and data synchronisation. Consider whether real-time or batch processing is required.
  • ii) interoperability and scalability: Ensure that integrated components can communicate seamlessly. Scalability is crucial to accommodate future growth and changing business needs.
  • iii) testing and maintenance: Specify testing requirements — unit, integration, and end-to-end testing. Also outline ongoing maintenance and support expectations.

B) technical qualification: Select vendors with expertise in integrating complex systems. Look for experience in integrating diverse technologies (ERP, CRM, legacy systems).

8.18 Hiring Consultants for Digital India Projects [C ONLY]

8.18.1Overview and the NeGD Framework

8.18.2Empanelment — the Three-plus-Two Year Validity

8.18.3The Three Pre-defined Categories

CategoryScope of services
category a — project/ programme management and advisory servicesi) developing project proposals, roadmaps, and templates;
ii) managing e-governance projects — including agile methodologies, bid processes, and change management;
iii) conducting audits (security, performance, and quality) and risk assessments
category b — digital ecosystem and architecture developmenti) designing digital ecosystem blueprints in line with national standards;
ii) preparing implementation plans — including business requirements, data governance strategies, and technology modernisation approaches;
iii) supporting the adoption of scalable and agile solutions
category c — technology management and emerging technologiesi) advising on emerging technologies such as AI, blockchain, IoT, and quantum computing;
ii) ensuring technology compliance, and managing cybersecurity and GIS solutions

8.18.4The Hiring Process — Four Steps

a) request for proposals or concept notes: "ministries, departments, and other Government organisations leveraging negd's empanelment notify empanelled agencies about specific assignments. Agencies submit technical proposals or concept notes, which are evaluated on merit."

b) selection and deployment: "selected agencies deploy consultants with expertise relevant to the project. Consultants are required to provide their own equipment, and work collaboratively with Government teams at designated project sites."

c) terms of engagement: "empanelled consultants operate on a time-limited project basis, without implying employment obligations by NeGD. Sub-contracting of services is prohibited."

d) compliance and terms — the four obligations:

#Obligation
iintellectual property rights: "all intellectual property generated during the project belongs to NeGD or the client organisation."
iiperformance standards: "consultants must adhere to timelines and quality benchmarks specified in the work order."
iiipenalties and termination: "delays or non-performance can result in penalties up to 10% of the project value — or termination of the engagement."
ivconfidentiality: "consultants must maintain confidentiality of all project-related data."

Part IV — NON-CONSULTANCY-ONLY Services

8.19 Inspection Agents [NC ONLY]

1. Why it is a non-consultancy service:

2. Selection and payment: "inspection agents May be selected using QCBS. Payment is usually based on a percentage of the value of goods inspected and certified."

8.20 Housekeeping Services [NC ONLY]

8.21 Manpower Outsourcing Services [NC ONLY]

(DoE, MoF's OM No. F.6/1/2023-PPD dated 06.01.2023)

8.21.1The Regularisation Caution — and the I-Card Rule

8.21.2LCS for High-Value Cases

" Least cost system (LCS) should be considered for procurement of manpower outsourcing service, wherever appropriate — especially in high-value cases."

8.21.3the Minimum and Maximum Service Charges — 3.85% to 7%

8.21.4The Two Clarifications

4. No bar on awarding above the minimum:"there is no bar on award of tenders to the lowest bidder, if he has quoted service charges more than the minimum prescribed service charges in the tender document (i.e., 3.85% to 7%)."(DoE OM No. 6/1/2023-PPD dated 17.01.2024)

5. When the floor price applies — the two limits:

8.22 Private Security Manpower Services [NC ONLY]

8.22.1What the Service Covers, and the PSARA Licence

"security services offer:

" This is one of the most frequently outsourced non-consultancy services.

The Private Security Agencies (regulation) Act, 2005 (PSARA) regulates the functioning of Private Security Agencies in India.

A PSARA licence and labour licence are required for any person or entity that wants to operate a private security agency in India. The State Government (in which the agency will be operating) issues these licences."

8.22.2The Ex-Servicemen (ESM) Resettlement Framework

8.22.3The DGR Empanelment Certificate — Five Years or Age Sixty

8.22.4The Sponsorship Requirement — and the Qualification Waiver

8.22.5The CPSE Mandate

"security manpower service for CPSEs is governed by orders from the Ministry of defence and the Department of public enterprises (DPE).

8.22.6The Mandatory GeM Route and the Three-Agency Sponsorship

8.22.7Selection — the 10% Negotiation Floor and the Seniority Tie-Breaker

8.23 Vehicle Hiring for Office Use [NC ONLY]

8.23.1Mode of Procurement and Type of Contract

8.23.2Contract Period

8.23.3Price Variation Clause (PVC)

8.23.4Bid Design

"appropriate eligibility, qualification, and selection criteria will be defined. Requirements for vehicle quality, technical specifications, and driver standards will also be specified. Different car specifications May be outlined for varying purposes.

A Service Level Agreement (SLA) will be included — which May cover:

8.23.5Basis of Payment — the Daily-Rate Formula

the payment periodicity and the quarterly kilometre adjustment:

ItemWhen paid
Basic monthly charges; Overtime/ night chargesPAID monthly
payments for extra kilometresprocessed on a quarterly basis

8.24 Procurement of IT Hardware as a Service (HaaS) [NC ONLY]

8.24.1The Distinction from an Integrated IT Project

CharacterisationSelection method
integrated IT projectinvolves considerable intellectual inputs, hence handled as procurement of consultancy servicesQCBS with 80%: 20% weightages for quality: Price
hardware as a service (HaaS)A non-consultancy service — hardware on a subscription or lease basis, with slas and maintenanceLCS (L1), OR QCBS with e.g. 30% technical and 70% financial

8.24.2Scope of Services — the Thirteen Elements

#ElementContent
adetailed specificationsclearly outline the specific IT hardware (desktops, laptops, servers, networking cabling/ equipment, ups, etc.) with configurations and performance standards. Specify what software packages (including anti-virus and firewall software) would be included — and that licence shall be kept valid during the contract period
bservice componentsinstallation · configuration · maintenance · repair/ replacement/ upgradation · and dismantling/ removal at the end of contract period
cdelivery and deploymentspecify timelines FOR delivery, installation, and commissioning of hardware at specified locations
dend-to-end supporthelp desk · remote support · on-site support · and any additional managed services
etraining and knowledge transfertrain the Procuring Entity's staff on using the hardware, managing configurations, basic troubleshooting and accessing support services
gdata protection"if any data is handled by the hardware or service provider, stringent data protection clauses must be included — ensuring compliance with relevant Indian regulations such as the information technology Act, 2000 and its associated Rules."
hcybersecurity standardsspecify the required cybersecurity measures and standards (e.g., iso/iec 27001 certification)
iaudit rights"include clauses allowing the procuring authority to audit the service provider's performance, data security, and compliance with the contract at regular intervals."
jrisk management planrequire the bidder to submit a plan to mitigate risks related to hardware failure, service disruptions, or cybersecurity threats
kownership model"clarify that the hardware is provided on a service model (HaaS) — and the ownership and risks remain with the service provider throughout the contract period."
linsurance"service provider would keep the hardware insured at his cost."
masset trackingrequirements for tracking and monitoring hardware assets — including provisions for upgrading hardware during the contract period

8.24.3Contract Period — and the Ten-Year QCBS Option

a) tenure: Specify the duration of the contract (e.g., 3 years, 5 years), indicating whether the contract is renewable and under what conditions.

b) exit clauses: Include provisions for early termination or contract extensions, based on performance.

8.24.4Service Level Agreement (SLA)

ElementRequirement
Uptime requirementsdefine minimum uptime guarantees (e.g., 99.9% availability) and penalties for breaches
response and resolution timesset clear expectations (e.g., 4-HOUR response time for critical failures)
maintenance & supportconditions for periodic preventive maintenance and replacement of faulty hardware at no additional cost
monitoring and reportingregular performance reports regarding hardware functionality, uptime, and SLA adherence
penalties for non-compliance"define penalties for failure to meet SLA requirements, delayed delivery, or non-compliance. Penalties could include financial deductions, contract termination, or blacklisting from future tenders."

8.24.5Payment Terms

a) subscription model: Outline the payment model — typically on a monthly or quarterly subscription basis, with provisions for penalties in case of non-compliance with slas.

B) cost inclusions: Define the total cost — including hardware, software, service charges, taxes, transportation, and any other related costs.

C) milestone-based payments: Payment May be linked to delivery · installation · successful commissioning · periodic payment · and dismantling/ removal at end of contract.

8.24.6Qualification and Evaluation Criteria

A) technical qualification:

#Requirement
iexperience and expertise: Bidders must have prior experience in providing HaaS to Government departments or large enterprises. Minimum of 3 to 5 years' experience in managing similar contracts
iicertifications: Relevant certifications such as ISO 9001 (quality management) and ISO 20000 (IT service management) May be required
iiiOEM authorisation: "if the bidder is not the OEM — an authorisation letter from the OEM must be submitted, to ensure genuine hardware, warranty, and after-sales support."

b) technical evaluation criteria:

i) compliance with specifications — hardware configuration requirements, SLAs, and support service expectations;

ii) scalability — the solution must be capable of accommodating future upgrades or expansions;

iii) vendor performance — past performance, compliance with SLAs, and customer satisfaction reports;

iv) demonstrations/ PoC — "proof of concept (PoC) or demonstrations May be required to assess functionality and performance of the proposed solution."

c) financial qualification: The bidder must demonstrate strong financial health — with required turnover and profitability over the last 3 to 5 years — to ensure financial stability for the duration of the contract.

d) financial evaluation criteria — the TCO basis and the two methods:

Appendix to Chapter 8 — Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1whether the Chapter exists at allG: Ch. 8 · C: Ch. 9 · NC: Ch. 8 · W: NONE
2Chapter titleG: Procurements with Unique Features… · C: Special Types of Engagements… · NC: *Special Types of Non-Consultancy Procurements…*
3Number of sectionsG: 7 · C: 10 · NC: 12
4Organising principleG: Transaction structures · C and NC: Categories of provider
5Overlap between G and the other twoZERO
6Overlap between C and NCOnly four topics: SSS · Individual providers · Specialised Agencies · NGOs
7Emergencies and Disaster Management(the 16 dispensations; crisis declaration order; single offer acceptable without re-tender; Rs 50,000 GeM exception; special time-bound audits after the crisis)G ONLY
8Buy Back Offer(the two-price with/without rebate mechanism)G ONLY
9Capital Goods(item-specific budget; wet-lease alternative; TCO; the three evaluation remedies)G ONLY
10AMC(starts after warranty; NPV discounting of future AMC; the Rs 1 lakh BG for goods taken to the factory; the model termination clause)G ONLY
11net Present Value(the formula, the GPF discount rate, the solved example where the HIGHEST-priced offer becomes L1)G ONLY
12Turnkey ContractG ONLY
13Books and Print Media(Net Discount over Published Price; one-year onboarding; Rate Contract)G ONLY
14EoI for shortlistingC: an entire chapter (Ch. 7) · NC: compressed into para 8.1 and framed as an EXCEPTION to its normal single-stage two-envelope process
15The seismic-survey/ airborne-data-acquisition illustration of when NC needs EoInc only
16SSS — the MONTHLY statement of all nomination selections to the Secretary/ HeadC(distinct from the QUARTERLY nomination report in Ch. 4)
17SSS — downstream continuity must be outlined in the INITIAL RfP; competitive process required if the initial award was non-competitive or the downstream assignment is substantially largerC + NC
18Individual Consultants — comparison of at least three candidates; CEC may interview and recommend remuneration; three direct-negotiation exceptions; COI extends to the parent firmC + NC
19Rule 177 GFR bar on retired Government servants; DoE OM F.No. 3-25/2020-E.IIIA dated 09.12.2020C
20NGOs — QCBS mandatory where the shortlist is all-NGO; the five NGO-unique criteria; SSS permitted for a remote-area single-NGO caseC + NC
21Procurement Consultants/ Agents — THE 30% QUALITY-WEIGHTAGE TEST distinguishing Consultancy from Non-ConsultancyC + NC(near-identical text)
22Cost weight less THAN 50% for procurement consultants handling specific items, with the stated reasonC ONLY(NC omits the 50% cap and its reasoning)
23Financial Advisors — retainer plus success fee; QCBS mandatory for M&A/ restructuring; cost may exceed 30% or LCS for large contracts; when success fees are appropriateC ONLY
24Auditors — QCBS preferred "since in recent times the quality of audit has been a matter of concern"C ONLY
25Logo/ Symbol Design Competitions — Rule 196; Official Languages Act and Emblems and Names Act; the 11-point Competition Notice; IPR rests with the sponsoring agency; public voting for matters of national importanceC ONLY
26Integrated IT Projects — quality weightageC: "even up to 80%" · NC (8.12.1): "80%: 20% for Quality: Price"
27The MeitY/ DPIIT list of restrictive and discriminatory conditions(Gartner Magic Quadrant; Rs 1000 Cr turnover for a Rs 70 Cr procurement; G8 export experience; named foreign brands; the −25°C EPBX-at-a-Central-India-airport example)C ONLY
28Digital India/ NeGD — empanelment valid three years extendable by two; Categories A, B, C; sub-contracting PROHIBITED; IPR belongs to NeGD or client; penalties up to 10% of project valueC ONLY
29Inspection Agents — generally NC because "they only inspect within the established protocols"; payment as a percentage of value inspectednc only
30Housekeeping — GeM offers floor-area-wise vs manpower-wise; "usually the floor area wise cleaning option is more cost effective"; reasons to be recorded on filenc only
31Manpower Outsourcing — the regularisation caution; I-cards must name the contractor; LCS for high-value; service charges floor 3.85% and ceiling 7% (both inclusive of GST); floor applies only to standalone manpowernc only
32Private Security — PSARA 2005; ~60,000 ESM retire annually; at least 90% ESM workforce; DGR certificate for 5 years or age 60 whichever earlier; DGR sponsorship mandatory; sponsored agencies exempt from minimum experience and turnover; mandatory GeM route; DGR sponsors at least three agencies; no negotiation below DGR rate (up to 10%); seniority tie-breakernc only
33Vehicle Hiring — Rate Contract through OTE; one year extendable twice; PVC on fuel and wages; 10 hours/ 100 km per day within 3,000 km monthly; night charges 11 PM–6 AM; extra km paid quarterly with shortfall carried forwardnc only
34HaaS — ownership and risk remain with the service provider; provider insures at his own cost; up to 10-year contract if QCBS; ISO 9001 and ISO 20000; TCO-based evaluation via L1 or QCBS 30:70nc only

end of Chapter 8

Chapter 9 — Part a

Contract Management, Administration, Scope Control and Quality Assurance

Part IAdministration, Scope Control and Quality Assurance

Merging: Goods Ch. 9 (Contract Management) · Works Ch. 7 (Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance) · Consultancy Ch. 10 (Monitoring Consultancy Services Contract) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 9 (Monitoring Non-consultancy Services Contract)

Structural Notes

1. Four different Chapter numbers and four different titles:

ManualChapterTitle
G GoodsChapter 9Contract Management
W WorksChapter 7Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance
C ConsultancyChapter 10Monitoring Consultancy Services Contract
NC Non-ConsultancyChapter 9Monitoring Non-consultancy Services Contract

2. This is the largest Chapter in the entire Manual family — 640 kb across the four Manuals. The Works chapter alone runs to some 50 sub-sections and is by far the most elaborate treatment of contract management anywhere in the four Manuals.

3. The three bodies of material that exist in one Manual only:

Body of materialExists only in
Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue of GoodsGOODS
Aligning stakeholder interests · Monitoring Team and System · Prerequisites to Commencement · Commencement of Work · Mobilisation · Monitoring Resources Deployed · Enforcing Contractor's Obligations · Safeguarding Assets · ESHS · Monitoring Variations/ Extra/ Substituted Items · Revised DPR · Compensation Events · Time at Large · e-Bill · Closure of Contract with its four reconciliationsWORKS
Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC) · Review of Inception Phase · Incentives for Excellence in Contract Execution · Concluding the Assignment and Post-Contract ReviewCS + NC

4. Because of the volume, this chapter is issued in three parts:

  • PART A (this document) — Purpose of Contract Management · CMC · Contract Administration · Scope and Quantity Control · Quality Assurance and Inspections.
  • PART B — Time Control (delays, EOT, Force Majeure, Denial Clause, LD, Performance Notice, Compensation Events, Time at Large) · Cost Control (prices, taxes, payments) · Logistics · Closure of Contract · Post-Contract Review.
  • PART C — Breach of Contract, Remedies and Termination · Dispute Resolution (Excepted Matters, Adjudication, Mediation, Arbitration, Foreign Arbitration, Appointment of Arbitrator, Arbitral Procedure, Challenging Awards, the CPSE mechanism).

Concordance for Chapter 9 — Part A

UnifiedTopicGWCNC
9.1The Purpose of Contract Management9.1.17.110.1.19.1.1
9.2Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC)10.1.29.1.2
9.3Aligning the Interest of the Stakeholders7.2.1
9.4Monitoring Team and System7.2.2
9.5Notice to Proceed, Kick-off Meeting and Prerequisites7.2.310.2.19.2.1
9.6Commencement of Work7.2.4
9.7Mobilisation7.2.5
9.8Review of Inception Phase10.2.29.2.2
9.9Reporting and Monitoring of Progress7.2.2-410.2.39.2.3
9.10Issuing Contract Amendments/ Variations9.7.27.2.810.2.49.2.4
9.11Obligations Control — Deployment of Resources9.7.57.2.6, 7.2.710.2.59.2.5
9.12Incentives for Excellence in Contract Execution10.2.69.2.6
9.13Safeguards for Handing Over Materials/ Equipment9.7.37.2.910.2.79.2.7
9.14Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS)7.2.10
9.15Scope and Quantity Control9.27.3.1–7.3.310.39.3
9.16Quality Assurance and Inspections9.47.3.410.3.29.3.2–9.3.3
9.17Warranty Clause9.4.8

9.1 The Purpose of Contract Management

9.1.1The Governing Proposition — common to all four

W, C and NC add: "implementation of the contract should be strictly monitored — and notices issued promptly whenever a breach of provisions occurs."

9.1.2What Is Handled During This Phase — the four lists compared

G GOODS (8 heads)W WORKS (7 heads)C CONSULTANCY / NC NON-CONSULTANCY (5 heads)
a) Scope of Supply and Quantity Controla) Contract Administrationa) Contract Administration
b) Time Control – Monitoring Delaysb) Monitoring Scope of Work and Quality Assuranceb) Scope Control and Quality Assurance
c) Quality Assurance and Inspectionsc) Time Monitoringc) Time Control
d) Cost Control – Prices, Taxes and Paymentsd) Financial Monitoringd) Cost Control
e) Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue of Goodse) Closure of Contracte) Post-contract evaluation
f) Contract AdministrationPerformance Security · Amendments · Safeguards for handing over materials · Monitoring Supplier Performance · Monitoring Supplier Obligations · Contract closuref) Resolving Disputes and Conflicts
g) Breach of Contract, Remedies and Terminationg) Breach and Termination of Contract
h) Dispute resolution

THE C AND NC Sub-heads of contract administration (nine items): I) issuing the notice to proceed; ii) meetings and reviews; iii) amendments/ variations to the contract; iv) obligations control: Monitoring that key experts and contracted resources are actually employed; v) safeguards for handing over materials/ equipment; vi) resolving problems faced by consultants; vii) dispute resolution and arbitration; viii) breach of contract, remedies, and termination of services prior to the end of the contract; ix) contract closure upon completion.

THE C AND NC Sub-heads of scope control and quality assurance: I) deciding on possible modifications to scope of work and issuing contract variations; ii) monitor that all deliverables are delivered as per contract — reports including draft final report and the final report; iii) quality assurance: Review quality of outcomes at inception phase, mid-term, and final phase.

9.1.3Why Services Contracts Need MORE Intense MonitoringCNC

9.1.4Why Poor Contract Management Costs the Nation [W ONLY]

#The cost
aadditional expenditure burden due to increased costs — crowding out more deserving schemes and projects
baffects viability of projects due to increase in construction [cost] — causing losses to the CPSE or agency concerned
ceconomic burden, due to delayed return on investments
dimposes unnecessary economic burden on affected stakeholders
e"creates a culture of acceptance of delay and avoidable costs — breeding more cases."
f"increased costs of procurement due to monetisation of higher risks, perceived by contractors, of delays and scope creep associated with public-funded projects."

9.2 Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC) [C + NC ONLY]

(Rule 205 of GFR 2017)

9.2.1Constitution

9.2.2The Six Responsibilities of the CMC

"the CMC shall be responsible for:"

  1. monitoring the progress of the assignment;
  2. To oversee that the assignment is carried out as per the contract;
  3. To assess the quality of the deliverables;
  4. To accept/ reject any part of the assignment;
  5. To levy appropriate Liquidated Damages or penalty — if the assignment is not carried out as per the contract, and if the quality of services is found inferior;
  6. And for any such deficiency related to the completion of the assignment.

9.2.3The Expert-Assistance Provision

9.3 Aligning the Interest of the Stakeholders [W ONLY]

9.3.1The Incentive-Structure Principle

9.3.2The Recognition Devices — including naming at work sites

9.3.3The Closing Aphorism

9.4 Monitoring Team and System [W ONLY]

9.4.1The Principle of Proportionality for Contract Management

9.4.2Role of Apex and Management Levels

"procurement and contract management require various levels of authorisation or approvals for technical, administrative, and financial decisions. Many of these approvals are at apex/ managerial levels — which are responsible for macro management of the contract, but May not be involved in day-to-day contract management. However, their roles are important for efficiency of the contract management process."

9.4.3The Contract Manager

The scale Rule:

Contract typeWho the Contract Manager is
Small, routine contractsA single person, who has a portfolio of contracts to manage
large, complex, high-value contractsnormally a team or entity

the five attendant requirements:

  1. "a competent project management team should be set up — including training on project management to the team, if required.";
  2. "a system of project monitoring for each work shall be prepared before start of the work — and the same shall be available at site of work.";
  3. "'Deadlines' or 'contractual milestones' should be set up and tabulated to facilitate monitoring of the progress of work.";
  4. "the work shall be monitored on a quarterly/ monthly basis by the Works Committee — and a status report should be submitted to the Secretary in charge of the concerned Ministry/ Department.";
  5. "execution of the work shall primarily be the responsibility of the nominated Contract Manager. However, for large contracts, senior officers shall also review the progress and quality of the work at various stages of construction."

9.4.4Progress Reporting and Review — the Fourteen-Point MIS ReportW

"there should be a stipulation in the contract for large-value works (magnitude to be specified) — for the contractor to submit a project-specific monthly progress report of the work in a computerised form (management information system reports — MIS reports)."

#Content of the Monthly MIS Progress Report
iproject information — giving the broad features of the contract
iiintroduction — giving a brief scope of the work and the broad structural or other details
iiiconstruction Schedule of the various components — through a bar chart for the next three quarters (or as specified) — showing the milestones, targeted tasks and up-to-date progress
ivprogress chart of the various components planned and achieved — for the month as well as cumulative — with reasons for deviations, if any, in a tabular format
vplant and machinery statement — indicating those deployed in the work, and their working status
viman-power statement — indicating individually the names of all the staff deployed in the work, along with their designations
viifinancial statement — gross value of work done · advances taken · recoveries effected · amounts withheld · net payments · details of cheque payments received
viiia statement showing the extra and substituted items submitted by the contractor and payments received against them · broad details of the bank guarantees, indicating clearly their validity periods · broad details of the insurance policies · advances received and adjusted
ixprogress photographs, in colour, of the various items/ components of the work done up to date — to indicate visually the actual progress
xquality assurance and quality control tests conducted during the month, with the results thereof
xiany hold-up shall be specified
xiidispute, if any, shall also be highlighted
xiiimonthly or fortnightly progress review by Contract Manager and Procuring Entity with contractor May be necessary — to ensure that the contractor deploys sufficient resources to meet the deadlines
xivthe photograph-and-video system — see below

9.4.5Project Management SoftwareW

9.5 Notice to Proceed, Kick-off Meeting, and Ensuring Prerequisites to Commencement

9.5.1Ensuring Prerequisites to Commencement of Work W — the Six Prerequisites

1. Land acquisition: "the process of land acquisition shall be started by the Procuring Entity well ahead, and completed entirely — or at least substantially — by the time the contract is awarded."

2. PERMITS/ APPROVALS — and the delay-claim warning:

The Procuring Entity shall seek requisite statutory approvals/ permission/ clearances/ certificates From concerned local bodies and statutory authorities — including:

the illustrative list of what such clearances cover:

the contractor's side: "the contractor shall give all notices and obtain all other necessary permits and approvals as May be required for the construction — and shall pay for all such permits and approvals."

3. Approval of quarries, borrow areas and materials:

4. Safety at work site — the hazardous substances and the public-protection list:

The SHE/ ESHS apparatus: "most large contracts have a well-defined safety, health & environment (SHE) — also called environmental, social, health and safety (ESHS, with addition of the social factor) — guideline embedded in the agreement.

5. Advance payments: "to enable mobilisation, advance payment(s) are to be given after the signing of the contract — if provided in the contract — on the contractor's submission of an unconditional BG in an acceptable form."

6. INSURANCES — the four checks:

"insurance provisions are valuable risk management tools. The contracting entity must ensure the following:"

a) the insurance policies are in place in accordance with the contract;

b) the coverages are adequate and within the thresholds specified in the contract;

c) the insurance policies contain the essential information — such as coverage, duration, applicability;

d) due diligence is applied to checking the authenticity of the insurance document and payment of insurance premiums.

9.5.2Issuing the Notice to Proceed and the Kick-off MeetingCNC

The Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals frame the same stage as "Issuing Notice to Proceed, Kick-off Meeting and Pre-requisites" — the service analogue of the Works "Work Order" at para 9.6 below.

9.6 Commencement of Work [W ONLY]

The contractor's three submissions: "within the stipulated time, the contractor should submit to the Contract Manager for his consent:

a) THE work program — including the measures proposed by him for work zone safety and mitigation of environmental impact;

b) THE methods statement which the contractor proposes to adopt for execution of the works; and

c) THE quality assurance plan."

9.7 Mobilisation [W ONLY]

Mobilisation of key resources:"the Contract Manager must ensure that the technical [and other key resources are mobilised]…"(and see para 9.11 below on Monitoring Resources Deployed).

9.8 Review of Inception Phase [C + NC ONLY]

The Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals provide for a distinct Review of Inception Phase — the point at which the Procuring Entity satisfies itself, on the strength of the Inception Report (due about six weeks after the commencement date — see Chapter 2, para 2.6.3(c)), that the assignment can be carried out as planned, and that any major inconsistency in the ToR, staffing problems, or deficiency in the Procuring Entity's assistance has been surfaced early.

9.9 Reporting and Monitoring of Progress [C + NC; and W at para 9.4.4]

Common to all four is the requirement of periodic progress reporting, but the instruments differ:

ManualThe reporting instrument
W WORKSThe fourteen-point monthly MIS progress report — see para 9.4.4 above
C ConsultancyThe inception · progress · interim · and final reports — see Chapter 2, para 2.6.3(c)
NC Non-consultancyReporting against the service Level Agreement (SLA) and key performance indicators — see para 9.15.4 below
G GOODSMonitoring of supplier performance and obligations — see para 9.11 below

9.10 Issuing Contract Amendments / Variations

All four Manuals provide for amendment of the contract during execution. The Works treatment is the most detailed, and is set out at Chapter 6, para 6.10.3-1 of this Unified Manual (Variations in Works Contracts, the Variations Register, and the requirement of the Engineer's prior approval from the Procuring Entity).

9.11 Obligations Control — Monitoring Resources Deployed and Enforcing Obligations

9.11.1The Common Object

" Monitoring that key experts and contracted resources are actually employed"(the C and NC formulation) — corresponding to W paras 7.2.6 (Monitoring Resources Deployed by Contractor) and 7.2.7 (Enforcing Contractor's Obligations), and G paras 9.7.4 and 9.7.5 (Monitoring Supplier Performance and Obligations).

9.11.2The Works Apparatus

The Works Manual treats this in two distinct sections:

  • 7.2.6 — monitoring resources deployed by contractor(plant, machinery, and manpower — cross-referenced to the Plant and Machinery Statement and Man-power Statement in the monthly MIS report at para 9.4.4 items (v) and (vi) above);
  • 7.2.7 — enforcing contractor's obligations.

9.12 Incentives for Excellence in Contract Execution [C + NC ONLY]

The Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals carry a short section providing for incentives for excellence in contract execution — the services counterpart of the Works provisions on aligning stakeholder interests at para 9.3 above (bonus, better rating, public recognition, and naming at work sites).

9.13 Safeguards for Handing Over Procuring Entity Materials/ Equipment to Contractors

9.13.1What May Be Handed Over

9.13.2The Bank Guarantee Requirement — and the Rs 1 lakh waiver

9.13.3The Contractor's Obligations in Respect of Loaned Assets

9.13.4The Transparency Requirement and the Closing Certificate

9.14 Environmental, Social, Health, and Safety (ESHS) Concerns [W ONLY]

9.14.1The ESHS Obligation and Its Staffing Consequence

9.14.2What ESHS Monitoring Involves During Implementation

9.14.3Safety of the Public and Labour

"the safety of all activities (including traffic safety) in and around the site, and safety of the public and labour, should be ensured by the contractor — as per prevalent labour laws/ regulations and the conditions of contract.

the hazardous substances: "special precautions must be used if hazardous chemicals are used or stored at the workplace — lead, silica, asbestos, and wood/ stone that will be cut and generate dust; And construction materials containing zinc, cadmium, beryllium, and mercury."

the public-protection list: "besides protecting the public from noise and environmental pollution — they must be safeguarded from:

9.15 Scope and Quantity Control

9.15.1Quantity Tolerance — Minor Short/ Excess Deliveries [G ONLY]

9.15.2The Option Clause at the Contract Management Stage [G ONLY]

1. The right: "under this clause, the purchaser retains the right to place orders for an additional quantity up to a specified percentage of the originally contracted quantity — at the same rate and terms of the contract — during the currency of the contract.

2. The eight conditions governing operation of the option clause:

#Condition
a"if the quantity has been increased under the option clause — the negative option clause should not be invoked thereafter, or vice versa."
b"in case of a decrease in the ordered quantity — it would be fair to allow the firm to supply work-in-progress or goods already put up for inspection."
c"there should be no declining trend in the price of the stores — as evidenced by the fact that no order has since been placed at lower rates, and no tender has been opened since the time offers have been received at lower rates — even if not finalised."
d"if the option clause exists during the provisioning of the next cycle, and tender evaluation in the next cycle shows an increasing price trend — the application of the option clause must be positively considered. The contract management authority must also keep an eye on delivery against the contract. If other conditions are satisfied, the option clause must be exercised."
e"the option clause is normally exercised after receipt of 50 (fifty) per cent quantity. If the delivery period is going to expire and other conditions are fulfilled — it can be exercised even earlier."
f"the option clause shall be exercised during the currency of the contract — so that the contractor has reasonable time/ notice for executing such an increase. It can be exercised even if the quantity of the original order is completed before the original last date of delivery. If not already agreed upon, the delivery period shall be fixed for the additional quantity on the lines of the delivery period in the original order — this will satisfy the requirement of giving reasonable notice to the supplier."
g"this provision can also be exercised in case of PAC/ single supplier OEM cases."
h"however, where parallel contracts on multiple suppliers are available — care should be taken in exercising the option clause, so that the original tender decision of splitting quantities and differential pricing is not upset or vitiated. Other things being equal, the supplier with the lower rate should first be considered for the option quantity."

9.15.3Scope of ServicesCNC

1. The performance obligation:

2. The standard of performance:

9.15.4Performance Standards and Quality Control CNC — and the 0.5% damages

1. The notification of defects:

2. The cost-of-correction deduction:

3. Damages for shortfall in performance — the 0.5% Rule:

9.15.5Service Level Agreement (SLA) [NC ONLY]

The Non-Consultancy Manual carries a distinct section on the Service Level Agreement (para 9.3.3), which has no counterpart in the Consultancy Manual's scope-control section — consistent with the NC emphasis on measurable performance standards and KPIs (see Chapter 2, para 2.7.2(d)).

9.16 Quality Assurance and InspectionsGfullest text

9.16.1The Three Components of Quality Assurance

#ComponentHow it is done
adefining quality standards"the description and TS define the quality standards expected from the product."
bplanning assurance of quality"by specifying the qualification criteria for the suppliers — to ensure that they have the technical, infrastructure and financial capabilities to meet the required quality standards. Specifications also lay down quality control requirements — to indicate parameters, target values, tolerances, and methods of measurement. This also involves laying down the type of inspection agency for inspection."
cmeasurement of quality"done through a scheme of inspections at the contract management stage — which lays down the actual process of inspection."

9.16.2Inspections — Measuring Quality Standards

"the stages and modes of inspection May vary depending on:

9.16.3Types of Inspection

A. Pre-dispatch Inspection

a) stage inspection and its purpose:

B) who inspects: "inspection of the materials before dispatch shall be carried out by the inspection agency nominated in the contract, or by its representative, at the premises of the supplier — in accordance with the inspection procedure laid down and incorporated in the purchase order."

c) who pays for testing: "the supplier should bear the testing charges for samples — and this should be made clear at the enquiry stage itself, to avoid claims later or affect his position in the comparative statement of offers. Any special testing involving significant financial implications shall be settled prior to placement of the order — and such costs should form part of the evaluation."

d)–g) offshore supplies and the waiver route:

  • "the Procuring Entity May depute its representative or a third-party inspection agency to the supplier's manufacturing premises to carry out/ witness inspection and testing, performance testing — at its discretion";
  • "alternatively, the Procuring Entity shall retain an option to waive the above and accept the material based on the supplier's internal test report, guarantee and fitment certificate. In this regard, the written approval of the hod of the indenting Department should be obtained, and the reasons for it should be recorded";
  • "whenever the inspection is carried out at the supplier's manufacturing premises — an inspection on receipt of goods at the Procuring Entity shall also be carried out by an officer of the indenting Department or a third-party inspection agency."

h) the inspector-hospitality prohibition — a direct instruction from DoE:

B. Inspection of Goods on Receipt at Consignee/ User's Site

9.16.4Types of Inspection Agencies

1.Internal Inspection Authorities

2.External Inspecting Authorities

A) third-party inspection and the reserved right:

b) external laboratory testing — the approved list and the five guidelines:

#Guideline
i"external testing May invariably be done by nationally accredited or reliable laboratories — preference being given to the National Test House (NTH). For testing the samples drawn from the lots offered by the supplier — an inspection agent qualified to conduct random sampling in accordance with quality assurance requirements should make the selection of samples."
ii"test reports must contain the values obtained in the tests — besides fail/ pass results. The laboratory must preserve the sample and test records for a period of three years."
iii"the Department should lay down a liability statement for costs expended on tests, dispatch of samples, transportation costs, test charges, and so on."
iv"in cases where the samples are to be tested at the supplier's cost because of the non-availability of his own testing arrangements — the responsibility of depositing the testing fees would rest with the supplier."
vthe default cost-allocation Rule and its exception — see below

3.Joint Inspection on Complaint

9.16.5Issue of Inspection Report

"after satisfactory inspection and tests — the acceptable goods shall be stamped, labelled…"(and the Inspection Report issued accordingly; see also the Goods Receipt and Inspection Report at Annexure 25 of the Goods Manual.)

9.16.6Material Put Up for Inspection Towards the End of Delivery

A distinct sub-section of the Goods Manual (9.4.6) governs the treatment of material offered for inspection at or near the expiry of the delivery period — read with para 9.3.11 (Handling Deliveries at the Last Moment or after Expiry of the Delivery Period), covered in Part B of this chapter.

9.16.7Approval of Acceptable Deviations

Goods para 9.4.7 provides for the formal approval of acceptable deviations discovered at inspection — the contract-management counterpart of the minor vs substantive deviation test at the evaluation stage (Chapter 7 Part A, para 7.15.4).

9.17 Warranty Clause [G ONLY]

9.17.1The Warranty and Its Survival

9.17.2Notification of Defect

9.17.3The 14-Day Rectification Obligation

9.17.4THE WARRANTY PENALTY REGIME — 0.5% per week, capped at 5%

9.17.5Warranty on Rectified/ Replaced Goods — the no-extension rule

9.17.6The 21-Day Breach Trigger

Appendix to Chapter 9 — Part a: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter number and titleG: Ch. 9 Contract Management · W: Ch. 7 *Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance · C: Ch. 10 Monitoring… · NC: Ch. 9 *Monitoring…
2Number of heads under contract managementG: 8 · W: 7 · C and NC: 5 (with nine sub-heads under Contract Administration)
3"Post-contract evaluation" as a distinct headc + nc only
4The six ways poor project management "costs the nation"(incl. "creates a culture of acceptance of delay" and "monetisation of higher risks perceived by contractors")W ONLY
5Why services contracts need more intense monitoring — "lack of physically/ tangibly measurable outcomes"; Management by Exception; counterpart Project Managerc + nc only
6contract Monitoring Committee (CMC) — Rule 205; at least three members; CEC members may be reused; outside experts at Procuring Entity's cost; six responsibilities incl. power to levy LD and accept/ reject any partc + nc only
7Appointing another qualified consultant to assist the CMC in complex assignmentsc + nc only
8Aligning the interest of the stakeholders — incentive structure; pecuniary and non-pecuniary; naming the contractor and project-in-charge publicly at work sites; recognition with "long shelf life"W ONLY
9Principle of Proportionality — "one size does not fit all"; too many checks stifle innovation, too little control produces "an undisciplined crisis management culture"W ONLY
10The Contract Manager — the six alternative titles; single person for small contracts, team for large; quarterly/ monthly monitoring by the Works Committee with status report to the SecretaryW ONLY
11The fourteen-point monthly MIS Progress Report — incl. named manpower statement, colour progress photographs, hold-ups and disputes to be highlightedW ONLY
12The photograph/ video system as "a permanent record of the project for posterity… in case needed for litigation or enquiry/ investigation"W ONLY
13Project management software named — MS PPM and Oracle Primavera P6; PMI-certified contract managersW ONLY
14The six prerequisites to commencement — land acquisition, permits (with the delay-claim warning), quarries and borrow areas, safety at work site, advance payments, insurancesW ONLY
15"All or most pre-requisites shall be fulfilled before award of the LoA"W ONLY
16Commencement of Work — Work Order within 2 weeks but not later than 6 weeks from LoA; the three contractor submissions (Work Program, Method Statement, QA Plan); possession of siteW ONLY
17Mobilisation as a distinct pre-construction phaseW ONLY
18Review of Inception Phasec + nc only
19Incentives for Excellence in Contract Executionc + nc only
20Safeguards for handing over materials — the Rs 1 lakh BG waiver and indemnity bond alternative; certificate on return of ID cards and gate passes; payment for electricity/ water/ craneCommon — W text fullest
21ESHS/ SHE — mandatory skills in Bid Documents; site safety engineer mandatory; frequent SHE audits; the hazardous-substances list; the public-protection listW ONLY
22Quantity tolerance — 5% of contract value or Rs 5 lakh whichever is less; not applicable to indivisible items or machinery and plantG ONLY
23The eight conditions governing the Option Clause — no reverse invocation; exercise normally after 50% receipt; no declining price trend; must be exercised during currency; care with parallel contractsG ONLY
24Scope of Services — "such other work-elements not mentioned explicitly but that can be reasonably inferred"c + nc only
25Damages for shortfall in performance — 0.5% of delivered price "but not as a penalty", without having to prove actual lossc + nc only
26Service Level Agreement as a distinct sectionnc only
27The three components of Quality Assurance (defining, planning, measuring)G ONLY
28Stage inspection; "even after pre-dispatch inspections, materials should be inspected again upon receipt as a matter of abundant precaution"G ONLY
29The prohibition on suppliers paying for inspectors' travel, stay and hospitalityG ONLY
30"The consignee should be the final authority for the acceptance of goods"G ONLY
31"The Procuring Entity retains the right to reject the consignment even if third-party inspection authorities have cleared it"G ONLY
32External testing — preference to the National Test House; test reports must contain values not just fail/pass; laboratory must preserve sample and records for three YEARS; referral/ appellate laboratoriesG ONLY
33The default testing-cost rule (supplier pre-dispatch, procuring agency post-receipt) — and the exception that if the material FAILS, the charges become the seller'sG ONLY
34Joint Inspection on Complaint — the three-member team; if the firm fails to associate, it is held with the pre-inspecting agencyG ONLY
35Warranty Clause — 24 months after delivery or 18 months from placement in service whichever sooner; obligations survive acceptance and even termination; 14-day rectification; 0.5% per week capped at 5%; replacement warranty runs only to the ORIGINAL warranty period; 21-day failure = breachG ONLY

end of Chapter 9 — part a

Part IITime Control, Cost Control, Logistics and Closure

Merging: Goods Ch. 9 (paras 9.3, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7.6) · Works Ch. 7 (paras 7.4, 7.5, 7.6) · Consultancy Ch. 10 (paras 10.4, 10.5, 10.6) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 9 (paras 9.4, 9.5, 9.6)

Concordance for Chapter 9 — Part B

UnifiedTopicGWCNC
9.18Delivery Period; Terms of Delivery9.3.1, 9.3.27.4.1, 7.4.29.4.1
9.19Delays in Delivery/ Execution9.3.37.4.510.4.19.4.2
9.20Extension of Delivery / Extension of Time (EOT)9.3.47.4.610.4.29.4.3
9.21Performance Notice9.3.57.4.910.4.39.4.4
9.22Force Majeure (FM)9.3.67.4.410.4.99.4.10
9.23Denial Clause (DC)9.3.77.4.810.4.49.4.5
9.24Liquidated Damages, Quantum and Waiver9.3.8–9.3.107.4.710.4.5–10.4.89.4.6–9.4.9
9.25Handling Deliveries at the Last Moment/ After Expiry9.3.11
9.26Compensation Events7.4.10
9.27Time At Large7.4.11
9.28Cost Control — Prices, Taxes and Payments9.57.510.59.5
9.29Electronic Bill (e-Bill) Processing System7.5.8
9.30Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue9.6
9.31Closure of Contract9.7.67.610.69.6
9.32Concluding the Assignment and Post-Contract Review10.69.6

9.18 Delivery Period and Terms of Delivery

9.18.1The Delivery Period Must Be SpecificG

9.18.2Terms of Delivery Determine When Title PassesG

9.18.3Contract Effective Date and Work ProgramW

The Works Manual replaces "delivery period" with Contract Effective Date (7.4.1) and the Work Program (7.4.2) — the latter being the contractor's submission approved by the Contract Manager at the commencement stage (see Part A, para 9.6).

9.18.4Contract Period and OptionsNC

The Non-Consultancy Manual carries a distinct opening section on Contract Period and Options (9.4.1) — governing the initial contract term and the exercise of extension options in service contracts.

9.19 Delays in Delivery / Execution

9.19.1The Governing Principle — Time is the Essence

The two remedies: The Procuring Entity May, without prejudice to his other rights:

a) recover from the contractor Liquidated Damages; or

b) treat the delay as a breach of contract and avail all the remedies therein.

C adds the notification duty: "the consultant should notify the Procuring Entity and explain the causes of such delays."

9.19.2INORDINATE DELAYS — the 25% test and its consequence

9.19.3Delay for Which the Supplier is NOT Responsible — the four cases

"in cases where there is a delay for which the supplier is not responsible — the delivery period needs to be re-fixed without imposing any penalty on the supplier — i.e., without LD and without a Denial Clause.

Normally, in the following circumstances, the supplier May not be considered responsible for the delay:"

#Case
icases where the supplier is dependent on the approval of the pre-production sample — and the delay occurs in approving the sample, though submitted by the supplier in time
iiwhere extension is granted on account of some omission on the part of the purchaser, which affects the due performance of the contract by the supplier
iiicases where the purchaser controls the entire production Schedule of the supplier
ivcases where production and/ or delivery has been affected by force Majeure, or statutory change, or specific executive instructions issued by govt.

9.20 Extension of Delivery / Extension of Time (EOT)

9.20.1THE TWO DISTINCT CONCEPTS — Re-fixation vs ExtensionWthe clearest statement

RE-FIXATION OF DELIVERYEXTENSION OF TIME (EOT)
Whenthe delay is not attributable to the contractor (or in case of Force Majeure)the delay is attributable (fully or partly) to the contractor
What it is"a fresh completion period, treated like the original completion period — which is arrived at by recasting the original contractual completion period, after taking care of the lost period for which the contractor was not responsible"the completion Schedule is extended
LDwithout LDwith LD
Denial ClauseWithout the denial clauseWith the denial clause
Approvalwith the approval of Competent Authority(as above)

9.20.2The Contractor's Duty to Give Notice

9.20.3The Two Pre-conditions for Granting ExtensionG

on approval from the ca, the Procuring Entity May agree to extend the delivery Schedule — with or without LD, and with or without the Denial Clause — provided:

A) the earlier-delivery test: "that a higher rate in the original tender was not accepted against other lower quotations in consideration of the earlier delivery."

b) the falling-price test: "in the case of fixed price contracts — there is no falling trend in prices for this item, as evidenced by the fact that, in the intervening period, neither orders have been placed at rates lower than this contract, nor any tender has been opened where such rates have been received — even though the tender is not yet decided.

9.20.4Extension Amounts to an Amendment — and Requires Consent

9.20.5EXTENSION AFTER EXPIRY — Section 63 of the Indian Contract Act [W ONLY]

9.20.6THE CORRESPONDENCE TRAP — and the mandatory closing sentence

9.20.7THE LD WARNING TRAP — why "without prejudice" is NOT enough

9.21 Performance Notice (Notice-cum-Extension Letter)

9.22 Force Majeure Clause (FM)

9.22.1The Definition and Its Exclusions

9.22.2What the FM Clause Does — suspension, NOT excuse

9.22.3The Notice Requirement — 14 days, and no ex post facto claim

FM affecting the purchaser: "there May be an FM situation affecting the purchase organisation only. In such a situation, the purchase organisation is to communicate with the supplier along similar lines as above for further necessary action."

9.22.4the 90-DAY Termination Option

9.22.5The Immunity from Punitive Provisions

9.23 Denial Clause (DC)

9.23.1What It Is and Why It Exists

9.23.2the Asymmetric Operation of the Denial Clause

| ANY downward Revision in statutory duties, PVC, and foreign exchange rate | the purchaser reserves his right to get the benefit During such period |

9.24 Liquidated Damages (LD) — Concept, Quantum and Waiver

9.24.1The Legal Concept

9.24.2Quantum of LD — the Rates Compared

ManualRate per week of delayMaximum
G GOODS0.5 (half) per cent of the delivered price (including elements of GST, freight and variations) of the delayed Goods and/ or incidental Works/ Services — for each week of delay or part thereof, until actual delivery or performance5% of the total contract value(or any other percentage if prescribed)
10% in case of INORDINATE DELAY
W WORKS — repair works costing UP TO Rs. 20 LAKH1 PER CENT (1%) of the contract value(that includes variations, taxes and duties)per week5% of contract value
10% in case of inordinate delays
W Works — all other works0.5 PER CENT (0.5%) of the contract value per week of delay5% of contract value
10% in case of inordinate delays

9.24.3LD on the VARIED Price — and the no-supply rule

9.24.4the GST Treatment of LD

9.24.5Incentives / Bonus for Early CompletionW

the seven-day reporting condition: "to avail of the incentive clause, it shall be mandatory on the part of the contractor to report the actual date of completion to the concerned Contract Manager.

9.24.6WAIVER OF LD — the three rules

1. The general Rule:

2. GOVERNMENT ESTABLISHMENTS — the special dispensation:

3. Development/ indigenisation contracts:

9.25 Handling Deliveries at the Last Moment or After the Expiry of the Delivery Period [G ONLY]

9.25.1the VOLUNTARY-ABROGATION Trap

9.25.2LOCAL SUPPLIES — the Franking Clause

"if the contractor makes supplies locally after the expiry of the delivery period — the supplies May be provisionally retained under a franking clause reserving right — and the contractor May be asked to obtain an extension of the delivery period from an authorised officer, with or without any LD/ Denial Clause."

9.25.3Supplies from Outside Contractors — the consignee's intimation

9.25.4IMPORTS — and the Letter of Credit safeguard

9.26 Compensation Events [W ONLY]

9.26.1The Definition and the Four Categories

These can be due to delays or default by the contracting entity in:

#Category
aproviding of encumbrance-free possession or access to site
bdischarging of obligations by the contracting entity — drawings · specifications · instruction · encumbrance-free site · approving of sub-contractor · payment · and completion certificates
cinfructuous additional or tests, works · delays due to the contracting entity's orders, default, or risks
dunforeseen adverse conditions — than could reasonably have been assumed after due diligence

9.26.2THE 'EARLY WARNING' REQUIREMENT — and the consequence of failure

9.26.3Payment May Continue While the EOT Proposal is Pending

9.27 Time at Large [W ONLY]

How to avoid it — the four-step prescription:

9.28 Cost Control — Prices, Taxes and Payments

9.28.1Prices Must Be Firm and As QuotedG

The controlled-price recovery right:"if the prices charged are discovered to be higher than any controlled or regulated price — the Procuring Entity shall have the right to either recover [the excess]…"(see Chapter 6, para 6.14.1-2 on undue profiteering and the MRP ceiling).

9.28.2Payment of Taxes and Duties; Statutory Variation Clause

Covered in full at Chapter 6, paras 6.16.1 to 6.16.4 of this Unified Manual — GST registration and HSN rules, the three bidder-borne taxes, customs duty, and the Statutory Variation Clause with its asymmetric operation (increases borne by the Procuring Entity only during the original/ re-fixed period; reductions passed on during the original and extended period).

9.28.3Financial MonitoringW

9.28.4Payments to Contractors and Handling of Securities

The payment machinery — Interim Payment Certificates, the Measurement Book regime, the 75%-within-10-working-days rule, and final bills within three months — is set out at Chapter 6, para 6.10.3 of this Unified Manual.

9.29 Electronic Bill (e-Bill) Processing System [W ONLY]

The Works Manual carries a distinct section (7.5.8) on the e-Bill Processing System — the electronic submission and processing of contractors' running account bills, integrated with the Public Financial Management System. It has no counterpart in the other three Manuals.

9.30 Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue of Goods [G ONLY]

9.30.1Special Instructions for Transportation, Packaging and Storage

#Instruction
aWHERE critical equipment of high value is involved — suitable special instructions shall be conveyed to the supplier about the mode of transport, loading, avoidance of transhipment — and, if necessary, provision of escorts
bin the case of chemicals, powdery materials, liquid materials — parties May be advised on proper packaging to avoid spillage en route, pollution problems — and conforming to the ISO 14001 standard
cspecial attention should be paid to perishable goods, considering their time-sensitive nature — regarding packaging · transportation · handling · storage (cold storage/ cold chain) · and fifo (first in first out) system of delivery
din case the Procuring Entity arranges transport — suitable instructions May be incorporated in the transportation contract

9.30.2Full Truck Loads and the "Not to Self" Rule

9.30.3Shipping Arrangements — the six-week notice

9.30.4Transfer of Title of Goods

1. The intention Rule: "the title of goods, and resultant rights and liabilities, is transferred to the buyer at such time as the parties to the contract intend this to happen — as recorded in the terms of the contract."

2. The risk Rule — and the "notwithstanding" chain:

3. Claims against the carrier: "the contractor shall alone be entitled and responsible for making claims against any carrier — in respect of non-delivery, short delivery, mis-delivery, loss, destruction, damage, or deterioration of the goods entrusted to such carrier by the contractor for transmission to the ultimate consignee or the interim consignee."

9.30.5Insurance in Transit

BasisWho insures
DOMESTIC GOODS supplied on a CIF/ FOR destination basisthe contractor is responsible until all the goods contracted arrive in good condition at the destination. The contractor May, at its option, cover the transit risk by getting the goods duly insured in his own name at his own cost
IMPORT of goods on FOB and CFR offersTHE procuring Entity shall arrange the insurance

9.30.6Distribution of Dispatch Documents — the 24-hour rule

9.30.7Receipt of Consignment

A. Preliminary Inspection and Receipt

What the preliminary inspection covers:

B. the SHELF-LIFE Rule — 75%

C. Detailed Inspection on Receipt

D. CONSIGNEE'S Right of Rejection of PRE-INSPECTED Goods — the 90-Day Rule

9.30.8Goods Receipt and Inspection Report (GRIR)

A. What a GRIR Is — and how it differs from a preliminary receipt

The two functions of the GRIR:

when a GRIR is prepared: "accounting of the material received shall be based on the GRIR prepared after inspection and acceptance of the material, which the concerned officers will sign.

B. THE REJECTION GRIR — and the yellow paint mark

The 21-DAY removal Rule and the risk-and-cost position:

C. Ground Rent on Unlifted Rejected Goods

9.30.9Storage and Issue of Inspected Goods

Goods para 9.6.7 governs the storage and issue of inspected goods — the handover to the warehouse against the GRIR, and the subsequent issue of stores to indenting sections.

9.31 Closure of Contract

9.31.1Completion of Construction W — the seven closing steps

1. The completion certificate and its two accompanying documents:

2. The joint inspection and "as built" drawings:

3. Occupancy certificates and nocs: "the contractor/ PWO/ PSU would be responsible for obtaining completion/ occupancy certificates/ clearances and no-objection-certificates (nocs), if applicable, from the local civic authorities — for completed work and facilities, before handing over the same to the 'Procuring Entity' for putting them to functional use."

4. Restoration of auxiliary services:

5. What must be handed over: The contractor/ PWO/ PSU shall hand over the completed work — including all services and facilities constructed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications, fulfilling all agreed techno-functional requirements — along with:

6. The Project Completion Report (PCR) — and the one-month deadline:

7. Record keeping: "record keeping should be created at every work centre, to facilitate proper stacking of records pertaining to the completed works. The records should be preserved in such a manner that the same can be retrieved whenever required."

9.31.2Completion of CONTRACT — and the single Defects Liability Certificate

9.31.3RECONCILIATION 1 — Material and Works ReconciliationW

9.31.4RECONCILIATION 2 — Reconciliation with the User DepartmentW

"besides works reconciliation — the user Department should certify in writing that the following activities (wherever applicable) have been completed by the contractor, to the department's satisfaction, as per the contract:"

#Item to be certified
aachievement of performance standards of work
binstallation and commissioning, if any
csupport service during the defect liability period — which has ended on ______
das made drawings
ereturn of all id cards, gate passes, documents, drawings, protective gear, material, equipment, facilities and assets loaned to contractor

9.31.5RECONCILIATION 3 — Payment ReconciliationW

9.32 Concluding the Assignment and Post-Contract Review [C + NC ONLY]

The Consultancy Manual (para 10.6) and the Non-Consultancy Manual (para 9.6) both carry a section titled "Concluding the Assignment and Post Contract review" — giving effect to the fifth head of contract management in those Manuals, "Post contract evaluation" (see Part A, para 9.1.2).

It governs:

  • THE acceptance of the final deliverables — including the Final Report, in respect of which (see Chapter 2, para 2.6.3(c)) "the consultants alone are responsible for their findings; although changes may be suggested in the course of the discussions, consultants should not be forced to make such changes";
  • THE release of final payment and guarantees (if any), and closing the contract; and
  • THE post-contract review — the retrospective evaluation of how the assignment performed, feeding back into future need assessment, ToR drafting and shortlisting criteria.

Appendix to Chapter 9 — Part B: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Delivery Period "deemed to be the essence of the contract"; terms of delivery determine when TITLE passesG ONLY
2Contract Effective Date and Work Program as the opening time-control provisionsW ONLY
3Contract Period and Options as the opening time-control provisionnc only
4INORDINATE DELAY — the 25% test; show-cause notice; deficient performance recorded for future tenders; LD cap rises from 5% to 10%G + W
5The four cases where the supplier is not responsible for delay(pre-production sample approval; purchaser's omission; purchaser controls the production schedule; FM/ statutory change/ executive instructions)G ONLY
6RE-FIXATION (no LD, no denial clause) vs extension of time (with LD, with denial clause)W states the distinction most clearly; G and C/NC apply the same substance
7"EOT must not be left to the end… interim EOT may be awarded"; EOT and LD reviewed after the Final Taking-Over CertificateW ONLY
8The two pre-conditions for extension — the earlier-delivery test and the falling-price test; PVC-linked raw materials may be extended even on a falling trend but with the denial clauseG ONLY
9Extension after expiry permissible under SECTION 63 of the Indian Contract Act with mutual consent — "the contract does not automatically terminate upon expiry"W ONLY
10The correspondence trap and the mandatory closing sentenceG + W
11Why "without prejudice" alone does not preserve the right to LDG + W
12Graded authority structure for granting extensionsW ONLY
13Performance Notice (notice-cum-extension letter)All four
14Force Majeure — expressly EXCLUDES "predictable/ seasonal rain"; notice within 14 days; cannot be claimed ex post facto; 90-day termination option without financial repercussionG ONLY(fullest); W, C, NC carry shorter versions
15The Denial Clause and its asymmetric operation — "PVC, other variations and foreign exchange clauses operate only during the ORIGINAL delivery period"G + W
16LD quantumG: 0.5% per week, max 5% (10% if inordinate) · W: 1% per week for repair works up to Rs 20 lakh; 0.5% for all other works; max 5% (10% if inordinate)
17LD applies on the price AS VARIED by PVC; LDs accrue only on delayed supplies; on cancellation only the loss occasioned can be recoveredG + W
18For GST, LD to be shown as a DEDUCTION on the invoice value by the contractorG + W
19Incentive/ bonus for early completion — 1% of contract value per month, max 5%; actual completion date to reach the CA within seven daysW ONLY
20Waiver of LD — "strictly an exception rather than a rule"; Government establishments as distinct from PSUs not to be penalised and risk-purchase claims not enforced; NO LD in development/ indigenisation contractsG ONLY
21Handling deliveries after expiry — the voluntary-abrogation trap; the FRANKING CLAUSE text; the consignee's intimation on demurrage and wharfage; the LC safeguard for importsG ONLY
22COMPENSATION EVENTS — four categories; the 'EARLY WARNING' requirement failing which no compensation; EOT to be finalised within two months; payment continues without LD recovery while the EOT proposal is pendingW ONLY
23Time At Large — the contractor is freed from his obligation to complete within the specified time; the four-step prescription to avoid itW ONLY
24Quarterly update of cash flow projections, cost estimates and milestones by the Contract ManagerW ONLY
25Electronic Bill (e-Bill) Processing SystemW ONLY
26LOGISTICS — ISO 14001 packaging for chemicals; FIFO and cold chain for perishables; "booked to the Procuring Entity and not 'self'"; six weeks' notice for shipping; 24-hour dispatch notificationG ONLY
27Transfer of title — risk remains with the contractor notwithstanding inspection, dispatch or payment; contractor alone entitled to claim against the carrierG ONLY
28The 75% shelf-life rule and the right to rejectG ONLY
29Consignee's right to reject pre-inspected goods within 90 days of the original Inspection ReportG ONLY
30GRIR vs preliminary receipt (quality AND quantity vs quantity only); the yellow paint/ chisel mark on rejected material; 21 days to lift at supplier's risk and cost; removal only after recovery of advance/ freight; ground rent 0.2%–0.5% per dayG ONLY
31Closure of contract — completion certificate with completion drawings and videography; restoration of auxiliary services including removal of garbage and debris; Maintenance Manual/ sop; Project Completion Report within one MONTH of settlement of final billsW ONLY
32"There will be only one DLC"; no-claim certificate before releasing the BG; the Rs 25 lakh threshold for the three reconciliationsW ONLY
33The three reconciliations — Material and Works · User Department · PaymentW ONLY
34Concluding the Assignment and POST-CONTRACT REVIEWc + nc only

end of Chapter 9 — part b

Part IIIBreach, Termination and Dispute Resolution

Merging: Goods Ch. 9 (paras 9.8–9.10) · Works Ch. 7 (paras 7.7–7.9) · Consultancy Ch. 10 (paras 10.7–10.9) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 9 (paras 9.7–9.9)

A Note on this Part — the Most NEARLY-UNIFORM Block in the Entire Manual Family

Unlike every other chapter, the dispute-resolution apparatus is substantially COMMON to all four Manuals, running to roughly the same 800 lines in each.

The reason is that it does not derive from the character of the procurement at all. It derives from a single set of statutes and a single set of DoE instructions applying uniformly:

SourceInstrument
StatuteIndian Contract Act, 1872 · Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 (amended 2015 and 2021) · Mediation Act, 2023 · msmed Act, 2006 · Indian evidence Act (replaced by Bhartiya Sakshya Adhiniyam 2023 from 1 July 2024)
DoE instructionsOM No. F.11/21/2024-PPD dated 03.06.2024 (the governing instruction on arbitration, mediation and challenging awards) · OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021 (General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management, incl. Rule 227A of GFR)

The only substantial divergences are noted in the Appendix at the end.

Concordance for Chapter 9 — Part C

UnifiedTopicGWCNC
9.33Breach of Contract9.8.17.8.110.8.19.8.1
9.34Termination of Contract for Default9.8.27.8.210.8.29.8.2
9.35Determination for Convenience / Frustration9.8.3, 9.8.47.8.310.8.39.8.3
9.36Limitation of Liabilities9.8.57.8.410.8.49.8.4
9.37Disputes9.9.17.7.110.7.19.7.1
9.38Excepted Matters9.9.27.7.210.7.29.7.2
9.39Adjudication9.9.37.7.310.7.39.7.3
9.40Mediation9.9.47.7.410.7.49.7.4
9.41Arbitration9.9.57.7.510.7.59.7.5
9.42Foreign Arbitration9.9.67.7.610.7.69.7.6
9.43Notice for and Reference to Arbitration9.9.7, 9.9.87.7.7, 7.7.810.7.7–89.7.7–8
9.44Appointment of Arbitrator9.9.97.7.910.7.99.7.9
9.45The Arbitral Procedure9.9.107.7.1010.7.109.7.10
9.46Challenging Arbitration/ Judicial Awards9.9.117.7.1110.7.119.7.11
9.47AMRCD — CPSE Disputes Mechanism7.7.12
9.48Contract Management — Risks and Mitigations9.107.910.99.9

9.33 Breach of Contract

9.33.1What Constitutes a Breach

The three named categories of default:

#CategoryContent
adefault in performance and obligations"if the contractor fails to deliver any or all the goods, or fails to perform any other contractual obligations — including Code of Integrity, or the obligation to maintain production capability (equipment & manufacturing facilities) based on which the contract was awarded — within the period stipulated in the contract, or within any extension thereof granted by the Procuring Entity — it shall be treated as a breach of contract."
binsolvencyif the contractor or any partner shall at any time be adjudged insolvent · or shall have a receiving order or order for the administration of his estate made against him · or shall take any proceeding for composition under any insolvency Act · or make any conveyance or assignment of his effects · or enter into any assignment or composition with his creditors · or suspend payment · or if the firm be dissolved under the partnership Act — the Procuring Entity May consider it as a breach of contract
cliquidationif the contractor is a company being wound up voluntarily or by order of a court · or a receiver, liquidator or manager on behalf of the debenture-holders is appointed · or circumstances shall have arisen which entitle the court or debenture-holders to appoint a receiver, liquidator or manager — the Procuring Entity May consider it as a breach of contract

9.33.2THE 'NOTICE OF DEFAULT' — two weeks, and the withholding of payments

9.34 Termination of Contract for Default

9.34.1The Notice of Termination and the Three Savings

Such termination shall not:

a) prejudice or affect the rights and remedies which have accrued and/ or shall accrue to the Procuring Entity after that;

b) affect the performance of the contract to the extent not terminated — unless otherwise instructed by the Procuring Entity;

c) extinguish warranty obligations of the contractor for the goods already supplied, if any.

9.34.2the Seven Additional Recourses on Termination

"if the contract is terminated in whole or in part — additionally, recourse May be taken to any one or more of the following actions:"

#Recourse
atemporarily withhold payments due to the contractor — till recoveries due to invocation of other contractual remedies are complete
bcall back any loaned property or advances of payment, if any — with the levy of interest rate (e.g., the interest rate of the general provident fund — GPF) prevailing on the date of release of advance payment, plus 2%, to be compounded quarterly
crecover Liquidated Damages and invoke the Denial Clause for delays
dprefer claims against insurance, if any
eencash and/ or forfeit Performance Security
finvoke any other contractual securities
ginitiate proceedings in a court of law — for the transgression of the law, tort, and loss, which are not addressable by the above means

9.35 Determination of Contract for Convenience of the Procuring Entity, or Frustration of Contract

9.35.1The 'Notice for Determination of Contract'

The three savings:

  • "such termination shall not prejudice or affect the rights and remedies accrued, and/ or that shall accrue after that, to the parties";
  • "unless otherwise instructed, the contractor shall continue to perform the contract to the extent not terminated";
  • "all warranty obligations, if any, shall continue to survive despite the termination."

9.35.2THE CRITICAL LEGAL POINT — determination for convenience is NOT a legal right

9.35.3The Thirty-Day Rule on Completed Goods

9.35.4FRUSTRATION OF CONTRACT — the 60-day mutual-agreement window

9.36 Limitation of Liabilities

9.36.1The Aggregate Cap — and its three exclusions

9.36.2The Consequential-Loss Exclusion — and the LD carve-out

9.37 Disputes

9.37.1The Definition of a "Dispute"

The formal definition — note the four elements:

9.37.2THE DoE DIRECTIVE ON CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES — a passage worth memorising

9.37.3THE SEQUENTIAL RULE — and the three mechanisms

The THREE-STEP Ladder:

StepMechanismGoverning instrument
1adjudication(contractual)
2mediationthe Mediation Act, 2023
3arbitrationthe Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996

the legal-advice duty: "while processing a case for dispute resolution/ litigation/ arbitration — the Procuring Entity is to take legal advice at appropriate stages."

9.38 Excepted Matters

9.38.1The Definition and the Reciprocity Exception

9.38.2What Excepted Matters Include

"unless otherwise stipulated in the contract — Excepted Matters shall include, but not be limited to:"

#Excepted matter
1ANY controversies or claims brought by a third party for bodily injury, death, [or] property [damage]
(and the further heads specified in the contract)
6provisions incorporated in the contract which are beyond the purview of the Procuring Entity, or are in pursuance of policies of Government — including but not limited to:
6(a)provisions of restrictions regarding local content and purchase preference to local suppliers In terms of the Make in India policy
6(b)provisions regarding restrictions on entities from countries having land-borders with India
6(c)purchase preference policies regarding MSEs and start-ups

9.39 Adjudication — Step 1

9.39.1The Notice of Adjudication

High-value matters:"where necessary — e.g., matters of high value — the Procuring Entity May proceed with adjudication by a high-level committee"(constituted on the lines of the HLC described at para 9.40.3 below).

9.39.2The 60-Day Decision and the Stay on Other Proceedings

9.39.3Escalation to Mediation

9.40 Mediation — Step 2

(The Mediation Act, 2023)

9.40.1Invoking Mediation

9.40.2THE DoE GUIDELINES ON MEDIATION — the High-Level Committee (HLC)

"Government departments/ entities/ agencies are encouraged to adopt mediation under the Mediation Act 2023, and/ or negotiate amicable settlements to resolve disputes."

a) the HLC and its composition:

B) the three ways an HLC May be used:

#Mode
inegotiate directly with the other party, and place a tentative proposed solution before the HLC
iiconduct mediation through a mediator, and then place the tentative mediated agreement before the HLC
iiiuse the HLC itself as the mediator

c) THE RATIONALE — arm's length scrutiny:

D) renegotiation in long-duration works contracts:

e) APPROVAL: "approval of the appropriate authority will need to be obtained for the final accepted solution. Section 49 of the Mediation Act 2023 is also relevant in this regard."

f) the non-routine Rule:

g) "disputes not covered in an arbitration clause — and where the methods outlined above are unsuccessful — should be adjudicated by the courts."

h) the modification authority: "general or case-specific modification in the application of the above guidelines May be authorised by:

9.40.3Appointment of Mediator(s)

9.40.4Confidentiality — and the recording prohibition

Online mediation: "the Act allows parties to opt for online/ virtual mediation — which shall be deemed to occur within the jurisdiction of a competent court. The Act also requires online mediation communication mechanisms to ensure confidentiality."

9.40.5How the Mediator Works

9.40.6Termination of Mediation — 120 Days Plus 60

9.40.7Mediated Settlement Agreement (MSA)

a) what it is: "if the parties resolve the dispute and execute a mediated settlement agreement ("MSA") — then the mediation is successful.

b) challenge to MSA — 90 days, four grounds only:

c) EXECUTION — enforceable as a decree:

9.40.8Costs and the Interest Moratorium

a) COSTS: "the parties shall equally bear all costs of mediation — including the fees of the mediator and the charges of the mediation service provider."

b) no claim of interest during mediation:

C) the stay on other proceedings: "the parties shall not initiate, during the mediation proceedings, any arbitral or judicial proceedings in respect of a dispute that is the subject matter of the mediation proceedings."

9.41 Arbitration — Step 3

(The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 — amended 2015 and 2021)

9.41.1The Arbitration Agreement and Its Survival

9.41.2the Msmed Override

9.41.3the Government Guidelines on Arbitration — the Rs 10 Crore Rule

(OM No. F.11/21/2024-PPD dated 03.06.2024)

"DoE has issued the following guidelines for arbitration in contracts of domestic procurement by the Government and by its entities and agencies — including CPSEs, public sector banks (PSBs), and Government companies:"

#Guideline
a## "arbitration as a method of dispute resolution should not be routinely or automatically included in procurement contracts/ tenders — especially in large contracts."
b## "as a norm — arbitration (if included in contracts) May be restricted to disputes with a value less than Rs. 10 crores.
This figure is regarding the value of the dispute — not the [value of the contract]."
d"*In matters where arbitration is to be resorted to — institutional arbitration May be given preference (where appropriate, after considering the reasonableness of the cost of arbitration relative to the value involved)."
egeneral or case-specific modification May be authorised by the Secretary concerned (or an officer not below Joint Secretary to whom delegated) for Ministries/ Departments/ attached and subordinate offices/ autonomous bodies — or by the managing director for CPSEs, Banks and Financial Institutions

9.42 Foreign Arbitration

9.43 Notice for Arbitration and Reference to Arbitration

9.43.1The Appointing Authority

9.43.2the 60–120 Day Window for the Notice for Arbitration

9.43.3Reference to Arbitration — the jurisdictional limit

9.44 Appointment of Arbitrator

9.44.1Qualification of Arbitrators — the five rules

#Rule
aRETIRED OFFICERS of the Procuring Organisation: Must HAVE retired in the rank of Senior Administrative Grade (or equivalent) · must have retired at least 1 year prior · AND must not be over 70 years of age on the date of notice for arbitration
bserving officers: Shall not be below ja grade level
c## the no-prior-involvement Rule: "he/ they shall not have had an opportunity to deal with the matters to which the contract relates — or who, in the course of his/ their duties as an officer of the procuring organisation, expressed views on any or all the matters under dispute or differences.
*A declaration to this effect shall be taken from the arbitrators."
d"an arbitrator May be appointed notwithstanding the total number of arbitration cases in which he has been appointed in the past."
e## "not be other than the person appointed by the appointing authority — and if for any reason that is not possible, the matter shall not be referred to arbitration at all."

9.44.2Panel of Arbitrators — and the two caps

9.44.3Replacement of Arbitrators

9.44.4THE FOUR APPOINTMENT REGIMES — turning on Section 12(5) waiver and value

A. Where Section 12(5) Has Been Waived

Value of all claims added togetherComposition of the Arbitral Tribunal
Does not exceed ₹ 1,00,00,000 (one crore)A sole arbitrator — who shall be a serving officer of the procuring organisation, not below Junior Administrative Grade, nominated by the appointing authority.
Appointed within 60 days From the day when a written and valid demand for arbitration is received
all other casesa panel of three serving officers not below Junior Administrative Grade — OR two serving officers not below jag and one retired officer (retired not below the rank of Senior Administrative Grade)

The four-name panel procedure (for the three-member tribunal):

B. Where Section 12(5) Has not Been Waived

Value of all claims added togetherComposition
does not exceed ₹ 50,00,000 (fifty lakh)A retired officer — retired not below the rank of Senior Administrative Grade officer — as the sole arbitrator
exceeds ₹ 50,00,000 (fifty lakh)a panel of three (3) retired officers — retired not below the rank of Senior Administrative Grade officer

The same four-name panel / 60-day / 30-day / 30-day procedure applies, but drawn entirely from RETIRED officers, with their retirement dates duly indicated.

9.44.5FAILURE TO APPOINT — who designates the institution

9.45 the Arbitral Procedure

9.45.1Effective Date of Entering Reference

9.45.2SEAT vs VENUE of Arbitration — the critical distinction

9.45.3The Duty to Send Parties Back if Earlier Steps Were Skipped

9.45.4Pleadings — the 30 / 60 / six-month timetable

StepTime limit
CLAIMANT to submit claims(stating the facts supporting the claims, with all relevant documents, and the relief or remedy sought against each claim)within 30 DAYS From the date of appointment of the arbitral tribunal — unless it has granted an extension
RESPONDENT to submit defence statement and counter-claim(s), if anywithin 60 DAYS Of receipt of the copy of claims — unless the Tribunal has granted an extension
COMPLETION of statements of claims, counter-claims and defence## within six months From the effective reference date

9.45.5Oral Arguments on a Day-to-Day Basis — and exemplary costs

9.45.6AWARD WITHIN 12 MONTHS — and the extension ladder

9.45.7Cost of Arbitration and Fees of the Arbitrators

#Fee entitlement
1A sole arbitrator shall be entitled to a 25% extra fee Over the prescribed fee
2the arbitrator shall be entitled to a 50 per cent extra fee if the award is made within 6 months — in terms of section 29(A)(2) of the Arbitration Act
3the arbitrator shall also be entitled to this extra fee where the fast track procedure in terms of section 29(B) is followed

9.45.8FAST TRACK PROCEDURE — four salient features

#Feature
a## "the dispute is to be decided based on written pleadings only. Procuring entities May encourage fast track procedure based on written pleadings only."
b"the arbitral tribunal shall have the power to call for clarifications in addition to the written pleadings where it deems necessary."
c"an oral hearing May be held only if all the parties request, or the arbitral tribunal considers it necessary."
d"the parties are free to decide the fees of the arbitrator(s) for a fast-track procedure."

9.45.9Powers of the Arbitral Tribunal to Grant Interim Relief

9.45.10THE AWARD — reasons, no pre-award interest, and corrections

finality and corrections:

  • "the award of the arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to this contract";
  • "a party May apply for corrections of any computational errors, typographical or clerical errors, or any other error of a similar nature occurring in the award — or interpretation of a specific point of the award — to the tribunal within 60 days of receipt of the award";
  • "a party May apply to the tribunal within 60 days of receiving the award to make an additional award — as to claims presented in the arbitral proceedings but omitted from the arbitral award."

9.46 Challenging Arbitration / Judicial Awards

9.46.1The Non-Routine Rule

9.46.2the 75% Payment Rule — Rule 227A of GFR, 2017

9.46.3the Escrow Account and the Waterfall

9.46.4the Candid Passage on Casual Appeals

9.46.5The Monitoring, Delegation and Board/ Committee Requirements

9.46.6THE STATISTICAL JUSTIFICATION — why the 75% risk is worth taking

9.46.7the Personal Accountability Provision

9.47 Mechanism for Resolution of Commercial Disputes Between Cpses and Government Agencies (AMRCD) [W ONLY]

9.47.1Introduction — and what AMRCD superseded

SCOPE — it applies to all commercial disputes concerning the interpretation and application of provisions in contracts between:

a) CPSEs inter se; and

b) CPSEs and Government departments/ organizations

9.47.2the TWO-TIER Structure

TierComposition / Authority
First level (tier 1)disputes are initially referred to a committee comprising:
• THE secretaries of the respective administrative ministries/ departments involved; AND
• THE Secretary of the Department of legal affairs.

THE financial advisors (fas) of the concerned ministries/ departments represent the issues before this committee
second level (tier 2)if the dispute remains unresolved at the first level — it is escalated to the Cabinet Secretary.

## WHOSE decision is final and binding

9.47.3Procedure — the three-month and 15-day rules

9.47.4Inclusion in Contracts — mandatory, including retrospectively

9.48 Contract Management — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1advance payments: "this is an area of risk in Public Procurement with undue and unintended benefits to the contractor — which vitiates the original selection criteria."any mobilisation or other advance payments should be as per the tender document/ contract, and only for justifiable cases.
Terms of such advances should be expressly stated in the NIT/ tender documents.
The advance payment May be released in not less than two stages, depending upon the progress of the contract.
The advance should be progressively adjusted against bills cleared for payment.
## "interest should be charged on delayed recoveries irrespective of the reason stated."
2contract changes and renegotiations: "this is also a risk area where the Procuring Entity May not get what it contracted and paid for, or May pay for what it has not received. On the other hand, the contractor May not get timely or proper amendments due to changes asked by the procuring entities."## "contract modifications and renegotiations should not substantially alter the nature of the contract. It should not vitiate the basis of the selection of the contractor. It should not give undue or unintended benefits to the contractor.
*However, for any changes caused by the Procuring Entity — the contractor should be adequately and timely compensated within the contractual terms."
3"supervising agencies/ individuals are unduly influenced to alter the contents of their reports — so changes in quality, performance, equipment, and characteristics go unnoticed."A contract management Manual or operating procedure should be prepared for large-value contracts.
There should be built-in systems for checks and balances
4"the contractor's claims are false or inaccurate — and are protected by the person in charge of revising them."## "all large contracts should be formally reconciled for closure — to ensure that the scope of the work and warranty/ defect liability period is completed.
*This should include the dispute resolution forum for resolving disputes in a fixed timeframe, with the provision of escalation level."
5"payment to the contractor is delayed intentionally or otherwise.""all payments/ recoveries should also be reconciled."
6"the contractor gets the final payment — but contract closure has not been formally done. As a result, material/ assets loaned to him are not accounted for."## "*it should also be ensured that material/ assets loaned to him — including security passes — are accounted for."
7## "every dispute lands up in arbitration or court cases — since the Procuring Entity is reluctant to grant compensation for its lapses to the contractor."(addressed by the dispute-resolution ladder at paras 9.37–9.46, and by the DoE directive at para 9.37.2)
8"agents/ sub-contractors and partners — chosen in a non-transparent way — are unaccountable, or are used to channel bribes.""agents should only be as per the terms of the contract.
## *sub-contracting of the contract should normally not be allowed in the procurement of goods."

Appendix to Chapter 9 — Part C: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1AMRCD — the Administrative Mechanism for Resolution of CPSEs Disputes(effective 22 May 2018, superseding the Permanent Machinery of Arbitration; two-tier structure ending with the Cabinet Secretary; three-month decision; 15-day appeal; excludes Railways, Income Tax, Customs and Excise)W ONLY
2Definition of breachG/C/NC: framed around insolvency, receivership, neglect, default, or disinclination to honour obligations — expressly including ETHICAL STANDARDS and the obligation to maintain production capability · W: framed around *inability to honour important stipulations*, noting that breaches mostly relate to inability to complete the Work within stipulated time
3"Obligation to maintain production capability (equipment & manufacturing facilities) based on which contract was awarded"G(a goods-specific default)
4Warranty obligations survive terminationG(consistent with the Goods-only Warranty Clause at Part A, para 9.17)
5Sub-contracting "should normally not be allowed in the procurement of GOODS"G(contrast the Works and NC positions permitting sub-contracting subject to limits — Chapter 3, para 3.3.3 and Chapter 4 Part A, para 4.3.3-E)
6Excepted matters head 6 — Make in India, land-border restrictions, MSE and Start-up preferences excluded from arbitrationCommon to all four
7The three-step ladder — Adjudication → Mediation → Arbitration, with the sequential ruleCommon to all four
8The Mediation Act 2023 replacing the conciliation part of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996Common footnote in all four
9Rs 10 crore norm restricting arbitration; institutional arbitration preferred; arbitration not to be routinely includedCommon to all four(OM dated 03.06.2024)
10The four appointment regimes turning on Section 12(5) waiver — Rs 1 crore / Rs 50 lakh thresholds; the four-name panel; the Finance/ Accounts member requirementCommon to all four
1175% payment against BG on challenging an award; the escrow waterfall; personal accountability for non-adherenceCommon to all four(Rule 227A of GFR 2017)
12Risk row 8 mitigation — "sub-contracting should normally not be allowed"G(the other Manuals' risk tables address agents differently)

end of Chapter 9 (parts a, b and c)

The Unified Manual for Public Procurement

Government of India · Ministry of Finance · Department of Expenditure

The Unified Manual
for Public Procurement

Four procurement Manuals merged into one continuous text. Where they agree, the provision is stated once. Where they differ, the divergence is set out openly, with the position of each Manual identified. Nothing has been dropped in the merging.

G Goods, 2024 W Works, 2025 C Consultancy Services, 2025 NC Non-Consultancy Services, 2025
9Chapters
391Sections
4Manuals merged
400+Points of difference

Front Matter

How to Use this Manual

Colour key — which Manual a passage comes from Common to all four Goods only Works only Consultancy only Non-Consultancy only Two or three Manuals

0.1Purpose and Scope of this Manual

This Manual consolidates, into a single continuous text, the four procurement Manuals issued by the Department of Expenditure, Ministry of Finance, Government of India. It is written for officers preparing for departmental promotion and competitive examinations, and for practitioners who must work across more than one category of procurement.

Each of the four source Manuals is complete in itself, and each is written as though the other three did not exist. In practice they overlap heavily, diverge sharply at particular points, and use different chapter numbers for the same subject matter. A candidate who studies them separately must hold four parallel structures in mind and reconcile them under examination conditions.

This Manual removes that burden. Where the four Manuals agree, the provision is stated once. Where they differ, the divergence is stated openly, with the position of each Manual identified. Nothing has been dropped in the process of merging: every provision of every source Manual appears somewhere in this text.

0.2The Four Source Manuals

TagManualEdition
GManual for Procurement of GoodsSecond Edition, 2024
WManual for Procurement of WorksSecond Edition, 2025
CManual for Procurement of Consultancy ServicesSecond Edition, 2025
NCManual for Procurement of Non-Consultancy Services2025

0.3How to Read this Manual

Untagged text applies to all four categories. Where a provision is confined to one or more categories, the relevant tag appears against the heading or in the body of the text:

TagCategoryMeaning of the tag
GGoodsThe provision appears only in the Goods Manual
WWorksThe provision appears only in the Works Manual
CConsultancy ServicesThe provision appears only in the Consultancy Manual
NCNon-Consultancy ServicesThe provision appears only in the Non-Consultancy Manual

Tags may be combined. A heading marked G + W is common to Goods and Works but absent from the two services Manuals.

Shaded panels carry three kinds of material: a divergence between the Manuals that a reader must not merge in the mind; a passage from a source Manual reproduced because its exact wording matters; or a caution that the source Manual itself states in emphatic terms.

Bold within the running text marks the operative words of a provision — the words on which its legal effect turns. It is used sparingly and deliberately.

Every chapter closes with a table of points of difference between the four Manuals. That table is the single most useful revision aid in this Manual, and should be read before and after the chapter body.

0.4Contents

ChapterTitleWhat it covers
1Introduction — Principles and PoliciesApplicability, categorisation, the Five R's, Value for Money, the five Fundamental Principles, Canons of Financial Propriety, procurement infrastructure, and the whole body of preferential and restricted purchase policy — MSE, Make in India, land border restrictions, Start-ups and DMI&SP
2Need Assessment, Formulation of the Requirement, and Procurement PlanningThe indent, the Perspective Plan and the Procurement Proposal; cost estimation; and the four different instruments by which a requirement is described — Technical Specifications, the DPR sequence, the Terms of Reference, and the Services and Activities Schedule
3Participation of Bidders, Vendor Relationship Management and GovernanceEligibility and legal status of bidders, the Code of Integrity, the Integrity Pact, grievance redressal, conduct of public servants, registration and enlistment, debarment, and Indian agents
4Bidding Design (Parts A and B)Agency for procurement, admeasurement, types of contract, systems of selection including QCBS, tendering systems, channels of procurement; and the full range of modes of procurement from Open Tender to Direct Procurement
5Bid Invitation ProcessModel Tender Documents, the contents and sections of the tender document, the REoI and RfP, e-publishing, amendment and extension, pre-bid conferences, bid submission, and bid opening
6Forms of Securities, Prices, Payment Terms and Price VariationsBid security and performance security, Security Deposit, Insurance Surety Bond and e-BG, payment terms, advance payments, price variation, Exchange Rate Variation, taxes, and Incoterms
7Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract (Parts A and B)Shortlisting and EoI, the Tender Committee and the CEC, preliminary examination, techno-commercial and financial evaluation, LCS, QCBS, SSS and FBS, abnormally low bids, cartels, negotiations, and award
8Special and Unique Types of ProcurementEmergencies and disaster management, buy back, capital goods, AMC, Net Present Value, turnkey; and the special engagements — individual consultants, NGOs, procurement agents, auditors, IT projects, security and manpower services
9Contract Management (Parts A, B and C)Contract administration and quality assurance; time control, cost control, logistics and closure; and breach, termination and the whole dispute resolution apparatus

0.5Master Concordance — Chapter Numbering across the Four Manuals

The single most frequent source of error in examination is that the same subject carries a different chapter number in each Manual. This table should be memorised before anything else in this book.

SubjectThis ManualGWCNC
Introduction, principles and policies11111
Need assessment and procurement planning22222
Bidders, governance and debarment33833
Bidding design and modes of procurement44344
Bid invitation process55455
Securities, prices and payment terms66566
Shortlisting of consultants (EoI)7A7
Bid evaluation and award of contract77687
Special and unique types of procurement88none98
Contract management and monitoring997109

Three consequences follow, and each has been the subject of examination questions:

  1. The Works Manual runs one chapter behind the others from Bidding Design onwards, because it places governance and debarment at the end, as Chapter 8, rather than early, as Chapter 3.
  2. The Consultancy Manual runs one chapter ahead from Bid Evaluation onwards, because it inserts an entire chapter on Shortlisting of Consultants, which has no counterpart anywhere.
  3. The Works Manual has no chapter on special types of procurement at all. Its variants — EPC, PPP, piece Work and stalled contracts — are dealt with inside its Bidding Design chapter.

0.6Master Concordance — Where the Four Manuals Stand Alone

A provision found in only one Manual cannot be inferred from the others. The following are the principal bodies of material that exist in a single Manual, and they account for most of the difference in length between the four.

Body of materialOnly inWhere in this Manual
Reservation of Khadi, pharmaceuticals and 358 MSE-reserved itemsG1.11.1
Right to Information and proactive disclosuresG1.16
Basic principles of undertaking works; administrative controlW1.17, 1.18
Law of AgencyW + C + NC1.15
Technical Specifications, Ecomark, BEE star ratingsG2.4
The PPR, DPR, technical Sanction and Reference Documents sequenceW2.5
Terms of Reference, activity-based and position-basedC2.6
Services and Activities Schedule, Method Statement, KPIsNC2.7
Agency for Procurement — PWO, PSU, works CommitteeW4.1
Admeasurement of services, input and outputNC4.2
Types of contract — Item Rate, Percentage Rate, Piece Work, EPC, PPPW4.3.3
Fixed Budget based SelectionC4.4.5, 7.22
Quality Oriented Procurement and the Special Technical CommitteeW + NC4.4.4
Rate Contract, Approved Vendor List, Proprietary Article CertificateG4.10, 4.13, 4.16
Award of work through quotations; stalled contractsW4.20, 4.21
Accessibility standards under the RPwD ActW5.3.5
Fixed days for issue of NIT and tender openingW5.6
Incoterms, Exchange Rate Variation, Letter of Credit, customsG6.12, 6.15, 6.17
Mobilisation, plant and secured advancesW6.13.2
Evaluation of the quality of technical proposals; the A–E rating scaleC7.17
Splitting of contracts; the option clause; variation of quantitiesG7.26 – 7.28
Emergencies, buy back, capital goods, AMC, Net Present ValueG8.1 – 8.6
Logo design competitions; Digital India; financial advisors; auditorsC8.14 – 8.18
Housekeeping, manpower, private security, vehicle hiring, HaaSNC8.20 – 8.24
Logistics — transport, title, receipt, storage, GRIRG9.30
Compensation Events; Time at Large; the three closure reconciliationsW9.26, 9.27, 9.31
Contract Monitoring Committee; post-contract reviewC + NC9.2, 9.32
The AMRCD mechanism for CPSE disputesW9.47

0.7Master Concordance — The Principal Numerical Divergences

Where the four Manuals prescribe different figures for the same thing, the difference is almost always examinable. These are collected here for revision; each is dealt with in its place in the text.

ProvisionGWCNCSee
Open Tender Enquiry applies aboveRs 50 lakhRs 10 lakhRs 50 lakhRs 50 lakh4.8
Special Limited Tender Enquiry aboveRs 50 lakhRs 10 lakhRs 50 lakhRs 50 lakh4.15
QCBS — weight of qualitynot usednot above 30%70%not above 30%4.4.3, 7.20
Performance security3 – 5%3 – 10%3 – 5%6.2
Firm price contracts up to12 months18 months12 months12 months6.14.2
Consequence under a Bid Securing Declarationsuspendeddebarredsuspendedsuspended6.1
Exemption from bid securityMSEs and Start-upsStart-ups only6.1
Liquidated damages per week0.5%1% for repair works up to Rs 20 lakh, otherwise 0.5%9.24.2
Debarment for breach of the Code of Integritynot less than 6 monthsnot less than 6 monthsnot exceeding 2 yearsnot less than 6 months3.5.5
Reference to the Competition Commission signed byJoint SecretaryJoint SecretaryCompetent AuthorityJoint Secretary3.5.5

0.8A Note on the Source Texts

Two errors in the source Manuals have been retained and flagged rather than silently corrected, because a candidate may be examined on the text as printed:

  1. The Goods Manual states the threshold below which performance security is not necessary as "Rupees 50 (twenty-five) lakh" — the figure and the word do not agree.
  2. The Goods and Consultancy Manuals cite the rule on enlistment of Indian agents as "Rule 52"; the Works and Non-Consultancy Manuals correctly cite Rule 152 of the General Financial Rules, 2017.

A third point of substance should also be noted. The Consultancy Manual assigns 70% weight to the technical score and 30% to cost, and then states two paragraphs later that "the weightage of the cost element adopted in Consultancy services is as high as 70 per cent." That sentence is correct in the Non-Consultancy Manual, where cost does carry 70%, but is internally inconsistent in the Consultancy Manual. Both sentences are reproduced in this Manual at paragraph 7.20.

Chapter 1

Introduction — Principles and Policies

Colour key — which Manual a passage comes from Common to all four Goods only Works only Consultancy only Non-Consultancy only Two or three Manuals

1.1Procurement Rules and Regulations; and this Manual

  1. Various Ministries, Departments, attached and subordinate offices, local urban bodies, public sector enterprises, and other Government (including autonomous) bodies (hereinafter referred to as 'Procuring Entities') spend a sizeable amount of their budget on the Procurement of goods, works and services to fulfil their stated objectives, assigned duties/ obligations/ responsibilities/ functions, and activities in alignment with desired policy outcomes.
  2. GCNC The Ministries/ Departments have been delegated full powers to make their own arrangements for the procurement of goods and services that are not available on the Government e-Marketplace (GeM). These powers must be exercised as per the Delegation of Financial Power Rules and in conformity with the 'Procurement Guidelines' described below. Common use Goods and Services available on GeM are required to be procured mandatorily through GeM as per Rule 149 of GFR, 2017.

W The Ministries/ Departments have been delegated powers to make their own arrangements for procurement of works under the Delegation of Financial Power Rules, which have to be exercised in conformity with the 'Procurement Guidelines' described below.

  1. To ensure that these procurements are made by following a uniform, systematic, efficient and cost-effective procedure, and also to ensure fair and equitable treatment of suppliers/ bidders/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers, there are guidelines comprising a hierarchy of Statutory framework, Rules and Regulations, Manuals of Procurement and Procurement Documents as detailed in Annexure 1 of the Manual for Procurement of Goods, Second Edition, 2024 (hereinafter referred to as 'Procurement Guidelines').
  1. At the apex of the Statutory framework governing public Procurement is Article 299 of the Constitution of India, which stipulates that contracts legally binding on the Government must be executed in writing by officers specifically authorised to do so. The Constitution also enshrines Fundamental Rights — in particular Article 14 (Right to Equality before Law) and Article 19(1)(g) (Right to practise any profession, or to carry on any occupation, trade, or business) — which have implications for Public Procurement.

Further:

  • GCNC The Indian Contract Act, 1872 and the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 are significant legislations governing contracts of sale/ purchase of goods in general.
  • W The Indian Contract Act, 1872 is a significant legislation governing contracts in general.

There are other mercantile laws that may be attracted in Public Procurement transactions:

  • Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996
  • Mediation Act, 2023(in G, W, NC)
  • Competition Act, 2002
  • Information Technology Act, 2000
  • Indian Stamp Act, 1899 (in W, C, NC)

— all as amended from time to time.

  1. In the Central Government, there is no law exclusively governing public procurement. However, comprehensive Rules and Regulations in this regard are available in:
  2. General Financial Rules (GFR), 2017 — especially [G, C, NC] Chapters 6 to 9; W Chapters 5 to 9;
  3. Delegation of Financial Powers Rules (DFPR) — [W, C, NC] cite DFPR, 2024;
  4. Government orders regarding purchase preference/ restrictions, such as the Public Procurement (Preference to Make in India) Order, 2017; facilities to Micro and Small Enterprises and Start-ups; Restrictions on Entities from a Class of Countries (Rule 144(xi), GFR 2017); and W relaxation of the conditions of prior turnover and prior experience for start-up enterprises.
  5. Without purporting to be a comprehensive compendium of all such 'Procurement Guidelines', this Manual is intended to serve as a portal to enter this vast area and draw attention to basic norms and practices governing public procurement.

1.2Clarification, Amendments and Revision of this Manual

The Procurement Policy Division, Department of Expenditure, Ministry of Finance would be the nodal authority for this Manual's revision, interpretation, and clarification.

1.3Applicability of this Manual

1.3.1Category of Procurements

G The Goods Manual applies to the Procurement of all "Goods" as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section. What is unique about the Procurement of goods (as compared to services and works) is the ability to precisely describe the technical specification and scope of the requirement. The other Manuals (Consultancy Services, Non-consultancy Services and Works) are generically based on the Goods Manual. Hence, for any topic for which guidance cannot be found in those Manuals, the Manual for Procurement of Goods shall apply mutatis mutandis. For the sake of brevity, those Manuals refer to some of the sections of the Goods Manual without reproducing them.

W The Works Manual applies to procurement of all "Works" as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section.

C The Consultancy Manual applies to procurement of "Consultancy Services" as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section. For any circumstances not covered, the Procuring Entity may refer to the Manual for Procurement of Goods, 2024.

NC The Non-Consultancy Manual applies to procurement of "Non-consultancy Services" (including "Outsourcing of Services") as defined in the 'Procurement Glossary' section. For any circumstances not covered, the Procuring Entity may refer to the Manual for Procurement of Goods, 2024 (Rule 206 of GFR, 2017).

1.3.2Classification of WorksW

The civil works are classified in GFR 2017 (Rule 130) into three categories:

CategoryMeaning
(a) Original WorksAll new constructions, site preparation, additions and alterations to existing works. Also includes special repairs to newly purchased or previously abandoned buildings or structures, including remodelling or replacement.
(b) Minor WorksWorks which add capital value to existing assets but do not create new assets.
(c) Repair WorksWorks undertaken to maintain building and fixtures. Expenditure on Repair Work does not add to the value of the asset and only restores the functionality of the asset.

Repair Work can be further categorised as:

  1. Annual repairs — covering routine and yearly operation and maintenance work on buildings and fixtures;
  2. Special repairs — undertaken as and when required, covering major repairs to existing buildings or structures. Some types of Special repairs may qualify to be categorised as 'Original Work' as mentioned above.

1.3.3Procuring Entities

  1. This Manual shall apply to all Procuring Entities covered by Rule 1 of GFR, i.e., all Central Government Ministries/ Departments, attached and subordinate bodies. These provisions shall also apply, as per the same rule, to autonomous bodies except to the extent that the bye-laws of an autonomous body provide separate procurement guidelines* that the Government has approved.
  1. W — additional provisions on addressees:
  2. This Manual inter alia covers fundamental provisions relating to the Constitution; Government instructions relating to Preferential Procurement Policies; GTE; Land Border restriction; and General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management (No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 20.10.2021), which are mandatory for all entities of Central Government.
  3. This Manual is addressed to Ministries/ Departments, their attached and subordinate offices, and autonomous bodies whose in-house capabilities are limited to repair works of up to Rs 60 lakh and who assign larger repair works (and original works) to third parties (Public Works Organisations or CPSEs) — Rule 133 of GFR, 2017 (as amended). Refer para 3.1 of the Works Manual for further details.
  4. This Manual may also be useful for Ministries/ Departments, their attached and subordinate offices, and autonomous bodies who have in-house capabilities for direct execution of larger works but may not have their own detailed procurement guidelines.
  5. The Manual does not purport to address procurement of larger works for which major works procuring Ministries/ Departments — like the Central Public Works Department (CPWD); Military Engineering Service (MES); Border Roads Organisation (BRO); Ministries of Railways; Information & Broadcasting; and Departments of Posts and Space, etc. — already have their own detailed guidelines tailored to unique individual requirements. They may, however, ensure that their procurement guidelines comply with the mandatory provisions mentioned in sub-para (a) above.

1.3.4Statutory Bodies and CPSEs

These guidelines shall also be applicable to bodies substantially owned or controlled by, or receiving substantial financial assistance from, the Central Government — inter alia:

  • Central Public Sector Enterprises (CPSEs or undertakings, including their subsidiary companies/ Ventures);
  • Public Sector Banks (PSBs);
  • Public Sector Insurance Companies (PSICs);
  • Public Sector Financial Institutions (FIs);
  • Constitutional or Statutory Bodies;
  • Public Academic Institutions (National/ Central institutes); and
  • Commissions created under the Constitution of India or specific legislations

— except to the extent of deviations that have been approved by their competent authority (e.g., Board of Directors in CPSEs).

1.3.5Indian Missions and CPSE Units Abroad

While the applicability of the Manual in the case of Indian Missions abroad and CPSE Units abroad shall be as per paras 1.3.3 and 1.3.4 above respectively, the following is clarified:

a) Adopting Financial Limits/ Thresholds in Local Currency: For procurements done and for use outside India, in the host country's local currency, Indian Missions and CPSE units abroad may adopt General Financial Rules (GFR) financial limits/ thresholds of procurements (as mentioned in this Manual at various instances, e.g., selection of mode of Procurement etc.) by using the latest INR-PPP conversion rates for the local currency as published by the IMF (International Monetary Fund). For convenience, such converted limits/ thresholds may be reviewed annually. Even if the Procurement is to be done in a currency other than the local currency, the applicable financial limits/ thresholds of procurements shall be in terms of the INR-PPP conversion rate for the local currency only. If the IMF does not publish the PPP conversion rate for local currency, then the conversion may be done to the currency most relevant to that mission/ unit in consultation with the Financial Adviser.

b) Exemptions: For exemptions from restrictions relating to Global Tenders, bidders from Land-border countries, and eProcurement for bona fide procurements and use outside India by Indian Missions and CPSE Units abroad, please refer to paragraphs 4.3.2-4-g)(W cites 4.3.2-4-h), 1.11.4-3-f)ii), and 4.17.1-4(W cites 4.17.1-5) respectively, in the Manual for Procurement of Goods, 2024.

1.3.6Portals

  • G GeM portal, GePNIC portal (Government e-Procurement of NIC, eproc.gov.in), and various such platforms of different Organisations carry out a substantial proportion of Public Procurement. Hence, the procedures for such platforms should conform to these 'Procurement Guidelines'.
  • W Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP of NIC, eproc.gov.in), and various such platforms.
  • CNC GeM portal, CPPP (Central Public Procurement Portal), and various such platforms — the procedures for such platforms should generally conform to these 'Procurement Guidelines'.

1.3.7Outsourced Procurement

These procurement guidelines would continue to apply if these procuring entities:

  • outsource the procurement process, or
  • bundle the procurement process with other contractual arrangements, or
  • utilise the services of a procurement support agency or procurement agents to carry out the Procurement on their behalf.

1.3.8Customisation

This Manual is to be taken as generic guidelines, which are necessarily broad in nature. (CNC add: Subject to the observance of these generic guidelines,) Procuring Entities are advised to customise these Manuals, with the approval of competent authority and financial concurrence, to suit their local/ specialised needs by issuing their own detailed Manuals (including customised formats); Model Tender Documents; Schedule of Procurement Powers; and Checklists — to serve as practical instructions for their officers and to ensure completeness of examination of cases.

For procuring organisations that have their own detailed manuals or procedure orders, the initiation, authorisation, Procurement, and execution of contracts undertaken by them shall be regulated by detailed rules and orders contained in their respective regulations and by other special orders applicable to them.

1.3.9Exemptions

These procurement guidelines would not apply to procurements by procuring entities mentioned above for their own use from their subsidiary companies, including Joint Ventures, where they have a controlling share.

Moreover, by a general or special notification, the Government may permit certain 'Procuring Entities' mentioned above, considering unique conditions under which they operate, for all or certain categories of procurement, to adopt detailed approved guidelines for procurement which may deviate in some respects but conform with all other essential aspects of these 'Procurement Guidelines'.

1.3.10Procurements financed by Loans/ Grants extended by International Funding Agencies

  1. For projects funded by the World Bank, Asian Development Bank, and other International Funding Agencies (IFA), the Articles of Agreement, with the approval of the Ministry of Finance, stipulate either the Indian (or State) Government's own procurement procedures or the IFA's specific procurement procedures to be followed by the borrowers.
  2. These guidelines would not be applicable to projects funded by the World Bank using the Investment Project Financing (IPF) instrument and similar instruments of other IFAs, as stipulated under Articles of Agreement as mentioned under sub-para (a) above. IFA's specific procurement procedures shall be applicable as permitted under Rule 264 of GFR, 2017.
  3. However, for projects financed using instruments such as Program-for-Results (PforR) of the World Bank, and Results-based Lending (RBL) of the Asian Development Bank, and similar instruments of other IFAs, the application of these guidelines as expressly agreed in the legal agreements shall be followed.

1.4Categorisation of Procurements

1.4.1Categories

Categorisation of Procurements helps prepare guidelines for Procurements and Model Tender Documents, which cater to peculiar contractual conditions of the categories of procurements. G These categories may be further sub-categorised, e.g., Capital Equipment procurement in Goods.

Following are the categories of procurements (please refer to their definitions in the 'Procurement Glossary' section):

  • a) Goods
  • b) Services
  • i) Consultancy Services, and
  • ii) Non-consultancy services (NC services)
  • c) Works

1.4.2Distinctive Features

Normally, such categorisation is evident from their definition, and Procurement should be done accordingly, following the relevant guidelines and Model Tender Documents. The boundaries between such categorisation may not be clear-cut and may overlap. It may neither be possible nor necessary to distinguish precisely between the categories in overlapping areas. Though simplistic, the main distinguishing factors between these are:

  1. While both Goods and Works lead to tangible outputs (with some exceptions like IPR materials), the main difference between goods and works is that the manufacture of goods is done on the supplier's own premises (other than installation/ commissioning), whereas 'Works' is executed on the premises of the procuring entity (other than pre-fabricated components). Works may include incidental 'Goods' and vice versa.
  2. The main difference between 'Goods' or 'Works' on the one hand and 'Services' on the other is the intangibility of the outputs of Services.
  3. The main difference between Consultancy and Non-consultancy services is the level of intellectual input, which is predominant in Consultancy and not central to Non-consultancy. Another difference is that non-consultancy services are repetitive routines with measurable and standardised outputs, while consultancy services are one-off and non-routine, with outputs that are neither precisely measurable nor standardised.

1.4.3In Case of Doubt

Procurement in cases of doubts about categorisation may be handled as follows:

a) Simpler procedure rule: In the case of blurred border lines and grey areas, a simpler procurement procedure should be followed. In case of doubt between:

  • i) Goods and works/ NC services/ consultancy → process as Procurement of Goods;
  • ii) Works and NC service/ consultancy → process as Procurement of Works;
  • iii) Non-consultancy and Consultancy services → process as Procurement of Non-consultancy services.

b) IT Projects: The Procurement of IT projects should usually be carried out as a procurement of Consultancy services, as the outcomes/ deliverables vary from one service provider to another. The IT Projects may include:

  • i) tailor-made/ bespoke software development;
  • ii) cloud-based services;
  • iii) composite IT system integration services involving the design, development, deployment and commissioning of IT systems, including hardware supply, software development, bandwidth, and operation/ maintenance of the system for a defined period after going live, etc.

c) Composite Contracts(PPD's OM No. F6/2/2023-PPD dated 13.01.2023): Composite contracts may involve mixed elements of Goods, Works, and Services. For example, in the Procurement of large machinery, some works and services like Installation, Commissioning, Training, Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) or a Comprehensive Maintenance Contract (CMC), and so on, may be incidental to the supply of goods. The relationship of primacy between the goods element and the works/ services element may be examined, irrespective of the relative values.

  • If the primary intention/ objective is the Procurement of goods with services/ works being incidental to it, it may be processed as Procurement of Goods.
  • However, if the primary intention/ objective is Procurement of Works/ Services with Procurement of goods being incidental, then it should generally be processed as Procurement of Works/ Services (as the case may be), irrespective of the relative values.
  • A possible alternative approach could be to have separate but linked contracts for such elements of Goods, Works, and Services, but implementation may become challenging.

WCNC — further refinements:

  • i) Procurement of "new product" viz. Mechanical, Electrical or ICT assets etc. of the nature of Machinery and Plant, with incidental works/ services like fabrication, installation, erection, commissioning, AMC/CMC, should be handled as procurement of Goods — except for procurement of IT Projects as specified above.
  • ii) AMC/ CMC of existing Mechanical, Electrical or ICT assets of the nature of Machinery and Plant should be treated as procurement of Non-Consultancy Services.

d) Consultancy vs Non-Consultancy — the "primary objective" test WCNC: It is possible that, depending on the nature and complexity of the assignment, a task could be dealt with either as a consultancy or a non-consultancy service. In essence, if the intellectual and advisory part of services is the primary objective (irrespective of the relative value of this component), the selection needs to be dealt with in Consultancy mode.

1.5Authorities Competent to Incur Expenditure on Procurements and Consultation with Financial Advisers

  1. The first step in procurement is the decision to procure something — goods, services, works, etc. — involving a formal decision to procure along with the exact or approximate expenditure to be incurred. A Competent Authority that is competent to incur expenditure may accord administrative sanction/ approval to incur expenditure on a specific procurement in accordance with the Delegation of Financial Powers Rules (DFPR) by following the 'Procurement Guidelines' (Rule 145 of GFR 2017).

Each 'Procuring Entity' may issue a Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP), adding further details to the broad delegations in the DFPR based on assessing risks involved in different decisions/ approvals at various stages of the Procurement Cycle.

  1. Being a decision with a financial bearing, it invariably requires consultation of the Financial Adviser (unless validly re-delegated within permissible limits or otherwise permitted by DoE through specific orders). The extent of involvement of the Financial Adviser and the Integrated Finance Division (IFD) in subsequent stages of procurement matters may be based on one of the following procedures (Para 19, Charter for Financial Advisers, 2023):

a) Normal Procedure: Under this procedure, the concurrence of the Financial Adviser/ IFD shall be required on all procurement matters, except for matters where re-delegation has been done within the permissible limits under the rules/ general orders/ general instructions of DoE. Unless the Secretary of the Department approves a special procedure with the concurrence of DoE, this procedure shall be followed.

b) Special Procedure: With the prior concurrence of Secretary (Expenditure), the Secretary of the Department may decide on a different level of involvement of the Financial Adviser/ IFD specific to the Department. The procedure shall lay out the types/ classes of cases where the Financial Adviser/ IFD consultation would be required, which may be in terms of:

  • threshold financial limits,
  • stages in Procurement, or
  • types of Procurement and contracts, viz. consultancy (NC adds: / non-consultancy), goods and works contracts, etc.,
  • or any permutation thereof.

G clarification: It is further clarified that this system will be applicable only to Ministries/ Departments etc. covered under the FA Charter. All other organisations, including CPSEs, are free to devise their own system.

  1. In all procedures, payments under approved contracts shall not require IFD consultation, except in cases where the payments are in relaxation/ variation to approved contract conditions.

1.6Basic Aims of Procurement — the Five R's of Procurement

In every Procurement, public or private, the basic aim is to achieve just the right balance between costs and requirements with respect to five parameters called the Five 'R's of Procurement. The entire process of Procurement — from the time the need for an item, facility or service is identified till the need is satisfied — is designed to achieve such a right balance. The word 'Right' is used in the sense of 'optimal balance'.

The Five R's are: 1. Right Quality; 2. Right Quantity; 3. Right Price; 4. Right Time and Place; and 5. Right Source.

1.6.1Right Quality

Procurement aims to buy just the right quality that will suit the needs — no more and no less — with precise specifications of the procuring entity's requirements, a proper understanding of the functional value and cost, and an understanding of the bidder's quality system and quality awareness. The concept of the right balance of quality can be further refined to the concept of utility/ value (refer para 1.7 below). Technical specifications and quality assurance plans are the most vital ingredients for the right quality. In public procurement, it is essential to give due consideration to value for money while preparing the specifications.

1.6.2Right Quantity

There are extra costs and systemic overheads involved with both procuring a requirement too frequently in small quantities and buying significant quantities for prolonged use. Hence, the right quantity should be procured (in the appropriate size of the contract), which balances extra costs associated with larger and smaller quantities.

1.6.3Right Price

It is not correct to aim at the cheapest materials/ facilities/ services available. The price should be just right for the quality, quantity, and other factors involved — or should not be abnormally low for facilities, works, or services, which could lead to a situation of non-performance or failure of contract. The concept of price can be refined further to consider not only the initial price paid for the requirement but also other costs such as maintenance costs, operational costs, and disposal costs (also termed life cycle costing — refer para 1.7 below).

1.6.4Right Time and Place

If an organisation needs the material (or facility or services) in three months, it will be costly to procure it too late or too early. Similarly, if the vendor delivers the materials/ facilities/ services in another city, extra time and money would be involved in logistics. An unrealistic time schedule for completion of a facility may lead to delays, claims, and disputes.

1.6.5Right Source

The source of delivery of Goods, Works and Services must have just the right financial capacity and technical capability for our needs — demonstrated through satisfactory past performance of contracts of the same or similar nature. Buying a few packets of printer paper directly from a large manufacturer may not be the right strategy. On the other hand, if our requirements are large, buying such requirements through dealers or intermediaries may also not be right.

1.7Refined Concepts of Cost and Value — Value for Money

The concept of price or cost has been further refined into:

  • Total Cost of Ownership (TCO),
  • Life Cycle Cost (LCC), or
  • Whole-of-Life (WOL) cost

— to consider not only the initial acquisition cost but also the cost of operation, maintenance, and disposal during the lifetime of the external resource procured.

Similarly, the concept of quality is linked to the need and is refined into the concept of utility/ value.

These two, taken together, are used to develop the concept of Value for Money (VfM) — also called Best Value for Money in certain contexts.

VfM means the effective, efficient, and economical use of resources, which may involve the evaluation of:

  • relevant costs and benefits, along with
  • an assessment of risks,
  • non-price attributes — e.g., goods and/or services that contain recyclable content, are recyclable, minimise waste and greenhouse gas emissions, conserve energy and water, minimise habitat destruction and environmental degradation, are non-toxic, etc., and/or
  • life cycle costs, as appropriate.

Price alone may not necessarily represent VfM.

In public Procurement, VfM is achieved by attracting the widest competition by way of:

  • optimal description of need;
  • development of value-engineered specifications/ Terms of Reference (ToR);
  • appropriate packaging/ slicing of requirement;
  • selection of an appropriate mode of Procurement and tendering system.

1.8Fundamental Principles of Public Procurement

General Financial Rules, 2017 (Rule 144) lay down the Fundamental Principles of Public Procurement. These principles and other additional obligations of procuring authorities in public Procurement can be organised into five fundamental principles of public Procurement, which all procuring authorities must abide by and be accountable for:

  1. Transparency Principle
  2. Professionalism Principle
  3. Broader Obligations Principle
  4. Extended Legal Responsibilities Principle(C terms it "Extrinsic legal principle"; W terms it "Extended legal principle")
  5. Public Accountability Principle

1.8.1Transparency Principle

All procuring authorities are responsible and accountable for ensuring transparency, fairness, equality, competition, and appeal rights. This involves simultaneous, symmetric, and unrestricted dissemination of information to all likely bidders, sufficient for them to know and understand the availability of bidding opportunities and the actual means, processes and time-limits prescribed for completion of registration of bidders, bidding, evaluation, grievance redressal, award, and management of contracts.

It implies that such officers must ensure:

  • consistency (absence of subjectivity),
  • predictability (absence of arbitrariness),
  • clarity,
  • openness (absence of secretiveness), and
  • equal opportunities (absence of discrimination) in processes.

In essence, the Transparency Principle also enjoins upon the Procuring Authorities to do only that which they professed to do as pre-declared in the relevant published documents, and not to do anything that had not been so declared.

As part of this principle, all procuring entities should ensure that offers are invited following a fair and transparent procedure and ensure publication of all relevant information on the Government e-Marketplace (GeM) and GeM-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP).

1.8.2Professionalism Principle

  1. As per these synergic attributes, the procuring authorities have a responsibility and accountability to ensure professionalism, economy, efficiency, effectiveness, and integrity in the procurement process. They must avoid wasteful, dilatory, and improper practices violating the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP). They should, at the same time, ensure that the methodology adopted for Procurement is reasonable and appropriate for the cost and complexity and that it effectively achieves the planned objective of the Procurement. As part of this principle, the Government may prescribe professional standards and specify suitable training and certification requirements for officials dealing with procurement matters.
  2. In reference to the above two principles — Transparency and Professionalism — it may be useful to refer to the following provision in the General Financial Rules, 2017:
  1. The procedure to be followed in making public Procurement must conform to the following yardsticks (Rule 144, GFR 2017):
  2. offers should be invited following a fair, transparent, and reasonable procedure;
  3. the procuring authority should be satisfied that the selected offer adequately meets the requirement in all respects;
  4. the procuring authority should satisfy itself that the price of the selected offer is reasonable and consistent with the quality required.

1.8.3Broader Obligations Principle

  1. Over and above transparency and professionalism, the procuring authorities also have the responsibility and accountability to conduct public Procurement in a manner that facilitates the achievement of the broader objectives, social policies and programme objectives of the Government — for example, economic growth, strengthening of local industry (Make in India), Ease of Doing Business, job and employment creation, and so on — to the extent these are specifically included in the 'Procurement Guidelines'. These policies are detailed in para 1.11 below.
  2. To support social policies — reservation of Procurement of specified goods from MSEs, weaker sections, backward regions, and reservation of Procurement of certain goods from MSEs.
  3. To strengthen local industry and job/ employment creation — preferential Procurement of locally manufactured goods or services (Rule 153(iii) of GFR, 2017) and support to Start-up enterprises (Rule 170(i), 173(i) of GFR, 2017).
  4. To achieve programme objectives — reservation of Procurement of a specified class of goods from or through certain nominated CPSEs or Government Organisations.
  5. On grounds of defence of India or matters directly or indirectly related thereto, including national security — impose restrictions, including prior registration and/or screening, on Procurement from bidders from, or bidders having commercial arrangements with an entity from, a certain country or countries, or a class of countries — Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017.
  6. Facilitating broader objectives of other Departments of Government — for example, ensuring tax or environmental compliance by participants, Energy Conservation, accessibility for People with Disabilities, etc. Procurement policies and procedures must comply with accessibility criteria that the Government may mandate from time to time.

1.8.4Extended Legal Responsibilities Principle

Procuring authorities must fulfil additional legal obligations in public Procurement, over and above mere conformity to the mercantile laws (which even private sector procurements must comply with).

The Constitution of India has certain provisions regarding fundamental rights and public Procurement. Courts have, over time, taken a broader view of public Procurement as a function of the 'State', interpreting these to extend the responsibility and accountability of public procurement authorities. Courts in India thus exercise additional judicial review (beyond contractual issues) over public Procurement in relation to the manner of decision-making with respect to fundamental rights, fair play, and legality.

Similarly, procuring authorities also have the responsibility and accountability to comply with the laws relating to Governance Issues like the Right to Information (RTI) Act and the Prevention of Corruption Act, and so on.

1.8.5Public Accountability Principle

  1. Procuring authorities are accountable for all the above principles to several statutory and official bodies in the Country — the Legislature and its Committees, Central Vigilance Commission, Comptroller and Auditor General of India, Central Bureau of Investigation and so on — in addition to administrative accountability. As a result, each individual public procurement transaction is liable to be scrutinised independently and in isolation, besides judging the overall outcomes of the procurement process over a period. Procuring authorities thus have responsibility and accountability for compliance with rules and procedures in each individual procurement transaction, as well as the achievement of overall procurement outcomes.
  2. The procuring authority, at each stage of Procurement, must therefore place on record, in precise terms, the considerations that weighed with it while making the procurement decision — from need assessment to fulfilment of need (Rule 144(viii), GFR 2017).
  3. Such records must be preserved, retained in easily retrievable form, and made available to such oversight agencies on demand. The procuring entity shall therefore maintain and retain audit trails, records and documents generated or received during its procurement proceedings in chronological order. The files shall be stored in an identified place and retrievable for scrutiny whenever needed without wasting time.

1.9Standards (Canons) of Financial ProprietyGW

Public Procurement, like any other expenditure in Government, must conform to the Standards (also called Canons) of Financial Propriety. It may be useful to refer to the relevant provisions in the General Financial Rules, 2017:

1.10Public Procurement Infrastructure at the Centre

Public Procurement is a complex function, and the infrastructure needed to execute it is equally complex. In India, the following administrative, oversight, and digital infrastructure exists for Public Procurement:

  1. Procurement Policy Division (PPD)
  2. Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP)
  3. Government e-Marketplace (GeM)
  4. Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India
  5. Lokpal/ Lokayukta — Anti-corruption Ombudsman
  6. Central Vigilance Commission (CVC)
  7. Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)

1.10.1Procurement Policy Division (PPD)

The Procurement Policy Division (PPD) in the Department of Expenditure, Ministry of Finance has been created to encourage uniformity and harmonisation in public procurement processes by:

  • disseminating best practices,
  • providing guidance, oversight and capacity building,
  • issuing procurement manuals and Model Tender Documents.

However, centralisation of Procurement or involvement in procurement processes is not the intended purpose of the creation of PPD.

1.10.2Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP)

The Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) has been designed, developed and hosted by the National Informatics Centre (NIC, Ministry of Electronics & Information Technology) in association with the Department of Expenditure to ensure transparency in the public procurement process.

  • Primary objective: to provide single-point access to the information on procurements made across various Ministries and Departments.
  • The CPPP has e-publishing and e-procurement modules.
  • It is mandatory for all Ministries/ Departments of the Central Government, CPSEs, and Autonomous and Statutory Bodies to publish on the CPPP all their tender enquiries and information about the resulting contracts.
  • CPPP provides access to information on documents relating to pre-qualification, bidders' registration, Tender Documents, details of bidders, their pre-qualification, registration, exclusions/ debarments, decisions taken regarding pre-qualification and selection of successful bids.
  • Implementing end-to-end e-procurement for all procurements is now mandatory — either through the CPPP portal or any other suitable GCQE-compliant portal.

1.10.3Government e-Marketplace (GeM)

GeM is the 'National Public Procurement Portal', serving as an end-to-end online marketplace for various entities.

  • The Procurement of Goods and Services available on GeM (as per Rule 149 of GFR, 2017) is mandatory for Ministries/ Departments (including attached/ subordinate offices), CPSEs, autonomous bodies and local bodies.
  • GeM facilitates the Procurement of common-use goods and services by such entities.
  • The portal aims to enhance efficiency, transparency, and speed in public Procurement.
  • Through this paperless, contactless, and cashless platform, registered government buyers can seamlessly procure goods and services from registered sellers.

1.10.4Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India

  1. The CAG of India, established under Articles 149–151 of the Constitution of India, holds a pivotal role as the Supreme Audit Institution of India (SAII). CAG plays a crucial role in promoting accountability, transparency, and good governance through high-quality auditing and accounting. It provides independent and timely assurance to the legislature, the public, and the executive that public funds are being collected and utilised effectively and efficiently.
  2. The CAG's mandate encompasses a wide spectrum of audit and reporting responsibilities:
  3. Government Departments and Entities;
  4. Government Companies and Corporations;
  5. Autonomous Bodies and Authorities that receive government funding (e.g., municipal bodies, IIMs, IITs, state health societies);
  6. Special Requests and Initiatives — the CAG can audit the accounts of any other body or authority upon request of the President/ Governor, or on its own initiative.
  7. CAG conducts multiple types of audits, namely:
  8. Compliance Audits
  9. Financial Audits
  10. Performance Audits
  11. Thematic Audits
  12. IT Audits

These audits, especially the performance audits, are noted to cover Procurement, but only with the perspective of identifying if any wastage, malpractice, and fraud have occurred.

  1. To carry out its extensive audit mandate effectively, the CAG is endowed with significant powers:
  2. Inspection Authority — power to inspect any office or organisation subject to its audit.
  3. Transaction Examination — can examine all transactions and question the executive regarding financial matters.
  4. Record Access — can call for records, papers, and documents from any audited entity.
  5. Audit Extent and Manner — authority to decide the extent and manner of audit to ensure thorough scrutiny.

1.10.5Lokpal/ Lokayukta — Anti-corruption Ombudsman

  1. The Lokpal and Lokayukta Act, 2013 and its amendment in 2016 (the Act) provides for a Lokpal in the Central (Union) Government and Lokayukta in the State Governments as the statutory anti-corruption Ombudsman to inquire into allegations of corruption against public servants and for related matters. Once appointed — by the President in the case of Lokpal, or the Governor in the case of Lokayukta — they cannot be transferred or removed except by impeachment proceedings undertaken by Parliament or the State legislatures respectively.
  2. The Act outlines the Lokpal's and Lokayuktas' roles, powers, and responsibilities. It has a broad scope regarding the individuals it covers — extending to:
  3. Union Ministers (including the serving and former Prime Ministers),
  4. Members of Parliament, and
  5. various categories of public servants, including those in Group 'A', 'B', 'C', or 'D' positions as defined in the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988.
  6. All entities (NGOs) receiving donations from foreign sources under the Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA)above Rs 10 lakh per year are also under the jurisdiction of Lokpal.

The Act grants Lokpal powers to sanction prosecution against public servants.

  1. There are exceptions in matters related to international relations, external and internal security, public order, atomic energy, and space. To initiate an inquiry into such cases, at least two-thirds of Lokpal members must approve. The Act emphasises confidentiality — if Lokpal concludes a complaint is baseless, the inquiry records remain undisclosed to the public or any party involved.
  2. One significant aspect of the Act is the requirement for public servants to declare their assets in a specified manner. This transparency measure aims to deter corruption and promote accountability.
  3. Composition: One Chairperson and a maximum of eight other members.
  4. The age of Lokpal (Chairperson or member) on the date of assuming office should not be under 45 years.
  5. Of the eight members, four are judicial members who are or have been judges of the Supreme Court or a Chief Justice of a High Court.
  6. The remaining four are non-judicial members — people of impeccable integrity and outstanding ability, having special knowledge and expertise of not less than twenty-five years in matters relating to anti-corruption policy, public administration, vigilance, finance including insurance and banking, law, and management.
  7. Fifty per cent of the Members shall be from Scheduled Castes/ Scheduled Tribes/ Other Backward Classes/ Minorities and women.
  8. Selection Committee: The Chairperson and Lokpal members are selected through a selection committee consisting of:
  9. the Prime Minister,
  10. the Speaker of Lok Sabha,
  11. the Leader of Opposition in Lok Sabha,
  12. the Chief Justice of India (CJI) or a sitting Supreme Court judge nominated by CJI, and
  13. another eminent jurist nominated by the President of India based on the recommendations of the first four members of the selection committee "through consensus".
  14. Lokpal may refer complaints for investigation to the CBI. For such cases, CBI would work under Lokpal's supervision. It envisages a 'Directorate of Prosecution' under the overall control of the Director, CBI, with a fixed tenure of two years. The appointment of the Director of Prosecution is to be based on the recommendation of the Central Vigilance Commission. Transfer of CBI officers investigating cases referred by Lokpal shall be with the CVC's approval.
  15. The Act lays down clear timelines for preliminary enquiry, investigation and trial and has provisions for attachment and confiscation of property acquired by corrupt means, even while prosecution is pending.

1.10.6Central Vigilance Commission (CVC)

  1. Under the Central Vigilance Commission Act, 2003, the CVC is a statutory body headed by the Central Vigilance Commissioner and comprising not more than two Commissioners. It is conceived to be the apex oversight institution, independent from any executive authority. There are two Chief Technical Examiners (CTE) who oversee public procurement.
  2. All Central (Union) Government entities appoint a Chief Vigilance Officer (CVO) in consultation with the CVC. CVOs undertake system audits and preventive/ forensic investigations in the Entity and report them to the CVC.
  3. CVC only investigates and recommends punitive and follow-up actions to the concerned entity but has no punitive powers by itself. The recommendations are not binding on the entities, but CVC may report any deviations from recommendations to Parliament. It has an advisory role in Discipline and Appeal cases arising from its investigations. It plays a role in sanctioning prosecutions related to corruption and consultations in key appointments. CVC also has a role in the appointment of Independent External Monitors (IEM) under the Integrity Pact (wherever applicable) for Central (Union) Government Entities. CVC submits an annual report to Parliament regarding its investigations.
  4. CVC has superintendence over the functioning of the CBI regarding the investigation of offences related to corruption in Central (Union) Government Agencies. CVC has jurisdiction over cases under the Lokpal and Lokayukta Act, Whistle Blowers Act, and Money Laundering Act.
  5. It has the powers of a civil court when conducting any inquiry. CVC and CVOs do not have the powers of Police to arrest, seize properties, and enforce compliance from non-government agencies. Therefore, cases requiring such action are entrusted to the CBI.
  6. To avoid conflict of interest, CVO and vigilance officers shall not associate with decision-making that may have vigilance sensitivities. Some organisations have a system wherein executive work — like the shortlisting of arbitrators or the debarment of firms — is entrusted fully/ partially to vigilance. The same is not appropriate and is also against the CVC Vigilance Manual.
  7. The following levels/ categories of officials are covered under the jurisdiction of the CVC:
CategoryCoverage
a) All India Services & Central GovernmentMembers of All India Services serving in connection with the affairs of the Union, and Group 'A' officers of the Central Government. Officers of central services, even those working in state governments, are also under its jurisdiction.
b) Schedule 'A' and 'B' PSUs of the Central GovernmentChief Executives and Executives on the Board and other officers of level E-8 and above
c) Schedule 'C' and 'D' PSUs of the Central GovernmentChief Executives and Executives on the Board and other officers of level E-7 and above
d) Public Sector BanksOfficers of the rank of Scale V and above
e) Reserve Bank of India, NABARD and SIDBIOfficers in Grade 'D' and above
f) General Insurance CompaniesManagers and above
g) Life Insurance Corporation of IndiaSenior Divisional Managers and above
h) Societies and local authorities owned or controlled by the Central GovernmentOfficers drawing a salary of Rs 8,700/- per month and above

1.10.7Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)

  1. Under the Delhi Special Police Establishment Act, 1946, the CBI — a police organisation under the Department of Personnel, Ministry of Personnel, Pension & Public Grievances — is the only oversight agency with police powers. It investigates and prosecutes corruption cases (including those related to public procurement) requiring arrest, seizure of properties and enforcement of compliance from non-government agencies. The prosecutions are carried out under, inter alia, the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988. It takes up cases based on complaints received from stakeholders or the general public.

Jurisdiction: Though its jurisdiction is restricted to Delhi and UTs, under sections 5 & 6 of the Act, the Central Government can extend its powers and jurisdiction to a State with the consent of the government of that State for investigation of specified offences (generally related to All India Services or Members of Parliament). High Courts and the Supreme Court can also order the CBI to investigate cases outside its normal jurisdiction, for which no consent is required from the State.

  1. The Delhi Special Police Establishment (DSPE), which forms a part of the CBI, has two Divisions:
DivisionInvestigates
(i) Anti-Corruption Division (ACD)All cases registered under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988. If an offence under any section of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 (replaced by the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS), 2023 from 1st July 2024) or any other law is committed along with the offence of bribery and corruption, it shall also be investigated by the ACD. The ACD also investigates cases of serious irregularities allegedly committed by public servants.
(ii) Special Crimes Division (SCD)All cases of Economic offences and all cases of conventional crime, such as offences relating to internal security, espionage, sabotage, narcotics and psychotropic substances, antiquities, murders and dacoities/ robberies, cheating, criminal breach of trust, forgery, dowry deaths, suspicious deaths, etc.
  1. While the superintendence of DSPE, as far as it relates to investigation of offences under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, vests in the CVC; for all other matters, the superintendence of DSPE vests in the Central Government.
  2. The administration of DSPE vests in the Director of the CBI, who is appointed on the recommendations of a committee headed by the Central Vigilance Commissioner. He holds office for a period of not less than two years. The Director of CBI exercises, in respect of DSPE, powers exercisable by an Inspector General of Police regarding the police force in a State.
  3. DSPE cannot conduct any inquiry or investigation into any offence alleged to have been committed under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, except with the prior approval of the Central Government, where such allegation relates to employees at the level of Joint Secretary and above in the Central Government, or corporations established by or under any Central Act, Government companies, societies, and local authorities owned or controlled by it.
  4. No such approval, however, is necessary for cases involving the arrest of a person on the spot on the charge of accepting or attempting to accept any gratification other than legal remuneration.

1.11Preferential / Mandatory / Restricted Purchase from Certain Sources

The Central Government may, by notification, provide for mandatory procurement of any goods or services from any category of bidders, or provide for preference to bidders on the grounds of promotion of locally manufactured goods or locally provided services (General Financial Rules, 2017, Rule 153).

WPresently the following policies are in vogue.

1.11.1Reservation of Procurement of Certain Class of Products from Certain AgenciesG

1.Khadi Goods / Handloom Textiles

Out of the total procurement of handloom origin textiles required by Central Government departments throughout the year, it shall be mandatory to make procurement of at least 20% from:

  • the Khadi & Village Industries Commission (KVIC), and/or
  • Handloom Clusters such as Co-operative Societies, Self Help Group (SHG) Federations, Joint Liability Groups (JLG), Producer Companies (PC), Corporations etc., including Weavers having Pehchan Card.

(Notified vide OM No. F.10/2/2019-PPD(Pt.) issued by Department of Expenditure dated 17.02.2020.)

Khadi and Handloom goods are also available on GeM. (GFR Rule 153(i).)

2.Pharmaceuticals from Pharmaceutical CPSEs

a) The Pharmaceuticals Purchase Policy, 2013(Department of Pharmaceuticals, Ministry of Chemicals and Fertilizers, OM 50(9)/2010-PI-IV dated 10.12.2013) is intended to ensure:

  • i) Optimum utilisation of the installed capacity and the provision of a necessary fillip in reviving these ailing pharmaceutical CPSEs;
  • ii) Availability of quality medicines at low prices to the masses;
  • iii) Drug security of the nation.

b) Salient features of this policy:

  • i) The Policy in respect of 103 medicines, originally valid for a period of five years, has now been renewed and extended(as approved by the Union Cabinet in its meeting held on 20.11.2019)till the final closure/ strategic disinvestment of the Pharma PSEs mentioned below.
  • ii) The Policy extends only to CPSEs under the administrative control of the Department of Pharmaceuticals, such as:
  • Indian Drugs and Pharmaceuticals Limited (IDPL)
  • Hindustan Antibiotics Limited (HAL)
  • Bengal Chemicals and Pharmaceuticals Limited (BCPL)
  • Karnataka Antibiotics and Pharmaceuticals Limited (KAPL)
  • Rajasthan Drugs and Pharmaceuticals Limited (RDPL)

and their subsidiaries where the Government of India owns 51% or above shares.

  • iii) Applicable to purchases by Central Government Departments, their PSUs, Autonomous Bodies, etc. Also applicable to the purchase of medicines by State Governments under health programmes funded by the Government of India, such as the National Rural Health Mission.
  • iv) Pricing of the products would be done by the National Pharmaceutical Pricing Authority (NPPA) using the cost-based formula, as mentioned in the Drugs Price Control Order, 1995. A uniform discount of 16% would be extended to all products. All taxes, whatsoever, would have to be passed on to buyers.
  • v) Annual revision of prices would be linked to the Wholesale Price Index, as per provisions contained in the Drugs Prices Control Order, 2013.
  • vi) The procuring entity would purchase from pharma CPSEs and their subsidiaries subject to their meeting Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) norms as per Schedule 'M' of the Drugs & Cosmetics Rules.
  • vii) In case pharma CPSEs and their subsidiaries fail to supply the medicines, the procuring entity would be at liberty to make purchases from other manufacturers. If the pharma CPSEs or their subsidiaries fail to perform as per the purchase order, they would also be subject to payment of liquidated damages or any other penalty as per the terms of the contract.
  • viii) The list of medicines (Annexure 29 of the Goods Manual) may be reviewed and revised by the Department of Pharmaceuticals as per requirement.

3.Reservation of specific items for procurement from Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE)

To enable wider dispersal of enterprises in the country, particularly in rural areas, the Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ Public Sector Undertakings shall continue to procure items reserved for procurement exclusively from MSE — presently 358 items (including eight items of Handicrafts), which have been reserved for exclusive purchase from them. The latest list can be found on the MSME Ministry's website.

The Ministry of MSME has clarified that laminated paper Gr. I, II and III are not covered under the paper conversion product (Sl. No. 202) of the Public Procurement Policy (Policy Circular No. 21(6)/2016-MA dated 26.05.2016).

NSIC may be contacted to locate the sources of such reserved items.

1.11.2Public Procurement Policy for Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs)

(Rule 153(ii) of GFR 2017)

1.The Policy

From time to time, the Government of India lays down procurement policies to help inclusive national economic growth by providing long-term support to micro, small and medium enterprises, and to disadvantaged sections of society(C adds: "and to address environmental concerns").

The Procurement Policy for Micro and Small Enterprises, 2012 [amended 2018 and 2021] has been notified by the Government in exercise of the powers conferred in Section 11 of the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development (MSMED) Act, 2006, which is mandatory to be followed by Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ Public Sector Undertakings. Details of the policy, along with the amendments issued in 2018 and 2021, are available on the MSME website.

2.Eligibility

  1. Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) registered under Udyam Registration are eligible to avail the benefits under the policy.
  2. This Policy provides preferential procurement of goods produced and services rendered by MSEs. Traders/ distributors/ sole agents/ Works Contracts are EXCLUDED from the purview of the policy.
  3. i) (Notified by MSME Ministry vide S.O. 4926(E) dated 18.10.2022) In case of an upward change in terms of investment in plant and machinery or equipment or turnover or both, and consequent re-classification, an enterprise shall continue to avail of all non-tax benefits of the category (micro, small, or medium) it was in before the re-classification, for a period of three years from the date of such upward change.
  • ii) MSEs would be treated as owned by SC/ST or Women entrepreneurs where:
  • In the case of a proprietary MSE — the proprietor(s) are SC/ST or Woman;
  • In the case of a partnership MSE — the SC/ST or Women partners hold at least 51% shares in the unit;
  • In the case of Private Limited Companies — SC/ST or Women promoters hold at least 51% share.

3.Applicability and Exemptions

  1. The policy is applicable to Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ Public Sector Undertakings.
  2. The policy is not applicable to State Government Ministries/ Departments/ State PSEs, but they have similar policies applicable in their state.
  3. Exemptions: Given their unique nature, defence armament imports shall not be included in computing the 25% goal for the Ministry of Defence. In addition, defence equipment like weapon systems, missiles, etc., shall remain out of the purview of such a reservation policy. Monitoring of goals set under the policy will be done, as far as they relate to the Defence sector, by the Ministry of Defence itself, in accordance with suitable procedures to be established by them.

4.Facilities for MSE

a) Reduced Transaction Costs: To reduce the transaction cost of doing business, MSEs will be facilitated by:

  • providing them tender documents free of cost,
  • exempting MSEs from payment of Earnest Money Deposits, and
  • adopting e-procurement to bring transparency in the tender process.

However, exemption from paying Performance Bank Guarantee/ Security Deposit is not covered under the policy.

b) Relaxation in Prior Turnover and Experience: The Procuring Entity may relax the condition of prior turnover and prior experience for start-up enterprises recognised by DPIIT, subject to meeting quality & technical specifications. Start-ups may be MSMEs/ MSEs or otherwise. Such relaxation can be provided in the case of procurement of works as well.

It is further clarified that such relaxation is not optional but normally has to be ensured, except in the case of procurement of items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, etc., where adequate justification exists for the Procuring Entity not to relax such criteria (Notified vide OM No. F.20/2/2014-PPD(Pt.) issued by Department of Expenditure dated 29.09.2016). The decision of the Procuring Entity in this regard shall be final. (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017.)

c) Timely Payments:Chapter V of the MSMED Act, 2006 has provisions for ensuring timely payments to MSE suppliers:

  • The period agreed upon for payment must not exceed forty-five (45) days from the deemed acceptance of the materials supplied by the MSEs.
  • In case of any discrepancies in the supplies, the Procuring Entity shall raise an objection to the MSE supplier within 15 days from the date of receipt of materials. If such objection is not raised, then it will be taken as deemed acceptance.
  • For delays in payment, the buyer shall be liable to pay compound interest to the supplier on the delayed amount at three times the bank rate notified by the Reserve Bank.
  • For arbitration and conciliation regarding the recovery of such payments and interest, the Micro and Small Enterprises Facilitation Council has been set up in various states.

5.Purchase Preference

a) The 25% annual target: Under the amended Public Procurement Policy for MSEs, Order 2012, the Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ PSUs shall procure a minimum of 25 per cent of their annual value of goods or services from MSEs (in accordance with GFR 2017, Rule 153(ii)).

  • i) The annual goal of procurement from MSEs also includes sub-contracts to MSEs by large enterprises and consortia of MSEs formed by the National Small Industries Corporation. If a sub-contract is given to MSEs, it will be considered as procurement from MSEs.
  • ii) CNC — important clarification: The annual target of 25% procurement from MSEs is only a MINIMUM. The MSE purchase preference is mandatory for all procurements (except for exemptions as per sub-para 3-c above), even after this target is achieved. For example, it is not permissible for organisations to earmark only some goods/ services to be procured exclusively from MSEs to achieve the annual target and not apply MSE procurement preferences to the rest of the goods/ services.

b) The L1+15% price band: In a tender, if the L1 price is from someone other than an MSE, participating MSEs quoting prices within a price band of L1 + 15% shall be allowed to supply up to 25% of the total tendered value by bringing down their price to the L1 price. If there is more than one eligible MSE within such price band who agrees to match the L1 price, the 25% quantity is to be distributed proportionately to them.

  • i) Non-divisible items: In case the tender item cannot be split or divided, etc., the MSE quoting a price within the band L1+15% may be awarded for full/ complete supply of the total tendered value, considering the spirit of the Policy for enhancing Government procurement from MSEs.
  • ii) Sub-targets: Out of the target of 25% of annual procurement from MSEs (not in the specific tender):
  • a sub-target of 4% of annual procurement is earmarked for procurement from MSEs owned by SC/ST entrepreneurs, and
  • 3% of annual procurement is earmarked for procurement from MSEs owned by women entrepreneurs.

However, in the event of failure of such MSEs to participate in the tender process or to meet tender requirements and L1 price, the 4% sub-target (SC/ST) and 3% (women) will also be met from other MSEs.

6.Developing MSE Vendors

The Central Ministries/ Departments/ PSUs shall take necessary steps to develop appropriate vendors by organising:

  • Vendor Development Programmes (VDP), or
  • Buyer-Seller Meets

focused on developing MSEs for procurement through the GeM Portal.

To enhance the participation of MSEs owned by SCs/ STs/ Women in Government procurement, Central Government Ministries/ Departments/ CPSEs should conduct Special Vendor Development Programmes/ Buyer-Seller Meets for SC/ST and Women MSEs.

7.Policy Implementation

  1. A Review Committee has been constituted under the Chairmanship of the Secretary, Ministry of MSME, to monitor and review the Public Procurement Policy for MSEs. M/o MSME will review and/or modify the composition of the Committee as and when required. This Committee will, inter alia:
  2. review the list of 358 items reserved for exclusive purchase from MSEs on a continuous basis,
  3. consider requests from Central Government Departments/ CPSEs for exemption from the 25% target on a case-to-case basis, and
  4. monitor achievements under the Policy.
  5. To monitor the progress of procurement by Central Government Ministries/ Departments and CPSEs from MSEs, the Ministry of MSME launched the MSME 'Sambandh' Portal on 8th December 2017 for uploading procurement details by all CPSEs on a monthly and annual basis, which the Ministry regularly monitors.
  1. To redress the grievances of MSEs related to non-compliance with the policy, a Grievance cell named "CHAMPION Portal" has been set up in the Ministry of MSME.
  2. G A National SC/ST Hub (NSSH) scheme was launched in October 2016 to provide handholding support to SC/ST entrepreneurs, and it is being coordinated/ implemented by the NSIC under this Ministry.
  3. Clarifications: The Office of the Development Commissioner (Micro, Small & Medium Enterprises) issued an FAQ on the Public Procurement Policy for MSE Order, 2012.

1.11.3Procurement Preference to Make in India (MII Policy)

(Rule 153(iii) of GFR, 2017)

1.Purpose

To encourage 'Make in India' and promote manufacturing and production of goods and services in India with a view to enhancing income and employment, the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT), Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Government of India, issued the Public Procurement (Preference to Make in India) Order, 2017.

The Order is issued pursuant to Rule 153(iii) of GFR, 2017 and is applicable to the procurement of Goods, Works, and Services.

2.Definitions

For the purpose of this Order:

  1. 'L1' means the lowest tender or lowest bid, or the lowest quotation received in a tender, tender/ bidding process or other procurement solicitation, as adjudged in the evaluation process as per the tender or other procurement solicitation.
  2. 'Local Content' means the amount of value added in India, which shall — unless otherwise prescribed by the Nodal Ministry — be:

Explanatory notes for calculation of local content:

  • i) Imported items sourced locally from resellers/ distributors shall be EXCLUDED from calculation of local content.
  • ii) The license fees/ royalties paid/ technical charges paid out of India shall be EXCLUDED from local content calculation.
  • iii) Procurement/ supply of repackaged/ refurbished/ rebranded imported products, as commonly understood, shall be treated as reselling of imported products and shall be excluded from calculation of local content. Definitions:
  • 'Refurbishing' means repair or reconditioning of an imported product — this does not amount to manufacture because no new goods come into existence.
  • 'Repackaging' means repacking of imported goods from bulk pack to smaller packs — this would not ordinarily amount to manufacture of a new item.
  • 'Rebranding' means relabelling or renaming or change in symbol or logo/ makes or corporate image of a company/ organisation/ firm for an imported product — this would amount to rebranding.
  • iv) To ensure that imported items sourced locally from resellers/ distributors are excluded from calculation of local content, procuring entities are to obtain from bidders the cost of such locally-sourced imported items (inclusive of taxes) along with a break-up on license/ royalties paid/ technical expertise cost etc. sourced from outside India. For items sold by a bidder as reseller, an OEM certificate for country of origin is to be submitted.
  • v) For contracts involving supply of multiple items, a weighted average of all items is to be taken while calculating the local content.
  • WCNC — Class definitions (these definitions appear in the Chapter 1 text of the Works, Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals; in the Goods Manual they are in the Procurement Glossary):
TermDefinition
'Class-I local supplier'A supplier or service provider whose goods, services or works offered for procurement meets the minimum local content as prescribed for 'Class-I local supplier' under this Order.
'Class-II local supplier'A supplier or service provider whose goods, services or works offered for procurement meets the minimum local content as prescribed for 'Class-II local supplier' but less than that prescribed for 'Class-I local supplier' under this Order.
'Non-Local supplier'A supplier or service provider whose goods, services or works offered for procurement has local content less than that prescribed for 'Class-II local supplier' under this Order.
  1. 'Margin of purchase preference' means the maximum extent to which the price quoted by a "Class-I local supplier" may be above the L1 for the purpose of purchase preference. It has been fixed as 20 per cent.
  2. 'Nodal Ministry' means the Ministry or Department identified pursuant to this Order with respect to a particular item of goods or services or works.
  3. 'Procuring entity' means a Ministry or Department or attached or subordinate office of, or autonomous body controlled by, the Government of India, and includes Government companies as defined in the Companies Act.
  4. 'Works' means all works as per Rule 130 of GFR 2017 and will also include 'turnkey works'.

2A. Special Treatment for Items Covered under the PLI Scheme

The manufacturers manufacturing an item under the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme shall be treated as deemed Class-II local supplier for that item, unless they have minimum local content equal to or higher than that notified for Class-I local supplier for that item, provided the manufacturer has received incentive from the concerned PLI Ministry for the item. The above shall be applicable for the specific time period only, as notified by the concerned PLI Ministry.

3.Eligibility of 'Class-I local supplier' / 'Class-II local supplier' / 'Non-local suppliers' for Different Types of Procurement

  1. In the procurement of all goods, services or works in respect of which the Nodal Ministry/ Department has communicated that there is sufficient local capacity and local competition, only a 'Class-I local supplier' shall be eligible to bid, irrespective of purchase value.
  2. Only 'Class-I local supplier' and 'Class-II local supplier' shall be eligible to bid in procurements undertaken by procuring entities, except when a Global Tender Enquiry has been issued. In global tender enquiries, 'Non-local suppliers' shall also be eligible to bid along with Class-I and Class-II local suppliers.

In procurement of all goods, services or works not covered by sub-para (a) above, and with estimated value of purchases less than Rs. 200 Crore, in accordance with Rule 161(iv) of GFR, 2017 (W cites Rule 161(iv)(b)), a Global Tender Enquiry shall not be issued except with the approval of the competent authority as designated by the Department of Expenditure.

  1. For the purpose of this Order, works include Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) contracts, and services include System Integrator (SI) contracts.

3A. Mandatory Sourcing of Items with Sufficient Local Capacity and Competition, from Class-I Local Suppliers in SI/ EPC/ Turnkey Contracts/ Service Tenders

  1. The items notified as having sufficient local capacity and competition shall mandatorily be sourced from Class-I local suppliers in si/ EPC/ turnkey Contracts/ Services tenders. This provision will be applicable only for those items which have been notified by the Nodal Ministry as Class-I — i.e., having sufficient local capacity and competition, with specific HSN codes.
  2. Notwithstanding the above, if in any project it is considered that it is not practically feasible to source such items from Class-I local suppliers, it may take relaxation from such stipulation with the approval of the Secretary of the administrative Ministry/ Department concerned, or with the approval of the Competent Authority specified by the Administrative Ministry/ Department, on a case-specific basis.

4.Purchase Preference

  1. Subject to the provisions of the Order and to any specific instructions issued by the Nodal Ministry, purchase preference shall be given to 'Class-I local supplier' in procurements undertaken by procuring entities in the manner specified hereunder.
  2. Divisible procurements: In the procurements of goods or works covered by para 3(b) above which are DIVISIBLE in nature, the 'Class-I local supplier' shall get purchase preference over 'Class-II local supplier' as well as 'Non-local supplier', as per the following procedure:
  • i) Among all qualified bids, the lowest bid will be termed L1. If L1 is a 'Class-I local supplier', the contract for the full quantity will be awarded to L1.
  • ii) If the L1 bid is not a 'Class-I local supplier':
  • 50% of the order quantity shall be awarded to L1.
  • Thereafter, the lowest bidder among the 'Class-I local suppliers' will be invited to match the L1 price for the remaining 50% quantity, subject to the Class-I local supplier's quoted price falling within the margin of purchase preference (L1+20%), and the contract for that quantity shall be awarded to such Class-I local supplier subject to matching the L1 price.
  • In case the lowest eligible Class-I local supplier fails to match the L1 price or accepts less than the offered quantity, the next higher Class-I local supplier within L1+20% shall be invited to match the L1 price for the remaining quantity, and so on, and the contract shall be awarded accordingly.
  • In case some quantity out of the 50% (for the eligible Class-I Local Suppliers) is still left uncovered, then such balance quantity may also be ordered on the L1 bidder.
  • Non-divisible procurements and services evaluated on price alone: In the procurements of goods or works covered by para 3(b) above which are not divisible in nature, and in the procurement of services where the bid is evaluated on price alone, the 'Class-I local supplier' shall get purchase preference over 'Class-II local supplier' as well as 'Non-local supplier', as per the following procedure:
  • Among all qualified bids, the lowest bid will be termed L1. If L1 is a 'Class-I local supplier', the contract will be awarded to L1.
  • If L1 is not a 'Class-I local supplier', the lowest bidder among the 'Class-I local suppliers' will be invited to match the L1 price, subject to the Class-I local supplier's quoted price falling within the margin of purchase preference (L1+20%), and the contract shall be awarded to such Class-I local supplier subject to matching the L1 price.
  • In case the lowest eligible Class-I local supplier fails to match the L1 price, the Class-I local supplier with the next higher bid within L1+20% shall be invited to match the L1 price, and so on, and the contract shall be awarded accordingly. In case none of the Class-I local suppliers within the margin of purchase preference matches the L1 price, the contract may be awarded to the L1 bidder.
  • "Class-II local supplier" will not get a preference for any procurement undertaken by procuring entities.

4A. Applicability in Tenders where the Contract is to be Awarded to Multiple Bidders

In tenders where the contract is awarded to multiple bidders, subject to matching of L1 rates or otherwise, the 'Class-I local supplier' shall get purchase preference over 'Class-II local supplier' as well as 'Non-local supplier', as per the following procedure:

  • i) In case there is sufficient local capacity and competition for the item to be procured, as notified by the Nodal Ministry, only Class-I local suppliers shall be eligible to bid. As such, the multiple suppliers who would be awarded the contract should be all and only 'Class-I Local suppliers'.
  • ii) In other cases, 'Class-II local suppliers' and 'Non-local suppliers' may also participate in the tender process along with 'Class-I local suppliers' as per provisions of the Order.
  • iii) If 'Class-I Local suppliers' qualify for the award of contract for at least 50% of the tendered quantity in any tender, the contract may be awarded to all the qualified bidders as per the award criteria stipulated in the tender documents.
  • iv) However, in case 'Class-I Local suppliers' do not qualify for the award of contract for at least 50% of the tendered quantity, purchase preference should be given to the 'Class-I local supplier' over Class-II local suppliers/ Non-local suppliers, provided their quoted rate falls within the 20% margin of purchase preference of the HIGHEST quoted bidder considered for award of contract — so as to ensure that the Class-I Local suppliers, taken in totality, are considered for award of contract for at least 50% of the tendered quantity.
  • v) Only those 'Class-I local suppliers' whose quoted rates fall within the 20% margin of purchase preference would be eligible for purchase preference, subject to meeting the prescribed criteria for award of contract as also the constraint of maximum quantity that can be sourced from any single supplier.
  • First, purchase preference must be given to the lowest quoting eligible 'Class-I local supplier'.
  • If the lowest quoting Class-I local supplier does not qualify for purchase preference because of the aforesaid constraints, or does not accept the offered quantity, an opportunity may be given to the next higher eligible Class-I local supplier, and so on.
  • In case the quantity thus allocated to eligible Class-I local suppliers is short of 50% of the tendered quantity, then this shortfall quantity may be distributed among all other qualified bidders as per the award criteria stipulated in the tender documents.
  • vi) To avoid any ambiguity during the bid evaluation process, the procuring entities may stipulate their own tender-specific criteria for the award of contracts amongst different bidders, including the procedure for purchase preference to 'Class-I local supplier', within the broad policy guidelines stipulated in the sub-paras above.

5.Exemption of Small Purchases

Notwithstanding anything contained above, procurements where the estimated value to be procured is less than Rs. 5 lakh shall be EXEMPT from the Order. However, it shall be ensured by procuring entities that procurement is not split for the purpose of avoiding the provisions of this Order.

5A. Exemption in Sourcing of Spares and Consumables of Closed Systems

Procurement of spare parts, consumables for closed systems, and Maintenance/ Service contracts with the Original Equipment Manufacturer/ Original Equipment Supplier/ Original Part Manufacturer shall be exempted from this Order.

6.Minimum Local Content

CategoryMinimum Local Content
Class-I local supplier50%
Class-II local supplier20%

The Nodal Ministry/ Department may prescribe only a higher percentage of the minimum local content requirement to categorise a supplier as Class-I/ Class-II local supplier. For items for which the Nodal Ministry/ Department has not prescribed a higher minimum local content notification under the Order, it shall be 50% and 20% for Class-I and Class-II local supplier respectively.

7.Requirement for Declaration/ Specification in Advance

The minimum local content, the margin of purchase preference, and the procedure for preference to Make in India shall be declared in the Notice Inviting Tenders or other forms of procurement solicitation, and shall not be varied during a particular procurement transaction.

8.Government e-Marketplace

In respect of procurement through GeM, GeM shall, as far as possible, specifically mark the items that meet the minimum local content while registering the item for display, and shall, wherever feasible, make provision for automated comparison with purchase preference and without purchase preference, and for obtaining consent of the local supplier in those cases where purchase preference is to be exercised.

9.Verification of Local Content

  1. The Class-I/ Class-II local supplier shall, at the time of tender, bidding or solicitation, be required to indicate the percentage of local content and provide self-certification that the item offered meets the local content requirement for Class-I/ Class-II local supplier, as the case may be. They shall also give details of the location(s) at which the local value addition is made.
  2. In cases of procurement for a value more than Rs. 10 crore, the Class-I/ Class-II local supplier shall be required to provide a certificate from the statutory auditor or cost auditor of the company (in the case of companies), or from a practising cost accountant or practising chartered accountant (in respect of suppliers other than companies), giving the percentage of local content.
  3. The bidder shall give self-certification for local content in the quoted item (goods/ works/ services) at the time of tendering. However, at the time of execution of the project, for all contracts above INR 10 Crore, the contractor/ supplier shall be required to give local content certification duly certified by a cost/ chartered accountant in practice.

For cases where it is not possible to provide certification by Cost/ Chartered Accountant at the time of execution of the project, the supplier shall be permitted to provide the certificate after completion of the contract, within the limit acceptable to the procuring entity.

In case the contractor/ supplier does not meet the stipulated local content requirement and the category of the supplier changes from Class-I to Class-II/ Non-local, or from Class-II to Non-local — a penalty up to 10% of the contract value may be imposed. However, the contract once awarded shall not be terminated on this account.

  1. Decisions on complaints relating to the implementation of this Order shall be made by the competent authority empowered to investigate procurement-related complaints relating to the procuring entity.
  2. Nodal Ministries may constitute committees with internal and external experts for independent verification of self-declarations and auditor's/ accountant's certificates — on a random basis and in the case of complaints.
  3. Nodal Ministries and procuring entities may prescribe fees for such complaints.
  4. False declarations will be in breach of the Code of Integrity under Rule 175(1)(i)(h) of the GFR, for which a bidder or its successors can be DEBARRED for up to two years as per Rule 151(iii) of the GFR, along with such other actions as may be permissible under law. The Department of Expenditure shall issue suitable instructions for the effective and smooth operation of this process, so that:
  5. i) The fact and duration of debarment for violation of the Order by any procuring entity are promptly brought to the notice of the Member-Convenor of the Standing Committee and the Department of Expenditure through the concerned Ministry/ Department or in some other manner;
  6. ii) On a periodical basis, such cases are consolidated, and a centralised or decentralised list of such suppliers with the period of debarment is maintained and displayed on the website(s);
  7. iii) With respect to procuring entities other than the one that has carried out the debarment, the debarment takes effect PROSPECTIVELY from the date of uploading on the website(s), in such a manner that ongoing procurements are not disrupted;
  8. iv) A supplier who has been debarred by any procuring entity for violation of the Order shall not be eligible for preference under the Order for procurement by any other procuring entity for the duration of the debarment. The debarment for such other procuring entities shall take effect prospectively from the date on which it comes to the notice of other procuring entities in the manner prescribed above.

10.Specifications in Tenders and Other Procurement Solicitations

  1. Every procuring entity shall ensure that the eligibility/ qualification conditions with respect to previous experience fixed in any tender or solicitation do not require proof of supply in other countries or proof of exports.
  2. Procuring entities shall endeavour to see that eligibility/ qualification conditions — including on matters like turnover, production capability, and financial strengthdo not result in unreasonable exclusion of Class-I/ Class-II local suppliers who would otherwise be eligible, beyond what is essential for ensuring quality or creditworthiness of the supplier.
  3. Procuring entities shall review all existing eligibility norms and conditions with reference to sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) above.
  4. Specifying foreign certifications/ unreasonable technical specifications/ brands/ models in the tender document is a restrictive and discriminatory practice against local suppliers. If foreign certification is required to be stipulated because of the non-availability of Indian Standards and/or for any other reason, the same shall be done only after written approval of the Secretary of the Department concerned, or any other Authority designated such power by the Secretary of the Department concerned.
  5. GC "All administrative Ministries/ Departments whose procurement exceeds Rs. 1000 Crore per annum shall notify/ update their procurement projections every year, including those of the PSEs/ PSUs, for the next five years on their respective website."

11.Reciprocity Clause

  1. When a Nodal Ministry/ Department identifies that Indian suppliers of an item are not allowed to participate and/or compete in procurement by any foreign government due to restrictive tender conditions which have the direct or indirect effect of barring Indian companies — such as registration in the procuring country, execution of projects of specific value in the procuring country, etc. — it shall provide such details to all its procuring entities, including CMDs/ CEOs of PSEs/ PSUs, State Governments and other procurement agencies under their administrative control, and GeM, for appropriate reciprocal action.
  2. Entities of countries identified by the Nodal Ministry/ Department as not allowing Indian companies to participate in their Government procurement for any item related to that Nodal Ministry shall not be allowed to participate in Government procurement in India for all items related to that Nodal Ministry/ Department, except for the list of items published by the Ministry/ Department permitting their participation.
  3. The stipulation in (b) above shall be part of all tenders invited by the Central Government procuring entities stated in (a) above. All purchases on GeM shall also necessarily have the above provisions for items identified by the Nodal Ministry/ Department.
  4. State Governments should be encouraged to incorporate similar provisions in their respective tenders.
  5. The term 'entity' of a country shall have the same meaning as under the FDI (Foreign Direct Investment) Policy of DPIIT, as amended from time to time.

12.Action for Non-Compliance with the Provisions of the Order

In case restrictive or discriminatory conditions against domestic suppliers are included in tender documents, an inquiry shall be conducted by the Administrative Department undertaking the procurement (including procurement by any entity under its administrative control) to fix responsibility for the same. Thereafter, appropriate action — administrative or otherwise — shall be taken against erring officials of procuring entities under relevant provisions. Intimation on all such actions shall be sent to the Standing Committee.

13.Assessment of Supply Base by Nodal Ministries

The Nodal Ministry shall keep in view the domestic manufacturing/ supply base and assess the available capacity and the extent of local competition while identifying items and prescribing the higher minimum local content or the manner of its calculation — with a view to avoiding cost increase from the operation of this Order.

14.Increase in Minimum Local Content

The Nodal Ministry may annually review the local content requirements with a view to INCREASING them, subject to the availability of sufficient local competition with adequate quality.

15.Manufacture under Licence/ Technology Collaboration Agreements with Phased Indigenisation

  1. While notifying the minimum local content, Nodal Ministries may make special provisions for exempting suppliers from meeting the stipulated local content if the product is being manufactured in India under a licence from a foreign manufacturer who holds intellectual property rights, and where there is a technology collaboration agreement/ transfer of technology agreement for indigenous manufacture of a product developed abroad with clear phasing of increase in local content.
  2. In the procurement of all goods, services or works in respect of which there is a substantial quantity of public procurement, and for which the Nodal Ministry has not notified that there is sufficient local capacity and local competition, the concerned Nodal Ministry shall notify an upper threshold value of procurement beyond which foreign companies shall enter into a JOINT VENTURE with an Indian company to participate in the tender. Procuring entities, while procuring such items beyond the notified threshold value, shall prescribe in their respective tenders that foreign companies may enter into a joint venture with an Indian company to participate in the tender. The procuring Ministries/ Departments shall also make special provisions to exempt such joint ventures from meeting the stipulated minimum local content requirement, which shall be increased in a phased manner.

16.Powers to Grant Exemption and to Reduce Minimum Local Content

  1. The Administrative Department undertaking the procurement (including procurement by any entity under its administrative control), with the approval of their Minister-in-charge, may — by written order, for reasons to be recorded in writing:
  2. i) reduce the minimum local content below the prescribed level; or
  3. ii) reduce the margin of purchase preference below 20 per cent; or
  4. iii) exempt any item or supplying entities from the operation of this Order or any part of the Order.
  5. The Administrative Department, while seeking exemption under this para, shall certify that such item(s) has not been notified by the Nodal Ministry/ Department concerned.
  6. A copy of every such order shall be provided to the Standing Committee and the concerned Nodal Ministry/ Department. The Nodal Ministry/ Department will continue to have the power to vary its notification on Minimum Local Content.

17.Directions to Government Companies

With respect to Government companies and other procuring entities not governed by the General Financial Rules, the administrative Ministry or Department shall issue policy directions requiring compliance with this Order.

18.Standing Committee

  1. A Standing Committee is constituted with the following membership:
PositionMember
ChairmanSecretary, Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT)
MemberSecretary, Commerce
MemberSecretary, Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology
MemberJoint Secretary (Public Procurement), Department of Expenditure
Member-ConvenorJoint Secretary (DPIIT)
  1. The Secretary of the Department concerned with a particular item shall be a member in respect of issues relating to such item. The Chairman of the Committee may co-opt technical experts as relevant to any issue or class of issues under its consideration.

19.Functions of the Standing Committee

The Standing Committee shall meet as often as necessary, but not less than once every six months. The Committee:

  1. shall oversee the implementation of this Order and the issues arising from it, and make recommendations to Nodal Ministries and procuring entities;
  2. shall annually assess and periodically monitor compliance with this Order;
  3. shall identify Nodal Ministries and the allocation of items among them for the issue of notifications on minimum local content;
  4. may require the furnishing of details or returns regarding compliance with this Order and related matters;
  5. may, during the annual review or otherwise, assess issues where the manner of implementation of the Order results in any restrictive practices, cartelisation, or increase in public expenditure, and suggest remedial measures;
  6. may examine cases covered by para 15 above relating to manufacture under licence/ technology transfer agreements, with a view to satisfying itself that adequate mechanisms exist for enforcement of such agreements and for attaining the underlying objective of progressive indigenisation;
  7. may consider any other issue relating to this Order that may arise.

20.Removal of Difficulties

Ministries/ Departments and the Boards of Directors of Government companies may issue such clarifications and instructions as may be necessary for the removal of any difficulties arising in the implementation of the Order.

21.Ministries Having Existing Policies

Where any Ministry or Department has its own policy for preference to local content approved by the Cabinet after 1st January 2015, such policies will PREVAIL over the provisions of the Order. All other existing orders on preference to local content shall be reviewed by the Nodal Ministries and revised as needed(W adds: "to conform to this Order, within two months of the issue of this Order").

22.Faqs

Please refer to the FAQs related to the PPP-MII Order issued by DPIIT.

1.11.4Restrictions/ Prior Registration on Entities from a Class of Countries

(Rule 144(xi), GFR 2017 — the "Land Border" Order)

1.Requirement of Registration

Rule 144 of GFR, 2017 has been amended to include a new sub-para (xi) as follows:

2.Detailed Provisions

(Notified by the Department of Expenditure's OM No. F.7/10/2021-PPD(1) dated 23.02.2023)

  1. Any bidder from a country that shares a land border with India will be eligible to bid in any procurement — whether of goods, services (including consultancy services and non-consultancy services) or works (including turnkey projects) — only IF the bidder is REGISTERED with the Competent Authority (see sub-para 10 below).
  2. Any bidder (including an Indian bidder) who has a Specified Transfer of Technology (ToT) arrangement with an entity from a country that shares a land border with India will be eligible to bid in any procurement — whether of goods, services (including consultancy and non-consultancy services) or works (including turnkey projects) — only if the bidder is registered with the Competent Authority. (See also sub-para 5 below.)
  3. Effective dates:
ProvisionApplicable from
Registration for bidders under para (a)23.07.2020
Registration for bidders under para (b) — ToT arrangementsAll procurements where tenders are issued/ published after 01.04.2023
  1. In tenders issued after 23.07.2020 or 01.04.2023, as the case may be, the requirements for registration of bidders and other relevant provisions of this Order shall be incorporated in the tender conditions.

3.Applicability

Apart from Ministries/ Departments, attached and subordinate bodies, notwithstanding anything contained in Rule 1 of the GFRs 2017, the Order shall also be applicable:

  1. to all Autonomous Bodies;
  2. to public sector banks and public sector financial institutions;
  3. to all Central Public Sector Enterprises;
  4. to all procurement in Public Private Partnership projects receiving financial support from the Government or public sector enterprises/ undertakings;
  5. to Union Territories, the National Capital Territory of Delhi, and all agencies/ undertakings thereof.

f) The Order is not applicable:

  • i) In projects that receive international funding with the approval of the Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), Ministry of Finance — the procurement guidelines applicable to the project shall normally be followed, notwithstanding anything contained in this Order and without reference to the Competent Authority. Exceptions to this shall be decided in consultation with DEA.
  • ii) On procurements made by Indian missions and by offices of government agencies/ undertakings located outside India.
  • iii) On bidders (or entities) from those countries — even if sharing a land border with India — to which the Government of India has extended lines of credit, or in which the Government of India is engaged in development projects. Updated lists are given on the Ministry of External Affairs' website.
  • iv) On procurement of spare parts and other essential service support like AMC/ CMC, including consumables for closed systems, from Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) or their authorised agents — exempted from the requirement of registration as mandated under Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017 (Notified vide OM No. F.12/1/2021-PPD(Pt.) dated 02.03.2021).
  • v) A bidder is permitted to procure raw materials, components, sub-assemblies, etc. from vendors from countries that share a land border with India. Such vendors will not be required to be registered with the Competent Authority, as it is not regarded as "sub-contracting". However, if a bidder proposes to supply FINISHED GOODS procured directly/ indirectly from vendors from countries sharing a land border with India, such vendors WILL be required to be registered with the Competent Authority (Notified vide OM No. F.18/37/2020-PPD dated 08.02.2021).

4.Definitions

a) "Bidder" — for the purpose of the Order (including the terms 'bidder', 'consultant', 'vendor' or 'service provider' in certain contexts) means any person, firm or company, including any member of a consortium or joint venture (that is, an association of several persons, or firms or companies), every artificial juridical person not falling in any of the descriptions of bidders stated hereinbefore, including any agency, branch or office controlled by such person, participating in a procurement process.

b) "Tender" — for the purpose of the Order will include other forms of procurement, except where the context requires otherwise.

c) "Transfer of Technology" — means dissemination and transfer of all forms of commercially usable knowledge, such as transfer of know-how, skills, technical expertise, designs, processes and procedures, and trade secrets, which enables the acquirer of such technology to perform activities using the transferred technology independently.

d) "Specified Transfer of Technology" — means a transfer of technology in the sectors and/or technologies specified in sub-para 5 below, occurring on or after 23.07.2020.

e) "Bidder (or entity) from a country which shares a land border with India" — means:

  • i) An entity incorporated, established, or registered in such a country; or
  • ii) A subsidiary of an entity incorporated, established, or registered in such a country; or
  • iii) An entity substantially controlled through entities incorporated, established, or registered in such a country; or
  • iv) An entity whose beneficial owner is situated in such a country; or
  • v) An Indian (or other) AGENT of such an entity; or
  • vi) A natural person who is a citizen of such a country; or
  • vii) A consortium or joint venture where any member of the consortium or joint venture falls under any of the above.

f) "Agent" — for the purpose of the Order, is a person employed to do any act for another, or to represent another in dealings with third persons.

g) "Beneficial owner" — for the purposes of point (e)(iv) will be as follows:

  • i) In the case of a company or Limited Liability Partnership, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s) who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical person(s), has a controlling ownership interest, or who exercises CONTROL through other means.
  • ii) In the case of a partnership firm, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s) who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical persons, has ownership of/ entitlement to more than fifteen per cent (15%) of capital or profits of the partnership.
  • iii) In the case of an unincorporated association or body of individuals, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s) who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical persons, has ownership of or entitlement to more than fifteen per cent (15%) of the property or capital or profits of such association or body of individuals.
  • iv) Where NO natural person is identified under (i), (ii) or (iii) above, the beneficial owner is the relevant natural person who holds the position of senior managing official.
  • v) In the case of a TRUST, the identification of beneficial owner(s) shall include identification of:
  • the author of the trust,
  • the trustee,
  • the beneficiaries with fifteen per cent (15%) or more interest in the trust, and
  • any other natural person exercising ultimate effective control over the trust through a chain of control or ownership.
  • vi) To determine nationality while assessing the beneficial ownership of the bidder, the nationality mentioned in the beneficial owner's PASSPORT should be considered. In case of the possibility of dual citizenship, nationality on all the passports should be considered through a suitable declaration. If nationality in any of the passports of the person whose beneficial ownership is being assessed is recorded to be from a country sharing a land border with India, the provisions contained under this Order shall apply.

5.Sensitive Sectors/ Technologies

(Relevant only for the provisions on ToT arrangements — refer sub-para 2(b) above)

  1. Certain sectors and technologies have been identified as sensitive from the national security point of view:
  2. Sectors listed in Schedule I → Category-I sensitive sectors
  3. Sectors listed in Schedule II → Category-II sensitive sectors
  4. Technologies listed in Schedule III → sensitive technologies

List of Category-I Sensitive Sectors (Schedule-I)

S. No.Sector
1Atomic Energy
2Broadcasting/ Print and Digital Media
3Defence
4Space
5Telecommunications

List of Category-II Sensitive Sectors (Schedule-II)

S. No.Sector
1Power and Energy (including exploration/ generation/ transmission/ distribution/ pipeline)
2Banking and Finance, including Insurance
3Civil Aviation
4Construction of ports and dams & river valley projects
5Electronics and Microelectronics
6Meteorology and Ocean Observation
7Mining and extraction (including deep sea projects)
8Railways
9Pharmaceuticals & Medical Devices
10Agriculture
11Health
12Urban Transportation

List of Sensitive Technologies (Schedule-III)

S. No.Technology
1Additive Manufacturing (e.g., 3D Printing)
2Any equipment having electronic programmable components or autonomous systems (e.g., SCADA systems)
3Any technology used for uploading and streaming data, including broadcasting, satellite communication, etc.
4Chemical Technologies
5Biotechnologies, including Genetic Engineering and Biological Technologies
6Information and Communication Technologies
7Software
  1. For Category-I sensitive sectors, bidders with a ToT arrangement in any technology with an entity from a country that shares a land border with India shall require registration.
  2. For Category-II sensitive sectors, bidders with a ToT arrangement in the sensitive technologies listed in Schedule III with an entity from a country that shares a land border with India shall require registration.
  3. In Category-II sensitive sectors, the Secretary (or an officer not below the rank of Joint Secretary to the Government of India, so authorised by the Secretary) of the Ministry/ Department of the Government of India is empowered, after due consideration, to WAIVE the requirement of registration for a particular item/ application or a class of items/ applications, even if included in Schedule III. The Ministry/ Department concerned shall INFORM DPIIT and the National Security Council Secretariat (NSCS) of their decision to waive the requirement of registration. Ministries/ Departments are not required to consult DPIIT/ nscs before deciding, and are only required to inform DPIIT/ nscs of the decision. If DPIIT/ NSCS raises any point, it should be considered in future procurements, and the ongoing procurement for which the waiver was granted need not be interrupted or altered.
  4. Based on security considerations, a Ministry/ Department in a Category-II sensitive sector, or other Ministries/ Departments, may recommend to DPIIT the inclusion of any other technology in the list of sensitive technologies — either generally or for their Ministry/ Department.

6.Sub-contracting in Works Contracts

In works contracts, including turnkey contracts, contractors shall not be allowed to sub-contract works to any contractor from a country that shares a land border with India unless such contractor is REGISTERED with the Competent Authority. The definition of "contractor from a country which shares a land border with India" shall be as in sub-para 4(e) above. This shall not apply to sub-contracts already awarded on or before the date of the Order (i.e., 23rd July 2020).

7.Model Clauses/ Certificate Regarding Compliance

An undertaking/ certificate shall be taken from bidders in the tender documents that the extant guidelines for participation in the tenders (which should include conditions for implementation of this Order) have been complied with. If such a certificate is given by a bidder whose bid is accepted and is found to be FALSE, this would be grounds for DEBARMENT and further legal action in accordance with law.

Model Clauses and Model Certificates, which may be inserted in tenders/ obtained from Bidders, are given in the Annexures. While adhering to the substance of the Order, procuring entities are free to appropriately modify the wording of these clauses based on their past experience, local needs, etc.

8.Validity of Registration

  • With respect to tenders, registration should be valid at the time of SUBMISSION of bids AND at the time of ACCEPTANCE of bids.
  • With respect to supplies other than by tender, registration should be valid at the time of placement of the order.
  • If the bidder was validly registered at the time of acceptance/ placement of the order, registration shall not be a relevant consideration during contract execution.

9.Government e-Marketplace

GeM shall REMOVE non-compliant entities from GeM unless/ until they are registered in accordance with this Order.

10.Competent Authority and Procedure for Registration

  1. The Competent Authority for the purpose of registration under this Order shall be the Registration Committee constituted by DPIIT(Notified vide OM No. F.6/18/2019-PPD issued by Department of Expenditure dated 23.07.2020).
  1. The Registration Committee shall have the following members:
  2. i) An officer not below the rank of Joint Secretary, designated for this purpose by DPIIT, who shall be the Chairperson;
  3. ii) Officers (ordinarily not below the rank of Joint Secretary) representing the Ministry of Home Affairs, Ministry of External Affairs, and those Departments whose sectors are covered by applications under consideration;
  4. iii) Any other officer whose presence is deemed necessary by the Chairperson of the Committee.
  5. DPIIT has laid down the method of application, format, etc. for such bidders as covered by the Order.
  6. On receipt of an application seeking registration from a bidder covered by sub-para 2(a) and 2(b) above, the Competent Authority shall first seek POLITICAL and SECURITY CLEARANCES from the Ministry of External Affairs and Ministry of Home Affairs, as per guidelines issued from time to time. Registration shall not be given unless political and security clearance have both been received.
  7. The Ministry of External Affairs and Ministry of Home Affairs may issue guidelines for internal use regarding the procedure for scrutiny of such applications.
  8. The decision of the Competent Authority to register such bidder may be for all kinds of tenders or for a specified type(s) of goods or services, and may be for a specified or unspecified duration of time, as deemed fit. The decision of the Competent Authority shall be final.
  9. Registration granted by the Competent Authority of the Government of India shall be valid not only for procurement by the Central Government and its bodies specified in sub-para 3 above, BUT also for procurement by State Governments and their agencies/ public enterprises, etc. No fresh registration at the State level shall be required.
  10. The Competent Authority is empowered to CANCEL the registration already granted if it determines that there is sufficient cause. Such cancellation by itself, however, will not affect the execution of contracts already awarded. Pending cancellation, it may also SUSPEND the registration of a bidder, and the bidder shall not be eligible to bid in any further tenders during the period of suspension.
  11. For national security reasons, the Competent Authority shall not be required to give reasons for rejection/ cancellation of registration of a bidder.

11.Clarifications Regarding Applicability of the Restrictions under Rule 144(xi)

  1. Proprietary purchases are not excluded from the provisions of Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017.
  2. The rule is applicable to all purchases irrespective of the order value.
  3. Sub-contracting is not permitted by any contractor to a contractor from a country sharing a land border with India unless registered with the competent authority. However, it is to be noted that procurement of raw materials, components, sub-assemblies, etc. does not constitute sub-contracting. In case a bidder has proposed to supply finished goods procured directly/ indirectly from vendors from countries that share a land border with India, such vendor will be required to be registered with the Competent Authority.
  4. There is NO bar on the contractor from procuring raw material from a firm that has been ACQUIRED by another firm belonging to a country that shares a land border with India.
  5. Contract Manufacturing outside India: If the bidder is getting the subject product manufactured outside India, this is treated as contract manufacturing, and the beneficial ownership of the actual manufacturing entity must be verified. If the actual manufacturer does not meet the beneficial ownership criteria — then the bidder must submit DPIIT registration of such manufacturer to participate in the procurement.
  6. The Hiring of Services: Suppose a Bidder (Indian/ Foreign) who is not from a country sharing a land border with India offers services to a procuring entity by arranging equipment from another company. Then the following scenarios may appear:
S. No.ScenarioApplicability of Rule 144(xi)
a)The equipment/ goods have been purchased or will be purchased from a company (manufacturer) from a country that shares a land border with India.The bidder has procured certain goods to offer the requisite services to a procuring entity. In such case, the bidder does not fall within the definition of the term "bidder" as defined under para 4(e) above. Hence, the provisions of Rule 144(xi) of GFR, 2017 do not apply to this case.
b)By entering into an MOU/ lease agreement with the company (who OWNS the equipment/ goods) from a country that shares a land border with India.Here, the bidding vendor proposes to hire services from a company that belongs to a country that shares a land border with India. This prima facie becomes a case of INDIRECT SUPPLY of services by a company that owns the equipment/ goods by introducing an intermediary. The intermediary merely acts as an AGENT to the company providing services of the equipment. In such a case, the company owning the equipment and indirectly supplying the services shall be required to be registered with the competent authority — thereby requiring the fulfilment of the provisions of Rule 144(xi).
c)By entering into an MOU/ lease agreement with company 'X' (the present owner of the equipment) from a country that does not share a land border with India. The equipment has been purchased from the manufacturer company 'Y', which is from a country that SHARES a land border with India.In this case, the actual supplier of services, prima facie, shall be 'X'. The status of 'X' in this case does not attract the provisions of Rule 144(xi).

12.Illustrative Examples of the Applicability of Restrictions under Rule 144(xi)

a) The "sister company / offshore production unit" example:

A vendor, say 'Party A' from India, is procuring an item from their sister company 'Party B', which is registered in a country that does not share a land border with India. Both Party A and Party B are owned by an entity, say 'Party C'. Party C does not belong to a country sharing a land border with India. However, Party B has its production facility in a country sharing a land border with India, and the manufactured item will be procured by Party A from Party B from that production facility. The production unit is wholly owned by Party B.

Party A claims that Rule 144(xi) does not apply to it because neither Party A nor Party B is:

  • i) An entity incorporated, established or registered in such a country — as Party A is registered in India and Party B is registered in a country not sharing a land border with India;
  • ii) A subsidiary of an entity incorporated, established or registered in such a country — as they are 100% owned subsidiaries of Party C, which is incorporated, registered and established in a country not sharing a land border with India;
  • iii) An entity controlled through entities incorporated, established or registered in such a country — as they are 100% owned by Party C;
  • iv) An entity whose beneficial owner is situated in such a country — as their beneficial owner is Party C;
  • v) An Indian (or other) agent of such an entity;
  • vi) A natural person who is a citizen of such a country;
  • vii) A consortium or joint venture where any member falls under any of the above — though it has a wholly owned subsidiary in a country that shares a land border with India, it is not a JV or consortium (a subsidiary does not qualify as a JV or consortium);
  • viii) In addition, Party A claims that they are not procuring finished goods directly/ indirectly from vendors from countries sharing land borders with India, as the item is being manufactured in their own production units.

b) IT goods and services examples:

ScenarioPosition
i) The contractor is only supplying the servers as-is from an OEM that belongs to a country sharing a land border with India, and there is NO value addition done by the contractorThe contractor acts as an AGENT for the OEM, and registration of both the OEM and the agent (contractor) is required as per Rule 144(xi) of GFR 2017.
ii) The contractor supplies value-added services on hardware and the contractor outsources the procurement of hardwareOEM registration is not required.
iii) There is deployment of IT services that includes both hardware and software customisation, and the contractor has sourced hardware which is made in the country sharing a land border with IndiaThe requirement of registration as per Rule 144(xi) is not applicable.

1.11.5Support to Start-up Enterprises

1.Definition of Start-up Enterprises

  1. As defined by DPIIT, an entity shall be considered a 'Start-up':
  2. i) Up to a period of ten YEARS from the date of incorporation/ registration, if it is incorporated as a private limited company (as defined in the Companies Act, 2013) or registered as a partnership firm (registered under section 59 of the Partnership Act, 1932) or a limited liability partnership (under the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008) in India; and
  3. ii) Turnover of the entity for any of the financial years since incorporation/ registration has not exceeded one hundred crore rupees; and
  4. iii) The entity works towards INNOVATION, DEVELOPMENT, or IMPROVEMENT of products, processes, or services, or a scalable business model with a high potential for EMPLOYMENT GENERATION or WEALTH CREATION.
  5. Provided that an entity formed by SPLITTING UP or RECONSTRUCTING an existing business shall not be considered a 'Start-up'.
  6. Provided further that, in order to obtain benefits, a Start-up so identified under the above definition shall be required to be RECOGNISED as a Start-up by DPIIT.

2.Support to Start-ups

The Government of India has ordered the following support to Start-ups (as defined by DPIIT):

a) Exemption from submission of Bid Security: Such Start-ups shall be EXEMPTED from payment/ submission of Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security.

b) Relaxation in Prior Turnover and Experience: The Procuring Entity reserves its right to relax the condition of prior turnover and prior experience for start-up enterprises recognised by DPIIT, subject to meeting quality & technical specifications. Start-ups may be MSMEs/ MSEs or otherwise. Such relaxation can be provided in the case of procurement of works as well.

It is further clarified that such relaxation is not optional but normally has to be ensured, except in the case of procurement of items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, etc., where adequate justification exists for the Procuring Entity not to relax such criteria. The decision of the Procuring Entity in this regard shall be final. (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017.)

1.11.6Domestically Manufactured Iron & Steel Products (DMI&SP) PolicyGW

PART A — DMI&SP POLICY, 2019 (as reproduced in the Goods Manual, 2024)G

1. Background: The DMI&SP policy provides a preference for Domestically Manufactured Iron and Steel Products in Government procurement. By promoting domestically manufactured iron and steel products as well as capital goods used for manufacturing iron and steel products, the Policy contributes to the growth of the Indian iron and steel industry. It was first notified in May 2017, revised in May 2019, and further amended in December 2020. The Ministry of Steel notified on March 8, 2024 the extension of this Policy till November 2024.

2. Applicability:

a) Iron & Steel Products:

  • i) The Policy applies to the government procurement of iron & steel products (listed in Appendix A of the Policy, produced in compliance with prescribed quality standards) by every Ministry or Department of Government and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control, and to projects funded by these agencies. All Central Sector Schemes (CS)/ Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS) for which States and Local Bodies make procurement would come within the purview of this Policy if the Government of India fully/ partly funds that project/ scheme.
  • However, this Policy shall not apply to purchasing iron & steel products with a view to COMMERCIAL RESALE or to use in producing goods for COMMERCIAL SALE.
  • The Policy also applies to private agencies' purchase of iron & steel products to fulfil an EPC contract and/or any other requirement of the Ministry or Department of Government or their PSEs.
  • ii) The Policy shall apply to projects where the procurement value of iron and steel products exceeds Rs. 5 lakh. The Policy shall also be applicable for other procurements (non-project) where the ANNUAL procurement value of iron and steel products for that Government organisation is more than Rs. 5 lakh. However, it shall be ensured by procuring entities that procurement is not SPLIT to avoid the provisions of this Policy.

b) Capital Goods for Manufacturing Iron & Steel Products:

  • i) For government procurement of capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products listed in Appendix B of the Policy (produced in compliance with prescribed quality standards, as applicable), the policy is applicable — irrespective of the project size — to all public sector steel manufacturers and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control, but not for commercial resale. The Policy also applies to the purchase of capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products by private agencies for fulfilling an EPC contract and/or any other requirement of public sector steel manufacturers and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control.
  • ii) NO Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of Capital Goods for manufacturing iron & steel products (Appendix-B) having estimated value UP TO Rs. 200 Crore, except with the approval of the competent authority as designated by the Department of Expenditure.

3. Waivers: Waivers shall be granted by the Ministry of Steel, subject to the conditions below. The exclusion requests shall be submitted to the Standing Committee along with sufficient proof of unavailability of domestically manufactured iron & steel products: a) Where specific grades of steel are not manufactured in the country; or b) Where the quantities as per the demand of the project cannot be met through domestic sources.

4. Purchase Preferences: a) NO Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of iron and steel products (Appendix-A). The procurement process shall be open only to the manufacturers/ suppliers capable of meeting/ exceeding the domestic value-addition targets. Manufacturers/ suppliers not meeting the domestic value addition targets shall not be eligible to participate in the bidding. b) Purchase preference shall be provided to domestically manufactured capital goods listed in Appendix B if their quoted price falls within 20% of the price quoted for corresponding imported capital goods. If the procuring company considers that the procured quantity cannot be divided in the prescribed ratio of 50:50, they shall have the right to award the contract to the eligible domestic manufacturer for a quantity not less than 50%, as may be divisible. The contract can be awarded to the eligible domestic manufacturer for the entire quantity if the tendered capital goods are NON-DIVISIBLE. If none of the eligible manufacturers meets domestic value addition requirements and matches the L1 bid, the original bidder holding the L1 bid shall secure the order for the entire procurement value.

5. Clause in Tender Document: The tender document for procurement of both Goods as well as for EPC contracts should explicitly outline the eligibility/ qualification criteria for adherence to minimum prescribed domestic value addition by the bidder for iron and steel products and capital goods (as indicated in Appendix A and Appendix B).

6. Standing Committee: A Standing Committee under the Ministry of Steel (MoS), chaired by the Secretary (Steel), shall be constituted to oversee implementation. The Committee shall comprise experts from Industry/ Industry Association/ Government Institution or Body/ Ministry of Steel. Its mandate: a) Monitoring the implementation of the Policy; b) Review and notify the Iron & Steel products list and the domestic value addition requirement criteria mentioned in Appendix A and Appendix B; c) Issue necessary clarifications for implementation of the Policy, including grant of exclusions to procuring agencies as per section 3; d) Constitute a separate committee to carry out grievance redressal; e) The Standing Committee shall submit its recommendations for approval to the Ministry of Steel.

7. Certification of Local Content: a) To qualify as domestically manufactured iron and steel products/ capital goods for purchase preference under this Policy, a minimum domestic value addition of 20% to 50% is specified in Appendix A (domestically manufactured iron and steel products) and 50% for Appendix B (capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products). The domestic value-addition is based on SELF-CERTIFICATION. b) For products in Appendix A, each domestic manufacturer shall furnish the Affidavit of self-certification in the prescribed format to the procuring agency declaring that the iron & steel products are domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed. It shall be the responsibility of the domestic manufacturer to ensure that the products supplied are indeed domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed for the product. c) For capital goods in Appendix B, the bidder shall furnish the certification issued by the STATUTORY AUDITOR of the domestic manufacturer declaring that the capital goods are domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed. The bidder shall also be required to provide a domestic value addition certificate on a HALF-YEARLY basis (September 30 and March 31), within 60 days of commencement of each half-year, duly certified by the Statutory Auditors of the domestic manufacturer, to the concerned procuring agencies till the completion of the supply — that the claims of domestic value addition made for the product during the preceding 6 months are in accordance with the Policy. d) Bidders who are selling agents/ authorised distributors/ authorised dealers/ authorised supply houses of the domestic manufacturers of iron & steel products are ELIGIBLE to bid on behalf of the domestic manufacturers under the Policy. However, this shall be subject to the following conditions:

  • i) The bidder shall furnish the authorisation certificate issued by the domestic manufacturer for selling domestically manufactured iron & steel products;
  • ii) In case the procurement is covered under Appendix A, the bidder shall furnish the Affidavit of self-certification issued by the domestic manufacturer to the procuring agency;
  • iii) In case the procurement is covered under Appendix B, the bidder shall furnish the certification issued by the statutory auditor to the domestic manufacturer;
  • iv) The bidder shall be responsible for furnishing other documents required to be issued by the domestic manufacturer to the procuring agency as per the Policy.

8. Complaints and Penalties: a) Complaints relating to mis-declaration made to the procuring agency or Ministry of Steel shall be dealt with in the prescribed time frame by examining the documents at the bidder's cost. A refundable cautionary deposit is required for complaints to the Ministry of Steel. b) Each procuring agency shall define the penalties in the tender document in case of wrong declaration by the bidder of the prescribed domestic value addition. The penalties may include forfeiting the EMD, other financial penalties, and debarment of the manufacturer/ service provider.

9. Specifications in Tenders and Other Procurement Solicitations: a) Every procuring entity shall ensure that the eligibility conditions with respect to previous experience do not require proof of supply in other countries or proof of exports. b) Procuring entities shall endeavour to see that eligibility conditions — including on turnover, production capability and financial strengthdo not result in unreasonable exclusion of local suppliers who would otherwise be eligible, beyond what is essential for ensuring quality or creditworthiness. c) Procuring entities shall review all existing eligibility norms and conditions with reference to (a) and (b) above. d) Reciprocity: If the Ministry of Steel is satisfied that Indian suppliers of iron and steel products are not allowed to participate and/or compete in procurement by any foreign government due to restrictive tender conditions which have the direct or indirect effect of barring Indian companies — such as registration in the procuring country, execution of a project of specific value in the procuring country, etc. — it may, if deemed appropriate, RESTRICT or EXCLUDE bidders from that country from eligibility for procurement of that item and/or other items relating to the Ministry of Steel. e) For the purpose of (d) above, a supplier or bidder shall be considered to be from a country if:

  • (i) the entity is incorporated in that country, or
  • (ii) a majority of its shareholding or effective control of the entity is exercised from that country, or
  • (iii) more than 50% of the value of the item being supplied has been added in that country.

Indian suppliers shall mean those entities that meet any of these tests with respect to India. The term 'entity' of a country shall have the same meaning as under the FDI Policy of DPIIT, as amended from time to time. f) In case restrictive or discriminatory conditions against domestic suppliers are included in tender documents, an inquiry shall be conducted by the Administrative Department undertaking the procurement to fix responsibility. Thereafter, appropriate action — administrative or otherwise — shall be taken against erring officials. Intimation on all such action shall be sent to the Standing Committee under the DMI&SP Policy.

PART B — DMI&SP POLICY (REVISED), 2025 — as applicable to EPC tendersW

1. Background: a) This policy, issued by the Ministry of Steel vide notification no. G.S.R. 341(E) dated 26th May 2025, provides preference for Domestically Manufactured Iron and Steel Products (DMI&SP) in Government procurement. b) The policy applies to procurement of iron & steel products notified in Appendix A. In Appendix B, the minimum domestic content and an exempted list of capital goods for manufacturing iron & steel products which can be imported have been listed. Appendix C contains the policy for promoting the procurement of technology from indigenous technology suppliers.

2. Definitions:

TermDefinition
BidderMay be a domestic/ foreign manufacturer of iron & steel, or their selling agents/ authorised distributors/ authorised dealers/ authorised supply houses, or any other company engaged in the bidding of projects funded by Government agencies.
Domestically Manufactured Iron & Steel ProductsThose iron and steel products that are manufactured by entities that are registered and established in India, INCLUDING in Special Economic Zones (SEZs).
Domestic ManufacturerA manufacturer of iron & steel products conforming to guidelines in section 7 and the definition of 'manufacturer' as per the Central Excise Act.
Domestic value additionThe amount of value added in India = total value of the item to be procured (excluding net domestic indirect taxes) MINUS the value of imported content in the item (including all customs duties), as a proportion of the total value of the item to be procured, in percent. The definition shall be in line with DPIIT guidelines and shall be suitably amended in case of any future changes by DPIIT. For the purpose of this policy document, "domestic value addition" and "local content" have been used INTERCHANGEABLY.

% Domestic value addition = {Total value of the item to be procured (excluding net domestic indirect taxes) − Value of imported content in the item (including all customs duties)} × 100 ÷ {Total value of the item to be procured}
Finished SteelFlat and long products, which can be subsequently processed into manufactured items.
GovernmentFor the purpose of the Policy, means Government of India.
Government agenciesInclude Government PSUs, Societies, Trusts, and Statutory bodies set up by the Government of India.
Indigenous TechnologyA technology shall be deemed to be Indigenous technology if at least 51% of the entity's equity is held by Indian residents, AND the IPR is owned or co-owned by an Indian entity or licensed exclusively to them, AND the core engineering R&D and project execution capabilities reside in India.
L1The lowest tender or the lowest bid, or the lowest quotation received in a tender, bidding process, or other procurement solicitation, as adjudged in the evaluation process.
MoSMinistry of Steel, Government of India.
Margin of purchase preferenceThe maximum extent to which the price quoted by a domestic supplier may be above L1 for the purpose of purchase preference. In the case of DMI&SP policy, the margin of purchase preference shall be 20% for items in Appendix B.
Melt & PourThe steel that has been produced in a steel-making furnace and poured into its first solid shape. The location where this process takes place is called the country of melt and pour (COM). The COM is the original location where crude steel is first produced in a liquid state and poured into its first solid shape. The first solid shape can be a semi-finished product — like a slab, billet, ingot — or a finished steel mill product.
Net Selling PriceThe invoiced price excluding net domestic taxes and duties.
Semi-Finished SteelIngots, billets, blooms, and slabs, which can be subsequently processed into finished steel.

3. Exclusions: a) Waivers may be granted by the Ministry of Steel to all such Government procurements subject to the below conditions: b) Where specific grades of steel are not manufactured in the country, or c) Where the quantities as per the demand of the project cannot be met through domestic sources. d) Exemption requests shall be submitted to the Standing Committee along with sufficient proof of unavailability of iron & steel products domestically.

4. Standing Committee: a) A Standing Committee chaired by the Secretary (Steel) shall oversee the implementation of the policy. b) The Committee shall comprise experts drawn from Industry/ Industry Association/ Government Institution or Body/ Ministry of Steel. Mandate:

  • i) Monitor the implementation of the policy;
  • ii) Review and notify the list of Iron & Steel products, the domestic content requirement criteria and policy directives as mentioned in Appendix A, Appendix B and Appendix C;
  • iii) Issue necessary clarifications for implementation of the policy, including grant of exclusions to procuring agencies as per Para 3;
  • iv) Constitute a grievance redressal committee for preliminary examination of complaints related to implementation of this policy;
  • v) Issue directions for suitable action to Ministries/ Departments concerned in case of non-compliance with this policy by the procuring agency, and advise.
  • Wherever a procuring entity concludes that an unreasonably high price has been quoted by the SOLE bidder/ manufacturer, the matter may be referred to the committee. In such cases, the procuring entity would be required to substantiate its case with complete and thorough documentation.
  • Specifying foreign certifications/ unreasonable technical specifications in the bid document is a restrictive and discriminatory practice against local suppliers. If foreign certification is required to be stipulated because of non-availability of Indian Standards and/or for any other reason, the same shall be done only after written approval of the Committee.

5. Applicability: a) The policy applies to every Ministry or Department of Government and all agencies/ entities under their administrative control, and to projects funded by these agencies, for the purchase of iron & steel products for government projects. All Central Sector Schemes (CS)/ Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS) for which procurement is made by States and Local Bodies come within the purview of this Policy if that project/ scheme is fully/ partly funded by the Government of India. b) The policy applies to public sector steel manufacturers and agencies/ entities under their administrative control for purchase of capital goods (Appendix-B) for manufacturing iron & steel products. c) Appendix-B contains the exemption list of capital goods used in manufacturing iron & steel products which can be imported, and the minimum domestic content requirement for respective packages. The domestic value addition for Capital Goods, as indicated, is subject to change; for example, if some capital goods components can be manufactured in the country, the domestic value addition percentage may go up. d) A purchase preference of 20% is applicable for capital goods used in steel manufacturing.

  1. Appendix-C contains directives and methodology for steelmaking CPSEs to procure from indigenous technology suppliers.
  2. The policy shall apply to projects AND non-projects where the total procurement value of iron and steel products (Appendix-A) in a contract is greater than rs. 5 lakh, on an ITEMISED BASIS.
  3. NO Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of iron and steel products (Appendix-A). NO GTE shall be invited for tenders related to the procurement of Capital Goods for manufacturing iron & steel products (Appendix-B) having estimated value UP TO Rs. 200 Crore, except with the approval of the competent authority as designated by the Department of Expenditure.
  4. The policy applies to the purchase of iron & steel products by PRIVATE agencies for fulfilling an EPC contract and/or any other requirement of a Ministry or Department of Government or their PSUs.

6. Tender Procedure for Procurement: a) Procuring agencies shall follow standard procurement procedures, in accordance with instructions of the Ministry of Finance and CVC, while adhering to DMI&SP policy. b) The tender document, for procurement of both Goods as well as for EPC contracts, should explicitly outline the qualification criteria for adherence to the requirement as mentioned in Appendix A and Appendix B. c) Domestic manufacturers of products under Appendix-A and Appendix-B shall SELF-CERTIFY the local content as per Form-1 placed in the policy, at the time of bidding. d) Bidders who are selling agents/ authorised distributors/ authorised dealers/ authorised supply houses of the domestic manufacturers of iron & steel products covered by Appendix-A are eligible to bid with self-certification on behalf of the domestic manufacturers under the policy, subject to the bidder furnishing an authorisation certificate issued by the domestic manufacturer at the time of delivery. e) For products covered under Appendix B, the bidder shall furnish certification issued by the statutory auditor or cost auditor of the company (in the case of companies), or from a practising cost accountant or practising chartered accountant (in respect of suppliers other than companies), declaring that the capital goods to be used in the iron & steel industry are domestically manufactured in terms of the domestic value addition prescribed. f) If Indian suppliers of an item are not allowed to participate and/or compete in procurement by any foreign government, due to restrictive tender conditions which have the direct or indirect effect of barring Indian companies — such as registration in the procuring country, execution of projects of specific value in the procuring country, etc. — it shall provide such details to the procuring entities for appropriate RECIPROCAL action. g) Entities of countries identified by the Ministry of Steel as not allowing Indian companies to participate in their Government procurement for any item related to the Ministry of Steel shall not be allowed to participate in Government procurement in India for all items related to the Ministry of Steel, except for the list of items published by the Ministry of Steel permitting their participation. h) The stipulation above shall be part of all tenders, including those on the GeM portal, invited by the Central Government procuring entities. i) In case restrictive or discriminatory conditions against domestic suppliers are included in bid documents, an inquiry shall be conducted by the Administrative Department undertaking the procurement to fix responsibility. Thereafter, appropriate action — administrative or otherwise — shall be taken against erring officials. Intimation on all such action shall be sent to the Standing Committee under the DMI&SP policy. j) A supplier DEBARRED by any procuring entity for violation of this Order shall not be eligible for preference under this Order for procurement by any OTHER procuring entity for the duration of the debarment. The debarment for such other procuring entities shall take effect prospectively from the date on which it comes to the notice of other procurement entities. k) Grievance redressal timelines: In case the matter is referred to the Ministry of Steel, the grievance redressal committee set up under the MoS shall dispose of the complaint within 4 WEEKS of its reference and receipt of all documents from the bidder, after taking into consideration the view of the Government Agency. The bidder shall be required to furnish the necessary documentation in support of domestic value addition claimed in iron & steel products to the grievance redressal committee under MoS within 2 WEEKS of the reference of the matter. l) The procuring agency shall define the penalties in the tender document in case of a wrong declaration by the bidder of the prescribed domestic value addition. The penalties may include forfeiting of the EMD, other financial penalties, and BLACKLISTING of such manufacturer/ service provider, etc., in terms of extant rules.

7. Implementation Monitoring by the Ministry of Steel: a) The policy provisions shall be applicable for 5 YEARS from the date of publication and may further be extended at the discretion of the Ministry of Steel. b) MoS shall be the NODAL MINISTRY to monitor the implementation of the policy. c) Agencies covered under the DMI&SP policy shall send a declaration on a QUARTERLY basis indicating the extent of compliance to the policy and reasons for non-compliance thereof, during the preceding financial year.

8. Conclusion — Applicability to EPC Tenders W:

Para 6(b) of the policy above makes it explicitly applicable to both Goods and EPC tenders. Except for the rare cases of EPC tenders for setting up of Steel Manufacturing facilities (where Appendix B and C shall also be applicable), normally only Appendix A shall be applicable in EPC tenders, and these products can only be procured from domestic sources. Purchase preference of 20% is applicable only to capital goods as per Appendix B and not to Appendix A.

1.12When is Procurement of Services JustifiedCNC

1.12.1Consultancy ServicesC

Rules 178 & 180 of GFR 2017 permit Ministries/ Departments to hire external professionals, consultancy firms or consultants (referred to as 'consultant' hereinafter) for a specific job, which is well defined in terms of content and time frame for its completion.

Engagement of consultants may be resorted to in situations requiring high quality services for which the Procuring Entity does not have the requisite expertise. Approval of the competent authority should be obtained before engaging consultant(s).

The need for Procurement of Consultancy Services may be justified on consideration of:

  1. The assignment should be well defined in terms of content and time frame for its completion;
  2. The inadequacy of Capability or Capacity of required expertise IN-HOUSE;
  3. The need to have qualified consultants for providing a specialised high-quality service;
  4. Need for impartial advice from a consultant (acting independently from any affiliation) to avoid conflicts of interest;
  5. The need, in some cases, for Transfer of Knowledge/ Training/ Capacity and capability building as a by-product of such engagement;
  6. Need to acquire information about/ identifying and implementing new methods and systems;
  7. Need for planning and implementing ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE;
  8. There may be internal capacity/ capability to do the job, BUT there are considerations of ECONOMY, SPEED, and EFFICIENCY in relation to additional requirement/ commitment/ usage of:
  9. i) Staff/ Management/ Organisation;
  10. ii) Technological and Material Resources;
  11. iii) Money; and
  12. iv) Time/ Speed of execution.

1.12.2Non-Consultancy ServicesNC

In the interest of economy, efficiency and to provide more effective delivery of public services, Rule 198 of GFR, 2017 permits Ministries/ Departments to procure/ outsource NC services (e.g. non-core, auxiliary and support services). Approval of the competent authority should be obtained before engaging service providers.

The need for Procurement of NC services may be justified on consideration of:

  1. Economy, speed and efficiency and more effective delivery of public services relating to additional requirement/ commitment/ usage of:
  2. Staff/ Management/ Organisation;
  3. Technological and Material Resources;
  4. Money; and
  5. Time/ Speed of execution.
  6. An administrative policy decided by the Ministry/ Department to outsource specific (or a class of) services.

1.13Principles for Public Procurement of ServicesCNC

Other principles of Public Procurement as mentioned in para 1.8 above are also equally applicable to Procurement of Consultancy and Non-consultancy services. To ensure value for money during procurement of services, the following additional principles shall be considered:

#Consultancy Services CNon-Consultancy Services NC
aServices to be procured should be justifiable in accordance with para 1.12 aboveServices to be procured should be justifiable in accordance with para 1.12 above
bTerms of Reference — a document covering well-defined scope of work/ description of services and the time frame for which services are to be availed — should be consistent with the overall objectives of the Procuring EntityIn Non-consultancy Services, the Activities Schedule — a document covering well-defined scope of work/ description of services and the time frame for which services are to be availed — should be consistent with the overall objectives of the Procuring Entity
cEqual opportunity to all qualified Consultants to compete should be ensuredEqual opportunity to all qualified service providers to compete should be ensured
dEngagements should be economical and efficientEngagements should be economical and efficient
eTransparency and integrity in the Consultancy process — that is, proposed, awarded, administered, and executed according to the highest ethical standardsTransparency and integrity in the selection process — that is, proposed, awarded, administered, and executed according to the highest ethical standards
fAdditionally, in procurement of consultancy services, consultants should be of HIGH QUALITY, in line with the justification as per para 1.12 above (Rule 180 of GFR 2017)

C — the two-stage requirement: In Procurement of Consultancy, these considerations can be best addressed through unrestricted competition among qualified shortlisted firms or individuals, in which selection is based on the QUALITY of the proposal and, where appropriate, on the COST of services to be provided. Hence Procurement of Consultancy needs to be done in a two-STAGE PROCESS.

1.14Legal Aspects Governing Public Procurement

A public procurement contract, besides being a commercial transaction, is also a legal transaction. There are several laws that may affect various commercial aspects of public procurement contracts. A public procurement professional is expected to be generally aware of the implications of the following basic laws affecting procurement; however, he or she is not expected to be a legal expert. In different contexts of the scope of work, an additional set of laws may be relevant.

W — the list of applicable laws, as enumerated in the Works Manual:

  1. The Constitution of India
  2. Indian Contract Act, 1872
  3. Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, as amended by the Arbitration and Conciliation (Amendment) Acts, 2015, 2019 and 2021
  4. Competition Act, 2002, as amended by the Competition (Amendment) Acts, 2007 and 2023
  5. The Information Technology Act, 2000 (IT Act — regarding e-procurement and e-auction, popularly called the Cyber Law), as amended by the Information Technology (Amendment) Acts 2008 and 2015, and as modified by the Jan Vishwas (Amendment of Provisions) Act, 2023
  6. Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005
  7. Central Vigilance Commission Act, 2003
  8. Delhi Special Police Establishment Act, 1946 (DSPE — basis of the Central Bureau of Investigation)
  9. Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988, as amended by the Prevention of Corruption (Amendment) Act, 2018
  10. Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita, 2023 (BNSS) — replaces the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973; Section dealing with sanction for prosecution — §218
  11. Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, as amended by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Acts 2018, 2019, 2020 and 2021 — governs insolvency and liquidation of business enterprises — and other allied laws applicable to business entities participating in works contracts
  12. Various labour laws applicable at the works' site
  13. Various building and safety acts, codes, standards applicable in the context of the scope of work; and
  14. Various environmental and mining laws, codes, standards applicable in the context of the scope of work.

1.15The Law of AgencyWCNC

In addition to the laws applicable to Public Procurement referred to above, the Law of Agency (Sections 182 to 238 of the Indian Contract Act, 1872) implies that the contractor/ consultant/ service provider would be an AGENT of the Procuring Entity, acting as a 'Principal', to execute the works/ carry out the service on its behalf.

Hence, there exists a PRINCIPAL/ EMPLOYER and AGENT relationship between the Procuring Entity and such contractor/ consultant/ service provider.

As per this law, the principal/ employer (i.e., the Procuring Entity) is vicariously, legally and financially liable for the actions of its Agents.

The Procuring Entities need to be AWARE of such eventualities. Standard/ Model Bidding/ Tender Documents should take care of this aspect.

1.16Right to Information and Proactive Information DisclosuresG

Section 4(1)(b) of the RTI Act lays down the information to be disclosed by public authorities on a SUO-MOTU or PROACTIVE basis, and Section 4(2) and Section 4(3) prescribe the method of its dissemination — to enhance transparency and also to reduce the need for filing individual RTI applications.

The Department of Personnel & Training, Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances & Pensions, Government of India, has issued "Guidelines on suo motu disclosure under Section 4 of the RTI Act" vide their OM No. 1/6/2011-IR dated April 15, 2013. The relevant guidelines relating to information disclosure relating to procurement are reproduced below:

1.17The Basic Principles of Undertaking WorksW

  1. No new works should be sanctioned without:
  2. Careful assessment of the assets or facilities already available, and the time and cost required to complete the new works;
  3. A concept plan/ preliminary drawing having been approved by the Authority competent to accord sanction. While designing projects, to the extent possible, principles of life cycle costing may also be considered.
  4. As budgetary resources are limited and granted on an annual basis, adequate provisions should be ensured for works and services already in progress before new works are undertaken.
  5. NO project or work will be SPLIT UP to bring it within the sanctioning powers of a lower authority.
  6. (Rule 137, GFR 2017) For the purpose of approval and sanctions, a group of works which forms one PROJECT shall be considered as one WORK. The approval or sanction of the higher authority for such a project consisting of a group of works should not be circumvented by resorting to approval of individual works using the powers of approval or sanction of a lower authority.
  7. (MoF OM No. F.1(26)-E-II(A)/66 dated 04.01.1967 & 27.10.1967)If the component parts of a project are MUTUALLY INDEPENDENT of each other and are not dependent on the execution of one or more such component parts, each such part should be treated as a SEPARATE PROJECT.
  8. In case the functioning of a project is DEPENDENT on the execution of one or more other projects, the entire group of such projects should be taken as a SINGLE scheme/ project and provision made accordingly.

If, however, a scheme consists of revenue component, capital expenditure and loan content, etc., the provision for which is required to be exhibited separately under respective Heads of Account, there is no objection to the provision being made in the relevant Heads of Account; but the authorities concerned should ensure that the sanction of the Competent Authority is obtained for the integrated scheme as a whole, depending on the total COST of the scheme. It will not be permissible in such cases to split up a scheme, treating each part as a scheme, in order to avoid the sanction of a higher authority.

  1. (Rule 138, GFR 2017) Any anticipated or actual SAVINGS from a sanctioned estimate for a definite project shall not, without special authorisation, be applied to carry out ADDITIONAL WORK not contemplated in the original project.
  2. (Rule 136(3), GFR 2017) Any development of a project considered necessary while a work is in progress, which is not contingent on the execution of the work first sanctioned, shall have to be covered by a SUPPLEMENTARY ESTIMATE.
  3. The construction period and sanctioned cost stipulated in the sanction of the Project will not be exceeded as far as possible.
  4. (Rule 135(2), GFR 2017) Ministry or Department shall put in place, as far as possible, empowered project teams for all large value projects, and these teams should be tasked only with project execution and not given other operational duties.
  5. The competent financial authority according the administrative approval should be KEPT INFORMED of the physical and financial progress of the work till their completion, through regular periodical reports.
  6. (Rule 135(1) and 139(i), GFR 2017) Subject to the observance of general rules (Rules 130–141, Rule 144 of GFR, 2017), the initiation, authorisation, procurement and execution of works allotted to a particular Ministry or Department shall be regulated by detailed rules and orders contained in the respective departmental regulations and by other special orders applicable to them. The detailed procedure relating to expenditure on such works shall be prescribed by departmental regulations framed in consultation with the accounts officer, generally based on the procedures and the principles underlying the financial and accounting rules prescribed for similar works carried out by the Central Public Works Department (CPWD).
  7. (Rule 136(1) and 139(vi), GFR 2017) NO works shall be commenced or liability incurred in connection with it until:
  8. Feasibility Study Report/ Preliminary Project Report (PPR) has been prepared in case of works of substantial value;
  9. A proper Detailed Project Report (DPR) has been prepared by a competent agency;
  10. Administrative Approval (A/A) has been obtained from the appropriate authority, in each case;
  11. Expenditure Sanction (E/S) to incur expenditure has been obtained from the competent authority;
  12. Technical approval has been obtained of the detailed and coordinated design of all the Architectural, Civil, Electrical, Mechanical, Horticulture and any other services included in the scope of the sanction, and of the Detailed Cost Estimates containing the detailed specifications and quantities of various items prepared on the basis of the schedule of rates maintained by CPWD or other Public Works Organisations;
  13. Funds to cover the work, which will be executed at least during the current year, have been provided by competent authority;
  14. Tenders have been invited and processed in accordance with rules;
  15. Award of work and execution of Contract Agreement;
  16. A work order has been issued;
  17. Statutory and other clearances: Time taken in the grant of statutory and other clearances also contributes to the time and cost overrun in public projects. These clearances are required to achieve specific objectives like concern for the environment, aviation safety, preservation of national heritage, conservation of forest and wildlife, etc. Public Authorities/ Project Executing Authorities should plan for obtaining all necessary clearances quickly and proper efforts be made for the same, which also should be duly recorded. The progress regarding follow-up of obtaining the statutory clearances should be closely monitored.
  18. Land acquisition: The process of land acquisition shall be started by the Procuring Entity well ahead and completed entirely, or at least substantially, before the work is started. Availability of auxiliary services has been ensured — like roads/ access, power, water, solid & liquid waste disposal system, street lighting and other civic services.
  19. It is desirable to have 100% of the required land in possession before award of contract; however, it may not always be possible to have the entire land due to prevailing circumstances.
  20. Also, it may not be prudent to put the entire process of award of contract on hold for want of the remaining portion of land, which — in the assessment of the public authority or project executing authority — could possibly be acquired in a targeted manner after award of the contract, without affecting progress.
  21. Minimum necessary encumbrance-free land should be available before award of contract. The minimum may be determined based on the circumstances of each case or general guidelines issued by the concerned authorities. Such land, non-availability of which will prevent essential components of work from execution, should be insisted upon.
  22. Public Authorities/ Project Executing Authorities should plan for acquiring balance land quickly and proper efforts be made for the same, which also should be duly recorded. The progress regarding land acquisition should be closely monitored.

1.18Administrative Control and Powers to SanctionW

1. Administrative control of works includes (Rule 131, GFR 2017): a) Assumption of full responsibility for construction, maintenance and upkeep; b) Proper utilisation of buildings and allied works; c) Provision of funds for execution of these functions.

2. Powers to Sanction Works (Rule 132, GFR 2017): The powers delegated to various subordinate authorities to accord administrative approval, sanction expenditure and re-appropriate funds for works are regulated by the Delegation of Financial Powers Rules (DFPR) and other orders contained in the respective departmental regulations. The powers of the Department relating to works are detailed in Rule 133(1) and 133(2) of GFR, 2017.

3. Work under the administrative control of the Public Works Departments (Rule 134, GFR 2017): Works not specifically allotted to any Ministry or Department shall be included in the Grants for Civil Works to be administered by the Central Public Works Department. NO such work may be financed partly from funds provided in the departmental budget and partly from the budget for civil works.

1.19Public Procurement Cycle

The procurement process for goods, works and/or services typically involves the following cycle of activities, undertaken in the order stated below. Details and procedures of the various stages of the procurement cycle are described in the subsequent Chapters.

Common four-stage spine (all four Manuals):

Need Assessment → Bid Invitation Process → Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract → Contract Management

1.19.1GoodsG

StageContent
a) Need AssessmentNeed assessment, formulation of Specifications and Procurement Planning (including market consultation, if required)
b) Bid Invitation ProcessPreparing tender documents, publication, receipt and opening of bids
c) Bid Evaluation and Award of ContractEvaluation of bids and award of contract
d) Contract ManagementContract management and closure
e) Disposal of ScrapDisposal of Scrap through various modes of disposal

1.19.2WorksW

Following are the stages in planning, sanctioning and execution of work:

1. Need Assessment: a) Perspective Planning for works; b) Preparation of Preliminary Project Report (PPR) or Rough Cost Estimate; c) Acceptance of necessity and issue of in-Principle Approval; d) Preparation of Detailed Project Report (DPR) or Preliminary Estimate (PE); e) Administrative Approval and Expenditure Sanction (A/A & E/S) or 'Go ahead' Approval; f) Detailed Design, Estimate and Technical Sanction; g) Appropriation/ re-appropriation of funds.

2. Bid Invitation Process: Preparation of Bid documents, Publication, Receipt and Opening of Bids.

3. Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract: a) Preliminary Examination and Evaluation of technical proposals — consideration of quality; b) Evaluation of financial proposals; c) Selection of winning proposal and award of the contract to the selected firm.

4. Contract Management: Execution and Monitoring of works and Quality Assurance.

1.19.3Consultancy ServicesC

The entire process of procurement and implementation of Consultancy services shall include the following steps:

1. Need Assessment: a) Preparation of Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) and obtaining in-principle approvals; b) Preparation of the Terms of Reference (ToR), cost estimate and seeking administrative and budgetary approval; c) Developing a Procurement Plan.

2. Shortlisting of Qualified Consultants — EOI process.

3. RfP Invitation Process: Preparing 'Request for Proposal (RfP) Document', publication, receipt and opening of bids.

4. Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract: a) Preliminary Examination and Evaluation of technical proposals — consideration of quality; b) Evaluation of financial proposals; c) Selection of winning proposal; NEGOTIATIONS and award of the contract to the selected firm.

5. Contract Management: Execution and Monitoring of Consultancy Assignments.

1.19.4Non-Consultancy ServicesNC

The entire process of procurement and implementation of Non-consultancy services shall include the following steps:

1. Need Assessment: a) Preparation of Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) and obtaining in-principle approvals; b) Preparation of the Services and Activities Schedule, cost estimate and seeking administrative and budgetary approval; c) Developing a Procurement Plan.

2. Bid Invitation Process: Preparing tender documents, publication, receipt and opening of bids.

3. Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract: a) Preliminary Examination and Evaluation of technical proposals — consideration of quality; b) Evaluation of financial proposals; c) Selection of winning proposal and award of the contract to the selected firm.

4. Contract Management: Execution and Monitoring of Service Contract.

1.20Nomenclature Conundrum

  1. There is NO standardised nomenclature in Public Procurement in India, and a mix of American, European, and British/ Indian nomenclature has become common.

'Tender' is taken to mean:

  • (i) the 'Tender Document' or 'Tender Process', as well as
  • (ii) the 'Bid' submitted by the 'bidders'.

The Tender Document floated by the Procuring Entity is also called a Bid (or Bidding) Document. Similarly, participants in a 'tender' are alternatively called BIDDERS and TENDERERS. This duality is reflected in "Notice Inviting Tenders" and "Instructions to Bidders", etc.

  1. An attempt is made in these Manuals to standardise:
  2. the term 'Tender' for the 'Tender Document' (document prepared and published by the Procuring Entity — instead of bid/ bidding document) or the 'Tender Process'; and
  3. 'Bid' for the bid submitted by the bidders — and hence 'bidder' is used instead of 'tenderer'.

Similar attempts are made to standardise other nomenclature in these documents without DISTURBING the nomenclature (e.g., 'Pre-qualification Bidding') already embedded in the CPPP or GeM portals.

Appendix to Chapter 1 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

A ready-reckoner of every place in Chapter 1 where the four Manuals genuinely differ, rather than merely rename.

#Point of differencePosition
1Delegation of powers for procurementG/C/NC: "full powers" for goods and services not on GeM; GeM mandatory under Rule 149. W: "powers" under DFPR only — no GeM mandate stated
2Relevant GFR chaptersG, C, NC: Chapters 6 to 9. W: Chapters 5 to 9
3Sale of Goods Act, 1930Cited in G, C, NC; NOT in W
4Mediation Act, 2023Cited in G, W, NC; NOT in C's para 1.1 list
5Indian Stamp Act, 1899Cited in W, C, NC; NOT in G
6Classification of Works (Original/ Minor/ Repair — Rule 130)W only
7Rs 60 lakh in-house repair-work thresholdW only
8Portals namedG: GeM + GePNIC. W:CPPP only. C/NC: GeM + CPPP ("generally conform")
9Composite contract refinements (new product vs AMC/CMC; Notes 1–3)W, C, NC; G has only the shorter version
10Consultancy-vs-NC "primary objective" test (dam safety example)W, c, nc; Not in G
11FA Charter applies only to Ministries/ Departments; CPSEs free to devise own systemG only
12Standards (Canons) of Financial ProprietyG, W only — absent from C and NC
13Rule 21 clause (v) — allowances not a source of profitW only
14National SC/ST Hub (NSSH)G only
15"25% is only a minimum; MSE preference mandatory for all procurements"C, NC only
16Non-tax benefits explained (schemes, delayed payments)C only
17Definitions of Class-I / Class-II / Non-local supplier in Chapter 1W, C, NC; in G these are in the Glossary
18"Rs 1000 Crore per annum → five-year procurement projections on website"G, C
19Start-up benefits limited to the DPIIT-registered industry/ sectorW, C
20"Relaxation can be partial — e.g. 25%" footnoteW, C, NC
21DMI&SP PolicyG: 2019 version. W:Revised 2025 version (G.S.R. 341(E) dated 26.05.2025), framed for EPC tenders. Absent from C and NC
22"When is procurement justified"C, NC only
23"Principles for Public Procurement of Services"C, NC only
24Two-stage process mandated for ConsultancyC only
25Enumerated list of 14 applicable lawsW only (G places them in Appendix 2; C/NC cross-refer)
26Law of AgencyW, c, nc; Not in G
27RTI and Proactive DisclosuresG only
28Basic Principles of Undertaking Works (13 principles)W only
29Administrative Control and Powers to SanctionW only
30Procurement Cycle — fifth stage "Disposal of Scrap"G only
31Procurement Cycle — Shortlisting/ EoI as a separate stage; RfP in place of Bid Invitation; Negotiations namedC only
32Procurement Cycle — Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) as first stepC, NC
33Repair works up to Rs 60 lakh — expenditure sanction on PPR aloneW only

end of Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Need Assessment, Formulation of the Requirement, and Procurement Planning

Merging: Goods Ch. 2 (Need Assessment, Formulation of Specifications and Procurement Planning) · Works Ch. 2 (Need Assessment and Procurement Planning) · Consultancy Ch. 2 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 2

The Central Idea of this Chapter

This is the chapter where the four Manuals genuinely diverge the most. Chapter 1 was largely common text; Chapter 2 is not. The reason is simple:

CategoryInitiating documentDescription-of-requirement instrumentApproval architecture
GoodsIndent / Purchase Requisition (Annexure 5)Technical Specifications (TS)Technical + Administrative + Budgetary sanction; signing of Indent
WorksRequisition → Perspective PlanPPR/ Rough Cost Estimate → DPR/ Preliminary Estimate → Detailed Designs & Detailed EstimatesIn-Principle Approval → A/A and E/S → Technical Sanction → Appropriation of funds
ConsultancyProcurement Proposal (Concept Paper) (Annexure 3)Terms of Reference (ToR) (Annexure 4)In-principle approval → Final Administrative and Budgetary Approval
Non-ConsultancyProcurement Proposal (Concept Paper) (Annexure 3)Services and Activities Schedule (Annexure 4)In-principle approval → Final Administrative and Budgetary Approval

Everything else in this chapter — cost estimation principles, procurement planning, packaging/slicing, cartel mitigation, annual procurement plans, risks and mitigations — is largely common and is stated once below.

Concordance for Chapter 2

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
2.1Need Assessment and the Initiating Document2.12.12.1, 2.22.1, 2.2
2.2Matters decided during Need Assessment2.1-2
2.3Estimation of Cost2.1-2-f)2.2, 2.42.42.3.2
2.4Formulation of the Requirement — Goods: Technical Specifications2.2
2.5Formulation of the Requirement — Works: PPR, DPR, designs, Estimates, Sanctions2.2–2.8
2.6Formulation of the Requirement — Consultancy: Terms of Reference2.3
2.7Formulation of the Requirement — NC: Services and Activities Schedule2.3.1
2.8Obtaining Sanctions/ Approvals2.32.3, 2.5, 2.72.52.3.3
2.9Need Assessment & Formulation — Risks and Mitigations2.42.62.3.4
2.10Procurement Planning2.5.12.92.7.12.4.1
2.11Procurement Planning — Risks and Mitigations2.5.22.4.2

2.1Need Assessment and the Initiating Document

2.1.1Goods — the IndentG

  1. Procurements should be initiated only on the basis of an INDENT (please refer to Annexure 5 — Purchase Requisition (Indent) for Goods (Non-stock)) from the user Department.
  2. The authority in the user Department initiating the indent for procurement shall first determine the need (including anticipated quantum) for the subject matter of the procurement.
  3. Description and Specification of Need assessment is of FUNDAMENTAL IMPORTANCE in ensuring value for money, transparency, competition, and a level playing field in procurement.
  4. The user department shall maintain all documents relating to the determination and technical/ financial/ budgetary approvals needed for procurement.

2.1.2Works — Perspective Planning for WorksW

  1. Each Ministry/ Department shall prepare a perspective plan for undertaking different types of works. There shall also be a provision for ANNUAL REVIEW of the plan for making modifications, if any.
  2. During procurements, in place of considering only the initial acquisition cost, other costs like cost of operation, maintenance, and disposal during the lifetime of the external resource procured should also be considered. This practice refers to the concept of Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) or Life Cycle Cost (LCC) or Whole-of-Life (WOL), as mentioned under para 1.7 above.

2.1.3Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Services — the Procurement ProposalCNC

  1. Procurement Proposal: A critical part of the procurement of Services process is preparing an appropriately staffed and budgeted Procurement Proposal/ Concept Paperwhich serves the function that an INDENT serves in procurement of Goods. The authority in the user Department initiating the procurement proposal shall first determine the need (including anticipated quantum) for the subject matter of the procurement.

Purpose/ Objective Statement of Services, Service Outcome Statement, and justification for the procurement of Services are important parts of the procurement proposal.

  1. The description instrument:
  2. CTerms of Reference containing Scope of Work, Time-frame, Key Staff, Deliverables/ Milestones is of fundamental importance in ensuring value for money, transparency, competition, and a level playing field in procurement of Consultancy Services.
  3. NCServices and Activity Schedule containing Service Outcomes, Description/ Scope of Services, Quantum and Length (Duration/ Frequency/ Shifts) of activities is of fundamental importance in ensuring value for money, transparency, competition, and a level playing field in procurement of NC Services.

The user Department shall maintain all documents relating to the determination and technical/ financial/ budgetary approvals of the need for procurement.

2.1.3.1Preparing the Procurement Proposal/ Concept PaperCNC

As a first step towards procurement of services, a formal written brief Proposal and Justification for the Services should be prepared (suggested format at Annexure 3: Format of Procurement Proposal). It is akin to the Indent for Materials/ Material Requisition in the case of Procurement of Goods.

The User should prepare, in simple and concise language, the requirement, purpose/ objectives and the scope/ outcomes of the assignment/ Services, and justify the procurement based on analysis of in-house available capacity/ capability.

  • CThe eligibility and PRE-QUALIFICATION criteria to be met by the consultants should also be clearly identified at this stage.
  • NCThe eligibility and QUALIFICATION criteria to be met by the service providers should also be clearly identified at this stage.

Justifications for procurement of Services as given in para 1.12 may be kept in view. It is the basic document for initiating procurement of services. It is also the document from which the subsequent detailing of the ToR C / Services and Activities Schedule NC is drawn up.

A procurement proposal should contain:

1. Purpose/ Objective Statement of Services: The user should prepare a "Purpose/ Objective Statement of Services". One of the important contents of this statement is the description of service to describe the subject matter of procurement, which would be used in all subsequent documents. Bringing out the background and context, this should justify how the proposed procurement of services would fit in with the short-term and strategic goals of the Procuring Entity. Making such a statement is important to put the need for services in clear perspective. It may seem elementary or academic, but is a necessary and critical first step in properly designing a procurement proposal.

2. Service Outcome Statement: Once the "Purpose/ Objective of Services" has been clearly defined, the next step is to formulate a 'Service Outcome Statement'. This should list out QUALITATIVELY and QUANTITATIVELY the outcomes expected from the Procurement of Services, as well as the expected Time-frame and a rough estimate of cost of Procurement of services (including related costs to be incurred by the organisation).

At this stage, it is not necessary to go into details of all the activities required to achieve the service outcomes, but it should list at least the BROAD activities, which would help in putting a rough estimate to the cost of the assignment.

A 'Service Outcome Statement' should provide a concrete basis for subsequently defining the type and amount of work that needs to be done by the Consultant/ service provider, and the time-frame within which the output needs to be received by the user. The estimated cost is needed to ascertain the level of administrative/ financial approvals necessary as per the SoPP.

3. Justification for the Procurement of Services: The Concept Paper/ Procurement Proposal should analyse the capabilities/ capacities REQUIRED to carry out the assignment. It should also analyse the AVAILABLE IN-HOUSE capabilities/ capacities and COMPARE these with the ones required for the assignment. Based on this assessment, the Procurement should be justified in the light of para 1.12.

2.1.3.2In-principle Approval for initiating procurement of ServicesCNC

Based on the justification contained in the Procurement Proposal, in-principle administrative approval and BUDGETARY SANCTION for initiating procurement of such services should be accorded by the Competent Authority (CA) as laid down in the SoPP.

Further stages May be proceeded with only after such approvals. (C cites Rule 180 of GFR 2017.)

2.2Matters Decided During Need AssessmentGof general application

During need assessments, the following matters are decided to comply with the 'Procurement Guidelines':

a) Expression/ Description of the Need

The expression/ description of the need is an important determinant of Value for Money (VfM) and wide competition. Therefore, to the extent practicable, it should be:

  • i) Unambiguous, complete, using common terminology prevalent in the relevant trade;
  • ii) In accordance with the guidelines prescribed, if any, in this regard;
  • iii) Except in the case of proprietary purchase from a selected single source, reference to trademark, brand/ trade names, catalogue numbers, or other details that limit any materials or items to specific manufacturer(s) should be AVOIDED as far as possible. Where unavoidable, such item descriptions should always be followed by the words "or substantially equivalent."

b) Method of Satisfying the Need

The method of satisfying the need — owning/ leasing/ hiring/ outsourcing or through Public Private Partnership (PPP), and so on — may be determined:

  • as per policies declared in this regard, or
  • based on a techno-economic evaluation (using life cycle cost if feasible) of various alternative methods of satisfaction of the need, and compatibility and inter-operability with existing infrastructure or systems.

There are now new procurement approaches like:

  • Hardware as a Service (HaaS), also known as Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)it allows customers to outsource their IT infrastructures, such as servers, networking, processing, storage, virtual machines, and other resources. Customers access these resources on the Internet using a pay-as-per-use model.
  • Software as a Service (SaaS)the SaaS provider is responsible for operating, managing, and maintaining the application software hosted on the cloud and the infrastructure on which it runs. The customer simply creates an account, pays a fee and uses the software over an internet connection by way of a web browser, mobile app or thin client.

c) Quantity of the Subject Matter of Procurement, Commensurate with Economy

  • i) Care should be taken to avoid purchasing quantities in excess of the requirement to avoid inventory carrying costs. Where scales of consumption or usage limits of requirements have been laid down by the Competent Authority, the officer signing the indent should also CERTIFY that the prescribed scales or limits are not exceeded. It is also necessary to round off the calculated quantity to the nearest wagon load/ truckload/ package to economise on transportation.
  • ii) An appropriate size of the tender has a great impact on value for money and the level of competition. A balance is achieved by judicious packaging requirements of different users or slicing requirements into smaller tenders (see para 2.10 below on the merits and demerits of packaging and slicing).
  • iii) units of quantity are an important parameter. Some items may be manufactured in metric tons but used in units of numbers or units of length (for example, steel sheets/ structurals). For the sake of transparency, it is important to buy an item in units of manufacture. For example, it is better to buy steel/ structurals in units of WEIGHT, since it has a tolerance in weight per unit of length; this usually works to the disadvantage of the buyer if it is bought in units of length. The buying and issuing units of an item may be different — but should be standardised.

d) Time-schedule and Place of Product/ Work/ Service Delivery

Need assessment and generation of indent for procurement should be done sufficiently in advance of the time when goods are required. Delays in need assessment have an ADVERSE IMPACT on value for money and transparency.

Great care is required to be exercised in filling up REALISTIC DATES for the requirement of material. The procuring entity should be allowed time in accordance with the established lead times.

In urgent cases, the procuring entity may entertain indents providing shorter periods, but such urgencies must be approved by the authority empowered to grant administrative approval for the indent, and must be accompanied by PROPER JUSTIFICATION.

e) Formulation of Specifications

Formulation of Specifications ensures value for money, transparency, a level playing field, and the widest competition. (Detailed at paras 2.4 to 2.7 below, category-wise.)

f) Estimation of Cost

(Detailed at para 2.3 below.)

2.3Estimation of Cost

2.3.1Why the Estimate MattersGof general application

The estimated cost in the indent is a VITAL ELEMENT in:

  • various procurement processes,
  • approvals, and
  • the establishment of reasonable prices at the time of evaluation of the bids.

Therefore, it should be worked out REALISTICALLY and OBJECTIVELY.

Following are some suggested methods of cost estimates. These are neither mandatory nor comprehensive nor in any order of preference. These methods are not mutually exclusive, and TRIANGULATION from different methods would give a more accurate estimate of cost.

A. Where historical cost data IS available

Last purchase price (or estimated rate in past indents) of this or similar or nearly equivalent requirements — after due updation as per D below.

B. Where NO historical cost data is available — Costing Analysis

Costing analysis through internal or external expert costing agencies provides a reliable estimate of cost.

C. Where NO historical cost data is available AND Costing Analysis is NOT feasible

In such situations, a rough assessment of cost can be arrived at — but should be used with CAUTION for evaluation of the reasonableness of bids:

  1. Rough assessment from the price of the assembly/ machine of which the item is a part, or vice versa;
  2. Published catalogues/ Maximum Retail Price (MRP) printed on the item is the main source for establishing the estimated cost of items. It may be noted that MRPs usually include SIGNIFICANT MARGINS for distributors, wholesalers, and retailers;
  3. As a LAST RESORT, a rough assessment of the opportunity cost of not using this item at all;
  4. Market Survey: For commercially available goods, a formal market survey online (GeM portal or other commercial market apps) or a physical survey of the market can provide a reasonable estimate of cost;
  5. Budgetary Quotes: For equipment/ craft that are custom-built to the buyer's specifications, the best way to get a rough assessment of costs is by obtaining budgetary quotes from potential parties.
  6. Ideally, there should be three quotes.
  7. However, there is a need to have a time schedule for receipt of quotes to ensure some timeframe for this activity.
  8. An attempt should be made to obtain as many budgetary quotes as possible from reputed/ potential firms, and a time (if feasible, ten to twenty-one days) should be indicated.
  9. In the event of receipt of less than three budgetary quotes, two EXTENSIONS (if feasible, of five days each) may be considered.
  10. In the event of the non-availability of three quotes within the above extended period, the estimates should be prepared based on the number of budgetary quote(s) received — which May even be one.
  11. Where more than one budgetary quote is received, the estimate should be framed on an AVERAGE of the quotes, which will reduce variations and fluctuations.
  12. CAUTION: Budgetary quotes are not exact estimates — the bidder who EXPECTS to be short-listed may quote HIGH rates, and the bidder who does not expect to be shortlisted may quote ABNORMALLY LOW prices to queer the pitch for others.

D. Updation of Historical Data

Historical cost data can be supplemented with escalations to cater for inflation, price increases of raw materials, labour, energy, statutory changes, price indices, and so on, to make them usable in conditions prevailing currently. In the case of foreign currencies, the rate should be reduced to a common denomination of Indian Rupees.

Price indices can be obtained from the following websites(some may require prior free registration, and some have paid subscriptions):

PurposeSource
Price indices of indigenous itemshttp://www.eaindustry.nic.in/home.asp.in — Ministry of Industry
Metals and other mineralshttp://www.mmronline.com/ · http://www.metalprices.com/index.asp · http://www.asianmetal.com/
Price trends of non-ferrous metalsLondon Metal Exchange — https://www.lme.com/ (often show volatile trends)
General economic/ trade intelligencehttp://www.tradeintelligence.com/ · http://www.cmie.com/ (Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy)
Price trends of different countrieshttp://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2015/01/ — International Monetary Fund
Industry chamberswww.ieema.org — Indian Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers' Association
Commodity PricesMulti Commodity Exchange of India Limited (MCX) — https://www.mcxindia.com/home
Cross-commodity price reporting agency (PRA)Fastmarkets — https://www.fastmarkets.com/

2.3.2Cost Estimation for Consultancy ServicesC

Preparation of a well-thought-through cost estimate is ESSENTIAL if realistic budgetary resources are to be earmarked.

a) Categories: Costs shall be divided into Two broad categories:

  • (a) fee or remuneration (according to the type of contract used); and
  • (b) reimbursable costs.

Depending on the nature of the assignment, cost estimates may be prepared either in local currency or with a combination of local plus foreign currencies. Cost estimate should provide for forecast of inflation during the period of assignment.

b) Estimated Resources: The cost estimate shall be based on the Procuring Entity's assessment of the resources needed to carry out the assignment:

  • i) Staff time;
  • ii) Logistical support (City, National and International Travels/ Trips and durations); and
  • iii) Physical inputs (for example, vehicles, laboratory equipment);
  • iv) Miscellaneous (Support services, contingencies, and Profit element, taxes, and duties).

c) Rates: Costs are normally estimated using UNIT RATES (staff remuneration rates, reimbursable expenses) and quantities (exceptionally, some items may be estimated on a lump-sum basis or percentage basis — Contingencies and support services). Rates of payment should be identified (including applicable taxes, if any) in LOCAL and FOREIGN currency for Staff Time, Logistics Costs and Costs of various physical inputs/ support services.

d) Staff Costs: The estimate of staff cost is based on an estimate of the personnel time (staff-months or staff-hours) required for carrying out the assignment, taking into account the time required by each expert, his or her BILLING RATE, and the related DIRECT COST component.

In general, staff remuneration rates include: Basic salary, social charges, overheads, fees or profit, and ALLOWANCES.

It is useful to prepare a bar chart indicating:

  • the duration of each main activity (WORK SCHEDULE), and
  • time to be spent by different members of the consultancy team (STAFFING SCHEDULE),

distinguishing tasks to be carried out by FOREIGN and LOCAL consultants. Due consideration should be given to the expected breakdown of a consultant's time in the home office and client's countries, and away-from-home-office allowance.

e) Logistic Costs: The number of trips required should be estimated as required to carry out various activities. Travel costs may be included for city travel, National and International travel and stay.

f) Physical Inputs Costs: Assessment of such costs would depend on the technical requirements of equipment.

g) Miscellaneous costs: Support services may be taken as a percentage of staff costs. Contingencies and Profit elements are usually taken as a percentage of the total cost of the Consultancy. To this would be added the taxes and duties likely to be incurred by the consultants.

Cost categories for breaking down an assignment C: Although assignments vary in size, length, and nature, it is possible to make a cost estimate by breaking down the assignment's activities into the following cost categories: a) Professional and support staff; b) Travel, Hotel, and transport; c) Mobilisation and demobilisation; d) Office rent, Furniture/ Equipment, supplies, Utilities, IT equipment and communication; e) Assignment-related surveys, training programmes; f) Translation, report printing; g) Contingencies: miscellaneous, insurance, shipping; and h) Indirect local taxes and duties in connection with carrying out the services.

2.3.3Cost Estimation for Non-Consultancy ServicesNC

Preparation of a well-thought-through cost estimate is essential if realistic budgetary resources are to be earmarked. The cost estimate shall be based on the Procuring Entity's assessment of the resources needed to carry out the services: managerial and staff time and physical inputs (for example, materials, consumables, tools and machines).

Costs shall be divided into three broad categories.Profit element, Taxes and duties should be ADDED to the estimated costs: a) Remunerations for Personnel deployed; b) Reimbursable: Travel, logistics, Consumables, Materials, Tools, Hiring of third-party services, etc.; c) Administrative and Miscellaneous: Mobilisation, demobilisation, Temporary Structures, Administrative expenses, office and IT equipment, contingencies, financing costs, Costs for hiring/ depreciation/ financing of machinery and equipment, etc.

Rates: Costs are normally estimated using unit rates (staff remuneration rates, reimbursable expenses) and quantities (exceptionally some items may be estimated on a lump-sum basis or percentage basis — Contingencies and support services).

Staff Costs: The estimate of staff cost is based on an estimate of the personnel time (staff-months/ weeks/ days) required for delivering the services, considering the time required by each staff, his remuneration rate (or the minimum wage rate, if applicable), and the related direct cost component. In general, staff remuneration rates include basic salary, social charges, overheads, fees or profit and allowances.

2.3.4Cost Estimation for WorksW

(Works cost estimation is embedded in the PPR → DPR → Detailed Estimates sequence — see para 2.5 below, and the reference documents at para 2.5.7.)

2.4Formulation of the Requirement — GOODS: Technical Specifications (TS)G

2.4.1Value for Money and Technical Specifications

The procuring authority should ensure that specifications are developed to ensure VfM, a level playing field and wide competition in procurement [Rule 173(ix) of GFR 2017].

The TS constitute the BENCHMARKS against which the procuring entity will verify the technical responsiveness of bids and, subsequently, evaluate the bids. Therefore, well-defined TS will facilitate:

  • the preparation of responsive bids by bidders, as well as
  • the examination, evaluation, and comparison of the bids by the procuring entity.

It would also help in ensuring the QUALITY of the supplied goods.

The procuring authority should ensure that the specification should:

1. Ensure a level playing field and the widest competition;

2. Be unambiguous, precise, objective, functional, broad-based/ generic, standardised (for items procured repeatedly) and measurable. TS should be broad enough to avoid restrictions on workmanship, materials and equipment commonly used in manufacturing similar kinds of goods;

3. Set out the required technical, qualitative and performance characteristics to meet just the bare essential specific needs of the procuring entity, without including SUPERFLUOUS and NON-ESSENTIAL features, which may result in unwarranted expenditure;

4. Standards:

  • Normally, these standards should be based on national technical regulations or recognised national standards (Bureau of Indian Standards — BIS) or building codes, wherever such standards exist. Preference should be given to procure the goods which carry the BIS mark.
  • In the absence of national standards, TS may be based on the relevant INTERNATIONAL standards.
  • Provided that an indenting authority may, for reasons to be recorded in writing, base the TS on equivalent international standards even in cases where BIS standards exist.
  • For any deviations from Indian standards or for any additional parameters for better performance, specific reasons for deviations/ modifications should be duly recorded with the approval of the Competent Authority.
  • Where the technical parameters are only MARGINALLY different, Indian standards may be specified, and the Departmental specifications could cover only such additional details as packing, marking, inspection, and so on, as are specially required for a particular end use.

5. Units: All dimensions incorporated in the specifications shall be indicated in metric units. If, for some unavoidable reason, dimensions in FPS units are to be mentioned, the corresponding equivalents in the metric system must also be indicated. In the case of Government of India funded projects ABROAD, the technical specifications may be framed based on the requirements and standards of the host beneficiary Government, where such standards exist — provided that a procuring entity may, for reasons to be recorded in writing, adopt any other technical specification;

6. Make use of best practices: Examples of specifications from successful similar procurements in other organisations or sectors may provide a sound basis for drafting the TS;

7. Avoid obsolescence: Commensurate with VfM, avoid procurement of obsolete goods, and require that all goods and materials be NEW, UNUSED and of the most recent or current models, and that they incorporate all recent improvements in design and materials, unless provided for otherwise in the tender documents;

2.4.2Environmental Issues, Green Procurement, Sustainable Development GoalsG

a) Comply with sustainability criteria and legal requirements of environment or pollution control and other mandatory and statutory regulations or internal guidelines, if any, applicable to the goods to be purchased.

b) While specifying packaging requirements in the supply of Goods/ Works/ Services, the procuring entity may emphasise packaging that has minimal impact on the environment without compromising on safety and security.

c) Ecomark: The procuring Entity may include a requirement for the Ecomark Label, to the extent feasible, in their Description/ Specification of the goods being procured.

The Government of India has promulgated the Ecomark Certification Rules, 2023 for:

  • labelling environmentally friendly products that meet the approved environment criteria, and
  • ensuring environmental performance of such products with respect to resource efficiency, circular economy and environmental impacts — in particular the impact on climate change, the impact on nature and biodiversity, generation of waste, emissions to all environmental media, pollution through physical effects, and use and release of hazardous substances

— thereby supporting the principles of 'LiFE (Lifestyle for Environment)'.

Objective: to encourage consumers to adopt such products and the manufacturers to transition to the production of Ecomark-certified products to promote sustainability. It shall be applicable to any product that is produced or supplied for distribution or use in the market, unless otherwise excluded under the Ecomark Certification Rules. It would also prevent misleading information on the environmental aspects of products.

d) Efficiency factors: Specifications should emphasise factors such as efficiency, optimum fuel/ power consumption, use of environmentally friendly materials, reduced noise and emission levels, low maintenance cost, and so on.

i) Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE): The Government of India set up the BEE (https://beeindia.gov.in/en) on 1 March 2002, under the provisions of the Energy Conservation Act, 2001, with the primary objective of reducing the energy intensity of the Indian economy. The Bureau initiated the Standards & Labelling Programme for equipment and appliances in 2006 to provide the consumer with an informed choice about energy saving and, thereby, the cost-saving potential of the relevant marketed product.

ii) Coverage: The scheme is invoked for 34 equipment/ appliances, out of which labelling is mandatory for 11 equipment/ appliances, i.e.:

The other appliances are presently under the VOLUNTARY labelling phase.

iii) Star ratings: The energy efficiency labelling programmes under BEE are intended to reduce the energy consumption of appliances without DIMINISHING the services they provide to consumers. The higher the stars, the more EFFICIENT the appliance. The threshold ratings prescribed by the Ministry of Finance are:

ApplianceThreshold Star Rating
Split Air Conditioners5 Star (under normal conditions where annual usage is expected to be more than 1000 Hrs)
3 Star (where usage of AC is limited, e.g., in conference rooms)
Frost Free Refrigerators4 Star
Ceiling Fans5 Star
Water Heaters5 Star

iv) Building it into the TS: The procuring Entity should try to build either the BEE Star rating, where applicable, and minimum energy efficiency, where such star ratings are not yet available, into the TS (in accordance with Rule 173(xvii) of GFR 2017). Such benchmarking illustrates the use of neutral and dependable benchmarking in the procurement of sustainable, environmentally favourable goods by way of appropriately formulated Technical Specifications.

In a similar fashion, to implement sustainability goals, TS may include an Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) as defined by ISO 14025 as a Type III declaration that "quantifies environmental information on the life cycle of a product to enable comparisons between products fulfilling the same function". Voluntary environmental standards can also be used to specify environmental sustainability criteria.

2.4.3Discourage Procurement Involving Evaluation of Samples/ Demonstration of EquipmentG

According to the existing guidelines on public procurement of goods, purchase in accordance with a sample, or requiring demonstration of equipment, should not be usually undertaken.

a) Calling for a sample along with the tender, or requiring a demonstration of equipment after bid opening, and deciding based on evaluation of the sample/ demonstration of equipment should not be done.

b) Built-in sample clauses: In certain specifications, there may be a built-in sample clause. Usually, such clauses are stipulated to illustrate INDETERMINABLE CHARACTERISTICS such as shade/ tone, make-up, feel, finish, workmanship, and so on. In some specifications there may not be a sample clause, but such indeterminable characteristics are left to be agreed between the seller and buyer. One way to procure/ indigenise certain spares whose drawings/ specifications are not available is to procure in accordance with an available sample of the part. In such cases, the supply must conform to an agreed reference sample only, whereas the remaining characteristics must conform to the drawings/ specifications.

c) The reference-sample procedure: However, NO sample should be called for or evaluated along with the bids. If desired:

  • Three COPIES of the purchaser's REFERENCE SAMPLE with seal/ label may be DISPLAYED for prospective bidders to illustrate the desired indeterminable characteristics, which final supplies from successful bidder(s) will have to meet in addition to the specifications/ drawings.
  • If required, in addition to the purchaser's reference sample, the provision for the submission of a PRE-PRODUCTION SAMPLE matching the purchaser's sample by the successful bidder(s) may be stipulated for indeterminable characteristics before giving clearance for bulk production of the supply.
  • On placement of the contract, the three copies of the purchaser's reference sample are distributed as follows:
  • One copy → to the CONTRACTOR for preparing pre-production sample/ supplies;
  • One copy → to the CONSIGNEE for matching with the pre-production sample/ supplies;
  • One copy → kept secure under lock and key in the SAMPLE ROOM of the procuring entity.
  • The Indent for items that are to be procured in accordance with a sample must be accompanied by three sealed reference samples, as far as possible.

d) Demonstration: If a demonstration of equipment (say, entirely newly developed equipment) is considered necessary, it may be planned only during the PRE-BID stage — but the evaluation of tenders should not be based on this.

2.4.4Essential Technical ParticularsG

The essential Technical particulars to be specified in the tender document shall include the following, to the extent applicable for a particular purchase:

  1. Scope of supply and END USE of the required goods;
  2. All essential technical, qualitative, functional, environmental and performance characteristics and requirements — such as material composition, physical dimensions and tolerances, workmanship, and manufacturing process wherever applicable; test schedule, if any — including guaranteed or acceptable MAXIMUM or MINIMUM values, as appropriate.
  1. Drawings;
  2. Requirement of the BIS mark, where applicable — mentioning all parameters where such a specification provides options;
  3. Requirement of a PRE-PRODUCTION SAMPLE, if any, at the post-contract stage before bulk production;
  4. Specific requirements of PRESERVATION, PACKING and MARKING, if any;
  5. INSPECTION PROCEDURE for goods ordered and criteria of conformity;
  6. Requirements of SPECIAL TESTS or type test certificate or TYPE APPROVAL for compliance of statutory requirements with reference to pollution, emission, noise, if any;
  7. Other additional work and/or related services required to achieve full delivery/ completion, installation, commissioning, training, technical support, after-sales service, and Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) requirements, if any;
  8. WARRANTY requirements;
  9. QUALIFICATION CRITERIA of the bidders, if any;
  10. Any other aspects PECULIAR to the goods in question — such as the shelf life of the equipment, and so on.

2.5Formulation of the Requirement — WORKS: PPR, DPR, Designs, Estimates and SanctionsW

2.5.1Preparation of Preliminary Project Report (PPR) or Rough Cost Estimate

WHO prepares it:

  • If the work is to be executed under its OWN arrangement by the Ministry/ Department — a PPR or Rough Cost Estimate shall be prepared by the WORKS COMMITTEE, based on Land, Site Details, functional and space requirements (or Various Facilities, Special Requirements/ Features and Broad Specifications for specialised Equipment and Plants), Layout Plans etc. — with the technical details/ documents mentioned below being prepared by (or under the guidance of) the TECHNICAL MEMBER(S) of the Works Committee.
  • If the Work is executed through a Public Works Organisation (PWO) or a Public Sector Undertaking (PSU) — on requisition from the Ministry/ Department for procurement of works, the PWO or PSU to whom the work is entrusted for execution shall prepare such PPR or Rough Cost Estimate and submit it to the requiring Department/ Ministry.

WHAT it triggers: Based on the PPR and Rough Cost Estimate, the competent authority in the Administrative Ministry/ Department grants IN-PRINCIPLE APPROVAL, indicating approval of the CONCEPT and SCOPE of the project at the ROUGH COST assessed.

The Preliminary Project Report shall provide the following details:

  1. Background of the work/ project justifying the NEED for the work;
  2. Details of SCOPE of the project;
  3. EXCLUSIONS (if any) — this will cover part of the work which is not included in this particular project estimate;
  4. Availability of LAND — there should be a clear indication about the availability of land required for completion of the whole project. The land shall be made available free of all encumbrances;
  5. Availability of AUXILIARY SERVICES — like roads, power, water, solid & liquid waste disposal system, street lighting and other civic services shall be ensured;
  6. Reference to Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings, if any, and their acceptance — this shall indicate the details of Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings prepared and their approval by the requisitioning authority;
  7. AGENCY of Procurement — through direct procurement, outsourcing to PWO/ PSUs or otherwise;
  8. Rough Cost Estimate: Ministries/ Departments may carefully assess alternative technological options, their area requirements, and obtain Rough Cost on the basis of prevailing plinth area rates (or any other reliable basis) without preparation of drawings, to enable the competent authority to accord in-principle approval;
  9. If relevant, cost benefit analysis of the project, including evaluation of options for cost sharing/ recovery (user charges) for infrastructure/ services. Principles of Life Cycle Cost may also be considered, to the extent feasible;
  10. CASH FLOW — this will show year-wise requirement;
  11. Source & availability of funds — the manner of transferring the fund to the executing agency to be spelt out;
  12. Appendices:
  13. i) Requisition of the Department/ Ministry;
  14. ii) Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings;
  15. iii) Reference to approval of Concept Plans/ Preliminary Drawings;
  16. Any other relevant documents;
  17. PRESENTATION on the findings of the feasibility study/ PPR: As directed in the Department of Expenditure's General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management (OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021), a presentation may be made by a team (which may include engineers/ consultants/ outside experts, finance officers etc.) before the public authority/ designated competent authority. This is to provide an opportunity to the public authority to have an overall assessment of the situation, appraisal of various options, as well as likely challenges and mitigation measures. In the case of VERY LARGE projects, such presentation may be made to the HEAD of the public authority. The record of discussions during the presentation may become part of the DPR and tender file/ project record.

2.5.2Acceptance of Necessity and Issue of In-Principle Approval

Approval of the competent financial authority for accepting the necessity of works and its SCOPE should be sought on the basis of the PPR or Rough Cost Estimate, and In-Principle Approval of the concerned Ministry/ Department shall be made available for preparation of the Detailed Project Report or Preliminary Estimates.

2.5.3Preparation of Detailed Project Report (DPR)/ Preliminary Estimates (PE)

1. On receipt of In-Principle Approval of the project, the procuring entity shall finalise the Detailed Project Report with due care and accuracy, using the latest technological tools, collecting all relevant ground information, including consultation with the field units wherever applicable, giving reference to the documents mentioned below. The DPR should provide a level playing field to the bidders and should ensure, as far as feasible, the widest possible competition.

The DPR shall contain:

  1. Reference to Concept plan/ preliminary drawings and their acceptance;
  2. Details of SCOPE of the project, indicating clearly the list of Engineering Services (Mechanical/ Electrical/ Plumbing) as well as Operation and Maintenance — included or not included in the DPR/PE;
  3. Preliminary estimated cost — this will also include the expected ESCALATION for the period of completion of the project, and also the departmental or lump sum charges to be paid to the executing agency (PWO or PSUs). Cash flow projection should show year-wise requirement. While designing the projects, if and to the extent possible, principles of Life Cycle Cost may also be considered;
  4. Time of completion — this will consist of two PARTS: one for PRE-CONSTRUCTION activity till award of the work, and the other for the EXECUTION;
  5. Details of LAND required along with land plan Schedule to implement timely land acquisition procedures;
  6. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of the project and approval thereof, wherever applicable;
  7. Social Impact Assessment and Resettlement and Rehabilitation: Social Impact Assessment needs to be done, based on baseline socio-economic survey and census survey data, to identify the Project Affected People (PAPs). A Resettlement and Rehabilitation Plan should be prepared for the PAPs in accordance with the LARR Act 2013 or the National Policy on Resettlement and Rehabilitation (NPRR), and State Governments' framework of resettlement policies and other social safeguard policies designed to protect the rights of the affected persons and communities as applicable;
  8. List of Approvals of STATUTORY BODIES required;
  9. Annual plan allocation and cash flow;
  10. Systems to be adopted for PROJECT MONITORING;
  11. Works accounting system;
  12. QUALITY ASSURANCE system/ mechanism;
  13. Bidding systems — Single, two parts, pre-qualification, Post-qualification;
  14. WHO prepares: In case the work is being executed by the Ministry/ Department themselves, DPR and PE will be prepared by the Ministry/ Department itself. In case the Work is assigned to a PWO or PSU, that agency shall prepare the DPR and PE;
  15. EXEMPTION: For repair works costing up to rs. 60 (SIXTY) LAKH, preparation of DPR and pe May be dispensed with, since repair work does not need detailed designing. Sanction may be accorded by the competent authority based on the PPR itself.

2. The consultant-quality problem: A major reason for problems in works contracts — in particular relating to construction of roads, highways, ports, runways, dams etc. on item-rate or percentage rate basis — is the OUTSOURCING of preparation of Detailed Project Reports to consultants without sufficient relevant experience, or without giving them sufficient TIME to do so.

  • It is therefore essential to STIPULATE & ENSURE successful project design/ supervision experience while selecting consultants, especially for large works contracts.
  • DPR in such contracts is required to be based on proper ground investigation at each specified stretch (normally 50 METRES), called a "REACH", and the Consultant be directed to exercise such due diligence.
  • Wherever consultants are appointed for preparation of DPR, field units of the public authorities should also be associated with the process. The inputs from these field units can be useful in proposing best solutions for design and execution of the work, as they are the custodian of legacy data, which may not be available with the consultants, as they may not be operating regularly in that geographical region.

3. Involvement of the Ministry/ Department: The involvement of the Ministry/ Department in providing proper inputs, including USER REQUIREMENTS, during the preparation of the DPR and before accepting the draft DPR, is PARAMOUNT in ensuring successful implementation.

  • Proper FIELD SURVEYS and INVESTIGATIONS of ground conditions are CRITICAL in preparation of a reliable DPR.
  • Providing scientifically valid data to bidders will depend on the quality of the investigations done by the DPR consultant.
  • As a corollary, the Ministry/ Department must INSIST on a qualified team of engineers with experience for carrying out DPR studies.
  • It is also essential that the Ministry/ Department insists that the Consultant offers them TECHNOLOGY OPTIONS at the EARLY stage of preparation of the DPR, so that a cost-efficient choice may be made using principles of life cycle costing.

4. Consequences of a defective DPR: In case the deviations between the actual ground situation and the situation recorded in such DPR result in significant COST and TIME OVER-RUNS, the Engineer, while doing valuation of variations, must bring to the Procuring Entity's notice the reach-wise differences, and the Ministry/ Department May consider stringent action against the consultant who has prepared such DPRs — including debarment from future consultancy contracts, after following due procedure. Such clauses May be included in the contracts for preparation of DPR.

5. Presentation on the DPR: A presentation may be made about the DPR before the public authority, for projects above a THRESHOLD VALUE as decided by Project Executing Authorities. The presentation may include:

In the case of very large projects, such presentation may be made to the HEAD of the public authority. The record of discussions during the presentation shall become part of the tender file/ project record.

2.5.4Administrative Approval and Expenditure Sanction (A/A and E/S)

1. A/A and E/S will be accorded to the execution of work by the competent financial authority in the Ministry/ Department after due examination of the Detailed Project Report and Preliminary Estimates.

POST-SANCTION CHANGES in scope and specification lead to delay, loss of quality and contractual penalties. Therefore, such A/A and E/S shall be accorded after carefully assessing their requirements.

The estimates framed by a PWO or other engineering organisation May be modified for such sanction only with their concurrence.

2. The sanction order should contain:

  • SCOPE of work,
  • estimated cost, and
  • TIME SCHEDULE for completion of work, and
  • funding sources along with the break-up of the share of each funding agency.

3. A Department of Government of India may sanction expenditure on any scheme or project as per the powers delegated from time to time by the Finance Ministry (DoE's O.M. No. 24(35)/PF-II/2012 dated 05.08.2016), subject TO its outlay having been APPROVED by the Competent Authority in accordance with the appraisal and approval process prescribed by the Finance Ministry from time to time. (Rule 16, DFPR 2024)

2.5.5Detailed Designs, Detailed Estimates and Technical Sanction

1. Except where the work is to be undertaken in the EPC (Turnkey) mode, on receipt of sanction of the project (based on DPR or PE) and assurance of funds, the procuring entity, in consultation with the Works Committee, shall prepare and accord TECHNICAL SANCTION to:

  • the detailed and coordinated DESIGN of all the Architectural, Civil, Electrical, Mechanical, Horticulture and any other services included in the scope of the sanction, and
  • the detailed cost estimates containing the detailed SPECIFICATIONS and QUANTITIES of various items, prepared on the basis of the Schedule of Rates maintained by CPWD or other Public Works Organisations

— so as to ensure that proposals are STRUCTURALLY SOUND and that the estimates are accurately calculated based on adequate data.

In case the work is to be executed through a PWO or PSU, preparation of detailed design/ estimates and technical sanction shall be done/ accorded by that organisation.

2. Architectural and structural drawings: Architectural and structural drawings ("fit for construction") are among the CORE REQUIREMENTS for projects.

  • Finalisation of these drawings at the EARLIEST — preferably at the time of preparation of the cost estimate itself — can help to determine quantities of various items of the work.
  • Adverse consequences of not preparing these drawings before invitation of tenders may manifest in the form of delay in execution of the work and deviations in quantities of the items of work.
  • Hence, APPROVED architectural and structural drawings should be available before invitation of tenders.
  • "Fit for construction" (sometimes called "Good for construction") drawings means the architectural and structural drawings approved by the project executing authority as well as by the authority governing the extant Rules/ laws, including byelaws, such as local authorities.

3. Enlarging the Schedule of Rates: Endeavour may be made to enlarge the base of the 'Schedule of Rates' published by various organisations, to bring a maximum number of items under its ambit. For NON-SCHEDULED ITEMS, rates may be finalised by a COMMITTEE constituted by the organisation concerned/ consultants, as the case may be.

2.5.6Appropriation of Funds

Before taking up the execution of work, it shall be ensured that proper funds are available to meet the expenditure on the work.

It should also be emphasised that the DPR CONSULTANT is able to provide realistic year-wise requirement of funds. This information is necessary so that concerned Ministries/ organisations may be intimated regarding the same, which will enable them to include such funds projection in their BUDGET.

2.5.7Reference Documents Used in Preparation of Estimates

For preparation of estimates and during execution of work, the following reference documents are used by PWOs. These may be SEPARATE for different regions, and for various types of works — Building, Electrical and Mechanical.(Annexure 12 of the Works Manual lists further resources regarding Procurement of Works.)

#DocumentPurposeExample
1Plinth Area RatesProvide a quick but fairly accurate method of estimation of cost of buildingsCPWD DPAR — Delhi Plinth Area Rates
2Schedule of RatesFor each kind of work commonly executed, to facilitate the preparation of estimates, and also to serve as a guide in settling rates in connection with contract agreements — maintained up to dateCPWD DSR — Delhi Schedule of Rates
3Analysis of RatesBy taking market rates of labour, materials, cartage etc. and their quantities for each kind of work commonly executedCPWD Analysis of Rates
4SpecificationsDescribing inputs, processes, tests and mode of measurement for each kind of work commonly executedCPWD Specifications

2.6Formulation of the Requirement — CONSULTANCY: Terms of Reference (ToR)C

2.6.1What the ToR Is and Why It Matters

1. The ToR is akin to description, Quantity and Technical Specification in Procurement of Goods. This is the first STEP in the selection of the consultants once a need has been identified.

It explains:

  • the purpose/ objectives of the assignment,
  • scope of work,
  • activities,
  • tasks to be performed,
  • respective responsibilities of the Procuring Entity AND consultant,
  • expected results, and
  • deliverables of the assignment.

It is important for an understanding of the assignment and its correct execution to ensure that the objectives of the assignment are achieved.

  • It reduces the risk for the PROCURING ENTITY of unnecessary extra work, delays, and additional expenses.
  • In addition, it helps reduce for the bidders the risk of ambiguities during the preparation of bidders' proposals, contract negotiation, and execution of Consultancy.

2. The balance to strike: Hence the ToR should be COMPREHENSIVE and UNAMBIGUOUS. HOWEVER, it should not be too detailed and inflexible, so that competing consultants may be in a position to propose their own methodology and staffing. Bidders shall be encouraged to comment on the ToR in their proposals.

2.6.2Contents of the ToR

The ToR shall include:

  1. Procuring Entity's organisation background and Project background;
  2. Purpose and Service Outcomes Statement of the assignment;
  3. Detailed scope of work Statement, including schedule for completing the assignment;
  4. Expected requirement of KEY PROFESSIONALS and kind of EXPERTISE;
  5. Capacity-building programme and transfer of knowledge, if any;
  6. Deliverables — List of reports (or documents, data, maps, surveys, designs, drawings), schedule of deliveries, and period of performance;
  7. Background material — Data, reports, records of previous surveys, and so on — available and to be provided to the consultant;
  8. FACILITIES such as local conveyance, office space, office machines, secretarial assistance, utilities, local services, etc., which would be provided to the consultant by the Procuring Entity;
  9. Institutional and organisational arrangement; and
  10. Procedure for REVIEW of the work of the consultant after award of contract.

(A template for developing a ToR is given at Annexure 4 of the Consultancy Manual. Rule 185 of GFR 2017.)

2.6.3Detailed Guidance on Key ToR Elements

a) Detailed Scope of Work

As part of the ToR, at its simplest, the 'Detailed Scope of Work' will contain:

  • the TYPE and VOLUME of activity to be undertaken, and
  • the TIME-FRAME of activity involved

to achieve the Purpose and Service Outcomes as envisaged in the 'Brief Proposal and Justification of the Services'.

Method: Starting from END-OUTCOMES BACKWARDS, the process to achieve the outcomes is BROKEN DOWN into a discrete number of interrelated tasks, which the consultant will have to undertake.

After the tasks are identified, a LOGICAL SEQUENCING of the tasks must be determined. Usually a simple BAR CHART (or GANTT CHART) is the best way to illustrate required outputs over time and their relationship to each other. The 'Detailed Scope of Work' contains such a sequence of tasks over a timeline, and also tangible outputs and activities such as reports, workshops, or seminars.

b) Expected Requirement of Key Professionals and Kind of Expertise

Except in very complex consultancies, it is DESIRABLE not to distinguish the tasks of individual experts, but instead to prepare a longer and more detailed description of what the consultancy team, as a whole, will provide — without splitting up tasks.

The ToR would list a range of tasks without regard to who will have the responsibility to undertake them. In most cases, where the number of experts is small, the work to be done is not clearly defined, and a degree of flexibility is required — this is ACCEPTABLE.

In consultancy services, key professionals are usually named, and their credentials carry weightage in technical evaluation.

c) Deliverables and Reports Requirements

The assignment's deliverables and reporting should be clearly specified. In particular, for inception and progress reports, there should be a BALANCE between keeping the Procuring Entity well informed and not forcing consultants to spend an excessive amount of time preparing minor reports.

The ToR should indicate: the FORMAT, FREQUENCY, and CONTENT of reports, as well as the number of copies, the LANGUAGE, and the names of the prospective recipients of the reports.

Depending on the assignment, the following reports are usually required:

ReportTimingPurpose and Content
i) Inception ReportAbout six WEEKS after the commencement dateAny major inconsistency in the toR, STAFFING PROBLEMS, or deficiency in the Procuring Entity's assistance that have become apparent during this period should be included. The inception report is designed to give the Procuring Entity confidence that the assignment can be carried out as planned and as agreed upon in the contract, and should bring to its attention major problems that might affect the direction and progress of the work.
ii) Progress ReportsMonthly or bimonthly, depending on the assignment.
• Feasibility studies and design assignments → two-month intervals is satisfactory
• Technical assistance and implementation supervision (e.g. construction) → best submitted MONTHLY
Keep the Procuring Entity regularly informed about the progress of the assignment. They may also provide WARNINGS of anticipated problems or serve as a reminder for payment of invoices due. Progress reports may include a BAR CHART showing details of progress and any changes in the assignment schedule. Photographs with time-stamping are a quick and easy way of conveying the status of a project, and their use in progress reports should be encouraged. For technical assistance services, progress reports also serve as a means of setting out the WORK PROGRAM for the following months. Each team member usually contributes to the preparation of the monthly report.
iii) Interim ReportsIf the assignment is PHASEDRequired to inform the Procuring Entity of preliminary results, alternative solutions, and major decisions that need to be made. Since the recommendations of an interim report may affect later PHASES of the assignment and even influence the results of the project, the Procuring Entity should DISCUSS the draft interim reports with consultants in the field. The Procuring Entity should not take more than 15 (FIFTEEN) DAYS to review and approve draft interim reports.
iv) Final ReportDue at the COMPLETION of the assignmentThe Procuring Entity and consultants should DISCUSS the report while it is still in draft form. The consultants alone are responsible for their findings; although changes may be SUGGESTED in the course of the discussions, consultants should not be forced to make such changes. If the consultants do not accept comments or recommendations from the Procuring Entity, these should be noted in the report. The consultants should include in the report the reasons for not accepting such changes.

d) Background Material and Records of Previous Surveys

This would vary from project to project, but TRANSPARENCY DEMANDS that such information should be transparently and equitably shared with all prospective bidders.

e) Facilities to be Provided by the Procuring Entity

Facilities such as local conveyance, office space, secretarial assistance etc. which can be provided to the consultant.

f) Procedure for Review of the Consultancy after Award of Contract

In consultancy services, the contract Monitoring Committee (CMC), and the procedure for review and approval of the work of the consultant after the award of contract, should also be declared and adhered to.

2.7Formulation of the Requirement — NON-CONSULTANCY: Services and Activities ScheduleNC

2.7.1What the Services and Activities Schedule Is

1. The Services and Activities Schedule is akin to description, Quantity and Technical Specification in Procurement of Goods. This is the first STEP in the selection of the Service Provider once a need has been identified.

It explains:

  • the background and context,
  • purpose/ objectives of the services,
  • scope, quantum, duration/ frequency of activities/ tasks to be performed,
  • respective responsibilities of the Procuring Entity and service provider,
  • expected outcomes, and
  • deliverables of the Service.

It is important for an understanding of the service requirement and its correct execution to ensure that the outcomes of the service are achieved. It reduces the risk for the Procuring Entity of unnecessary extra work, delays, and additional expenses. In addition, it helps reduce for the bidders the risk of ambiguities during the preparation of bidders' proposals and contract execution. Hence, the Services and Activities Schedule should be COMPREHENSIVE and UNAMBIGUOUS.

The OBJECTIVES of the Services and Activities Schedule are:

  • a) To provide sufficient information on the quantum, scope, duration/ frequency and TIMELINES of Services to be performed, to enable bids to be prepared efficiently and accurately; and
  • b) When a Contract has been entered into, to provide a PRICED Services and Activities Schedule for use in the PERIODIC VALUATION of Services executed.

2.7.2Contents of the Services and Activities Schedule

Besides detailing the activities, quantum and time frame, the Services and Activities Schedule should contain the following sections also:

a) Background

  • i) Procuring Entity's organisation and Project background;
  • ii) Purpose and Service Outcomes Statement;
  • iii) Short Description and Scope of Services (including any incidental works/ goods) that would help the bidders understand the service requirement;
  • iv) Contract period (and provision of extension, if any), duration/ frequency/ timeline of outcomes/ deliverables;
  • v) Type of Contract/ BOQ — Time-based, Unit-Rate, Indefinite delivery, Lumpsum or Percentage-Based;
  • vi) Expected requirement of RESOURCES: Man-power, Materials, Equipment;
  • vii) FACILITIES such as office space, office machines, utilities, local services, etc., which would be provided to the Service Provider by the Procuring Entity;
  • viii) INSURANCES required, if any;
  • ix) Statutory and Contractual OBLIGATIONS to be complied with by the Service Providers;
  • x) Institutional and organisational arrangement for Services — Counterpart Contract Management Team, Chain of Command, Interim/ ultimate beneficiaries/ stakeholders of Services; and
  • xi) Procedure for REVIEW of the Service delivery after award of contract, including service Level Agreement, if any.

b) Description of Services

A brief description of the service required is important information that would help the bidders understand the service requirement. It should cover background about the Procuring Entity's organisation and about the project/ service. The Purpose and Service Outcome statement should be INCLUDED in the description of services (as finalised for initiating the procurement) to help the service providers understand the requirement.

c) Services and Activities Schedule

In order to attain the objectives, Services should be itemised in sufficient detail to DISTINGUISH:

  • between the different CLASSES of Services, or
  • between Services of the same NATURE carried out in different LOCATIONS or in other circumstances which may give rise to different considerations of cost.

There may be more than one schedule of Services, based on grouping similar services in one Schedule. Each Service should be described and broken down into DISCRETE ACTIVITIES required to deliver the service.

The description/ Scope of Service and Activities should indicate WHAT IS — and, more important, what is not — included in the scope, and the conditions under which services are to be performed.

Consistent with these requirements, the layout and content of the Services and Activities Schedule should be as simple and brief as possible. All information relevant for the bidder to quote a price may be included — e.g., the location, frequency/ shifts/ length and quantum, and time-frame/ duration of completion of activities to be performed.

d) Performance Standards and Quality Assurance

Performance standards/ Service Levels; functional/ materials/ technical specifications (indicating QUANTITATIVE and QUALITATIVE parameters/ limits/ thresholds for performance) should be specified OVERALL for the Service AND for each activity, materials, tools and machines to be used in the activity.

It should also include:

  • i) Any reporting requirement, periodic meetings or other submissions;
  • ii) Any service Level Agreement, if required — say, for the outsourcing of services;
  • iii) key performance indicators indicating how MEASUREMENT, REPORTING, and TRACKING of performance parameters would be done for Quality Assurance and Monitoring of Service (indicate procedure for quality assurance and monitoring of services, including institutional or third-PARTY arrangements for this purpose);
  • iv) Procedure for RESOLUTION and ESCALATION procedures in case of DEFICIENCY in performance/ quality/ service levels;
  • v) METHOD STATEMENT (Sequencing and inter-dependencies of activities), methodology, Service Level Agreement, arrangements to ensure environmental, social, gender, health, and SAFETY requirements if relevant. The Method Statement must be supplemented by information in sub-schedules for work plan; and
  • vi) Schedule for Forms of BOQ/ Contract based on INPUT-ADMEASUREMENT — Key Inputs deployments (Personnel Deployment, Critical Equipment Deployment and Critical Materials Deployment) May not be essential — but list these if required to achieve the performance standards and quality. If the service is not dependent on any of the key inputs, that May be omitted.

e) Labour/ Personnel Schedule

If labour/ personnel are used in the activity, these may be QUANTIFIED, specifying PLACE, SHIFTS and frequency of utilisation in the Services and Activities Schedule.

In case any KEY PROFESSIONALS or PROJECT MANAGER is required, their qualification and experience required may also be mentioned.

f) Critical Material Schedule

In case any Materials/ Consumables/ tools of trade are to be consumed/ deployed, a SEPARATE Materials Schedule should be included, indicating the specification and quantity of such materials/ consumables/ tools to be consumed/ deployed per unit activity/ day/ location/ per manpower deployed.

The price of all these materials/ tools etc. is to be shown as a separate lump-sum cost in the financial bid by the bidder.

g) Critical Equipment Schedule

Any ESSENTIAL equipment or machinery — Trucks, Cranes, Washing Machines, Vessels/ crafts, plant and machinery, etc. — that the service provider must HAVE and should DEPLOY as a QUALIFYING REQUIREMENT must be mentioned, along with specifications, capacity, age of equipment etc.

It should be ensured that OPERATORS for such equipment must be mentioned in the Labour/ Personnel Schedule.

In case of INPUT ADMEASUREMENT, indicate only Critical Equipment (not others) required to carry out the Services to required standards and quality. CATEGORISE the equipment — IT Equipment/ Motor Vehicles, Cranes, Washing Machines, vessels/ crafts, plant & machinery etc. Give estimated number LOCATION-WISE, CATEGORY-WISE.

h) Statutory and Contractual Obligations to be Complied with by the Contractor

The service provider mostly works within the premises of the Procuring Entity, along with the staff of the Procuring Entity.

Many services are subject to various STATUTORY PROVISIONS relating to:

The bidder must have:

  • a Service Tax Number,
  • ESI registration,
  • EPF Registration Certificate,
  • Registration Declaration of ownership under the Indian Registration Act, 1908,
  • a Labour Licence, and
  • PAN (Income Tax).

Moreover, the Procuring Entity itself may have its OWN regulations about safety, security, confidentiality, etc. All such statutory and contractual obligations must be listed, so that price implications and compliance are taken care of by the bidder.

i) Facilities and Utilities to be Provided by the Procuring Entity at the Site

It should be mentioned if any facility/ utility — IT/ Communication Services, Emergency Medical, Room, Furniture, Electricity connection, Water connection, etc. — would be made available to the successful bidder to carry out the service.

In case it is proposed to CHARGE for the Electricity/ Water supplied to the service provider, the same may be mentioned, including the rate of charges.

SPECIALLY MENTION facilities and utilities which WILL not be provided, or the facilities which would be provided on a CHARGEABLE basis.

It should be clearly MENTIONED that the service provider will not be allowed to use any of the Procuring Entity's facility/ area which are not LISTED in this section.

j) Institutional Arrangements and Procedure for Review of Work of Service Provider after the Award of Contract

Institutional arrangements like the placement in a Department, name of Project Manager, and chain of command for reporting may be specified. The process of Review of Service Outcomes and deployment of personnel and resources should be clearly brought out.

(A template for the Services and Activities Schedule is given in Annexure 4 of the Non-Consultancy Manual.)

2.8Obtaining Technical, Administrative and Budgetary Sanctions/ Approvals

2.8.1Goods — Sanctions and Signing of IndentsG

Procuring Entities may lay down a Schedule of powers for administrative and budgetary approval of indents generated for the procurement of goods (please refer to Annexure 4 for the suggested Structure of SoPP).

Before granting such approvals, it should be CERTIFIED that:

  • Funds in the budget are available, and
  • liability for this indent is noted against the total available budget.

In case the delivery schedule is URGENT (or shorter than the usual lead time), an URGENCY CERTIFICATE should be recorded to JUSTIFY the urgency.

The indenting authority may submit an indent in the form of a PURCHASE REQUISITION (Annexure 5) to the procuring entity, giving it ADEQUATE TIME for procurement.

Monitoring registers:

RegisterMaintained byFormat
Progress of Indents submittedIndentorsIndentors should monitor the progress of the Indents they submitAnnexure 6 — Purchase Requisition Register for Indentors
Progress of Indents receivedProcuring authorityon receipt from the indenting authority, the progress of such Indents should be monitoredAnnexure 7 — Purchase Requisition Register for Procuring Entity

2.8.2Works — the Sanctioning SequenceW

(See paras 2.5.2, 2.5.4, 2.5.5 and 2.5.6 above — In-Principle Approval → A/A and E/S → Technical Sanction → Appropriation of Funds.)

2.8.3Consultancy and Non-Consultancy — Final Administrative and Budgetary ApprovalsCNC

1. Compatibility with budget and iteration:

  • C The scope of the work described in the ToR shall be compatible with the available budget.
  • NC The Services and Activities Schedule shall be compatible with the available budget.

The most important step is to determine whether all TASKS required to achieve the desired output have been INCLUDED.

The NEXT STEP is to determine whether an ADEQUATE BUDGET has been ALLOCATED to implement the ToR/ services as designed/ proposed.

The Competent Authority's approval may be taken for the ToR/ the Procurement before proceeding ahead.

After administrative approval, provision May be made in the budget; or, if that is not feasible, additional confirmation at the time of seeking Administrative approval may be taken from the CA for inclusion in the revised estimate stage of budget.

Procurement May be initiated only after such budgetary provisions/ confirmations.

2. Schedule of powers: Procuring Entities may lay down a Schedule of powers for administrative and budgetary approval of procurement proposals for services. Before granting such approvals, it should be CERTIFIED that funds in the budget are available and liability for this procurement proposal is noted against the total available budget.

2.9Need Assessment and Formulation of the Requirement — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1The need is either ARTIFICIALLY CREATED or EXAGGERATED, with the intention to channel benefits to an individual or an organisation. For example, demand is created for a good that is not needed, simply to benefit the company's owner.Keep records and involve stakeholders: Records of decision-making and data used should be kept. Involve PROCUREMENT and FINANCE functions at this stage also. END-USER and STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS should be part of the process.
2DELAYS in the Assessment of Need and generation of the Indent/ Purchase Proposal for Procurement may lead to SHORTCUT procurement procedures that DILUTE TRANSPARENCY and PREVENT the achievement of value for money. It may also lead to delays in the delivery of goods/ services.Need assessment should be done sufficiently in advance of the time when goods/ services are required. In the case of URGENT requirements, the URGENCY CERTIFICATE should be approved by an authority empowered to grant administrative approval for the indent, RECORDING JUSTIFICATION — why the need could not be formulated earlier.
3The estimate of the costs may be INADEQUATE. This may lead to an inadequate response from the bidders and may delay the finalisation of procurement. It may also adversely affect the QUALITY of supplies.Estimates of procurement should be prepared with DUE DILIGENCE, keeping inflation, technology changes, profit margins, etc., in view.
4GNeed Description/ Specifications involving SUBJECTIVITY: Procurements where samples are asked to be submitted along with the offer, and the evaluation is based on the SUBJECTIVE EVALUATION of samples — which may lead to allegations of corruption.If required, a STOCK SAMPLE for INDETERMINABLE PARAMETERS — such as shade/ tone, size, make-up, feel, finish, and workmanship — may be DISPLAYED during procurement, to which the offers must conform. If necessary, provide for submission of a PRE-PRODUCTION SAMPLE by the successful bidder(s) before giving clearance for bulk production of the supply. (See para 2.4.3.)
5Need Description/ Specifications/ Terms of Reference/ Activity Schedule are DISPROPORTIONATE to the need identified, or made to tilt in favour of one or a group of vendor(s) or contractor(s) to artificially restrict competition.Use a formal market discovery tool: A pre-bid conference and/or well-publicised EoI may be used to discover the market. Otherwise, encourage and invite comments on the technical and commercial conditions in the tender document, or hold a pre-bid conference.
6ASYMMETRIC DISSEMINATION of vital need information: Dialogue for determining solutions available in the market is held only with SELECTED prospective bidders, giving them an UNDUE ADVANTAGE in preparing for the bidding. Selected prospective bidders get access to INSIDE INFORMATION that has not been disclosed, or DISCLOSED LATE, to others.(Same mitigation as Risk 5 above — formal market discovery tool.)

2.10Procurement Planning

2.10.1The Requirement is Usually Part of a Larger ProjectWCNC

The Works/ Consultancy Services/ NC Services may be part of a LARGER PROJECT in which there may be other components of Work, Goods, or Consultancy/ NC services.

Once a project or a programme is identified, the Procuring Entity needs to develop a synchronised procurement plan for all the various components of the project/ programme. This will also require:

  • planning of the SEQUENCE and CONTENTS of the different components,
  • adoption of the most appropriate method of selection and type of contract, and
  • ensuring that selection of the contractor/ consultant/ service provider is initiated and completed in a timely manner to meet the overall requirements of project implementation.

Procurement planning is a crucial stage of decision-making for a better outcome and for VfM considerations.

2.10.2Critical Review of the IndentG

Within 10 (ten) working days of receipt of the indent from the user Department, the procuring authorities should CRITICALLY REVIEW the description and TS enclosed with the indent for:

  • completeness/ approvals/ funding,
  • VfM, and
  • possibility of the widest competition

— and seek clarifications from the indenting officer, if needed, before initiating such procurement.

2.10.3Reassessment of Quantity and Packaging/ Bundling/ Slicing of Requirement

i) The general rule (Rule 157 of GFR 2017): The procuring authority shall normally neither package nor divide its procurement, or take any other action to LIMIT COMPETITION among bidders, or to avoid the necessity of obtaining the sanction of a higher authority required with reference to the estimated value of the total demand.

ii) the exception: Provided that — in the interest of efficiency, economy, timely completion or supply, wider competition, or access to MSEs (W says: access to SMALLER CONTRACTORS) — a procuring authority May, for reasons to be recorded in writing, divide its procurement into APPROPRIATE PACKAGES, or club requirements of other users for procurement.

iii) Market-facing considerations: Packaging of the contract and procurement planning should be done while keeping in view:

  • Market conditions and availability,
  • the possibility of eliciting the interest of the qualified firms,
  • EFFECTIVE COMPETITION for the type and size of the contract, and
  • access to MSEs(W: smaller contractors).

iv) Mixed-category requirements:

  • G Some requirements, e.g., IT Systems, may have elements of Goods, Works, and Services. It could be either SLICED into separate Goods, Works and Services elements, or COMBINED into a single package.
  • WCNC For example, for a particular contract, material to be procured may constitute more THAN 50 (fifty) per cent of the total cost of works, or there are services which are a mix of consultancy services with a substantial element of goods, such as procurement of an IT system. Such procurement could be done as a single composite contract comprising all components, or divided into separate procurements/ contracts for each category of procurement.

v) The test to apply: In all such situations, the DOMINANT ASPECT of the requirement, and the value for Money aspects of a composite all-inclusive contract versus dividing the contract into respective categories, should be carefully examined at the time of need assessment/ procurement planning. This is a crucial stage of decision-making in procurement planning for a better outcome and for VfM considerations.

2.10.4Eligibility for Participation in Tender

Determine and declare in documents any limitation on the participation of bidders as per the Government's procurement policy regarding preference for certain sections of industry, if any.

The procuring entity shall not establish any requirement aimed at LIMITING the participation of bidders in the procurement process that discriminates against or amongst bidders, or against any category thereof — except to lay down a reasonable and justifiable eligibility or pre-qualification criteria for the bidders.

2.10.5Type of Contract, System of Tendering and Mode of Procurement

a) Type of Contract [W only]: Decide upon the type of contract suitable to the procurement requirement — Lump sum; Item Rate; Percentage Rate; Piece Work; EPC or PPP.

b) Selection of a system of tendering: single/ two stage; single/ two bids; suitability for e-procurement or reverse auction.

c) Select the mode of procurement: open tenders, limited tenders, single tenders, and so on.

2.10.6Time Frame

Decisions on the TIMEFRAME for completing various stages of procurement — from the date of issuing the tender to the date of issuing the contract — which should be DECLARED in the pre-qualification/ bidder registration or tender documents. (Rule 144(ix), GFR 2017)

The procuring entity should endeavour to adhere to the time limit so decided, and RECORD REASONS for any modification of such limits.

2.10.7Availability of Land and Statutory ClearancesW

  1. It is DESIRABLE to have 100% of the required land in possession before award of contract; however, it may not always be possible to have the entire land due to prevailing circumstances. Also, it may not be prudent to put the entire process of award of contract ON HOLD for want of the remaining portion of land, which in the assessment of the public authority or the project executing authority could possibly be acquired in a targeted manner after award of the contract, without affecting progress.
  2. Minimum necessary encumbrance-free land should be available before award of contract. The minimum may be determined based on the circumstances of each case, or general guidelines issued by the concerned authorities. Only such land, non-availability of which will prevent essential components of work from execution, should be INSISTED UPON.
  3. Time taken in the grant of statutory and other clearances also contributes to the time and cost of public projects. These clearances are required to achieve specific objectives like concern for the environment, aviation safety, preservation of national heritage, conservation of forest and wildlife, etc. Public Authorities/ Project Executing Authorities should PLAN for obtaining all necessary clearances QUICKLY and CLOSELY MONITOR the progress.

2.10.8Architectural and Structural DrawingsW

Architectural and structural drawings ("fit for construction") are among the CORE REQUIREMENTS for projects. Finalisation of these drawings at the EARLIEST — preferably at the time of preparation of the cost estimate itself — can help to determine QUANTITIES of various items of the work.

ADVERSE CONSEQUENCES of not preparing these drawings before invitation of tenders may manifest in the form of delay in execution of the work and deviations in quantities of the items of work.

Hence, APPROVED architectural and structural drawings should be available before invitation of tenders.("Fit for construction", sometimes called "Good for construction", drawings means the architectural and structural drawings approved by the project executing authority as well as by the authority governing the extant rules/ laws, including byelaws, such as local authorities.)

2.10.9Annual Procurement Plans

WCNC — the mandatory 30-day rule:GFR 2017 [Rule 144(x)] mandates that all ministries/ departments shall prepare an annual procurement plan within 30 (thirty) days of budget approval, before the commencement of the year, and the same should also be placed on their website.

[All four] — publication: The procuring entity shall/ may publish information regarding the planned procurement activities for the forthcoming year or years on:

  • G the Government e-Marketplace (GeM), GeM-Central Public Procurement portal, and the website/ e-procurement portal used by the procuring entity;
  • WNCCPPP and website/ e-procurement portal used by the procuring entity;
  • C the central public procurement portal and website/ e-Procurement portal used by the procuring entity

— with a caveat that such publication shall not be construed as an initiation of a procurement process, and shall not cast any obligation on the Procuring Entity to issue the tender document or confer any right on prospective bidders. (Rule 144(x), GFR 2017)

[All four] — the integrated plan: An integrated annual procurement plan should be prepared for goods, works and services for the ensuing financial year, based on:

  • The latest cost estimates, and
  • a realistic time Schedule for procurement activities and contract implementation

— and thus Schedule and stagger the procurements over the year, with a view to:

  • Ensure an even load on the Procuring Entity and the market, and
  • Co-ordinate matching procurements of Goods, Works, and Services for a project.

2.10.10Mitigating Cartel Formation

a) Inadequate competition due to an inadequate number of suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers in the list/ panel of registered vendors — may empower bidders to conspire against the Procuring Entity:

  • i) new firms May be encouraged to register themselves for the subject goods/ category/ services.
  • ii) Review the description of requirement:
  • G A review of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (especially TAILOR-MADE specifications) may be done to examine why a commercially available alternative cannot be used instead, or at least review its features so that more suppliers become eligible. Consider using SUBSTITUTE ITEMS or new developments in the market.
  • W Various items in the BOQ May be reviewed (using packaging/ slicing) so that more contractors become eligible. Insisting on costly machinery to be used May reduce competition and encourage cartel formation.
  • CNC Various services and activities in the Services and Activities Schedule may be reviewed so that more consultants/ service providers become eligible. Insisting on costly machinery to be used may reduce competition and encourage cartel formation.

b) Pre-bid conferences: Processes — e.g., PRE-BID CONFERENCES, where a considerable number of competing bidders come together on a platform — May facilitate such cartel formation. This may be AVOIDED as far as feasible, or be held only VIRTUALLY.

HOWEVER, a pre-bid conference May be advantageous in the case of:

G adds:Pre-bid conferences must be done wherever necessary.

c) Varying quantity and conditions: Tendering similar quantities/ works/ services with similar conditions, year on year, provides a stable conspiring environment for the bidders to come to an agreement for quoting prices and quantities. Therefore, the following action can be considered to vary quantity and conditions to make it difficult for cartels:

  • i) change the mode of procurement — OTE instead of LTE, or GTE instead of OTE; or bypass the pre-qualification stage and vice versa.
  • ii) change the quantity/ packaging:
  • G Change the quantity to be procured by PACKAGING/ SLICING the tendered quantity, or by clubbing more than one similar item in a tender (or vice versa).
  • W Change the packaging/ slicing by clubbing/ slicing WORKS in a tender.
  • CNC Change the packaging/ slicing by clubbing/ slicing SERVICES/ ACTIVITIES in a tender.
  • iii) change the pre-qualification criteria, especially in the case of slicing/ packaging, to broaden the target bidders.

2.10.11Strategising Large ProcurementGW

Large procurements warrant strategies to achieve competition and VfM. Large procurements require the application of mind during need assessment, cost estimation and procurement planning — where the blind application of Rules May not bring VfM.

Formal market research can reveal important parameters of the market that can be used for designing optimal procurement strategies — alternative methods of procurement, slicing/ packaging, mitigating cartels, optimising various features/ specifications of the item/ work — to maximise VfM and competition.

Some of the market parameters to look for are:

#ParameterG — GoodsW — Works
aCapacity vs demandTotal Production Capacities and total demand for the ITEM in the country and abroad. Is there an unbalanced demand/ supply?Total Production Capacities and total demand for similar works in the region or the State. Is there an unbalanced demand/ supply?
bVolumes of procurementHow SIGNIFICANT is our requirement vis-à-vis the market? Would CLUBBING DEMANDS increase BARGAINING POWER? Can we COLLABORATE with another large public-sector buyer? Has there been a recent major procurement that may CONSTRICT available capacity?(same)
cLevel of competitionLocation-wise number of SUPPLIERS, co-ordination/ cartelisation among them, major suppliers/ buyers CONTROLLING the marketLocation-wise number of CONTRACTORS, co-ordination/ cartelisation among them, major contractors/ buyers controlling the market
dBottlenecksSUPPLY CHAIN constraints, RAW MATERIALS bottlenecks, LOGISTICS, GEOPOLITICAL issuesMANPOWER constraints, SKILLS/ MANPOWER bottlenecks, LOGISTICS, GEOPOLITICAL issues
eSpecifications/ statutory constraintsSpecifications and variations: Patents, manufacturing processes, pollution, and other LEGAL RESTRICTIONS, etc. Should we tinker with specifications to get VfM?Statutory Constraints: Patents, construction processes, pollution, and other legal restrictions, etc. Should we tinker with specifications to get VfM?
fPricing Trends [G only]seasonality of prices — is it the appropriate time to enter the market?

2.11Procurement Planning — Risks and MitigationsGNC

RISKMITIGATION
Packaging, bundling, and slicing of requirements are done to avoid open competition or reduce competition. Or it is TOO LARGE to make it difficult for MSEs to participate. Possible CLUBBING/ COLLABORATION among different units having the same NEEDS has not been explored.Lay down a clear policy for packaging and bundling of requirements. In LARGE PACKAGES, the affordability of EMD and the resultant restriction on competition may be kept in view, and bidders May be allowed to bid for slices of the package by depositing proportional EMD.

Appendix to Chapter 2 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter titleG:Need Assessment, Formulation of Specifications and Procurement Planning · W:Need Assessment and Procurement Planning · C/NC:Need assessment and Procurement Planning
2Number of sectionsG: 5 · W: 9 (the most) · C: 7 · NC: 4 (the fewest)
3Initiating documentG: Indent/ purchase Requisition (Annexure 5) · W: Requisition + Perspective Plan · C/NC: Procurement Proposal (Concept Paper) (Annexure 3)
4Description-of-requirement instrumentG: Technical Specifications (TS) · W: PPR → DPR/PE → Detailed Designs & Detailed Estimates · C: Terms of Reference (ToR) · NC: Services and Activities Schedule
5Perspective Plan with annual reviewW only
6"Matters decided during need assessment" (method of satisfying need, HaaS/ SaaS, units of quantity, wagon-load rounding)G only
7Detailed cost-estimation methods (last purchase price, costing analysis, MRP, market survey, budgetary quotes with 3-quote/ 10–21 day/ two 5-day extension rule, price-index websites)G only
8Cost categoriesC:TWO (fee/ remuneration + reimbursable) · NC:THREE (Remuneration + Reimbursable + Administrative & Miscellaneous), with profit, taxes and duties added on top
9Minimum wage rate referenced in staff costingNC only
10Green procurement — Ecomark Rules 2023, BEE star ratings table, EPD/ISO 14025G only
11Samples and demonstration of equipment — three-copy reference-sample procedureG only
12Essential Technical Particulars (12-item list)G only
13PPR / Rough Cost Estimate with 14-item content listW only
14In-Principle Approval as a distinct sanction stepW only (C/NC have an in-principle approval on the Concept Paper, but not the works sequence)
15DPR/PE with 15-item content list; EIA; Social Impact Assessment & LARR Act 2013W only
1650-metre "reach" ground investigation rule; debarment of DPR consultantsW only
17A/A and E/S; sanction order contents; Rule 16 DFPR 2024W only
18Technical Sanction; "fit for construction" drawings; Schedule of Rates enlargementW only
19Appropriation of funds as a distinct stepW only
20Reference documents (Plinth Area Rates, Schedule of Rates, Analysis of Rates, Specifications)W only
21Rs 60 lakh repair-works exemption from DPR/PEW only
22Activity-based vs position-based ToR; four report types (Inception/ Progress/ Interim/ Final); 6-week inception; 15-day interim review; "consultants alone are responsible for their findings"C only
23Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC)C only
24Performance Standards & QA, KPIs, SLA, Method StatementNC only
25Labour/ Personnel Schedule; relievers and leave reserve not separately payableNC only
26Critical Material Schedule; Critical Equipment Schedule; input- vs output-admeasurementNC only
27Statutory obligations list (ESI, EPF, labour Licence, PAN, Private Security Agency licence)NC only
28"Borrow the Works SoR + percentage above/below" simplification for large activity schedulesNC only
2910 working days for critical review of indentG only
30Access to MSEs vs access to smaller contractors (packaging exception)G/C/NC: MSEs · W: smaller contractors
31Type of contract decision in planning (Lump sum/ Item Rate/ Percentage Rate/ Piece Work/ EPC/ PPP)W only
32Land availability & statutory clearances in procurement planningW only
33Annual Procurement Plan — express 30-day-from-budget-approval mandateW, C, NC (G states the publication obligation under Rule 144(x) but not the 30-day deadline)
34Strategising Large Procurement (market research parameters)G + W only
35"Pricing Trends / seasonality" as a market parameterG only
36Procurement Planning — Risks and Mitigations tableG + NC only
37Need Assessment — Risks and Mitigations tableG, C, NC — absent from W
38Subjectivity-of-samples risk row in the risk tableG only

end of Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Participation of Bidders, Vendor Relationship Management and Governance Issues

Merging: Goods Ch. 3 (Supplier Relationship Management) · Works Ch. 8 (Registration/ Enlistment of Contractors and Governance Issues) · Consultancy Ch. 3 (Participation of Bidders and Governance Issues) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 3 (Participation of Bidders and Governance Issues)

Structural Warning for Students

This block of subject matter is CHAPTER 3 in the Goods, Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals — but CHAPTER 8 in the Works Manual.

The Works Manual moves the entire vendor-governance block to the END of the Manual (after Contract Execution), whereas the other three place it before Bidding Design. The content is substantially the same; only the location differs. Any exam question citing "para 8.2" of Works corresponds to "para 3.2" of Goods.

Concordance for Chapter 3

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
3.1Supplier/ Contractor Relationship Management3.18.1
3.2Eligibility Criteria for Participation in Tender Process3.13.1
3.3Legal Status of Bidders3.23.2
3.4Governance Issues — Canons of Financial Propriety; RTI3.3.1, 3.3.23.3.1, 3.3.2
3.5Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP)3.28.23.3.33.3.3
3.6Integrity Pact (IP)3.38.33.43.4
3.7Grievances and its Redressal3.48.43.53.5
3.8Conduct of Public Servants — Risks and Mitigations3.58.53.63.6
3.9Development of New Sources and Registration/ Empanelment/ Enlistment/ Pre-qualification3.68.63.73.7
3.10Debarment3.78.73.83.8
3.11Enlistment of Indian Agents3.88.83.93.9

3.1Supplier/ Contractor Relationship ManagementGW

Supplier Relationship Management G / Contractor Relationship Management W comprises the following three functions:

  1. Ensuring COMPLIANCE of suppliers/ contractors to the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement and Integrity Pact (CIPP), if stipulated in Tender/ Bid Documents;
  2. REMOVAL from the list of registered/ enlisted suppliers/ contractors, and DEBARMENT of firms;
  3. Development of new sources and registration/ enlistment of suppliers/ contractors.

3.2Eligibility Criteria for Participation in Tender ProcessCNC

1.Normally, participation in the Tender Process should be open to all bidders. However, the procuring entity should lay down 'Eligibility' criteria, based on the requirement of the procurement and Government Policies.

Timing rule: The bidder should meet the eligibility criteria as of the date of his bid submission — AND should continue to meet these till the award of the contract. Otherwise, his bid would be rejected as non-responsive and would not be evaluated for award of contract.

The bidder shall be required to DECLARE FULFILMENT of Eligibility Criteria in his bid document.

Some of the eligibility criteria relate to the following issues (for details refer to the relevant Model Tender Documents):

a) Legal status of the bidder: a natural person, or a private entity, or a public entity (State-owned enterprise or institution), or a Joint Venture/ Consortium (an association of several persons, firms, or companies — hereinafter JV/C).

b) Participation of demerged entities [NC only]: (by virtue of a corporate restructuring exercise etc.) Tender documents must clearly mention if — and under what conditions — the demerged entity will be permitted to use the credentials of the original/ parent entity (for the initial five years from the incorporation of the demerged entities) to satisfy the eligibility criteria, or not, in the specific tender.

c) Requirement of various REGISTRATIONS/ LICENCES from various statutory authorities required for the subject matter of procurement: GSTIN, PAN, EPF, ESI, labour, Private Security Agencies (PASARA), etc.

d) Submission of requisite BID SECURITY (or Bid Security Declaration, if allowed) or proof of exemption therefrom.

E) free from financial insolvency, debarment or convictions.

F) a consistent history of litigation or arbitration by the bidder May result in disqualification.

g) Free from 'conflict of interest' with other bidders, which may affect fair competition.

h) Restriction on participation as per Government Policies:

  • i) For Class-II Local Suppliers and Non-Local bidders as per the Make-in-India policy;
  • ii) Any bidder from a country sharing a land border with India (but not in development partnership with India), or any bidder (INCLUDING INDIAN) with a Specified Transfer of Technology (ToT) arrangement with such a country, shall be eligible subject to certain conditions.

3.3Legal Status of BiddersCNC

3.3.1Individual Persons

1. Individual consultants C / Individual service providers NC:

Individual consultants/ service providers are recruited for similar activities as Consultancy firms/ Service providing firms when a full team is not considered necessary.

They may be:

  • independent experts not permanently associated with any particular firm, or
  • employees of a firm recruited on an INDIVIDUAL basis, or
  • employees of an agency, institution, or university.

They are normally recruited for:

They are not normally recruited for PROJECT PREPARATION, unless the proposed project is simple and, generally, a repeat of an already established and successful project.

As with firms, individual consultants/ service providers are classed as either INTERNATIONAL or NATIONAL, depending on their level of EXPERTISE and their international experience and exposure.

2. Retired Government Servants:

C — the GFR bar:Rule 177 of GFR, 2017 says that consulting services do not include direct engagement of retired Government servants.They should not be engaged as consultants against regular vacant posts under this rule. Such engagements should be handled as a PERSONNEL MATTER.

CNC — the permitted mode: As Consultants/ Service Providers, retired Government servants CAN be hired/ engaged only:

  • for a SPECIFIC TASK, and
  • for a specific duration.

They should be assigned clear output-related goals.

Remuneration:

Type of engagementRemuneration
Full-TIME basis (when they are not allowed to concurrently do any other assignment), on a monthly basisLast pay drawn minus pension, as per extant DOPT guidelines
PART-TIME, NON-EXCLUSIVE engagementsThe Procuring Ministry/ Department may fix remuneration on a per day/ month or lump-sum basis

3.3.2Private and Public Entities

1. Consultancy Firms C / Service Providing Firms NC: The MAIN SOURCE of consultants/ service providers is firms of diverse specialisations that provide consultancy/ non-consultancy services. Such firms are normally classified as either:

  • INTERNATIONAL — firms that have international experience and are capable of undertaking work at international level at international rates; or
  • NATIONAL — firms that may not have international exposure and normally undertake assignments only within that country, usually at significantly lower rates.

2. Non-Governmental Organisations (NGO): There may be a DISTINCT ADVANTAGE in the use of NGOs in Projects which emphasise experience in community participation and in-depth local knowledge — for example, Projects related to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) or Government Social Initiatives like 'Swachh Bharat Abhiyan', etc.

3. Specialised Agencies and Institutions: Specialised agencies or institutions — including Government/ Semi-Government agencies, universities, research and professional institutions — may also from time to time be recruited to provide Consultancy/ Non-consultancy services.

These services may be provided by INDIVIDUALS (as discussed above) or by TEAMS. Nonetheless, there are at times DISTINCT ADVANTAGES to using such agencies. Experts and teams from such agencies and institutions may undertake a variety of roles across the whole field of possible services — these may range from PROJECT PREPARATION through PROJECT SUPERVISION and POLICY ADVICE to project benefit monitoring and evaluation.

3.3.3Association of Several Bidders

1.Sub-contracting

A bidder who is capable of being selected for award of contract on his own credentials may propose to sub-contract a PART of the contract for SPECIALISED ITEMS of services, as a financial or technical strategy.

  • The names and details of the sub-contracts are to be clearly stated in the bid submitted by the Bidder.
  • Provided further that such sub-contractor should not circumvent the eligibility criteria.
  • Qualifications of these sub-contractors shall not be considered in evaluation of qualification criteria for the bid.
  • DESPITE any approval granted by the Procuring Entity for such arrangements, the bidder/ contractor shall be solely and directly responsible for executing sub-contracted portions of the contract.
  • The total VALUE of the sub-contracting portion of services must not exceed the per cent of the contract price as specified in the Tender Document/ Contract — if not so specified, 25 (twenty-five) per cent.
  • Sub-contracting by the contractor without the approval of the Procuring Entity shall be a breach of contract.

2.Consortium of Consultants C / Consortium of Service ProvidersNC

a) Why consortia form: In large and complex assignments, consultants/ service providers may associate with each other to form a consortium:

  • to COMPLEMENT their respective areas of expertise,
  • to INCREASE the technical responsiveness of their proposal, and
  • to make larger pools of experts available, or for other reasons.

Such an association may be for the LONG TERM (independent of any particular assignment) or for a SPECIFIC assignment.

b) Legal character: Such associations are called Consortium or Joint Ventures (JVs) for the purpose of this Manual.

  • In case of consortium or JVs, all members shall sign the contract and shall be jointly and severally liable for the entire assignment.
  • HOWEVER, the Procuring Entity only deals with the lead member of consortiums/ JVs for all purposes.
  • After the short list is finalised and the Request for Proposal (RfP) is issued, any association in the form of a consortium/ JV or sub-consultancy among the short-listed firms shall be PERMISSIBLE in accordance with provisions stated in the RfP. Under such circumstance, one of the shortlisted consultants must become the lead member of the consortium/ JV.

c) What the bid document must specify: Bid documents should clearly specify whether consortiums/ JVs are ALLOWED to bid — in the case of complex and large assignments, say above certain values (say Rs. 5 crore).

  • Maximum number of partners in a consortium/ JV shall be LIMITED (say — three).
  • In case consortiums/ JVs are permitted to bid, it should be clarified:
  • WHAT qualifications are to be met COLLECTIVELY (clubbed together) by the consortium/ JV partners — say, experience of similar consultancy/ non-consultancy service; and
  • WHAT each partner has to meet individually and separately — say, financial capacity.
  • In the case of each member meeting credentials individually, it should also be specified that:

d) Ensuring the consortium actually performs: If consortiums/ JVs are allowed, measures should be taken to ensure that all the consortium/ JV partners are present and deliver services all through the contract period.

  • An IMPLEMENTATION BOARD with participation of all consortium/ JV partners may be provided for, wherein the project Manager from the Procuring Entity shall also be ALLOWED AUDIENCE when required.
  • MEETING of consortium/ JV partners with the project executing authority for quarterly progress review may be made a criterion linked to achievement of key dates or even payment.

3.4Governance Issues in Procurement — Financial Propriety and RTICNC

3.4.1Standards (Canons) of Financial Propriety

Public Procurement, like any other expenditure in Government, must conform to the Standards (also called Canons) of Financial Propriety — Rule 21 of GFR, 2017.

3.4.2Right to Information and Proactive Information Disclosures

Section 4(1)(b) of the RTI Act lays down the information to be disclosed by public authorities on a suo-motu or proactive basis, and Section 4(2) and Section 4(3) prescribe the method of its dissemination — to enhance transparency and to reduce the need for filing individual RTI applications.

The DoPT has issued "Guidelines on suo motu disclosure under Section 4 of the RTI Act" vide OM No. 1/6/2011-IR dated April 15, 2013. The relevant guideline relating to procurement:

3.5Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP)

(Rule 175 of GFR 2017)

3.5.1Introduction

Public Procurement is perceived to be prone to corruption and ethical risks. To mitigate this, the officials of Procuring Entities involved in procurement AND the bidders/ suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers must abide by the following Code of Integrity for Public Procurement (CIPP).

Declarations by officials: All Procuring officials May be asked to sign declarations to this effect PERIODICALLY and in various procurement decisions.

  • [G, C, NC] — including Need Assessment
  • Wincluding Preparation of Estimates

Declarations by bidders: The bidders/ suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers should be asked to sign a declaration about abiding by the CIPPW adds: including sub-contractors engaged by themin registration/ enlistment applications AND in tender/ bid documents, with a WARNING that, in case of any transgression of this code:

  • Git would be liable for punitive actions as detailed below;
  • Wits name is not only liable to be removed from the list of enlisted contractors, but it would be liable for other punitive actions such as cancellation of contracts, debarment or action in Competition Commission of India, and so on;
  • CNCits name is not only liable to be removed from the list of registered suppliers/ contractors/ service providers, but it would be liable for other punitive actions as detailed below.

3.5.2The Code — Seven Prohibited Practices

Procuring authorities, as well as bidders, suppliers, contractors, consultants and service providers, should observe the highest standard of ethics and should not INDULGE in the following PROHIBITED PRACTICES — either directly or indirectly — at any stage during the procurement process or the execution of resultant contracts:

#PracticeDefinition
i"CORRUPT practice"making offers, solicitation or acceptance of a BRIBE, REWARDS or GIFTS or any material benefit, either directly or indirectly, in exchange for an unfair advantage in the procurement process, or to otherwise INFLUENCE the procurement process or contract execution
ii"FRAUDULENT practice"any OMISSION or MISREPRESENTATION that may mislead or attempt to mislead so that financial or other benefits may be obtained, or an obligation avoided. This includes making FALSE DECLARATIONS or providing FALSE INFORMATION for participation in a procurement process, or to secure a contract, or in the execution of the contract
iii"ANTI-COMPETITIVE practice"any collusion, bid rigging or anti-competitive arrangement, or any other practice coming under the purview of the Competition Act, 2002, between two or more bidders — with or without the knowledge of the procuring entity — that may IMPAIR the transparency, fairness and progress of the procurement process, or to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels
iv"COERCIVE practice"any COERCION or any threat to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or its property, to influence the procurement process or affect the execution of a contract
v"Conflict of interest" (coi)any PERSONAL, FINANCIAL, or BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP between the BIDDER and any personnel of the Procuring Entity who are directly or indirectly related to the procurement or execution process of the contract, which can affect the decision of the procuring entity directly or indirectly
vi"Undue advantage"Improper use of information obtained by the bidder from the procuring entity with an intent to gain an unfair advantage in the procurement process or for personal gain. This also includes if the bidder (or his allied firm) provided services for the need assessment/ procurement planning of the tender process in which he is participating
vii"OBSTRUCTIVE practice"MATERIALLY IMPEDE the procuring entity's INVESTIGATION of a procurement process — either by deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering; or by concealing evidence material to the investigation; or by making false statements; or by THREATENING, HARASSING or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to such investigation or from pursuing the investigation; or by impeding the Procuring Entity's rights of audit or access to information

3.5.3Obligations for Proactive Disclosures

Whether asked or not, in a tender document:

a) Declaration of Conflict of Interest: Procuring authorities, as well as bidders, suppliers, contractors, consultants and service providers, should suo-moto proactively declare any conflict of interest as per item (v) above — PRE-EXISTING or as soon as these arise at any STAGE in any procurement process or execution of a contract.

b) Declaration of previous transgressions: Bidders must DECLARE any PREVIOUS TRANSGRESSIONS with respect to the prohibited practices above with any entity in any country during the last three years, or of being debarred by any other Procuring Entity.

c) Declaration of commissions/ fees to agents: The bidder/ contractor must disclose any commissions or fees that may have been paid or are to be paid to AGENTS, REPRESENTATIVES, or COMMISSION AGENTS concerning the selection process or execution of the Contract. The information disclosed must INCLUDE:

  • the name and address of the agent, representative or commission agent,
  • the AMOUNT and CURRENCY, and
  • the purpose of the commission or fee

— in a format given in the tender document.

3.5.4Professionalism and Unfair Competitive Advantage [C ONLY]

A) professionalism: The consultant is required to provide professional, objective, and impartial advice — at all times holding the Procuring Entity's interest paramount above his/ its own corporate interests and above any consideration for future work — strictly avoiding any conflicts of interest.

b) Unfair Competitive Advantage: Fairness and transparency in the selection process require that the consultants or their affiliates competing for a specific assignment do not derive an unfair competitive advantage from having provided consultancy services related to the assignment in question.

Such unfair competitive advantage is BEST AVOIDED by full TRANSPARENCY and by providing equal opportunity, so that all firms or individuals interested or involved have full INFORMATION about a service assignment and its NATURE, SCOPE, and background information. To that end, the request for proposals and all information should be made available to all short-listed consultants simultaneously.

c) The three disqualification rules: Therefore, without limitation on the generality of the foregoing, and unless stated otherwise in the RfP document, Consultants (including their experts and sub-consultants) or their allied firm shall not be eligible for any assignment that:

  • i) by its NATURE, may be in conflict with another assignment of the consultant or its allied firm — for the same or for another procuring Entity;
  • ii) a consultant or any of its affiliates/ allied firms that has been engaged by the client to provide goods, works, or non-consultancy services for a project, shall be disqualified from providing consultancy service resulting from or directly related to those goods, works, or non-consultancy services;
  • iii) conversely, a consultant or any of its affiliates/ allied firms hired to provide consultancy services for the preparation or implementation of a project shall be disqualified from subsequently providing goods or works or non-consultancy services resulting from or directly related to the consultancy services for such preparation or implementation.

3.5.5Punitive Provisions

(Rule 175(2) of GFR, 2017)

Without prejudice to — and in addition to — the rights of the procuring entity to other penal provisions as per the tender/ bid documents or contract, IF the procuring entity CONCLUDES that a (prospective) bidder/ supplier/ contractor/ consultant/ service provider, directly or through an agent, has violated this code of integrity in COMPETING FOR the contract or in EXECUTING a contract, the procuring entity May take appropriate measures including one or more of the following:

1.If his bids are UNDER CONSIDERATION in any procurement

  1. Forfeiture and/ or encashment of Bid Security;
  2. Calling off of any pre-contract negotiations; And
  3. REJECTION and EXCLUSION of the bidder from the procurement process.

2.If a contract has ALREADY BEEN AWARDED

  1. CANCELLATION of the relevant contract and recovery of compensation for loss incurred by the procuring entity;
  2. FORFEITURE and/ or ENCASHMENT of any other security or bond relating to the procurement;
  3. Recovery of payments — including advance payments, if any — made by the procuring entity, along with interest thereon at the prevailing rate.

3.Provisions IN ADDITION to the above

  1. REMOVAL from the list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors and/ or DEBARMENT of the bidder from participation in FUTURE PROCUREMENTS of the procuring entity:
  2. [G, W, NC] — for a period not less than six months;
  3. Cfor a period not exceeding two years.
  1. In case of ANTI-COMPETITIVE PRACTICES, information for further processing May be filed with the Competition Commission of India:
  2. [G, W, NC] — under the signature of a joint Secretary level officer;
  3. Cby the Competent Authority.
  4. Initiation of suitable disciplinary or criminal proceedings against any individual or staff found responsible.

3.6Integrity Pact (IP)

1. What it is: The pre-bid Integrity Pact is a tool to help governments, businesses, and civil society fight corruption in public contracting.

It binds both buyers and sellers to ethical conduct and transparency in all activities — from:

This removes the insecurity of bidders that, while they themselves May abjure bribery, their competitors May resort to it and win contracts by unfair means.

2. Who must incorporate it, and at what threshold: Ministries/ Departments and their attached/ subordinate offices (including autonomous bodies) should incorporate the Integrity Pact (OM No. 14(12)/2008-E-II(A) dated 19th July 2011) in the procurements/ contracts:

  • of the NATURE and of a THRESHOLD VALUE,
  • decided by the ministries/ departments,
  • with the approval of the minister in charge.

Format and customisation:

  • [G, W] — The procuring entities May make suitable changes in the format, wherever required, based on the specific situation in which the pact is to be used. The pact May also be updated, wherever necessary, to incorporate latest procurement instructions.
  • [C, NC] — Ministries/ Departments including their attached/ subordinate offices AND CPSEs may use this format of Integrity Pact, with the suitable changes specific to the situations in which the pact is to be used.

3. Extension to PSBs, PSICs and FIs: CVC issued a revised standard operating procedure (CVC Circular No. 04/06/23 — 015/VGL/091 dated 14.06.2023) and has further stated (CVC Circular No. 06/05/21 — 015/VGL/091 dated 03.06.2021) That, in view of the increasing procurement activities of public sector banks (PSBs), public sector insurance companies (PSICs) and public sector financial institutions (FIs), they shall also adopt and implement the suggested format of Integrity Pact.

3.7Grievances and its Redressal

1. Procuring Entities shall provide a suitable clause in their tender documents for the redressal of grievances of bidders. The following is a suggested mechanism of redressal.

2. Who may apply, and within what time:

Any supplier, contractor, or consultant that claims to have suffered or is likely to suffer loss or injury as a result of a decision/ action/ omission of the Procurement Entity May make an application for its review:

  • Within a period of five (5) days from its date,
  • to the DESIGNATED OFFICER named in the tender documents in this regard (or the head of the Procuring Entity, if not so specified),
  • specifying the ground(s) and the relevant clauses of the tender documents.

De-briefing: Unsuccessful bidders May seek de-briefing regarding the rejection of their bid — in writing or electronically — within five (5) days of the declaration of techno-commercial or financial evaluation results.

3. Only a directly affected bidder can represent:

  1. Only a bidder who has participated in the concerned procurement process — i.e., pre-qualification, bidder registration or bidding, as the case may be — can make such representation.
  2. In case the PRE-QUALIFICATION bid has been evaluated before the bidding of Technical/ financial bids, an application for review in relation to the technical/ financial bid may be filed only by a bidder who has qualified in the pre-qualification bid.
  3. In case the TECHNICAL bid has been evaluated before the opening of the FINANCIAL bid, an application for review in relation to the financial bid may be filed only by a bidder whose technical bid is found to be acceptable.

D) decisions not subject to review: The following decisions of the procuring entity, in accordance with the provisions of internal guidelines, shall not be subject to review:

  • i) determination of the need for procurement;
  • ii) selection of the mode of procurement or tendering system;
  • iii) choice of selection procedure;
  • iv) complaints against specifications — except under the premise that they are either VAGUE or too specific to limit competition, which may be permissible;
  • v) provisions limiting the participation of bidders in the procurement process in terms of government policies;
  • vi) provisions regarding purchase preferences to specific categories of bidders in terms of policies of the Government;
  • vii) the decision to enter into negotiations with the L1 bidder;
  • viii) cancellation of the procurement process — except where it is intended to SUBSEQUENTLY RE-TENDER the same requirements;
  • ix) issues related to ambiguity in contract terms shall not be taken up after a contract has been signed; all such issues should be HIGHLIGHTED before the vendor/ contractor consummates the contract.

4. This grievance redressal is BESIDE the avenue of complaints to the vigilance Department of the procuring organisation.

5. If received DURING the processing of the tender: The designated officer shall FORWARD the application to the tC/ convener of TC for its examination on merits and action as considered necessary.

  • An interim reply May be sent that the application will be kept in view in the tender evaluation, and a final response shall be given only after the declaration of the award of the contract.
  • The Tender Committee shall place the application on record — including its analysis and action taken thereon — in the TC minutes/ report to the Competent Authority.
  • After the award, the TC convener shall respond to the aggrieved party.

6. If received after the declaration of the award of the contract: The designated officer shall FORWARD the application to the COMPETENT AUTHORITY of the tender for his examination on merits and action as considered necessary.

If the Competent Authority finds the complaint to have substance, appropriate and feasible remedial measures should be initiated.

7. If the grievance is resolved, or if the grievance is found to be unwarranted, the aggrieved party shall be informed by the TC convener of the final decision — without disclosing confidential details.

8. Remedial actions available: Based on such representation, if the Competent Authority is satisfied that there has been a contravention of procurement guidelines in the case, he May initiate such action as, in his opinion, is necessary to rectify the contravention — INCLUDING:

  1. If the grievance is due to inadequacy of procurement guidelines or a lack of understanding of the staff — remedial action to address such lacunae May be initiated without repercussions to the concerned staff;
  2. Annulment or reconsideration of the procurement proceedings;
  3. Cancellation of the resultant procurement contract, if legally feasible;
  4. In case any individual staff is found responsible — suitable disciplinary proceedings should be initiated against such staff under the conduct Rules;
  5. In case the complicity of any bidder is proved:
  6. i) REMOVAL of the concerned firm from the list of registered firms;
  7. ii) DEBARMENT of the bidders, if warranted;
  8. iii) reporting the matter to the Competition Commission of India (CCI) in case of anti-competitive actions by the bidder;
  9. Handing over the case to the CVO if there are aspects that require INVESTIGATIONS.

3.8Conduct of Public Servants in Public Procurement — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1HOSPITALITY: Hospitality — including facilitation of travel, lodging, boarding and ENTERTAINMENT during official or unofficial programs — from suppliers/ contractors may tend to cross the limits of ethical/ occasional/ routine/ modest/ normal business practice. Officials sent to the firm's premises for INSPECTIONS/ MEETINGS may mistakenly presume entitlement to hospitality from the firm, even if other arrangements are available at the location.Hospitality must never be solicited, directly or indirectly. The frequency, scale and number of officials availing hospitality should not be allowed to identify the recipient in a public way with any particular contractor, supplier or service provider, or raise doubts about its neutrality. It should not involve significant travel, overnight accommodation, or trips abroad. Particular care should be taken in relation to offers of hospitality from firms (say, participating in current or imminent tenders or their execution) who stand to derive a personal or commercial benefit from their relationship with the recipient.
2GIFTS: Gifts from suppliers/ contractors may tend to cross the limits of ethical/ occasional/ routine/ modest/ normal business practice — especially during the festive season. Since the VALUE of the gift May not be known to the recipient, it may cause an inadvertent violation of conduct Rules.Gifts must never be solicited, directly or indirectly. An official should not accept and retain gifts that are more valuable than the limit as laid down in the conduct Rules. Cash, gift cheques or any vouchers that May be exchanged for cash May not be accepted, regardless of the amount. Particular care should be taken in relation to gifts from firms (say, participating in current or imminent tenders or their execution) who stand to derive a personal or commercial benefit from their relationship with the recipient. Any gift received inadvertently in violation of the above must immediately either be returned, or else reported and deposited in toshakhana/ treasury.
3Private purchases from official suppliers: Procuring Officials may mistakenly consider it innocuous to seek discounts in private procurements from suppliers/ contractors having OFFICIAL DEALINGS or its ALLIED FIRMS — G adds: especially from rate Contract holders.Officials involved in Public Procurement must never indulge in any non-official pecuniary transaction with the contractors, suppliers, or service providers with whom they have official dealings — including seeking or accepting special facilities or discounts on private purchases (G adds: particularly the same items that are being ordered officially on rate contracts).
4sponsorship of events: Procuring officials May mistakenly consider it innocuous to seek financial favours — donations, advertisements for souvenirs, and contributions in cash or kind — in relation to sponsoring cultural, social, charitable, religious, or sporting events, in the false belief that, since they are personally not benefitted, it would not be a violation of CIPP.Officials involved in Public Procurement must never indulge in any non-official pecuniary transaction with the contractors, suppliers, or service providers with whom they have official dealings — including soliciting of sponsorship for unofficial and private cultural, social, sporting, religious, charitable, or similar organisations or events.
5conflict of interest (coi): The CIPP defines COI as "…any personal, financial, or business relationship between the bidder and any personnel of the procuring entity who are directly or indirectly related to procurement or execution process of the contract, which can affect the decision of the procuring entity directly or indirectly……"There may be DILEMMAS regarding which officers are 'RELATED' to the tender or execution process, and even in respect of minor, routine transactions.(See detailed mitigation below the table.)

3.8.1Detailed Mitigation for Conflict of Interest

a) which OFFICERS are 'related' to the tender or execution process: This would depend on the ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE and the sensitivity of their role in procurement. It may cover KEY OFFICIALS (and any external consultants/ advisors) involved in:

  • making a RECOMMENDATION,
  • various APPROVALS, or
  • making a MAJOR DECISION

at any STAGE in procurement — i.e., during:

B) illustration — coi (actual, potential, or perceived) can arise if such officers (or his close family) have:

  • i) substantial business interests in the firm — e.g., shares more than 0.1% of market cap — or have taken a loan or other FINANCIAL OBLIGATION (say DISCOUNTS) from the firm or its personnel, etc.;
  • ii) business relationships with the firm — say, previously worked for the firm, or availed hospitality/ gifts beyond the limits laid down in the Code of Conduct of the organisation, etc.;
  • iii) FAMILIAL RELATIONSHIP with the personnel of the firm;
  • iv) close personal friendships or REGULAR (say, more than once in a quarter) social interactions — e.g., clubs, games, social associations — with the Firm's personnel, etc.

C) resolution of coi:

It shall be the responsibility of such officials to declare coi — to the extent he is aware of it in normal course — with reference to a procurement process, to the Competent Authority/ next higher officer.

The competent officer may EVALUATE:

  • the level of coi, and
  • the sensitivity of the function assigned to the official.

He may then EITHER DETERMINE:

  • I) that the coi is insignificant enough to influence the type of function performed by the official — and ask the officer to continue his function; Or
  • ii) that if the coi or the type of function is significant — nominate any alternative officer to perform the function (partly or fully) of this official in that procurement process.

3.9Development of New Sources and Registration/ Empanelment/ Enlistment/ Pre-qualification

(Rule 150 of GFR 2017)

3.9.1The Three (or Two) Concepts Distinguished

A. The Goods/ CS/ NC formulation — THREE conceptsGCNC

Normally, in open tendering, there should be no restriction of prior registration. Entities may provide for registration after selection in unrestricted open tendering.

Differences may be noted between REGISTRATION, EMPANELMENT and PRE-QUALIFICATION:

ConceptPurpose
A) registrationTo establish GENUINE IDENTIFICATION of the firm — e.g., for e-procurement portals, preferential procurement, and so on
b) empanelmentTo establish PRIMA-FACIE CAPABILITY for RESTRICTED TENDERING (not open tendering) — e.g., limited tendering panels (CNC add: also useful in special limited tenders). (It means maintaining a CLASSIFIED LIST of firms based on their EXPERIENCE, usually required in case of limited tenders.)
c) pre-qualificationwherever the nature of the requirement dictates competition only among prequalified bidders (without vitiation of prices offered by unqualified bidders), prequalification May be done with open tendering in the prequalification bidding stage
d) approved list/ multi-use listIf there are FREQUENT REQUIREMENTS of such nature, prequalification may be done through an OPEN PROCESS with an EXTENDED VALIDITY of the Shortlist of Qualified Bidders — called the List of Approved Sources in some organisations (e.g., Ministry of Railways) — for example, one year or longer. The use of a List of Qualified Bidders is also known as a MULTI-USE LIST in many countries — as distinct from empanelment (e.g., Limited Tender Panel, which does not undergo a formal open tender pre-qualification/ EoI process). In such long-term multi-use lists or approved lists, if any competent bidder applies for inclusion at any time, it should be examined as per the criteria of the original multi-use list.

However, since in common parlance "registration" is a word used interchangeably by most departments for all the above three concepts, this usage is being retained — though the distinction would be clear from the context of usage.

B. The Works formulation — TWO conceptsW

The terms 'ENLISTMENT' and 'REGISTRATION' may be differentiated as follows:

TermMeaning
A) registrationsimply registering the contractor, without any verification
b) enlistmentincluding the name of the contractor in the list after verification of credentials

3.9.2Registration — General Provisions

a) Who may register, and why GCNC: For goods and services not available on GeM, and for Works, the head of Ministry/ Department May periodically register suppliers of goods and services that the Department or Office SPECIFICALLY REQUIRES.

Ensuring an up-to-date and current list of registered, capable and competent suppliers/ consultants/ service providers facilitates efficiency, economy, and promotion of competition in public procurement — especially while floating a limited tender/ local purchase/ direct contracting.

For such tenders, it May be possible to skip bidder qualification, to avoid unnecessary repetition/ duplication of efforts — thereby saving time, especially in the case of emergency procurement.

Registration of the supplier/ consultant/ service provider should be done following a fair, transparent, and reasonable procedure and after giving due publicity.

Such registered suppliers should be on-boarded on GeM as and when the item or service gets listed on GeM (Amended vide DoE OM No. F.1/26/2018-PPD dated 02.04.2019).

The list of registered firms for the subject matter of procurement should be exhibited on the websites of the Procuring Entity/ their e-procurement portals.

b) Registration on e-procurement portals W: All the Ministries/ Departments shall register the prospective contractors on their e-procurement portal or in the CPPP (in case they do not have their own e-procurement portal) before submitting their bids.

The contractor May be an individual, sole proprietorship firm, partnership firm, limited liability partnership, private or public limited company.

For registration, the Ministries/ Departments/ CPSUs shall capture at least: a) Name of contractor; b) Address and Contact details; c) Permanent Account Number (PAN); d) Details of Digital Signature Certificate (DSC); and e) GSTIN.

Depending on the requirement of the respective procurement portal, the Ministries/ Departments can capture any other information as may be considered necessary.

c) Enlistment practice in works departments W: Some departments — such as the Central Public Works Department (CPWD) and Military Engineering Services (MES) — are enlisting the contractors after verification of their credentials.

  • Public authorities May empanel/ register contractors of those specific types of work which are required by them regularly.
  • PERFORMANCE of such empanelled contractors should be reviewed periodically.
  • The list of empanelled/ registered contractors shall be updated on a regular basis.
  • The category/ Class of contractors May be upgraded/ downgraded, or contractors May be de-listed, based on their performance.
  • Empanelment of contractors shall be done in a fair and equitable manner, preferably online, after giving due publicity.
  • The practice of inviting bids for works tenders only from empanelled contractors May be confined to tenders up to a certain threshold value (say Rs 20 crore), as decided by the project executing authorities.
  • It is expected that ministries/ departments will also develop their own enlistment process — as has been done by CPWD, Ministry of railways (MoR) and Ministry of road transport & highways (MoRTH) — to reduce the time required for verification of credentials of the contractors after opening of the bids.
  • The lists of such enlisted contractors can be used by any Ministry/ Department/ cpsu.

d) Sharing of information through CPPP W: The ministries/ departments will also share the information of registered and enlisted contractors with each other through the Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP).

  • They will also ensure that whenever a contractor is debarred, the information regarding the same is made available immediately to all the ministries/ departments through the CPPP.
  • The reasons for the debarment and the order of such debarment May also be displayed on the CPPP.
  • NIC/ MeitY shall make appropriate changes in the CPPP so that each contractor can be uniquely identified by PAN.
  • All the Ministries/ Departments May take cognizance of the information regarding debarment of contractors and use it as an input for the decision-making process as per their own procurement policies.

e) Entities with their own policies: Ministries/ Departments with a significant volume of procurements May follow their own policies and procedures for registration/ enlistment of vendors/ contractors, if they already exist. The policies and procedures described below are for the non-mandatory generic guidance of Ministries/ Departments that DO not have their own policies/ procedures.

The Ministry/ Department shall notify the authorities competent to deal with the applications and grant registrations/ enlistments, along with their jurisdictions.

The appellate authority shall be at least one level above the registering authority, or as designated by the Ministry/ Department.

f) Cross-use of lists and EMD exemption: All Ministries/ Departments May use such lists prepared by other ministries/ departments as and when necessary.

Registered suppliers/ firms are ordinarily exempted from furnishing earnest money deposit/ Bid Security with their tenders for items and monetary limits for which they are registered.

3.9.3Categories for Registration/ Enlistment

G — Categories for Registration of Suppliers of Goods

In case of procurement of goods, the Administrative Department shall register firms as suppliers of goods in different trade groups of goods in the following BROAD CATEGORIES: a) MANUFACTURERS who supply INDIGENOUS items; b) AGENTS/ DISTRIBUTORS of such manufacturers who desire to market their production only through their agents; c) FOREIGN MANUFACTURERS with/ without their accredited agent in India; d) stockists of imported spares or other specified items; e) suppliers of imported goods having REGULAR ARRANGEMENTS with foreign manufacturers.

W — Categories for Enlistment of Contractors

In case of procurement of works, the Administrative Department shall enlist firms as contractors in different types/ categories of works — civil, electrical, horticulture, nursery, etc.

The contractor may be a private, partnership, pvt ltd, corporate, PSU or a JOINT VENTURE company.

3.9.4Registration of ManufacturersG

One of the main prerequisites for registration as a manufacturer is that the firm should possess its own in-house testing facilities.

Before the manufacturer is included in the list of registered suppliers, the Procuring Entity shall verify the bona fides and standing of the firm. The procuring Entity May also seek assistance from the inspection wing of other inspecting agencies.

Iso-certified firms: In the case of firms that have an established quality maintenance system with ISO 9001-2000 certification (latest version) from authorised agencies, the Procuring Entity May consider the registration of such firms without carrying out a capacity assessment.

3.9.5Grades/ Classes (Monetary/ Tendering Limits)

Registration/ enlistment should be done by grading the firms (grade a, b, and so on) based on their capability to execute contracts/ orders of different monetary limits in the relevant category of requirements.

The monetary limits should be carefully fixed while keeping in view:

  • The banker's reports,
  • the capacity and capability of the firm, and
  • other FINANCIAL INFORMATION indicated in the BALANCE SHEETS, such as profit and loss statements.

G — Example of gradation for Goods (NOT mandatory)

GradeMonetary Limit
Grade ARs. 25 (Rupees twenty-five) lakh AND above
Grade BRupees five lakh to Rs. 25 (Rupees twenty-five) lakh
Grade CRupees one lakh and up to Rupees five lakh

Additional rule G: The firms that are registered for the supply of orders valued above rupees five lakh should invariably be manufacturers or their authorised agents.

Wherever practical, the Procuring Entity shall register the manufacturers and not agents or intermediaries.

A sole selling agent/ authorised agent could be considered for registration, subject to the conditions that:

  • The Procuring Entity is satisfied that he is the sole selling agent of the manufacturers;
  • The Procuring Entity ascertains the financial and technical capabilities of the manufacturers;
  • The availability of a suitable arrangement with the sole selling agent for after-sales service shall also be ensured; And
  • the Procuring Entity shall also satisfy itself that a valid legal agreement exists between the applicant unit and its sole selling agent during the period for which he is registered.

W — Class of Enlistment (Tendering Limits) for Works

(A sample classification — Source: Rules for Enlistment of Contractors in CPWD, 2024)

ClassTendering LimitClassTendering Limit
Class-I (Super)Rs 650 croreClass-IIRs 15 crore
Class-I (AAA)Rs 260 croreClass-IIIRs 4 crore
Class-I (AA)Rs 130 croreClass-IVRs 1.30 crore
Class-I (A)Rs 75 croreClass-VRs 40 lakh
Class-IRs 50 crore

3.9.6Procedure for Registration/ Enlistment

a) Fair procedure and publicity: Registration/ enlistment of the suppliers/ contractors should be done following a fair, transparent, and reasonable procedure and after giving due publicity.

Details of the procedure for registration/ enlistment of new firms May be uploaded on the website and published in the form of a booklet for information of the suppliers/ contractors. Timeframes and criteria for registration/ enlistment of new suppliers/ contractors May be clearly indicated.

b) Identifying possible sources: Possible sources for any category/ group of requirements can be identified based on internal and external references. Data on new suppliers/ contractors can be obtained from:

The e-procurement and GeM portals pre-register suppliers online. Such data can be a source of information on prospective suppliers/ contractors.

c) Updating the list and inviting EoI: The list of registered/ enlisted contractors shall be updated on a regular basis (ANNUALLY) G. New supplier(s)/ contractor(s) May be considered for registration/ enlistment at any time, provided they fulfil all the required conditions.

For any larger-scale or critical registration or development of new suppliers/ contractors, the Procuring Entity should call for eoI by publicising its need for the development of sources.

D) CIPP undertaking: While registering the firms, an undertaking May be obtained from them that they will abide by the CIPP enclosed with the application, with a clear warning that, in case of transgression of the Code of Integrity, their names are likely to be deleted from the list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors — besides any other penalty or more severe action as deemed fit.

E) GCC undertaking: Along with the new/ renewal application for registration/ enlistment, the suppliers/ contractors should also be asked to declare that, if awarded a contract in any LTE in which they participate, they bind themselves to abide by the Procuring Entity's general conditions of contract (GCC). Such GCC should be part of the application.

F) the participation Rule: Registered vendors/ enlisted contractors must participate in relevant limited tenders. In case they do not respond to at least three (3) tenders in a year on being invited to do so — if there were at least 6 invitations to them — they May be removed from the list of registered vendors/ enlisted contractors.

g) Eligibility for registration/ enlistment:

  • i) any firm situated in India or abroad that is in the business of providing goods/ works/ services of specified categories of interest shall be eligible for registration/ enlistment;
  • ii) Gwhere registration is granted based on partly outsourced arrangements/ agreements, it shall always be the responsibility of the registered unit to keep such arrangements/ agreements renewed/ alive, and to keep their registration valid for the period for which it has been granted.Any failure in this regard May make the registration null and void/ ineffective retrospectively from any such dates which the registering authority considers appropriate;
  • iii) Suppliers/ contractors should possess a valid digital signature certificate (DSC) Class III with the company name at the time of registration/ enlistment/ renewal, to enable them to participate in e-PROCUREMENTS;
  • iv) the firm should also have good internal governance — such as a whistleblower policy, commitment to esg (environmental, social, and governance) code of conduct, code of business ethics, etc.;
  • V) the firm against whom punitive action has been taken shall not be eligible for re-registration/ re-enlistment during the currency of the punitive action. Registration/ enlistment requests May not be entertained from firms (or their allied firms) who are de-registered/ banned (W Phrasing: "From such firms, stakeholders of whom have any interest in de-enlisted/ banned firms").

H) assessment of capacity and capability: The application form, complete in all respects and accompanied by the requisite processing fee and prescribed documents, shall be submitted by the firms to the registering/ enlisting authority.

The application form, duly filled in, when received from the firms, shall be scrutinised carefully to assess the capacity and capability of the firms — INCLUDING:

  • References shall be made to other firms of the standing of whom the applicant firm claims to be a supplier/ contractor.
  • Likewise, the applicant firm's bankers May also be requested to advise about the firm's financial standing.

i) If registration cannot be granted: In cases where the firm is not considered capable and registration/ enlistment cannot be granted, the concerned authority shall communicate the deficiencies and shortcomings directly to the firms, under intimation to the appellate authority.

Where a request for re-verification and review is made by the firm — along with any fee as prescribed and within the period prescribed by the Department — a review shall be undertaken.

Requests for re-verification after the expiry of the said period would be treated as a fresh application, and a processing fee, if any is prescribed, charged accordingly.

j) Grant of registration/ enlistment: If considered to be CAPABLE after carefully assessing and verifying credentials, the firm May be granted registration/ enlistment with the approval of the ca.

k) Scope of registration:

  • G Registration should be for specific trade groups of goods/ works/ services. For this purpose, all goods/ works/ services should be divided into trade groups, and the information published on the relevant portals/ websites.
  • W Enlistment should be for a specific category of works.

l) Validity period and provisional status:

G — GoodsW — Works
Validitya specified period (one to three years)A specified period (say three years), and would be considered for EXTENSION (on application by the contractor/ service provider) based on satisfactory performance of the firm
RenewalAt the end of this period, the registered supplier(s) willing to continue with registration is to apply afresh for renewal of registration
Provisional statusthe registration would be initially treated as provisional, and it would be treated as confirmed only after the firm has satisfactorily executed one order of the relevant category and value from the Procuring EntitySame rule, but "one CONTRACT of the relevant category and value"
Extension not a rightthe extension of validity of registration is not a matter of right, and the Procuring Entity reserves the right not to extend such registration without assigning any reason(same)
New entrantsNew supplier(s) May also be considered for registration at any time, provided they fulfil all the required conditions

m) Unique number and website display: All registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors should be allocated a unique registration/ enlistment number.

The list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors — indicating the names and addresses with details of the requirements and monetary value they will supply/ execute, as well as the VALIDITY PERIOD, and so on, for which they are registered/ enlisted — shall be exhibited on the websites of the Procuring Entity.

n) EMD exemption and its limits G: Within the monetary limits so prescribed, and also for the category of registration, the registered firm May be exempted from depositing the earnest money deposit (EMD).

In other categories and higher monetary limits, the supplier would be treated as any unregistered supplier and not be entitled to the privileges of a registered supplier.

O) monitoring performance and removal: The performance and conduct of every registered supplier/ enlisted contractor are to be monitored/ watched by the relevant Department.

The Procuring Entity should also reserve the right to remove firms who do not perform satisfactorily — even during the validity of registration/ enlistment (after giving due opportunity to the supplier/ contractor to make a representation) — if they:

  • Fail to abide by the terms and conditions of the registration/ enlistment, or
  • fail to execute contracts on time, or
  • supply substandard goods G / do substandard work W, or
  • make any false declaration to any Government agency, or
  • G For on public interest considerations / W For any ground which, in the opinion of the Government, is not in public interest.

P) right of reassessment: The Procuring Entity shall retain its option to reassess firms already registered/ enlisted at any later date, to satisfy itself with:

  • The current financial soundness/ creditworthiness,
  • facilities available, and so on.

Thereafter, the Procuring Entity May decide to retain them as registered suppliers for the requirements and monetary limit that were earlier considered, or with necessary changes as deemed fit.

In case of adverse reports from the team of Procuring Entity officers who reassess the firm, the Procuring Entity shall:

  • GWDELETE such firm from the registered suppliers'/ enlisted contractors' list;
  • CNC — delete or downgrade such firm from the registered suppliers'/ service providers' list.

3.10Debarment

(Rule 151 of GFR 2017)

3.10.1GFR Provisions

Registration of suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers AND their eligibility to participate in a Procuring Entity's procurements is subject to:

  • Compliance with the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement, and
  • satisfactory performance in contracts.

Rule 151 of GFR, 2017 states the following regarding 'debarment from bidding':

3.10.2Current Guidelines on Debarment

1. Origin: PPD, DoE did consultations on the issue of Debarment with major procuring Ministries/ Departments and issued the following 'debarment guidelines' in supersession of all earlier instructions on this subject (Notified vide OM No. F.1/20/2018-PPD issued by Department of Expenditure dated 02.11.2021).

Public Procurement organisations who have existing guidelines for debarment (by any name) should revise their guideline in conformity with these guidelines issued by PPD, DoE.

2. Two types of debarment:

TypeWho issues the order
I) debarment limited to a single MinistryThe Ministry itself can issue the appropriate Orders, thereby banning all its business dealing with the debarred firm
ii) Debarment EXTENDING beyond the jurisdiction of the Ministry — i.e., covering all Central ministries/ departmentsthe requisite orders shall be issued by the Department of Expenditure (DoE), Ministry of Finance (MoF)

3. Definitions:

TermDefinition
"Firm" / "bidder"have the same meaning for the purpose of these guidelines, which includes an individual or person, a company, a cooperative society, a hindu undivided family, and an association or body of persons — whether incorporated or not — engaged in trade or business
"Allied firm"All concerns which come within the sphere of effective influence of the debarred firms shall be treated as allied firms. In determining this, the factors listed in its definition in the 'Procurement Glossary' section may be kept in view
"Banning of a firm", "suspension", "black-listing"convey the same meaning as "debarment"

4. Alignment obligation: All ministries/ departments must align their existing debarment guidelines with these guidelines. Further, tender/ bidding documents must also be suitably amended, if required.

3.10.3Debarment by a SINGLE Ministry/ Department

Orders for Debarment of a firm(s) shall be passed by a Ministry/ Department, keeping in view the following:

a) Grounds and duration: A bidder (including its successors/ allied firms) May be debarred from participating in any procurement process for a period not exceeding two years (along with such other actions as may be permissible under law) for the following reasons:

  • i) If it is determined that the bidder has breached the Code of Integrity as per Rule 175 of GFRs 2017.
  • ii) false declaration of local content by Class-I/ Class-II local suppliers under the Public Procurement (Preference to Make in India) Order 2017, dated 16/09/2020 or later — shall also be treated as a breach of the Code of Integrity. A supplier who has been debarred by any procuring entity as per this sub-para:
  • The fact and duration of debarment for this reason by any procuring entity must be promptly brought to the notice of the member-convenor of the standing committee (joint Secretary, DPIIT, under the Make in India order) and the Department of Expenditure, through the concerned Ministry/ Department or in some other manner;
  • The standing committee shall consolidate such cases, and a centralised list or decentralised list of such suppliers with the period of debarment must be maintained on a periodical basis and displayed on the website(s);
  • Such suppliers — though debarred by a single Ministry/ Department — shall not be eligible for preference under the Make in India order for procurement by any other Procuring Entity for the duration of the debarment. This shall be effective from the date of uploading such debarment to the website(s).
  • iii) for any other actions or omissions by the firm that, in the opinion of the Ministry/ Department, warrants debarment.

B) jurisdiction of the order: The debarment order shall not be circulated to other ministries/ departments. It will only be applicable to all the attached/ subordinate offices, autonomous bodies, Central public sector undertakings (CPSEs), etc., of the Ministry/ Department issuing the debarment order.

c) Reasonable opportunity: The concerned Ministry/ Department, before ISSUING the debarment order against a firm, must ensure that reasonable opportunity has been given to the concerned firm to represent against such debarment — including a personal hearing if requested by the firm.

d) Competent Authority: The Secretary of the Ministry/ Department May nominate an officer at the rank of Joint Secretary/ Additional Secretary as Competent Authority (ca) to debar the firms.

e) List maintenance: The Ministry/ Department will maintain a list of such debarred firms, which will also be displayed on its website. Such a list on the website shall be automatically binding on the departments, subordinate and attached offices, autonomous bodies, and CPSEs under the Ministry — but in case of doubt, it can be confirmed by the issuing authority.

F) concurrent debarments: More than one Ministry/ Department May concurrently debar the same firm.

G) not a vigilance function: Debarment is an executive function and should not be allocated to the vigilance Department.

H) timeline for the debarment process: The period of debarment starts from the date of issue of the debarment order; Therefore, the process of debarment should be conducted expeditiously.

Considering the QUASI-JUDICIAL NATURE of such proceedings and the need to afford a fair hearing to the firm, the following timeline is SUGGESTED — which May be suitably modified considering the specifics of an organisation:

StepActivityTime
iNoticing of delinquency of the firm by the Procuring Entityzero-day
iiEvaluation of evidence and proposal to ca for debarment of the firm2 WEEKS
iiiIssue of show cause notice to the firm, calling for written and oral submission1 WEEK
ivtime for submission, including reminders, etc.3 WEEKS
vevaluation of firm's submission and giving oral hearing to the firm3 WEEKS
viFinal ORDER, indicating an opportunity to the firm — 2 weeks — to appeal to the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department as APPELLATE AUTHORITY2 WEEKS
total from zero-day, after which the debarment period starts12 WEEKS
viireceipt of appeal and disposal of the same by the appellate authority4 WEEKS

3.10.4Debarment by CPSEs, Attached Offices/ Autonomous Bodies, and GeM

ministries/ departments, at their option, May also delegate powers to debar bidders to their CPSEs, attached offices/ autonomous bodies, etc.

In such cases, the broad principles for debarment in para 3.10.3(a) to (h) above are to be kept in mind.

Debarments by such bodies shall be applicable only to the procurements made by such bodies.

Similarly, the Government E-marketplace (GeM) can also debar bidders for up to two years on its portal.

3.10.5Debarment ACROSS ALL Ministries/ Departments

In the following situations, the Ministry/ Department May consider debarring the firm from taking part in any tendering procedure floated by ALL The Central Government ministries/ departments:

a) Ground — conviction (Rule 151(i) of GFRs, 2017), for debarment up to three years:

  • i) under the prevention of Corruption Act, 1988; or
  • ii) the IPC, 1860/ Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita, 2023, or any other law for the time being in force, for causing any loss of life or property, or causing a threat to public health, as part of the execution of a Public Procurement contract.

B) the reference to DoE: The Ministry/ Department concerned should, after obtaining the approval of the Secretary concerned, forward to DoE a self-contained note setting out all the facts of the case and the justification for the proposed debarment, along with all the relevant papers and documents.

C) prior opportunity is mandatory: The Ministry/ Department, before forwarding the proposal to DoE, must ensure that reasonable opportunity has been given to the concerned firm to represent against such debarment — including a personal hearing if requested by the firm.

D) interim debarment: The firm shall remain debarred during the interim period till the final decision is taken by DoE — only in the Ministry/ Department forwarding such proposal.

For this purpose, the proposing Ministry shall issue an interim order debarring the firm from taking part in tendering procedures floated by their Ministry/ Department, following the procedure laid down in para 3.10.3 above.

Such order inter alia must mention that the Government reserves its right to further debar the firm from taking part in any tendering procedure floated across all the Central Government ministries/ departments, following due procedure.

E) doe's powers and timeline: DoE can also give additional opportunity, at their option, to the firm to represent against proposed debarment. DoE can also take suo-moto Action to debar the firms in certain circumstances.

DoE shall complete the process of debarment within 12 weeks after receiving the proposal from the concerned Ministry/ Department.

F) doe's order: DoE will issue the necessary orders for debarment for a period not exceeding three years for offences mentioned in Rule 151(i) of gfrs, 2017 — after satisfying itself that the proposed debarment across all the ministries/ departments is in accordance with the said Rule. This scrutiny is intended to ensure uniformity of treatment in all cases.

G) the Central list: DoE will maintain a list of such debarred firms, which will be displayed on the gem-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP). This list on CPPP shall be applicable to all ministries/ departments, attached and subordinate offices, CPSEs, and autonomous bodies — but in case of doubt, they May confirm it from the issuing authority.

H) absolute bar: No contract of any kind whatsoever shall be placed on the firm debarred by DoE — including its allied firms — during the period of debarment, by any Ministry/ Department/ attached/ subordinate offices of the Government of India, including autonomous bodies, CPSEs, etc., after the issue of a debarment order.

3.10.6Review and Revocation of Orders

A) automatic revocation on expiry: An order for debarment passed shall be deemed to have been automatically revoked on the expiry of the period of debarment specified therein — and it will not be necessary to issue a specific formal order of revocation.

b) Early review/ revocation: The AUTHORISED ENTITY (DoE, Ministry/ Department, or CPSEs, Attached Offices/ Autonomous Bodies, GeM, etc.) that ISSUED the order of debarment can review or revoke the debarment order before the period of debarment is over:

  • Suo-moto (based on new facts that come to light), or
  • on an appeal by the debarred bidder.

After a review, an order for modification of the period of debarment or revocation of debarment — if there is adequate justification for the same — can be issued.

Approval levels:

  • Ordinarily, such modification/ revocation of the Order should be done with the approval of the Secretary concerned of doE or the Ministry/ Department that issued such orders.
  • In case of debarments done by CPSEs, attached offices/ autonomous bodies, GeM, etc., such modification/ revocation of the debarment orders should be done only with the approval of at least a board-level officer.

3.10.7Other Provisions (Common to BOTH Types of Debarment)

a) Contents of the order: The debarment order shall MENTION:

  • The reason(s) in brief that led to the debarment of the firm,
  • The jurisdictional extent to which the order shall be applicable, and
  • The validity period of debarment.

B) the bar on contracts, and the two cut-off dates: No contract of any kind whatsoever shall be placed with a debarred firm — including its allied firms — after the issue of a debarment order by the entities in the jurisdiction mentioned in the order.

Bids from only such firms shall be considered for placement of contract which are:

  • Neither debarred on the date of opening of tenderopening of the first bid, normally called the technical bid, in case of two-packet/ two-stage tendering
  • nor debarred on the date of contracti.e., date of issue of the Letter of Acceptance.

Even in the cases of risk purchase, no contract should be placed on such debarred firms.

C) treatment of a debarred firm's bid: If any debarred firm submits the bid, it will be ignored. In case such firm is lowest (L-1), the next lowest firm shall be considered as L-1. Bid Security submitted by such debarred firms shall be returned to them.

d) No retrospective effect on existing contracts: Contracts concluded before the issue of the debarment order shall not be affected by the debarment orders.

E) automatic extension to allied firms and JV partners: The debarment shall be automatically extended to all its allied firms. In case a joint venture/ consortium is debarred, all partners will also stand debarred for the period specified in the debarment order. The names of partners should be clearly specified in the "debarment order".

F) no impact on other legal rights: Debarment in any manner does not impact any other contractual or other legal rights of the procuring entities.

g) Commencement — two different dates:

  • For the issuing entity: The period of debarment shall start from the date of issue of the debarment order.
  • For other procuring entities: The debarment takes effect prospectively from the date of uploading on the website(s), in such a manner that ongoing procurements are not disrupted.

H) minimum period: Ordinarily, the period of debarment should not be less than six months.

i) GeM Suspension under the Incidence Management Policy [W + C + NC — not in G]:

The GeM portal also has a provision for suspension — debarring vendors'/ service providers' participation in procurements of ALL The buyers — under its incidence management policy.

the reasons and periods for suspension are different than in the provisions mentioned above.

However, if a Procuring Entity feels that the period of suspension by GeM is not adequate, it May also debar the firm as per the procedure mentioned in this section for a more appropriate period — but such debarment shall be applicable ONLY To procurements by that Procuring Entity.

j) Undertakings from bidders on debarment status [G — not in W/C/NC]:

It is noticed that many procuring entities take undertakings from the bidders with respect to their debarment status/ period. Such undertakings, if taken, must be in conformity with the debarment guidelines, as above, to avoid any possible confusion.

k) Alignment obligation WCNC: All ministries/ departments must align their existing debarment guidelines in conformity with these guidelines. Further, bidding documents must also be suitably amended, if required.

3.10.8Safeguarding the Procuring Entity's Interests during Debarment

Suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers are important assets for the procuring entities, and punishing delinquent suppliers should be the last resort.

  • It takes a lot of time and effort to develop, register and mature a new supplier.
  • In case of a shortage of suppliers in a particular group of materials/ equipment/ services, such punishment May also hurt the interest of the Procuring Entity.

Therefore:

  1. The Procuring Entity May always seek the views of the concerned Department regarding the repercussions of such punitive action on the continuity of procurements.
  2. The Procuring Entity May give due weightage to the past performance of the supplier/ consultant/ service provider.
  3. In case of a shortage of suppliers and in cases of less serious misdemeanours, the Procuring Entity May:
  4. Pragmatically analyse the circumstances,
  5. reform the supplier, and
  6. get a written commitment from the supplier that his performance will improve.
  7. If this fails, efforts should be made to see if:
  8. [G, c, nc] — a shorter period of debarment can serve the purpose;
  9. W — A temporary Debarment can serve the purpose.

3.11Enlistment of Indian Agents

(Rule 152 of GFR 2017)

ministries/ departments, if they so require, May enlist Indian agents who desire to quote directly on behalf of their foreign principals.

Detailed guidelines on Indian Agents of foreign suppliers are contained in Annex-1 to the Integrity Pact Annexure of each Manual — "Guidelines for Indian Agents of Foreign Suppliers".

Appendix to Chapter 3 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 3 (before Bidding Design) · w: Chapter 8 (after Contract Execution)
2Chapter titleG:Supplier Relationship Management · W:Registration/ Enlistment of Contractors and Governance Issues · C/NC:Participation of Bidders and Governance Issues
3Relationship Management sectionG (3.1) + W (8.1) only — absent in C/NC
4Eligibility Criteria for ParticipationC (3.1) + NC (3.1) only — absent in G/W
5Legal Status of Bidders (individuals, firms, NGOs, specialised agencies, sub-contracting, consortium/ JV)C (3.2) + NC (3.2) only
6JV/C discouraged in QCBS/ QOP procurementNC only
7Demerged entities — five-year use of parent credentials (DoE OM F.8/78/2023-PPD dated 12.10.2023)NC only
8Rule 177 GFR bar on direct engagement of retired Government servants as consultantsC only (NC states the substance without citing Rule 177)
9Canons of Financial Propriety re-stated in this chapterC (3.3.1) + NC (3.3.1) — in G/W it is at para 1.9
10RTI and Proactive Disclosures re-stated in this chapterC (3.3.2) + NC (3.3.2) — in G it is at para 1.12; absent from W entirely
11CIPP broken into four numbered sub-sections (Introduction; the Code; Proactive Disclosures; Punitive Provisions)W only (8.2.1–8.2.4)
12CIPP declaration signed at "Need Assessment" vs "Preparation of Estimates"G/C/NC: Need Assessment · W: Preparation of Estimates
13CIPP declaration expressly extended to SUB-CONTRACTORS engaged by the bidderW only
14Professionalism and Unfair Competitive Advantage; the three consultancy disqualification rulesC only
15Punitive debarment period under CIPPG/w/nc: Not less than six months (a floor) · c: Not exceeding two years (a ceiling)
16CCI reference filed by whomG/W/NC: Joint Secretary level officer · C: the Competent Authority
17"Recovery of payments including advance payments"G, W, NC — C omits "including advance payments"
18Integrity Pact — tri-partite arrangement with sub-contractorsC only
19IP format may be updated to incorporate latest procurement instructionsG + W · C/NC instead say Ministries and CPSEs may use the format with suitable changes
20Annex-2 to Integrity PactG:Extract of Standard Operating Procedure · W/C/NC:Appointment and Role of IEMs
21Grievance redressal — "ambiguity in contract terms" placed as a separate paragraphW (para 4) · G/C/NC place it as item (ix) within the "not subject to review" list
22Rate Contract holders named in the "private purchases" risk rowG only
23Registration/ Empanelment/ Pre-qualification — three concepts distinguishedG, C, NC
24Registration vs Enlistment — two concepts distinguishedW only
25Mandatory pre-bid registration on e-procurement portal/ CPPP with five data fields (Name, Address, PAN, DSC, GSTIN)W only
26CPWD/ MES enlistment practice; MoR and MoRTH cited; Rs 20 crore ceiling on empanelled-only tenderingW only
27Sharing of registered/ enlisted/ debarred contractor data through CPPP; unique identification by PAN by NIC/ MeitYW only
28Five categories for registration of suppliers of goods (manufacturers, agents, foreign manufacturers, stockists, importers)G only
29Categories of works for enlistment (Civil, Electrical, Horticulture, Nursery)W only
30In-house testing facility prerequisite; MSE relaxation; ISO 9001-2000 treatmentG only
31Grade A/B/C monetary limits (Rs 25 lakh / Rs 5–25 lakh / Rs 1–5 lakh)G only
32CPWD Class-I(Super) to Class-V tendering limits (Rs 650 crore down to Rs 40 lakh)W only
33Sole selling agent registration conditions; above-Rs-5-lakh manufacturers-or-authorised-agents ruleG only
34Partly outsourced arrangements — registration void retrospectivelyG only
35Re-verification request permitted only after six MONTHSC + NC state it expressly · W says "say, within six months" · G silent
36Validity of registrationG: one to three years, apply afresh for renewal · W: say three years, extension on application based on satisfactory performance
37EMD exemption within monetary limit; treated as unregistered beyond it; security deposit insteadG only
38Adverse reassessment consequenceG/W: DELETE from list · C/NC: DELETE or downgrade
39Full registration procedure reproducedG (16 sub-paras) + W (17 paras) · C/NC reproduce an abridged version and cross-refer to para 3.6 of the Goods Manual
40Debarment section titleG: Suppliers · W: Contractors · C: "Suppliers" (apparent template carry-over) · NC: Service Providers
41Rule 151(a)(ii) statute citedG: IPC 1860 (with BNS footnote) · W/C/NC: Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita directly
42"Ministry/ Department will maintain such list … displayed on their website" added to Rule 151(c)W + NC
43Footnote that "now two years is applicable" against the three-year period in Rule 151(b)W only
44GeM Suspension under Incidence Management PolicyW + C + NC — absent from G
45Undertakings from bidders regarding debarment status must conform to the GuidelinesG only
46Closing safeguard — remedy if reform failsG/C/NC: a SHORTER PERIOD of debarment · W: a TEMPORARY debarment
47Rule number cited for Indian Agents footnoteG + C print "Rule 52" (evident typo) · W + NC correctly print "Rule 152"

end of Chapter 3

Chapter 4 — Part a

Bidding Design

Part IContracts, Selection Systems and Channels

Agency for Procurement · Admeasurement · Types of Contracts · Systems of Selection · Tendering Systems · Channels of Procurement

Merging: Goods Ch. 4 (Modes of Procurement and Tendering Systems) · Works Ch. 3 (Bidding Design for Works) · Consultancy Ch. 4 (Bidding Design for Consultancy Services) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 4 (Bidding Design for Non-Consultancy Services)

Structural Warning for Students

This block is CHAPTER 4 in Goods, Consultancy and Non-Consultancy — but CHAPTER 3 in Works.

(The reverse of the trap in the previous chapter, where governance was Ch. 3 in three Manuals but Ch. 8 in Works.)

This is also the chapter of greatest substantive divergence between the four Manuals. Three whole apparatus exist in only one Manual each:

ApparatusExists only in
Agency for Procurement (pWO/ PSU/ works Committee)Works
Admeasurement of Services (input vs output)Non-Consultancy
Rate Contract / Framework Agreement, Approved Vendor List, Proprietary Article Certificate, Direct ProcurementGoods(covered in Part B)

And "Types of Contracts" does not exist at all in the Goods Manual — goods procurement has no contract-type taxonomy, because it uses Rate Contracts and supply orders instead.

Because of the volume, this chapter is issued in two parts:

  • PART A (this document) — Agency, Admeasurement, Types of Contracts, Systems of Selection, Tendering Systems, Channels of Procurement.
  • PART B — Modes of Procurement (OTE, GTE, rc/fa, eRA, PQB, AVL, LTE, SLTE, PAC, STE, direct Procurement, Quotations, Stalled Contracts).

Concordance for Chapter 4 — Part A

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
4.1Agency for Procurement3.1
4.2Admeasurement of Services4.1
4.3Types of Contracts — (none)3.24.14.2
4.4Systems of Selection — (none)3.34.24.3
4.5Tendering Systems4.14–4.163.44.44.5
4.6Channels of Procurement4.173.54.54.6
Part BModes of Procurement4.1–4.133.6–3.144.34.4

4.1Agency for Procurement [W ONLY]

1. The three routes (Rule 133 of GFR, 2017): Rule 133 permits Ministries/ Departments at its discretion to assign execution of their original and repair works as follows: a) directly by the Ministry/ Department; b) public works organisations (PWO); c) public sector undertaking (PSU)/ Organisations set up to execute Works.

2. Directly by the Ministry/ Department: A Ministry or Department at its discretion May directly execute repair works estimated to cost up to rupees sixty (60) LAKH, after following the due procedure 'laid down for Execution of Works' (Rules 139, 159 and 160 of GFR 2017).

4.1.1Public Works Organisations (PWO)

A Ministry or Department May, at its discretion, assign:

  • REPAIR WORKS estimated to cost above Rupees SIXTY (60) LAKH, and
  • original/ minor works of any value

to any public Works Organisation (PWO) such as:

4.1.2Public Works PSU/ Organisations

As an alternative, a Ministry or Department May assign repair works estimated to cost above rupees sixty (60) lakh and original works of any value to: A) any public sector undertaking (PSU) set up by the Central or State Government to carry out civil or electrical works; Or b) to any other Central/ State Government organisation/ PSU which May be notified by the Ministry of housing and urban affairs (MoHUA) for such purpose, after evaluating their financial strength and technical competence.

4.1.3Procedure for Assigning Work to PWO or PSU/ Organisations

1. Competition among PSUs — and the PMC characterisation: For the assignment of work to PSUs, the Ministry/ Department shall ensure competition among all such eligible PSUs/ ORGANISATIONS.

This competition shall be essentially on the lump sum service charges to be claimed for execution of work.

The award of work to a PSU should be taken as project management consultancy (pmc), and the concerned PSU shall be treated as a consultancy firm. Relevant methods (QCBS, LCS etc.) for procurement of consultancy will be applicable.

2. Nomination basis: In exceptional cases, for assignment of work on nomination basis to a PSU, the conditions for nomination basis would apply. The work under these circumstances shall also be assigned only on a lump sum basis.

3. Sanctions and execution(Rule 140, GFR 2017): For original works and repair works entrusted under paras 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 above, the administrative approval and expenditure sanction shall be accorded and funds allotted by the concerned authority in accordance with the sanctioning sequence of Chapter 2.

The PWO or the PSU or any organisation allotted work shall then execute the work entrusted to it in accordance with the Rules and procedures prescribed in their own organisation.

4. Memorandum of Understanding (MoU): An MoU May be drawn with the PWO or the PSU for proper execution of work.

The MoU should spell out:

  • the OBLIGATIONS on the part of the PWO or PSU regarding execution of works as per proper specifications, and
  • for maintaining proper quality and speed of execution of works;
  • Different stages at which funds shall be released to the PWO should also be clearly spelt out.

Such MoU would normally be for a specific standalone work, but could also be for a project consisting of a collection of related works.

5. Long-term framework MoU: In case of MoU with PWOs, it could also be a long-term framework moU.

6. The Works Committee: For execution of any work under Paras 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 above, the Ministry/ Department shall constitute a "Works Committee" — whether on an ad hoc or standing basis — comprising:

  • representatives of the ADMINISTRATIVE WING,
  • representatives of the FINANCE WING, and
  • an officer possessing technical skills and experience of framing estimates and execution of works.

If need be, members May be co-opted from: the User Department; CPWD/ PWOs/ PSUs; or any technically sound Government agency such as a relevant National Institute of Technology (NIT)/ Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) or a relevant National Research Institute, etc.

The Works Committee shall:

  • Ensure observance of due process in the planning and execution of works;
  • Check the reasonability of the estimates and other technical details; And
  • monitor the execution of the works.

4.2Admeasurement of Services [NC ONLY]

Non-consultancy services are bid and contracted on the total price (UNIT RATE × quantum) of the delivered services (of requisite performance standards) — much like procurement of goods and works.

The QUANTUM of services can be ascertained by EITHER:

  • measuring the INPUTS DEPLOYED by the service provider → INPUT ADMEASUREMENT; or
  • measuring the output of services delivered → output admeasurement.

4.2.1Input Admeasurement

1. The quantum of services can be ascertained by measurement of the inputs — personnel, equipment, materials, and miscellaneous inputs — deployed during a period (say per month) by the service provider.

2. What the contract specifies:

  • the UNIT RATE, and
  • the ESTIMATED QUANTUM (per period — say per day/ month) of various inputs required to be deployed to deliver the required quantum of services of requisite performance standards.
  • The contract would also specify the SERVICE CHARGES (including profits, overheads, etc.) and taxes over and above such input unit rates.

Financial evaluation is based on the total price of the indicated quantum of various inputs at the contracted unit rate, plus service charges and taxes.

3. The monitoring burden: Input admeasurement requires more vigilant and constant monitoring of inputs deployed. The Procuring Entity must also monitor the performance standards, methodology employed and productivity of inputs to ensure Value for Money.

4. Where used: Input admeasurement is frequently used in time-based and indefinite delivery types of contracts for Services like:

5. Input Admeasured Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) The quality and scope of the Output/ deliverables is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the service provider to IGNORE the quality and scope of the services. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of contract.The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality, methodology and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payments should be released only against such certificates. Therefore, the service Level Agreement (SLA) becomes very important in such contracts.
b) productivity of inputs deployed is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the service provider to use paid staff in a dilatory and un-productive manner. This may lead to time and cost over-runs.Such contracts need to be closely monitored and administered by the Procuring Entity to ensure that the progress of the contract is commensurate with the time spent, and that the resources for which payment is claimed have actually efficiently and productively been deployed on the contract during the period. It may be worthwhile to lay down productivity linkage between the quantum of the output of services and input deployed in a period (say, cleaning of a quantum of area per day per cleaner deployed) as part of Performance Standards. A system of MONTHLY REPORTING of payouts and the quantum of work achieved by the service provider to the CA should be instituted to enable supervision. Such contracts should include an upper limit of total payments to be made to the service providers, to safeguard against excessive prolonging of time and payments. After this limit is reached — or the period of completion is exceeded — the ca should review the justification for the extension of the contract.

4.2.2Output-Admeasurement

1. Alternatively, the quantum of services can be ascertained by measurement of the quantum of outputs delivered of the required performance standards — numbers, length, area, volume, weight, value, etc., or a combination thereof — say, the area of office cleaned, or tonne-kilometre of transportation, or value of goods inspected.

2. Financial evaluation: The contract specifies a unit rate of the output of services, and the financial evaluation is done based on the total price of the indicated quantum of service at the contracted unit rate plus taxes.

3. Why it is preferred: Output admeasurement contracts are simpler to administer, since the Procuring Entity will only ascertain performance standards and the quantum. It need not monitor the inputs deployed and the methodology employed. Therefore, wherever feasible, output admeasurement should be the preferred choice.

4. However, in many services, it May be part of the quality assurance plan and SLA to ensure that a specified quantum of inputs is deployed for the services — although payments are still based on output admeasurement.

5. Where used: Depending on the situation, output admeasurement may be suitable mainly for lump-sum and percentage-based types of contracts, and in special circumstances for time-based and indefinite delivery types.

Suitable for Services like:

6. Output Admeasurement Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) insufficient deployment of resources: Service Provider may not deploy sufficient resources, which may lead to POOR QUALITY and TIME OVER-RUN.Stipulate in the tender document that the quantum of input deployments (personnel, equipment, materials, etc.) shall also be quoted — but shall be used only to monitor performance standards.
b) The QUALITY of the Output/ deliverables is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the service provider to Cut corners on quality of the output/ deliverables by saving on resources employed. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of Output/ deliverables.Such contracts should be used mainly for contracts in which the quality and scope of the required output are clearly defined and are measurable. The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payment should be made only against certificate of acceptance of deliverables. It's important to include a service Level Agreement in such contracts.
c) time and cost over-run: As time is not linked to the payment, there may be a tendency for the service provider to save on deployment of resources, which may result in time-over-run.While the payments are not linked to time, the contract should be monitored per month to ensure that the output per month is in line with planned and estimated time-line. This type of contract should include an upper limit of total payments to safeguard against excessive prolonging of time and payments. After this limit is reached, or the period of completion is exceeded, the CA should review the justification for the extension of the contract.

4.3Types of Contracts

4.3.1The Common Opening PropositionWCNC

1. There are various alternative bases for linking payments to the performance of a contract (called types of contracts) — each having different risks and mitigation measures.

  • Bids are called and evaluated based on the type of contract.
  • CNC add:The BOQ of the financial bid is designed specifically for each type of contract.
  • The choice of the type of contract should be based on value-for-money (VfM), with due regard to the nature of work/ requirement.
  • Adoption of an inappropriate type of contract could lead to a situation of lack of competition, contractual disputes and non-performance/ failure of the contract.
  • W adds:Standard forms for all the types of contracts mentioned below are available with public works organisations like CPWD, and the same May be used for calling the tenders.

4.3.2The Three Taxonomies Compared

W — WORKS (7 types)C — CONSULTANCY (5 types)NC — NON-CONSULTANCY (4 types)
a) Lump sum (Firm Fixed Price) contracta) Lump sum (Firm Fixed Price) contracta) Lump sum (Firm Fixed Price) contract
b) Item Rate (Unit Rate) contractb) Time based (Retainer-ship) contractb) Time based contract
c) Percentage Rate contractc) Percentage (Success Fee) contractc) Percentage (Success Fee) contract
d) Piece Work contractd) Retainer-ship cum Success fee-based contractd) Indefinite delivery contract
e) Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) contracte) Indefinite delivery contract
f) Public Private Partnership (PPP)

4.3.3WORKS — the Seven TypesW

A. Lump Sum (Fixed Price) Contract

1. In this type of contract, bidders are required to quote a lump sum fixed price figure for completing the works in accordance with the given designs, specifications and functional requirements.

  • Bidder's price is deemed to include all elements of cost — no arithmetical correction or price adjustments are allowed during evaluation and execution.
  • Lump sum contracts are easy to administer because it is a fixed price for a fixed scope, and payments are linked to clearly specified outputs/ milestones.

2. Quality risk: There may be a tendency for the Contractor to cut corners on quality and scope of work by saving on resources employed. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of work. The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of work, and a certificate for its acceptability May be recorded.

3. Time risk: As time is not linked to the payment, there may be a tendency for the Contractor to save on deployment of resources, which may result in time over-run. While the payments are not linked to time, the assignment should be monitored per month to ensure that the progress of work per month is in line with the planned and estimated timeline.

4. Where suitable: Lump sum service contracts should be used mainly for assignments in which the quality, scope and timing of the work are clearly defined.

Lump sum contracts May be used where the works can be defined in their full physical and qualitative characteristics, and risk for change in quantity or specification, and unforeseen difficulties and site conditions (for example, hidden foundation problems) are minimal.

Thus suitable for:

In the latter case, the Department shall spell out the requirements in detail to enable the contractor to prepare his designs and drawings accordingly and submit them to the Procuring Entity for check and approval before construction.

5. Schedule of Rates still relevant: A Schedule of Rates (sor) May still be specified in order to regulate the amounts to be added to or deducted from the fixed sum on account of additions and alterations to drawings, designs and specifications not covered by the contract.

6. Payment: The contractor shall be paid from time to time as per the Schedule specified in the contract, or the full amount on completion of the work. The billing Schedule shall be commensurate with the actual work done, and the risk of front-loading strictly guarded against.

7. Measurements: Detailed measurements of work done in a lump sum contract are not required to be recorded — except in respect of additions and omissions. No reference is made in the contract to the departmental estimate of the work, prevailing sor, or the quantities of work to be done. Payment of additions and omissions is regulated by the prevailing sor as agreed upon while approving the tender or the rates.

B. Item Rate (Unit Rate) Contract

1. For item rate tenders, contractors are required to quote a rate for each individual item (detailed sub-activity) comprising a work, on the basis of the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) provided by the Procuring Entity in the bid documents.

This is the most commonly used contract type for civil works.

2. Payment and variations: The payment is made at the rate set out in the contract for the measured quantity.

Extent of variation in BOQ quantitiesTreatment
REASONABLE variations — typically ±10% to ±15%Can be allowed during the execution in terms of the contract
SLIGHTLY LARGER variation — typically ±25% to ±30%competent Authority's sanction is required
Where the variation exceeds the prescribed limitThe contract generally provides that either (a) the Procuring Entity May revise the rate with mutual agreement (often based on analysis of current market rates), or (b) the work beyond the limit May be treated as a new item, requiring approval at appropriate levels

3. Where suitable: Suitable for all types of major works such as buildings, bridges, culverts, roads, sewer lines, irrigation works — and carries the least risk of uncertainty for the parties.

4. Prerequisite: Specifications, design, drawings and contract conditions — including availability of land, forest clearance, social and environmental impact assessment, where applicable — have to be critically appraised before the initiation of the procurement process, in order to minimise the incidence of internal inconsistencies, variations, and situations of claims/ disputes or contract failure.

C. Percentage Rate Contract

1. For percentage Rate Contract, the contractors are required to quote a rate as an overall percentage above or below the total estimated cost.

2. Where suitable: This type works best when the work does not involve major design process and directions, and simple drawings are sufficient for execution. It saves on the time and effort of detailed design before the procurement process.

Can be used for:

3. Billing: Bills for percentage rate contracts shall be prepared at the estimated rates for individual items only, and the percentage excess or less shall be added or subtracted from the gross amount of the bill. The payment is made for the measured quantity.

Contract provisions are made to determine the price of the items not included in sor. In the absence of a standard Schedule of Rates, a project-specific Schedule of items and their rates is drawn.

D. Piece Work Agreement

1. In a piece work agreement, bidders quote and are paid for each piece (or unit) of a work element — neither the complete work as in lump-sum contract, nor as granular a work element as in item Rate Contract — without necessarily providing detailed quantities upfront.

The Procuring Entity has flexibility to put an end to the piece work agreement at his option at any time. It incentivises productivity of the contractor and cost control for the Procuring Entity.

2. Two main uses:

A) anticipatory work commencement: In cases where it is necessary to start the work in anticipation of formal acceptance of a detailed contract, a piece work agreement May be drawn — and the agreement May be cancelled as soon as the regular contract is signed.

b) for ongoing requirements: For ongoing requirements — i.e., pipes, laying of sewerage, maintenance of colonies/ facilities etc. — quotations are called periodically, and a running piece work agreement is drawn up as a result of those quotations, usually for a period of one year. The agreement provides for payment of stipulated rates only when it refers to such quantity of time, and also stipulates that the Procuring Entity May put an end to the agreement at his option at any time.

3. Important provisions of such contracts:

A) quality assurance: Contractor might prioritise speed over quality to maximise earnings. Therefore, the contract must clearly define the quality standards each unit of work must meet to be acceptable. Implement processes for inspecting and approving completed work before payment. Define the scope of work meticulously to prevent misunderstandings. Maintain open lines of communication with contractors to address issues promptly. Establish KPIs to monitor progress and quality.

B) payment terms: Specify the payment rate per unit of work and any conditions that might affect this rate. Outline when payments will be made (e.g., upon completion of each unit, weekly, monthly).

C) termination clauses: Include a clause that allows the Procuring Entity to terminate the contract at their option at any time. Specify any notice period required and obligations upon termination.

D) labour laws: There's a potential for unfair labour practices if not properly managed. Therefore, the contract must stipulate strict compliance with local labour regulations, including minimum wage requirements and worker protections.

E) documentation: Keep thorough records of work completed and payments made for transparency and legal purposes.

E. Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contracts

1. What it is: The EPC approach — also called 'design & build' contracts — relies on assigning the responsibility for investigations, design and construction to the contractor for a lump sum price determined through competitive bidding.

The objective is to ensure implementation of the project to specified standards with a fair degree of certainty relating to costs and time, while transferring the construction risks to the contractor.

2. Policy push: On the recommendations of niti aayog, the cabinet committee on economic affairs (ccea) has recommended that item rate contracts May be substituted by EPC contracts wherever appropriate (NITI Aayog OM No. N-14070/14/2016-PPPAU dated September 05, 2016).

3. Output specifications, not construction specifications: Unlike the normal practice of construction specifications, the technical parameters in the EPC agreement are based mainly on output specifications/ performance standards.

The Procuring Entity specifies only the core requirements of design and construction that have a bearing on the quality, durability, reliability, maintainability and safety of assets — and enough room is left for the contractor to add value. The contractor has full freedom to design and plan the construction Schedule using best practices.

4. Risk allocation:

RiskBorne by
Soil conditions and weather; Commercial and technical risks relating to design and constructionthe contractor
delays in handing over the land · approvals from local authorities · environment clearances · shifting of utilities · approvals in respect of engineering plansthe Procuring Entity

5. Selection, price and the 10% variation ceiling: Selection of the contractor is based on open competitive bidding. All project parameters — contract period, price adjustments and technical parameters — are to be clearly stated upfront, and short-listed bidders are required to specify only the lump sum price for the project. The bidder who seeks the lowest payment is awarded the contract.

The contract price is subject to adjustment on account of price variation during the contract period as per a specified formula.

It also lays down a ceiling of 10 (ten) per cent of contract price to cater for any changes in the scope of project, the cost of which the Procuring Entity will bear.

  • Once this ceiling is reached, no further variations shall be issued under the existing contract.
  • Any additional requirement beyond this limit must be procured separately through a competitive bidding process, so as to preserve transparency, fairness, and Value for Money.
  • In exceptional cases where continuity of work demands that the existing contractor execute such additional scope, this shall be permitted only through a formally approved supplemental agreement, with revised price and timelines duly concurred by the Competent Authority and finance.
  • The original contractor shall, however, be required to extend reasonable cooperation to ensure coordination with any other agency engaged for excess works.

Suggested eligibility criteria for EPC tenders:

A) technical capacity: The bidder has received payments for construction of eligible projects over the past five financial years preceding the bid due date. The payment amounts should be at least:

  • i) 60% of the estimated project cost from one eligible project; or
  • ii) 40% of the estimated project cost from each of two eligible projects; or
  • iii) 30% of the estimated project cost from each of three eligible projects.

b) financial capacity: The bidder should possess a minimum net worth of at least 15% of the estimated project cost at the close of the preceding financial year. If the bid due date falls within three months of the closing of the latest financial year, that year can be ignored for calculation purposes.

C) eligible works for EPC tenders specifically refer to construction projects directly awarded by either a Government Ministry or Department, or by a public listed company. The latter should be listed on major Indian stock exchanges, such as the nse or the bse.

In the case of awards from public listed companies, the tender documents need to clearly outline specific financial requirements. This includes detailing the average annual turnover of the company over a defined period — typically the past three or five years. Additionally, the tender should specify a minimum duration for which the company must have been registered — for example, a period of five years. This stipulation is aimed at ensuring that the awards considered for eligibility come from established and financially sound entities.

6. Design review process: The selected Contractor carries out survey and investigations and also develops designs and drawings in conformity with the specifications and standards laid down in the Agreement.

The Procuring Entity's engineer (also called owner's engineer) reviews the design and drawings to ensure that these conform to the scope of the project, design standards and specifications.

Any comments by the Procuring Entity on the design proposals submitted by the contractor are to be communicated in totality once, in a time-bound manner as indicated in the Schedule. The contractor is free to proceed with construction after the expiry of the specified period, in case no remarks/ clearances are given by the Procuring Entity.

7. Shifting of utilities: The contractor is also responsible for shifting of any utility (electric lines, water pipes, telephone cables etc.) to an appropriate location or alignment — if the utilities are under the purview of the Procuring Entity and adversely affect or infringe the execution of works.

This requirement should be part of the tender document, so as to avoid such a requirement at a later stage that May lead to amending the scope of work.

For utilities not owned by the Procuring Entity, the concerned organisation under whose ambit such utilities fall shall be intimated by the Procuring Entity for shifting, and the price of shifting shall be paid to the organisation by the Procuring Entity. If there is delay in shifting of the utilities for which the contractor is not accountable, reasonable time extension May be given to the contractor.

8. Liquidated Damages and bonus: The contractor is liable to pay Liquidated Damages (LD) for each day of delay beyond the specified date of completion — subject to the total amount of damages not exceeding 10 (ten) per cent of the contract price.

However, the contractor is entitled to time extension arising out of delays on account of change of scope and Force Majeure, or delays caused by or attributable to the Procuring Entity.

If so provided in the Bid Document, the Procuring Entity is also liable to pay a bonus (normally should not exceed ten per cent) to the Contractor for completion of the project before the scheduled completion date.

If delays have happened in achieving the individual milestones but the overall project completion is within time, then LD deducted should be refunded (without any interest).

9. Supervision: Monitoring and supervision of construction are undertaken through the Procuring Entity's engineer — a qualified firm selected through a transparent process — acting as a single window for coordination with the contractor.

10. Staged payment, defects liability and grace period: Each item of work is further sub-divided into stages, and payment based on output specifications and performance standard is to be made for each completed stage of work.

  • A defects liability period of two years May be specified in the agreement in order to provide additional comfort to the Procuring Entity.
  • A grace period of say 30 days for achieving the individual project milestones as per payment schedule May be provided in the tender document, so that any unavoidable delay may be covered during the grace period. The applicability of Liquidated Damages would be beyond the grace period.

11. Model documents: FIDIC (Fédération Internationale Des Ingénieurs-Conseils — an International Federation of Consulting Engineers, known by its French acronym) has also published such contractual frameworks.

Model EPC contract documents have been developed for highways and railways and published by the erstwhile planning commission. NHAI has already adopted these documents, and all construction contracts are currently being structured on this model. The Ministry of railways has also started using such documents. Model bidding documents and Model EPC contracts, suitably revisited or modified wherever required to suit the requirements of particular sectors, may be adopted.

12. Capability of the Owner's Engineer: The selected Procuring Entity's Engineer (Consultant) has to have good experience in design, project supervision and works management.

The Procuring Entity organisation must have an experienced team (Works Committee) to super-check the quality of supervision exercised by the owner's engineer — including quality of design review, site supervision, quality audits, etc. Periodic audits of the Procuring Entity's engineer's functioning are desirable.

13. Third-party consultant: In complex projects, a third-party consultant be deployed for specific tasks like design audit, quality audits, safety audits, etc., to cross-check the Procuring Entity's engineer's diligence in the process.

14. Change of Scope and the right to match: The tender document should consist of provisions of change of scope in terms of specifications, omission of any work from the Scope of the Project, or any additional work. However, the total value of all change of scope orders should be limited (SAY 10%) of the contract price.

In the event the parties are unable to agree to the proposed change of scope, the Procuring Entity May award such works or services to any other party — preferably on the basis of open competitive bidding.

The contractor should have the option of matching the first-ranked bid in terms of the selection criteria, subject to payment of a certain percentage (say 2%) of the bid amount to the Procuring Entity. Such an option is possible when the contractor also participated in the bidding process and its bid did not exceed the first-ranked bid by more than 10%.

15. Sub-contracting: Sub-contracting by the EPC contractor must be limited and should not exceed 50% of the contract price. Any work to be sub-contracted by the main contractor must be brought to the notice of the Procuring Entity.

16. Qualification of sub-contractor: Preceding 3 years, at least one work of a similar nature with a contract value exceeding 40% of the value of the sub-contract to be awarded, and received payments in respect thereof for an amount equal to at least 80% of such contract.

Provided, however, that in any event the contractor shall communicate the name and particulars to the Procuring Entity for any sub-contract, including the relevant experience, prior to entering into any such sub-contract. Overall responsibility of all works lies on the contractor.

17. General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management on EPC (OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021):

  1. In EPC contracts, since primary responsibility to execute the work lies with the EPC contractor, success of the project also depends upon the quality of the tender document — wherein enough clarity on the broad framework for execution of the work and the obligations of the contractor needs to be built in.
  2. Milestones for payment to the contractor should be fixed in a manner that facilitates smooth cash flow for the contractor as well as for progress of the work. Milestones fixed should avoid excessive front loading or back loading — i.e., amount of payment should be commensurate with stage-wise quantum of work/ cost incurred. Milestones for payment should also be linked with the deliverables.
  3. In case of EPC contracts, only general arrangement drawings and architectural control parameters should be part of the EPC tender document. Timelines for submission of drawings by the contractors and approval thereof by the Competent Authority should be clearly prescribed in the tender document, wherein damages for non-adherence of such timelines May also be incorporated.
  4. EPC contracts shall specify broad technical specification and key output parameters. Over-specification of design May lead to increase in cost. Technical specifications shall be framed in such a manner as to allow sufficient freedom to the contractor to optimise design. Provisions on the following should be included in commercial conditions:
  5. i) limitation of liability for procuring entity as well as contractor;
  6. ii) deviation limits and procedure for change of scope;
  7. iii) contract closing timelines and procedure to ensure timely closing of contract;
  8. iv) performance parameters and Liquidated Damages for shortfall in performance;
  9. v) RISK MATRIX and RESPONSIBILITIES of the contractor and the procuring entity.
  10. In addition, a latent defect period beyond the defect liability period May be included to protect the procuring entity and public authority interest in case of any design/ engineering defect after the defect liability period is over, wherever appropriate.
  11. To mitigate the risk involved in the methodology proposed by the contractor, the project executing authority shall either have an in-house engineering, quality assurance and project management expert, or alternatively hire an experienced engineer to intensively examine the proposal submitted by the contractor. Project executing authorities are to ensure that optimal technological solutions are provided by the contractor.
  12. To ensure quality, regular inspection and quality checks must be carried out. The project executing authority shall carry out stage inspections in manufacturing of critical equipment/ critical activities of the project.

F. Public Private Partnership (PPP)

PPP means an arrangement between:

  • A Government/ statutory entity/ government-owned entity on one side — the Sponsoring (PPP) Authority, or simply the Authority; and
  • A private sector entity on the other — a legal entity in which 51% or more of equity is with the private partner/s — the concessionaire

— for the creation and/ or management of public assets and/ or public services, through investments being made and/ or management being undertaken by the concessionaire, for a specified period of time (concession period) on commercial terms, where:

  • there is a well-defined allocation of risk between the concessionaire and the Authority; and
  • the concessionaire — who is chosen on the basis of a transparent and open competitive bidding — receives performance-linked payments that conform (or are benchmarked) to specified and pre-determined performance standards, measurable by the authority or its representative.

G. Comparison of Types of ContractsW

Contract TypePayment StructureScope FlexibilityRisk to ContractorCommon Use Cases
Lump Sum ContractFixed price for the entire projectLowHigh (if costs are underestimated)Simple, well-defined projects
Item Rate ContractPayment based on rates for units of work/ materialsHighMediumProjects with variable quantities
Percentage Rate ContractPayment based on a percentage of a standard scheduleMediumMediumProjects with standardised rates
Piece Work ContractFixed rate per unit of work completedMediumDepends on productivityDiscrete unit work, as in repair works
EPC ContractPayment for design, procurement, and constructionLow (complete facility delivery)High (responsible for entire project)Large, complex projects
PPP ContractPayment based on performance and availability of servicesMediumShared between public and private entitiesInfrastructure projects, public services

4.3.4CONSULTANCY and NON-CONSULTANCY — the Service Contract TypesCNC

A. Lump Sum (Firm Fixed Price) Contract

1. The lump sum (firm fixed price) contract is the simplest/ simpler form of contract, and wherever feasible the Procuring Entity shall use this form of contract.

Consultants/ service providers are required to quote a lump sum fixed price figure for completing the services in accordance with:

  • C the given Terms of Reference;
  • NC the given activity and services Schedule.

The proposal is deemed to include all prices — no arithmetical correction or price adjustments are allowed during evaluation.

The Terms of Reference/ Schedule of Requirement shall indicate the scope and quantum of services required.

2. Why easy to administer: Lump sum contracts are easy to administer because there is a fixed price for a fixed scope, and payments are linked to clearly specified outputs/ milestones/ deliverables — Csuch as reports, documents, drawings, bills of quantities, software programs and so on.

Bidders quote a lump sum price for the required quantum of services. They May also be asked to quote a unit rate for the consultancy output/ service, to be used in case of variation, etc.

3. The Schedule of requirement shall indicate the quantum of the outputs/ services, its performance standards, and the timeline/ milestones of its delivery. Contract May specify parts of payments to be released at specified timelines/ milestones.

4. Where used:

  • C Widely used for simple planning and feasibility studies, environmental studies, detailed design of standard or common structures, preparation of data processing systems, and so forth.
  • NC Not many services are amenable to lump-sum type of contracts. Depending on the situation, such contracts may be used for transport services, logistics, clearing and forwarding, courier services, drilling, aerial photography, satellite imagery, mapping, and similar operations.

5. Lump Sum Contracts — Risks and Mitigations C(NC cross-refers to its Output Admeasurement risk table):

RISKMITIGATION
1. The quality and scope of the Output/ deliverables is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the consultant to Cut corners on quality and scope of the output/ deliverables by saving on resources employed. Disputes may arise due to different possible interpretations of quality and scope of assignment.Lump sum service contracts should be used mainly for assignments in which the quality, scope, and timing of the required output are clearly defined. The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payment should be made only against certificate of acceptance of deliverables.
2. Time over-run: As time is not linked to the payment, there may be a tendency for the consultant to save on deployment of resources, which may result in time-over-run.While the payments are not linked to time, the assignment should be monitored per month to ensure that the output per month is in line with the planned and estimated timeline.

B. Time-Based Contract — "Retainer-ship" C / "Unit-rate"NC

1. C In Time-based (Retainer-ship) contracts, payments are based on agreed hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates for staff (who in consultancy contracts are normally named) and on reimbursable items using actual expenses and/ or agreed unit prices.

The rates for staff include: Salary, social costs, overhead, fee (or profit), and — where appropriate — special allowances.

1. NC In Time-based (unit-rate) contracts, payments are based on agreed unit prices.This type of contract can be based either on input (more often) or output admeasurement.Payments are usually released every month for the quantum of inputs/ output actually performed.

2. C The Schedule of requirement shall indicate the quantum of inputs required — man-hours of different key and non-key personnel — qualifications of key personnel, reimbursable items, and the timeline/ milestones of its deliverables.

3. When to use time-based rather than lump sum — and the key distinction from Indefinite Delivery C:

Both time-based contracts AND indefinite delivery contracts are used when a lump sum contract is not feasible, due to difficulties in specifying:

  • the SCOPE/ LENGTH of consultancy services, or
  • the quantum of individual activities

— either because the inputs required for attaining the objectives of the requirement is difficult to assess, or because the services are tied up to contracts/ activities by others for which the completion period May vary.

4. Where used C: Widely used for complex studies, supervision of construction, advisory services, and most training assignments, etc.

5. Time-Based Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
1. The quality and scope of the Output/ deliverables — as in Lump-sum Contracts — is not linked to the payment. There may be a tendency for the consultant to cut corners on quality, scope, and timing of the output/ deliverables by saving on resources employed.The contract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, and a certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payments should be released only against such certificates.
2. Performance in each time period is not linked to the payment. There May be a tendency for the consultant to use paid staff in a dilatory and un-productive manner.Contracts need to be closely monitored and administered by the Procuring Entity to ensure that the progress of assignment is commensurate with the time spent, and that the resources for which payment is claimed have actually efficiently and productively been deployed on the assignment during the period. A system of MONTHLY REPORTING of payouts and quantum of work achieved by the consultant to the CA should be instituted to enable supervision.
3. Time and cost over-run is a major risk in Time-based contracts, as the payment is based on time, and delay May result in unanticipated benefit to the consultant and the assignment may get delayed.This type of contract should include an upper limit of total payments to be made to the consultants for the assignment, to safeguard against excessive prolonging of time and payments. After this limit is reached, or the period of completion is exceeded, the ca should review justification for extension of the contract.

C. Percentage (Success/ Contingency Fee) Contract

1. Percentage (success/ contingency fee) contracts directly relate the fees paid to the consultant/ service provider to the estimated or actual project cost, or actual value of assets/ transactions to be handled — e.g., project cost, or the cost of the goods procured or inspected.

The payment is made based on the value of assets/ transactions handled during the period.

2. The Schedule of Requirement shall indicate the estimated value of assets/ transactions to be handled, as well as the contract period (one year, unless otherwise stipulated) over which such volume shall be availed.

However, there shall be no firm commitment to avail the entire value of transactions within the contract period.

The final selection is made among the technically qualified consultants who have quoted the lowest percentage, while the notional value of assets is fixed.

3. Where used C: Commonly used for appropriate architectural services; Procurement and inspection agents.

4. Percentage Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
Quality and Scope not linked to payment (as in Lump-sum)Contract should include provision for evaluation of quality, scope and the timing of deliverables, and certificate for its acceptability may be recorded. Payment should be made only against certificate of acceptance of deliverables.
Time over-run — time not linked to paymentAssignment should be monitored per month to ensure output per month is in line with planned and estimated timeline.
Bias against economic solutions: Since the percentage payment is linked to the total cost of the project, in the case of architectural or engineering services, percentage contracts implicitly lack incentive for economic design and are hence discouraged.Therefore, the use of such a contract for architectural services is recommended only if it is based on a fixed target cost and covers precisely defined services.

D. Retainer and Success (Contingency) Fee Contract [C ONLY]

1. In Retainer and Success (Contingency) fee contracts, the remuneration of the consultant includes:

  • A retainer (time-based, monthly payment), and
  • a success fee (percentage-based) — the latter being normally expressed as a percentage of the estimated or actual project cost.

2. Where used: Widely used when consultants (banks or financial firms) are preparing companies for sales or mergers of firms — notably in privatisation operations. It can also be used for assignments related to organisational restructuring/ change.

3. Risks and Mitigations: All RISKS as applicable to both Percentage Contracts AND Time-Based contracts are encountered in this case. The same mitigation strategies as in both Percentage and Time-Based contracts may be adopted.

E. Indefinite Delivery Contract (Price Agreement)

1. These contracts are used when the Procuring Entity needs to have "on call" specialised services, the extent and timing of which cannot be defined in advance.

C adds:There is no commitment from the Procuring Entity for the quantum of work that May be assigned to the consultant.

The Procuring Entity and the firm agree on the unit rates to be paid, and payments are made periodically on the basis of the time/ quantum of service actually used during the period.

NC adds:This type of contract can be based either on input (more often) or output admeasurement.

2. Schedule of requirement: Shall indicate only a tentative estimate of the volume of required service/ outputs/ inputs, as well as the contract period (one year, unless otherwise stipulated) over which such volume is likely to be availed.

The services shall be availed on-call, as and when needed by the Procuring Entity, without any commitment regarding the volume of services.

The consultant/ service provider shall be selected based on the total price (unit rate multiplied by indicative volume) of such services/ inputs — including service charges and taxes — over the period of contract.

3. NC — the cross-monitoring rule: In case of OUTPUT ADMEASUREMENT contracts, if expressly STIPULATED in the Tender Document, the quantum of input deployments (Personnel, equipment etc.) shall also be called for — but shall be used only to monitor performance standards.

Similarly, in case of input admeasurement contracts, the quantum of services to be delivered per quantum of inputs deployed per day/ month May also be called for, to evaluate the quality and productivity of deployed inputs.

4. Where used: Commonly used to RETAIN "ADVISERS" or avail services 'ON-CALL' — for example:

5. Indefinite Delivery Contracts — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
1. Quality and Scope of the Output/ deliverables not linked to paymentContract should include provision for evaluation of quality and scope of deliverables, with certificate for acceptability; Payments released only against such certificates.
2. Performance in each time period not linked to payment — tendency to use resources in a dilatory and un-productive mannerClose monitoring and administration; Monthly reporting of payouts and quantum of work achieved to the CA.
3. Time and cost over-run is a major risk, as the output may not be achieved in the estimated timeUpper limit of total payments; after the limit is reached or the period exceeded, CA should review justification for extension.
4. Risk of over-utilisation C: Indefinite Delivery Contracts are at risk of being over-utilised in excess of actual need, since the scrutiny of service need May not be as intense as in case of other types of contracts.The need assessment of utilised services should be subject to some scrutiny, to ensure that there is no abnormal unexplainable trend in utilisation. Such contracts need to be closely monitored to ensure that there is no indiscriminate or unwarranted usage, and a maximum contract value May be laid down to keep control over usage, with approval of ca obtained to extend beyond such limit. A system of MONTHLY REPORTING to CA should be instituted. In the report, a monthly payout benchmark May be kept, above which the report May be required to be sent to a level above ca.

4.4Systems of Selection

4.4.1The Common RationaleWCNC

1. Why different systems exist: The relative importance of quality and price aspects May vary from contractor to contractor/ assignment to assignment, depending on:

  • The complexities/ criticality of quality requirements;
  • The internal capability of the Procuring Entity to engage and supervise the contract; As well as
  • the value of procurements.

Hence different systems of selection are designed to achieve appropriate relative importance (weightage) of quality and price aspects.

The decision on the system of selection is normally preceded by an assessment of the capacity of the user to engage and supervise the implementation of the proposed contract. The selection method chosen depends to some extent on this assessment. Selection of the system of selection should also consider the likely field of bidders.

2. The four systems:

W — WorksC — ConsultancyNC — Non-Consultancy
a)Price based System — Least Cost Selection (LCS)Price based System — LCSPrice based System — LCS
b)Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)QCBSQCBS
c)Fixed Budget based Selection (FBS) (C only)
d)Direct Selection: Single Source Selection (SSS)Direct Selection: SSSDirect Selection: SSS

3. The default rule — and it differs by category:

  • W In the procurement of WORKS, the NORMAL system of selection used is PRICE-BASED — least Cost Selection (L1) — as in the procurement of Goods, for technically responsive offers. Under VERY SPECIAL circumstances, Single Source Selection may also be used. HOWEVER, the QCBS method has been ALLOWED to be used for procurement of Works for highly technically complex and critical assignments where it is justifiable to pay appropriately higher prices for a higher quality proposal.
  • C — the two-stage rule:Since the quality and scope of a consultancy assignment are not tangibly identifiable and consistently measurable, the technical and financial capability of consultants becomes an important — though indirect — determinant for quality and scope of performance. In such a situation, value for Money is achieved by encouraging wide and open competition among equally competent consultants.

Thus, selection of consultants is normally done in a two-stage process:

  • First stage: Likely capable sources are shortlisted, on the basis of qualification and experience requirements for the given assignment — if need be, through an 'Expression of Interest' (EoI) through advertisement.
  • Second stage: The shortlisted consultants are invited to submit their technical and financial (RfP) proposals, generally in separate sealed envelopes. Evaluation of the technical proposal is carried out by evaluators without access to the financial part of the proposal. Financial proposals are opened after evaluation of quality.

4.4.2Price Based System — Least Cost Selection (LCS)

(Rule 193 of GFR 2017)

1. How it works: In this method of selection, bidders submit both a technical proposal and a financial proposal at the same time.

  • Minimum qualifying marks for the quality of the technical proposal are prescribed as a benchmark — normally 75 (seventy-five) out of a maximum of 100 (hundred) — and indicated in the tender document/ RfP, along with a scheme for allotting marks for various technical criteria/ attributes.
  • Alternatively — since in LCS selection, technical offers do not require to be ranked (or to have weighted technical score added to financial score, as in QCBS) — it would suffice in appropriately simple cases if the evaluation criteria is only a fail/ pass criteria prescribing only the minimum qualifying benchmark.
  • The technical proposals are opened first and evaluated, and the offers that qualify as per these technical evaluation criteria will only be considered as technically responsive; the rest will be considered technically non-responsive and will be dropped from the list.
  • Financial proposals are then opened for only eligible and responsive offers (financial bids of other unresponsive bidders remain unopened) and ranked.
  • The L-1 offer out of the responsive offers is selected on price criteria alone, without giving any additional weightage to marks/ ranking of the technical proposal.

This system of selection is roughly the same as the price-based selection of an l-1 OFFER (among the technically responsive offers) in the procurement of goods/ works.

2. Where suitable W: LCS is considered suitable for engaging contractors in most works procurement assignments that are of a standard or routine nature — such as construction works or non-complex engineering projects — where well-established practices and standards exist.

3. The default Rule: It is the simplest and the quickest system of selection, and under normal circumstances this method of evaluation shall be used as default, since it allows for minimum satisfactory technical efficiency with economy. Justification must be provided if a selection method other than LCS is to be used.

4. LCS — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) technical criteria May not be relevant to the realisation of the quality of the assignment.Technical criteria selected should be relevant and proportional to the requirement of quality of the assignment, and the selection process should be rigorous enough to ensure that — on the one hand — no technically unsatisfactory bids should be able to get past a loose criterion, and — on the other hand — no technically satisfactory offer should get ruled out by tight criteria.
b) marking subjectivity: The scheme of marking or its application may be subjective.It is important to lay down as objective a scheme of marking as possible. Cases where subjectivity is unavoidable (as in evaluation of methodology etc.) — a system of grading responses and their marking May be laid down in the bidding documents. The Procuring Entity should also have a system of conciliation and moderation of widely disparate markings by different members of the evaluation committee. W adds: *As mentioned above, in most works procurement a fail/ pass criteria is sufficient, and it avoids subjectivity.*

4.4.3Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)

(Rule 192 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: In the QCBS system of selection, both the quality of the proposal and the cost are considered as deciding factors. This approach is employed when the quality of deliverables is crucial, but the cost of service or work cannot be ignored.

2. The mechanics:

  • Quality/ technical scores are assigned to proposals based on specified quality criteria.
  • Minimum qualifying marks — normally 70–80 (seventy to eighty) out of a maximum of 100 (hundred) marks — as a benchmark for the quality of the technical proposal is prescribed, and proposals below this benchmark are not considered for financial evaluation.
  • The financial proposals are also given a cost-score based on the relative ranking of prices — with 100 (hundred) marks for the lowest and pro-rated lower marks for higher-priced offers.
  • The total score shall be obtained by weighting the quality and cost scores and adding them.
  • The proposed weightings for quality and cost shall be specified in the RfP/ tender document.
  • The firm obtaining the highest total score shall be selected.
  • It May be noted that, theoretically, a QCBS system with a weight of 100% (hundred percent) for the 'cost' approximates the price-based LCS system.
  • This method of selection shall be used for highly technically complex and critical assignments where it is justifiable to pay an appropriately higher price for a higher quality of proposal.

3. The suggestive weighting table [C only]:

DescriptionRemarksQuality/ Cost Score Weighting (%)
Highly complex/ downstream consequences/ specialised assignmentsUse QCBS with higher technical weightage80/20
Moderate complexityMajority of cases will follow this range75–65 / 25–35
Assignments of a standard or routine nature, such as auditors/ procurement agents handling the procurementUse of LCS is appropriate60–50 / 40–50

4.4.4The Quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) FrameworkWNC

A. When QCBS may be used

Procuring entities are ALLOWED to use QCBS for procurement of works and non-consultancy services in the following cases:

A) where the procurement has been declared to be a Quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) by the Competent Authority; Or

b) [NC only — the value route]: For procurement of non-consulting services, where the estimated value of procurement (including all taxes and option clause) does not exceed rs 10 CRORE — this method of selection shall be used for highly technically complex and critical assignments where it is justifiable to pay an appropriately higher price for higher quality of proposal.

C) the prohibitions: QCBS shall not be used in procurements planned to be done:

  • Wthrough two-STAGE BIDDING(where the Procuring Entity is unable to define the technical specifications or performance parameters with adequate clarity), or through REVERSE AUCTION, or through LIMITED TENDERS;
  • NC through REVERSE AUCTION or through LIMITED TENDERS.

The PRINCIPLES of QCBS shall be as provided in RULE 192(i), (ii), and (iii) of the GFR. (Refer to the Manual for Procurement of Consultancy Services for such principles.) However, the maximum weight of the non-financial parameters shall in no case exceed 30%.

B. The Competent Authority for allowing QCBS

A) for declaring a procurement as QOP:

i) Where the procuring entity/ project executing authority is covered by RULE 1 OF GFR (as amended by OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 08.03.2024):

  1. Secretary of the Ministry/ Department to which the procuring entity belongs; or
  2. Secretary of the public authority, with the concurrence of the Procuring Entity/ project executing authority;
  1. Where the public authority is any Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) or Indian Institute of Science (IISc) — the director of such IIT/ IISc. (This provision is applicable for procurement declared as QOP on or before 31.03.2027 and will be reviewed thereafter.)

ii) where the Procuring Entity is a CPSE — the board of directors of the CPSE.

iii) in case the authority to approve procurement on a nomination basis is lower than the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department (or board of directors in case of CPSEs), such authority will also be competent to approve the procurement as QOP.

B) [nc only] for non-consulting services not exceeding Rs. 10 crore in value: where the procuring entity/ project executing authority is covered by Rule 1 of GFR(i.e., Central Government Ministries/ Departments, attached/ subordinate bodies, and Autonomous Bodies — except those Autonomous Bodies with separate Financial Rules approved by the Government)by the officer or authority so designated.

C. The Special Technical Committee (STC)

a) Composition — in all cases of QOP, an STC shall be constituted with the following composition:

  • I) two or more persons who have expert knowledge and/ or long experience relevant to the procurement in question;
  • ii) one or more persons with extensive experience in handling public projects and/ or public finance in the Government or State/ Central public sector;
  • iii) one or more persons with experience in financial management/ financial administration/ audit/ accountancy;
  • iv) not more than one member representing the Procuring Entity, who May inter alia provide administrative support to the committee;
  • V) any person who is a member of the STC shall not associate himself in any manner with any bidder for the procurement concerned.

B) appointment: The names of members of the STC shall be decided either by the Competent Authority specified above, or by any other authority to whom such power is delegated by the Competent Authority. However, powers shall not be delegated to the officer or authority competent to finalise the particular procurement.

Sitting fee May be paid to the members of the STC. Incidental costs, including travel, shall be paid by the Procuring Entity.

C) mandate — the STC shall make specific recommendations on the following matters:

  • I) the weight to be given to non-financial parameters (not exceeding 30%). However, the weight for the "technical" shall be chosen considering the complexity of the assignment and the relative importance of quality. The proposed weightings for quality and cost shall be specified in the Tender Document.
  • ii) the specific quality/ technical parameters, their weights, their scoring methodology, the minimum qualification score, etc., and other relevant criteria necessary for ensuring fair and transparent quality/ technical evaluation of the bids.

D) binding force: The recommendations of the STC shall be followed, except where there are special grounds in public interest for deviating from them. However, every case of deviation from the recommendations of the STC shall require approval of the Competent Authority who approved the declaration of the procurement as QOP.

D. Grounds for Declaring a Procurement to be QOP

A procurement should be declared as a QOP only if there is enough justification in terms of:

  • Value addition, or
  • enhancement of delivery, or
  • paramount importance of quality.

Reasons for not adopting two-cover/ pre-qualification-based/ least-cost system shall be documented.

E. Tender Documents — Fixing/ Selection of the Evaluation/ Qualification Criteria

To ensure quality, some of the criteria used in marking May be made mandatory — and if a bidder does not meet those, then bids shall not be evaluated further.

Weightage May also be given for the timely completion of past projects of a similar nature by the bidder.

F. Pre-bid Meeting

In all cases of QOP, a pre-bid meeting shall be held, in which the technical criteria — including the marking scheme — shall be discussed with the potential bidders.

If any changes in the criteria are necessitated by such consultation, such changes shall require the recommendation of the STC.

G. Fixing of Scoring/ Marking Criteria

A) objectivity: The scoring should not be a variable that relies on the subjective opinion of the evaluating panel. The marking scheme should enable the achievement of almost similar scores irrespective of the persons/ experts involved in the evaluation process. When the outcomes are consistent with the available information, the QCBS parameters are more reliable. Unambiguous descriptions and criteria help to avoid grey areas, so as to ensure that there is only one possible score for the item. As far as possible, the criteria should be so specific and clear that bidders can self-mark their own bids.

B) the minimum threshold and why it must be set high: It is better to specify minimum marks for meeting the qualifying criteria specified. In QCBS selection, minimum qualifying marks (normally 70–80 out of a maximum of 100 marks) as a qualifying benchmark shall be prescribed and indicated in the tender document, along with a scheme for allotting marks for various technical criteria/ attributes. Bids scoring less than the minimum threshold shall not be considered for further evaluation.

C) fixed vs relative parameters: Examples of fixed quality parameters that ought not to be considered for relative scoring include organisations' ISO/ standards' accreditation, etc. These are required to establish the credentials of the contractor but cannot be used for relative comparison between various bidders.

D) past performance: Bidders should be asked to produce certificates for past performance. A format May be given in the tender itself outlining the contract details, completion, sustainability etc., and bidders May be asked to fill it and give evidence to that effect.

E) presentations: Bidders May be asked to submit a detailed presentation on their proposals in the form of a soft copy along with the bid, so as to facilitate better understanding of their proposal and to ensure commitment.

F) KPIs: Besides the BOQ output criteria for payment, key performance indicators (KPIs) May be specified with minimum achievement levels for payment, so as to ensure quality compliance.

H. Caution against Joint Ventures/ Consortium in QCBS ProcurementsWCNC

A) since quality is given weightage in the evaluation itself, in QCBS procurement, therefore, JVs May be avoided as far as possible. JVs could, however, become necessary in high technology or innovative projects where a single entity May not be able to execute the work alone.

B) if JVs are allowed, measures should be taken to ensure that all the JV partners are present and execute work all through the contract period. An implementation board with the participation of all JV partners May be provided for, wherein the Project Manager from the Procuring Entity shall also be allowed an audience when required. Meeting of JV partners with the project executing authority for quarterly progress review May be made a criterion linked to the achievement of key dates or even payment.

I. QCBS — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
A) inappropriate selection of QCBS: There is a possibility that the QCBS system is selected where LCS or other systems would have been more appropriate, considering the quality requirements or the capability of the Procuring Entity to monitor the assignment.The selection of QCBS should be justified and applied only under the circumstances mentioned above.
b) weightage of technical: Cost may not be proportional to quality requirements.Weightage different from 70:30 (seventy: Thirty) should be adequately examined and justified.
c) technical criteria May not be relevant to the realisation of the quality of the assignment.Technical criteria selected should be relevant and proportional to the requirement of quality of assignment, and the selection process should be rigorous enough to ensure that no technically unsatisfactory bids get past a loose criterion, and no technically satisfactory offer gets ruled out by tight criteria.
D) marking subjectivity: The scheme of marking or its application may be subjective.Lay down as objective a scheme of marking as possible. Where subjectivity is unavoidable (as in evaluation of methodology etc.), a system of grading responses and their marking may be laid down in the bidding documents. The Procuring Entity should also have a system of conciliation and moderation of widely disparate markings by different members of the evaluation committee.

4.4.5Fixed Budget based Selection (FBS) [C ONLY]

1. Its status: GFR 2017 provides three methods for selection/ evaluation of consultancy proposals — viz. QCBS, LCS and SSS. The Fixed Budget Based Selection (FBS) method is now also allowed for selection of consultants (General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management — DoE's OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29 October 2021).

2. How it works: In FBS, the selection process considers both the quality of proposals and the cost. FBS is a competitive method, encouraging consultants to provide high-quality services within the defined budget constraints:

A) fixed budget: In the Request for Proposal (RfP) document, a specific fixed budget is specified. Consultants must adhere to this budget, and their proposed cost cannot exceed it.

b) quality assessment: Consultants submit their proposals, and the evaluation considers the quality of these proposals. The proposal that scores the highest in quality — and is within the specified budget — is selected for award of contract. This assessment ensures that the selected consultant meets the project's requirements effectively, within the stipulated budget.

3. FBS May be used when: A) the type of consulting services required is simple and/ or repetitive and can be precisely defined; And b) the budget can be reasonably estimated, and set based on credible cost estimates and/ or previous selections which have been successfully executed; And c) the budget is sufficient for the consultant to perform the assignment.

4.4.6Direct Selection: Single Source Selection (SSS)

(Rule 194 of GFR 2017)

1. When permissible: Under some special circumstances, it May become necessary to select a particular contractor/ consultant/ service provider where adequate justification is available for such single-source selection, in the context of the overall interest of the Procuring Entity.

The selection by SSS/ nomination is permissible under exceptional circumstances such as:

  1. Tasks that represent a natural continuation of previous work carried out by the firm;
  2. In case of an emergency situation; Situations arising after natural disasters; Situations where timely completion of the assignment is of utmost importance;
  3. Situations where execution of the assignment May involve the use of proprietary techniques, or only one contractor/ consultant has the requisite expertise;
  4. At times, other PSUs or Government organisations are used to provide technical expertise. It is possible to use the expertise of such institutions on an SSS basis;
  5. Under some special circumstances, it may become necessary to select a particular contractor/ consultant where adequate justification is available in the context of the overall interest of the Ministry or Department. Full justification for Single Source Selection should be recorded in the file, and approval of the Competent Authority obtained before resorting to such single-source selection.

2. Safeguards: The Procuring Entity shall ensure fairness and equity, and shall have a procedure in place to ensure that: A) the prices are reasonable and consistent with market rates for tasks of a similar nature; And b) the required work/ services are not split into smaller-sized procurement.

3. Mandatory reporting of nomination awards: All works/ purchase/ consultancy/ non-consultancy contracts awarded on a nomination basis should be brought to the notice of the following authorities for information: a) THE SECRETARY, in the case of Ministries/ Departments; b) the board of directors or equivalent managing body, in case of Public Sector Undertakings, Public Sector Banks, Insurance companies, etc.; c) the chief executive of the organisation where such a managing body is not in existence.

  • I) the report relating to such awards on a nomination basis shall be submitted to the Secretary/ board/ chief executive/ equivalent managing body every quarter.
  • ii) the audit committee or similar unit in the organisation May be required to check at least 10% of such cases.

4. SSS — Risks and Mitigations:

RISKMITIGATION
a) inappropriate selection of SSS: There is a possibility that the SSS system is selected where LCS or other systems would have been more appropriate, considering the quality requirements or the capability of the Procuring Entity to monitor the assignment. The assignment May be split into parcels to avoid competitive selection systems, or to avoid obtaining higher-level approvals for SSS.Full JUSTIFICATION for single source selection should be recorded in the file, and approval of the Competent Authority obtained — the Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) should severely restrict powers for SSS selection. In direct selection, the Procuring Entity should ensure fairness and equity, and the required work/ services are not split into smaller-sized procurement to avoid competitive processes.
b) cost May be unreasonably high: The single contractor/ consultant is likely to charge unreasonably high prices.The Procuring Entity must have a procedure in place to ensure that the prices are reasonable and consistent with market rates for tasks of a similar nature. If necessary, negotiations May be held with the contractors/ consultants to examine reasonableness of quoted price.

4.5Tendering Systems

4.5.1The Common Rationale

Tendering systems are designed to achieve an appropriate balance between the countervailing needs for the 'right quality' and the 'RIGHT PRICE' — while the mode of procurement addresses the 'RIGHT SOURCE', and the TENDER DOCUMENT addresses the 'RIGHT QUANTITY' and 'right time and place' — under different complexities/ criticality of Technical requirements and value of procurements.

please note that the selection of a tendering system has to be based on the two factors mentioned above; Hence, just a value threshold for their use is discouraged. Selection should be based on professional judgement of the two factors mentioned above. (Stated expressly in G, W and NC.)

4.5.2The Systems Listed

G GoodsW WorksC ConsultancyNC Non-Consultancy
1. Single-Stage Tendering System
— a) Single Stage Single Envelope System
— b) Single Stage Two Envelopes System (Two Bid System) (Rule 163 of GFR 2017)
— c) Single Stage Two Envelopes System with PRE-QUALIFICATION[C ONLY]
2. Two Stage Bidding — Expression of Interest Tenders — Market Exploration/ Short-listing (Rule 164 of GFR 2017)

4.5.3Single-Stage Tendering System

In single-stage tendering, bids are invited at a single stage of submission. The bids can be stipulated to be either in a single envelope or in multiple envelopes.

A. Single Stage Single Envelope System

1. In a single-stage single-envelope system, eligibility, technical/ commercial details, and financial details are submitted together in the same envelope.

Evaluation is in the sequence of evaluated responsive prices (from L1 onwards), and their technical/ commercial compliance is checked.

The lowest-priced bid that meets the eligibility/ qualification criteria, technical and commercial conditions laid down in the tender documents is declared as successful.

2. Where suitable: This tendering system is SUITABLE where:

  • The technical requirement is simple or moderately complex;
  • The capability of the source of supply is not too crucial; And
  • the value of procurement is not too high.

This is the simplest and the quickest tendering system and should be the default system of tendering.

B. Single Stage Two Envelopes System (Two Bid System)

(Rule 163 of GFR 2017)

1. When used: In technically complex requirements — but where the capability of the source of supply is still not critical, and the value of procurement is not high — a Single-stage two-envelopes system may be followed.

2. Composition of the two envelopes (off-line tenders): Bidders should be asked to bifurcate their quotations into two separately sealed envelopes:

  • The first envelope — called the techno-commercial bid — contains the eligibility, technical quality and performance aspects, commercial terms and conditions and documents sought in the tender, except the price and relevant financial details.
  • The second envelope — called the financial bid — contains the price quotation along with other financial details.
  • Both the envelopes are to be submitted together in a sealed outer envelope.
  • In e-procurement, the bidder would be asked to upload two files, mutatis mutandis.

3. First opening: The techno-commercial bids are to be opened in the first instance on the pre-announced bid opening date and time, and scrutinised and evaluated by the TC with reference to parameters prescribed in the tender documents; And responsive, eligible, and technically compliant bidders are decided.

4. Second opening: Thereafter, the financial bids of ONLY The techno-commercially compliant offers are to be opened on a pre-announced date and time for further scrutiny, evaluation, ranking and placement of the contract.

  • In e-procurement, financial bids of technically non-compliant offers would remain encrypted and unopened.
  • In off-line tenders, the financial bids of technically non-compliant bidders should be returned unopened to the respective bidders by registered acknowledgement due/ reliable courier, or any other mode with proof of delivery.

4.5.4Two-Stage Bidding — Expression of Interest (EoI) Tenders — Market Exploration

(Rule 164 of GFR 2017)

1. The problem it solves: In the case of green-field/ blue-sky projects, where the equipment/ plant to be procured is COMPLEX, the procuring organisation May not possess the full knowledge of either the various technical solutions available or the likely sources for such products in the market.

To meet the desired objectives of a transparent procurement that ensures value for money and simultaneously ensures the upgradation of technology & CAPACITY BUILDING, it would be prudent to invite an Expression of Interest (EoI) bids as a first stage of the two-stage tendering system — to explore the market and finalise specifications based on technical discussions/ presentations with the experienced manufacturers/ suppliers in a transparent manner.

2. The four situations in which EoI bids May be invited: A) it is not feasible for the Procuring Entity to formulate detailed specifications or identify specific characteristics for the subject matter of procurement without receiving inputs regarding its technical aspects from bidders; B) the character of the subject matter of procurement is subject to rapid technological advances, market fluctuations, or both; C) the Procuring Entity seeks to enter into a contract for research, experiment, study, or development — except where the contract includes the production of requirements in quantities sufficient to establish their commercial viability or to recover research and development costs; Or d) the bidder is expected to carry out a detailed survey or investigation and undertake a comprehensive assessment of risks, costs and obligations associated with the particular procurement.

A. The Procedure of Two-Stage Bidding

1. First stage: The Procuring Entity shall invite EoI bids containing the broad objectives, technical and financial qualification criteria, terms and conditions of the proposed procurement, etc. — without a bid price.

On receipt of the Expressions of Interest, manufacturers/ suppliers which are prima facie Considered technically and financially capable of supplying the material or executing the proposed work shall be shortlisted.

2. Technical discussions: Thereafter, technical discussions/ presentations May be held with the short-listed manufacturers/ suppliers — giving equal opportunity to all such bidders to participate in the discussions.

During these technical discussions, the procurement agency May also add other stakeholders who could add value to the decision-making on the various technical aspects and evaluation criteria.

A proper record of discussions/ presentations and the process of decision-making should be kept.

3. Framing specifications: Based on the discussions/ presentations so held, one or more acceptable technical solutions could be decided upon — by laying down detailed technical specifications for each acceptable technical solution, quality benchmarks, warranty requirements, delivery milestones, etc. — in a manner consistent with the objectives of transparent procurement.

At the same time, care should be taken to make the specifications generic in nature, to provide equitable opportunities to the prospective bidders.

4. The limit on revision: In revising the relevant terms and conditions of the procurement, if found necessary because of discussions with the shortlisted bidders, the Procuring Entity shall not modify the fundamental nature Of the procurement itself.

5. Second stage: The Procuring Entity shall invite only those bidders whose bids at the first stage were not rejected, to participate in a two-envelope tendering in response to a revised set of terms and conditions of the procurement.

6. Right of withdrawal without penalty: Any bidder invited to bid but not in a position to supply the subject matter of procurement due to modification in the specifications or terms and conditions May withdraw from the tendering proceedings without forfeiting any Bid Security That he May have been required to provide, or being penalised in any way — by declaring his intention to withdraw from the procurement proceedings with adequate justification.

7. 'Non-committal' EoI: If the Procuring Entity is of the view that after the EoI stage there is a likelihood of further participation by many more bidders — and to avoid getting trapped into a legacy technology — the second-stage tendering May not be restricted only to the shortlisted bidders of the EoI stage, and it May be so declared in the EoI document ab initio.

Thereafter, in the second stage, normal OTE/ GTE tendering May be performed. Such a variant of EoI is called a 'non-committal' EoI.

Instances of 'non-committal EoI' should be rare, since it May de-incentivise the participants from giving a diligent/ sincere EoI. There should not be any bid-security requirement in such non-committal EoI.

B. Invitation of EoI Tenders

In EoI tenders, an advertisement inviting Expression of Interest should be published. The invitation to the EoI document should contain: a) a copy of the advertisement; b) objectives and scope of the requirement — a brief description of objectives and the broad scope of the requirement; it may also include the validity period of empanelment; c) instructions to the bidders — including the nature of supply, fees for empanelment (if EoI is for empanelment), last date of submission, place of submission and any other related instructions; d) formats for submission — the format in which the bidders are expected to submit their EoI; e) QUALIFICATION CRITERIA — the invitation to EoI should clearly lay down the qualification criteria that should be applied for shortlisting. The required supporting documents need to be clearly mentioned.

C. Evaluation of EoI

The bidders should be evaluated for shortlisting — inter alia — based on their past experience of performance in a similar context, financial strength, and technical capabilities, among others.

Each bidder should be assigned scores based on the sum of marks obtained for each parameter multiplied by the weightage assigned to that parameter.

All bidders who secure the minimum required marks (normally 60 (sixty) per cent) should be shortlisted. The minimum qualifying marks should be specified in the EoI document.

ALTERNATIVELY, instead of weighted evaluation, the EoI document May specify a 'FAIL-PASS CRITERIA' with the minimum qualifying requirement for each of the criteria — such as minimum years of experience, minimum number of assignments executed and minimum turnover. Under such circumstances, all bidders who meet the minimum requirement as specified should be shortlisted.

The shortlist should normally comprise at least four firms.

An example of EoI Qualification criteria G:

CriteriaSub-criteriaWeightage*Break-up of Weightage
Past experience of the firm with similar requirementsA\*
Financial strength of the vendorB\*
Turnover figures for the last three yearsB1\*
Net profit figures for the last three yearsB2\*
Quality accreditations, licensing requirementsC\*
Manufacturing capabilities/ tie-upsD\*
After-sales support infrastructureE\*
Product supportF\*

4.6Channels of Procurement

Public Procurement can be performed/ channelled by way of:

4.6.1Electronic Procurement (e-Procurement)

(Rule 160 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: Electronic procurement (e-procurement) is the use of information and communication technology (especially the internet) by the buyer (through a third-party e-procurement portal) in conducting procurement processes with the vendors/ contractors for the acquisition of goods (supplies), works and services — aimed at open, non-discriminatory, and efficient procurement through transparent procedures.

2. The mandate — and its two exceptions: It is mandatory for ministries/ departments to receive all bids through e-procurement portals that are gcqe compliant, for all procurements.

This condition will NOT Be applicable for:

  • the procurement made without QUOTATION (under RULE 154 of GFR, 2017); or
  • through PURCHASE COMMITTEE (under RULE 155 of GFR, 2017).

3. No mixing of Manual and electronic bids: Normally, in e-procurement, no physical/ off-line tender documents are provided, nor are any Manual bids accepted. It is not a good practice to call both electronic and Manual bids in the same tender.

4. Exemption — Global Tender Enquiry: In Global Tender Enquiry (by any mode — open tender, limited tender or single tender), e-procurement May not be mandatorily insisted upon. However, e-publishing would still be mandatory.

5. Exemption — national security and missions abroad: In individual cases where national security and strategic considerations demand confidentiality, ministries/ departments May exempt such cases from e-procurement — after seeking the approval of the concerned Secretary and with the concurrence of financial advisers.

In case of tenders floated by Indian missions and CPSE units abroad, the Competent Authority for deciding the tender May exempt such cases from e-procurement.

6. The portals: Note the different names used by the four Manuals for the NIC portal:

  • G"The National Informatics Centre (NIC) has an e-Procurement portal called Government e-procurement of NIC (gepnic)."
  • C"National Informatics Centre (NIC) has an eProcurement portal called the Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP)."

There are other service providers in the public sector (e.g., MSTC) and private sector that can be utilised for e-PROCUREMENT. Details about the process of e-procurement are available from the service providers.

7. Which portal a Ministry should use: Ministries/ departments that do not have a large volume of procurement, or carry out procurements required only for the day-to-day running of offices, and have not initiated e-procurement through any other solution so far — May use the e-procurement solution developed by NIC.

Other ministries/ departments May either use the e-procurement solution developed by NIC, or engage any other service provider — G adds: (Gcqe compliant) — following due process.

8. These instructions will not apply to procurements made by ministries/ departments through Government E-marketplace (GeM).

4.6.2Mandatory Procurement of Goods and Services through GeM

(Rule 149 of GFR 2017)

1. What an online marketplace is: An online marketplace (or e-commerce marketplace) is a type of e-commerce site where several sellers offer products or services, and all the buyers can select the product/ services offered by any one of the sellers based on his own criteria.

In an online marketplace, the purchaser's transactions are processed by the marketplace operator, and then products/ services are delivered and fulfilled directly by the participating retailers. Other capabilities might include auctioning (forward or reverse), catalogues, ordering, posting requirements by purchasers, payment gateways, etc.

In general, because online marketplaces aggregate products from a wide array of providers, selection is usually wider, availability is higher, and prices are more competitive than in vendor-specific online retail stores.

2. The mandate: The Government of India has established the Government E-marketplace (GeM) for common-use goods and services. The procurement process on GeM is end-to-end — from placement of contract orders to payment to suppliers. This is to ensure better transparency and higher efficiency. All the processes will be electronic and online.

The procurement of goods and services through the GeM portal by ministries/ departments (including attached/ subordinate offices), CPSEs, and autonomous bodies is mandatory for goods or services available therein, as per Rule 149 of GFR, 2017.

3. Supplier registration: Products and services are listed on GeM by various suppliers, as on other e-commerce portals. Supplier registration on geM is online and automatic, based on:

4. Demand aggregation: The best prices for a user can be available if the same requirements and demands of various organisations are aggregated. This Acts as an incentive for the supplier to quote their best price. For the same products, the demand of various Government departments can be clubbed together, and Reverse Auction can be done based on aggregate demand, which will provide the best prices to the Government.

5. The GeM monetary thresholds — Rule 149 of GFR, 2017:

ValueProcedure
a) UP TO Rs. 50,000/-through any of the available suppliers on the GeM, meeting the requisite quality, specification, and delivery period.
Note 1: In the case of automobiles, direct procurement under this sub-para is permitted without any ceiling limit.
Note 2: In case the item is available on GeM, it is not permitted To purchase the same under Rule 154 of the GFR, 2017.
B) above Rs. 50,000/- and up to Rs. 10,00,000/-through the GeM seller having the lowest price amongst the available sellers, of at least three different manufacturers, ON GeM — meeting the requisite quality, specification, and delivery period.
The tools for online bidding and online Reverse Auction available on GeM can be used by the buyer even for procurements less than Rs. 10,00,000/-.
Note 1: In case the item is available on GeM, it is not permitted To purchase the same under Rule 155 of the GFR, 2017.
c) above Rs. 10,00,000/-through the supplier having the lowest price meeting the requisite quality, specification, and delivery period — after mandatorily Obtaining bids, using online bidding or Reverse Auction tool provided on GeM.

D) the invitation for the online e-bidding/ Reverse Auction will be available to all the existing sellers or other sellers registered on the portal who have offered their goods/ services under the particular product/ service category, as per the terms and conditions of GeM.

E) the above-mentioned monetary ceiling is applicable ONLY for purchases made through GeM. For purchases, if any, outside GeM, relevant GFR Rules shall apply.

F) the ministries/ departments shall work out their procurement requirements of goods and services on either "opex" model or "capex" model as per their requirement/ suitability at the time of preparation of budget estimates (be), and shall project their annual procurement plan of goods and services on GeM portal within 30 (thirty) days of budget approval.

g) it is the responsibility of the Procuring Entity to do due diligence to ensure the reasonableness of rates. The government buyers may ascertain the reasonableness of prices before placing an order using the BUSINESS ANALYTICS (ba) tools available on geM — including the last purchase price on geM, the department's own last purchase price, etc.

H) demand for goods shall not be divided into small quantities to make piecemeal purchases, to avoid procurement through L-1 buying/ bidding/ Reverse Auction on GeM, or the necessity of obtaining the sanction of higher authorities required with reference to the estimated value of the total demand."

6. GeM Portal: https://gem.gov.in — Detailed instructions for user organisation registration, supplier registration, listing of products, terms and conditions, online bidding, Reverse Auction, demand aggregation, call centre, etc., are available on this portal.

7. Uploading of non-availability report — gemar&pts: It is mandatory for a buyer to generate a "GeM availability report and past transaction summary" (gemar&pts) with a unique id on the GeM portal using his login credentials, for procurement outside GeM (for example, for procurement through the Central Public Procurement Portal)(Notified vide OM No. F.6.18.2019-PPD dated 11th June 2021).

The past transaction summary will be provided, where available.

"Gemar&pts" shall be a pre-requisite for arriving at a decision by the Competent Authority for procurement of required goods and services by floating a bid outside GeM, and its unique id would be required to be furnished on the publishing portal along with the tender proposed to be published.

8. Interaction with Rules 154 and 155:

  • Purchase of goods without quotation Can be resorted to for value up to Rs. 50,000/- only on each occasion — without inviting quotations or bids — based on a certificate to be recorded by the Competent Authority, only when the required goods are not available on GeM.
  • In case a certain item is not available on the GeM portal, purchase of goods costing above Rs. 50,000/- and up to Rs. 5,00,000/- on each occasion May be made on the recommendations of a duly constituted local Purchase Committee.

9. Buying outside GeM when the item is on GeM: Where an item is available on GeM, and the Ministry/ Department/ organisation wants to buy outside the GeM in view of any compelling circumstances, the approval of the standing committee of GeM (SCoGeM) And the Secretary concerned Shall be required (OM No. F.6/15/2018-PPD dated 05.02.2020).

10. Receipt of Materials and Payment Procedures: Further details are given in Annexure 36 of the Goods Manual.

11. Push Button Procurement (PBP) on GeM(Notified vide OM No. F.6/7/2022-PPD dated 06.09.2022):

a) The rationale: As per Rule 144(vii) and Rule 149 of GFR, 2017, the procuring entity should satisfy itself that the price of the selected offer is reasonable. SOMETIMES — ESPECIALLY INFREQUENTLY — Government buyers find it difficult to certify the reasonableness of rates. Such users normally do not possess the requisite skills to make procurement decisions. It delays the procurement process.

At the same time, for typically low-value procurements, efforts expended in assessing the reasonability of rates May be disproportionate. Additionally, with developments in technology and e-procurement becoming the norm, the availability of market activities and the capability to analyse them artificially have provided an opportunity to automate decision-making activities, such as the assessment of the reasonability of rates in such cases.

b) The seven conditions of PBP:

  • I) PBP will be made only on GeM through bidding — PBP through direct purchase, L-1, custom-bid, etc., are not permitted.
  • ii) the total procurement value of the specific case is permitted up to rupees five (5) lakh, inclusive of all taxes.
  • iii) this will be an additional Method of procurement, and procuring entities are free to use or not to use this additional method.
  • iv) this method can be used only if at least five bids Are received. In case fewer than five bids are received, the procurement is to restart using the usual procurement modes. However, buyers will have a choice to extend the PBP date once by three (3) days At the time of preparation of the tender document, in case of lesser participation.
  • V) no splitting of requirements is to be done to bring procurement under this method.
  • vi) once a bid is invited on GeM, the contract will be placed directly by GeM without any human intervention [provided condition (iv) above is complied with].
  • vii) GeM will permit this method only for such categories where at least ten sources Are listed.

c) GeM has published a Manual on PBP for buyers on its website.

4.6.3Procurement through Centralised Agencies or other Organisations

Departments/ Organisations that have not built up their own capability for procurement May engage procurement agents — for individual procurement or as outsourcing of service — with the approval of the Competent Authority.

Many canalised agencies authorised by the Government, and some CPSEs, provide end-to-end procurement services — i.e., framing procurement documents, bidding process, evaluation, and contract management.

Possibilities of other ministries/ departments or their attached and subsidiary offices undertaking such procurement may also be explored.

Appendix to Chapter 4 — Part a: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 4 · W: CHAPTER 3
2Chapter titleG:Modes of Procurement and Tendering Systems · W/C/NC:Bidding Design for …
3Agency for Procurement (PWO / PSU / MoHUA notification / Works Committee / Sample MoU)W ONLY
4Rs 60 lakh direct-execution ceiling for repair worksW ONLY
5Award to a PSU treated as project management consultancy; competition on lump sum service chargesW ONLY
6Admeasurement of Services — input vs outputnc only
7"Types of Contracts" sectionabsent from goods entirely; W has 7, C has 5, NC has 4
8Item Rate, Percentage Rate, Piece Work, EPC, PPPW ONLY
9BOQ variation bands (±10–15% allowed; ±25–30% needs CA sanction)W ONLY
10EPC 10% change-of-scope ceiling; LD capped at 10%; bonus ≤10%; 2-year defects liability; 30-day grace period; sub-contracting ≤50%W ONLY
11EPC technical capacity thresholds (60% one project / 40% two / 30% three); net worth 15%W ONLY
12Right of the EPC contractor to MATCH the first-ranked bid on payment of ~2%W ONLY
13Retainer-ship cum Success (Contingency) Fee ContractC ONLY
14"Risk of over-utilisation" as a fourth risk row in Indefinite Delivery contractsC ONLY
15Consultancy staff "normally NAMED" in Time-Based contractsC ONLY
16Percentage contract discouraged for architectural services unless on fixed target costC (NC carries the type but not this caution in the same terms)
17"Systems of Selection" sectionabsent from goods entirely
18QCBS weightage — invertedC: Technical 70% / Cost 30%, technical never more than 80% · W & NC: Cost 80% / Technical 20%, non-financial never EXCEEDING 30%
19QCBS suggestive weighting table (80/20 · 75-65/25-35 · 60-50/40-50)C ONLY
20Fixed Budget based Selection (FBS)C ONLY
21Quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) declaration frameworkw + nc only
22Special Technical Committee (STC) — composition, appointment, mandate, binding forcew + nc only
23IIT/ IISc Director as Competent Authority for QOP, valid up to 31.03.2027w + nc only
24Rs 10 crore value route to QCBS for NC Services, and the "crossing Rs 10 crore" 10% rulenc only
25QCBS prohibited in two-STAGE BIDDINGW ONLY (NC prohibits only Reverse Auction and Limited Tenders)
26Mandatory pre-bid meeting in all QOP cases; changes to criteria need STC recommendationw + nc only
27Consultancy shortlist: Not fewer than 3, not more than 8C ONLY
28EoI shortlist should normally comprise at least four firms; minimum 60% marksG (applied by cross-reference to W/C/NC)
29"Single Stage Two Envelopes System with PRE-QUALIFICATION" listed as a distinct tendering systemC ONLY
30Full text of the tendering systemsG ONLY — W, C and NC all expressly cross-refer to Goods Ch. 4 "for the sake of brevity"
31NIC portal namedg: Gepnic · c: CPPP
32eRA placed under CHANNELSW (3.5.2) + NC (4.6.2) · G places it under MODES (4.5) · absent from c
33GeM monetary thresholds, GeMAR&PTS, SCoGeM approval, Push Button ProcurementG ONLY in full (C/NC reproduce parts; W does not)
34Automobiles exempt from the Rs 50,000 direct-purchase ceiling on GeMG ONLY
35PBP conditions — Rs 5 lakh cap, at least 5 bids, one 3-day extension, at least 10 listed sources, no human interventionG ONLY
36Nomination awards reported QUARTERLY; audit committee to check AT least 10% of such casesW + C + NC (common)
37"Justification must be provided if a selection method other than LCS is used"W (states it as an express default rule)

end of Chapter 4 — part a

Part IIModes of Procurement

Merging: Goods Ch. 4 paras 4.1–4.13 · Works Ch. 3 paras 3.6–3.14 · Consultancy Ch. 4 para 4.3 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 4 para 4.4

The Most Important Caution in this Chapter

The Threshold Divergence Table — the Single Most Examinable Page in this Chapter

ThresholdG GOODSW WORKSC CONSULTANCYNC NON-CONSULTANCY
OTE (Open Tender Enquiry) applies aboveRs. 50 lakhRs. 10 lakhRs. 50 lakhRs. 50 lakh
LTE (Limited Tender Enquiry) is the default up toRs. 5 lakh to Rs. 50 lakhup to Rs. 10 lakhup to Rs. 50 lakhup to Rs. 50 lakh
SLTE (Special LTE) applies for procurements more THANRs. 50 LAKHRs. 10 LAKHRs. 50 lakhRs. 50 lakh
Rule cited for the LTE/SLTE thresholdRule 162Rule 139(v) AND Rule 162Rule 162Rule 162
GTE restrictionNo GTE up to Rs. 200 croreSame — Rs. 200 croreSameSame
Direct Procurement without Quotationup to Rs. 50,000(Rs. 1,00,000 for Scientific Ministries)(subsumed in "Award of Work through Quotations")up to Rs. 50,000up to Rs. 50,000
Direct Procurement by Purchase Committeeabove Rs. 50,000 and up to Rs. 5,00,000(up to Rs. 10 lakh for Scientific Ministries)(not carried)up to Rs. 5 lakhup to Rs. 5 lakh
Award of Work through Quotations(not carried)up to Rs. 5 lakh — works only(not carried)(not carried)
Rate Contract viability thresholdaggregate requirement more than Rs. 50 lakh p.a.(cross-refers)(cross-refers)(cross-refers)

Concordance for Chapter 4 — Part B

UnifiedModeGoodsWorksCSNCS
4.7Modes of Procurement — the taxonomy4.13.64.34.4
4.8Open Tender Enquiry (OTE)4.23.7(listed only)(listed only)
4.9Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) + Rs 200 crore restriction4.33.8(listed only)(listed only)
4.10Rate Contract (RC)/ Framework Agreement (FA)4.4(listed only)(listed only)(listed only)
4.11Electronic Reverse Auction (eRA)4.53.5.2 (under Channels)absent4.4-3-a)-iii + 4.6.2
4.12Pre-qualification Modes — PQB4.63.9(listed only)(listed only)
4.13Approved Vendor List (AVL)4.7(cross-ref only)(cross-ref only)(cross-ref only)
4.14Limited Tender Enquiry (LTE)4.83.10(listed only)(listed only)
4.15Special Limited Tender Enquiry (SLTE)4.93.11(listed only)(listed only)
4.16Proprietary Article Certificate (PAC)4.10absent(listed only)(listed only)
4.17Single Tender Enquiry (STE)/ Selection by Nomination4.113.12(listed only)(listed only)
4.18Direct Procurement without Quotation4.12(listed only)4.4-7
4.19Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee4.13(listed only)4.4-7
4.20Award of Work through Quotations3.13
4.21Award of works in stalled contracts3.14
4.22Mode selection by value — Non-Consultancy Services4.4-5 to 4.4-7

4.7Modes of Procurement — the Taxonomy

1. The balance to be struck: Offers from prospective bidders in Public Procurement must be invited according to a procedure that achieves a balance between the need for the widest competition, on the one hand, and the complexity — GNC Add: Time, effort, and cost — of the procedure, on the other hand.

Different modes of procurement (W, C, NC add: and tendering systems) are used to suit various procurement circumstances to achieve this balance. Various modes of procurement vary the extent of competition (width and specificity of catchment area of bidders) to suit different procurement situations.

Mode of procurement addresses the 'right source' of the 5Rs.

2. Delegation:There are laid-down delegations of powers to approve different modes of procurement to various competent authorities as shown in DFPR(G Annexures 2 and 3 · W, C, NC Annexure 1). Each Procuring Entity May also publish its own Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) delegating such powers within the entity(G Annexure 4 · W, C, NC Annexure 2).

4.7.1The Five (or Six) Families of Modes — Compared Across the Four Manuals

FamilyG GOODSW WORKSC CONSULTANCYNC NON-CONSULTANCY
A) advertised modes(widest possible competition through wide publicity — Rule 161)OTE · GTE · Rate Contracts · eRAOTE · GTEOTE (above Rs 50 lakh) · GTE (restricted below Rs 200 cr)OTE (above Rs 50 lakh) · GTE · eRA
b) pre-qualification modes(restricted to shortlisted pre-qualified bidders; shortlisting itself through wide publicity akin to advertised tenders)PQB · AVLPQB · AVL (cross-ref to Goods para 4.7)PQB · AVL (cross-ref)PQB · AVL (cross-ref)
c) restricted modes(restricted to known, selected bidders; shortlisting based on less rigorous checks of capability and past experience — Rule 162)LTE (up to Rs 50 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 50 lakh)LTE (up to Rs 10 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 10 lakh)LTE (up to Rs 50 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 50 lakh)LTE (up to Rs 50 lakh) · SLTE (above Rs 50 lakh)
d) nomination modes(from a single source in special circumstances — Rule 166)PAC · STE without PACSTE or Selection by Nomination only — NO PACPAC · STE without PACPAC · STE without PAC (NC cites RULE 204 GFR, not Rule 166)
e) shopping modes(without tendering or calling for formal bids, for small-value procurements — Rules 154, 155)Direct Procurement without Quotation · Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee"Award of Work through Quotations/ Shopping Modes" — Procurement of Works through QuotationsDirect Procurement without Quotation · by Purchase CommitteeDirect Procurement without Quotation · by Purchase Committee
f) framework agreements/ rate contracts(listed as a SEPARATE family)(RC is under Advertised Modes)listed separately as family (f)listed separately as family (f)listed separately as family (f)

W additional footnote: *"Please also refer to RULE 139 of GFR 2017 regarding the thresholds for modes of procurement pertaining to Works."*

W descriptions of AVL and Framework Agreements:

  • AVL: "Procurement is restricted to contractors who have been pre-approved and included on a long-term multi-use list based on their demonstrated ability to meet the required standards."
  • Framework Agreements: "Also known as RATE CONTRACTS, are agreements with contractors to execute works at pre-agreed rates during a specified validity period."

4.8Open Tender Enquiry (OTE)

(Rule 161 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: In Open Tender Enquiry (OTE) — also known as national competitive bidding (ncb), or simply advertised tender enquiry, but this Manual would stick to OTE — an attempt is made to attract the widest possible competition by publishing the NIT simultaneously on the designated websites.

This is the default mode of procurement and gives the best Value for Money, but the procedure is relatively complex and prolonged. The systemic cost of this procedure May be high enough to be unviable for smaller-value procurements.

2. When OTE procedures — through e-procurement or through traditional tendering — should be adopted:

a) Procurements exceeding the threshold of:

  • [G, C, NC] — Rs. 50 lakh (Rupees Fifty Lakh);
  • W — Rs. 10 lakh (Rupees Ten Lakh) in works procurement;

B) all requirements with clear technical specifications;

c)G For requirements that are ordinarily available in the open market, it is necessary to evaluate competitive offers to decide the most suitable and economical option available;

W For requirements that can ordinarily be fulfilled by the players available in the open market, it is necessary to evaluate competitive offers to decide the most suitable and economical option available;

d) G When requirements are not available from known sources, or sources are presently limited and need to be made broad-based. In such situations, even for procurements below Rs. 50 lakh, the OTE mode May be used if warranted.

W When the requirement cannot be fulfilled from known contractors, or contractors are presently limited and the requirement is to be made broad-based. In such situations, even for procurements below Rs. 10 lakh, the OTE mode May be used if warranted.

4.8.1Terms and Conditions

1. No restriction on participation:

  • G There should be no restriction on participation by prospective bidders who meet the eligibility criteria. Especially, prior registration with the Procuring Entity should not be insisted upon. However, bidders who are already registered are also free to participate.
  • W Participation should not be restricted to only bidders enlisted with the Procuring Entity. Bidders already enlisted are also free to participate. However, a requirement that successful un-enlisted bidders May have to get enlisted with the Procuring Entity before the contract is placed on them May be mentioned in the tender document.

2. Advertisement:

  • G Advertisements in such cases should be given on the GOVERNMENT e-MARKETPLACE (GeM) as well as ON GeM-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) at www.eprocure.gov.in.
  • W Advertisements in such cases should be given on the GeM-Central Public Procurement Portal (GeM-CPPP) at www.eprocure.gov.in. (no separate GeM mention)

an organisation that has its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website. The Procuring Entity should also post the complete tender document on its website and gem-cppp to enable prospective bidders to make use of the document by downloading it. The advertisements for the tender invitations should give the complete web address from which the tender documents can be downloaded.

While it is no longer mandatory to issue advertisements in newspapers, there is no bar to issuing such advertisements if the procuring entities consider them necessary.

To promote wider participation and ease of bidding, no cost of tender documents May be charged for the tender documents downloaded by the bidders.

3. Free availability: The sale/ availability for downloading of tender documents against NIT should not be restricted and should be available freely. Tender documents should preferably be sold/ made available for download up to the date of tender opening (W: "up to the tender closing date and time").

4. Model Tender Document: The tender documents should be prepared based on the relevant approved Model Tender Document (MTD) for the procurement category.(Further details on preparing tender documents are provided in G Chapter 5 · W Chapter 4.)

5. Records in off-line tenders: The Procuring Entity shall maintain proper records about the number of tender documents sold, the list of parties to whom sold, details of the amount received through sale, and the number of unsold tender documents — which are to be cancelled after the opening of the tenders.

6. Currency: In domestic tenders, bids can be submitted only in INR, and any bid in foreign currency should be summarily rejected. Foreign bidders can also participate if they submit a bid in INR. However, purchase preference for local content as per the PPP-MII shall apply.

7. Consortium bidding in domestic open tenders: In the case of a domestic open tender for projects (including turnkey projects) allowing consortium bidding, a foreign bidder can be a consortium member — subject to the condition that the consortium as a whole Meets the minimum local content criteria, as per the Make in India order, 2017.

The leader of the consortium can be a foreign party, and the bids are to be solicited in Indian rupee only — i.e., no payment can be made in foreign currency to the foreign consortium member.

4.8.2OTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. The crux of this mode is attracting bids from all possible prospective bidders. The risk is that this May not be achieved, even after incurring the extra cost of open tendering. This could be due to:
a) Insufficient publicity;
b) Hindrances in the availability of tender documents;
c) Insufficient time for bid preparation; or
d) Due to the onerous cost of tender documents or EMD
it should be ensured that the NIT on the website is easily searchable and visible, not hidden under layers of clicks. The matter should not be left entirely to the website or media publicity alone. Due diligence should be done to locate likely bidders. All registered vendors/ contractors — in particular past successful vendors/ contractors — should be given intimation about forthcoming tenders via sms/ mail/ email.

Further, a limited or open tender that results in only one effective offer Shall be treated as a Single Tender Enquiry situation, with relevant powers of approval, etc.

It should also be ensured that there is no impediment to the issue/ access of tender documents.

Ordinarily, the due date fixed for the opening of the tender shall be a minimum of 21 (twenty-one) days from the date of advertisement, which may vary considering the nature of the material called for and delivery requirements. The due date may be subsequently extended with the approval of the ca only if it is felt necessary to have better competition.

The tender documents shall be priced minimally (if at all priced), keeping in view the value of the tender as well as the cost of preparation and publicity of the tender documents.

EMD should be sufficient to ensure that bidders honour their bids but, at the same time, should not be large enough to reduce competition.
2. Lack of clarity in description/ specification of requirement, or undue stringency in qualifying criteria or other conditionsMitigations of such risks can be addressed at the time of need assessment and procurement planning (please refer to Chapter 2) to attract adequate competition.

4.9Global Tender Enquiry (GTE)

(Rule 161 of GFR 2017)

1. What it is: GTE — also known as international competitive bidding (icb), but this Manual would stick to GTE — is like OTE, but through appropriate advertising and provision for payment in foreign currencies through Letter of Credit, it is aimed at inviting the participation of inter alia Foreign firms.

Bids in foreign currency in any other mode of procurement shall be summarily rejected.

Subject to restriction on GTE (Para 4.9.2 below), GTE can ALSO Be in SLTE, LTE or STE mode if justified with proper approvals as per SoPP.

The point of balance between VfM and the cost/ complexity of the procedure is further aggravated as compared to OTE. The development of local industry also needs to be kept in mind.

2. Hence, GTE may be viable only in the following situations:

G GOODSW WORKS
aWhere goods of required specifications/ quality May not be available within the country, and alternatives available in the country are not suitable for the purpose, it is necessary to also look for suitable competitive offers from abroadWhere required technology/ specifications/ quality are not available within the country and alternatives available in the country are not suitable for the purpose
bnon-existence of a local branch of the global principal of the manufacturer/ vendors/ contractorsnon-existence of a local branch of the global principal of the contractors
crequirement for compliance with specific international standards in technical specificationsrequirement for compliance with specific international standards in technical specifications
dabsence of a sufficient number of competent domestic bidders likely to comply with the required technical specifications, and in case of suspected cartel formation among indigenous biddersin case the requirement cannot be executed by indigenous contractors at reasonable rates

4.9.1Terms and ConditionsGreproduced in abridged form in W

1. Advertisement — as in OTE (see para 4.8.1-2 above).

2. Free availability of documents — as in OTE.

3. Pricing of documents — the tender documents shall be priced minimally (if at all priced), keeping in view the value of the tender as also the cost of preparation and publicity of the tender documents.

4. Language and standards: GTE tender documents must be in english and must contain technical specifications that are in accordance with national requirements or else based on an international trade standard.

5. E-procurement: In Global Tender Enquiry, e-procurement May not be mandatorily insisted upon. (But e-publishing remains mandatory — see Part A, para 4.6.1-4.)

6. Notice period: The due date fixed for the opening of the tender shall be a minimum of four weeks From the date of advertisement — which may vary considering the nature of the material called for and the time required to prepare the bids. The due date may be subsequently extended with the approval of the CA to promote better competition and also considering the delivery requirement.

7. Incoterms: Relevant INCOTERMS (presently 2020 version) should be included in the tender.

8. Currency of Bidding G: In GTE, foreign bidders have the flexibility to quote prices and receive payments in either Indian rupees OR Freely convertible currencies such as US dollars, euros, pound sterling, yen, other relevant currencies, or a combination thereof.

However, prices for goods, works, or services (including agency commission) performed or sourced in India Must be quoted and paid for in Indian rupees.

Indian bidders are required to quote in INR only. During the evaluation, all quoted prices are converted into Indian Rupees.

9. Agency Commission G: The amount of agency commission — normally not exceeding five per cent — payable to the Indian agent (who shall provide self-attested documentary evidence about their identity and business details to establish that they are a bona fide business and conform to regulations) should not be more than what is specified in the agency agreement (a certified copy should be submitted along with the financial bid) between the bidder and the Indian Agent.

Agency commission shall be paid by the Procuring Entity in India in equivalent Indian rupees On satisfactory completion of the project or supplies of goods and spares.

The Indian agent will be required to submit a certificate along with their agency commission bill, confirming that the amount claimed as agency commission in the bill has been spent/ will be spent strictly to render services to the foreign principal, in terms of the agency agreement.

The Procuring Entity or their authorised agencies and/ or any other authority of the Government of India shall have rights to examine the books of the Indian agent, and defects or misrepresentations in respect of the afore-indicated confirmation coming to light during such examinations will make the foreign principal (i.e., the contractor) AND Their Indian agent liable to be debarred from having business dealings with the purchaser, following laid-down procedures for such debarment.

10. Delivery Terms G: The delivery terms are to be expressed in terms of INCOTERMS.

As per the revised policy of the Government(Ministry of Shipping's No. SC-18013/1/2013-ASO-I dated 08.09.2015):

  • All Public Procurement import contracts involving ocean freight of dry or liquid bulk cargoes Are to be finalised only on a FOB (free on board)/ FAS (free alongside ship) BASIS, and in case of any departure therefrom, prior approval of the concerned administrative Ministry/ Department May be obtained.
  • However, imports involving ocean freight of general liner cargoes, project cargoes, heavy lift, container, break bulk cargoes, etc., can now be made on FOB/ FAS/ CFR (cost & freight)/ CIF (cost, insurance & freight)/ DDP (delivery duty paid at named place) BASIS.
  • All importing Government departments/ pses can now make their own shipping arrangements without needing to route their requirements through the chartering wing of the Ministry of shipping.
  • As per the extant directive of the Government, airlifting of imported goods from abroad will be done only through an Indian carrier, wherever applicable.

11. Insurance G: Wherever necessary, the goods supplied under the contract shall be fully insured in a freely convertible currency against loss or damage incidental to manufacture or acquisition, transportation, storage and delivery as specified in the contract.

  • If considered necessary, the insurance may be done for coverage on an "all RISKS" basis, including war risks and strike clauses.
  • The amount covered under insurance should be sufficient to cover the overall expenditure incurred by the purchaser for receiving the goods at the destination.
  • Insurance for imported goods/ equipment would need to be arranged very carefully and only for cases where the value of individual shipments is expected to be more than rupees five crore.
  • Procuring entities with substantial import contracts May arrange "open cover (all risk)" annual insurance for all imports during the year with insurance companies, instead of insurance for each import separately.
  • Where delivery of imported goods is required by the purchaser on CIF/ CIP/ DDP Basis, the supplier shall arrange and pay for marine/ air insurance, making the purchaser the beneficiary.
  • Where delivery is on a FOB/ FAS Basis, marine/ air insurance shall be the purchaser's responsibility.

12. Taxes on imports G: Import of goods or services or both attracts integrated tax (IGST). The IGST rate and GST cess shall be applicable on the 'customs assessable value' PLUS The 'basic customs duty applicable thereon'.

Foreign bidders shall indicate the break-up of prices for: Freight, insurance, customs duty, port handling charges, clearing agency charges, related ITC (hs) code, IGST/ GST cess, and related HSN code, as relevant to the quoted price basis.

4.9.2Restrictions on Global Tenders up to Rs. 200 Crore

1. The bar: No Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) shall be invited up to Rs. 200 crore, or any limit as May be prescribed by the Department of Expenditure from time to time.

2. The relaxation route: In exceptional cases where the Ministry or Department feels that there are special reasons for inviting GTE for tenders below such limit — including those in SLTE/ LTE mode or on a single tender basis — it May record its detailed justification and seek prior approval for relaxation From the Competent Authority specified by the Department of Expenditure.

a) The GTE Portal: The agencies/ subordinate offices under the administrative control of a Ministry/ Department that require to float a GTE for procurement of certain products/ items/ services shall submit their applications and comments online Through the GTE portal under the e-samiksha platform via https://esamiksha.gov.in/GTE_NFEProposalForm.aspx OR https://cabsec.gov.in/more/globaltenderenquiryproposal/ — starting from 5TH May 2022. No physical application will be received.

b) 'GTE portal', a user-friendly IT application under the e-Samiksha platform, was developed by the cabinet secretariat (ID No. 213/2/1/2021-C.A.IV dated 02.05.2022). For more details, refer to GTE Guidelines on the eSamiksha portal.

3. The two mandatory pre-conditions before sending a GTE proposal:

A) a domestic open tender MUST Be floated first to identify the domestic manufacturers/ service providers for the items/ services for which approval is being sought for issuance of Global Tenders.

The proposal must contain the details of domestic open tenders issued after 15.05.2020, covering:

B) the proposal must contain details of deliberations with DPIIT/ relevant industrial bodies regarding the identification of domestic manufacturers/ service providers.

4. The eight exemptions from the Rs. 200 crore restriction:

a) specialised research equipment: For procurement of specialised equipment required for research purposes, and spares and consumables for such equipment, for the use of educational and research institutes — the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department concerned shall be the Competent Authority to approve the issue of GTEs, subject to fulfilment of conditions in sub-para 5 below. The equipment should be of a specialised nature and required for research purposes, not the routine equipment used in offices. (OM No. 4/1/2021-PPD dated 11.06.2021)

b) ICT items: Gtes for procurement of ICT items, software and hardware such as blade servers, SAN storage, LAN switches, mobile testing devices, cloud orchestration & system software, network & web apts, mobile testing tools, integrated backup system (ibs), etc. Can be issued with the approval of the Secretary concerned, instead of Secretary (coordination), until further orders. (OM No. F.4/1/2022-PPD dated 29.08.2022)

c) nomination-basis procurements(as no competitive tenders are invited), inter alia including:

  • I) procurement of spare parts of the equipment/ plants & machinery, etc., on a nomination basis from original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) or original equipment suppliers (OES) or original part manufacturers (opms). (For this purpose, 'Spares' shall be taken to include CONSUMABLES for such equipment.)(OM No. 12/17/2019-PPD dated 29.10.2020)
  • ii) procurement of services like Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) and auxiliary/ add-on components for existing equipment/ plant & machinery, etc., which are procured from OEM/ OES/ OPM on a nomination basis. (OM No. F.4/1/2021-PPD dated 01.09.2021)

d) PRE-15.05.2020 contractual commitments: Where procuring entities need to issue GTEs to fulfil contractual commitments/ obligations entered by them before 15.05.2020 — i.e., a bid has been submitted by them to their clients before 15.05.2020. Similarly, where procuring entities need to issue GTEs in view of existing collaboration agreements they entered with foreign suppliers before 15.05.2020. (OM No. 4/1/2021-PPD dated 12.03.2021)

e) medical devices and drugs: Based on the reference received from the Ministry of Health & Family Welfare (MoH&fw), GTE can be floated for 354 medical devices AND 120 DRUGS (placed in Annexure 31 of the Goods Manual). These exemptions for medical devices and drugs are provided UP TO 31.03.2027 Till further orders. It is further clarified that:

  • I) the machine system includes spare parts and accessories, which May be procured by procuring entities together or separately.
  • ii) the Procuring Entity concerned May frame the detailed technical specifications for the above devices as per their requirement. (OM No. 4/1/2023-PPD(pt.) dated 28.06.2024 for devices; OM No. F.4/1/2023-PPD(pt) dated 07.06.2024 for drugs)

f) mdb/ bfa-funded projects: Projects funded by multilateral development banks (MDBs like The World Bank, Asian Development Bank, etc.)/ bilateral funding agencies (BFAs), where the procurement is governed by the conditions negotiated in the loan agreement, and where the project executing agencies from time to time further award works to various Autonomous Bodies/ CPSEs etc. — the Secretary of the Ministry/ Department responsible for execution of such project shall be the Competent Authority for approval for issuance of GTEs by such autonomous bodies/ CPSEs. (OM No. F.7/12/2021-PPD-I dated 27.07.2021)

g) semiconductor equipment: Procurement of SEMI-CONDUCTOR EQUIPMENT for the purpose of MANUFACTURING ELECTRONICS, and procurements by public-funded semiconductor and display fab facilities (including such facilities in institutes of high learning) — UP TO 31.03.2025. (OM No. F.4/1/2022-PPD-II dated 01.04.2022 and OM No. F.4/1/2023-PPD dated 23.03.2023)

h) procurement abroad for use abroad: GTE restriction up to Rs. 200 crore is not applicable for bona-fide procurements done outside India for use outside India, by CPSEs having international operations or by Indian missions abroad. Such entities should ensure that the bulk of procurement is done in India (and exported for their use abroad), as far as feasible — so as not only to promote Make in India but also to improve export performance.

5. The seven conditions attached to exemption 4(a) — Educational and Research Institutions

Educational, Research institutions, and other units will make full efforts towards reducing imports in the following manner. This will result in substantial effects both within the institutions and through impact on the eco-system:

  1. Efforts should be made to promote technology transfer through agreements, or to encourage technological collaboration with foreign manufacturing in India with the start-ups set up in research parks.
  2. Sharing and updating information about the availability of research equipment across various Indian institutes on a single portal — the I-STEM portal has been developed for this purpose — so that the needy institutes can utilise those.
  3. Without compromising quality, institutes should indicate alternative/ equivalent technical specifications that could suit their requirement, so that there are more chances for local manufacturers to participate in the tender process.
  4. Regular interaction between academia and Indian industry organisations at the level of the institution about the requirement of equipment of foreign origin and for encouraging domestic manufacturing.
  5. Regular requirements of proprietary/ non-proprietary research consumables May be assessed, and domestic alternatives May be explored for use.
  6. The office of psa initiates a national-level programme for indigenous development of scientific equipment.
  7. Without compromising quality, institutes should be flexible with specifications so that domestic manufacturers are encouraged to meet requirements.

6. Guidelines for resorting to GTE (research institutions): a) market assessment should be done by the concerned institution, as certified by the head of the institution. Only after no Indian manufacturer is found Should a GTE be issued. B) in case no Indian manufacturer/ suppliers are found, procurement May be done through GTE, subject to compliance with provisions of GFR and the requirement of procurement through GeM. C) dean (r&d) or an appropriate authority within the institute will issue certificates as per sub-para 7 below before inviting GTE. As a reporting matter in the board of governors, such certificates should be tabled and shared with the office of the psa, DPIIT, and the concerned administrative Ministry. d) The information about the procurement of equipment should be shared across various educational and research institutes through the i-stem portal. This will allow the equipment to be used by other institutions for research purposes too. e) analyse the equipment being procured time and again from abroad and help develop them in India by identifying potential manufacturers and providing them with technical assistance and expertise. This programme will be coordinated by the empowered technology group (constituted by Cabinet and chaired by the principal scientific adviser — psa). Half-yearly reports on this action are to be shared by the institutes with the office of the psa, DPIIT, and concerned administrative Ministry. f) preference for local suppliers over foreign suppliers, as per the existing Government of India guidelines, should be observed as applicable.

7. The three certificates to be issued: A) certification that locally available alternatives with equivalent specifications are not suitable for research purposes. B) the non-availability of such equipment for research purposes with nearby research institutes or within the institute. C) certification of the requirement of proprietary items of foreign origin for research purposes (where applicable).

4.9.3GTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
Risks are the same as in OTEthe same mitigation as in the case of OTE also applies here.
The involvement of foreign bidder agents in GTE procurements is also a major risk area.Procurements should preferably be made directly from the manufacturers. Either the agent on behalf of the foreign principal OR The foreign principal directly could bid in a tender — but not both. Further, in cases where agents participate in a tender on behalf of one manufacturer, they should NOT Be allowed to quote on behalf of another manufacturer along with the first manufacturer. Commissions and scope of services to/ by the agents should be explicit and transparent in the bids/ contracts.

4.10Rate Contract (RC)/ Framework Agreement (FA)Gtext; W/C/NC list it as a separate family and cross-refer

4.10.1Definition

A Rate Contract (commonly known as rc) is an agreement between the purchaser and the supplier for the supply of specified goods (and allied services, if any) at a set price and terms & conditions (as incorporated in the agreement) during the period covered by the Rate Contract.

No quantity is mentioned, nor is any minimum drawable quantity guaranteed in the Rate Contract.

The Rate Contract is a standing offer From the supplier firm. The firm and/or the purchaser are entitled to withdraw/ cancel the Rate Contract by serving an appropriate notice on each other, giving suitable notice (say thirty days).

However, once a supply order (also called withdrawal order) is placed in terms of the Rate Contract, during the validity period of the Rate Contract, on the supplier for the supply of a definite quantity — that supply order becomes a valid and binding contract.

4.10.2The Nine Items Amenable to Rate Contract

The following types of items can be advantageously procured through Rate Contracts:

  1. Goods that are regularly or repetitively required by more than one Procuring Entity/ organisation.
  2. The quantities required cannot be accurately forecast.
  3. Individual requirements of procuring entities may be small, but the total aggregate requirements of all the procuring entities are more than rs. 50 lakh per annum.
  4. The item has detailed specifications, drawings, and descriptions.
  5. Prices of the items are stable — or, if prices are variable, they can be determined through a Price Variation Clause.
  6. Items are not scarce/ critical/ 'perpetually in short supply' goods or services.
  7. Demand for the item is not seasonal, since Rate Contract holders May shy away from supplying the item during high seasonal demands and dump supplies during low demand season.
  8. Spares used for maintenance of expensive equipment/ machines, from OEMs, to facilitate uninterrupted supply of genuine spares.
  9. Consumables used by advanced research, development and scientific institutes/ organisations of the Government of India(e.g., glass wares, plastic wares, chemicals, bio-chemicals etc. — the examples are illustrative, not exhaustive).

4.10.3Merits of Rate Contract

a) Benefits to USERSb) Benefits to SUPPLIERS
I) competitive and economical price due to aggregation of demandsi) reduces marketing costs and efforts
ii) saves time, effort, person-hours, and related costs involved in the time-consuming and repetitive tender process — thus reduces lead time for procurementii) eliminates repetitive tendering and follow-up actions with multiple authorities
iii) availability of quality goods with full quality assurance backupiii) provides single-point contact for govt. Supplies
iv) enables procurement as and when required — thus reduces inventory carrying costiv) aggregation of govt. Demand leads to economic production
V) advantageous even to small users and those located in remote areasV) improves the credentials of the company
vi) provides one single point of contact to procure such itemsvi) promotes quality discipline

4.10.4Terms and Conditions

1.Conclusion of Rate Contracts, including Parallel Rate Contracts

a) any organisation can enter a Rate Contract for items amenable to the Rate Contract for its procuring entities' use (e.g., in different geographical regions/ subsidiaries). A Central purchase organisation can also enter a Rate Contract for several organisations that require the subject goods. No indents are required to enter a Rate Contract; Only an estimate of the annual requirements Of different ultimate users is needed.

Inspection and testing of such goods or services, wherever required, may be arranged by the agency entering into the rate contract.

The agency entering the Rate Contract should post the descriptions, specifications, prices and other salient details of the entire rate-contracted goods or services, appropriately updated, on its website for use by the procuring entities.

B) mode: Rate Contract enquiries should preferably BE THROUGH e-procurement or Open Tender Enquiry — but Limited Tender Enquiry/ Single Tender Enquiry can also be used if justified by the nature of the requirement. Specific special terms and conditions for the Rate Contract should be added to the Tender Documents.

C) past performance review: Performance against earlier/ current rate contracts of past/ current Rate Contract holders shall be critically reviewed Before they are considered for award of new rate contracts. Specific performance and achievement criteria as on a selected cut-off date are to be evolved for this purpose and incorporated in the tender enquiry document. The tenderers will be asked to furnish the relevant details (along with their bids) to enable the purchaser to judge their performance and achievement against the past/ current rate contracts.

d) Evaluation: Procedures stipulated for evaluation of bids and award of contract shall be applicable mutatis mutandis In the finalisation of Rate Contract — including provisions for negotiations/ counter-offer and splitting of contracts (parallel contracts).

E) parallel rate contracts: Depending on the anticipated demand of the item, location of the users, capacity of the responsive bidders, reasonableness of the prices quoted, etc. — parallel rate contracts May be awarded to more than one (preferably at least three) supplier. For transparency and to avoid criticism, all such parallel rate contracts are to be issued simultaneously, as far as feasible.

2.Period of Rate Contract

A Rate Contract should typically be for one year for stable technology products. However, in exceptional cases, a shorter or longer period of not more than two years May be considered.

As far as possible, the validity period of rate contracts should be fixed in such a way as to ensure that new budgetary levies would not affect the price And thereby frustrate the contracts.

Attempts should also be made to stagger The period of rate contracts for different items throughout the year.

3.The Nine Special Conditions Applicable for Rate Contract

A) the Procuring Entity May prescribe the amount of Bid Security in the tender document.

B) no quantity is mentioned in the Schedule of requirement; Only the anticipated drawable quantity is mentioned without commitment.

C) the purchaser reserves the right to conclude one or more than one Rate Contract for the same item.

D) the purchaser and the supplier May short-close The Rate Contract by serving suitable notice to each other. The prescribed notice period is generally fifteen to thirty days.

e) Re-negotiation and repeat bidding: The purchaser can re-negotiate the price with the Rate Contract holders even during the validity If market conditions change significantly — or undertake repeat competitive bidding through open/ advertised tenders on the same terms and conditions, including specifications, during the validity period of existing valid r/cs. In such cases, the existing r/c holders can bid, apart from the new eligible bidders, and equal and fair opportunity would be provided. If the prices received are found lower than the existing r/c prices, new r/cs May be awarded at reduced prices, and existing r/cs at higher prices May be short-closed — giving adequate notice — if they do not match such reduction in prices under the fall clause.

F) in an emergency, the purchaser May purchase the same item through an ad hoc contract with a new supplier.

G) the purchaser and the authorised users of the Rate Contract are entitled to place supply orders up to the last day of the validity Of the Rate Contract — and though supplies against such supply orders will be delivered beyond The validity period of the Rate Contract, the terms & conditions of the Rate Contract will guide all such supplies.

h) the fall clause — the price safety mechanism in rate contracts:

The fall clause provides that if the Rate Contract holder reduces its price, or sells, or even offers to sell The rate-contracted goods or services (following conditions of sale similar to those of the rate contract) at a price lower than the Rate Contract price, to any person or organisation During the currency of the Rate Contract — the Rate Contract price will be automatically reduced with effect from that date for all subsequent supplies under the Rate Contract, and the Rate Contract amended accordingly.

Other parallel Rate Contract holders, if any, are also to be allowed to reduce their price by notifying the reduced price to them, giving 07 (seven) days To intimate their revised prices, if they so desire, in a sealed cover to be opened in public on the specified date and time, and further action taken as per standard practice.

The four exceptions — the provisions of the fall clause will NOT Apply to:

  • I) export/ deemed export by the supplier;
  • ii) sale of goods or services as original equipment At prices lower than the price charged for routine replacement;
  • iii) sale of goods (such as drugs) which have expiry dates;
  • iv) sale of goods or services at lower prices —
  • 1) on or after the date of completion of placement of order of goods by the Procuring Entity, under the existing or previous rate contracts;
  • 2) under any previous contracts entered with the Central or State Government departments, including new undertakings (excluding joint sector companies and/ or private parties) and bodies.

I) the fall clause certificate: The Rate Contract holder shall furnish the following certificate to the concerned paying authority along with each bill for payment of supplies made:

4.Performance Security

Depending on the anticipated overall drawable annual quantity against a rate contract, and the anticipated number of parallel rate contracts to be issued for an item — the Department May consider obtaining Performance Security @ 3% to 5% of the value of supply order In the supply orders issued against rate contracts on the Rate Contract holder.

5.Placement of Supply Orders

a) Who may place them: Procuring entities nominated (CALLED direct demanding officers — DDO) in the Rate Contract can place supply/ withdrawal orders in terms of the rate contract during the validity period of the rate contract on the Supplier for the supply of definite quantities. An indent with required administrative and financial approvals is required before A supply order can be placed.

Alternatively, the organisation managing the Rate Contract can centrally administer the placement of withdrawal orders against indents from the constituents.

b) The mandatory-use rule and its small-value escape: Once a Rate Contract is available, all nominated procuring entities (DDOs) must mandatorily Procure the item only through supply orders on the Rate Contract holders.

In case of an emergency, if a Procuring Entity directly procures rate-contracted goods or services from the suppliers — the prices to be paid for such goods or services shall not exceed Those stipulated in the Rate Contract, and the other salient terms and conditions of the purchase should be in line with those specified in the Rate Contract. However, they May be permitted to procure a small value of their requirements directly — say up to Rs. One lakh at one time and not more than Rs. 5 lakh annually — following relevant procedures.

C) upper threshold on supply orders: The Procuring Entity May stipulate an upper threshold of value for supply orders received against the Rate Contract by the rc holder. Except with prior approval of the Procuring Entity, the contractor shall not comply With the supply orders received from the ddos exceeding such threshold amount.

D) the five criteria for choosing among parallel rc holders: All parallel rcs for an item — even at differential rates — are assumed to be at reasonable rates. The Procuring Entity can select any rc holder, following transparent and equitable criteria. The following factors May be kept in view:

  • I) the Rate Contract price.
  • ii) the past performance of firms with reference to their capacity, quality of supplies, as well as timely delivery of the goods.Procuring Entities should maintain suitable records for past performance with respect to timely delivery and quality.
  • iii) there is a need for reputed brands in the case of sensitive, critical, and vital requirements.
  • iv) the proximity of the Rate Contract holder, where proximity is considered crucial for timely delivery, ease of progressing, and from the point of view of logistics and contract management, etc.
  • v) the delivery dates committed by various Rate Contract holders with respect to the delivery requirements of the Procuring Entities.

E) the delivery-time problem in rate contracts: In rate contracts, if the time FOR delivery is not fixed by mutual agreement, IT IS not the essence of the contract AND IS not binding On the supplier. Therefore, no Liquidated Damages can be levied for non-supply or delay in supply against such orders.

That being so, under section 46 of the contract Act, the goods are only to be delivered within a "Reasonable time" — which is a rather vague concept.

But where there has been an unreasonable delay in delivery, the direct demanding officer (DDO) has the right to give the contractor notice, fixing a reasonable time FOR delivery of the goods and stipulating that delivery within the time specified shall be the essence of the contract. If the goods are not delivered within this period, the supply order can be cancelled by the agency that finalised the Rate Contract (Since he alone, not the DDO, is a party to the Rate Contract), and deficient performance is noted for future rate contracts.

f) The cure — obtaining a prior delivery commitment: However, in cases where the delivery date stipulated in the relevant order has been expressly agreed to by the supplier in writing before placing the relevant order — Liquidated Damages CAN Be recovered (by the agency that entered into the Rate Contract) from the supplier on account of delay in delivery beyond the stipulated delivery date — provided the agency that finalised the Rate Contract has not in any way interfered with the supplier's discretion to meet the said supply order by directing the supplier to give priority to some other supply orders. Therefore, it is advisable that, before placing the supply order On a Rate Contract holder, a commitment is obtained from him for the delivery period.

g) Approval before ordering: Before creating the supply order, approval of the ca (depending on the value of procurement) May be taken by submitting information about all the available parallel rcs And justifying the selection of a particular rc holder.

h) The ten essential details of a supply order:

6.Renewal of Rate Contracts

It should be ensured that new rate contracts are made operative right after the expiry of the existing rate contracts without any gap for all rate-contracted items.

In case it is not possible to conclude new rate contracts for some special reasons, timely steps are to be taken to extend the existing rate contracts with the same terms, conditions, etc., for a suitable period, with the consent of the Rate Contract holders.

Rate contracts of the firms who do not agree To such extension are to be left out.

Also, while extending the existing rate contracts, it shall be ensured that the price trend is not lower.

4.10.5RC — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. A Rate Contract is not the right mode For critical, strategic, and vital requirements, since the buyer-seller relationship is TRIPARTITE, and the timely supply of requirements and penalties thereof cannot be strictly enforced as in other modes.

In situations where items have inadequate annual or seasonal capacities in the market, the rc holders May dump material On the Procuring Entity during the wrong seasons and starve Them during working seasons. This happens in, say, CEMENT — where government buyers are likely to be saddled with huge supplies during the rainy season, but RC holders may divert the bulk of supplies to the private market during the working season.

RC Purchase is not SUITABLE for requirements of dynamic technological and price changes — e.g., PCs, laptops, tablets, servers, and mobile phones — where the price of older models may crash as soon as a new model is announced. RC holders may slow down supplies initially but dump supplies when prices crash in the market.
Rcs May be avoided for critical/ strategic and vital requirements.

For seasonal and short-supply items, procuring entities May monitor and provide clauses to prevent dumping and starving of supplies.

In technologically fast-changing products, the Procuring Entity May keep an eye on market prices and re-negotiate them as soon as market prices fall significantly due to new arrivals.
2. The existence of rcs May not be adequately made known to possible users. Moreover, the reverse risk is that many different offices May keep procuring the same item independently — thus missing the potential benefits of bulk prices and simplified processes if such items were brought under an rc.The descriptions, specifications, and other salient details of all rcs should be appropriately updated and made available on the Procuring Entity website as well as the e-procurement portal. The e-procurement system should be able to offer alerts About the availability of rc if an attempt is made to float a tender for the same item. To derive benefit from bulk prices in rc, all offices should furnish to the rc agency their annual requirement of items to enable the finalising of RCs after inviting quotations.
3. Rc procurements are at risk of being ordered more than actual requirements, since the procurement scrutiny may not be as intense as in the case of other modes of procurement.The quantity being ordered should be subject to the same level of scrutiny As in other modes of procurement, to ensure that there is no abnormal, unexplainable trend in procurement.
4. Wherever there are PARALLEL RCs for the same item from several firms, there May be intense and often unhealthy lobbying (including corrupt practices) from them to seek orders.1. Procuring entities must put in place adequate guidelines to handle rc procurements — including a transparent system of choosing the rc holders by rotation In a transparent manner in case of parallel rcs. (Suggested criteria at para 4.10.4-5-d.) The delegation of powers in this regard should also be restricted, keeping these risks in view.
2. The Procuring Entity should maintain suitable records of rc firms for past performance with respect to timely delivery and quality.
3. Wherever there are FAILURES against the rate contract in terms of timely delivery and quality of goods, such failures should be reported to the agency that entered the Rate Contract, and direct alternate procurement action May be taken to ensure the timely availability of quality materials to meet the needs of the Procuring Entity.

4.11Dynamic Price Discovery — Electronic Reverse Auction (eRA)

(Rule 167 of GFR 2017)

4.11.1What eRA Is

Electronic Reverse Auction (eRA — a type of auction classified as a dynamic procurement mode) is an online real-time purchasing technique used to select a successful bid.

eRA IS AN iterative process with automatic evaluation of bids, where bidders can offer successively more favourable bids to displace the lowest bid at any given moment within the duration of the era.

The following four parameters are announced before the start Of the online Reverse Auction:

if a new lower bid is received within the last few minutes (pre-announced, say five minutes) of closing time, the closing time May get automatically extended by a few minutes (pre-announced, say ten minutes) for others to respond. A maximum number of such extensions May be pre-announced (say 50).

The most favourable bid at the end of the stipulated/ extended time is declared as successful. It has, however, to be ensured that the entire process is conducted transparently and fairly.

4.11.2The Four Reasons Why Caution Is Advised

Electronic reverse auctions can be a powerful tool for procuring goods and services, but they also come with potential risks and drawbacks:

A) quality and supplier relationships: In an era, the focus is on price, and suppliers May be forced to cut corners To win bids — affecting the overall quality of the product or service. Additionally, aggressive bidding can strain supplier relationships, leading to long-term negative effects.

b) value for Money: While reverse auctions can drive down immediate costs, THEY may not optimise Value for Money. Factors like Total Cost of Ownership, lifecycle costs, innovation, reliability, sustainability, and strategic alignment May get overlooked.

C) lack of technology development: Suppliers May hesitate to invest in innovation or process improvements if they are constantly pressured to lower prices. This can hinder long-term competitiveness and limit the introduction of new technologies or ideas in hi-tech goods and services.

D) risk of supplier dropouts: Aggressive bidding can lead to suppliers dropping out of the market segment, reducing competition. If critical suppliers exit, it can disrupt the supply chain and impact availability.

4.11.3Where eRA Is Appropriate, Where Caution Is Needed, and Where It Is Inappropriate

A) a Reverse Auction Would Be Appropriate Where:

  • I) items are commodities, commercially-off-the-shelf items;
  • ii) it is feasible to formulate a detailed description of the subject matter of the procurement;
  • iii) there is a competitive market of bidders (say more than five) anticipated to be qualified to participate in the era, so that effective competition is ensured;
  • iv) the criteria to be used by the Procuring Entity in determining the successful bid are quantifiable and can be expressed in monetary terms.

B) Where Caution is Needed in Using Reverse Auction:

  • i) In the case of repetitive/ regularly procured items, future procurements May be affected, as there may not be the same type of price reduction in future procurements as in the first Reverse Auction. Procuring entities May face a situation of not being able to justify the higher rates received subsequently.
  • ii) where it is proposed to issue parallel orders by splitting the total order quantity among more than one supplier, a Reverse Auction May be avoided. However, in such a case, if the Reverse Auction is resorted to, then there should be adequate suppliers available — i.e., if the quantity is to be split into n parts, then suppliers available should be at least N+3.

C) Reverse Auction Would NOT Be Appropriate For:

  • I) the requirement is not of high enough value to generate competitive pressures on bidders;
  • ii) items of strategic/ critical/ vital/ high technically complex nature; Items that are in short supply in the market;
  • iii)where the QCBS System of selection is used(wherever permissible in case of Consultancy, Non-consultancy Services or Works);
  • iv) where FBS (Fixed Budget Based Selection) System of selection is used in consultancy services, wherein the only parameter for evaluation is quality/ technical criteria;
  • V) in engineered products having complexity in design;
  • vi) EPC contracts and complex works contracts;
  • vii) items where there are only a few suppliers.

4.11.4Terms and Conditions

A. The Procedure

i) STAND-ALONE eRA: The procuring entity shall solicit bids through an invitation to the electronic Reverse Auction, to be published or communicated in accordance with provisions like e-procurement. The invitation shall, in addition to the information as specified in e-procurement, include details relating to:

ii) era preceded by PQB: If the consideration of quality requires competition only among qualified bidders, era May be preceded by a stage of PQB (on the same platform as era) to shortlist qualified bidders, who would only be allowed to participate in the era process that follows.

iii) tender-cum-e-Reverse Auction (the combined procedure): Procuring entities May combine a full two-envelope e-procurement process with Reverse Auction. Then, after an e-procurement process, the e-Reverse Auction process is mandatorily conducted, taking the L1 price as the benchmark (upper limit), after the financial bid opening (declaration of L-1 landed price/s) — provided the number of valid bidders is not less than a stipulated number (3 if not specified).

iv) the shortlisting formula for the combined procedure: Unless otherwise stipulated, the following procedure shall be followed for elimination/ shortlisting of bidders (from among those qualified in the preceding e-Procurement process) eligible to participate in e-Reverse Auction:

1) the bids disallowed from participating in the Reverse Auction shall be the highest bidder(s) In the tabulation of prices in the financial bid. If the highest bidders quote the same rate, the price offer received LAST, as per the time log of the portal, shall be removed first — on the principle of last in, first out By the system.

2) the three bands:

Number of valid biddersConsequence
Less THAN the minimum stipulated number (or 3 if not specified)a Reverse Auction shall NOT Be conducted, and the financial bids from the e-procurement process shall be evaluated and finalised
4 TO 6 valid biddersTHE lowest three (3) Bidders shall be allowed to participate in the Reverse Auction
More THAN 6 valid biddersONLY 50% of the bidders (Rounded up to the next integer) shall be allowed to participate

3) the preference override: However, if MSE bidders or class-i local suppliers Under the Make in India policy do not meet the above criteria, but their prices in financial bids are within the policy's margin of preference, they shall be allowed to participate. Such bidders would be over and above The shortlist mentioned above.

B. The e-Reverse Auction Process (e-RAP)

I) there shall be no participation fees for the e-Reverse Auction.

ii) where pre-qualification precedes the era, an electronic invitation shall be issued, giving sufficient notice period To the successful bidders, so that they can formulate pricing strategies. The starting price shall be decided by the Procuring Entity.

iii) in case of the combined procedure, upon opening the financial bids, a Reverse Auction platform shall be created. The Reverse Auction shall start within the specified period (two hours if not specified) of the bid. Unless modified by the Procuring Entity, THE L-1 landed price In the financial bid (as per the calculation schema based on the Tender Document evaluation criteria) shall be the start bid price On which the auction shall be initiated.

iv) the decrement value: The Procuring Entity shall specify the decrement value before starting THE e-Reverse Auction — or, if not specified, 0.5% of the start bid price, rounded off to the next unit, tens, hundreds, thousands, etc., with a minimum of Rs. 1. The reduction in bids shall have to be made as per decrement value or in multiples thereof.

V) the timing parameters and their defaults:

ParameterDefault if not specified
Initial period of the reverse auctiontwo hours
Last-minute-bidding periodfive minutes before the auction closing time
Auto-extension periodten minutes
Maximum number of auto-extensions50

all times and periods are as per the server time stamp.

vi) service disruption: In case of service disruption at the service provider's end during the Reverse Auction, the Reverse Auction process shall start all over again, with the last recorded lowest price of the prematurely ended e-rap as the 'start bid' price.

The prices quoted in the prematurely ended e-rap shall be binding on all the bidders for consideration if the restarted process does not trigger within the stipulated time (or by 5.00 pm on the same day, if not stipulated).

Disruption and restarting of e-rap shall be intimated to all the bidders through system/ sms/ e-mail through the e-procurement portal.

vii) What is displayed: Bidders must submit only the landed price In the Reverse Auction, and only the item-wise L-1 price shall be displayed, without disclosing the number of bids and names of the bidders. The landed price would not be the same for two bidders, even if any bidder makes such an attempt.

While evaluating the bids, the exchange rate captured by the e-procurement system shall be considered for converting foreign currency into Indian rupees.

viii) Post-closure publication: After the auction's closing time, the bid history Showing all the last valid bids offered, along with the names of the bidders, shall be published. All bidders shall have the facility to see and get a print of the same for their records.

ix) binding force: All electronic bids submitted during the Reverse Auction process shall be legally binding On the bidder. Only the chronologically last bid Submitted by a bidder until the end of the auction shall be considered the valid financial bid of that bidder, and consideration of the same for entering into a contract by the Procuring Entity shall be binding on the bidder.

X) non-participation in the combined procedure: If a bidder does NOT Submit his bid in the Reverse Auction, the price quoted in the financial bid in the preceding e-procurement shall be considered the valid price of that bidder. The status of the bidder (L-1, L-2, etc.) shall be evaluated considering either the bid price submitted in the Reverse Auction, or the price quoted in the financial bid — whichever is lower.

xi) purchase preference: Short-listed MSE or class-i local suppliers, eligible for any purchase preference policy as per the tender document, shall get an opportunity to match the L-1 prices concluded after the Reverse Auction, if their final prices in the Reverse Auction fall within the permitted percentage.

xii) there shall NOT Be any negotiation after the e-Reverse Auction process is closed.

xiii) the breakup of landed price: The successful L-1 bidder, after the Reverse Auction, must upload within a stipulated period (within 2 working days, if not specified) THE breakup of landed prices In the shortfall documents, at which the contract shall be awarded.

While giving the breakup, the bidder shall include the same taxes and duties As quoted while submitting the financial bid. If the L-1 bidder FAILS To submit the breakup of the landed price within the stipulated period, the Procuring Entity shall place an order based on the breakup of the financial bid submitted by the bidder, and the same shall be binding on the bidder.

xiv) Monitoring for abuse: The Procuring Entity shall monitor whether there is improper use Of the Reverse Auction — including, for example, evidence of predatory pricing, collusion, interference with the proper operation of the technology, etc. Bidders (including their subsidiaries) found to have engaged in collusive activities or other improper practices will be treated in accordance with the cartel/ pool-rate provisions of the evaluation Chapter.

4.12Pre-qualification Modes of Procurement

4.12.1Why Pre-qualification Modes Exist

Where the procurement is significantly complex, and the capability of the source of supply is crucial for the successful performance of the contract, it May be necessary to ensure that:

  • There is competition only among bidders equally capable Of performing the contract, and
  • incapable bidders don't queer the pitch By their low-quality/ low-price bids.

In such a situation, a pre-qualification of bidders May be required to shortlist bidders who are equally capable of performing the contract. Evaluation of techno-commercial and financial bids is restricted to this shortlist only.

4.12.2Pre-qualification Bidding (PQB)

1. What it is: In the situations mentioned above, where THE time, effort and money required from the bidder To participate in a tender is high, a two-phase pre-qualification bidding May be considered.

Pre-qualification Bids (PQBs) should meet the norms of transparency, fairness, and maintenance of competition.

2. The two phases:

  • In the first PQB phase, competent, qualified bidders are shortlisted by using a pre-qualification criterion (PQC), covering:

no techno-commercial or financial details are asked for in the first phase of PQB.

  • In the second phase, tender documents (techno-commercial and financial) are issued as usual through e-procurement/ e-publishing; Bids only from shortlisted qualified bidders Are evaluated, and others are rejected.

3. Where PQB is NOT Desirable:

Since the two-phase PQB system May strain the transparency principle, and there is a heightened risk of anti-competitive practices, two-phase PQB should be done only as an exception Under specified circumstances.

Hence, the procuring entities May lay down restricted powers to approve such modes at sufficiently high levels in SoPP. It should NOT Be a routine/ normal mode of procurement, and qualification criteria as part of a single/ two/ multiple envelopes system should suffice in such situations.

PQB bidding as a separate phase is contraindicated In the following circumstances:

  • A) where procurement is being done through limited tender enquiries;
  • B) where the requirement is technically and commercially not complex enough That pre-qualification of the bidder is not crucial for the performance of the contract — for example, commercial off-the-shelf (cots) requirements;
  • C) where the procurement is significantly complex and the time, effort and money required from the bidder to participate in a tender is not significant — clear-cut, fail-pass pre-qualification criteria can be specified in single-stage tendering (Instead of two-phase tendering).

4. Pre-qualification criteria (PQC) — the two-sided test:

(A sample PQC is given in Annexure 12 of the Goods Manual.)

Due consideration should be given while framing PQC to its effect on the adequacy of competition.

PQC should NOT Result in unreasonable exclusion of 'class-i local supplier'/ 'class-ii local supplier' who would otherwise be eligible, beyond what is essential for ensuring the quality or creditworthiness of the supplier.

To encourage MSEs, local bidders and past successful bidders, a call May be taken as to whether PQC should apply to full quantity/ packages OR BE proportional to part quantity/ package quoted By a bidder.

In case the requirement is suddenly multiple times the past procurements, blind adoption of past pqcs (fractions/ percentages) May lead to the disqualification of successful past vendors, leading to inadequate competition.

PQC should, therefore, be carefully decided for each procurement With the approval of ca for acceptance of the tender.

It should be clarified in the PQB documents that bidders have to submit authenticated documents In support of eligibility criteria.

5. Advertisement and Notification — and the notice periods:

The invitation for the first-phase PQB shall be processed (advertised, tender document preparation, publicity, evaluation, and so on) in the same manner as a normal GTE or OTE (As the situation calls for) tender, ensuring the widest possible coverage.

The PQC and evaluation criteria should be clearly noted in the PQB documents.

The PQB documents should also indicate a complete Schedule of requirements for which this PQB is being done, including approximate likely quantities Of requirements.

SituationMinimum period for submission of PQBs
Normal (domestic)3 WEEKS
Where FOREIGN BIDDERS are also involved4 WEEKS
in case of urgency duly approved by camay be reduced to 10 (ten) DAYS

6. Evaluation: At least in high-value and critical procurements, the credentials regarding experience and past performance submitted by the successful bidder May be verified as per PQC — as far as reasonably feasible — from the parties for whom work has been claimed to be done.

The procuring entity shall evaluate the qualifications of bidders only in accordance with the PQC specified, and shall give due publicity to the particulars of the bidders that are qualified On the relevant portals/ websites.

7. Subsequent Procurement Tender — the single-use and six-month rules:

The pre-qualification shortlist shall be for a single subsequent procurement.

In this subsequent procurement, bids are invited from these qualified bidders only, and all other bids May be treated as unsolicited offers, which are normally rejected.

This second phase of the procurement process is handled as a normal two-envelope tender.

The time gap between the pre-qualification approval and the floating of the linked main procurement tender should normally be less than six months.

4.12.3Single Stage Pre-qualification

1. When to use it instead: In the situation described above — i.e., significantly complex procurement; the capability of the source of supply is crucial; the necessity to ensure competition only among equally capable bidders — but where the time, effort and money required from the bidder to participate in a tender is not very high:

Instead of a separate phase of pre-qualification bidding, a clear-cut, fail-pass pre-qualification criteria (PQC) Can be asked to be submitted as the first (additional) envelope in a single-stage three-envelopes system, so that a bidder's risk of having his bid rejected on the grounds of qualifications is remote if he exercises due diligence.

In e-procurement, separate files shall be uploaded by the bidder, mutatis mutandis.

2. The terminological point: Strictly SPEAKING, this is not a pre-qualification but a post-qualification Of bidders (i.e., after the techno-commercial and financial bids have been received).

In respect of pre-qualification, in the first instance on the pre-announced bid opening date, only the PQB envelopes (Also containing the EMD and other eligibility documents) are opened and evaluated to shortlist the responsive bidders who pass the pre-qualification.

3. The rest of the procedure: The rest of the procedure is the same as the two-envelope system (techno-commercial and financial bids) for only qualified bidders.

  • In e-procurement, the other two envelopes of unqualified Bidders would remain encrypted and unopened.
  • In off-line tenders, the other two envelopes of unqualified bidders are returned unopened To the respective bidders by registered acknowledgement due/ reliable courier, or any other mode with proof of delivery.

4.12.4PQB Tendering — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. Pre-qualification criteria: PQB has the potential of getting misused or being applied without considering the restrictive nature of competition. PQC should be relevant to the quality requirements, and neither very stringent nor very lax in restricting/ facilitating the entry of bidders. These criteria should be clear, unambiguous, exhaustive, and yet specific. Also, there should be FAIR COMPETITION.Lay down criteria for when prequalification in single-stage or two-stage tendering is warranted. Also, model PQC criteria for diverse types of procurements should be laid down on the lines of Annexure 12.
2. Dangers of anti-competitive bidding: Since in a two-stage PQB, shortlisted bidders are announced, there is a heightened possibility of these bidders forming a cartel and quoting anti-competitive prices In the second stage of tendering.Two-stage PQB should be done only in appropriately justified situations. Alternatively, a single-stage multiple-envelope system May be used for prequalification — in which the chances of anti-competitive behaviour and cycle time Are significantly lower.
3. Two-phase PQB is a time-consuming process.(as above)
4. Contentious and disputes: Both the successful and unsuccessful bidders tend to view the PQB process as a means for creating rights/ privileges/ entitlement for them — by way of hair-splitting, contentious or viciously legalistic interpretations of PQC criteria, disregarding the very rationale of the PQB and PQC.In the PQC, a caveat against such tendencies May be included — asserting the right of the procuring agency to interpret the PQC on common usage of terminologies and phrases in Public Procurement, instead of legalistic and hair-splitting judgements — and that their decision in this regard would be final.

4.13Approved Vendor List (AVL)Gtext; W/C/NC list it and cross-refer to Goods para 4.7

4.13.1Strategic, Safety and Security Requirements — the Justification

Many organisations have regular and continuous Requirements of tailor-made items (for which the Procuring Entity is the monopoly buyer), which are critical for the safety and security of its operations, and where large investments and gestation periods Are needed for developing manufacturing and quality control infrastructure/ processes for its production.

In view of heavy investments, vendors need regular and sustained offtake for financial viability.

Such procurement needs to be done over an extended period of time only from vendors who have undergone rigorous pre-qualification.

The firms are assessed for requisite infrastructure to produce consistent quality goods up to the assessed production capacity, with regular monitoring of the quality assurance system.

It May even involve, if required, extended field trials of products and inspection of manufacturing/ quality assurance facilities and processes. Such time-consuming pre-qualification would not be feasible for each individual procurement.

4.13.2What an AVL Is

In such situations, a separate phase of PQB tendering is done with a much more stringent PQC — but the resultant shortlist of qualified vendors is kept valid for an extended period (say 2 to 5 years) As stipulated in the PQB documents.

These are called approved vendor lists (AVL). In some countries, these May be referred to as multi-use lists.

4.13.3The Two Categories of Approved Vendors

CategoryBasis of approvalUpgrade path
"Developmental vendors" (may be named 'Temporarily or Provisionally Approved Vendors' in some organisations)Approval is granted based on an assessment of infrastructure facilities available and satisfactory production of samples as per specification — but their capability to consistently produce the quality material giving satisfactory service life in the field Is yet to be establishedafter these development vendors demonstrate a capability to produce consistent quality goods with required service life over a period (say 2 years), they are upgraded
"Approved vendors"(the regular category)Demonstrated consistent quality over the qualifying period

4.13.4Procurement Restricted to AVL — and the 20:80 Split

in all subsequent procurements, eligibility criteria restrict participation to the "Approved Vendor List" (regular and developmental), and all other bids are treated as unsolicited offers, which are normally rejected.

Only a part — say not more than 20% — of the total tendered quantity is distributed among development vendors, provided they quote lower than The regular approved vendors.

The rest of the quantity (say 80% or more) is awarded to 'approved vendors'.

This ensures that development vendors are able to demonstrate their capabilities for upgradation to the regular approved vendor category.

Thus, it should be ensured that development orders are for a viable quantity for production and for the purpose of proving their capability.

4.13.5Benefits of AVL

An AVL is a powerful tool that contributes to cost control, reliability, and overall efficiency In procurement for strategic, safety and security goods.

It ensures that vendors have undergone rigorous vetting And have demonstrated stability and reliability.

Working with approved vendors instils confidence in the quality Of materials and components purchased and reduces the chances of defects. Downtime due to failures and repairs is also minimised.

4.13.6Monitoring and Updation

An AVL is a dynamic tool, and its effectiveness depends on proactive management and adaptability. Updating an AVL over time is crucial to maintain its effectiveness and relevance.

  • If a new vendor applies for inclusion in AVL, it May be added to AVL if it meets the PQC in the original PQB.
  • Key performance indicators (KPIs) for vendors should be part of the PQB document — including on-time delivery, product quality, and responsiveness.
  • These metrics May be used to conduct periodic reviews of the AVL (e.g., annually or biannually), and vendors who consistently fail to meet standards or demonstrate poor performance May be downgraded or removed From the AVL.
  • Audits of existing vendors May be conducted to assess financial stability, production capabilities, and adherence to contractual terms.
  • The procuring Entity should MONITOR industry trends, technological advancements, and new suppliers.
  • Feedback May be gathered from stakeholders who use or maintain the goods. Their insights can highlight areas for improvement or identify potential issues with specific vendors.
  • Vendors May be given support to enhance their capabilities and training, share best practices, and encourage continuous improvement.

4.13.7Where AVL Is Not Desirable

The same contra-indications as in PQB are much more accentuated In the case of AVL, as the list is used over prolonged periods.

Hence, the AVL mode for an item should be approved at the highest level In the procuring organisation.

Since the AVL system strains the transparency principle And there is a heightened risk of cartelisation and collusion, AVL should NOT Be a routine/ normal mode of procurement and should be done only as an exception — otherwise, PQB modes of procurement May be used.

AVL is contraindicated in the following seven circumstances: A) where the requirement is not related to strategic, safety or security. B) where the item is not tailor-made, nor is the Procuring Entity a monopoly buyer. C) where the item is not regularly and continuously procured. D) where the requirement is technically and commercially not complex enough. e) where large investment and prolonged gestation period are not required In developing manufacturing/ quality assurance facilities/ processes. F) where the technology is not stable And is evolving/ changing at a fast pace. G) where procurement can be done through limited tender enquiries.

4.13.8AVL — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. Dependency on vendors: It can shift the balance of power to the hands of the vendor — leading to many disadvantages:

1.1 anti-competitive practices: These approved vendors can easily form a cartel and indulge in anti-competitive practices. This includes a significant risk of collusion due to power in the hands of the procurement entity's personnel who inspect/ monitor the facilities/ quality.

1.2 cost escalation: Over time, vendor costs May increase, affecting overall procurement expenses.

1.3 supplier ethics and compliance: Approved vendors May engage in unethical practices or violate compliance standards.
1. Diversify the AVL by including multiple reliable vendors for critical goods. Maintain a backup list of development vendors To mitigate sudden disruptions. Regularly monitor and update the AVL.

1.1 be alert about cartel/ pool rates. Include a cartel clause And take mitigation measures.
The personnel in such jobs May be rotated frequently And should not be allowed to be in the same position for more than 3 years.
If the same personnel who created The AVL are also given the task of monitoring it, it May create a conflict of interest. So, personnel for these two tasks should be different.
The KPIs and PQC should be objectively measurable.
Every three years, a fresh PQB May be done for new vendors.

1.2 benchmark costs periodically against market trends. Negotiate long-term contracts with price stability clauses.

1.3 conduct due diligence on vendors' ethical practices. Include compliance clauses for the Code of Integrity In contracts and monitor adherence.
2. Lack of monitoring and updation: AVL is a dynamic tool that needs constant monitoring and updating.
2.1 complacency: Once vendors are approved, complacency May set in, leading to reduced performance.
2.2 quality fluctuations: Even approved vendors May occasionally deliver subpar quality due to production issues or changes in their processes.
2. Monitor and update the AVL lists.
2.1 continuously engage with vendors, encourage innovation, and set improvement targets.
2.2 regularly audit vendors to ensure consistent quality.
3. Market dynamics: Market dynamics (e.g., price fluctuations and technological advancements) impact vendor capabilities and competitiveness.
3.1 innovation gap: Sticking to the same vendors May hinder access to innovative solutions. A non-approved vendor offers an innovative solution that could significantly improve operations.
3. Stay informed about industry trends and adjust the AVL accordingly.
3.1 encourage vendors to propose new technologies or approaches. Consider adding emerging vendors to the AVL. Evaluate the benefits and risks. Seek approval for a temporary exception, or consider adding the vendor to the AVL.
4. Inadequate or too-many vendors on AVL: Both an inadequate number of vendors AND too many vendors on AVL may be detrimental to the intended benefits.
Too many vendors May force vendors to cartelise for survival — having invested heavily in creating infrastructure.
Too few vendors May create supply chain disruption and increased prices.
Such situations may be specially monitored. In the PQB document, an upper limit May be indicated for the maximum number of suppliers to be taken on AVL.
A large number of vendors getting cleared for AVL is an indication that this item is not a fit case for AVL mode.
In case of inadequate numbers on AVL, a repeat PQB May be done, and efforts May be made to induce new vendors with technological and preferential help in setting up infrastructure.

4.14Limited Tender Enquiry (LTE)

(Rule 162 of GFR 2017)

4.14.1What LTE Is

LTE is a restricted competition procurement, where a pre-selected panel of vendors is directly approached for bidding.

G GOODSW WORKS
Who is on the panelvendors on the list of registered suppliers For the subject matter of procurement — for goods and services not available on the GeM portalbidders enlisted with the Procuring Entity, along with those enlisted with other public works organisations/ works PSUs

bids from uninvited bidders are treated as unsolicited And are not entertained, except in exceptional circumstances.

However, ministries/ departments should evolve a system by which requests for registration/ enlistment of interested/ unsolicited firms should be decided before the bid in the next round of tendering.

This mode provides a short and simple procedure But May not provide as good a VfM as in the case of open tendering — but it is still a good balance for procurements below a threshold.

4.14.2When LTE Is the Default Mode — THE THRESHOLD DIVERGENCE

ManualThreshold
G GOODSLTE procedures should be the default mode Of procurement when the estimated value of procurement is between Rs. 5 lakh to Rs. 50 lakh (Rupees Five Lakh to Fifty Lakh)
W WORKSLTE procedures should be the default mode of procurement when the estimated value of procurement is up to Rs. 10 lakh (Rupees Ten Lakh) — OR when limited numbers of tenderers are known to possess requisite skills, technology and resources, by reason of their highly complex or specialised nature, OR FOR works of a secret nature
C Consultancy / NC Non-consultancyUsed for procurements up to Rs. 50 lakh

4.14.3Terms and Conditions

1. Prior approval of the panel: The shortlist of vendors/ contractors from the list of registered suppliers/ enlisted contractors for the subject matter of procurement, to whom it is proposed to send tender documents, shall be approved by the Competent Authority before floating the tender.

2. Rotation where the panel is large: In case the number of registered/ enlisted bidders for an item/ work is large and unwieldy, A transparent system of rotation of invitation to bid May be used to keep the invited shortlist to a manageable number (SAY 8 TO 12).

3. Despatch and mandatory publication: In off-line tendering, copies of the tender documents should be sent free of cost (Except in case of priced specifications/ drawings) directly by speed post/ courier/ e-mail To the panel.

Further, the Procuring Entity should also mandatorily publish its limited tender enquiries:

  • GON GeM as well as ON GeM-CPPP;
  • WON GeM-CPPP.

Apart from that, the organisations should publish the tender enquiries on its own/ the department's or ministry's website.

4. The minimum number Rule: The minimum number of bidders to whom LTE should be sent is more than three.

In case less than three Approved vendors/ contractors are available, LTE May be sent to the available approved vendors/ contractors with the approval of the ca, duly recording the reasons.

Efforts should then be made to identify a higher number of approved suppliers/ contractors By the supplier registration/ enlistment section, to obtain more responsive bids on a competitive basis.

5. Simplified tender document:A simplified tender document with brief terms and conditions Should be used, instead of a detailed tender document.(G Annexure 8 — Limited Tender Form · C Annexure 15 · NC Annexure 9.)

in any case, all registered vendors/ contractors who are normally invited to quote in such limited tenders have already acknowledged acceptance of the "general conditions of contract" as part of the registration application, which is applicable to such procurements — in addition to these brief "terms and conditions" in the LTE tender form.

If necessary, specifications and drawings or any other document May be enclosed with the limited tender form.

6. Currency: In domestic tenders, any bid in foreign currency should be summarily rejected.

7. The security exemption: Since selected bidders are normally registered/ enlisted with the Procuring Entity, bid Security (EMD) and Performance Security are normally not taken in LTE.

4.14.4LTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. A major risk in this mode is that the demand May be artificially split to avoid OTE or higher-level approvals.The e-procurement portal May be programmed to raise an alert If the same item is repeatedly attempted to be procured through LTE.
2. There is a risk that LTE May not attract enough bids, and sometimes there May be a single acceptable offer.
It could be due to tender documents not reaching the targeted bidders — intentionally or otherwise.
It could also be due to bidders not getting adequate time to submit bids.
This could also be due to an insufficient database of registered/ known vendors.
To ensure sufficient response, in addition to mails/ emails to selected vendors, web-based publicity should be given for limited tenders — with suitable clarifications that unsolicited bids shall not be considered.
Sufficient time should be allowed for the submission of bids — say two weeks. A shorter or longer period, if considered sufficient, could be allowed if justified according to the urgency/ complexity of the requirement.
Further, a limited or open tender that results in only one effective offer Shall be treated as a single Tender Enquiry situation, with relevant powers of approval, etc.
3. There is also a risk that the selection of vendors May not be transparent.
At the evaluation stage, some invited bidders May be passed over on the grounds of being ineligible/ unreliable.
On the other hand, unsolicited bidders May also quote, causing a dilemma of transparency regarding the consideration of such offers.
Maintenance of a panel of registered suppliers for each subject matter of procurement is a sine qua non for LTE (Rule 150 GFR 2017). Such panels of vendors should be reviewed every year To ensure an adequate number of registered suppliers.
The panel should not be changed after the LTE tender has been published.
ALL past successful vendors/ bidders should invariably be invited. In case it is proposed to exclude any registered/ approved vendor/ contractor from being shortlisted for inviting LTE, detailed reasons — such as failure in supply — should be duly recorded, and approval of the ca should be taken before exclusion.
Bidders should be selected with due diligence to ensure that bidders who do not meet eligibility criteria are not shortlisted.
At the evaluation stage, in LTE, passing over of a duly shortlisted bidder on grounds of poor past performance or eligibility May raise questions about transparency.

4.15Special Limited Tender Enquiry (SLTE)

4.15.1What SLTE Is and When It May Be Used

LTE/ SLTE mode is permissible in certain special circumstances for values higher than the LTE threshold, where normally OTE should have been done.

Powers to sanction procurement on an LTE/ SLTE basis in such exceptional cases May be laid down in SoPP, based on a certificate of urgency signed by the indentor.

This mode has the merit of being quicker, but the VfM obtained May be less than in the case of OTE; Hence, it should be restricted to the following four situations:

1. Urgency: The Competent Authority in the Ministry/ Department certifies That there is an existing or prospective urgency for operational or technical requirements, and any additional expenditure involved by not procuring through advertised tender enquiry is justified in view of urgency. The Ministry/ Department should also put on record the nature of the urgency and reasons why the procurement could not be anticipated earlier.

2. Public interest: There are sufficient reasons to be recorded in writing by the Competent Authority, indicating that it will not be in the public interest To procure the goods/ works through advertised tender enquiry.

3. Known sources: The sources of supply are definitely known, and the possibility of fresh source(s) beyond those being tapped is remote.

4. Policy: Government policy designates procurement from specific agencies.

4.15.2Terms and Conditions

1. The tender process would be the same as in the case of a normal LTE Described above. However, the tender documents are more detailed, as in the case of OTE.

2. The indentor's certificate: The indentor should certify that there is an existing or prospective urgency for operational or technical requirements, and that any additional expenditure involved by not procuring through an advertised tender enquiry is justified in view of urgency. The indentor should also put on record the nature of the urgency and reasons why the procurement could not be anticipated.

3. Currency: In domestic tenders, any bid in foreign currency should be summarily rejected.

4. The security Rule — the opposite of LTE: Unlike LTE, bid Security and Performance Security are taken in SLTE, as in OTE tenders.

4.15.3SLTE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
Risks as applicable in both LTE and OTE Are also applicable here.

In addition, there is a risk that this mode May be used unjustifiably to avoid open tendering (OTE).
All mitigation strategies of LTE and OTE shall also apply here.

In addition, the checks and balances systems should be tighter By way of enhanced and severely restricted delegation of powers for certification of urgency and approval of this mode of procurement.

A system of reports from the authority signing the urgency certificate, AND post facto review of utilisation of received goods/ works/ services to tackle the expressed urgency, May be laid down.

4.16Proprietary Article Certificate (PAC) Procurement

(Rule 166(i) and (iii) of GFR 2017)

4.16.1When PAC May Be Certified

In the procurement of goods, certain items are procured only from original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) or manufacturers having proprietary rights (or their authorised dealers/ stockists) against a PAC certificate. (Format at Annexure 9 of the Goods Manual.)

this mode May be the shortest, but since it May provide lesser VfM than LTE/ OTE AND strains the transparency principle, it should be used only in justifiable situations.

Such situations may arise on the following three grounds where a PAC can be certified:

1. Sole manufacturer: It is in the user department's knowledge that only a particular firm is the manufacturer Of the required goods.

2. Standardisation and warranty: For standardisation of machinery or components or spare parts to be compatible with the existing sets of machinery/ equipment (On the advice of a competent technical expert), or if it is a condition of the manufacturer's warranty that only OEM spares are to be used during the warranty period — the required goods are to be purchased only from a selected firm duly approved by the Competent Authority.

3. Research continuity: In case of advanced educational, research, development and scientific institutes/ organisations of national importance, specialised equipment and their spares/ consumables May have to be procured from the same original vendor — on the advice of a competent technical expert and approved by the project in-charge — to maintain consistency/ reproducibility/ continuity of established/ standardised methods/ protocols to attain objectives of such projects.

4.16.2Terms and Conditions

1. The certificate and its effect on powers: Users should enclose, with their indent, a PAC certificate signed by the appropriate authority as per DFPR/ SoPP, with the concurrence of associated finance, for sourcing an item from OEM or PAC firms or their authorised agents.

Once a PAC is thus signed, the powers of procurement are the same as in normal conditions As per the delegation of powers.

2. Proprietary items shall be purchased only from a nominated manufacturer, or its authorised dealer as recorded in the PAC certificate.

3. In certain unavoidable cases, the procuring authority May have no alternative but to waive payment of EMD/ SD for procurement on a proprietary basis.

4.16.3PAC — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. There is a risk that this mode May get used unjustifiably to restrict competition. Such risks get aggravated in case of secrecy about such procedures, as alternative vendors/ contractors may not even come to know about such opportunities.The delegation of powers should be restricted for signing the PAC.
Even in PAC procurements, the NIT and the award of contract should be put on gem-cppp and Procuring Entity websites.
2. Once approved, there is a risk of a nexus getting developed, and the mode May continue to be used for many years without fresh application of mind.No item should be procured on a PAC basis for more than three years, after which a mandatory OTE mode May be used to test the market.
The procuring entity may also keep an eye on the GeM portal for other vendors Who can supply such items.
3. The bidder May charge a price higher than the market.To the extent feasible, the PAC firm should be asked to accept a "Fall clause" — undertaking that if it supplies or quotes a lower rate to other governments, the public sector, or private organisations, it shall reimburse the excess.
If the price offered is not acceptable, negotiation May be held with the PAC firm.

4.17Single Tender Enquiry (STE) / Selection by Nomination

(Rule 166 of GFR 2017 · NC cites Rule 204)

4.17.1What STE Is and When It May Be Used

G A tender invitation to one firm only without a PAC certificate is called a single tender.

W The selection by direct negotiation/ nomination is called a single tender.

This mode May be the shortest, but since it May provide lesser VfM as compared to LTE/ OTE And May also strain the transparency principle, it should be resorted to only under the following conditions:

G GOODS — ONE ground only (where a PAC cannot be certified)

1. In the case of an existing or prospective emergency relating to operational or technical requirements to be certified by the indentor, the required goods are necessary to be purchased from a particular source — subject to the reason for such decision being recorded and approval of the Competent Authority obtained.

W WORKS — SIX grounds

1. Unforeseeable urgency: There is an urgent need for the work, and engaging in a competitive tendering process would therefore be impractical — provided that the circumstances giving rise to the urgency were neither foreseeable by the Procuring Entity nor the result of dilatory conduct on its part.

2. Natural continuation — and the 25% cap: Works that represent a natural continuation of previous work carried out by the firm, when — considering the limited size of the additional work in relation to the original procurement And the reasonableness of the price — it will be cost-effective to resort to single-source procurement.

3. Emergency/ disaster: In case of an emergency situation, situations arising after natural disasters, situations where timely completion of the work is of utmost importance — subject to the reason for such decision being recorded and approval of the Competent Authority obtained.

4. Proprietary techniques/ sole expertise: Situations where execution of the work May involve use of proprietary techniques, OR only one contractor has the requisite expertise.

5. National defence/ security: The procurement entity engages in procurement involving national defence or national security And determines that single-source procurement is the most appropriate method of procurement.

6. Overall interest: Under some special circumstances, it May become necessary to select a particular agency where adequate justification is available for such single-source selection in the context of the overall interest of the Ministry or Department.

4.17.2Terms and Conditions

1. The restricted-powers Rule: The reasons for an STE AND The selection of a particular firm must be recorded and approved by the ca As per the delegation of powers laid down in DFPR/ SoPP — prior to single tendering. Unlike in PAC, the powers of procurement of STE are more restricted.

2. Gother terms and conditions of PAC procurement mentioned above would also apply in this case.

2. W — Fairness and no-splitting: The Procuring Entity shall ensure fairness and equity And shall have a procedure in place to ensure that:

  • The prices are reasonable and consistent with market rates for work of a similar nature; And
  • the required work is not split into smaller-sized procurements.

3. The mandatory quarterly reporting of nomination awards WCNC:

In case of single tender procurements:

A) a report relating to such awards on a nomination basis shall be submitted every quarter TO:

  • i) THE SECRETARY, in case of Ministries/ Departments;
  • ii) the board of directors or equivalent managing body, in case of Public Sector Undertakings, Public Sector Banks, Insurance companies, etc.;
  • iii) the chief executive of the organisation where such a managing body is not in existence.

b) THE audit committee or similar unit In the organisation May be required to check at least 10% of such cases.

4.17.3STE — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
GTHE same but more heightened risks than PAC Are present in this mode. The selection of a single vendor May be non-transparent and unjustified.The same mitigation strategies as in the case of PAC should apply. Procurements on an STE basis should be made from reputed firms after determining the reasonableness of rates. The procurement powers for STE should be severely restricted.
Wrisks as applicable in both LTE and OTE are also applicable here. In addition, there is a risk that this mode May be used unjustifiably to avoid open tendering (OTE), thereby making the selection of the contractor non-transparent and unjustified.All mitigation strategies of LTE and OTE would apply here also. In addition, the systems of checks and balances should be tighter by way of enhanced and severely restricted delegation of powers in this regard for certification of urgency And approval of this mode. A system of reports from the authority signing the urgency certificate, and post facto review of utilisation of executed works and receipt of incidental goods/ services To tackle the expressed urgency, May be laid down. Audit should take up the bulk of such cases for review to judge the genuineness of urgency certification.

4.18Direct Procurement without Quotation

(Rule 154 of GFR 2017)

4.18.1What It Is and When It May Be Used

direct procurement of goods without formal quotations is normally done for the smallest value procurements. This is also called petty purchase.

It should be used for off-the-shelf goods with simple and standard specifications, and when the required goods (of required specification or within the required delivery period, etc.) are not available on GeM.

However, for procurement outside GeM, it is mandatory for a buyer to generate a "GeM availability report and past transaction summary" (gemar&pts) with a unique id on the GeM portal using his login credentials.

The procedure is the simplest and quickest, BUT VfM May be poor; Hence, it is suitable only for low-value, urgent and simple requirements In the following three situations:

1. The value threshold and the scientific-ministry enhancement:

CategoryLimit per case/ occasion
GeneralRs. 50,000 (Rupees Fifty Thousand) for each requirement/ case
scientific ministries/ departments — for scientific equipment and computersENHANCED to Rs. 1,00,000/- (Rupees One Lakh) on each occasion (OM No. F.20/42/2021-PPD dated 20.05.2024)

2. The requirement is urgent but was not covered in the procurement plan.

3. The requirement is for off-the-shelf goods of simple and standard specifications. Examples of procurement are the day-to-day needs of the office and field units, and so on.

4.18.2Terms and Conditions

1. Who does it and the certificate: The competent officer of the Procuring Entity can initiate and complete this purchase after diligent enquiries from the market And filling out the certificate prescribed (G Annexure 10 · C Annexure 13 · NC Annexure 7).

Such powers, to a limited extent, can also be given to various user sections for operational needs.

2. The imprest system: Normally, an imprest amount (with facilities for cheque payments) sufficient for two months' estimated procurements Can be sanctioned, so that officers can handle such procurements. The imprest amount can be recouped on a monthly basis by submission of expense vouchers.

3. Records: IN A summary form, records should be kept of the vendors/ contractors approached and the prices they indicate.

4. The essence of the mode: Selection of sellers by diligent market enquiry is of the essence of this mode of procurement.

5. Where to survey: In larger cities, reputed shopping malls May also be included in the market survey. Reputed internet shopping portals May also be explored.

4.18.3Direct Procurement without Quotations — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
1. The main risk is the splitting of demand to avoid higher approvals or higher modes of procurement.Supervisors should carry out periodic reviews Of such procurements to ensure that the demand is not split into small quantities for the sole purpose of avoiding the necessity of getting approval from the higher authority, or for avoiding LTE or OTE mode.
AN annual review Of such procurements shall be carried out to ensure that future anticipated requirements are clubbed and procured through LTE/ OTE/ rc.
To keep better control, an annual ceiling May be fixed for each office for such a mode of procurement — say, rupees five lakh for each office per year. Each office should maintain records to monitor such limits.
2. Over a period, intentionally or otherwise, the due diligence of enquiries from the market May degenerate into a mechanical obtaining of quotations, leading to the development of nexus and crony suppliers.
Vendor selection May be manipulated with fake supporting vouchers.
Since such small-value materials do not undergo accounting and inventory control, there is a risk of the development of a nexus, leakages, and fake procurements and payments.
The same set of vendors May get patronised repeatedly for a wide variety of requirements.
Since only cursory visual inspections Are done, quality May be at risk.
Supervisors should cross-check a percentage of cases in the market for prices, fake vouchers, and so on.
Supervisors should also check that the same vendor(s) is not being patronised repeatedly.
for the sake of transparency, payments should be made by cheque or through electronic clearance service — except that cash payment May be allowed up to Rs. 5,000 (rupees five thousand).
Staff involved with such procurements should not continue in the same role for long and should be rotated frequently.

4.19Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee

(Rule 155 of GFR 2017)

4.19.1What It Is and When It May Be Used

this mode of procurement is made by a local Purchase Committee consisting of three members of an appropriate level, constituted by hod.

This procedure is slightly more complex And is likely to provide BETTER VfM Than direct procurement without quotation; Hence, it is suitable for marginally higher thresholds.

It is used in the following conditions:

1. The value band and the scientific-ministry enhancement:

CategoryLimit per occasion
GeneralAbove Rs. 50,000/- and up to rs. 5,00,000/- (Rupees Five Lakh) only, on each occasion
scientific ministries/ departmentsENHANCED to Rs. Ten LAKH (above Rs. 1 lakh, as in para 4.18.1-1 above) on each occasion (same OM and same list of qualifying Ministries as at para 4.18.1)

2. GeM condition: Only in case when a certain item is not available on the GeM portal (of required specification or within the required delivery period, etc.). However, for procurement outside geM, it is mandatory for a buyer to generate a GeMAR&PTS With a unique id on the GeM portal.

3. Extension to small works and services: This mode of procurement is described in the parlance of procurement of goods; However, in principle, it is equally applicable to contingency expenditure on small works/ services.

4.19.2Terms and Conditions

1. The controlling Ministry May lay down an annual ceiling value per office/ unit for such procurements.

2. In case of emergency procurement, the facility for withdrawing the requisite advance cash amount and its subsequent account May also be considered.

3. This is intended to be a fast-track, simple mode Of procurement. The committee will survey the market To ascertain the reasonableness of rate, quality and specifications And identify the appropriate supplier.

4. The essence — market survey, NOT A mini-lte: The selection of suitable products and suppliers by actual market survey (not by calling tenders like a mini-lte) is the essence of this mode.

Therefore, there is no question of obtaining quotations by email or otherwise.

The committee shall survey the market to ascertain the reasonableness of rate, quality and specifications and identify the appropriate supplier. The survey May include online internet shopping portals, besides physical local market surveys.

For organisations in smaller towns/ hinterlands, surveys in nearby bigger cities/ metros May also be included As part of the survey, depending on the ease of logistics.

5. The certificate:Before recommending the placement of the purchase order, members of the committee will jointly record the certificate prescribed(G Annexure 11 · C Annexure 14 · NC Annexure 8).

6. The committee shall survey the market to ascertain the reasonableness of rate, quality, and specifications; Identify the appropriate supplier; And jointly record a certificate before placing the purchase order.

4.19.3Direct Procurement by Purchase Committee — Risks and Mitigations

RISKMITIGATION
Risks are the same as in the case of direct procurement without quotation mentioned above — with mitigation due to the involvement of three members.

Over a period, intentionally or otherwise, the due diligence of enquiries from the market May degenerate into a system of floating and obtaining limited tenders — leading to delays and the development of nexus and crony suppliers.
Mitigation strategies are also the same as in direct procurement without quotation.

4.20Award of Work through Quotations [W ONLY]

1. The threshold and the permitted works: Use of quotations up to Rs. Five lakh in each instance Shall be adopted for procurement of minor civil works LIKE:

— for which there is an established market.

Procuring Entity shall not divide its procurement into separate contracts to bring the amount less than the amount set forth for such purpose.

2. The minimum of three: Procuring Entity shall request quotations from as many contractors as practicable, but positively from at least three contractors.

Each contractor from whom a quotation is requested shall be informed whether any elements other than the charges for the works to be executed — such as transportation and insurance charges, duties and taxes — are to be included in the price.

3. One quotation only, no revision: Each contractor is permitted to give only one price quotation AND IS not permitted to change its quotation.

4. Emergent cases only: Award of work through quotations shall be resorted to only in emergent cases, AND suitable reasons shall be recorded.

4.21Award of Works in Stalled Contracts [W ONLY]

1. The problem: Where a contractor abandons or stops the work mid-way — either due to insolvency or a dispute or other reason — engagement of the new contractor takes considerable time, and in the meanwhile:

  • Public money is locked up in assets which cannot be utilised,
  • apart from inconvenience and loss of amenities to the general public Due to such half-completed works.

2. The solution — and its two conditions: Notwithstanding anything in the GFR or the Manual, procuring entities should devise methods (including limited/ single tenders) to deal with part-completed contracts, wherever the work is abandoned by the contractor mid-way.

However, for issuance of limited/ single tenders in such cases:

  • Condition 1 — the 20% billing test: At least 20% of work should have been billed By the contractor who has abandoned the work.
  • Condition 2 — elevated approval: Procurement approval of such limited/ single tender should be at the next higher level, or such level as May be prescribed.

4.22Mode Selection by Value — Non-Consultancy Services [NC ONLY]

4.22.1Higher Value Non-consultancy Services

(Rule 201(ii) of GFR, 2017)

in procurements of non-consultancy services above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, it should normally be by an advertised mode (i.e., OTE).

Services which are available on GeM have to be mandatorily procured through that portal.

4.22.2Lower Value Non-consultancy Services

(Rules 199 and 201(i) of GFR 2017)

for procurement below Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, LTE can be issued to a selected shortlist of likely service providers.

The three-step shortlisting procedure:

1. The long list: To start with, preparation of a long list of potential service providers May be done on the basis of formal or informal enquiries FROM:

2. The moderated long list: The Procuring Entity should scrutinise the preliminary long list Of likely service providers as identified above, and shortlist the prima facie eligible and capable service providers From the long list.

The number of service providers in this moderated long-list should be more than three.

3. The standing panel: To smoothen this shortlisting of service providers, procuring entities who do frequent procurement OF non-consultancy services May consider the preparation of a panel of qualified service providers, after evaluation of their credentials — on the lines of registration of vendors in the procurement of goods.

Services that are available on GeM have to be mandatorily procured through that portal.

4.22.3Small Value Non-consultancy Services

The rationale: In small-value procurement of non-consultancy services, the service provider May neither be capable of handling the bidding process, nor May procurement be done by shopping mode of procurement.

ValueMode to be used
UP TO Rs. 50,000 (Fifty thousand)THE 'Direct procurement without quotation' Mode of procurement used in procurement of goods May very well be utilised in such cases (certificate at Annexure 7)
UP TO Rs. 5 (Rupees Five) LAKHTHE 'Direct procurement by a Purchase Committee' Mode, as used in procurement of goods, May be utilised (certificate at Annexure 8)

in all such modes of procurement, the procedure prescribed in the Manual for procurement of goods, 2024, May be followed.

Appendix to Chapter 4 — Part B: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1SLTE thresholdG/C/NC: above Rs. 50 LAKH · W: above Rs. 10 LAKH
2OTE thresholdG/C/NC: above Rs. 50 lakh · W: above Rs. 10 lakh
3LTE default bandG: Rs. 5 lakh to Rs. 50 lakh · W: up to Rs. 10 lakh · C/NC: up to Rs. 50 lakh
4Rule cited for LTE/ SLTE thresholdG/C/NC: Rule 162 · W: Rule 139(v) AND Rule 162
5Additional non-monetary grounds for LTE (high complexity/ specialised nature; works of a SECRET nature)W ONLY
6LTE panel drawn also from OTHER Public Works Organisations/ Works PSUsW ONLY
7proprietary Article Certificate (PAC) as a modeg, c, nc — absent from works entirely
8STE groundsG: One ground (emergency, indentor-certified) · W: Six grounds including national defence/ security and natural continuation
925% cap on incremental work under "natural continuation" STEW ONLY
10Rule cited for Nomination modesG/W/C: Rule 166 · NC: Rule 204, with an added requirement of consultation with the Financial Adviser and detailed justification forming an integral part of the proposal
11Award of work through quotations (up to Rs. 5 lakh, at least 3 contractors, one quotation each, emergent cases only)W ONLY
12Award of works in stalled contracts (20% billing test; next-higher-level approval)W ONLY
13Direct Procurement without Quotation / by Purchase CommitteeG (full text), C, NC — not in Works
14Scientific Ministries enhancement (Rs. 1 lakh / Rs. 10 lakh) with the four-part qualifying listG ONLY
15RATE CONTRACT full text — items amenable, merits, fall clause, parallel RCs, DDO, renewalG ONLY (W/C/NC list "Framework Agreements/ Rate Contracts" as a separate sixth family and cross-refer)
16Rate Contract listed under ADVERTISED modes vs as a SEPARATE FAMILYG: under Advertised · W/C/NC: separate family (f)
17Approved Vendor List full text — Developmental vs Approved Vendors, 20:80 split, 3-year rotation rule, fresh PQB every three yearsG ONLY (W/C/NC cross-refer to Goods para 4.7)
18eRA — placementg: A mode (4.5) · w: A channel (3.5.2) · nc: Both (4.4-3-a-iii and 4.6.2) · c: Absent entirely
19eRA expressly stated as inappropriate where QCBS is used in NC servicesnc only (the general eRA text in G also excludes QCBS and FBS)
20GTE viability ground (d)G: absence of sufficient competent domestic bidders AND *suspected cartel formation · W: requirement cannot be executed by indigenous contractors *at reasonable rates
21GTE Terms — Currency of Bidding, Agency Commission (5%), Delivery Terms/ Incoterms, Insurance (Rs. 5 crore threshold, Open Cover), IGST break-upG ONLY
22The eight GTE exemptions (research equipment, ICT items, nomination-basis spares/AMC, pre-15.05.2020 commitments, 354 medical devices + 120 drugs to 31.03.2027, MDB/BFA projects, semiconductor to 31.03.2025, procurement abroad for use abroad)G ONLY
23The seven conditions + six guidelines + three certificates for research-institution GTEG ONLY
24Advertisement portals in OTE/ LTEG: GeM AND GeM-CPPP · W: GeM-CPPP only
25Requirement that successful un-enlisted bidders get enlisted before contract placementW ONLY
26PQB/ Single-Stage Pre-qualification full text — PQC two-sided test, 3/4-week and 10-day notice, single-use shortlist, six-month gapG ONLY
27Mode selection by value bands for NC Services (above Rs 50 lakh → OTE; below → LTE with 3-step shortlisting; small value → Goods shopping modes)nc only
28"More than three" in the moderated long-list of NC service providersnc only
29Quarterly reporting of nomination awards + audit committee to check at least 10% of casesW, C, NC state it in the modes/ SSS sections
30Common footnote: thresholds revised upwards vide PPD's OM No. F.1/3/2014-PPD dated 10.07.2024all four

end of Chapter 4 — part b (and of Chapter 4)

Chapter 5

Bid Invitation Process

Merging: Goods Ch. 5 · Works Ch. 4 · Consultancy Ch. 5 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 5

Structural Notes for Students

1. This is one of only two chapters whose title is word-for-word identical in all four Manuals (the other being Chapter 6, Forms of Securities…). BUT the Works Manual numbers it CHAPTER 4, not Chapter 5.

2. Four common anchors run through all four Manuals, in the same order:

3. But the four Manuals organise the material very differently:

Number of sectionsDistinctive feature
G Goods5The base text; leanest treatment
W Works15the most granularPromotes each sub-topic to a full section; adds fixed NIT/ opening days, accessibility standards, entry window for sub-contractors
C Consultancy8ALONE splits the tender document into two separate documents — REoI (5.2) and RfP (5.3)
NC Non-Consultancy5Places the entire document-composition detail inside 5.1 as sub-paras 5.1.3 to 5.1.12; adds Performance Standards/ Method Statement and minimum-wage restrictions

Concordance for Chapter 5

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
5.1Model Tender Documents5.1.1(in 4.2)5.1.15.1.1
5.2Tender Documents — the fundamental document5.1.24.15.1.25.1.2
5.3Contents/ Sections of Tender Documents5.1.34.2(see 5.4, 5.5)5.1.3
5.3.1Notice Inviting Tender (NIT)5.1.3-24.2.1(RFPL — 5.3.2-2)5.1.4
5.3.2Instructions to Bidders (ITB) and AITB5.1.3-34.2.2(ITC — 5.3.2-3)5.1.5
5.3.3General and Special Conditions of Contract5.1.3-44.2.35.3.2-45.1.6
5.3.4Schedule of Requirements5.1.3-54.2.4(ToR)5.1.7
5.3.5Technical Specifications/ Drawings/ QA5.1.3-64.2.55.1.8
5.3.6Qualification Criteria5.1.3-74.2.65.2.2-65.1.9
5.3.7Evaluation Criteria5.1.2-64.2.75.3.2-6(within 5.1.12)
5.3.8Submission Forms and Formats5.1.3-84.2.85.3.35.1.11
5.3.9Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet)5.1.3-8-b4.2.95.3.3-25.1.10
5.4REoI Document5.2
5.5RfP Document5.3
5.6Mandatory e-Publishing5.1.44.35.45.1.13
5.7Amendment of Tender Documents5.1.54.45.4.25.1.14
5.8Extension of Deadline of Bid Submission5.1.64.55.4.35.1.15
5.9Availability and Cost of Tender Documents5.2.14.6.15.5.15.2.1
5.10Participation of Bidders — Eligibility5.2.24.6.25.5.25.2.2
5.11Pre-NIT and Pre-bid Conferences5.2.34.75.5.35.2.3
5.12Site Visit4.7-35.5.45.2.4
5.13Clarification of Tender Documents5.2.44.85.5.55.2.5
5.14Withdrawal/ Amendment/ Modification by Bidders5.2.54.95.5.65.2.6
5.15Sealing/ Marking of Bids in off-line Tenders5.2.64.105.5.75.2.7
5.16Uploading/ Submission of Bids5.2.74.115.5.85.2.8
5.17Bid Validity5.2.84.125.5.95.2.9
5.18Opening of Bids5.34.135.65.3
5.19Transparency and Third-Party Rights5.44.145.75.4
5.20Risks and Mitigations5.54.155.85.5

5.1Model Tender Documents

the Department of Expenditure (DoE), Ministry of Finance, Government of India, has issued model tender documents (MTD) for:

CategoryDate of issue
Procurement of GOODSOctober 2021
Procurement of NON-CONSULTANCY SERVICESOctober 2021
Procurement of CONSULTANCY SERVICESApril 2023(includes a Model REoI)

procuring entities are URGED To customise the relevant MTD to prepare tender documents for their procurements. Guidance notes annexed to the MTDs Detail the process of customisation of MTD for an organisation and for each procurement.

5.2Tender Documents — the Fundamental Document

1. Why it matters: The tender document is the fundamental document In the Public Procurement process, as — after the award of the contract — it becomes part of the contract agreement.

A carefully prepared tender document avoids delays and complaints. This will also attract more bidders to formulate and submit their competitive bids with confidence.

Hence, it is worth spending time and effort on this — even in cases of urgency.

2. Clarity requirement: Provisions/ clauses in the tender document should be clear, self-contained, and comprehensive without any ambiguity — to avoid differences in interpretation and possible disputes, time overrun, cost overrun and quality compromises.

5.2.1The Essential Aspects Every Tender Document Must Address

(Rule 173 of GFR 2017)

While tender documents should be complete in themselves and may be slightly different for various categories of procurement, these must necessarily address the essential aspects below. Model Tender Documents issued by the DoE — which comply with all these requirements — may be used, with due customisation:

Requirement
a)description of the subject matter of procurement, its specifications/ drawings including the quality/ nature/ quality assurance, quantity, time and place or places of delivery/ completion
W Variant: *…Quantity, time and location where the construction is to be effective, any incidental services to be performed*
a-bis)W Only: The facilities and the inputs which will be provided to the contractor by the Ministry/ Department
b)limitation or preference for participation by bidders in terms of Government policies
c)the procedure, as well as the date, time, and place for obtaining, submitting, and opening of the bids
d)suitable provisions for enabling a bidder to question (W: "Seek clarification/ question") The bidding conditions, bidding process and/ or rejection of its bid. These provisions should include a time frame in which the Procuring Entity will address the bidder's questions
e)criteria for determining the responsiveness Of bids; Criteria as well as factors to be considered for evaluating the bids on a common platform; And the criteria for awarding the contract to the responsive, most advantageous (lowest/ highest as the case May be) bidder — should be clearly indicated
W Footnote on "highest":"Highest, here, refers to the selection of the contractor using the quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS) methodology — wherein the contractor securing the HIGHEST MARKS by combining the technical and financial evaluation scores is identified as the Highest scorer or the h1 BIDDER*, and is eligible for award of contract."*
f)THE eligibility Criteria should take care of the supplier's/ contractor's eligibility to participate in the tender process (W: "to receive such a government contract")
f-bis)W Only: Requirements as to documentary evidence, which must be submitted by contractors to demonstrate their qualifications
g)THE qualification Criteria should consider their capability to perform the resultant contract successfully, balancing considerations of quality, time, and cost
W variant: *…should take care of the contractor's past performance, experience, technical competence, financial strength to handle the contract successfully, compliance with environmental protection regulations/ environment management system and so on*
h)commercial terms and conditions — e.g., payment terms, tax implications, respective obligations of the Procuring Entity and the suppliers, and compliance framework for statutory and other norms. The provision of price variation, wherever considered appropriate, and the methodology for calculation, shall be clearly stipulated
i)the tender document should include a clause that "If a firm quotes nil charges/ consideration, the bid shall be treated as unresponsive and will not be considered."
j)procedures for redressal of grievances or complaints from aggrieved bidders
k)if applicable, the integrity Pact clause and format To be signed shall be included
l)suitable provision for settlement of disputes, if any, emanating from the resultant contract
m)essential terms of the procurement contract, including a suitable clause mentioning that the resultant contract will be interpreted under Indian laws

5.2.2Delegation, Eligibility vs Qualification vs Evaluation, and Time

3. Delegation: Procuring entities May issue instructions regarding the appropriate delegation of authority for approval of the tender documents before these are floated/ uploaded.

4. The three-filter structure — the single most important conceptual point in this chapter:

FilterFunction
Eligibility criteriaspecify the criteria that a bidder should meet to be considered a responsive bid To be evaluated further, beyond the preliminary evaluation/ screening of bids
qualification criteriadetermine the capability of bidders (who have passed the eligibility criteria) to perform the contract. Only those bidders who meet the qualification criteria go to the next step of evaluation for award of contract
evaluation criteriaTHE final filter Used to select the bidders (who have passed the qualification criteria) for the award of the contract

5. Qualification Criteria — the broad-basing rule: Qualification criteria should be clear and fair in regard to the specific circumstances of the procurement. Public authorities should also keep the experience, technical and financial criteria broad-based, so that bidders with experience in items/ goods of a similar nature (W: "in execution of works of a similar nature") Can participate.

Appropriate parameters should be prescribed to enable the selection of the right type of bidders in the public interest, balancing considerations of quality, time, and cost.

6. Evaluation Criteria — the permitted additional criteria: Depending on the requirement and VfM considerations, the Procuring Entity may consider including, besides price, one or more additional criteria:

G GOODSW WORKS
Quality · technical merit · aesthetic and functional characteristics · environmental characteristics · running costs · cost-effectiveness · after-sales service and technical assistance · delivery date and delivery period or period of completionquality of workmanship · technical merit · aesthetic and functional characteristics · environmental characteristics · period of completion

no criteria shall be used for the evaluation of tenders that cannot be verified.

7. Default method: Open online tendering should be the default method To ensure efficiency of procurement.

8. The time-allowed Rule: The Procuring Entity should allow enough time to the bidders to prepare their proposals. The time allowed shall depend on the assignment, but:

SituationMinimum period
Normallynot less than three weeks
Where participation of INTERNATIONAL service providers/ contractors is contemplatednot less than four weeks

9. The four reserved rights: Tender documents should invariably Reserve the Procuring Entity's right — without assigning any reason — to: A) reject any or all of the bids; Or b) cancel the tender process; Or c) abandon the procurement of the goods/ works/ services; Or d) issue another tender for identical or similar goods/ works/ services.

5.3Contents/ Sections of the Tender Document

(Rule 168 of GFR 2017)

5.3.0The Section Structure

SectionG GOODSW WORKS
INotice Inviting Tender (NIT) and its Appendix: Tender Information Summary (TIS)(same)
IIInstructions to Bidders (ITB)(same)
IIIAppendix to Instructions to Bidders (AITB)(same)
IVGeneral Conditions of Contract (GCC)(same)
VSpecial Conditions of Contract (SCC)(same)
VISchedule of Requirements(same)
VIITechnical Specifications and Quality AssuranceDRAWING, Technical Specifications and Quality Assurance
VIIIQualification and Evaluation Criteria(same)
IX / X(i) Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet) then (j) Submission forms and formats(i) Submission forms and formats then (j) Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet) — order reversed

5.3.1Notice Inviting Tender (NIT)

1. Legal importance: NIT is of legal importance, since it is this part of the tender document that solicits offers from the bidders. G adds: *The model NIT format in MTD should be used to publish the tender notice.*

2. Function and alerts: THE NIT (and its Appendix TIS) must contain sufficient information in brief for a prospective bidder to decide whether to participate In the tender and, if he decides to participate, how to go about it.

To ensure competition, the attention of all likely bidders — for example, registered vendors/ contractors, past suppliers/ contractors, and other known potential suppliers/ contractors — should be invited to the NIT through email/ smss/ letters.

In e-procurement, the website May be programmed to generate these alerts automatically.

3. The mandatory note for limited tenders: In case of procurement through a limited tender, the NIT May be uploaded on geM (Goods only) As well as on gem-cppp and the Procuring Entity's website, with a note saying:

4. Audit trails: Time-stamped audit trails for the e-publication shall be maintained by the procurement portal. Printouts May be taken only in case of off-line tenders, if required — apart from ensuring maintenance of time-stamped audit trail of e-publication. The complete details of the dates on which advertisements appeared on the website should be indicated when sending cases to higher authorities.

5.3.2Instructions to Bidders (ITB) and its Appendix (AITB)

ITB contains all relevant information as well as guidance to the prospective bidders regarding:

ITB should NOT Contain information on processes after the announcement of the award, which should be covered in GCC — for example, the arbitration clause, resolution of disputes, and so on.

ITB also contains an introduction/ overview of the contents of the tender document.

the AITB device: Instead of modifying ITB every time, any changes warranted by exceptional circumstances May be indicated — with the prior approval of ca — in a separate Appendix to ITB (AITB), and ITB May be included unchanged in every tender document.

It should also be indicated therein that the provisions in the AITB shall supersede the corresponding provisions in the ITB.

5.3.3General and Special Conditions of Contract (GCC and SCC)

The general conditions of contract (GCC) details the terms and conditions that would govern the resultant contract.

GCC covers all information on aspects after the announcement of the tender award till the closure of the contract and dispute resolution. It should NOT Cover any aspect up to the announcement of the award.

The SCC device: Instead of modifying the GCC every time, any changes warranted by exceptional circumstances May be indicated in a separate section — special conditions of contract (SCC) — with the prior approval of the ca, and GCC May be included unchanged in every tender document.

It is also to be indicated therein that the provisions in the SCC will supersede the corresponding provisions in the GCC.

5.3.4Schedule of Requirements

G Goods

This section describes the list of goods required, quantities, delivery requirements, destination, and scope of supply (Concomitant accessories, spare parts, and incidental works/ services).

If there is no separate section on technical specifications (TS) and quality assurance (QA), then TS and QA May also be included here.

It must be clarified whether the evaluation of eligibility/ qualifications/ financial bids would be done item-by-item in a Schedule OR on the total of all items in a Schedule — and, if there is more than one Schedule, whether the same would be done on a schedule-by-schedule basis Or on the total of all schedules put together.

W Works

1. For works procurement, this section should detail the scope of work, including the description of the works to be undertaken, quantities, quality standards, site location, and delivery requirements/ milestones. If there are no separate sections on TS and QA, these details should be incorporated here, specifying the standards and methodologies to be employed.

2. It should be clarified how the evaluation will be conducted — whether item-by-item, by lot, or for the entire scope of work. Additionally, if the procurement involves multiple lots or sections of work, it should be stated whether evaluations will be done on a lot-by-lot basis Or based on the total of all lots or sections combined.

3. This ensures transparency and clarity, enabling bidders to understand the scope fully and submit their bids accordingly.

4. Identification of milestones May be done in an optimal and sequential manner, and the same May be stipulated in the tender document along with enabling provisions.

NC NON-CONSULTANCY — Schedule of Requirements and Services and Activities Schedule

Schedule of Requirements and its sub-schedule — Service and Activities Schedule — describes the background, purpose/ objectives, description/ scope, deliverables/ outcomes, quantum, timelines of services required, etc.

The requirements May consist of more than one Schedule. Each Schedule May contain more than one service.

In case of multiple schedules of requirement in a tender of services, it should be clarified how bids for multiple schedules would be evaluated for award of contract — either Schedule by Schedule or in total.

Bidders must fill up compliance Regarding these schedules.

5.3.5Technical Specifications, Drawings and Quality Assurance

G Goods

Technical specifications and quality assurance lays down the technical specifications and quality assurance requirements of the goods required. It would also stipulate, if required, any compliance required by Central and State pollution control boards.

W Works — and the Accessibility Mandate

1. Construction drawings, technical specifications and quality assurance plan Lay down the technical specifications and quality assurance requirements of the works to be executed. It would also stipulate, if required, any compliance required by Central and State Pollution Control Boards.

2. The mandatory accessibility clause — W ONLY: "The bidder shall ensure that all products, services, platforms, infrastructure, and other deliverables under contract must comply with applicable accessibility standards and guidelines as notified under the rights of persons with disabilities Act, 2016, and the rights of persons with disabilities Rules, 2017 As amended — including but not limited to:"

a) harmonised guidelines and standards for universal accessibility in India, issued by the Ministry of housing and urban affairs.

b) IS 17802 (PART 1):2021 — Accessibility for ICT Products and Services Part I: Requirements; and IS 17802 (PART 2):2022 — Accessibility for ICT Products and Services Part 2: Determination of Conformance — issued by the bureau of Indian Standards; and

c) any other relevant guidelines, notifications, or instructions from time to time by the Department of empowerment of persons with disabilities, Ministry of social justice and empowerment, Government of India.

NC NON-CONSULTANCY — Performance Standards and Quality Assurance; Method Statement; Work Plan; Critical Material Schedule

1. Performance Standards and Quality Assurance STIPULATES THE quantitative/ qualitative parameters/ limits/ thresholds for performance standards/ service levels and functional/ technical specifications To which the service must be performed.

It shall stipulate procedures for the measurement, reporting and monitoring Of performance parameters — including institutional or third-party arrangements for this purpose.

It shall also stipulate the procedure for resolution and escalation in case of deficiency In performance/ quality/ service levels.

In the case of long-term and complex services, it May stipulate a service-level agreement (SLA) Which must be complied with during delivery of services.

Performance standards shall also include statutory compliance required for occupational safety, health and working conditions Requirements during delivery of services.

2. Procuring Entity May, if considered necessary, specify sub-schedules: Method statement, work plan, and critical material schedules Required for the performance of services to desired quality and standards. Otherwise, these May be left to be quoted by the bidder.

3. Bidders must fill up the relevant forms regarding this Schedule.

5.3.6Qualification Criteria

1. The general Rule (all four): If it is intended to use qualification criteria to evaluate a tender and determine whether a bidder has the required qualifications to perform the contract successfully, this point May be clearly specified in ITB/ AITB or as a separate section OF THE tender document.

The bidder must ensure that he provides convincing proof Of having fulfilled these criteria.

Any criteria not specified in the tender Cannot be used for evaluation or qualification.

2. The content of Pre/ Post Qualification Criteria: PQC shall be based entirely upon the capability and resources required to perform the particular contract satisfactorily, considering:

THE quantity, delivery, and value Of the procurement shall be kept in view while the pre/ post qualification criteria are fixed.

There should be NO Pre/ post qualification criteria that would be advantageous to foreign manufactured goods at the cost of domestically manufactured goods. (C variant: "advantageous to FOREIGN CONSULTANTS at the cost of domestically delivered services".)

3. Relaxation for start-ups (all four): The condition of prior turnover and prior experience May be relaxed for start-ups — only to start-ups recognised by DPIIT — subject to meeting quality & technical specifications And making suitable provisions in the tender document (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017; OM No. F.20/2/2014-PPD (Pt.) dated 20.09.2016).

Start-ups May be MSMEs/ MSEs or otherwise. Such relaxation can be provided in the case of procurement of works as well.

It is further clarified that such relaxation is not optional but has to be ensured — except in case of procurement of items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, etc., where adequate justification exists for the Procuring Entity not to relax such criteria.

4. Demerged entities — W, C, NC ONLY (DoE's OM No. F.8/78/2023-PPD dated 12.10.2023):

W formulation:Demerged entities (by virtue of a corporate restructuring exercise etc.) May be permitted To participate in the tender by using the credentials of the original/ parent entity to satisfy the eligibility criteria — at least for the initial five years from the incorporation of the demerged entities.

Procuring entities may, in suitable cases, consider the credentials based on the merit and circumstances of the cases — like type of procurement, nature of demerger, number of eligible bidders available, etc.

Tender documents must clearly mention If the credentials of the demerged entity will be considered or not in the specific tender, and May give the conditions under which demerged entities May become eligible.

5. Entry window for sub-contractors in smaller contracts — W ONLY:

6. The non-consultancy qualification criteria — NC Only, with its three numbered criteria and worked example:

Unless otherwise stipulated, the Qualification Criteria shall include:

CriterionContent
Criteria 1: Experience and past performancei) Experience of providing similar services
ii) VOLUME of similar services: (1) 3 services > each 40% of the estimated cost; OR (2) 2 services > each 50% of the estimated cost; OR (3) 1 service > 80% of the estimated cost
Criteria 2: PERFORMANCE CAPABILITY — Managerial and Equipmenti) CONTRACT MANAGER — 5 years' experience (3 as a manager)
ii) Ownership/ proposals for acquisition/ hiring the essential equipment
criteria 3: Financial capabilityi) Avg annual turnover AT least 3–7 TIMES the estimated cost
ii) Financial Liquidity

the worked example given in the nc Manual:

a) Past Experience:

  • i) The bidder must have at least three years' experience (Ending month of March prior to the bid opening) of providing similar types of services to Central/ State Government/ PSUs/ nationalised banks/ reputed organisations. Services rendered with a list of such organisations, with duration of service, shall be furnished.
  • ii) the bidder must have successfully executed/ completed similar services (the definition of "similar services" should be clearly DEFINED) Over the last seven financial years Previous to the current financial year:
  • (1) three similar completed services with annualised value not less than 40% (forty per cent) of the estimated annualised cost; OR
  • (2) two similar completed services with annualised value not less than 50% (fifty per cent) of the estimated annualised cost; OR
  • (3) one similar completed service with annualised value not less than 80% (eighty per cent) of the estimated annualised cost.

b) Performance Capability:

  • I) managerial capability: A contract Manager with five years' experience In services of an equivalent nature and volume, including no less than three years as manager.
  • ii) equipment capability: Ownership/ proposals for the timely acquisition (own, lease, hire, etc.) of the essential equipment listed in the tender information summary (TIS).

c) Financial Capability:

  • I) average annual gross billing during the last three years, ending 31ST March of the previous financial year, should be at least 3 times (for 1–3 year contracts) to 7 times (for contracts longer than 3 years) The estimated annual cost — as far as feasible based on the nature of service and market condition.
  • ii) liquid assets and/ or credit facilities — net of other contractual commitments and exclusive of any advance payments Which May be made under the contract — of no less than the amount specified in the tender document.

The upper-cap Rule NC: In higher-value procurements, the minimum annual turnover should not be blindly a multiplier Of the assignment value — but there May be an upper cap on demanded turnover, so as not to restrict competition only to the big or foreign firms.

5.3.7Evaluation Criteria — the Works elaborationW

1. These criteria can include:

and — critically in safeguarding the Procuring Entity's interests:

— ensuring that any defects identified within a specified period post-completion are rectified at the contractor's expense, and that the project's integrity is maintained over time.

It's crucial that the evaluation criteria — including those for the defect liability and warranty periods as well as long-term service commitments — are tangible and verifiable. This ensures a transparent, equitable, and objective assessment process, enabling a holistic evaluation that considers not only the initial project execution but also its long-term sustainability, operational efficiency, and maintenance.

The inclusion of the projected delivery date and completion timeline Ensures the project adheres to strategic planning and timelines.

2. Conditional discounts — W Only: Conditional discounts, or discounts offered post tender opening, if any, shall not be considered during evaluation. However, such discounts shall be availed if the bidder becomes otherwise eligible for award of contract.

5.3.8Submission Forms and Formats

This section contains the relevant forms for tender submission:

5.3.9Financial Bid (BOQ Excel Sheet)

1. Preparation by the Procuring Entity: The Procuring Entity should select an appropriate format of BOQ from the e-procurement portal And upload it after filling up the entries for the complete Schedule of requirements and various price components (W Adds: "/ Schedule of Rates") — to enable the system to automatically calculate the all-inclusive price of a bid and generate a comparative tabulation of all bids.

2. The "not entered = not paid" Rule — C and NC Only: The bidder should fill in rates and prices for ALL Items described in the excel sheet/ services and activities Schedule.

Items for which no rate or price is entered By the bidder will not be paid for By the Procuring Entity when executed, and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices.

The priced schedule contains sections on remuneration for staff deployed, reimbursable expenses and miscellaneous expenses.

All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the consultant/ service provider under the contract — or for any other cause — as in the month prior to the month of the deadline for submission of bids — should be included in the total bid price.

Even in tenders for lump-sum contracts, for the purpose of determining the remuneration due for additional elements of work/ additional services during the contract, the bidder shall provide a breakdown of the lump-sum price.

C adds: *Bidding Documents should include a clause that "if a firm quotes NIL service charges/ consideration, the bid shall be treated as unresponsive and will not be considered".*

3. Uploading discipline (all four): Bidders are to upload only the downloaded BOQ (in excel format) After entering the relevant fields — without any alteration/ deletion/ modification of other portions of the excel sheet.

The quoted price shall be considered to include all relevant financial implications — including inter alia:

4. Restrictions regarding personnel deployed — NC ONLY:

A) the minimum wage floor: The quoted rates shall not be less than the minimum wage fixed/ notified by the Central/ State Government (whichever is higher) — where the service is performed — and shall include all statutory obligations and service charges/ margin (including transaction charges) over such minimum wage.

B) the 'nil' price Rule: Bids without any element of cost over and above such minimum wage Shall be treated as 'Nil' price quotations and would be rejected.

C) LCS for manpower outsourcing: Least cost system (LCS) should be considered for procurement of manpower outsourcing service, wherever appropriate — especially in high-value cases.

D) liability and character verification: The service provider shall be liable for all kinds of dues payable in respect of all personnel Provided under the contract, and the Procuring Entity shall not be liable for any dues for availing the services of the personnel. The service provider should ensure that the persons to be deployed are not alcoholics or drug addicts And do not indulge in any activity prejudicial to the interest of the Procuring Entity. The service provider shall ensure to get the police verification for all the manpower deployed By them, and the contractor should ensure that the manpower deputed should bear good moral character.

5.4Preparation of the Request for Expression of Interest (REoI) Document [C ONLY]

5.4.1Basic Considerations

1. DoE has issued Model Tender Documents for Procurement of Consultancy Services, which includes a MODEL REoI.

2. Why two stages: It is important to hire consultants who have a reputation for relevant quality and competence; hence Procurement of Consultancy is done in a two-stage process:

  • The first stage (expression of Interest Stage) — to shortlist such qualified consultants in a transparent and open Manner.
  • In the next stage (RfP Stage) — there is competition only among qualified shortlisted firms or individuals, in which selection is based on the quality of the proposal And, where appropriate, on the cost of services To be provided.

3. Therefore, the process of shortlisting is one of the most difficult and time-consuming tasks In the selection process of a consultant. This could be eased by writing a clear description of service (objectives and scope) and shortlisting criteria.

5.4.2Contents of the REoI

The EoI document shall contain the following sections:

Part i: REoI process

  • Section I: Request for Expression of Interest (REoI)
  • Section II: Appendix
  • Section III: Qualification Criteria

part II: Schedule of requirements

  • Section IV: Terms of Reference

part III: EoI submission formats

  • Form 1: EoI Form (Covering Letter)Form 1.1: Consultant Information · Form 1.2: Eligibility Declarations
  • Form 2: Qualification Criteria – ComplianceForm 2.1: Performance Capability Statement · Form 2.2: Financial Capability Statements · Form 2.2.1: Financial Statement · Form 2.2.2: Average Annual Turnover
  • Form 3: Checklist for Consultants
  • Other Annexures:Annexure 1: Authorisation to Attend Pre-EoI Conference · Annexure 2: Code of Integrity

Section-wise description:

  • Section I — REoI: A formal invitation for Expression of Interest from interested bidders.
  • Section II — Appendix: Where variable parameters and information related to this specific REoI process Are summarised.

Section III — qualification criteria:

a) This section lays down the qualification criteria which shall be applied by the Procuring Entity for shortlisting the consultants. The REoI should ask for sufficient information So that the Procuring Entity May evaluate the consultant's capabilities and eligibility To undertake the assignment. The Consultants must be asked:

  • I) requisite experience during a specified period (say 5 years) with volume of assignments similar in nature in general and specific sectors relevant to the subject assignment;
  • ii) financial capability: Turnover (overall and from consultancy services).

b) Relaxation for Start-ups(as at para 5.3.6-3 above).

c) Qualification Criteria shall be based entirely upon capability and resources; there should be no qualification criteria advantageous to FOREIGN CONSULTANTS at the cost of domestically delivered services.

d) Qualification of demerged entities(as at para 5.3.6-4 above).

E) what the REoI must NOT ASK FOR — a critical restriction:

Section IV — terms of Reference (ToR): This section describes the background, purpose/ objectives, description/ scope of work, deliverables/ outcomes, inputs to be provided by the Procuring Entity, and timelines of Consultancy Services (hereinafter called the 'Service') required.

The 'service' May include incidental goods, works, and other services If so indicated therein. Any generic reference to the 'Service' shall be deemed to include such incidental Goods, Works, and other Services. This may also include the place of execution of the assignment.

5.4.3Important Provisions of the REoI

1. REoI contains all relevant information and guidance regarding — obtaining tender documents, preparing and submitting a responsive bid, the process of establishing eligibility/ qualification credentials, evaluation and comparison of tenders, code of Integrity in Public Procurement (CIPP), the process of grievance redressal, and declaration of results.

2. Eligibility Criteria: Provisions relating to eligibility criteria, conflict of interest and applicable preferential policies regulate the participation of bidders of various categories and their agents.

  • It mentions the type of entities which may participate, specifically if JV/C are permitted to participate.
  • It shall also mention that the consulting company should be registered under the applicable Act with registered offices in India.
  • It also excludes insolvent, bankrupt, debarred, convicted firms, and firms with conflict of interest from participation. Restriction of participation of bidders from certain countries having land borders with India also applies.
  • In case jv/cs are permitted, it should be made clear if the experience of the bidders as a member of JV/C would be considered or not. If yes, then the manner of aggregating qualifications Of members of JV/C — say, only pro-rata experience proportionate to his percentage share declared in JV/C MoU — May be mentioned.

3. Preferential Procurement Policies: applicable policies are mentioned (MSEs, Start-ups, Make in India etc.).

4. EoI validity: Eois shall remain valid for a period not less than 60 (sixty) days From the deadline for the EoI submission.

5. Qualification Criteria: the qualification criteria for shortlisting the bidders and its scoring/ marking scheme is detailed. It also specifies, if JV/C are permitted, how credentials of members would be considered in evaluation.

6. ToR at the eoI STAGE — the "not yet ready" rule: At the EoI stage, ToR is relevant for bidders to decide whether they are interested in bidding for this assignment. It is also relevant to decide the specific sector of experience required in the qualification criteria.

Normally, ToR should be ready before REoI is floated. However, if a detailed ToR is not ready, at least the following should be included in the REoI: Description/ scope of work, deliverables/ outcomes, inputs to be provided by the Procuring Entity, and timelines Of the required 'service'.

REoI should contain a clause retaining the right to make minor adjustments to ToR at the RfP stage.

5.5Preparation of the Request for Proposals (RfP) Document [C ONLY]

(Rule 186 of GFR 2017)

5.5.1What the RfP Is

the request for proposals (RfP) is the bidding document in which the technical and financial proposals from the consultants are obtained.

For procurement of consultancy services, the RfP is sent only to the short-listed consultants.

It contains the following sections:

  • Section I: Request for Proposal Letter (RFPL) and its Appendix: Tender Information Summary (TIS)
  • Section II: Instructions to Consultants (ITC)
  • Section III: Appendix to Instructions to Consultants (AITC)
  • Section IV: General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
  • Section V: Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
  • Section VI: Terms of Reference (ToR)Section VI-A: List of Key Experts and Required Qualifications
  • Section VII: Evaluation/ Scoring Criteria

5.5.2Section-by-Section

1. Section I — RFPL and TIS: Provides a synopsis of information relevant for a consultant to decide on participating in the RfP. RFPL states the intention of the Procuring Entity to enter into a contract for the provision of consultancy services, details of the Procuring Entity, and date, time, and address for submission of proposals.

It plays the role played by NIT In procurement of goods and services.

2. Section II — ITC and Section III — AITC: Contains all necessary information that would help the consultants prepare responsive proposals.

It shall bring in as much transparency as possible To the selection procedure by providing information on the evaluation process, and by indicating the evaluation criteria and factors and their respective weights and minimum passing quality score.

Standard information includes clauses relating to the procedure of bid submission, pre-bid meeting, seeking clarifications, and so on — BUT should NOT Contain information on processes after the announcement of the award, which should be covered in GCC.

The assignment/ job-specific information in AITC includes: Date and time of bid submission, contact address, qualification criteria, method of selection, evaluation process, factors of evaluation and their respective weights, and so on.

The ITC shall specify the proposal validity period — normally 90 (ninety) days.

3. Sections IV and V — GCC and SCC: (as at para 5.3.3 above).

4. Section VI — ToR and Section VI-A — List of Key Experts:

A) ToR describes the background, purpose/ objectives, description/ scope, deliverables/ outcomes, timelines, Procuring Entity's inputs and counterpart personnel, statutory requirements of services required, etc.

B) the budget-disclosure Rule: Since cost is part of the selection criterion, the ITC shall not indicate the budgetexcept in case of fixed budget system of selection — but shall indicate the expected input of key professionals (staff time).

Section VI-A: 'List of Key Experts and Required Qualifications' describes the team composition, expertise, experience, and professional qualifications required for each key expert. Consultants, however, shall be free to prepare their own estimates of staff time Necessary to carry out the assignment.

C) consultants May be encouraged to provide comments and suggestions On ToR, counterpart staff, key experts and facilities to be provided by the Procuring Entity.

D) simplified technical proposal (stp) vs full technical proposal (ftp):

5. Section VII — Evaluation/ Scoring Criteria: Stipulates the scoring scheme for evaluating various technical criteria. These may cover scoring of criteria relating to:

It may also lay down a minimum technical score to qualify for the next stage of financial evaluation. In a specific evaluation scheme, instead of a scheme of scoring, a scheme may be laid down to evaluate criteria on a pass/ fail basis.

5.5.3Standard Formats for Technical and Financial ProposalsC

1. Technical proposal forms:

FormContent
T-1Proposal Formto serve as a covering letter to BOTH the Techno-commercial and Financial Proposals(T-1A: Consultant's Commercial Information)
T-2Consultant's Organisation and Experience
T-3Comments and Suggestions on Terms of Reference, Counterpart Staff, and Inputs to be Provided by the Procuring Entity
T-4Description of Approach, Methodology and Work Plan in Responding to the Terms of Reference
T-5Work Schedule and Planning for Deliverables
T-6Team Composition, Assignment, and Key Experts' Inputs(Annex to T-6: Key Experts' Curriculum Vitae — CV)
T-7Terms and Conditions – Compliance
T-8Checklist for Consultants
T-9Bank Guarantee Format for Earnest Money Deposit
T-10Integrity Pact

2. Financial proposal (BOQ excel sheet) — (see para 5.3.9 above).

3. OTHER FORMATS — Contract Form and its Appendices:

5.5.4Important Provisions of the ITCC

2. Eligibility to participate — the closed-list rule: As the RfP follows the earlier EoI shortlisting process, this invitation is open only to consultants who have been shortlisted therein or are specifically invited to participate.

IT IS not permissible for the shortlisted consultants to transfer this RfP to any other firm Without the permission of the Procuring Entity.

Proposals from consultants who have not been shortlisted shall not be entertained.

The shortlisted consultant must continue to meet the eligibility criteria prescribed in the EoI document (based inter alia on which they were shortlisted) — including restrictions on consultants from specified countries — as of the date of his proposal submission, and should continue to meet these till the award of the contract. Consultants must provide evidence of their continued eligibility if requested.

3. Association among shortlisted consultants — and the 14-day approval rule:

Unless otherwise stipulated in TIS/ AITC, if a shortlisted Consultant considers that it may enhance its expertise by associating with other consultants in the form of a joint venture or as sub-consultants, it may do so with either:

  • (a) NON-SHORTLISTED Consultant(s), or
  • (b) SHORTLISTED Consultants

— without vitiating the shortlisting criteria of the REoI.

The lead member Rule:

  • The shortlisted consultant shall be the lead member When associating with non-shortlisted Firms as a joint venture.
  • IF shortlisted Consultants associate with each other, any of them can be a lead member.

A shortlisted consultant must obtain the Procuring Entity's written approval not later than 14 days before the RfP submission deadline, in all such cases.

Such approval shall be denied IF:

  • (i) a shortlisted consultant proposes to associate with an ineligible consultant — or, in case of an ineligible joint venture, any of its members;
  • (ii) because of the change, the consultant no longer substantially meets the qualification criteria Outlined in the REoI document; Or
  • (iii) if, in the opinion of the Procuring Entity, a substantial reduction in competition May result.

4. Preferential Procurement Policies: applicable policies are mentioned (MSEs, Start-ups, Make in India etc.).

5. RfP validity: RfP shall remain valid for a period not less than 90 (ninety) days From the deadline for the RfP submission.

6. Evaluation/ scoring criteria — the three heads, and the presentation rule:

Evaluation shall, inter alia, consider the Consultant's:

  • (i) "specific experience of the consultant (as a firm) relevant to the assignment";
  • (ii) "adequacy and quality of the proposed methodology, and work plan";
  • (iii) "key experts' qualifications and competence for the assignment".

It also specifies, if JV/C are permitted, how credentials of members of JV/C would be considered.

The presentation Rule: The Procuring Entity May ask all shortlisted consultants To deliver a presentation on their technical proposals.

  • This presentation shall only cover contents of the technical proposals already submitted By the consultant.
  • Unless otherwise provided, no marks shall be assigned to the presentation.
  • Opportunities for such presentations shall be provided in a manner to provide a level playing field To all shortlisted consultants — including time limits for such presentations.

5.6Uploading of Tender Documents: Mandatory e-Publishing

(Rule 159 of GFR 2017)

1. The mandate and its reach: IT IS mandatory for all ministries/ departments of the Central Government, their attached and subordinate offices, and autonomous/ statutory bodies to publish their tender enquiries, corrigenda thereof, and details of bid awards Online on the gem-Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) — and also on their own website.

These instructions apply to ALL Of the following — whether they are advertised, issued to a limited number of parties, or to a single party:

the exclusions differ by Manual:

ManualThese instructions would NOT apply to
G, C, NCthe purchase of goods without quotations, or the purchase of goods by the purchase Committee
Wworks procurement through quotation

2. The national security exemption — and its quarterly reporting obligation:

Individual cases where confidentiality is required for reasons of national security Would be exempted from the mandatory e-publishing requirement.

BodyWho approves the exemption
Ministry/ DepartmentTHE Secretary Of the Ministry/ Department, with the concurrence of the concerned Financial Adviser
Autonomous and Statutory bodiesTHE head of the body, with the concurrence of the head of the finance — in each such case

statistical information on the number of cases in which exemption was granted and the value of the concerned contract Should be intimated on a quarterly basis To the Ministry of Finance, Department of Expenditure.

3. Fixed days for issuance of NIT and tender opening — W ONLY:

Example 1 — fixation of days by CPWD:

RegionDays for Issuance of NITsDays for Tender Opening
DelhiMondayMonday
NorthernTuesdayTuesday
SouthernWednesdayWednesday
EasternThursdayThursday
WesternFridayFriday

5.7Amendment of Tender Documents

(Rule 173(iii) of GFR 2017)

1. At any time prior to the date of submission of bids, the Procuring Entity May — suo motu Or in response to a clarification sought by a prospective bidder (directly or in a pre-bid conference) — amend tender documents by issuing a corrigendum.

Copies of such amendment/ modification should be uploaded on the e-publishing portal and the Procuring Entity's own website.

In case of off-line tenders, the copies of such amendment/ modification are to be simultaneously despatched, free of cost, by registered/ speed post/ courier/ e-mail, to all the parties who have already purchased the tender documents — and copies of such amendments are also to be prominently attached in the unsold sets Of the tender documents.

When the amendment/ modification changes the requirement significantly And/ or when there is not much time left for the bidders to respond and prepare a revised tender, the time and date of submission of tenders are also to be suitably extended (not less than 3 days).

2. The 21-DAY re-publication Rule — W ONLY:

5.8Extension of Deadline of Bid Submission

1. Ordinary extension: To give sufficient time to bidders to prepare and submit their bids, the Procuring Entity may — suo motu, or based on a justifiable request of bidder(s), or due to significant modification of tender documents — extend the time and date of submission of tenders suitably (not less than three (3) days), along with suitable changes in the corresponding time-frames for:

Depending on the situation, such an amendment May also need fresh publication, adopting the same procedure as for publication of the original tender enquiry.

2. Auto-extension of bids in case of lack of response — an important and easily-missed provision:

A) the information blackout: The e-procurement portal/ GeM should not provide anybody — including the Procuring Entity — with the bid count before the tender opening time, even at their request.

b) The set-up: The e-Procurement portal/ GeM May facilitate the Procuring Entity in specifying, at the time of tender upload:

  • THE minimum number of bids Considered sufficient; And
  • THE pre-specified number of days for automatic extension Of bid opening (not less than 7 days).

C) the declaration: The system shall declare in the tender details that in case of low competition (without specifying the number), the tender closing time shall be automatically extended by the specified number of days.

D) the operation: If bids received till the bid opening time are less than the specified minimum bids, the system should automatically extend The tender opening by the specified number of days — without seeking any input from or sharing any information with anyone, including the Procuring Entity.

Purchasers and bidders shall only be informed That "due to less competition, the tender closing time has been extended up to (date and time)."

e) ONCE only — G Only: However, this automatic extension of bid opening shall be done only once, not repeatedly.

f) the 'one' device: If a Procuring Entity wants to go ahead even with low competition (E.g., due to urgency), they May mention 'ONE' As the minimum bid — so that if no bid is received, the tender is automatically extended; Otherwise, it is not.

G) GeM and e-procurement portals shall update their systems accordingly.

5.9Availability and Cost of Tender Documents

(Rule 161(v) of GFR 2017)

1. Availability window: Tender documents should preferably be sold or available for download after the date and time of the start of availability till the deadline for availability As mentioned in the tender document (say up to the date of opening of tenders) — and this should be clearly indicated in the documents.

The organisation should also post the complete tender document on the website (W adds: "and on GeM-CPPP") AND permit prospective bidders to make use of the document downloaded from the website.

W adds: *The advertisement for invitation of tenders should give the complete web-address from where bid documents can be downloaded.*

2. The cost Rule: Normally, no tender document fee should be charged.

In exceptional cases, a Procuring Entity May fix a bare minimum cost Of tender documents to defray the expenses/ effort of preparing documents, drawings, ETC.

The cost of the tender document is to be submitted to the authority nominated therein by the prospective bidder in the form of a demand draft/ banker's cheque/ pay order/ online payment gateway.

3. Who is exempt from the tender document cost — the two Manuals differ:

ManualFirms eligible for exemption
G GOODSMSEs AND The Procuring Entity's registered units(for relevant items and monetary limit)
W WORKSonly the Procuring Entity's registered units (for relevant grades of work and monetary limit) — MSEs are not named

Such firms HAVE TO submit/ upload scanned copies of documents in support of this exemption.

5.10Participation of Bidders — Eligibility Criteria

1. The general rule: The tender document May lay down eligibility criteria For participating in the tender process — e.g., restrictions on participation by bidders relating to:

Except for the eligibility criteria, participation shall be open to all bidders in open/ global tender enquiries.

In the case of the second stage (Of two-stage bidding or PQB) or limited tenders, participation shall be open only to such bidders who have been previously shortlisted or specifically invited.

2. Purchase preference policies: The Procuring Entity May reserve its right to grant preferences to eligible bidders under various Government policies/ directives (policies relating to Make in India, MSME, Start-ups, etc.).

3. The additional works eligibility heads — W ONLY (not in the Goods list):

A) legal status of the bidder: Individual bidder — a natural person, or a private entity, or a public entity (state-owned enterprise or institution), or a joint venture/ consortium (JV/C).

B) the Rs. 10 crore JV threshold: For package size exceeding certain values [say — Rs. 10 (ten) crore], JV/C May be permitted to participate in the procurement of works in specific situations where the credentials required are not likely to be available with an individual bidder.

  • Maximum number of partners in JV shall be limited (say — three).
  • In case of JV, all the partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the successful completion of the work.
  • Participation of JV/C is specifically discouraged In the case of quality Oriented Procurement (QOP) with QCBS evaluation.

C) registrations/ licences: GSTIN, PAN, EPF, ESI, labour, Private Security Agencies (PASARA), etc.

D) submission of requisite bid Security (Or Bid Security declaration, if allowed) or proof of exemption therefrom.

e) FREE FROM financial insolvency, debarment, or convictions.

f) A consistent history of litigation or arbitration By the bidder May result in disqualification.

G) restriction as per Government policies: for Class-II Local Suppliers and Non-Local bidders under Make-in-India; and bidders from land-border countries or with a Specified ToT arrangement.

4. Conflict of interest — the four (or three) situations:

Bidders having a conflict of interest shall not be eligible to participate In the tender process — unless the conflict stemming from such relationship has been resolved in a manner acceptable to the Procuring Entity Throughout the tender process and execution of the contract.

The bidder shall be considered to have a conflict of interest in the following situations:

A) personnel relationship: If its personnel have a close personal, financial, or business relationship With any personnel of the Procuring Entity who are directly or indirectly related to the procurement or execution process of the contract, which can affect the decision of the Procuring Entity directly or indirectly.

B) prior involvement: The bidder (or his allied firm) provided services for the need assessment/ procurement planning Of the tender process in which it is participating.

C) the agency Rule — G Only: A principal can authorise only one agent, and an agent should not represent or quote on behalf of more than one principal. However, this shall not debar more than one authorised distributor (With or without the OEM) from quoting equipment manufactured by an OEM in procurements under a Proprietary Article Certificate.

D) multiple bids — and the two Manuals differ on the consequence:

Consequence of participating in more than one bid
G GOODSparticipation in any capacity by a bidder (including as a partner/ JV member or sub-contractor in another bid or vice versa) in more than one bid shall result in the disqualification of all bids in which he is a party
W WORKS…Shall result in the *disqualification of the bid in which he is a main/ principal/ lead bidder*

HOWEVER (both Manuals): This DOES NOT Limit the participation of an entity as a sub-contractor in more than one bid, if he is not bidding independently in his own name or as a member of a JV/ consortium.

5. OEM/ agents of supplier — G ONLY:

A) the manufacturer's authorisation requirement: Except in the case of commercially-off-the-shelf (cots) Items, when a firm sends a quotation for an item manufactured by some different company, the firm is also required to attach, in its quotation:

  • THE manufacturer's authorisation certificate; and
  • THE manufacturer's confirmation of extending the required warranty support for that product(in addition to the bidder's own confirmation of the required warranty), as per formats given in Tender Documents.

This is necessary to ensure a quotation from a responsible party offering a genuine product backed by a warranty obligation from the concerned manufacturer.

B) tender-specific authorisation for large contracts: In the case of large contracts, especially capital equipment, the manufacturer's authorisation must be insisted upon on a tender-specific basis — not general authorisation/ dealership — by clearly declaring it in the tender documents.

5.11Pre-NIT and Pre-bid Conferences

(Rule 173(x) of GFR 2017)

5.11.1Pre-Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) Conference — Market Consultation

IN complex and innovative procurement cases, or where the Procuring Entity May not have the required knowledge to formulate tender provisions, A pre-nit conference (before finalising/ publishing NIT) May help the Procuring Entity in obtaining inputs from the industry.

Such conferences should be widely publicised So that different potential suppliers/ contractors can attend (DoE's OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021, para 9.2).

All inputs received from the probable bidders in such a conference shall be compiled/ minuted, and requirements finalised (with the approval of the technical committee, if formed, by the Competent Authority).

In a more complex, large, and green-field/ blue-sky project, two-stage tendering (with EoI) would be more appropriate and transparent.

5.11.2Pre-bid Conference

When it must be provided for:

ManualTrigger
G GOODSin case of turnkey contract(s) and sophisticated and costly equipment, large works and complex consultancy assignments
W WORKSin case of turnkey contract(s) or contract(s) of special nature for procurement of sophisticated and costly work/ services/ equipment — or wherever felt necessary'

a suitable provision shall be kept in the tender documents for one or more pre-bid conferences (after the NIT and tender documents have been published) — FOR clarifying issues/ clearing doubts, if any, and for ensuring a level playing field, relating to the specifications and other allied technical/ commercial details.

A) who May attend, and the deemed-no-issue Rule:

  • G Participation in the pre-bid conference May be restricted to prospective bidders who have downloaded the tender document.
  • Participation is not mandatory.
  • However, if a bidder chooses not to (or fails to) participate in the pre-bid conference or does not submit a written query, it shall be assumed that they have no issues regarding the techno/ commercial conditions.

B) the timing Rules:

EventTiming
Date of the pre-bid meetingnormally after 15 to 21 (fifteen to twenty-one) days Of the issue of the tender document — and should be specified therein
Last date for written queries and for registration for participationmentioned in the tender document — 7 days before the date of the conference, if not specified
Modethe pre-bid conference May also be held online At the discretion of the Procuring Entity

c) Timelines to be declared: Timelines for response to the pre-bid conference — E.G., replies to questions, issue of minutes of the pre-bid conference, corrigenda, etc. — should be mandatorily mentioned in the tender document and complied with.

D) identity requirement: Delegates participating in the pre-bid conference must provide a photo identity and an authorisation letter as per the specified format from their company/ principalsotherwise, they shall not be allowed to participate.

E) the seven-day minutes Rule: After the pre-bid conference, minutes of the pre-bid conference shall be published on the Procuring Entity's portal within seven days of the conference.

If required, a clarification letter and corrigendum To the tender document shall be issued, containing amendments to various provisions — which shall form part of the tender document.

To give reasonable time to the prospective bidders to take such clarifications into account in preparing their bids, the Procuring Entity May suitably extend, as necessary, the deadline for the bid submission.

5.12Site VisitWCNCNOT in Goods

The bidder/ consultant, at its own cost, responsibility and risk, MAY visit and examine the site of work/ required services and its surroundings, and obtain all information that May be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a contract for the works/ services.

5.13Clarification of Tender Documents

A prospective bidder requiring clarification on the tender documents May ask questions in writing/ electronically From the office/ contact person as mentioned in the tender document.

The three time limits:

StepTime limit
Questions must be raisedbefore the clarification end date Mentioned in the tender document — or, if not mentioned, before 7 days of the deadline for the bid submission
Holiday rulethis deadline shall not be extended in case of any intervening holidays
Response by the Procuring Entitya response will be sent in writing/ digitally at least 5 days prior to the date of opening of the tenders

ONLY material queries and their responses Shall be uploaded on the website — without revealing the identity of the bidder making the query.

When the response to clarification changes the requirement significantly And/ or when there is not much time left for the bidders to respond, the time and date of submission of tenders May also be suitably extended (not less than 3 days).

5.14Withdrawal/ Amendments/ Modifications to Bids by Bidders

1. What is permitted before the deadline: The bidder, after submitting its bid, is permitted to substitute/ alter/ modify it, superseding the earlier bid — so long as such revised bid is uploaded/ received duly sealed and marked like the original bid, up to the deadline of submission of bids.

Resubmission of a bid shall require uploading all documents, including the financial bid, afresh.

The system shall consider only the last bid submitted As a valid bid.

The bidder May withdraw his bid before the bid submission deadline — and it shall be marked as withdrawn and shall not be opened During the bid opening.

2. What is prohibited after the deadline — and the penalty:

Any such action after the bid-submission deadline is not permitted.

Withdrawal/ amendment/ modification/ alteration/ impairment/ derogation of a bid, in any respect, by its bidder between the deadline for submission of bids and the expiration of the period of bid validityhis Bid Security/ EMD shall be forfeited, besides imposition of any other punitive remedy available to the Procuring Entity.

In such cases, tender evaluation shall be proceeded with in terms of the evaluation chapter.

5.15Sealing/ Marking of Bids in Off-line Tenders

1. The tender document should indicate the manner of submission/ uploading of bids.

2. The double-envelope discipline: In the case of off-line tenders, the total number of bid copies (for example, duplicate or triplicate, and so on) required to be submitted should be specified.

The bidder is to:

  • Seal the original and each copy Of the bid in separate envelopes, duly marking the same as "original", "duplicate", and so on;
  • Print the address of the purchasing office and the tender reference number On the envelopes;
  • Further, the sentence "Not to be opened before (the due date and time of tender opening)" is also to be printed on these envelopes;
  • The inner envelopes are then to be put inside a bigger outer envelope, which will also be duly sealed, marked, and so on, as above.

If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked properly As above, the Procuring Entity does not assume any responsibility for its misplacement, premature opening, late opening, and so on.

5.16Uploading/ Submission of Bids

5.16.1Uploading Bids in e-Procurement

a) the Procuring Entity is neither a party nor a principal In the relationship between the bidder and the organisation hosting the e-procurement portal (hereinafter called the portal).

Bidders must acquaint and train themselves With the Rules, regulations, procedures, and implied conditions/ agreements of the portal. Bidders intending to participate shall be required to register with the portal, and must comply with its conditions — including registration and a compatible digital signature certificate (DSC). In the case of downloaded documents, the bidder must not make any changes to the contents of the documents while uploading — except for filling in the required information.

B) any query/ clarification/ complaint regarding downloading tender documents and uploading bids on the e-procurement portal May be addressed to the portal's help desk.

C) the primacy Rule: In case of conflict between the provisions of the portal and the tender document, provisions of the portal shall prevail.

D) no extension for office closure: Bids must be uploaded by the submission deadline. If the office happens to be closed on the deadline to submit the bids, this deadline shall not be extended.

e) ONLY one copy Of the bid can be uploaded, and the bidder shall digitally sign all statements, documents, and certificates Uploaded by him — owning sole and complete responsibility for their correctness/ authenticity As per the provisions of the IT ACT 2000, as amended.

f) The protected Price Schedule: The Bidder shall write his name in the space provided in the specified location only. Bidder shall type rates in figure only in the rate column of respective item(s) — without any blank cell or zero values in the rate column, and without any alteration/ deletion/ modification of other portions of the excel sheet. If space is inadequate, the Bidder may upload additional documents under "Additional Documents" in the "bid Cover Content".

G) the server clock Rule: The date and time of the e-procurement server clock — which is also displayed on the bidders' dashboard — shall be used as the reference time for deciding the closing time of bid submission. No request on the account that the server clock was not showing the correct time, and that a particular bidder could not submit their bid because of this, shall be entertained. Failure or defects on the internet, or heavy traffic at the server, shall not be accepted as a reason for a complaint. The Procuring Entity shall not be responsible for any failure, malfunction or breakdown of the electronic system Used during the e-tender process.

h) Encryption: The bidder should ensure the correctness of the bid before uploading, and take a printout of the system-generated submission summary to confirm the successful bid upload. All bids uploaded by the bidder to the portal shall be automatically encrypted. The encrypted bid can only be decrypted/ opened by the authorised persons on or after the due date and time.

i) Scanned documents: Bidder must upload scanned copies of originals (or self-attested copies of originals — as specified), and should ensure the clarity/ legibility of the scanned documents. The Procuring Entity reserves its right to call for verification of originals Of all such self-certified documents from the bidders at any stage of evaluation — especially from the successful bidder(s) before the issue of Letter of Award (LoA).

j) physical submission of originals — the one case where the deadline DOES extend: If so specified in the tender document, originals (or self-attested copies) of specified scanned, uploaded documents must be physically submitted before the deadline specified for it (before the bid submission deadline, if not so specified), sealed in double cover, and acknowledgement must be obtained.

Failure to do so is likely to result in the bid being rejected. If the office is closed on the deadline for the physical submission of originals, IT shall stand extended to the next working day At the same time and venue.

k)no Manual bids shall be made available or accepted for submission in e-procurement(except for originals of scanned copies as per sub-para (j) above).

5.16.2Submission of Bids in the Offline Tender Process

A) the technical and financial proposals shall be submitted at the same time. To safeguard the integrity of the process, the technical and financial proposals shall be submitted in separate sealed envelopes and kept in an outer sealed envelope.

b) the tender box and its two locks: The procuring entity shall maintain tender boxes for receiving the bids at suitable locations, which would facilitate security and easy access for bidders.

If required, tender boxes should be separate for each day of the week of tender opening, and should be sealed by the Bid Opening Committee (boc) of the day. The tender box shall have two locks. The key of one lock will be with the head of the office, and the other key with the official nominated by him.

c) Courier and prohibited modes: Bids received by courier Shall be deposited in the tender box by the despatch section Till the date and time of bid opening. Bids sent by telex, cable or facsimile are to be ignored and rejected.

D) bulky/ oversized bids: For bulky/ oversized bids that cannot be dropped into tender boxes, the officials authorised to receive such bids shall maintain proper records and provide a signed receipt with the date and time To the bearer of the bid. He will also sign on the cover, duly indicating the date and time of receipt. Names and designations of at least two such authorised officers Should be mentioned in the tender documents.

5.16.3Bid Security

A self-attested scan of the original Bid Security/ BSD Should be uploaded along with bids. Bids not complying with these provisions shall be rejected.

In off-line tenders, bid Security or — if permitted — bid securing declaration (BSD) must accompany the bid As per instructions in the tender document.

5.17Bid Validity

A bid shall remain valid for the period mentioned in the tender document — 90 days if not so specified.

A bid that is valid for a shorter period shall be rejected as non-responsive.

In case the day up to which the bids are to remain valid falls on — or is subsequently declared — a holiday/ closed day for the Procuring Entity, the bid validity shall automatically be deemed to be extended up to the next working day.

The validity period should not be unreasonably long, as keeping the tender unconditionally valid for acceptance for a longer period entails the risk of getting higher prices from the bidders.

5.18Opening of Bids

1. Timing and the holiday Rule: Immediately after the deadline for bid submission, the Procuring Entity shall proceed to the bid opening.

If the specified date of bid opening falls on — or is subsequently declared — a holiday or closed day for the Procuring Entity, the bids shall be opened at the appointed time on the next working day.

Composition of the Bid Opening Committee (boc): In offline tenders, the boc shall comprise one officer each from the Procuring Entity and associated/ integrated finance.

2. E-procurement: All tenders uploaded by bidders are received, safeguarded, and opened online on the portal.

3. The offline bid-opening procedure — ten steps:

A) letters of authority: The authorised representatives of bidders who intend to attend the tender opening in OTE/ GTE/ SLTE ARE TO bring letters of authority From the corresponding bidder with them. The prescribed format should be given in the tender document. All bid-opening activities should be carried out demonstrably before such a gathering.

(Bid Opening Attendance Sheet cum Report — G Annexure 13 · W Annexure 3 · C Annexure 5 · NC Annexure 5.)

b) opening the tender box — and the treatment of LATE and WRONGLY-DROPPED bids:

  • At a prescheduled date and time, the BOC of the day should get the tender box opened after ensuring and demonstrating that the seal on the box has not been tampered with.
  • All bids should be collected from the tender box. Bids for tenders not opening on that day should be put back into the box and the box resealed.
  • Sometimes, tenders are dropped wrongly Into this tender box. Such wrongly dropped tenders, with appropriate endorsement, should be put into the appropriate box — OR sent to the Tender Committee (TC) concerned if the date of opening is over.
  • The bids for different tenders opening on the day (including oversized bids, which were submitted to designated officers) should be sorted, and a count for each tender should be announced and recorded — particularly noting any modifying/ altering/ withdrawal of bids.
  • Boc should ensure and demonstrate that bid envelopes are duly sealed and untampered.
  • Late bids should be separately counted but kept aside and not opened. In the case of an advertised tender enquiry or Limited Tender Enquiry, late bids (i.e., bids received after the specified date and time for receipt of bids) should not be considered — Rule 165 of GFR 2017.

C) the two-stage opening: The technical bids will be opened on the pre-announced date, and the financial proposals shall remain sealed and shall be opened publicly in due course of time only for those firms that have technically qualified.

D) serial numbering and initialling: After opening, every tender shall be numbered serially (say 3/14 — if it is the third bid out of 14 total), initialled, and dated on the first page By the boc.

  • Each page of the price Schedule or letter attached to it shall also be similarly initialled — particularly the prices, delivery period, and so on, which shall also be circled and initialled along with the date.
  • Any other page containing significant information should also be dealt with similarly.
  • Blank pages, if any, should be crossed out across and marked accordingly By the boc.
  • The original (and duplicate, if any) copies in a tender set are to be marked accordingly by the boc.

e) the alterations protocol — one of the most detailed procedural rules in the Manuals:

  • Erasure/ cutting/ overwriting/ use of whitener/ columns left unfilled in tenders, if any, shall be initialled along with the date and time and numbered By the officials opening the tenders.
  • THE total number of such noticed alterations (or the absence of any alteration) should be explicitly marked on the first page of the bid.
  • Wherever quantity/ amount is written only in figures, the boc should write them in words.
  • ALL rebates/ discounts Should be similarly circled, numbered, and signed.
  • In the absence of any alteration/ overwriting/ whitener/ blanks, the remark "no corrections noted" Should be written. Similarly, the absence of discounts should be marked with "no discounts noted".

F) what the boc announces — and what it May not do: The boc is to announce the salient features of the tenders — such as description and specification of the goods, quoted price, terms of delivery, delivery period, discount (if any), whether EMD furnished or not, and any other distinctive feature — for the information of the representatives attending the tender opening. Clarifications by the bidders shall not be allowed or recorded During the bid opening. The boc has no authority to reject any tender at the tender opening stage.

g) Samples: PROPER sealing and codification Needs to be done on reference samples, as well as for samples that accompany the bid. These should be kept for reference under lock and key. Details should be recorded in the sample register Maintained in the opening section.

h) Financial instruments: Should BE noted in the bid opening report/ register and handed over to the finance section for safe custody and monitoring.

i) The Bid Opening Report: A bid opening report containing the names of the bidders (serial number wise) and salient features of the tenders, as read out during the public opening, will be prepared by the tender opening officers and duly signed by them along with the date and time.

The tenders that have been opened, the list of the representatives attending The tender opening, and the bid opening report are to be handed over to the nominated procuring officer — and an acknowledgement shall be obtained from him.

j) A similar procedure shall later be followed during financial bid opening In case of multiple-envelope bidding.

5.19Transparency and Protecting Third-Party Rights of Bidders

1. The public interest: Objectives of transparency in e-PROCUREMENT ARE amply served if data relating to the tender and award of contract are accessible to the public.

2. The participating bidders' interest: As far as the bidders who have participated in a tender (participating bidders) are concerned — for transparency, a comparative summary of technical (compliance details) and of financial bids (including QCBS calculations, wherever applicable) Should also be accessible to them.

BUT not necessarily to the public at large — unless sought and if permissible under the RTI Act.

3. The trade-secrets concern: Bidders May have genuine concerns about techno-commercial and operational trade secrets If their full technical and financial bids are accessible to their competitors or the public at large.

This concern May get aggravated in complicated EPC/ PPP/ consultancy procurements.

Technical/ financial bids should not be made accessible to the public at large, AND a call needs to be taken based on the sensitivity of details in the bids to restrict access of even participating bidders to full technical/ financial bids of their competitors.

The decision of the Procuring Entity to share or not share the full technical bids with other participating bidders should be clearly brought out in the tender documents.

4. The reserved right: However, a clause May be added to the tender documents reserving the right of the Procuring Entity and the e-procurement portal to provide access to bidders' technical/ financial bids to other participating bidders — in addition to the comparative summary of technical and financial bids of all participating bidders.

5.20Bid Invitation Process — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1exceptions to an open tender process are abused, leading to single-source processes.Rigorously follow the conditions under which open tendering can be dispensed with.
2WHEN short-lists Are used, the process of preparation of short-lists May be non-transparent, AND all eligible firms May not be included, and some ineligible firms May get included.Registration of bidders/ contractors: All major procuring departments must keep a list of registered bidders for use in restricted tendering. Publicise even restricted bids On your website. Bidders for LTE/ SLTE May be transparently selected with the approval of ca.
3pre-qualification criteria: PQB has the potential of getting misused or being applied without considering the restrictive nature of competition. PQC should be relevant to the quality requirements, and neither very stringent nor very lax in restricting/ facilitating the entry of bidders. These criteria should be clear, unambiguous, exhaustive, and yet specific. Also, there should be FAIR COMPETITION.G:Lay down criteria when PQB tendering is warranted. Also, model PQC criteria for diverse types of procurements should be laid down.
W variant:
Lay down criteria when two-stage tendering is warranted. Also lay down model PQC criteria for diverse types of procurements.
4invitation to tender (an open bid) is not well publicised or gives insufficient time — thereby restricting the number of bidders that participate.Publicity and adequate time for bid submission must be ensured. Higher-level approval should be obtained for a shorter bid submission period.
5evaluation criteria are not set from the beginning, OR ARE not objective, OR not clearly stated In the tender documents — thereby making them prone to being abused.Objective, relevant and clearly stated evaluation criteria must be specified in the tender document.

Appendix to Chapter 5 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 5 · W: CHAPTER 4
2Chapter titleIDENTICAL in all four — one of only two such chapters(W spells its risk section "Bidding Invitation Process", as do C and NC; G says "Bid Invitation Process")
3Number of sectionsG: 5 · W: 15 (most granular) · C: 8 · NC: 5
4Model Tender DocumentsG/C/NC cite DoE MTDs (Goods & NCS Oct 2021; Consultancy April 2023) · W refers instead to "relevant standard bidding documents" and says to follow CPWD's if the organisation has none
5Survey & soil investigation report, area grading, mapping of underground facilities to be part of the tender documentW ONLY
6"Facilities and inputs which will be provided to the contractor by the Ministry/ Department" as an essential aspectW ONLY
7"Requirements as to documentary evidence" as an essential aspectW ONLY
8Footnote defining "HIGHEST" bidder as the H1 QCBS scorerW ONLY
9Order of the last two tender-document sectionsG: Financial Bid then Submission Forms · W: Submission Forms then Financial Bid
10Section VII titled "DRAWING, Technical Specifications and Quality Assurance"W (G omits "Drawing")
11The four circumstances warranting an SCC clauseW ONLY
12Evaluation by item/ lot/ entire scope; milestone identification "in an optimal and sequential manner"W ONLY
13ACCESSIBILITY MANDATE — RPwD Act 2016 & Rules 2017; Harmonised Guidelines (MoHUA); IS 17802 Parts 1 & 2W ONLY
14Performance Standards & QA; Method Statement; Work Plan; Critical Material Schedule; SLA; Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditionsnc only
15The three NC Qualification Criteria and the 3×40% / 2×50% / 1×80% volume testnc only
16Contract Manager — 5 years' experience, 3 as managernc only
17Turnover multiple of 3–7 times, with the stated reason that NC needs a higher multiple than Worksnc only
18Upper cap on demanded turnover in higher-value procurementsnc only
19Entry window for sub-contractors — repair contracts up to Rs. 60 lakh; no more than 2 contracts under relaxed credentialsW ONLY
20Demerged entities — five-year use of parent credentialsW, C, NCnot in Goods
21Conditional discounts not considered at evaluation but availed if bidder otherwise eligibleW ONLY
22REoI DOCUMENT — contents, forms, EoI validity 60 days, "do not ask for CVs or approach at EoI stage", right to make minor ToR adjustments at RfP stageC ONLY
23RfP DOCUMENT — rFPL/ ITC/ AITC, rfP validity 90 days, budget not to be disclosed except in FBS, STP vs FTP, 14-day association approval, presentation carries no marksC ONLY
24"Any procurement portal without Excel BOQ facility should endeavour to build it"C + NC
25"Items for which no rate is entered will not be paid for and are deemed covered"; lump-sum breakdown requirementC + NC
26Minimum wage floor; 'NIL' price rejection; LCS for Manpower Outsourcing; police verification and good moral character of deployed manpowernc only
27e-Publishing exclusionG/C/NC: purchase without quotation & by purchase committee · W: works procurement through quotation
28Fixed days for NIT issuance and tender opening; CPWD region-wise table; Rs. 2 crore one-week/ two-week ruleW ONLY
2921-day extension norm and fresh publication where amendment substantially changes requirementsW ONLY
30Auto-extension "only ONCE, not repeatedly"G states it twice; W OMITS the restriction
31Exemption from tender document costG: MSEs and registered units · W: registered units only (for relevant grades of work)
32Legal status of bidder; Rs. 10 crore JV threshold; max 3 JV partners; JV discouraged in QOP/QCBS; PASARA and other licences; litigation history disqualificationW ONLY(in this chapter)
33Consequence of participating in more than one bidg: Disqualification of ALL BIDS in which he is a party · W: disqualification of the bid in which he is main/ principal/ lead bidder
34One-Principal-one-agent rule and the PAC exception for multiple authorised distributorsG ONLY
35OEM authorisation certificate + warranty confirmation; tender-specific authorisation for capital equipmentG ONLY
36Pre-bid conference triggerG: turnkey, sophisticated/ costly equipment, large works, complex consultancy · W: adds "or wherever felt necessary"
37Participation restricted to those who downloaded the Tender DocumentG (W does not state this restriction)
38site visitW, C, NC — absent from Goods
39Bid Opening Committee = one officer each from Procuring Entity and Integrated Financestated in G
40Risk table row 3 mitigationG: "when PQB tendering is warranted" · W: "when Two-STAGE tendering is warranted"

end of Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Forms of Securities, Prices, Payment Terms and Price Variations

Merging: Goods Ch. 6 · Works Ch. 5 · Consultancy Ch. 6 · Non-Consultancy Ch. 6

Structural Notes

1. This is the second and last chapter whose title is WORD-FOR-WORD IDENTICAL in all four Manuals. BUT the Works Manual numbers it CHAPTER 5, not Chapter 6.

2. Despite the identical title, this chapter has the sharpest content divergence of any "common" chapter. Three whole bodies of material exist in one Manual only:

Body of materialExists only in
Terms of Payment for Domestic Goods · Terms of Payment for IMPORTED Goods · Letter of Credit · Air Freight Charges · Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) · INCOTERMS 2020 · Customs Duty · Insurance Surety Bond and e-BG (full text) · Warranty Bank GuaranteeGOODS
Security Deposit/ Retention Money · Insurances and Indemnities · Variations and Measurement Books · Interim Payment Certificates · MOBILISATION ADVANCE · Plant/ Machinery/ Shuttering Advance · SECURED ADVANCE against material at siteWORKS
The multi-year performance-security reduction rule for SERVICE contracts (5–7 years)CS + NC

3. The seven common anchors, present in all four in the same order:

Concordance for Chapter 6

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
6.1Bid Security/ EMD6.1.15.1.16.1.16.1.1
6.2Performance Security/ Guarantee6.1.25.1.26.1.26.1.2
6.3Security Deposit/ Retention Money5.1.3
6.4Insurance Surety Bond (ISB)6.1.3(cross-ref)(cross-ref)(cross-ref)
6.5Electronic Bank Guarantee (e-BG)6.1.4(cross-ref)(cross-ref)(cross-ref)
6.6Warranty Bank Guarantee6.1.5
6.7Verification of Bank Guarantees6.1.65.1.46.1.36.1.3
6.8Safe Custody and Monitoring6.1.75.1.56.1.46.1.4
6.9Insurances and Indemnities5.1.6
6.10Payment Clause / Payment Terms6.25.26.26.2
6.11Terms of Payment — Domestic Goods6.36.3 (generic)6.3 (generic)
6.12Terms of Payment — Imported Goods; LC6.4
6.13Advance Payment6.55.36.46.4
6.14Prices, Firm Price and Variable Price6.65.46.56.5
6.15Exchange Rate Variation (ERV)6.7
6.16Statutory Taxes/ Duties/ Levies6.85.56.66.6
6.17Incoterms 20206.9
6.18Recovery of Public Money from the bill6.105.66.76.7
6.19Payment against Time-Barred Claims6.115.76.86.8

6.1Bid Security / Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)

(Rule 170 of GFR 2017)

1. Purpose and when taken: To safeguard against a bidder's withdrawing or altering its/ his bid during the bid validity period — in the case of advertised (OTE and GTE) tenders or Special Limited Tender Enquiry — Bid Security (also known as earnest money deposit — EMD) is to be obtained from the bidders along with their bids.

2. The amount: The amount of Bid Security should ordinarily range between two (2) to five (5) per cent of the estimated value Of the goods/ works to be procured.

The amount, rounded off to the nearest thousands of rupees, as determined by the Procuring Entity, is to be indicated in the tender documents.

3. Forms of Bid Security — and the issuing-bank divergence:

Bid security may be obtained in the form of:

ManualWhich banks may issue
G GOODSfrom any of the commercial banks
W WORKSissued/ CONFIRMED by any of the scheduled banks (as defined in section 2(e) of the RBI Act 1934)
W Footnote: "a Bank Guarantee merely advised by a scheduled bank is not acceptable, in lieu of being confirmed."

the Rs. 5 lakh threshold: In case the Bid Security is more than a threshold (rupees five lakh), and in case of foreign bidders in GTE tenders, it May be in the form of a bank Guarantee (In equivalent foreign exchange amount, in case of GTE) issued/ confirmed from any of the commercial/ scheduled banks in India in an acceptable form.

4. Validity: The Bid Security is normally to remain valid for a period of 45 (forty-five) days beyond the final bid validity period.

5. Bid securing declaration (BSD) — and the divergence in consequence:

In place of a Bid Security, procuring entities — after seeking approval from the Competent Authority — May consider asking bidders to submit a bid securing declaration (BSD), accepting that:

  • If they withdraw or modify their bids during the period of validity; or
  • if they are awarded the contract and they fail to submit Performance Security, or to sign the contract, before the deadline defined in the tender documents

— it shall be considered as a violation of the Code of Integrity, and they shall be:

ManualConsequence
G, C, NC"…Shall be suspended for the time period specified in the BSD"
W WORKS"…Shall be debarred for the time period specified in the BSD"

— from being eligible to submit bids/ proposals for contracts with the Procuring Entity.

6. Exemptions from Bid Security — and the MSE divergence:

In appropriate cases, submission of the bid security may be exempted with the Competent Authority's (ca's) approval — especially in the case of:

the statutory exemptions:

ManualWho is exempt from payment of EMD
G GOODSBOTH — micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) as defined in the MSE Procurement Policy, ANDregistered startups as recognised by DPIIT
W WORKSONLY — registered startups as recognised by DPIIT (MSEs are not named)

In case the bidder falls into these categories, the bidder should furnish a certified copy of its valid registration details.

The scope of the registered-bidder exemption:

  • G:"except for MSEs, this exemption is valid for the trade group and monetary value Of registration only."
  • W:"This exemption is valid for the monetary value Of registration only."

7. Forfeiture: A bidder's Bid Security shall be forfeited IF:

  • The bidder withdraws or amends its bid, OR impairs or derogates from the tender in any respect, within the period of validity of the tender; Or
  • THE successful bidder fails to furnish the required Performance Security or to sign the contract Within the specified period.

8. Return of bid securities — the three timelines:

SituationWhen returned
UNSUCCESSFUL biddersas soon as possible after the expiry of the final bid validity period — and, at the latest, by the 30TH day after the award of the contract
SUCCESSFUL bidderUPON receipt of Performance Security
In two-packet or two-stage tendering — unsuccessful bidders of the first stagewithin 30 days of declaration of the result of the first stage (i.e., technical evaluation, etc.) (OM No. F.1/2/2022-PPD dated 01.04.2022)

6.2Performance Security / Performance Guarantee

(Rule 171 of GFR 2017)

1. Purpose: TO ENSURE due performance of the contract, Performance Security (or performance Bank Guarantee — PBG, OR security Deposit — SD) is to be obtained from the successful bidder awarded the contract.

2. The quantum — the key numerical divergence(OM No. F.1/2/2023-PPD dated 01.01.2024):

CategoryPerformance Security
GOODSThree (3) TO five (5) PER CENT of the value of the contract
WORKSThree (3) TO ten (10) PER CENT of the value of the contract
non-consultancy servicesThree (3) TO five (5) PER CENT of the contract value(the NC Manual expressly notes "3 to 10% for Works")

3. The upper ceiling — the illustrative example given in G and NC:

Tender valueIllustrative ceiling on Performance Security
Up to Rs. 50 croreRs. 75 LAKH
above Rs. 50 crore but below Rs. 300 croreRs. 3 CRORE
higher than Rs. 300 croreThe Procuring Entity may decide the amount — but not less than Rs. 3 crore mentioned above

however, procuring entities are free to decide their own upper limits/ quantum for Performance Security (NC Adds: "Or dispense with it") — with the approval of Competent Authority and finance concurrence, based on their perception of performance risks vis-à-vis need for competition.

4. Forms of Security: Performance security may be furnished in the form of:

— safeguarding the purchaser's/ Procuring Entity's interest in all respects.

5. GTE contracts and URDG 758: In the case of GTE tenders, the Performance Security should be in the same currency as the contract And must conform to the uniform Rules for demand guarantees (URDG 758) — an international convention regulating international securities.

6. Joint ventures — W and NC: In case of a JV, the BG towards Performance Security shall be provided by all partners in proportion to their participation in the project.

7. The no-retention Rule for goods — G Only: Unlike the procurement of works, in the procurement of goods, the concept of taking part of the performance guarantee as money retained from the first or progressive bills of the supplier is not acceptable.

8. The value threshold below which Performance Security is not needed:

ManualProvision
G GOODS"Submission of Performance Security is not necessary for a tender value up to rupees 50 lakh."
(The Goods Manual prints "Rupees 50 (twenty-five) lakh" — an evident typographical inconsistency between the figure and the word.)
NC Non-consultancy"Submission of Performance Security May not be insisted upon In lower-valued contracts (say up to rupees 50 (fifty) lakh)."
W WORKS(no such threshold stated)

9. Exemption from submission of Performance Security:

Procuring Entity may EXEMPT the following entities (on their specific requests or otherwise): A) govt. Ministries, departments, attached and subordinate offices, autonomous bodies

  1. G and NC ONLY:THE OEM in whose favour PAC is issued, in tenders issued against PAC.

10. When furnished and how long valid:

Performance Security is to be furnished by a specified date — generally 14 (fourteen) to 28 (twenty-eight) days after notification of the award(G and NC add: "depending on the amount").

It should remain valid for a period of 60 (sixty) days — or any other period mentioned in the tender documents — beyond the date of completion of all contractual obligations, including:

  • G, NC:Warranty obligations;
  • W:Defect liability period (DLP)/ warranty period.

11. Multi-year contracts — the proportionate-reduction Rule, and its two versions:

G — GOODS version:In the case of goods contracts (e.g., rate contracts and other long-term contracts) spanning over multiple years, procuring entities May consider proportionately reducing Performance Security in proportion to the balance contract period, wherever feasible — instead of retaining the full Performance Security over the complete contract period, which May be of 2–3 years or more.

C + NC — the SERVICES version, with its stated rationale:

12. Replacement of existing securities — W and NC: Securities in the existing Contracts in the form of Bank Guarantee May be permitted by the Procuring Entity to be replaced by the contractors with insurance surety bonds or e-Bank Guarantee. Adequate safeguards — such as requiring prior submission of new forms of security before releasing the original forms of security — should be ensured.

13. Forfeiture and refund — and the "partial execution" rule:

The Performance Security will be forfeited and credited to the Procuring Entity's account in the event of a breach of contract By the contractor.

It should be refunded to the contractor without interest After he duly performs and completes the contract in all respects…

…BUT not later than 60 (sixty) days Of completion of all such obligations including the warranty (W: "of completion of the Defect Liability Period (DLP)/ warranty period") Under the contract.

14. Monitoring and transparency: The senior officers should monitor the return of bid/ performance securities, and delays should be avoided. If feasible, the details of these securities May be listed in the e-procurement portal/ website of the Procuring Entity to make the process transparent and visible.

6.3Security Deposit / Retention Money [W ONLY]

IN addition To Performance Security, contracts for works usually provide for a percentage — usually five per cent — of each running bill (periodic/ interim payment) to be withheld as Security Deposit/ retention money until final acceptance.

The earnest money, instead of being released, May form part of the Security Deposit.

The contractor's option to replace retention money — at two stages:

The contractor may, at his option, replace the retention amount with an unconditional BG/ Insurance Surety Bond From a bank acceptable to the Procuring Entity at the following stages:

A) after the amount reaches half the value of the limit Of retention money; And

b) after the amount reaches the maximum limit Of retention money.

The two-halves release Rule:

HalfWhen released
One-HALF of the retention money (or BG which replaced it)shall be released on the issue of the taking-over certificate. If the taking-over certificates (TOCs) are issued in parts, then in such proportions as the engineer May determine, having regard to the value of such part or section
the other halfshall be released upon expiration of 60 (sixty) days — or any other period mentioned in the tender document — after the DLP/ warranty period of the works, or final payment, whichever is earlier — ON certification by the engineer

in the event of different defect liability periods/ warranty periods being applicable to different sections or parts or equipment incidental to works, the expiration of defect liability period/ warranty period shall be the latest of such periods.

6.4Insurance Surety Bond (ISB)Gtext; W/C/NC cross-refer to Goods para 6.1.3

An Insurance Surety Bond (isb) is a three-party agreement That provides financial assurance to one party (the beneficiary) by another party (the surety or bonding company) on behalf of a third party (the principal).

Isb ensures that the principal fulfils their contractual obligations.

The three parties:

PartyWho it is
1. PrincipalThe party that obtains the surety bond — typically the contractor or service provider who provides the Bid/ performance security to the Procuring Entity
2. BeneficiaryThe party (procuring Entity) that requires the Insurance surety bond. The beneficiary seeks financial protection in case the principal fails to meet their obligations
3. Surety insurerThe bond-issuing entity (bank or insurance company). They act as a guarantor, assuring the beneficiary that the principal will perform as promised

the default procedure and its two timelines:

If the principal defaults, the surety insurer assesses the extent of default and determines the amount payable Under the bond. If the principal does not pay within 14 DAYS, the surety insurer pays within 45 calendar days Of receiving the necessary documentation.

6.5Electronic Bank Guarantee (e-BG)Gtext; W/C/NC cross-refer to Goods para 6.1.4

1. What it is: Electronic Bank Guarantee is a dematerialised Bank Guarantee processed on national e-governance services limited (NeSL) — AN information utility registered with the insolvency and bankruptcy board of India, under the aegis of the insolvency and bankruptcy code.

It handles all lifecycle events of e-bg — execution by the issuing bank, intimation to and verification by the beneficiary, amendment, invocation or release by the beneficiary, cancellation, etc.

The facility is available 24/7, including non-working days. Beneficiaries and banks can continue to use their own BG templates.

All bidders May be encouraged to submit e-bgs instead of traditional paper-based bank guarantees.

2. Creation of e-BG: The procuring Entity should ensure that the bidder/ contractor is informed (in the tender documents) of its unique identity number (UIN — which can be allotted by its bank) and email id.

A clause regarding e-bgs May be included in the tender, acknowledging and accepting the use of e-bgs as a valid form of Bank Guarantee for the tender process. The Procuring Entity May reserve the right to verify the authenticity of e-bgs And take necessary actions in case of discrepancies.

The UIN and email id of the beneficiary are specified by the issuing bank when creating the e-bg on the NeSL portal, upon being approached by the bidder/ contractor. On creation of e-bg, it is stored on the NeSL portal.

3. Intimation to Beneficiary: NeSL shall send a notification to the email id of the beneficiary provided by the issuing bank (As well as the beneficiary's registered email id) during issuance or subsequent event of e-bg (amendment/ invocation, release/ cancellation, etc.).

The Procuring Entity can receive the email notification without registration — BUT such an email shall not have the e-bg document attachment.

The issuing Bank can also arrange to forward the e-bg to the beneficiary through the applicant or any other mechanism.

4. Registration and login: Beneficiaries and their authorised representatives must register with NeSL using UIN and email id. They must log in to the NeSL portal using the same details to view, download, verify, or release/ invoke THE e-BG.

Integration with Government procurement portals (CPPP, GeM, State govt procurement portals) IS being explored To facilitate e-bg access without needing to log into the NeSL portal.

5. EASY VERIFICATION — the significant benefit: Verification of the e-BG stored in NeSL is sufficient, AND verification with the issuing bank is not required. This is a significant benefit for procuring entities.

6. Invocation and release: The e-bg process through NeSL facilitates beneficiaries submitting requests for invocation or any other consents through digitally signed submission in the NeSL portal — without the need to approach the issuing bank.

6.6Warranty Bank Guarantee [G ONLY]

In the case of works and capital equipment, there is usually a defect liability/ warranty clause Against defects arising from design, material, workmanship, or any omission on the part of the vendor/ contractor During a specified period of months from the date of commissioning or the date of dispatch in case of goods — whichever is earlier.

The general Rule: In such cases, the performance guarantee is to be valid up to 60 (sixty) days beyond the warranty period.

The permitted alternative — the swap:

It is normally permissible in such a situation to allow:

  • THE performance guarantee To be valid up to 60 (sixty) days beyond the delivery/ commissioning period; AND
  • the contractor to submit a fresh warranty Bank Guarantee of 10 (ten) per cent of the value of the goods, in the currency of the contract, valid up to 60 (sixty) days beyond the warranty period.

In such cases, the performance guarantee is to be returned only after satisfactory delivery/ commissioning and receipt of such a warranty Bank Guarantee.

When no warranty clause is called for: In the procurement of goods other than capital equipment — and in the case of low-value capital goods, say up to rupees one lakha warranty clause is not called for.

6.7Verification of Bank Guarantees

1. The general Rule: Bank guarantees submitted by the bidders/ suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers as EMD/ performance securities need to be immediately verified from the issuing bank before acceptance.

There May not be any need to get the Bank Guarantee vetted by legal/ finance authority if it is in the specified format.

The five verification guidelines(for BGs against EMD/ performance security/ advance payments and for various other purposes):

A) BG shall be as per the prescribed formats.

B) the BG contains the name, designation and code number of the bank officer(s) signing the guarantee(s).

c) THE address and other details (including telephone no.) of the controlling officer of the bank Are obtained from the branch of the bank issuing the BG — this should be included in all bgs.

d) the confirmation channels — and the Works addition:

The confirmation from the issuing branch of the bank is obtained in writing Through:

the bank should be advised to confirm the issuance of the bgs — specifically quoting the letter of the Procuring Entity — on the printed official letterhead of the bank, indicating the address and other details (including telephone nos.) of the bank and the name, designation and code number of the officer(s) confirming the issuance.

E) the interim route: Pending receipt of confirmation as above, confirmation can also be obtained with the help of the responsible officer at the field office which is close to the issuing branch of the bank — who should personally obtain the confirmation From the issuing branch and forward the confirmation report To the concerned Procuring Entity.

2. Genuineness: BANK GUARANTEES — either received in physical form or electronic form — should be verified for their genuineness following the prescribed method, and the organisations should do due diligence on the genuineness of the bank guarantees before acceptance.

3. What is not acceptable: Corporate guarantee or indemnity bond shall NOT Be accepted for bid Security (EMD) or Performance Security, or in lieu of any other Bank Guarantee (e.g., for advance payment/ warranty obligations).

4. Please note the ease with which an e-bg can be verified (para 6.5-5 above).

6.8Safe Custody and Monitoring of EMDs, Performance Securities and Other Instruments

1. The mechanism: A suitable mechanism for safe custody and monitoring Of emds, performance securities, and other instruments should be developed and implemented by each Procuring Entity.

The ministries/ departments shall also make institutional arrangements for taking all necessary actions on time FOR:

2. The monthly review Rule: Monitoring should also include a monthly review of all bank guarantees and other instruments expiring in the next three months — along with a review of the progress of the corresponding contracts.

3. The extension Rule and the absolute prohibition: Extension of bank guarantees and other instruments, where warranted, should be sought immediately and implemented within their validity period.

such a system of monitoring of securities and other instruments May be computerised with automatic alerts about lapse of validity, ETC.

6.9Insurances and Indemnities [W ONLY]

6.9.1Insurances

IN works and services contracts, the contractor must take insurances against vicarious liabilities that May arise for the Procuring Entity — i.e., under labour laws and workmen compensation.

6.9.2Indemnity/ Indenture Bonds

a) why they are needed: The Procuring Entity is potentially liable for injury, damage, or loss relating to a third party due to actions by the contractor during execution of the contract.

Violation of laws and regulations (e.g., environmental issues) also May result in liabilities for the Procuring Entity.

The Procuring Entity also needs to be protected against damage to its assets during contract execution. For such potential liabilities, instead of insurance, an indemnity bond May suffice.

B) the statutory definition: Indemnity bonds are defined under section 124 of the Indian Contract Act:

it is also called an indenture bond — especially in the context of secured advance payments in works contracts.

An indemnity bond is a bond intended to provide financial reimbursement to the holder for any actual or claimed harm/ loss caused by the issuer's conduct or another person's conduct.

In many cases this could be an alternative to a BG — especially where the financial implication of default cannot be estimated.

Some government departments (forest, mines, geology, environment, traffic) may also ask for such bonds to allow a Contractor to carry out work related to their jurisdiction.

C) the three parties:

  • i) ISSUER — is legally required to obtain a bond.
  • ii) HOLDER — is the party that imposes the bonding. In some cases, as an added confidence, a third party 'surety provider' (usually a bank) is added.
  • iii) SURETY (say a bank or the holding company of the issuer) — guarantees the financial compensation if the issuer dithers or fails to guarantee.

d) the critical weakness — why a BG is safer:

When getting indemnity bonds, the issuer signs an indemnity agreement with the surety provider, naming the holder as the beneficiary, and submits it to the holder. It states that the full financial responsibility in case of bond claims belongs to the issuer rather than the surety.

In case the issuer does not perform his obligations and dithers or fails to compensate The holder as per the indemnity bond, the only recourse is a civil case in the courts.

Since this is a long-drawn and expensive proposition, a BG is considered a safer option than an indemnity bond.

6.10Payment Clause / Payment Terms

6.10.1Elements of Price

1. What determines the elements: The elements of price included in the quotation of a bidder depend on:

2. The category-specific elements:

G GOODS:

  • Indigenous goods: The main elements May include raw material, production cost, overhead, packing and forwarding charges, margin of profit, transit insurance, excise duty and other taxes and duties as applicable.
  • Imported goods: in addition to elements similar to the above (other than excise duty and taxes), there may be customs duty, import duty, landing and clearing charges, and commission to Indian agents.
  • Further, depending on the nature of the goods, there may be cost elements towards installation and commissioning, operator's training, and so on.

NC Non-consultancy — the admeasurement-driven price structure (unique to nc):

3. C + NC — the necessity of specifying delivery terms: It is therefore necessary that — to enable the bidders to frame their quotations properly in a meaningful manner — the tender documents should clearly specify the desired terms of delivery and also the respective duties and responsibilities to be performed by the consultant/ service provider and the Procuring Entity.

4. Cost break-up (all four): Where the price has several components — such as the price of the goods, cost of installation and commissioning, operators' training, and so on — bidders should be asked to furnish a cost break-up indicating the applicable prices and taxes for each of such components along with the overall price. THE payment Schedule and terms will be linked to this cost break-up.

5. CURRENCY — the general rule (all four):

The tender documents are to specify the currency (currencies) in which the tenders are to be priced.

As a general Rule:

  • Domestic bidders are to quote and accept their payment in Indian currency;
  • Indian agents of foreign suppliers/ consultants/ service providers are to receive their agency commission in Indian currency;
  • Costs of imported goods/ services directly imported against the contract MAY BE quoted in foreign currency (currencies) and paid accordingly in that currency;
  • the portion of the allied work and services to be undertaken in India (like installation and commissioning of equipment) are to be quoted and paid in Indian currency.

G — the additional GTE currency Rule: For domestic bidding, regardless of whether the bidder is foreign or Indian, the currency of the bid and payment should be entirely in Indian rupees. In GTE, foreign bidders have flexibility to quote in INR or freely convertible currencies — but prices for goods, works or services (including agency commission) performed or sourced in India must be quoted and paid for in Indian rupees. Indian bidders are required to quote in INR only.

6.10.2Payment to Suppliers — the Ten ObligationsG

The governing principle: In a supply contract, the delivery of goods is the essence of the contract for the purchaser. Similarly, receiving timely payment for the supplies is the essence of the seller's contract.

A healthy buyer-supplier relationship is based on the twin foundation of timely and quality supply on the one hand, and prompt and full payment to the supplier on the other.

It should be ensured that all payments due to the firm — including the release of the Performance Security — are made on a priority basis without avoidable delay As per the tender/ contract conditions:

A) as far as possible, the payment terms and time Schedule should be given in the contract and must be adhered to. Any foreseeable payment delays should be communicated to the suppliers in advance.

B) the tax certificate obligation: Prompt and timely provision of statutory certificates to the seller for taxes deducted at source is as much a part of the payment as the amount actually released.

A detailed payment advice showing the calculations and reasons for the amounts disallowed and taxes deducted must be issued to the supplier along with payment. As soon as possible — but not later than the date of submission of tax returns — the Procuring Entity must provide the statutory certificates for the taxes deducted, so that he can claim set-offs and refunds From the concerned authorities. As far as MSME suppliers Are concerned, the MSME Act 2006 Has provisions for timely payments within 45 days, AND A levy of penal interest for delayed payment, AND arbitration/ conciliation for related complaints by Micro and Small Enterprises facilitation councils.

C) release of payment and settlement of the final bill should be processed through the associated/ integrated finance As per the terms and conditions of the contract.

D) the absolute bar: No payments to contractors by way of compensation or otherwise — outside the strict terms of the contract or more than the contract rates — should be allowed.

E) before the payment is made, the invoice should be cross-checked with the actual receipt of material/ assets/ services, to ensure that the payment matches the actual performance.

F) the contractor's certificate: While claiming the payment, the contractor must certify on the bill that the payment being claimed is strictly within the terms of the contract, and that all the obligations on his part for claiming this payment have been fulfilled.

There should also be a suitable provision for verification of the authenticity of the person signing the invoice, and so on, to claim the payment.

6.10.3Payment Terms in WORKS [W ONLY]

1. Variations in works contract:

Variations can include:

A written procedure must be part of the contract for issuing variation instructions.

The engineer needs prior approval from the Procuring Entity before instructing a variation — except in certain situations specified in the SCC.

Variations are tracked using a variations register. The register is updated monthly and summarised To keep all involved agencies informed.

The engineer must balance the risks of quick finalisation against the costs of delays.

Variations involving extra costs are valued as per the contract's relevant clauses. The engineer consults with the Procuring Entity and contractor to agree on suitable rates for items beyond the sor.

The financial implications of variations are kept up to date, AND any significant cost and time overruns due to deviations must be reported to the Procuring Entity.

2. Measurement and payment — the Measurement Book regime:

All items with financial value shall be recorded in Measurement Books (mb) or level field books, to maintain a complete record of the work performed Under the contract.

Measurements and levels are taken and signed jointly by the designated official and the contractor.

The contractor shall — without extra charge — provide all assistance with every appliance, labour and other things necessary for measurements and recording levels.

The contractor shall not cover (or place it beyond reach) the work without written consent from the Procuring Entity — otherwise the contractor shall have to uncover it at their own expense, or they will not be paid for that work.

Organisations are encouraged to implement electronic Measurement Books (e-mbs) and integrate them with it-based project monitoring systems.

3. Interim payments and the Interim Payment Certificate (IPC):

Payment provisions — including amounts to be paid, Schedule of payments, and payment procedures — shall be indicated in the tender document and also in the contract.

Payment terms prescribed in the tender document should be such that the payment made to contractors at every stage is commensurate with the quantum of work done — subject to any requirements for initial mobilisation.

Each month, the contractor submits a statement showing the amounts they consider themselves entitled to.

The engineer issues an interim Payment Certificate (IPC) AFTER:

interim monthly payments are made based on the IPC — net of retentions, recovery of advances, and statutory deductions.

4. Delay in payments to contractors — the four hard timelines:

Delays in eligible payments to contractors can lead to project delays, cost overruns, and disputes.

StepTimeline
Ad-hoc payment of at least 75% of the eligible running account billmust be made within 10 working days Of bill submission
The REMAINING paymentshould be made within 28 working days
if payments are delayed beyond 10 working daysA written explanation must be submitted to the next higher authority within three working days
if bills are delayed by more than 30 working dayspublic authorities May include a provision for interest payments — at the rate of interest in general provident fund

5. Final bills: The final bill must be submitted by the contractor in the same manner as interim bills, within a specified time after the physical completion of work and the issuance of the final certificate of completion (FCC) By the Department/ Ministry.

Payment is made after verifying the bill on the personal certificate of the officer-in-charge, who confirms that the work has been executed as per the contract specifications and industry standards.

Final payment should be paid to the contractor within three months after completion of work.

6.10.4Modes of Payment (common to all four)

A) electronic by default: Procuring entities should make payments through the electronic clearance system (ECS) — e.g., real-time gross settlement systems (RTGS), national electronic funds transfer (NEFT), or electronic payment gateways.

As per RBI guidelines, the ECS mandate in rbi's format May be obtained at the time of supplier/ contractor/ consultant/ service provider registration and in the tender document. The Format is available with all Banks.

b) The exception: HOWEVER, if ECS payments are not feasible, payments May be made in exceptional circumstances by cheque/ demand draft drawn on a Government treasury or branch of RBI, or any scheduled bank authorised by RBI for transacting Government business.

C) payment to the supplier's bank — G Only: Such payment can also be made to the supplier's bank, if the bills are endorsed in favour of the bank with a pre-receipt embossed on the bills with the words "received payment", and the supplier authenticates both the endorsement and pre-receipt. In addition, an irrevocable power of attorney is to be granted by the supplier in favour of the bank.

D) TReDS (all four): Trade receivables discounting system (TReDS) is an electronic platform for facilitating the financing/ discounting of trade receivables of MSMEs through multiple financiers.

These receivables can be due from corporates and other buyers, including Government departments and PSUs.

Payments can also be made through this platform to MSE suppliers/ contractors/ consultants/ service providers.

6.11Terms of Payment

6.11.1Terms of Payment for DOMESTIC GOODSG

1. The governing consideration: Terms of payment May be decided by the Procuring Entity safeguarding its interest, based on the terms of delivery, nature of goods, type of inspection, mode of transport and risks In such situations.

2. The four standard payment patterns:

Terms of deliveryPayment term
FOR destination/ delivery at site (no installation)100% on receipt and acceptance of goods by the consignee and on the production of all required documents by the supplier
fOR dispatching station(no installation)60 TO 90% ON proof of dispatch And other related documents; Balance on receipt at site and acceptance by the consignee(depending on the value and nature of the goods, mode of transportation, and so on)
fOR dispatching station(with installation and commissioning)60% on proof of dispatch along with other specified documents · 30% on receipt of the goods at the site by the consignee · balance 10% on successful installation and commissioning and acceptance by the consignee
fOR destination/ delivery at site(with installation and commissioning)90% on receipt and acceptance of goods by the consignee at destination and on production of all required documents · balance 10% on successful installation and commissioning and acceptance

3. The six documents for payment for domestic goods:

  1. Supplier's invoiceindicating, inter alia, description and specification of the goods, quantity, unit price, total value;
  2. Packing list;
  3. Insurance certificate;
  4. Proof of dispatch: Railway receipt/ consignment note;
  5. Quality assurance certificates:(a) manufacturer's guarantee certificate or in-house inspection certificate; Or (b) inspection certificate issued by purchaser's inspector;
  6. Any other document(s) as and if required in terms of the contract.

6.11.2Terms of Payment for SERVICESCNC

1. The standard term:

  • C Consultancy:The usual payment term is 100 (hundred) per cent on receipt and acceptance of deliverables by the Procuring Entity, and on production of all required documents by the consultant.
  • NC Non-consultancy:The usual payment term is 100 (hundred) per cent on acceptance of delivered services by the ultimate user, and on production of all required documents by the service provider.

2. Payment provisions — including amounts to be paid, Schedule of payments, and payment procedures — shall be indicated in the RfP/ tender document and also in the contract.

Payments May be made at regular intervals (as under time-based contracts) OR for agreed outputs (as under lump sum contracts).

6.12Terms of Payment for IMPORTED GOODS, and the Letter of Credit [G ONLY]

6.12.1Terms of Payment

Usual payment terms, unless otherwise directed by ca:

SituationPayment
Installation, erection, and commissioning are NOT the responsibility of the supplier100% net price is to be paid against the production of stipulated documents
Installation, erection and commissioning ARE the responsibility of the supplier80–90% of the net price against production of stipulated documents; Balance within 21–30 (twenty-one to thirty) days of successful installation and commissioning at the consignee's premises and acceptance by the consignee
agency commissionTHE entire 100% agency commission is paid (in equivalent non-convertible Indian rupees based on bc selling rate of exchange) after all other payments have been made to the supplier in terms of the contract

6.12.2Modes of Payment for Imported Goods

1. Statutory compliance: It should be ensured that the imports into India conform with the export-import policy in force; FEMA; FEMA (current account transactions) Rules, 2000; And directions issued by RBI under FEMA from time to time.

2. The LC route: For imported goods, payment usually happens through the letter of Credit (LC) Opened by the State bank of India or any other commercial bank As decided by the Procuring Entity.

The amount of LC should be equal to the total payable amount And be released as per the clauses mentioned above. If the LC is not opened, payment can also be made to the seller through a direct bank transfer — for which the buyer has to ensure that payment is released only after the receipt of prescribed documents.

3. LC for domestic bidders too: To have uniform payment clauses in GTE tenders for foreign and domestic bidders, the Procuring Entity May include a provision in its tender conditions — on the merits of the case, especially high-value contracts for sophisticated equipment/ machineryallowing payment through LC to domestic bidders also.

6.12.3Documents for Payment for Imported Goods

The documents needed from the supplier are to be clearly specified in the contract. The paying authority also verifies the documents received from the supplier with corresponding stipulations made in the contract before releasing the payment. Documents are specified in the Letter of Credit but usually are:

  1. Supplier's original invoice giving full details of the goods, including quantity, value, and so on;
  2. Packing list;
  3. Certificate of country of origin Of the goods — to be given by the seller, or a recognised chamber of commerce, or another agency designated by the local Government for this purpose;
  4. Quality assurance certificates:(a) certificate of pre-dispatch inspection by the purchaser's representative; Or (b) manufacturer's test certificate and guarantee;
  5. Certificate of insurance;
  6. Bill of Lading/ airway bill/ rail receipt or any other dispatch document issued by a Government agency (like the Department of Posts) or a duly authorised agency, indicating:

6.12.4Air Freight Charges and Air Freight Consolidators

goods that are required to be airlifted are to be dispatched on a 'charge forward basis'. All air freight charges shown on the relevant consignment note as chargeable to the consignee Are to be paid to the airline in rupees.

The consolidator device: Some organisations need to import sophisticated instruments, tools, and kindred goods. These are small in size and very delicate/ fragile in nature. Such goods invariably need to be airlifted — but, quite naturally, form a small part of the air cargo carried by aircraft.

For such imports, procuring entities May engage air freight consolidators, WHO consolidate the small air cargo of different customers and airlift them from one airport to another.

The hiring of airfreight consolidators' services should be done transparently, following standard principles of Public Procurement.

6.12.5Letter of Credit (LC)

1. The four parties to the LC:

The purchaser forwards a request to its bank (called the issuing bank) in their prescribed format, along with all relevant details, including an authenticated copy of the contract.

Based on this, the issuing bank opens the LC — promising to pay the specified amount to the supplier's (beneficiary's) bank based solely on the documents presented by the supplier as specified in the LC conditions, without physically ascertaining the shipment of goods.

The issuing bank arranges with a bank in the supplier's region (called the advising bank) to notify the supplier and his bank of the availability of the LC.

Since the supplier May not be comfortable with the issuing bank, it May ask a bank he trusts (called the confirming bank) TO add a guarantee to ensure payments by the issuing bank.

2. The five risks involved:

RiskDescription
A) commercial risknon-payment due to buyer's financial distress
b) global riskpolitical instability · currency fluctuations · import/ export restrictions · disruptions in international logistics
c) documentary riskdiscrepancies in submitted documents, or interpretation of documents and LC conditions by various parties involved
d) BANK RISKBANK insolvency or non-performance
e) FRAUDshipment May not be physically dispatched, OR dispatched in damaged condition or with inadequate packaging

3. The four precautions:

A) care should be taken to ensure that all details in the LC — such as product description, quantity, payment terms, documents to be produced, LD clause, and shipping terms — ARE accurate and identical to those shown in the contract, to avoid discrepancies.

B) frequent amendments can lead to delays and complications. Suppliers May use their own delays in supplies by asking for unnecessary amendments to LC (or contract).

C) provisions of uniform customs and practices for documentary credits (UCP 600) Should be adhered to while opening the LC for import into India.

D) the seller must present documents in time within the tenure of the LC To receive payment, and the documents submitted must match the LC requirements.

4. The six charges and who bears them:

ChargeBorne by
A) opening charges(including commitment fees — charged for the LC's validity period — and usance fees, if the LC allows deferred payment)the Procuring Entity
b) advising feepaid by the issuing bank to the advising bank — and is included in charges to the Procuring Entity
c) confirming bank's fee (if applicable)paid to the confirming bank by the supplier
d) extension/ amendment fee(when an LC needs to be extended or amended due to changes in delivery dates, terms, or other conditions)THE party requesting The extension or amendment (purchaser or seller)
e) retirement chargeslevied by the supplier's (beneficiary's) bank on the supplier To handle payment from the issuing bank
f) other chargesreimbursements for foreign trade law-related obligations, if any, to be borne by the party of that country.For example, if there are specific legal requirements related to foreign exchange regulations or documentation in the exporting country, the Seller may need to cover these. If there are specific taxes for foreign exchange remittances, then the purchaser may bear such charges.

5. The seven types of LC:

TypeMeaning
A) revocable LCCAN BE modified or cancelled without notice
b) irrevocable LCcannot be amended, modified, or cancelled after issue without agreement and notice to the seller. Generally, the irrevocable LC is opened, so that the supplier is fully assured of his payment on fulfilling his obligations
c) confirmed LCan intermediate bank in the supplier's country (confirming bank) adds its confirmation at the request of the seller — guaranteeing that payment would be made as per LC conditions, even if the issuing bank or seller's bank demurs
d) unconfirmed LCthere is no additional confirmation beyond the issuing bank
e) transferable LCthe seller can transfer part of the LC to another party (e.g., as a payment to his supply chain)
f) back-to-back LCAN intermediary (second beneficiary) is involved in this
g) revolving LCcovers multiple transactions over an extended period. Specifically used for repeated shipments of the same product between the same buyer (importer) and seller (exporter)

6. Deduction of Liquidated Damages (LD) under the LC:

THE delivery Schedule and LD clause (including the amount of LD) are part of the LC conditions.

If the documents submitted (inspection certificate and dispatch documents) show that these conditions of LC are violated, LD as per the LC conditions is deducted from the payment made to the supplier.

In case the delivery date of the contract is extended to take care of a delay in supply for which the supplier is responsible, THE tenure of the LC is also to be extended — BUT the expense incurred for such an extension (of LC) is to be borne by the supplier.

6.13Advance Payment

(Rule 172(1) of GFR 2017)

6.13.1The Common ConditionsGCNC

1. The governing principle and its economic rationale:

Ordinarily, payments for services rendered or supplies made should be released only after the services have been rendered or supplies made.

However, in exceptional situations where substantial funds are to be sunk by the contractor before payment becomes due — considering the lower cost of funds for the Government entity as compared to the higher cost of funds for the bidder — advance payment with safeguards (BG or Insurance Surety Bond or Letter of Credit) May be considered.

G — the two permitted situations: A) advance payment demanded by firms holding maintenance contracts for servicing of air-conditioners, computers, other costly equipment, etc.; B) advance payment demanded by firms against fabrication contracts, turn-key contracts, or supply of complicated tailor-made goods, and so on.

2. The quantum — the three ceilings:

The quantum of such advance payments should not exceed the quantum of funds to be sunk by the contractor before payment becomes due in the contract. The quantum should not generally exceed the following limits:

RecipientCeiling
Private firmsthirty (30) per cent of the contract value
a State or Central Government agency or pseforty (40) per cent of the contract value
In the case of a MAINTENANCE CONTRACTthe amount should not exceed the amount payable for six months Under the contract

in exceptional cases, the competent Authority May relax the ceilings Mentioned above, with prior concurrence of the associated/ integrated finance.

3. INTEREST-FREE ADVANCE — and the default penalty:

Since the provision of advance payment leverages the difference in interest rate As argued above, and considering the additional cost of Bank Guarantee for advances for the bidderinterest-free advance payments May be considered with the approval of Competent Authority and finance concurrence.

Where an interest-free advance is permitted, a clause in the tender enquiry and the contract May be stipulated that — if the contract is terminated due to default of the contractor — the advance payment would be deemed as an interest-bearing advance at the interest rate prevailing on the date of release of advance payment (e.g., the general provident fund — GPF — rate), plus 2%, to be compounded quarterly.

In appropriate cases, the competent authority may stipulate advance payments with suitable interest rates (e.g., the GPF rate) to be recovered along with the instalments of recovery of advance payment.

4. INSTALMENTS — the minimum-two rule: The advance payment should not be made in less than two instalments, as per the expected infusion of funds required in the contract — except in exceptional circumstances, for the reasons to be recorded. This will keep a check on contractor mis-utilisation of full advance when the contract is delayed considerably.

5. RECOVERY — the "whichever is earlier" rule: ADVANCE PAYMENTS — especially interest-free advances — should be recovered (from either running bills or from the performance/ advance payment bank guarantees) in instalments linked to milestones or specified periods — whichever is earlier.

This would ensure that even if the contractor is not executing the work or executing it at a slow pace, recovery of advance could commence — and the scope for misuse of such advance could be reduced.

6. BANK GUARANTEE — the 110% rule and its exemptions:

While making any advance payment, adequate safeguards in the form of a Bank Guarantee (or e-Bank Guarantee) of at least 110% of the advance should be obtained from the firm.

In case the advances are to be paid/ recovered in instalments, an equal number of part bgs (with proportionate amount and validity) May be taken instead of a lumpsum BG — WITH each BG released after a related recovery is made.

AN indemnity bond is not to be considered in place of a Bank Guarantee.

The two exemptions from the BG requirement:

  • No Bank Guarantee should be insisted on in case advance is being given to Central Ministry/ Department, their attached/ subordinate offices, or the autonomous bodies attached with them;
  • The BG May also not be taken wherever a contract has been placed on a CPSE on nomination basis.

7. What is NOT An advance payment — an important distinction:

"milestone/ stage payments or part payments against proof of dispatch documents should not be considered as advance payments for the purpose of this Para — as these payments are made after the sinking of funds by the contractor for achieving these milestones/ stages/ dispatches." (Rule 172(2) GFR 2017)

these should be provisioned in the tender document/ contract, including Bank Guarantee to be taken, if any, in case of milestone/ stage payments.

8. The pre-declaration Rule: Provision of advance payment should be anticipated at the procurement planning stage.

THE quantum of advance payment and related conditions should be declared in the tender documents — with the approval of Competent Authority and concurrence of associated/ integrated finance.

IF not so declared, the condition of advance payment for a particular bid should not be agreed to.

9. Documents for advance payments: Documents needed from the supplier for advance payment release are to be clearly specified in the contract. The paying authority should also verify the documents received from the supplier with corresponding stipulations made in the contract before releasing the payment.

10. Insurance — G ONLY:

IN every case where advance payment or payment against dispatch documents is to be made, or LC is to be opened, THE condition of insurance should invariably be incorporated in the terms and conditions.

Wherever necessary, the goods supplied under the contract shall be fully insured in a freely convertible currency against loss or damage incidental to manufacture or acquisition, transportation, storage and delivery.

If considered necessary, insurance may cover "All risks", including war risks and strike clauses. The amount covered should be sufficient to cover the overall expenditure incurred by the Procuring Entity for receiving the goods at the destination.

Delivery basisWho arranges and pays for marine/ air insurance
CIF/ CIP/ DDPthe supplier shall arrange and pay — making the purchaser the beneficiary
FOB/ FASmarine/ air insurance shall be the purchaser's responsibility

6.13.2Advance Payments in Works — the Three Distinct Advances [W ONLY]

A. Mobilisation Advance

1. The 10% Rule: If considered justified in certain specialised and capital-intensive works, the contract May provide for an interest-bearing mobilisation advance To be paid to the contractor exclusively for the costs of mobilisation, at 10 (ten) per cent of the contract price, on the provision by the contractor of an unconditional BG.

Such bgs shall remain effective until the advance payment has been fully repaid — but the amount thereof shall be progressively reduced by the amount repaid by the contractor, as indicated in the interim payment certificates.

2. The two instalments of 5% each:

InstalmentWhen paid
FIRST 5%ON commencement of the work And provision by the contractor of the unconditional BG in respect of the advance
second 5%ON certification by the engineer of the contractor's having achieved a financial progress of 10 (ten) per cent of the contract price — as also provision of a BG by the contractor for this part of the advance

3. Need-based: Provision of mobilisation advance should essentially be need-based. Suitable delegation of authority May be done in the organisation To take the decision for grant of the mobilisation advance — whether interest-free or interest-bearing.

4. Interest-free mobilisation advance and the time-based recovery Rule:

Interest-free mobilisation advance May also be given wherever the situation warrants in specific cases — BUT it should be clearly stipulated in the tender document.

AND its recovery should be time-based, not linked with progress of work.

This would ensure that even if the contractor is not executing the work or executing it at a slow pace, recovery of advance could commence, and scope for misuse of such advance could be reduced.

5. Part bank guarantees — one per instalment: Part 'bank guarantees' (bgs) against the mobilisation advance should be taken in as many numbers as the proposed recovery instalments, and should be equivalent to the amount of each instalment.

This would ensure that — at any point of time, even if the contractor's money on account of work done is not available with the organisationrecovery of such advance could be ensured by encashing the BG for the work supposed to be completed within a particular period of time.

6. There should be a clear stipulation of interest to be charged on delayed recoveries — either due to the late submission of bill by the contractor or any other reason, besides the reason giving rise to the encashment of BG.

7. THE amount of mobilisation advance, interest to be charged (if any), its recovery Schedule, and any other relevant detail should be explicitly stipulated in the tender document upfront.

8. Relevant format for BG should be provided in the tender document, which should be enforced strictly — and the authenticity of such bgs should also be invariably verified from the issuing bank, confidentially and independently by the organisation.

9. In case of 'Machinery and equipment advance', insurance and hypothecation to the employer should be ensured.

10. The utilisation certificate Rule: Utilisation certificate from the contractor for the mobilisation advance should be obtained. Preferably, mobilisation advance should be given in instalments — AND subsequent instalments should be released only after getting a satisfactory utilisation certificate from the contractor for the earlier instalment.

B. Plant, Machinery and Shuttering Material Advance

1. The 5% advance and its five conditions:

Another interest-bearing advance of five (5) per cent of the contract price — depending on the merits of the case — May be paid against the new key construction equipment purchased for the work and brought to the site, if so provided in the bid documents and so requested by the contractor.

The advance should normally not be more than 50 (fifty) per cent of the depreciated cost Of such plant and machinery, which should be hypothecated to the govt. Before the payment of advance is released.

This advance shall be subject to the following conditions:

  • (i) the contractor shall produce satisfactory proof of payment;
  • (ii) such equipment is considered necessary by the engineer for the works;
  • (iii) the equipment has been verified to have been brought to site;
  • (iv)the contractor gives an undertaking on stamp paper that the equipment will work only on that job And will not be removed from the site without obtaining written approval from the engineer; and
  • (v) the contractor furnishes a BG to cover the advance.

No advance shall be admissible on equipment purchased under a hire-purchase scheme/ financing arrangement, or on hired equipment.

2. Rate of interest: The rate of interest shall be stipulated in the bid documents (say 10 (ten) per cent per annum), or as May be notified by the procuring agency from time to time.

3. Repayment: The repayment of advances shall be done through proportionate percentage deductions from running bill (periodic/ interim payment). THE time of commencement of repayment, rate of deductions from interim payments, and time by which the advance should be fully repaid Will be as specified in the contract.

4. The misappropriation consequence: All advances shall be used by the contractor exclusively for mobilisation expenditure, including the acquisition of construction-related plant and equipment.

Should the contractor misappropriate any portion of the advance, it shall become due and payable immediately, and no further advance will be made to the contractor thereafter. In such cases, the contractor shall also be liable for appropriate action under the contract.

C. Secured Advance Against Material Brought to Site

1. The 75% Rule and the 90-DAY condition:

Secured advance on the security of materials — which are not combustible, fragile or perishable in naturebrought to the site but not yet incorporated in the works Will be made up to:

— subject to the condition that their quantities are not excessive and shall be used within a period of 90 (ninety) days, and subject to other stipulations in the contract.

The safeguards:

  • The contractor will be required to sign an indenture bond, hypothecating the goods to the Procuring Entity, and also be responsible for their safe custody.
  • Before the advance is released, the Procuring Entity May inspect the site to ensure that the contractor has safeguarded the materials against pilferage and deterioration.
  • It May be ensured that the contractor has not taken any loan/ limit from banks against hypothecation of the materials against which the secured advance is claimed. AN undertaking in this regard May also be taken from the contractor.

2. The "paid stock only" Rule:

Generally, as per the provisions of the contracts, the contractors are required to submit proof of cost of materials and the delivery of material at site while claiming such advances.

THE stock register should be maintained from the commencement of the contract And — unless otherwise prescribed in the contracts — the stock so considered for advance should generally be only paid stock (and not brought on credit).

Where the materials are supplied from a captive source of the contractor, THE reasonableness of the valuation of such materials May be ensured.

3. The 120-DAY absolute recovery Rule:

The advance will be repaid from each succeeding running bill (periodic/ interim payment) to the extent materials for which advance has been previously paid have been incorporated into the works.

6.14Prices, Firm Price and Variable Price

6.14.1Prices and the Bar on Undue Profiteering [G ONLY]

1. Independent pricing: The prices should be arrived at independently — without restricting competition, any consultation, communication, or agreement with any other bidder or competitor.

2. Without undue profiteering — the price ceilings:

A) the price quoted by the bidder shall not be higher than the controlled price fixed by law for the goods, if any.

Where there is no controlled price, it shall not exceed the prices or contravene the norms for fixation of prices, if any, laid down by Government.

Where the Government has fixed no such prices or norms, it shall not exceed the price appearing in any agreement, if any, relating to price regulation by any industry.

B) the disclosure obligation and its consequence: If the price quoted is higher than the controlled price, the bidder shall specifically mention this fact in his bid, giving reasons for quoting a higher price(s). IF HE fails to do so or makes any misstatement, it shall be lawful for the Procuring Entity either:

  • TO revise the price at any stage to bring it in conformity with the sub-clause above; or*
  • TO terminate the contract for default As per the contract, and avail all the remedies available therein — in addition to other punitive actions for violation of Code of Integrity.

3. Price Components: The price Schedule should show all the specified components of prices. The price components for goods offered from India And those offered from abroad should be indicated separately In the applicable price schedules.

  • The components should include, as applicable: GST, transportation, insurance, and price of incidental works/ services as mentioned in the Schedule of Requirements.
  • For goods offered from abroad, the price components (indicating the currency, in the case of GTE) should include: Customs duty, marine insurance, freight, and agency commission, as applicable.

6.14.2Fixed Price — the Threshold Divergence

ManualRule
G GOODS · C Consultancy · NC Non-consultancyshort-term contracts where the delivery period does not extend beyond 12 (twelve) months Should normally be concluded on a firm and fixed price (and not subject to variation on any account) by inviting tenders accordingly
W WORKSshort-term contracts where the delivery/ completion period does not extend beyond 18 (eighteen) months Should normally be concluded with a firm and fixed price

6.14.3Variable Price and the Price Variation Clause (PVC)

1. When a PVC May be provided:

G, C, NC:In tenders with deliveries longer than 12 (twelve) months, a Price Variation Clause (PVC) May be provided to protect the purchaser's interests — particularly for high-value (more than rupees three crore) procurements.

However, even for shorter deliveries or lower value, the PVC May be stipulated for items with inputs (raw material, labour, ETC.) prone to short-term price volatility — especially for critical or high-value items/ services.

W adds the competitive rationale: *"provision of price variation … will deal with rise and fall of the prices in construction materials, labour and other key inputs. … the provision of price variation clauses enables contractors to factor this reduced risk and quote more competitive prices."*

2. The "provide your own formula" Rule: Where it is decided to conclude the contract with a variable price, an appropriate clause incorporating a suitable price variation formula (to take care of the changes in the input cost of labour, material, and fuel/ power Components) should be provided in the tender documents.

3. Sources of indices and weighting: The variations are to be calculated periodically (usually quarterly) By using indices published by:

suitable weights are to be assigned to the applicable elements — i.e., Fixed overheads and various applicable inputs (material/ fuel/ labour — for which reliable indices are available).

If the production of goods/ delivery of services/ works needs more than one raw material, the input cost of material May be further sub-divided into various categories of material, for which cost indices are published.

4. The twelve essential elements of a PVC(common to all four, with minor wording variations):

I) base date & time lag: The price agreed upon should specify the base date — that is, the month and year to which the contract/ bid price is linked — to enable variations to be calculated with reference to the price indices prevailing in that month and year. This base date should be a few weeks/ months (the period is called time-lag) prior to the last date of submission of bids, when the last published price indices would be available. Time lag applies both for the base date and the date of supply/ delivery date, AND must be specified in the tender documents.

ii) ignorable variation: The price variation formula must also stipulate a minimum percentage of variation of the contract price, only above which the price variation will be admissible.

iii) inordinate variation — the ceiling and the frustration route:

In rare cases, prices May go up to such an extent that it May render the contract unviable for either party, thus frustrating the contract. Therefore, the Price Variation Clause should provide for a ceiling — a percentage per annum, or an overall ceiling, or both (say 20%/ 25% of the original price) — on price variations, beyond which the price variation would be capped at this level. As soon as it comes to light that price variations are likely to go beyond this ceiling — and if the supplier/ contractor is not agreeable to the price variation being capped — HE MAY notify the purchaser under 'frustration of contract' provisions in the tender document/ clause, for short-closing the contract.

iv) no PVC on advance/ stage payments: Where advance or stage payments are made, there should be a further stipulation that no price variations will be admissible on such portions of the price, after the dates of such payment.

V) LD is calculated on the varied price: Where deliveries are accepted beyond the scheduled delivery date, subject to levy of Liquidated Damages as provided in the contract — the LD (if a percentage of the price) will be recoverable on the price as varied by the operation of the PVC.

vi) the asymmetric default Rule — the single most important PVC provision:

vii) price variation May be allowed beyond the original scheduled delivery date — BY specific alteration of that date through an amendment to the contract — in cases of force Majeure or defaults by Government.

viii) import/ duty disclosure — W Only: Where contract execution depends on imported (subject to customs duty and foreign exchange fluctuations) and/ or locally sourced and/ or locally manufactured (subject to excise duty and other duties and taxes) Goods/ works/ services — the percentage and element of duties and taxes included in the price should be specifically stated, along with the selling rate of foreign exchange element taken into account in the calculation of the price of the imported item.

ix) the clause should also contain the mode and terms of payment of the price variation admissible.

X) the downward-benefit provision: The buyer should ensure a provision in the contract for the benefit of any reduction in the price in terms of the PVC being passed on to him.

xi) An illustrative PVC clause is available at:G Annexure 18 · W Annexure 5 · C Annexure 16 · NC Annexure 10.

xii) the final-payment certificate — W ONLY:

5. The statutory-regulation adjustment — W ONLY:

  • To the extent that full compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the contractor is not covered by the provisions of the contract, THE unit rates and prices included in the contract shall be deemed to include amounts to cover the contingencies of such uncovered portion of rise or fall of costs.
  • IF any statutory regulations or bye-laws come into force after submission of the bids, which cause additional or reduced cost to the contractor In the execution of the contract — such statutory additional or reduced cost (except which are covered in cost indices) shall be added to or deducted from the contract price.

6.15Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) [G ONLY]

1. The two triggers:

In case of domestic tender contracts Involving:

  • Substantial import content (say > 25% of the total price), AND
  • a long delivery period (exceeding one year from the date of the contract)

— an appropriate exchange Rate Variation (ERV) clause May be formulated by the Procuring Entity in consultation with its associated/ integrated finance, as needed, and incorporated in the tender enquiry document.

In that clause, the bidders are to be asked to indicate:

  • THE import content and the currency(ies) used for calculating the value of import content(s) In their total quoted price;
  • THE base exchange rate for each such foreign currency Used for converting the foreign exchange content into Indian rupees; And
  • THE extent of foreign Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) risk they are willing to bear.

2. The base date, the variation window, and the 2.5% band:

ElementRule
Base dateTHE deadline of bid submission — OR seven days prior to it (the purchase organisation is to adopt a suitable date)
variation windowbetween the above base date and the date of remittance to the foreign principal, OR the mid-point of manufacture of the foreign component (the purchase organisation is to choose the appropriate date)
applicable exchange rateaccording to the "Bill currency selling" Exchange rate as quoted by a source as specified — if not specified, authorised exchange bankers approved by RBI — in the tender document on the dates in question
the dead bandno variation in price in this regard will be allowed if the variation in the rate of exchange remains within the limit of plus/ minus 2.5 per cent (or any other percentage fixed by the Procuring Entity)

ERV shall be applicable only for components used to manufacture supplied goods imported after the contract date.

3. Who bears it — and the asymmetric default Rule:

ANY increase or decrease in the landed price of import content (including customs duty) By reason of the variation in the rate of exchange shall be charged to the buyer's account during the original delivery period.

4. The four documents for claiming ERV: A) a bill of ERV claim enclosing the working sheet; B) banker's certificate/ debit advice detailing the foreign exchange paid and exchange rate; C) copies of the import order placed on the supplier; D) supplier's invoice for the relevant import order.

6.16Statutory Taxes / Duties / Levies

6.16.1Goods and Services Tax (GST)

1. GST registration status and GSTIN (the 15-digit registration number) — the nine rules:

A) all bidders should ensure that they are GST compliant, and that their quoted tax structure/ rates are as per the GST Act/ Rules.

B) bidder should be registered under GST And furnish their GSTIN number and GST registration certificate In their offer — unless they are specifically exempted from registration Under a specific notification/ circular/ section/ Rule issued by statutory authorities.

C) multiple verticals: If the bidder has multiple business verticals in a State and has separate registrations for each vertical, THE GSTIN of each vertical concerned with the supply and service involved — as per the scope of the Schedule of requirements and price Schedule — shall be quoted.

D) multiple states: If the supply/ service is from multiple states, the bidder should mention GST registration numbers for each State separately.

E) composition scheme: If the bidder has opted for a composition levy under section 10 of CGST, he should declare the fact while bidding, along with GSTIN and GST registration certificate.

f) exemption from registration — and the Reverse Charge Mechanism:

If a bidder is not liable to take GST registration (i.e., having turnover below threshold), he shall submit an undertaking/ indemnification against tax liability. The bidder claiming exemption shall submit a valid certificate from a practising chartered accountant (ca)/ cost accountant with the unique document identification number (din), to the effect that the bidder fulfils all conditions prescribed in the notification exempting him from registration.

Such bidder/ dealer shall not charge any GST and/ or GST cess in the bill/ invoice. In such a case, applicable GST shall be deposited under reverse charge mechanism (rcm) — or otherwise as per GST Act — by the Procuring Entity directly to concerned authorities. Bidder should note that his offer would be loaded with the payable GST under the rcm. Further, the bidder should notify and submit to the Procuring Entity within 15 days of becoming liable for registration under GST.

G) bidders must also consider the benefits of input tax credit Under the GST legislation, as amended from time to time, on input goods/ capital goods/ input services While quoting the prices.

H) the jurisdictional assessing officer Rule: In their bids, the bidders shall indicate the details of their GST jurisdictional assessing officers (designation, address, email id). In case of a contract award, the purchaser shall immediately forward a copy of the loa/ purchase order to the jurisdictional assessing officer Mentioned in the bidder's bid.

I) the Procuring Entity's state-wise gstins shall be indicated in tender documents.

2. HSN code and GST rate — the four rules:

a)if provided in the tender document, the HSN (harmonized system of nomenclature) code for the goods is only indicative. The bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that they quote the correct HSN code and corresponding GST rate.

B) the separate-disclosure Rule: As per the GST Act, the bid and contract must show the GST tax rates (and GST cess if applicable) and GST amount explicitly and separately from the bid/ contract price (exclusive of GST).

So, if a bidder asks for GST (and GST Cess if applicable) to be paid extra, the rate and nature of such applicable taxes should be shown separately.

Bidders should quote 'GST' if payable extra on the total basic rate of each cost element, AND quote GST in '%' inclusive of cess.

C) if the price is stated to include GST, the bidder must declare the current GST rate (and GST cess, as applicable) included in the price.

D) the blank-column Rule — a trap for bidders: If GST, other taxes, or duties are not specified, or the column is left blank In the price Schedule, it shall be presumed that no such tax/ levy is applicable or payable by the Procuring Entity. No Statutory Variation in GST shall be paid in such a case.

3. Refund from supplier: Sometimes, the supplier — after claiming and receiving reimbursements for GST from the purchaserapplies to the concerned authorities for refunds, on genuine grounds, of certain portions of such duties and taxes paid by it, and receives the allowable refunds. Such refunds contain the purchaser's share also (Out of the payments already made by the purchaser to that supplier). The tender enquiry document and the contract are to contain suitable provisions for obtaining such refunds from the supplier.

4. The three statutory duties/ taxes/ levies to be entirely borne by the bidder — including any statutory variations thereon, for which the Procuring Entity would not be responsible:

A) personal and corporate tax: Bidder shall bear all personal/ corporate taxes imposed on owners/ company/ joint venture/ subcontractors or their employees.

B) taxes on sub-contractors, vendors: Bidder shall bear all taxes — including GST — as May be imposed on the contractor or supply-chain (sub-contractors, vendors, etc.).

C) duties/ taxes on raw materials: The Procuring Entity is not liable for any claim from the contractor on account of fresh imposition and/ or increase (including statutory increase) of GST, customs duty, or other duties on raw materials and/ or components used directly in the manufacture of the contracted goods, taking place during the pendency of the contractunless such liability is expressly agreed to in terms of the contract.

5. Applicability to imported goods/ services: Following the implementation of GST, the import of commodities shall not be subject to erstwhile applicable duties LIKE safeguard duty, education cess, basic customs duty, anti-dumping duty, ETC. All these supplementary customs duties are subsumed under GST.

If imported into India, the supply of commodities, services, or both shall be considered as supply under inter-state commerce/ trade, and shall attract integrated tax (IGST). THE IGST rate and GST cess shall be applicable on the 'customs assessable value' plus the 'basic customs duty applicable thereon'.

6.16.2Customs Duty on Imported Goods [G ONLY]

1. The disclosure and the import-in-whose-name Rule: Regarding imported goods, the bidder shall specify the rate and the total amount of customs duty payable thereon. Bidder shall also indicate the corresponding Indian tariff classification (ITC-HS) Applicable for the goods. Any material imported directly from the supplier or manufacturer should be under the name of the Procuring Entity. In this regard, all formalities will be completed by the Procuring Entity by engaging a customs house agent (CHA) and bearing the cost thereof.

2. The three customs-duty exemptions: The Government has allowed exemption from payment of customs duty on certain types of goods for use by the following organisations: a) scientific and technical instruments imported by research institutes; B) hospital equipment imported by Government hospitals; C) consumable goods imported by a public-funded research institution or a university.

3. The two certificates required: However, to avail of such exemptions, the organisations are required to produce — at the appropriate time — :

4. The MOOWR scheme 2019:

THE manufacturing and other operations in a warehouse regulations (MOOWR) scheme 2019 Was introduced by the Central board of indirect taxes and customs (CBIC) TO promote India as a global manufacturing hub and bolster the "Make in India" initiative.

This scheme allows importers to bring raw materials and capital goods into the country without paying customs duties.

These imported materials can then be utilised for manufacturing and other operations within private bonded warehouses. Under the MOOWR Scheme: a) import duty is deferred When raw materials and capital goods are imported into India; B) if these materials are used for exports, THE deferred duty is exempt; C) if the inputs are utilised for goods sold in the domestic market (i.e., domestic tariff area), import duty for such inputs used for domestic clearance must be paid; D) import duty on capital goods is paid if they are cleared for the domestic market.

5. THE relevant contemporary instructions covering these aspects should be incorporated in the tender enquiry document and the resultant contract.

6.16.3Deduction of Income Tax, etc., from Payments

If applicable under relevant tax laws and Rules, the Procuring Entity shall deduct from all payments and deposit required taxes to respective authorities.

6.16.4Statutory Variation Clause

Unless otherwise stated in the contract, statutory Variation in applicable GST rateonly during the period from the date of submission of the tender to the date of acceptance of the tender (that is, placement of the contract), and during the original/ re-fixed delivery period of the contractshall be borne by the Procuring Entity.

The benefit of any reduction in the GST rate must be passed on to the Procuring Entity during the original and extended delivery period.

however, GST rate amendments shall be considered for the quoted HSN code only, against documentary evidence — provided such an increase in GST rates is after the tender submission date.

However, the statutory Variation shall not be applicable for any misquotation of the HSN number or incorrect GST rate by the bidder.

6.17Incoterms 2020 — Terms of Delivery [G ONLY]

1. The eleven INCOTERMS — seven for any mode, four for sea/ inland waterway:

A. Rules for Any Mode of Transport (Seven)

IncotermApplicable to
EXW — ex-works(named place of delivery)the seller makes the goods available at their premises or another named place
FCA — free carrier(named place of delivery)the seller delivers the goods — cleared for export — at a named place to a carrier or to another party nominated by the buyer
CPT — carriage paid to(named place of delivery)earlier C&F — Cost and Freightthe seller is responsible for export clearance and freight costs for carriage to the named place of destination
CIP — carriage and insurance paid to (named place of delivery)in addition to CPT responsibilities, the seller is required to obtain *insurance for the goods while in transit for 110% of the contract value under institute cargo clauses (a) of the institute of London underwriters‌
DAP — delivered at place(named place of delivery)the seller delivers the goods — ready for unloading — at the named place of destination
DPU — delivered at place unloaded (named place of delivery)earlier DAT — Delivered At Terminalin addition to DAP responsibilities, the seller is required to unload the goods At the named place of destination
DDP — delivered duty paid(named place of delivery)in addition to DAP responsibilities, the seller is required to clear the goods through customs and pay import duties and taxes

B. Rules for Sea and Inland Waterway Transport (Four)

IncotermApplicable to
FAS — free alongside shipalongside the buyer's vessel at the named port of shipment, the seller is to clear the goods for export. However, if the parties wish the buyer To clear the goods for export, explicit wording should be added to the contract
FOB — free on-boardseller to arrange for export clearance and deliver goods on board a vessel that is to be designated by the buyer
CFR — cost and freightin addition to FOB responsibilities, the seller pays for the carriage of the goods up to the named port of destination
CIF — cost, insurance and freightin addition to CFR responsibilities, the seller is required to obtain *insurance for the goods while in transit for 110% of the contract value under institute cargo clauses (a)*

2. History and the title-of-goods principle:

IN USE SINCE 1936, INCOTERMS have been last revised in 2020. Out of the 11 INCOTERMS options, seven apply to all modes of transportation, whereas four apply only to sea and inland waterway transportation.

Incoterms rules describe the tasks, costs and risks involved in the delivery of goods from the seller to the buyer.

normally, unless otherwise defined, the title of goods passes from the supplier to the purchaser in accordance with the terms of delivery (for, CFR, among others). The terms of delivery, therefore, specify when the ownership and title of goods pass from the seller to the buyer, along with the associated risks.

The four allocations made by terms of delivery: A) control and care of the goods while in transit; B) carrier selection, transfers, and related issues; C) costs of freight, insurance, taxes, duties and forwarding fees; D) documentation, problem resolution and other related issues.

3. The spectrum: The options range from one extreme — the buyer takes full responsibility from the point of departure (EXW) — to the other extreme — the seller is responsible all the way through delivery to the buyer's location (DDP)(Annexure 19 of the Goods Manual).

4. The four special definitions within INCOTERMS:

TermSpecial meaning
DeliveryTHE point in the transaction where the risk of loss or damage to the goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer
FREEseller has an obligation to deliver the goods to a named place for transfer to a carrier
carrierany person who, in a contract of carriage, is nominated by seller/ buyer for transport by any mode
to clear for exportTO file the shipper's export declaration and get an export permit

5. The Indian national-transport terms: Within national transportation, certain terms have assumed acceptance due to usage:

  • Free on rail (for)* has two versions: *For/ dispatching* and *for/ destination(the buyer is responsible from the nominated point mentioned till arrival point, as in DAP above);
  • On similar lines, infrequently, free on truck (fot) is also used in road transport.

6.18Recovery of Public Money from the Supplier's/ Contractor's/ Consultant's/ Service Provider's Bill

Sometimes, requests are received from a different Ministry/ Department FOR withholding some payment from a supplier/ contractor out of the payment or securities due to it against a contract.

Such requests are to be examined by the Procuring Entity (which has received the request) on the merits of the case for further action.

6.19Payment against Time-Barred Claims

1. The three-year Rule: Ordinarily, all claims against the Government are time-barred after a period of three years, calculated from the date when the payment falls dueunless the payment claim has been under correspondence.

2. The admission-of-liability exception: However, the limitation is saved if there is an admission of liability to pay — and a fresh period of limitation starts from the time such admission is made.

3. The procedure: THE drill to be followed while dealing with time-barred claims will be decided by the Procuring Entity concerned, in consultation with the paying authority.

4. The absolute bar on the paying authority: The paying authority is to ensure that no payment against such a time-barred claim is made till a decision has been taken in this regard by the ca.

Appendix to Chapter 6 — Points of Difference Between the Four Manuals

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG/C/NC: Chapter 6 · W: CHAPTER 5
2Chapter titleIDENTICAL in all four — the second and last such chapter
3Issuing banks for Bid Securityg: *Commercial banks · W: *SCHEDULED BANKS* (s.2(e) RBI Act 1934), with the footnote that a BG *MERELY ADVISED* is not acceptable in lieu of being *CONFIRMED
4Consequence under a Bid Securing DeclarationG/C/NC: bidder shall be *SUSPENDED · W: bidder shall be *DEBARRED
5Who is EXEMPT from EMDG: *MSEs AND DPIIT-recognised Start-ups · W: *only DPIIT-recognised Start-ups
6Scope of the registered-bidder EMD exemptionG: valid for trade group and monetary value · W: valid for monetary value only
7Upper ceiling on Bid Security in larger tendersW ONLY
8performance Security quantumG: 3–5% · W: 3–10% · NC: 3–5%(NC expressly notes "3 to 10% for Works")
9Lower percentage from the 3–10% band for tenders > Rs 50 croreW ONLY
10Rs 75 lakh / Rs 3 crore illustrative ceiling tableG + NC
11"…or dispense with it" — power to waive performance security entirelync only
12Threshold below which Performance Security not neededG: Not necessary up to Rs 50 lakh (printed as "Rs. 50 (twenty-five) lakh" — a source typo) · nc: May not be insisted upon up to Rs 50 lakh · W: no threshold
13OEM in whose favour PAC issued — exempt from Performance SecurityG + NC(absent from W, consistent with Works having no PAC mode)
14Validity beyond completion of obligationsG/NC: including warranty obligations · W: including defect liability period (DLP)/ warranty
15"Full performance security should be forfeited even IF the Contractor has PARTIALLY EXECUTED the work"G ONLY
16Retention of part of Performance Guarantee from progressive billsG: expressly "not acceptable" for goods · W: this IS the Security Deposit/ Retention Money regime
17Multi-year proportionate reduction of Performance SecurityG: framed for Rate Contracts, 2–3 years · C/NC: framed for service contracts of 5–7 years or more, with the working-capital rationale
18JV — BG in proportion to participationW + NC
19Replacement of existing BGs with ISB/ e-BGW + NC
20Security Deposit/ retention money (5% of each running bill; two-stage replacement; two-halves release)W ONLY
21Insurance Surety Bond full text (three parties; 14-day/ 45-day rule)G ONLY(others cross-refer)
22Electronic Bank Guarantee full text (NeSL, UIN, 24/7, verification without issuing bank)G ONLY(others cross-refer)
23Warranty Bank Guarantee (10% of value; no warranty clause for non-capital goods or capital goods up to Rs 1 lakh)G ONLY
24BG confirmation channel includes the official email-id of the bankW ONLY
25Insurances and indemnities; Indemnity Bond under s.124 Contract Act; "a BG is safer than an indemnity bond"W ONLY
26Price elements driven by INPUT vs OUTPUT admeasurementnc only
27Payment to the supplier's bank on endorsement + irrevocable power of attorneyG ONLY
28Ten payment obligations incl. MSME 45-day rule and statutory tax certificatesG ONLY
29VARIATIONS; variations register; MEASUREMENT BOOKS and e-MBs; Interim Payment CertificateW ONLY
30DELAY-IN-PAYMENT TIMELINES — 75% within 10 working days; balance within 28; explanation within 3; interest at GPF rate beyond 30 working days; final payment within 3 monthsW ONLY
31Acceptance for payment of servicesc: By the *Procuring Entity · nc: By the *ultimate user
32Terms of Payment for DOMESTIC GOODS (the four patterns) and for imported goods; LC; Air Freight ConsolidatorsG ONLY
33Advance payment ceilings — 30% private / 40% Govt agency or PSE / 6 months for maintenance contracts; 110% BG; two-instalment rule; GPF+2% compounded quarterly on defaultG + C + NC
34MOBILISATION ADVANCE (10% in two 5% instalments; time-based recovery if interest-free; part BGs per instalment; utilisation certificates)W ONLY
35Plant, machinery and shuttering advance (5%; not more than 50% of depreciated cost; five conditions; stamp-paper undertaking; no advance on hired/ hire-purchase equipment)W ONLY
36Secured advance against material at site (75% of invoice or BOQ value whichever less; 90-day use; indenture bond; Paid stock only; 120-day absolute recovery)W ONLY
37fixed-price thresholdg/c/nc: *12 months · w: *18 months
38Undue profiteering / MRP ceiling / controlled price disclosureG ONLY
39PVC weightages include POL (Petroleum, Oils and Lubricants)W ONLY
40PVC element on import/ excise duty disclosure and FX selling rateW ONLY
41The final-payment "no decrease in indices" undertaking and the vigilance-about-downward-variation dutyW ONLY
42Relaxing the PVC cap where short-closing is not in the Procuring Entity's interestG + C
43Exchange Rate Variation (ERV) — 25% import content, >1 year delivery, ±2.5% dead band, four claim documentsG ONLY
44GST — full nine-rule registration regime, HSN/ rate rules, refund-from-supplier, three bidder-borne taxesG(fullest); C/W/NC carry shorter versions
45CUSTOMS DUTY, the three exemptions, the two certificates, and the MOOWR Scheme 2019G ONLY
46Statutory Variation Clause reproduced in full with the "re-fixed delivery period" noteC + NC(G and W cross-refer to their contract-management chapters)
47INCOTERMS 2020 — all eleven terms, the title-of-goods principle, the four special definitions, FOR/ FOTG ONLY
48Recovery of Public Money — section titleG: Suppliers' · W: Contractor's · C: Consultant's · NC: Service Provider's
49Payment against Time-Barred Claims — three-year rule, admission-of-liability exception, no payment till CA decidesCOMMON to all four — and the closing section of the chapter in every Manual

end of Chapter 6

Chapter 7 — Part a

Shortlisting, the Evaluation Committee, and Preliminary Examination

Part IShortlisting, Committees and Preliminary Examination

Merging: Goods Ch. 7 (Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract) · Works Ch. 6 (Evaluation of Bids and Award of Work) · Consultancy Ch. 7 (Shortlisting of Consultants, EoI) and Ch. 8 (RfP Evaluation and Award of Contract) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 7 (Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract)

Structural Warnings for Students

1. Three different Chapter numbers for the same block:

ManualChapterTitle
G GoodsChapter 7Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract
W WorksChapter 6Evaluation of Bids and Award of Work
C ConsultancyChapter 8RfP Evaluation and Award of Contract
NC Non-ConsultancyChapter 7Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract

Why consultancy is one Chapter ahead: The Consultancy Manual inserts an entire Chapter 7 — shortlisting of consultants, Expression of Interest (EoI) before its evaluation chapter. That chapter has NO counterpart in any other Manual and is reproduced in full at para 7.1 below.

2. The committee is different in consultancy:

ManualEvaluating body
G, W, NCtender Committee (TC) — also called Tender Evaluation Committee (TEC) in some organisations
Cconsultancy Evaluation Committee (CEC)

3. Because of the volume (423 KB across the four Manuals), this chapter is issued in two parts:

  • PART A (this document) — Shortlisting/ EoI · Bid Evaluation Process · Composition and Role of the Committee · Dissent, Independence and Confidentiality · Timely Processing · Extension of Bid Validity · Lack of Competition · Committee Report · Preliminary Examination.
  • PART B — Techno-commercial Evaluation · Evaluation of Quality (Technical Proposals) · Financial Evaluation · lCS/ QCBS/ SSS/ FBS · Reasonableness of Prices · Abnormally Low Bids · Cartel Formation · Negotiations · Cancellation and Re-tender · Award of Contract · Audit Trails · Risks and Mitigations.

Concordance for Chapter 7 — Part A

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
7.1Shortlisting of Consultants — EoICh. 7 entire
7.2Bid Evaluation Process — importance7.1-16.1.18.1.17.1.1
7.3Evaluation in Different Tendering Systems(in 7.1)6.1.28.1.27.1.2
7.4Preparation and Vetting of Comparative Statement7.26.1.38.1.37.1.3
7.5The Stages of Evaluation6.1.48.1.47.1.4
7.6Contacting Procuring Entity during evaluation7.3.66.1.58.1.57.1.5
7.7Composition of the Committee; SoPP7.1-2, 7.1-36.2.18.2.17.2.1
7.8Role of the Committee7.1-2-c6.2.28.2.27.2.2
7.9Handling Dissent among the Committee7.6.126.2.38.2.37.2.3
7.10Independence, Impartiality, Confidentiality, No COI7.6.136.2.48.2.47.2.4
7.11Timely Processing of Tenders7.6.16.2.58.2.57.2.5
7.12Extension of Bid/ Tender Validity Period7.6.26.2.68.2.67.2.6
7.13Consideration of Lack of Competition7.6.106.2.78.2.77.2.7
7.14Committee Recommendations/ Report7.6.146.2.88.2.87.2.8
7.15Preliminary Examination7.36.38.37.3.1

7.1 Shortlisting of Consultants — Expression of Interest (EoI) [C ONLY]

7.1.1Basic Considerations

1. Why two stages are necessary: Due to the inherent complexities of evaluation of physically non-measurable scope and quality standards of consultancy proposals, IT IS too time-consuming and expensive for the Procuring Entity to invite — as well as for the consultancy firms to prepare — and evaluate proposals from all consultants who want to compete.

Therefore, procurement of consultancy is done in a two-stage process.

2. The first stage: The qualified firms with requisite experience, technical and financial capabilities — who can be trusted to deliver the required services at the desired level of quality — ARE shortlisted transparently. This shortlisting is done through the expression of Interest (EoI) process.

adequate time should be allowed for getting responses from interested consultants. The Procuring Entity shall make available copies of the EoI document to the interested consultants on its website and e-procurement portal (GeM/ CPPP).

3. The second stage: In the second stage — request for proposals (RfP) — proposals containing technical and financial bids Are invited from such shortlisted bidders. Selection of the winning bidder is based on the quality of the proposal and, where appropriate, on the cost of services To be provided.

7.1.2The Four Modes of EoI

A. Open Tender Enquiry (OTE) — Rule 183(ii) of GFR 2017

For procurement above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, shortlisting is done in an openly advertised competitive (OTE mode) shortlisting process called Expression of Interest (EoI) — giving equal opportunity to all interested bidders To be considered for shortlisting.

Under EoI, the "Request for Expression of Interest" (REoI) is advertised on the Central Public Procurement Portal (CPPP) at www.eprocure.gov.in AND ON Government E-marketplace (GeM).

An organisation having its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website. The advertisements should give the complete web address from where the bidding documents can be downloaded.

A complete ToR should be ready before requesting EoI.

Attention of known reputed consultants May also be separately drawn Wherever possible.

The advertisement must include, among other things:

B. Global Tender Enquiry (GTE)

in case it is felt that likely consultants May not be available in India, the EoI process May be done on global Tender Enquiry (GTE) process — BY sending REoI notice to foreign embassies in India and Indian embassies in relevant countries.

C. Limited Tender Enquiry (LTE) — Rule 183(i) of GFR 2017

In procurements of consultancy services below Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, shortlisting is done without a formal published Expression of Interest — akin to a limited Tender Enquiry (LTE) process.

The three-step procedure:

  1. To start with, the preparation of a long list of potential consultants May be done on the basis of formal or informal enquiries FROM: Other ministries or departments or organisations involved in similar activities · chambers of commerce & industry · association of consultancy firms, etc.
  2. The Procuring Entity should scrutinise the preliminary long list AND shortlist the prima facie eligible and capable contractors From the long list.
  3. The number of consultants in this moderated long-list should not be less than three. In case sufficient consultants cannot be located, then the responses May be called from a lesser number of consultants — but not less than three in any case, after taking ca's approval.

The panel device: To smoothen this shortlisting for projects below Rs. 50 lakh, procuring entities who do frequent procurement of consultancy services May consider preparation of a panel of qualified consultants, after evaluation of their credentials — on the lines of registration of vendors in procurement of goods.

IF THE complexity of the project so justifies, A formal EoI May be advertised even for procurements below Rs. 50 lakh, with the approval of ca.

D. Special Limited Tender Enquiry (SLTE) — Rule 162 of GFR 2017

LTE mode for EoI — even for values higher than Rs. 50 lakh, where normally OTE should have been done — is permissible in certain exceptional circumstances.

Powers to sanction procurement on LTE basis in such exceptional cases May be laid down in SoPP, based on a certificate of urgency signed by the indentor.

This mode has the merit of being quicker, but VfM obtained May be less than in case of OTE; Hence it should be restricted to the following four situations: A) the Competent Authority certifies that there is an existing or prospective urgency for operational or technical requirements, and any additional expenditure involved by not procuring through advertised tender enquiry is justified in view of urgency. The Ministry/ Department should also put on record the nature of the urgency and reasons why the procurement could not be anticipated earlier. b) THE sources of supply are definitely known, and the possibility of fresh source(s) beyond those being tapped is remote. c) THERE ARE sufficient reasons, to be recorded in writing by the Competent Authority, indicating that it will not be in public interest To procure the services through advertised tender enquiry. D) Government policy designates procurement from specific agencies.

7.1.3Evaluation of the REoI

A. General Norms

B. Evaluation of Responsiveness and Eligibility

1. ONLY substantively responsive eois Shall be evaluated for shortlisting. A substantively responsive EoI is complete and conforms to the REoI document's essential terms and conditions.

2. The pass/ fail Rule: The Procuring Entity shall determine whether the consultants are eligible as per laid-down eligibility criteria. The eligibility evaluation shall be on a "pass" or "fail" basis. A consultant must achieve a "pass" on all the criteria to proceed to the next step. Any consultant not achieving a 'pass' in any of the eligibility criteria shall be rejected as non-responsive.

C. Evaluation of Qualification — the Nine Rules

1. The Procuring Entity shall evaluate the consultants for shortlisting, inter alia, based on their past experience of handling general and similar consultancy assignments, and financial capability of the firm.

2. No borrowed credentials: The determination shall not consider the qualifications of other firms — such as the consultant's subsidiaries, parent entities, affiliates, or any other entity different from the consultant. Assignments completed by the consultant's individual experts working privately or through other consulting firmscannot be claimed as the relevant experience of the consultant, or that of the consultant's partners or sub-consultants.

3. The Procuring Entity reserves the right to waive minor deviations in the qualification criteria, if they do not materially affect the capability of a consultant to perform the contract.

4. Key experts are not evaluated at EoI stage — and the reason: The qualification and experience of key experts are not included in the shortlisting criteria but shall be evaluated at the RfP stage.

5. In case a particular certification/ licence is required To perform the assignment, that May also be included in eligibility or qualification criteria.

6. The suggested qualification criteria table and weightages:

Criteria / Sub-criteriaSuggested ValuesSub-criteria weightCriteria weight
Criteria 1 — general and similar experience(Bidders providing Consultancy services for at least the specified period and having completed the specified volume of general and similar consultancy assignments during the specified period)70%
Similar assignmentsdefine based on value, general and specific sector of work, region, key activities/ methodologies/ technologies etc.
Consultants must have at least α years' experience in Consultancy Servicesα = 720%
During the last α years, Consultancy Assignments completed or substantially completed (at least γ payments received) should be at least βα = 7 · γ = 80% · β = 750%
Out of the Consultancy Assignments mentioned above, δ should be similar assignmentsδ = 230%
criteria 2 — financial capability(Overall financial strength of the consultant in terms of turnover, profitability, and cash flow — liquid assets — situation)30%
turnover:Minimum average annual turnover of at least Rs. θ Crores, at least κ of which should be from Consultancy Service Contracts (total payments received for contracts in progress or completed) within the last α yearsθ = 200% of the value of assignment · κ = 50% · α = 770%
financial viability — net worth: The Net Worth of the Bidder firm should not be negative on 'The Relevant Date' and should not have eroded by more than ξ in the last 3 YEARSξ = 30%30%
relaxation for start-ups:Qualification criteria can be relaxed up to λ% for start-ups, subject to meeting the quality and technical specifications during the RfPλ = 20% (twenty per cent)

7. Qualification criteria shall be based entirely upon the capability and resources required to perform the particular contract satisfactorily, considering bidders' experience and past performance, capabilities with respect to personnel, equipment and manufacturing facilities, financial standing and relevant compliance with environmental protection regulations. There should be no qualification criteria that would be advantageous to foreign consultants at the cost of domestically provided consultancy.

8. Demerged entities: Tender documents must clearly mention if (and under what conditions) the demerged entity will be permitted to use credentials of original/ parent entity (for initial five years from the incorporation of the demerged entities) To satisfy the qualification criteria or not.

9. The turnover-multiple caution — an express criticism of prevailing practice:

D. Simplified vs Marking-Scheme Evaluation at EoI

10. The default — simplified criteria: In EoI, simplified evaluation criteria should be used, instead of marking schemes. A fail-pass, minimum benchmark in each criteria/ sub-criteria Can be specified.

11. The complex-case alternative — with a worked example: However, in a complex situation, marks/ scores May be assigned to the response of each consultant based on weightages assigned to each of the criteria in the EoI.

12. The purpose of scoring — not merely disqualification: "this exercise of scoring is not merely for disqualification of firms below a threshold, but to establish the relative strengths and weaknesses of the applicants — in order to arrive at a robust short list of qualified consultants who have the required experience and qualifications to deliver the required services at the desired level of quality."

13. The 75% threshold: The Procuring Entity shall shortlist all the consultants who secure the minimum required marks — normally 75% (seventy-five per cent). THE minimum qualifying requirement shall be specified in the EoI document.

7.1.4The EoI Evaluation Report

1. The shortlist size Rule — minimum three, maximum eight:

The short list of firms is required for the selection of consultancy services in a competitive process with:

If there are a larger number of consultants meeting the evaluation criteria, the shortlist shall be restricted to a specified number of consultantsif not specified, eight (8) consultantsbased on higher average turnover (or any other criteria, if so stipulated therein).

2. National-only shortlists: The short list May comprise only national consultants (firms registered or incorporated in the country and having registered office in India) FOR small assignments — AND indicated in the EoI.

This situation is applicable where:

  • Qualified national firms are available at a competitive cost; Or
  • the nature of the assignment is such that a foreign consultant's inclusion is not justified(for example, a training or outreach to be carried out in local language); or
  • foreign consultants have not expressed any interest.

3. CONCURRENT ASSIGNMENTS — the capacity check: IF THE same firm is considered for concurrent assignments *(for example, a construction supervision consultant for different stretches/ packages of rehabilitation/ reconstruction of a road contract)*, the Procuring Entity shall *assess the firm's overall capacity to perform multiple contracts before including it in more than one short list*. HOWEVER, this needs to be pre-declared in the EoI documents.

4. The evaluation committee May submit its EoI evaluation report to ca for approval. THE tender Committee format at Annexure 6 Can be used mutatis mutandis for this purpose.

7.1.5Declaration of Shortlist and Issue of RfP

1. Provisional shortlisting: Eois of consultants that succeed in the above evaluation shall be shortlisted. Provisionally shortlisted consultants will be informed of the condition(s) that must be met before submitting their proposal in the RfP process.

2. Validity of the shortlist — the six-month rule: Only shortlisted (including provisionally shortlisted) consultants shall be invited to participate in the following RfP process.

Such shortlisting shall remain valid for a period specified in the REoI — six months from the date of declaration, if not so specified.

3. Publication and the advertising bar: After the EoI evaluation report is accepted by the Competent Authority, the name and address of the shortlisted consultant(s) shall be published in the portal and notice board/ bulletin/ website of the Procuring Entity.

All consultants shall be advised about shortlisting of their eois or otherwisewithout disclosing the comparative position of their eois with that of others.

Shortlisted consultants must not advertise or publish the same in any form without the prior written consent of the Procuring Entity.

4. Shortlisting confers no rights: "shortlisting a consultant is an administrative process and does not confer any legal or contractual rights on the shortlisted bidder. Since original documents/ certificates are not being called for and examined at this stage, all shortlisting shall be conditional upon final verification of such documents/ certificates during the RfP process."

7.1.6Shortlisting — Risks and MitigationC

RISKMITIGATION
1. Conflict of interest situations: It is possible that conflict of interest situations are not reported or declared by the participating consultants — or sometimes by members of the evaluation committee.These situations need to be dealt with by signing declarations in specified formatsboth at the EoI bid stage as also in the technical proposal — AND by CEC members before undertaking the evaluation of proposals.
2. "Qualifications leasing":Local bidders with insufficient qualifications May show association with well-qualified (foreign or local) consultants — just to use their qualification documents to get the contract. These well-qualified consultants lease their qualification — but do not, or only minimally, contribute experience or key personnel at the execution stage.This issue needs to be dealt with from the EoI stage BY:
very clearly identifying the qualified applicant; and
putting on record/ contract the guaranteed contribution from the partner with qualification.

7.2 Bid Evaluation Process — the Governing Principle

The evaluation of bids is one of the most significant processes of procurement and must be transparent.

All bids are to be evaluated strictly based on the terms and conditions incorporated in the tender document and those stipulated by the bidders in their bids.

No hearsay information or hitherto undeclared condition should be brought in while evaluating the bids.

Similarly, no tender enquiry condition (especially the significant/ essential ones) should be overlooked/ relaxed while evaluating the bids.

G — the single-vendor caution on preferences: "care should be taken to ensure that preferences provided to any category of bidders on certain specified grounds do not result in a single vendor selection."

W — the permitted evaluation factors: The Contracting Authority may include quality, price, technical merit, aesthetic and functional characteristics, environmental characteristics, running costs, cost-effectiveness, after-sales service and technical assistance, delivery date and delivery period or period of completion, etc. "no criteria shall be used for evaluation of tenders that cannot be verified or [are] not stated in the contract — with the exception of provisions of laws in force."

7.3 Evaluation in Different Tendering SystemsWCNC

1. Single-stage single-envelope tendering: The evaluation of eligibility/ qualification of bidders, technical, commercial, and financial aspects is done simultaneously.

THE lowest-priced bid that meets the eligibility/ qualification criteria and technical and commercial conditions Laid down in the tender documents is declared as successful.

2. Single-stage two-envelope tendering — and the sanctity of the sealed financial bid:

Initially, only the techno-commercial bids would be opened and evaluated for bids which successfully meet the eligibility/ qualification criteria and techno-commercial aspects.

Financial bids of such successful bidders only Would be opened. The TC shall evaluate financial bids with a view to select the lowest (L1) bidder Who meets the eligibility/ qualification criteria and techno-commercial aspects.

Evaluators of technical proposals shall not have access to the financial proposals until the technical evaluation is concluded.

3. Two-stage bids: In two-stage bids, the PQB/ EoI stage would have already been evaluated, AND this second stage is for evaluation of responses to the second-stage two envelopes from the shortlisted qualified bidders, following the procedure described in sub-para 2 above.

7.4 Preparation and Vetting of Comparative Statement

Except in cases up to Rs. 50 lakh (rupees fifty lakh), the Procuring Entity should prepare a comparative statement of quotations (technical and financial) received in the order in which bids were opened.

Type of bidWhat the comparative statement contains
Techno-commercial bidinformation about deciding the responsiveness and eligibility of bids, AND evaluating the technical suitability of offers
financial bidinformation about rates quoted (including taxes), discounts if any, AND any other information that has implications on the ranking of bids

the concerned officers should sign the comparative statement So prepared. It May also be vetted by the associated/ integrated finance for veracity of information.

7.5 The Stages of EvaluationWCNC

the evaluation of the bids shall be carried out in two stages:

AT THE first stage, evaluation of responsiveness and technical bids is taken up.

Evaluators of technical bids shall not have access to the financial bids until the technical evaluation is concluded — AS THE envelope containing the financial bid is not opened till the technical evaluation is complete.

The financial bid of only such bidders will be opened which obtain minimum qualifying marks/ standards prescribed for the technical bid.

The evaluation shall be carried out in full conformity with the provisions of the tender document.

7.6 Contacting the Procuring Entity during the Evaluation

From the time of bid submission to awarding the contract, no bidder shall contact the Procuring Entity on any matter relating to the submitted bid.

If a bidder needs to contact The Procuring Entity for any reason relating to this tender and/ or its bid, it should do so only in writing or electronically.

any effort by a bidder to influence the Procuring Entity during the processing of bids, evaluation, bid comparison or award decisions Shall be construed as a violation of the Code of Integrity — and the bid shall be liable to be rejected as non-responsive, in addition to other punitive actions for violation of the Code of Integrity as per the tender document.

7.7 Composition of the Tender Committee (TC)/ Consultancy Evaluation Committee (CEC), and the SoPP

7.7.1The Direct Acceptance Threshold

There are delegations up to a threshold value — called the direct acceptance threshold — below which the evaluation of the bids May be entrusted solely and directly to the individual Competent Authority, without the involvement of a Tender Committee or any evaluation report.

ManualThe threshold
G GOODSTender Committee required for all cases having financial implications of more than Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh
W WORKS"…direct acceptance threshold — normally LTE threshold of Rs 50 lakhs"
C ConsultancyCEC required for all cases having financial implications of more than Rs. 50 lakh *(including SLTE or Nomination Basis)*; for cases less than Rs. 50 lakh, direct acceptance
NC(same as Goods)

he would carry out all the steps in the evaluation described in this Chapter, instead of the TC/ CEC, AND directly record reasons and decisions in the file itself (or online, where such systems exist).

He May ask for a technical suitability report from user departments if needed.

In procurements above such a threshold — including nomination and SLTE modes — evaluation is to be done by a Tender Committee/ CEC.

7.7.2Composition

1. The three-member norm: TC/ CEC should normally comprise three members, including:

  • A finance member(nominated by the Financial Adviser)C: "Financial Adviser or his representative"; and
  • A representative of the user

— as per soPP.

2. SIZE: "TC/ CEC should not be large/ very large, as it May slow down the evaluation process."

however, suitable domain/ technical experts May be included in the committee to render assistance in the evaluation of the bids(W adds: "from the user department (or otherwise)").

3. The two independence Rules under Rule 173(xxii) of GFR 2017:

4. The convenor: THE representative of the Procuring Entity will work as the convenor (member Secretary) Of the TC/ CEC.

5. Constitution at one level higher, and pre-nomination: "tender committees May be constituted with the approval of one level higher than the Competent Authority."

"it is advantageous for organisations doing procurements regularly to have pre-nominated (by designation) tender committees for various categories and value-slabs of procurements, included in the SoPP."

6. C — the convenor's additional duty at the outset: "he shall distribute the RfP to the CEC members and request them to familiarise themselves with the characteristics and requirements of the assignment, the selection procedures, and the evaluation criteria and sub-criteria. The convenor of the CEC should also call a meeting of the CEC members to review any questions they May have on the evaluation principles, procedures, and objectives."

7.7.3The Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) — the Six Approval Stages

the Competent Authority's written approval must be taken at various stages of procurement, before proceeding ahead — e.g.:

#Stage requiring CA's written approval
iadministrative/ financial sanctions/ issue of tender (G adds: including Tender Documents)
iiapproval of techno-commercial evaluation and opening of price bids In case of a two-packet system (G adds: and similar approvals in case of PQB modes and Two-Stage Tendering)
iiiprice negotiations, if permitted under specified circumstances
ivapproval of financial evaluation and award of contract To the selected bidder(s)
vcancellation of procurement and re-tendering
viin some particular decisions during contract execution — e.g., the exercise of the option clause or any variation beyond the laid-down percentage · forfeiture/ release of performance securities · premature termination/ foreclosure of contract, etc.

The minister/ board-level simplification (in all four):

the Procuring Entity should lay down a Schedule of Procurement Powers (SoPP) detailing such thresholds. It can also lay down the powers, jurisdiction, and composition of various levels of the Tender Committee and corresponding Competent Authority for various categories of procurement and different threshold values.

7.8 Role of the Tender Committee/ CEC

1. Custody: The member Secretary of the TC/ CEC (OR THE competent Authority, in direct acceptance cases) SHALL:

  • Receive the bids opened, along with other documents, from the Bid Opening Committee/ tender opening officials; and
  • BE responsible for the safe custody of the documents and for the processing involved at all steps in finalising the procurement.

2. Scope of responsibility — and note how much wider the CEC's is:

ManualThe Committee shall be responsible for
GALL aspects and stages of the tender evaluation
W, NCall aspects and stages of the evaluation of technical and financial proposals, negotiations, and final award of contract
Call aspects and stages of the consultant selection — that is: Evaluation of EoI · shortlisting of consultants · deciding tors · issuance of RfP · evaluation of technical and financial proposals · negotiations · and final selection of the consultant

3. The personal-discharge Rule — one of the most important governance provisions in the chapter:

4. The four pre-evaluation checks: After the proposals have been opened, the evaluation process can begin. Before starting the evaluation, the TC/ CEC members should ensure that they: A) have no conflict of interest(W adds: "as defined in the tender document"); B) understand the evaluation criteriaC: "understand the rating and scoring system"; C) have been provided with evaluation worksheets; and d) AGREE ON how to evaluate the proposals.

7.9 Handling Dissent among the Tender Committee/ CEC

1. Resolve by discussion, not by correspondence:

in cases where it is not possible to come to a consensus And differences persist amongst TC members:

  • THE reasons for dissent of a member should be recorded in a balanced manner, along with the majority's views on the dissent note;
  • THE final recommendations should be that of the majority view.
  • "however, such situations should be rare."
  • the Competent Authority (ca) can overrule such dissent notes after recording reasons for doing so clearly. His decision would be final.

2. Where the ca disagrees with the committee — the send-back procedure:

7.10 Independence, Impartiality, Confidentiality and 'No Conflict of Interest' at All Stages of Evaluation of Bids

1. No communication with bidders: Members of the TC/ CEC should not have any conflict of interest, and should not directly engage in any communication with bidders — from the date of their appointment to the date on which the contract is awarded.

2. Confidentiality and its one exception:

Information relating to the evaluation of bids and the committee's deliberations Should be confidential, and not be shared with persons not officially connected with the process — until the award of the contract is notified to the successful firm.

3. The declaration requirement — extended to non-members:

"all technical, commercial and finance officials who have contributed to the techno-commercial or financial evaluation of bids — even though they May not be part of the TC — should:

  • Deal with the procurement in an independent, impartial manner;
  • Have no conflict of interest with any of the bidders involved;
  • Maintain confidentiality of the information processed during the evaluation process and not allow it to reach any unauthorised person."

they should sign a declaration at the end of their reports/ notings Stating that:

TC members May also make such a declaration at the end of their reports.

4. Handling external references, grievances and directives during processing:

7.11 Timely Processing of Tenders

(Rule 174(i) of GFR 2017)

1. The 90 → 60 → 75 day Rule:

2. The CPWD example — maximum days for award of contract W:

Procuring OfficerLimit of procurement (Rs. crore)Maximum days for decision for award of contract
Assistant Engineer0.0610 DAYS
Executive Engineer1.0015 DAYS
Superintending Engineer10.0030 DAYS
Chief Engineer30.0045 DAYS
Additional Director General and aboveMore than 30.0060 DAYS

3. The published Schedule and the accountability Rule:

"the complete time Schedule of finalising the tender process — from the date of issuing the tender to the date of issuing the contract — should be published in the bid documents."

4. The fixed weekly TC meeting day:

7.12 Extension of Bid/ Tender Validity Period

(Rule 174(iii) of GFR 2017)

1. The primary obligation: The entire process of scrutiny and evaluation of tenders, preparation of ranking statement and notification of awardmust be done expeditiously and within the original tender validity period.

2. The extension procedure and its five Rules:

If, due to some exceptional and unforeseen reasons, the purchase organisation is unable to decide on the placement of the contract within the original validity period, it May:

  • Preferably request — before expiry of the original validity periodall the responsive tenderers To extend their tenders up to a specified period;
  • While asking for such extension, the tenderers are also to be asked to extend their offers "as it is", without any changes therein;
  • They May also be requested to extend the validity of the EMD for the corresponding additional period (which is to be specified in the request);
  • "a tenderer May not agree to such a request — and this will not lead to forfeiture of its EMD";
  • But the tenderers who do agree to extend the validity are to do so without changing any terms, conditions, and so on, of their original tenders;
  • Reasons for seeking extension of bid validity should be recorded by the procuring officers.

3. TREATMENT OF "not-EXTENDED" AND "WITHDRAWN" BIDS — the three scenarios:

A) if it happens before completion of the techno-commercial evaluation:

B) if it happens after techno-commercial evaluation but before completion of financial bid evaluation:

c) in case of QCBS System of evaluation:

7.13 Consideration of Lack of Competition in OTE/ GTE and LTE

(Rule 173(xx) and (xxi) of GFR 2017)

1. What counts as adequate competition:

"the number of bids received which can indicate adequate competition depends on the parameters of procurement (value, specification, mode of procurement, tendering system, etc.) and the market situation. This has to be judged by the Tender Committee."

2. THE 'single offer' situation — and the express criticism of routine re-tendering:

Sometimes, against advertised/ limited tender cases, the Procuring Entity May not receive a sufficient number of bids And/ or — after analysing the bids — ends up with only one responsive bid — a situation referred to as 'Single offer'.

The pre-retender check: "before re-tendering, the Procuring Entity is first to check whether — while floating/ issuing the enquiry — all necessary requirements and formalities such as standard conditions, industry-friendly specification, wide publicity, sufficient time for bidding, and so on, were fulfilled. If not, a fresh enquiry is to be issued after rectifying the deficiencies."

the three conditions under which a single-bid process is valid:

3. The powers and the fallback: However, as far as delegation/ Schedule of Procurement Powers is concerned, the Competent Authority would be as in single tender mode. In case of price not being reasonable, negotiations (being L1) or re-tender May be considered as justifiable.

4. Unsolicited offers against LTEs — the general rule and its three exceptions:

"unsolicited offers against ltes should be ignored; However, ministries/ departments should evolve a system by which interested firms can enlist and bid in the next round of tendering."

however, under the following exceptional circumstances, these May be considered for acceptance at the next higher level of competency: A) inadequate competition; B) non-availability of suitable quotations from registered contractors; C) urgent demand, and capacity/ capability of the firm offering the unsolicited [offer] being known, etc.

7.14 Tender Committee/ CEC Recommendations and Report

1. What the committee must recommend:

The TC has to make formal recommendations for the award of the contract to the bidder:

  • Whose bid has been determined to be substantially responsive; and
  • THE lowest evaluated bid;
  • Provided further that the bidder is determined to be qualified to perform the contract satisfactorily, and his credentials have been verified.

2. The good-practice Rule on deviations:

"it is a good practice that TC should spell out salient terms and conditions of the offer(s) recommended for acceptance.

these recommendations are submitted for approval to the tender accepting authority.

3. No separate fa consultation — and the four-fold responsibility of the ca:

4. After the acceptance of these recommendations by the tender accepting authority, the letter (notification) of award (LoA) can be issued.

7.15 Preliminary Examination

7.15.1Unresponsive Bids

The definition: "a substantively responsive bid is complete and conforms to the tender document's essential terms, conditions, and requirements — without substantive deviation, reservation, or omission."

"only substantively responsive bids shall be considered for further evaluation. Other bids shall be treated as unresponsive and ignored. All bids received shall first be scrutinised to identify unresponsive bids, if any."

the nine grounds on which a bid May be declared unresponsive:

#Ground
1the bid is not in the prescribed format, OR IS unsigned, OR not signed as per the stipulations In the tender document
2the required EMD has not been provided, OR exemption from EMD is claimed without acceptable proof of exemption
3the bidder is not eligible to participate As per the eligibility criteria laid down (including conflict of interest and other provisions of CIPP). In case procurement is on a limited tender basis, or where procurement is restricted to pre-approved vendors, it should be especially ensured that there is no conflict of interest
4G ONLYthe bidder has *quoted for goods manufactured by a different firm, without the required authority letter from the proposed manufacturer
5the bid departs from the essential requirements Specified in the tender document (for example, the bidder has not agreed to give the required performance security)
6against a Schedule in the list of requirements, the bidder has not quoted for the entire requirement as specified in that Schedule.
Worked example: "in a schedule, it has been stipulated that the bidder will SUPPLY the equipment, INSTALL and COMMISSION it, and also TRAIN the purchaser's operators for operating the equipment. The bidder has, however, quoted only for the supply of the equipment."
7bidder has quoted conditional bids, or more than one bid, or alternative bidsunless permitted explicitly in the tender document
8THE bid validity is shorter than the required period. However, in case of STE/ PAC procurement *(NC: "in case of STE procurement")*, shorter bid validity May be accepted
9non-submission, or submission of illegible scanned copies Of stipulated documents/ declarations(G adds: "if so stipulated in the Tender Document")
10NC ONLYthe bid has unresolved substantive deviations

7.15.2Non-conformities between Figures and Words — the Four Correction Rules

"sometimes, non-conformities/ errors are also observed in responsive tenders between the quoted prices in figures and words. This situation normally does not arise in the case of e-procurement."

#DiscrepancyWhich prevails
1between the unit price And the total price(the total obtained by multiplying the unit price by the quantity)THE unit price shall prevail, and the total price corrected accordingly
2an error in a TOTAL Corresponding to the addition or subtraction of sub-totalsTHE sub-totals shall prevail, and the total shall be corrected
3between WORDS AND figuresTHE amount in words shall prevail
4The procedural consequencesuch a discrepancy in an offer should be conveyed to the bidder, asking him to respond by a target date. If the bidder does not agree to the Procuring Entity's observation, the bid is liable to be rejected

7.15.3Discrepancies between Original and Additional/ Scanned Copies of a Bid

"normally, as far as feasible, no submission of original documents in physical format should be asked for in e-procurement — other than: Cost of tender documents (if any), Bid Security, and statutory certificates (if any)."

in e-procurement, there could be discrepancies between the uploaded scanned copies and the originals submitted by the bidder. In off-line tenders, discrepancies May be observed between the original copy and other copies of the responsive bids.

this issue is also to be addressed with the bidder in the same manner as above, and subsequent actions shall be taken accordingly.

7.15.4Deviations, Reservations and Omissions — Substantive or Minor

1. The three definitions:

TermDefinition
"Deviation"IS A departure from the requirements Specified in the tender document
"Reservation"IS THE setting of limiting conditions, or withholding from complete acceptance Of the requirements specified in the tender document
"Omission"IS THE failure to submit part, or all, of the information or documentation Required in the tender document

2. The three-limb test for a substantive Deviation:

3. The consequence and its one exception: "the decision of the Procuring Entity shall be final in this regard. Bids with substantive deviations shall be rejected as non-responsive."

4. THE "better than asked for" RULE — a provision often missed:

5. Examples of minor issues: During the preliminary examination, some minor infirmity and/ or irregularity and/ or non-conformity May also be found in some bids. Such minor issues could be:

6. Considering minor deviations — and the judicial precedent cited:

the four-fold test for accepting a minor deviation: "the Procuring Entity reserves the right to accept bids with such minor issues — provided they:

  • Do not constitute any substantive deviation;
  • Do not have a fiscal impact;
  • Do not prejudice, or affect the ranking order of the bidders; And
  • do not grant the bidder any undue advantage vis-à-vis other bidders and the Procuring Entity."

wherever necessary, the Procuring Entity shall convey its observation on such 'minor' issues to the bidder. If the bidder does not reply by the specified date, or gives an evasive reply without clarifying the point at issue in clear terms — that bid shall be liable to be rejected as non-responsive.

7.15.5Clarification of Bids / Shortfall Documents

1. The clarification procedure and its three absolute bars:

During the evaluation and comparison of bids, the purchaser May — at his discretion — ask the bidder for clarifications on the bid.

The request for clarification shall be given in writing by registered/ speed post/ courier/ email, asking the bidder to respond by a specified date — mentioning therein that if the bidder does not comply or respond by the date, his tender will be liable to be rejected.

2. The shortfall-documents Rule — the "historical documents" test:

provision May be made by e-procurement portals for requesting shortfall documents from the bidders. The system May further allow shortfall documents to be taken from any bidders only once after the technical bid opening.

The qualification-documents Rule — and the crucial worked example:

7.15.6Evaluation of Eligibility

the Procuring Entity shall determine — to its satisfaction — whether the bidders are eligible as per the eligibility criteria in the tender document To participate in the tender process.

Tenders that do not meet the required eligibility criteria prescribed shall be rejected as unresponsive.

Appendix to Chapter 7 — Part a: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter numberG: Ch. 7 · W: Ch. 6 · C: Ch. 8 · NC: Ch. 7
2Chapter titleG/NC: *Bid Evaluation and Award of Contract · W: *Evaluation of Bids and Award of Worksuffix · C: RfP Evaluation and Award of Contract
3Whole additional Chapter — Shortlisting of Consultants, EoIC only (its Chapter 7)
4the evaluating bodyg/w/nc: *Tender Committee (TC) · c: *Consultancy Evaluation Committee (CEC)
5Scope of the Committee's responsibilityG: all aspects of tender evaluation · W/NC: adds negotiations and final award · C: adds evaluation of EoI, shortlisting, deciding ToRs, and issuance of RfP
6EoI shortlist sizeC only: minimum three (Rule 184 GFR) and generally not more than eight; if more qualify, restrict to eight based on higher Average Turnover
7EoI shortlist validityC only: Six months if not specified; beyond 6 months, better to re-invite EoI
8EoI minimum qualifying marksC only: normally 75%
9Start-up relaxation at EoIC only: up to λ = 20%
10The turnover-multiple criticism (5–10 times "appears high"); upper cap so as not to restrict competition to "the big four or five Consultancy Firms"C ONLY
11Key Experts not evaluated at EoI stageC ONLY
12"Qualifications leasing" riskC ONLY
13Direct acceptance thresholdG/C/NC: Rs 50 lakh · W: "normally LTE threshold of Rs 50 lakhs"
14Rule 173(xxii) extended to the ACCEPTING AUTHORITYW + C(G states it only for committee members)
15Express urging to apply Rule 173(xxii) below the threshold tooG + C
16Convenor's duty to distribute the RfP and call a familiarisation meetingC ONLY
17"Understand the evaluation criteria" vs "understand the rating and scoring system"G/W/NC vs C
18The large-envelope custody safeguard for unopened financial bidsW + C + NC
19Comparative statement — vetting by Finance not required if prepared by the e-Procurement portalW ONLY
20The permitted evaluation factors list, and "no criteria that cannot be verified OR are not stated in the contract"W ONLY
21Caution that preferences must not result in single-vendor selectionG ONLY
22CPWD table of maximum days for award (10/15/30/45/60 days)W ONLY
23"Notify at least one day every week for TC meeting; no leave or tour on such days"W(also in C/NC in similar terms)
24Print the tender schedule on the inside cover of the Procurement FileW
25Withdrawn L-1 bid → must re-tender; and such L1 price not to be taken as precedence for price estimates or reasonablenessCommon — but the QCBS/H-1 variant is in W, C, NC
26Withdrawn/ not-extended H-1 bid in QCBS → must re-tenderW + C + NC(no QCBS in Goods)
27Ground 4 for unresponsiveness — quoting for goods of a different manufacturer without authority letterG ONLY
28Ground 10 — "unresolved substantive deviations"nc only
29Shorter bid validity acceptable in STE/ PACG · NC says only "STE"(consistent with Works and NC treatment of PAC)
30Bids with deviations may be accepted in STE/ PAC with CFA approvalG
31The amendment-Bank-Guarantee judicial precedent on minor irregularityG + W + NC
32Shortfall documents may be taken only ONCE after technical bid openingG(stated expressly)
33"No new supply order should be asked for to qualify the bidder"G + W
34Unsolicited offers against LTE — three exceptional circumstances for acceptance at next higher levelW(fullest statement)
35The express criticism of routine re-tendering on single bids, and the three validity conditionsW(fullest); echoed in G/C/NC

end of Chapter 7 — part a

Part IIEvaluation, Negotiation and Award

Merging: Goods Ch. 7 (paras 7.4–7.8) · Works Ch. 6 (paras 6.4–6.6) · Consultancy Ch. 8 (paras 8.4–8.8) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 7 (paras 7.3.4–7.6)

Concordance for Chapter 7 — Part B

UnifiedTopicGoodsWorksCSNCS
7.16Evaluation of Eligible Techno-commercial Bids7.4.26.4.18.37.3.4
7.17Evaluation of the Quality — Technical Proposals8.4
7.18General Norms for Ranking of Financial Bids7.56.4.28.5.17.4.1
7.19Least Cost Selection (LCS)(the default)6.4.38.5.27.4.2
7.20Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)6.4.58.5.37.4.4
7.21Single Source Selection (SSS)6.4.48.5.47.4.3
7.22Fixed Budget Selection (FBS)8.5.5
7.23GTE Tenders — evaluation7.5.26.4.68.5.67.4.5
7.24Concurrent Application of MSE and MII Policies7.5.18.5.87.4.6
7.25Evaluation in Rate Contracts7.5.3
7.26Variation of Quantities at the Time of Award7.6.3
7.27Option Clause7.6.4
7.28Splitting of Contracts/ Parallel Contracts7.6.5
7.29Reasonableness of Prices7.6.66.4.77.4.7
7.30Consideration of Abnormally Low Bids7.6.76.4.88.5.77.4.8
7.31Cartel Formation/ Pool Rates/ Bid Rigging7.6.86.4.98.5.77.4.9
7.32Negotiations for Reduction of Prices7.6.96.4.108.5.77.4.10
7.33Negotiations to Freeze Description of Service8.6
7.34Cancellation of Procurement/ Rejection of All Bids/ Re-tender7.6.116.4.118.5.97.4.11
7.35LoA to Successful Bidder7.7.16.5.18.7.17.5.1
7.36Publication of Award; Return of EMD7.7.26.5.28.7.27.5.2
7.37Performance Security7.7.36.5.37.5.3
7.38Acknowledgement and Execution of Contract7.7.46.5.47.5.4
7.39Framing of Contract7.7.56.5.57.5.5
7.40Audit Trails — Procurement Records7.7.66.5.67.5.6
7.41Risks and Mitigations7.86.68.87.6

7.16 Evaluation of Eligible Techno-commercial Bids

7.16.1Evaluation of Qualification Criteria

1. What is ascertained: In evaluating the techno-commercial bid, conformity to the eligibility/ qualification criteria, technical specifications, and quality assurance; And commercial conditions of the offered goods to those in the tender document is ascertained.

Additional factors incorporated in the tender document shall also be considered in the manner indicated therein.

This determination will, inter alia, consider the bidder's financial, technical, and production capabilities To satisfy all the Procuring Entity's requirements as incorporated in the tender document.

Such determination shall be based upon scrutiny and examination of all relevant data and details submitted by the bidder in its bid, as well as such other allied information as deemed appropriate by the Procuring Entity.

2. Start-up relaxation: The condition of prior turnover and prior experience May be relaxed for start-ups (Only to start-ups recognised by DPIIT), subject to meeting quality & technical specifications and making suitable provisions in the tender document (Rule 173(i) of GFR 2017). Such relaxation is not optional but has to be ensured — except for items related to public safety, health, critical security operations and equipment, where adequate justification exists.

7.16.2Evaluation of Technical Suitability

THE description, specifications, drawings, and other technical terms and conditions Are examined by the TC in general, and by a technical member of the TC in particular.

the alternative-offers Rule: "the tender document should clearly State whether alternative offers/ makes/ models would be considered or not — and, in the absence of an express statement to the effect, these should not be allowed."

an important document is the exceptions/ deviation form submitted by the bidder. It is important to judge whether an exception/ deviation is minor or major. Minor exceptions/ deviations May be waived following the criteria in part a, Para 7.15.4-6.

7.16.3Evaluation of Bids involving Samples/ DemosG

"evaluation of techno-commercial bids should not be done based on the evaluation of samples or demos — in view of the subjectivity involved."

The permitted alternative — the reference-sample route:

  • IF A purchaser's reference sample has been displayed for prospective bidders to illustrate the desired indeterminable characteristics, the contract should mention that final supplies must meet such characteristics of the reference sample, in addition to the specifications/ drawings.
  • If required, a provision for the submission of a pre-production sample matching the purchaser's reference sample by the successful bidder(s) May be stipulated before giving clearance for bulk production.

There should be a time limit for submission and approval of the pre-production sample.

7.16.4Evaluation of Commercial Conditions — and the SEVEN "CRITICAL PROVISIONS"

bidder must comply with all the commercial and other clauses Of the tender document.

The Procuring Entity shall evaluate the commercial conditions quoted by the bidder to confirm that all terms and conditions stipulated in the tender document have been accepted without substantive omissions/ reservations/ exception/ deviation.

ONLY minor deviations May be accepted/ allowed — provided these do not constitute substantive deviations.

7.16.5Declaration of Successful Bidders

1. Single-envelope tenders: In a single envelope/ cover tender, TC proceeds to evaluate the price aspects without a reference to ca at this stage.

2. Multiple-envelope tenders — the technical evaluation report:

The TC prepares a recommendation for a techno-commercial bid to declare successful bidders.

"for each proposal, the report also should substantiate the results of the evaluation and indicate technical weaknesses or deviations from the terms set out in the tender documents — and comment on their acceptability."

it should review the tc's evaluation of each proposal (On technical, contractual, and other aspects).

The ca should decide how any acceptable deviation in each proposal should be handled during contract formulation, in case that proposal is ranked first.

3. Announcement and the two timelines:

After the approval of ca, the results of the techno-commercial bid evaluation are to be announced (including informing the failed bidders).

EventTimeline
Return of Bid securities of unsuccessful bidders of the first stagewithin 30 days of declaration of result of the first stage (i.e., technical evaluation)
Opening of FINANCIAL BIDSDate/ time and place (or on the portal in e-procurement) ANNOUNCED, in the presence of technically suitable bidders who are willing to attend. Such a date should be two to five (5) days after the announcement

7.17 Evaluation of the Quality — Technical Proposals [C ONLY]

7.17.1Responsiveness to the ToR

The CEC shall evaluate each proposal on the basis of its responsiveness to the ToR.

Proposals not responding to the ToR fully and properly will be summarily rejected as being non-responsivebefore taking up the appraisal of the technical proposal for evaluation of quality.

7.17.2Criteria and Sub-criteria — the Four Heads and the Absolute-Grading Rule

1. The four criteria, totalling 100 marks: CEC shall evaluate the quality of the technical proposal by awarding marks so as to make the total maximum technical score of 100 (one hundred), FOR:

A) the consultant's relevant experience for the assignment;

b) THE quality of the methodology Proposed;

c) THE qualifications of the key staff PROPOSED; and

d) capability for transfer of knowledge (if relevant).

2. The model scheme of maximum/ minimum marks:

Rated CriteriaRange of Percentage for Score
1. Consultancy firm's experience relevant to assignment5–10%
2. Proposed approach, methodology, work plan, and understanding of requirements20–50%
3. Qualification and adequacy of experience of key staff30–60%
4. Transfer of knowledge, if relevant\*0–10%
overall100%

The four explanatory Rules:

  • "the weight given to the firm's experience can be relatively modest — since this criterion has already been considered when short-listing the consultant."
  • "more weight shall be given to the methodology in the case of more complex assignments (for example, multidisciplinary feasibility or management studies)."
  • "evaluation of only the key personnel is recommended. Since key personnel ultimately determine the quality of performance, more weight shall be assigned to this criterion if the proposed assignment is complex."
  • "the CEC shall review the qualifications and experience of proposed key personnel in their curricula vitae — which must be accurate, complete, and signed by an authorised official of the consultant *and* the individual proposed."
  • "the experience criteria mentioned in point 1 above holds true for a consultancy firm and not for an individual consultant."

3. SUB-CRITERIA — kept to the minimum, with worked examples:

"the CEC shall normally divide the above criteria into sub-criteria. However, the number of sub-criteria should be kept to the minimum that is considered essential."

CriterionSuggested sub-criteria and weights
methodologya) understanding of ToR — 30% weightage
b) acceptability and detailing of methodology and work plan — *50% weight

c) innovation, if it is important — 20% weightage*
suitability of the key professionalsa) EDUCATIONAL QUALIFICATIONS — *20% weightage
b) professional experience in the required area of assignment — *80% weight

the simplified alternative: "similar to in LCS and EoI, a simplified evaluation criteria laying down minimum qualifying fail-pass benchmarks for each criteria/ sub-criteria (instead of marking schemes) May also be used in appropriate cases. All offers that pass the qualifying benchmarks are declared as technically qualified and their financial bids are opened."

7.17.3Rating/ Grading Schemes to Mitigate Subjectivity

1. The problem stated:

2. Why slabs rather than a full range:

"precise and exact markings of criteria and sub-criteria specified in technical evaluation — especially of unquantifiable criteria, e.g., evaluation of methodology — May neither be feasible nor warranted, especially when there is bound to be variation among marks by different members of CEC.

3. The five-grade rating scale — reproduced in full:

RatingAssessmentDetailed Evaluation (in case of unquantifiable Criteria)Marks
Avery goodThe consultants have outstanding, advanced expertise in specific problem areas of the assignment, that can promise an excellent execution of the assignment. The consultants' staff includes top experts in the field. The consultants are considered world-class specialists in the approaches and methodologies dealing with specific issues in the assignment. The consultants operate according to well-established quality management (ISO 9002 etc.) procedures.Full marks
BGOODThe consultants have extensive experience in the field of the assignment, and have worked in regions and sectors with similar physical and institutional conditions, including similar critical issues. Permanent staff are adequate and highly qualified. The consultants have experience with advanced approaches and methodologies.80% of full marks
CsatisfactoryThe consultants have experience in the field of assignments similar to the one being considered — but have not dealt with critical issues specific to it(such as, for instance, delicate social or environmental issues). The consultants are experienced in the use of standard approaches and methodologies. The consultants' permanent staff are adequate.60% of full marks
DunsatisfactoryThe consultant has experience which is not considered adequate for the quality needed by the project.30% of full marks
Enot relevantThe consultant's experience has no, or little, relevance to the project under consideration.10% of full marks

4. The first reading — without scoring:

5. The grading system must be defined before The proposals are opened:

After the review, the CEC meets to define the grades of the rating system to be adopted (if not detailed in the RfP), according to the criteria and sub-criteria set out in the rfP.

"to discourage subjectivity and avoid the use of points and fractions of points, the rating system provides a few grades (from three to four) for each criterion and sub-criterion."

"minimum qualifying marks or relative qualifying method for quality of the technical proposal will be prescribed and indicated in the RfP."

the three reasons why undefined grading distorts evaluation:

a) "evaluators May differ, even widely, in their definition, understanding, or interpretation of the same criterion — and also because of their subjective experience and understanding of the ToR";

b) "disparities in evaluators' relative generosity or severity in judgment and ratings can easily be magnified by the lack of common definitions of the requirements to be considered for each criterion and sub-criterion";

c) "large differences in scores caused by inadequate understanding of the ToR or improper use of the evaluation criteria and sub-criteria are difficult to reconcile and explain."

7.17.4Individual Scoring of Proposals

"CEC members should carry out the evaluation independently and score the proposal based on the rating criteria.

The CEC evaluation should be based on the proposal as submitted. Under no circumstances can the CEC request information or clarifications that May change the proposals. Issues to be clarified with the selected consultant will have to be discussed during negotiations.

Individual evaluators' results are recorded on pre-established worksheets.

After each member has independently rated all criteria and sub-criteria, it is good practice to read each proposal again — to ensure that scores reliably reflect the quality of the proposal."

7.17.5Joint Review and Mitigation

1. The reconciliation procedure:

2. The minimum qualifying mark and the debriefing duty:

"eventually, for each of the technical proposals, the CEC should calculate the average of the scores allocated to each criterion by all members, establish the technical ranking of the proposals, identify the best, and propose it for award.

The evaluation also establishes whether a proposal passes the minimum qualifying mark (or technical score — normally 75 (seventy-five)) provided for in the RfP.

If one or more proposals fail to meet the minimum qualifying mark, both individual and joint assessments must be carefully reviewed and justified.

Short-listed consultants are usually discouraged when their proposals are rejected — particularly when they are only a few points below the minimum mark; Therefore, the Procuring Entity should be prepared to debrief consultants to explain the evaluation of their proposals."

7.18 General Norms for Ranking of Financial Bids

1. The basis — total outgo from the buyer's pocket:

Unless otherwise stipulated, evaluation of the financial bids shall be on the price criteria only. Financial bids of all techno-commercially suitable bids are evaluated and ranked to determine the lowest-priced bidder, based on the total outgo from the buyer's pocket — including:

2. Evaluation of multiple schedules/ items/ destinations — the three cases G:

CaseHow ranking is done
a) The list of requirements contains more than one Schedule/ packageresponsive, technically suitable bids shall be evaluated and compared separately for each Schedule. The bid for a Schedule will not be considered if the complete list of goods in that Schedule is not included in the bid. However, bidders have the option to quote for any one or more schedules, and to offer *unconditional discounts for individual schedules*
b) There is only a list of items without grouping into schedulesranking shall be done for each item separately. Bidder has the option to quote for any one or more items and to offer unconditional discounts for individual items. HOWEVER, bidder shall quote for all the destinations included in an item quoted
c) There is only one item with several destinationsranking shall be done separately for each destination included in that item; the Bidder has the option to quote for any one or more destinations, and to offer unconditional discounts for individual destinations

discounts as above shall be considered for deciding the lowest evaluated bid. However, any conditional discounts are not considered for the ranking.

3. No loading unless pre-announced: "unless explicitly announced beforehand in the tender documents, the quoted price should not be loaded based on deviations in commercial conditions. If it is decided to incorporate such clauses, these should be unambiguous and clear — and thereafter, there should be no relaxation during evaluation."

Additionally, while purchasing sophisticated and costly equipment, machinery, and so on, the procuring entity also gives special importance to factors such as high-quality performance, environmentally friendly features, low running cost, low maintenance cost. To take care of this, relevant details, and the criteria adopted to assess the benefit of such features, are to be clearly stipulated in the tender document, so that the bidders are aware of it and quote accordingly.

4. The comparison basis: Unless otherwise stipulated, the comparison of the responsive bids shall be on total outgo from the Procuring Entity's pocket — to be paid to the supplier or any third party, including all elements of costs As per the terms of the proposed contract.

Therefore, it should normally be on a CIF/ FOR destination basis, duly delivered, commissioned, as the case May be: A) goods manufactured in India, or goods of foreign origin already located in India — GST and any other duties/ levies contractually payable (to the bidder) are to be added; B) goods of foreign origin offered from abroad — customs duty and other similar import duties/ taxes contractually payable are to be added.

5. Purchase preferences: As per policies of the Government from time to time, the purchaser reserves his option to give price/ purchase preferences as indicated in the tender document.

6. VARIABLE-PRICE BIDS — the "as on deadline" rule: If the bids have been invited on a variable price basis, they will be evaluated, compared, and ranked based on the position prevailing on the deadline of bid submission — and not based on any future date. If a bidder submits a firm price quotation against the requirement of a variable price quotation, that bid shall be prima facie acceptable and considered further — taking the price variation asked for by the bidder as nil.

7. Tie at the l-1 POSITION — the four-step tie-breaker G:

"rarely, there May be a tie at the lowest bid (L-1) position between two or more start-up/ non-start-up bidders.

it must be first determined whether it is a case of cartel formation or anti-competitive practices — and if so, it shall be dealt with accordingly.

If this is not a case of cartel formation, the decision will be taken in the following manner:"

StepRule
iif one of the L1 bidders is an MSE owned by sc/st or a woman entrepreneur, then the 25% quantity order reserved for MSEs will be placed on that MSE, subject to fulfilment of other tender conditions
iiif one of the L1 bidders is an MSE, other than an MSE owned by sc/st or a woman entrepreneur, then an order shall be placed on such MSE bidders
iiiin all other scenarios, the order shall be placed on the L1 bidder having a higher turnover in the previous financial year. In case there is a tie at L-1 between only start-up bidders and none of them has past turnover, the order will be placed on the start-up that was registered earlier with DPIIT
ivfor tenders issued through the GeM PORTAL: THE tie-breaker methodology available on the GeM portal is to be followed

8. Ambiguous price bids: "if the price bid is ambiguous, so that it May very well lead to two equally valid total price amounts — then the bid should be treated as unresponsive."

9. Suo motu and conditional discounts after bid opening — the two-limbed Rule:

10. C — additional financial-opening Rules for consultancy:

  • The financial proposals shall be opened publicly in the presence of representatives of the technically qualified consultants who choose to attend. The evaluation committee demonstrably verifies that the financial proposals have remained sealed And then opens them.
  • THE name of the consultant, quality scores, and proposed prices shall be read aloud and recorded. No modification to financial proposals is permitted. When electronic submission is used, this information shall be posted online.
  • The arithmetic-correction Rule differs by contract type:
Contract typeRule
Time-based contractANY arithmetical errors shall be corrected, and prices shall be adjusted if they fail to reflect all inputs That are included in the respective technical proposals
lump-sum contractthe consultant is deemed to have included all prices In its financial proposal — so neither arithmetical correction nor any other price adjustment shall be made
  • for the purpose of evaluation, the total cost shall include all taxes and duties for which the Procuring Entity makes payments to the consultant, and other reimbursable expenses — such as travel, translation, report printing, or secretarial expenses.
  • THE GST misclassification Rule: "the offers shall be evaluated based on the GST rate quoted by each bidder… the Procuring Entity shall not be responsible for any misclassification of HSN number or incorrect GST rate if quoted by the bidder. Any increase in GST rate due to misclassification of HSN number shall have to be absorbed by the consultant."
  • if GST is quoted extra, but with the provision that it shall be charged as applicable at the time of delivery, the offer shall be evaluated for comparison purposes by loading the maximum existing rate of GST for the product/ HSN code.

7.19 Least Cost Selection (LCS)

Under the LCS procedures, the financial proposals will be ranked in terms of their total evaluated cost.

THE least cost proposal will be ranked as L-1, and the next higher and so on will be ranked as L-2, L-3, etc.

THE least cost proposal (L-1) will be considered for award of contract.

C:The CEC will put up a report on financial evaluation of the technically qualified consultants to the competent finance authority, along with the recommendation that the least cost proposal (L-1) can be approved/ invited for negotiation and for final award of contract.

7.20 Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS)

(Rule 192 of GFR 2017)

7.20.1The Qualifying Benchmark

in QCBS selection, minimum qualifying marks — normally 70–80 (seventy to eighty) out of a maximum of 100 marks — as a qualifying benchmark for quality of the technical proposal shall be prescribed and indicated in the tender document, along with a scheme for allotting marks for various technical criteria/ attributes.

Bids scoring less than the minimum threshold shall not be considered for further evaluation.

7.20.2The Two Scores and the Weighted Total

ScoreHow computed
technical/ quality scorethe proposal with the highest technical marks shall be given a score of 100, and other proposals given technical scores proportional to their marks w.r.t. The highest technical marks
financial scorethe proposal with the lowest cost May be given a financial score of 100, and other proposals given financial scores inversely proportional to their prices w.r.t. The lowest offer

THE total score shall be obtained by weighing the quality and cost scores and adding them up.

The proposal obtaining the highest total combined score will be ranked as H-1, followed by H-2, H-3, etc. THE H-1 proposal shall be recommended for award of contract(C adds: "will be invited for negotiations, if required").

7.20.3The QCBS Formula

AN evaluated bid score (b) Will be calculated for each responsive bid using the following formula — which permits a comprehensive assessment of the bid price and the technical merits of each bid:

SymbolMeaning
Cevaluated bid price
C_lowTHE lowest Of all evaluated bid prices among responsive bids
TTHE total technical score Awarded to the bid
T_highthe technical score achieved by the bid that was scored best Among all responsive bids
XTHE weightage for the price As specified in the bds/ tender document

the bid with the best evaluated bid score (b) among responsive bids shall be the most advantageous bid.

7.20.4the Worked Examples — and How the Same Numbers Produce Different Winners

A. THE CONSULTANCY EXAMPLE — weightage 70 technical: 30 costC

Minimum qualifying marks for technical qualification: 75. Three proposals A, B, C received.

StepABC
Technical marks awarded758090
Technical points (T/T_high)75/90 = 8380/90 = 8990/90 = 100
Quoted priceRs. 100Rs. 104Rs. 106
Financial points (C_low/C)100/100 = 100100/104 = 96100/106 = 94
Combined score (Tech × 0.70 + Fin × 0.30)83×0.70 + 100×0.30 = 88.1089×0.70 + 96×0.30 = 91.10100×0.70 + 94×0.30 = 98.20
RANKH-3H-2H-1

B. THE NON-CONSULTANCY EXAMPLE — same data, weightage 30 technical: 70 costNC

StepABC
Technical marks awarded758090
Technical points8389100
Quoted priceRs. 100Rs. 104Rs. 106
Financial points1009694
Combined score (Tech × 0.30 + Fin × 0.70)83×0.30 + 100×0.70 = 9589×0.30 + 96×0.70 = 94100×0.30 + 94×0.70 = 96
RANKH-2H-3H-1

C. THE WORKS EXAMPLE — weightage 30 technical: 70 cost, with different dataW

Minimum qualifying marks: 75.

StepABC
Technical marks awarded807590
Normalised technical score80×100/90 = 88.8975×100/90 = 83.3390×100/90 = 100.00
Quoted priceRs. 120Rs. 100Rs. 105
Normalised financial score100×100/120 = 83.33100×100/100 = 100.00100×100/105 = 95.24
Combined score (Tech × 0.30 + Fin × 0.70)85.0095.0096.67
RANKH-3H-2H-1

7.20.5Additional QCBS Rules in Non-ConsultancyNC

a) the evaluation committee: "for evaluation, a suitable committee shall be constituted. However, members of the STC [Special Technical Committee] shall not be involved."

b) joint ventures: "joint ventures May be avoided in general in non-consultancy services — and particularly in the QCBS system."

c) the MII disapplication — an important consequence:

7.21 Single Source Selection (SSS)

the single source in case of SSS selection shall be called for further negotiation, if need be — after opening and evaluation of its financial proposals.

7.22 Fixed Budget Selection (FBS) [C ONLY]

Under FBS, the selection of the consultant shall be made by one of the following two methods:

A) the competitive quality-only method: By a competitive selection process, based only on quality, using specific marking criteria for quality in the manner indicated in Rule 192(i) of the GFR.

b) the empanelment method — for repetitive or multiple assignments: BY empanelling consultants for a period, using suitable eligibility/ qualification criteria.

7.23 GTE Tenders — Special Aspects of Financial EvaluationGfullest text

1. Currency of bid and conversion:

In GTE, foreign bidders have the flexibility to quote prices and receive payments in either Indian rupees or freely convertible currencies (US Dollars, Euros, Pound Sterling, Yen, other relevant currencies, or a combination).

However, prices for goods, works, or services (including agency commission) performed or sourced in India must be quoted and paid for in Indian rupees. Indian bidders are required to quote in INR only.

2. The loading sequence to arrive at DDP/ FOR destination cost — a step-by-step calculation:

A) taxes on import: Import of goods or services or both attracts integrated tax (IGST). The IGST rate and GST cess shall be applicable on the 'Customs assessable value' plus the 'basic customs duty applicable thereon'. The offers would be compared based on the principle of the total outgo from the Procuring Entity's pockets.

B) the dual-quotation requirement: "the foreign bidders are normally asked, in the tender documents, to quote both on a FAS/ FOB basis and also on a CFR/ CIF basis — duly indicating the break-up of prices for freight, insurance, and so on — with purchasers reserving the right to order on either basis. They should also indicate the customs tariff number and customs duty applicable in India."

the seven-step loading:

c) the comparison basis — two cases:

  • IF both Indian and foreign bidders have quoted, the comparison would be made based on DDP/ for/ FOT destination, including all applicable taxes and duties (on the principle of the total outgo from the Procuring Entity's pockets).
  • In case there are no domestic bidders, a comparison of offers can be made based on CIF/ landed costs — since the rest of the costs would be the same for all bidders.

7.24 Evaluation of Concurrent Application: MSE and Make in India Policies

"the concurrent application of the two procurement preference orders — i.e., the MSE procurement order of 2012 and the PPP-MII order — May create confusion for the procuring entities on how to evaluate the bids falling within the purview of both policies.

To bring predictability both to the procuring entities and bidders, DoE has issued guidelines in this regard." (OM No. F.1/4/2021-PPD dated 18.05.2023.)

7.25 Evaluation in Rate Contracts [G ONLY]

1. If stipulated in the tender documents that this is a tender process to enter "Rate Contract(s)", THEN additional clauses (including Performance Security, fall clause, etc.) shall be incorporated therein, and the evaluation would be done accordingly.

2. Procedures stipulated in this Chapter shall be applicable mutatis mutandis. The procedure for negotiations/ counter-offers and splitting of contracts (parallel contracts) is slightly different in Rate Contract. One-time or standing approval of the Secretary of the Department May be taken for this procedure.

3. The counter-offer procedure for parallel rate contracts:

A) initially, the Rate Contract would be awarded to the L-1 bidder. Then the price of L-1 shall be counter-offered to the higher-quoting responsive bidders (under intimation to L-1) — asking them to send their revised bids online on the e-procurement portal, to be opened at a specified place, date, and time. The L-1 bidder would be specifically informed that it May, if it desires, reduce its price, and send its revised bid accordingly.

The bidders who accept the counter-offered rate or a rate lower than that would be awarded parallel rate contracts. If L-1 bidder lowers its rate in its revised offer, the same would also be accepted with effect from that date, and its Rate Contract would be amended accordingly.

B) where L-1'S price is not reasonable: "price negotiation with the bidders should be severely discouraged. However, in the case where parallel rate contracts are necessary — even if the lowest responsive bidder (L-1) price is not reasonable — negotiation May be conducted with the L-1 bidder in the first instance.

c) all such parallel rate contracts would be released transparently and simultaneously.

4. The catalogue basis — for products that cannot be equitably compared:

If stipulated in the tender document, in the case of:

— where the design feature, performance parameters, etc., differ significantly among the products of different manufacturers — and even between different models of the same manufacturer — and where equitable comparison of prices is not feasible:

5. Period: A Rate Contract shall be for the period specified in the tender document — or one year if not so specified.

7.26 Variation of Quantities at the Time of Award [G ONLY]

7.27 Option Clause [G ONLY]

1. When and at what percentage:

Normally, for raw materials/ consumables of regular and year-on-year recurrent requirements, all tenders of value above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh — to take care of any change in the requirement during the currency of the contract — a plus/ minus option clause [normally 25 (twenty-five) per cent] May be incorporated in the tender document.

However, the ca May approve the inclusion of such a clause in lower denomination tenders, if such items have a history of frequent disruptions in the continuity of supplies.

The model clause:

2. The hedging caution: "the higher the option limit, the more uncertainty there is for the bidders in formulating their prices — and the more chance of hedging the prices quoted to take care of such uncertainties; Hence, the option limit should be carefully considered only in justifiable requirements."

3. There should be no option clause in development orders.

4. The ca-determination Rule: "the quantum of the option clause will be excluded from the value of tenders for the purpose of determining the level of ca in the original tender."

7.28 Splitting of Contracts / Parallel Contracts [G ONLY]

1. The default: "unless otherwise stipulated in TIS/ AITB, there shall be no parallel orders or splitting quantities among more than one bidder."

7.28.1Case A — Splitting WITHOUT prior declaration

"however, after due processing, if it is discovered that the quantity to be ordered is more than what the L1 bidder alone is capable of supplying, and there was no prior declaration in the tender documents to split the quantities — then the quantity being finally ordered May be distributed among the other bidders in a manner that is fair, transparent and equitable, based on objective data available in the bids (e.g., eligibility criteria, quantity/ delivery):

A) as far as feasible, counter-offer the L1 rate to such firms;

B) if distribution at the counter-offered rate is not feasible, then distribution May be done at the rates quoted by such bidders — if their rates are still within the zone of reasonableness."

7.28.2Case B — Splitting WITH prior declaration, and the 70:30 / 50:30:20 ratios

in case of:

— it May be advantageous to decide in advance to have more than one source of supply.

In such cases, a parallel contract clause should be added to the tender documents, clearly stating that the Procuring Entity reserves the right to split the contract quantity.

THE manner of deciding the relative share of L1 and the rest should be clearly defined, along with the minimum number of suppliers sought.

the variation latitude: "these ratios are approximate, and the Procuring Entity May marginally vary quantities to suit: Capacity/ past performance of the bidder · unit loads of packing or transportation · relative ranking of the bids · delivery period offered · existing load of bidder · and other similar factors affecting smooth supplies."

7.28.3The Five Allocation Guidelines (applicable in BOTH cases)

a) L1 should be awarded at least the percentage mentioned above, or his quoted quantity/ spare supply capacity — whichever is lower.

B) in case the quantity thus allocated for L1 is less than the prescribed percentage — higher percentages than those stipulated for L2 (and L3, and so on) May be considered To cover the entire tender quantity.

C) for the rest of the contract quantity, the lowest rate accepted will be counter-offered to the L2 party. On acceptance, the order will be placed on L2 for the respective (or increased) percentage or the quoted quantity/ spare supply capacity, whichever is lower — and so on to other higher bidders. In case of non-acceptance by L2, a similar offer shall be made to L3 and L4, and so on.

D) in case of shortfalls, the percentage of allocation of bidders in sequence May be proportionately increased — and, if unavoidable, more bidders than the minimum number specified May be considered, keeping the sanctity of ranking of bidders.

e) in case higher-priced bidders do not agree to match the L1 price, action as per case a(b) above May be considered.

7.28.4The Two Pre-conditions Before Splitting

"in either situation, before splitting the quantity, distribution shall be subject to:

I) purchase preference to MSME and 'class-i local supplier' (under Make in India order); And

ii) rates of L1 being considered reasonable — and if it is not reasonable, negotiation (if permissible) with the L1 party May be carried out before splitting of quantities, with the approval of the ca — otherwise there would be no alternative but to re-tender the requirement."

7.29 Reasonableness of Prices

1. The mandatory declaration: "in every recommendation of the TC for an award of contract, it must be declared that the rates recommended are reasonable."

if the rates received are considered abnormally low or unreasonably high, action May be taken as per Paras 7.30 and 7.32 respectively — or, as per Para 7.34, reject any or all bids; Abandon/ cancel the tender process and issue another tender.

2. No blind reliance on the estimate: "in large-value tenders, blind reliance on the cost estimate is not recommended for assessing reasonableness. More than one method of estimation of cost May be used to triangulate a reasonable price."

3. The seven cautions on using last purchase price (lpp):

Where there is no estimated cost, a comparison with the last purchase price (lpp — the price paid in the latest successful contract) is the basis for judging reasonableness. The following points May be kept in mind:

#Caution
aTHE basic price, taxes, duties, transportation charges, packing and forwarding charges should be indicated separately — and the comparison should be on basic price
bwhere the firm holding the lpp contract has defaulted, the fact should be highlighted — and the price paid against the latest contract placed prior to the defaulting lpp contract, where supplies have been completed, should be used
cwhere the supply against the lpp contract is yet to commence (i.e., delivery is not yet due), it should be taken as lpp with caution — especially if the supplier is new; the price paid against the previous contract may also be kept in view
dwhere the price indicated in the lpp is subject to variation, or if it is more than a year old — THE updated basic lpp, as computed in case of the Price Variation Clause (PVC), May also be indicated
ein the case of wholly imported stores, the comparison of the last purchase rate should be made with the net CIF value at the current foreign exchange rate
f"it is natural to have marginal differences in prices obtained at different cities/ offices for the same item, due to their different circumstances. The prices obtained are greatly influenced by quantity, delivery period, and terms of the contract"
g"prices paid in emergencies, or prices offered in a distress sale, are not accurate guidelines for future use. Such purchase orders and TC proceedings should indicate that: "These prices are not valid lpp for comparison in future procurement.""

7.30 Consideration of Abnormally Low Bids (ALB)

1. The definition:

the procedure:

  • The Procuring Entity May seek written clarifications from the bidder — including detailed price analyses of its bid price in relation to:
  • if, after evaluating the price analyses, the Procuring Entity determines that the bidder has substantially failed to demonstrate its capability to deliver the contract at the offered price — the Procuring Entity May reject the bid/ proposal, and evaluate the next higher bidder (and so on).

2. No normative percentage:

"due care should be taken while formulating the specifications [W: "preparing the drawings, formulating specifications"] at the time of preparation of the tender document — to safeguard against the submission of abnormally low bids."

3. Predatory pricing: "in the case of predatory pricing as well, procuring entities May refer to the above consideration of abnormally low bids to assist themselves in the finalisation of tenders." (OM No. F.12/17/2019-PPD dated 06.02.2020.)

4. The additional Security Deposit Rule — a common misconception corrected:

7.31 Cartel Formation / Pool Rates / Bid Rigging

7.31.1The Statutory DefinitionG

"the Competition Act defines bid rigging as agreements that have the effect of eliminating or reducing competition, or adversely affecting or manipulating the process of bidding."

the forms of bid rigging:

7.31.2The Five Tell-tale Signs of a Cartel

Sometimes, a cartel of bidders quotes equal/ marginally different rates (pool rates) Against a tender, whereas possibly:

#G GOODSW WORKS
arates quoted (and breakup thereof) are equal — despite their manufacturing/ logistics costs being different due to their scale of production/ locationquoted prices and scope of works: Prices quoted (and their detailed breakdowns) are suspiciously similar — despite significant differences in the proposed approach to completing the works. *Look for variations in methodologies, materials, or timelines that could justify price differences*
bthe rate manages to be L1the rates quoted by two or more bidders manage to be L1
cin a variation, the rates May not be exactly equal, but May be close enough to make the cartel members L1, L2, L3, etc.(same)
drespective quoted quantities by these bidders are much less than the tendered quantity — leaving no option but to distribute quantities among these bids
etheir bids have other uncanny similarities — i.e., the same layout or typographical errors.
"bids from the same IP address raise suspicion — but by itself May not be a strong indicator of a cartel. In such cases, other factors mentioned in this Para should be assessed to judge cartelisation."
unexplained similarities in bids: Bids from different contractors exhibit unusual similarities beyond pricing — including identical typos, grammatical errors, formatting, or even the use of uncommon terminology

7.31.3Why It Matters Even When Rates Are Reasonable

the evidentiary difficulty G:

the legal characterisation: Such cartel formation/ pool rates abuse the transparency of Public Procurement and are a violation of the Code of Integrity for Public Procurement. Such tactics leading to an "Appreciable adverse effect on competition" (AAEC) is an offence under the Competition Act, 2002, as amended by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2007.

7.31.4The Cartel Formation/ Pool Rates Clause — Two Preventive Measures

To discourage such practices, the Procuring Entity May include in all tender documents a cartel formation/ pool rates clause, reserving its rights to take the following actions without assigning any reasons:

A) the minimum-quantity requirement:

ManualMinimum percentage a bidder must bid for
G GOODS"more than a minimum specified percentage — say 25% — of the tendered quantity; Otherwise, their offer shall be rejected"
W WORKS"for those works procurements where schedules or division of work is possible — more than a minimum specified percentage, say 20% or 30%"

b) the warning: Warn that the Procuring Entity May take any/ all punitive actions available under the Code of Integrity — including removal from the list/ panel of registered sources or debarment — besides reporting the transgression to the competition commission, and concerned trade associations like FICCI, ASSOCHAM, NSIC for suitable punitive action.

c) the negotiation bar — reproduced verbatim in the cartel section:

7.31.5The Four Ways to Decide a Tender Where a Cartel Is Suspected

#Permitted action
ireject all bids from the suspected cartel formation and decide the tender accordingly
iiplace an order on any one or more firms from among the cartel, for any quantity, with the exclusion of the rest — with or without negotiation or counter-offering
NOTE: "the selection of firms for this May be based on a transparent logistics parameter — i.e., quicker delivery, nearer location of source, relatively better past performance, etc."
iiiwhenever a tender is floated for purchase exclusively from an Approved Vendor List [W: pre-qualified/ approved sources], and cartel formation is suspected among all such sources — the Procuring Entity May place orders on bidders who are not in the Approved Vendor List, for any quantity
ivwherever a specified ratio for splitting of quantities among 2/3 sources is stipulated, and cartel formation is suspected among the lower 2/3 bidders — place orders on any number of bids beyond such ratios, or decide the tender as per (i) or (ii) above

W — the additional remedial measures:

7.32 Negotiations for Reduction of Prices

(Rule 173(xiv) of GFR 2017)

7.32.1The General Rule and the Two Absolute Bars

7.32.2The Four Exceptional Circumstances

"price negotiations May not be considered except under the following exceptional circumstances:"

a) where THE L1 price is not considered to be reasonable, AND:

  • I) the procurement is done on a nomination basis; or
  • ii) procurement is from single or limited sources; or
  • iii) in situations where the requirements are urgent, and the delay in re-tendering for the entire requirement due to the unreasonableness of the quoted rates would jeopardise essential operations, maintenance, and safety:

b) where there is suspicion of cartel formation — which should be recorded.

7.32.3Who Decides, and the Recording Duty

"the decision whether to invite fresh tenders or to negotiate (and with whom) should be made by the tender accepting authority, based on the recommendations of the TC.

Convincing reasons must be recorded by the authority recommending negotiations.

The ca should exercise due diligence while accepting a tender, ordering negotiations, or calling for a re-tender — and a definite timeframe should be indicated."

7.32.4What Counts as a Negotiation — and What Does Not

SituationIs it a negotiation?
a counter-offer TO L1 To arrive at an acceptable rateYES — shall amount to a negotiation
A COUNTER-OFFER (at the rates accepted by L1) to L2, L3, and so on, in case of splitting of quantities (and in parallel Rate Contracts)NO — shall not be deemed to be a negotiation
dynamic bids in the reverse Auction ProcessNO — are not to be considered as negotiations

7.32.5The Four-Step Negotiation Procedure

after the ca has decided to call a specific bidder for negotiation:

A) extend validity first: "it must be understood that if the period of validity of the original offer expires before the close of negotiations, the original offer will not be available for acceptance. The period of validity of the original offer must, therefore, be extended — wherever necessary — before negotiations."

b) the invitation letter: The bidder should be addressed as per the prescribed format, so that the rates originally quoted by him shall remain open for acceptance in the event of failure of the contemplated negotiation.

c) the signed declaration: "a negotiation meeting should be started only after obtaining a signed declaration from the negotiating supplier."

d) the revised bid — and the "price only" rule:

7.33 Negotiations to Freeze Description of Service [C ONLY]

1. Why it is called "negotiation" at all:

2. What May be discussed — and the anti-dilution rule:

"negotiations are not an essential part of the selection process. In many cases, however, it is felt necessary to conduct negotiations with the selected consultant for discussions of:

3. FINANCIAL NEGOTIATIONS — the three strict limits:

7.34 Cancellation of Procurement Process / Rejection of All Bids / Re-tender

(Rule 173(xix) of GFR 2017)

1. The right and its limits:

The Procuring Entity has the right to cancel the process of procurement or reject all bids at any time before intimating acceptance of a successful bid.

the six grounds for cancellation:

#Ground
aIF THE quantity and quality of requirements have changed substantially, or there is an un-rectifiable infirmity in the tender process
bWHEN none of the bids is substantially responsive To the requirements of the procurement documents
cnone of the technical proposals meets the minimum technical qualifying score
dIF effective competition is lacking. However, lack of competition shall not be determined solely based on the number of bidders
ethe bids'/ proposals' prices are substantially higher than the updated cost estimate or available budget
fif the bidder whose bid has been found to be the lowest evaluated bid fails to sign the procurement contract, or fails to provide the Performance Security, or otherwise withdraws from the procurement process — the Procuring Entity shall re-tender the case

2. The balancing test — and the irreversibility Rule:

3. Approval and communication: The ca should accord approval for re-tendering based on the reasons/ proper justification in writing.

The decision to cancel shall be immediately communicated to all bidders that participated; Bids, if not opened, would not be opened and, in off-line tenders, be returned unopened. EMD, cost of tender document (if any) etc. Should be promptly returned.

4. The pre-retender check: "before re-tendering, the Procuring Entity is first to check whether — while floating/ issuing the enquiry — all requirements and formalities such as standard conditions, industry-friendly qualification criteria, technical and commercial terms, wide publicity, sufficient time for tendering, and so on, were fulfilled. If not, a fresh enquiry is to be issued after rectifying the deficiencies."

7.35 Letter of Award (LoA) to the Successful Bidder

1. The notification and when the contract is legally formed:

Prior to the expiry of the period of bid validity, the successful bidder will be notified — briefly indicating relevant details such as quantity, specification of the goods ordered, prices, and so on — in writing by a registered letter or any other acknowledgeable and foolproof method That his bid has been accepted.

in the same communication, the successful bidder is to be instructed to furnish the required Performance Security within a specified period (generally 14 to 28 days, depending on the amount).

2. Verification of originals before the LoA:

Before issuing an LoA, the Procuring Entity May — at its discretion — ask the bidder to submit for verification the originals of all such documents whose scanned copies were submitted online.

If so decided, the photocopies shall be verified and signed by the competent officer and kept in the records as part of the contract agreement.

3. The value of the contract should include taxes/ duties/ levies, IF ANY.

4. The no-third-party Rule — a point frequently tested:

5. The GeM seller id requirement: "it shall be mandatory for the successful bidder to register on GeM and obtain a unique GeM seller id — before the placement of LoA or the contract. This id shall be incorporated into the contract."

6. C — the cross-checking duty at RfP stage: "before a final award is announced, the technical and financial credentials of the selected bidders/ consultant should be cross-checked to the extent feasible. This is especially important at RfP stage — since normally such a verification is not done at the EoI stage."

7.36 Publication of Award of Contract and Return of EMD

(Rule 173(xviii) of GFR 2017)

1. Mandatory publication: The details of the award of the contract and the name of the successful bidder should be mentioned mandatorily on the CPPP/ GeM (as relevant), and in the notice board/ bulletin/ website of the concerned Ministry or Department/ e-procurement portal.

2. THE EXCEPTION — and the special CPSE six-month rule:

3. Return of bid securities: Upon the successful bidder furnishing the signed agreement and Performance Security, each unsuccessful bidder will be promptly notified, and their Bid Security shall be returned without interest within 30 (thirty) days of notice of award of contract.

The successful supplier's Bid Security shall be adjusted against the SD, or returned as per the terms of the tender documents.

7.37 Performance Security at the Award Stage

The supplier receiving the LoA is required to furnish the required Performance Security (if it is part of tender conditions) in the prescribed form, within the period prescribed in the tender document (generally 14 to 28 days, depending on the amount).

The escalation sequence on failure:

7.38 Acknowledgement of Contract by the Successful Bidder and Execution

1. After the successful bidder is notified, he will be sent an agreement in duplicate for signature and return — incorporating all agreements between the parties.

2. The acknowledgement timelines and exemptions:

SituationTimeline
OTEacknowledge and unconditionally accept, sign, date and return the agreement within 14 (fourteen) days From the date of issue of the contract
GTEwithin 28 (twenty-eight) days

when acknowledgement is not required:

  • IN low-value contracts below rupees two and a half lakh;
  • When the bidder's offer has been accepted in its entirety without any modifications;
  • "if both parties simultaneously sign the contract across the table — further acknowledgement from the supplier is not required."

if the supplier raises issues: "while acknowledging the contract, the supplier May raise issues and/ or ask for modifications against some entries; Such aspects shall be immediately investigated for necessary action — and thereafter, the supplier's unconditional acceptance of the contract must be obtained."

it should also be made known that if he does not furnish the required Performance Security or does not sign the contract within the stipulated target dates — such non-compliance will constitute sufficient ground for punitive actions.

"the Procuring Entity May also consider getting the contract digitally signed."

3. Who May sign: "all contracts shall be signed and entered into after receipt and verification of the requisite Performance Security — by an authority empowered to do so by or under the orders of the president [Article 299 of the Constitution]."

7.39 Framing of Contract

the contract should be strictly as per the bid conditions and the accepted offer.

7.40 Audit Trails — Procurement Records

1. The obligation: The Procuring Entity must maintain and retain audit trails, records and documents generated or received during its procurement proceedings — in chronological order. The files should be stored in an identified place and retrievable for scrutiny whenever needed, without wasting time.

2. The e-procurement dispensation:

The nine categories of documents to be maintained (electronically or physically): a) documents pertaining to the determination of the need for procurement; B) description of the subject matter Of the procurement; C) statement of the justification for the choice of a mode of procurement other than open competitive tendering; D) documents relating to pre-qualification and registration of bidders, if applicable; e) PARTICULARS OF issue, receipt, opening of the bids and the participating bidders at each stage; f) requests for clarifications and any reply thereto — including the clarifications given during pre-bid conferences; g) bids evaluated and documents relating to their evaluation; h) contracts and contract amendments; i) complaint handling; Correspondence with clients, consultants, and banks.

3. The physical-file structure — and the two-volume practice:

In organisations where physical files are still maintained, the procurement file should start with the indent And related documents, followed by:

in case of bulky bids received, all bids May be kept in a separate volume — with a copy of accepted bids later being put on the main volume.

7.41 Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1evaluation of bids is subjective, or leaves room for manipulation and biased assessments. Some TC members May not be independent or neutral, or May have a conflict of interest (coi).TC should give an undertaking at the appropriate time that none of the members has any coi With the companies/ agencies participating. Any member having a coi should refrain from participating in the TC.
"some members of a TC May be subordinate to, or related to, others in a strictly hierarchical organisation — so that they are not free to express independent views. Such a situation must be avoided when constituting the TC."
2discriminating against a best value bid: "in case a bidder's bid (not in the good books of the Procuring Entity) becomes the best value bid as per the evaluation criteria, some of the following actions May have risks of misuse. There is also a reverse risk in these actions if a favourite becomes the best value bid."(Mitigation for each type is at rows 3–6 below.)
3unwarranted re-tendering: Rejecting all bids and calling for re-tendering on the pretext of prices being high, change of specifications, budget not being available, and so on.Refer to para 7.34 for safeguards. "in case a procurement is re-bid more than once, approval of one level above the ca May be taken." Also see the complaint mechanism.
4sudden quantity reduction/ increase or splitting of quantity/ work at the time of award. "many organisations have provisions for change/ splitting in the bid quantity at the time of award. Some organisations vary quantity even without such provisions."bid conditions must specify a limit beyond which the originally announced quantity/ scope cannot be reduced/ increased.
If parallel contracts are envisaged, clear criteria for the splitting May be specified in the tender documents beforehand.
5unwarranted negotiations: Negotiations are called without justification. Sometimes, a counter-offer is made to discourage the lowest acceptable bidder.Normally, there should be no post-tender negotiations. In certain exceptional situations — procurement of proprietary items · items with limited sources of supply · items where there is suspicion of a cartel formationnegotiations May be held with L-1. In case of L-1 backing out, there should be re-tendering.
6unwarranted delays in finalising or varying the terms of the contract agreement: "even after the TC recommendations are accepted, the signing of the contract is delayed on one pretext or the other. Although there is a standard contract form in the tender documents, the contract May be drafted in a fashion that favours or discourages the successful bidder."A target timeline for the finalisation of procurement should be laid down. Delays and reasons thereof should be brought out before the ca on the file at the time of tc's acceptance or contract signing.
"the contract should be strictly as per the bid conditions and accepted offer."
7anti-competitive practices: "bidders which would otherwise be expected to compete, secretly conspire to frustrate the buyer's attempts to get VfM in a tender process. Anti-competitive conspiracies can take many forms. Sometimes, the officers involved in procurement May be part of such collusion."

(The five named forms are set out below the table.)
"these strategies, in turn, May result in patterns that procurement officials can detect — and steps can be taken to thwart such attempts."
"such anti-competitive activities come under the purview of competition law, which provides stringent penalties."
"regular training should be held for officers involved in procurement — to detect and mitigate such practices, and also to use the competition law against such bidders."

The Five Named Forms of Anti-Competitive ConductG

FormDefinition
1. Bid coordination"the bidders collude to quote the same or similar rates that are much higher than the reasonable price — to force the buyer to settle the procurement at exorbitant prices."
2. Cover bidding"cover bidding is designed to give the appearance of genuine competition, by way of supporting bids for the leading bid-rigger."
3. Bid suppression"bid suppression means that a company does not submit a bid for final consideration, in support of the leading bid-rigger."
4. Bid rotation"in bid-rotation schemes, conspiring firms continue to bid — but they agree to take turns being the winning (i.e., lowest qualifying) bidder in a group of tenders of a similar nature."
5. Market allocation"competitors carve up the market and agree not to give competitive bids for certain customers, or in certain geographic areas."

Appendix to Chapter 7 — Part B: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1QCBS weightage — invertedC: Technical 70% / Cost 30% · W & NC: Technical ≤30% / Cost ≥70%
2The identical sentence "since the weightage of the COST element … is as high as 70 per cent" appears in both C and NCAn evident internal inconsistency in the CS Manual, which has just assigned 70% to TECHNICAL
3QCBS worked example — the winnerC: Proposal C at Rs. 106, the HIGHEST-priced bid · W: Bid C at Rs. 105, the second-lowest bid · NC: same data as C but H-1/H-2/H-3 order changes
4QCBS tie-breakerCommon: the bid with the higher TECHNICAL score becomes H-1
5evaluation of the quality — technical proposals(four criteria; absolute-not-comparative grading; 5-grade A–E rating scale at 100/80/60/30/10%; first reading without scoring; grading defined before opening; individual scoring; joint review and averaging; 75 minimum qualifying mark; debriefing duty)C ONLY
6The model marks scheme (5–10% / 20–50% / 30–60% / 0–10%)C ONLY
7Methodology sub-criteria (30/50/20) and Key Professionals sub-criteria (20/80)C ONLY
8Fixed budget selection (FBS) — the two methodsC ONLY
9negotiations to freeze description of service(and the consequent absence of negotiation annexures in CS)C ONLY
10"In no case should financial negotiation result in an INCREASE in the financial cost as originally quoted"C ONLY
11Arithmetic correction permitted in TIME-BASED contracts but not in LUMP-SUM contractsC ONLY
12"A technical proposal pre-disclosing any material pricing information shall also be rejected"C ONLY
13MII purchase preference not applicable where evaluation uses QCBS or FBSNC(stated expressly)
14"Members of the STC shall not be involved" in the QCBS evaluation committeenc only
15evaluation in rate contracts(counter-offer procedure for parallel RCs; Catalogue basis on NDP/MRP; one-year default period)G ONLY
16variation of quantities at award — 15% defaultG ONLY
17OPTION CLAUSE — 25%, above Rs 50 lakh, none in development orders, excluded from CA determinationG ONLY
18Splitting/ parallel contracts — 70:30 and 50:30:20 ratios; the minimum-quote anti-cartel safeguard; five allocation guidelinesG ONLY
19Tie at l-1 — the four-step tie-breaker (SC/ST or Women MSE → other MSE → higher turnover → earlier DPIIT registration; GeM methodology on GeM)G ONLY
20Evaluation of multiple schedules/ items/ destinations — the three casesG ONLY
21"Net of GST" for CPSEs availing Input Tax CreditG ONLY
22GTE loading sequence — 1% port handling, customs/CVD/surcharges, clearing agency, inland freight, GST, LC charges; CIF comparison where no domestic biddersG ONLY
23Evaluation of bids involving samples/ demos; pre-production sample; cancellation without repercussionG ONLY
24The six "critical provisions" deemed material if deviated fromG(fullest statement)
25"The CA may ask the TC to explain the report but should not request that evaluation be changed"G
26Financial bid opening to be 2–5 days after announcement of techno-commercial resultsG
27Abnormally Low Bids — "resource mobilisation" included in the price-analysis headsW(G omits it)
28ALB — "due care while preparing the drawings, formulating specifications"W(G says only "formulating the specifications")
29Cartel sign — "quoted quantities much less than tendered quantity" and "same IP address raises suspicion but is not by itself a strong indicator"G ONLY
30Cartel sign — "prices suspiciously similar despite significant differences in the proposed approach"W ONLY
31Minimum quote percentage to defeat cartelsG: say 25% · W: say 20% or 30%, where schedules or division of work is possible
32Cartel remedies — detailed cost analysis by experts; encouraging new firms to enlist; switching to post-qualification; packaging/ slicingW ONLY
33Reporting cartels to FICCI, ASSOCHAM, NSIC by nameG ONLY
34Reasonableness — the seven LPP cautions, incl. "these prices are not valid LPP for comparison in future procurement"G ONLY
35The five named forms of anti-competitive conduct (Bid Coordination, Cover Bidding, Bid Suppression, Bid Rotation, Market Allocation)G ONLY
36"Once a Tender is re-tendered, the bids in the old tender cannot be revived, as per the Indian Contract Act"G
37"In case a procurement is re-bid more than once, approval of one level above the ca may be taken"G
38LoA constitutes legal formation of contract if not conditional on performance security; acceptance complete on submission to postal authoritiesG
39Contract cannot be placed on a subsidiary or authorised dealer — only on the bidder in whose name the bid was submittedG
40Mandatory GeM Seller ID before LoAG
41CPSE commercial-resale disclosure and the six-month deferred publication of award detailsG ONLY
42Acknowledgement within 14 days (OTE)/ 28 days (GTE); exemption below Rs 2.5 lakhG
43Audit Trails — the nine document categories and the two-volume file practiceG(also in W and NC)
44Cross-checking credentials before final award "especially important at RfP stage since verification is not done at EoI stage"C ONLY

end of Chapter 7 (parts a and b)

Chapter 8

Special and Unique Types of Procurement

Merging: Goods Ch. 8 (Procurements with Unique Features) · Consultancy Ch. 9 (Special Types of Engagements) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 8 (Special Types of Non-Consultancy Procurements)

Structural Warning — the Works Manual Has No Such Chapter

three of the four Manuals carry a "special types" Chapter. The works Manual does not.

ManualChapterTitleSections
G GoodsChapter 8Procurements with Unique Features7
W Works — NONE —(its Chapter 7 is Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance — which corresponds to the CONTRACT MANAGEMENT chapters of the other three)
C ConsultancyChapter 9Special Types of Engagements10
NC Non-ConsultancyChapter 8Special Types of Non-Consultancy Procurements12

The Three Chapters Barely Overlap

GOODS GCONSULTANCY CNON-CONSULTANCY NC
Organising principletransaction-structure variants(how the deal is shaped)categories of provider(who is engaged)categories of provider + named services (who, and for what)
ContentsEmergencies/ Disaster · Buy Back · Capital Goods · AMC · NPV · Turnkey · Books & Print MediaSSS · Individual Consultants · Specialised Agencies · NGOs · Procurement Consultants · Financial Advisors · Auditors · Logo Design Competitions · Integrated IT Projects · Digital IndiaEoI Shortlisting · SSS · Individual Service Providers · Specialised Agencies · NGOs · Procurement Agents · Inspection Agents · Housekeeping · Manpower Outsourcing · Private Security · Vehicle Hiring · HaaS

the goods Chapter has ZERO Overlap with the other two. Consultancy and non-consultancy share only four topics: SSS · Individual providers · Specialised Agencies/ Institutions · NGOs.

Concordance for Chapter 8

UnifiedTopicGCNC
Part i — goods-only
8.1Handling Procurement in Emergencies and Disaster Management8.1
8.2Buy Back Offer8.2
8.3Capital Goods/ Equipment (M&P, IT Systems)8.3
8.4Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC)8.4
8.5Net Present Value (NPV)8.5
8.6Turnkey Contract8.6
8.7Procurement of Books and Print Media8.7
part II — common to c and nc
8.8EoI for Shortlisting of Service Providers(Ch. 7)8.1
8.9Single Source Selection (SSS)9.18.2
8.10Selection of Individual Consultants/ Service Providers9.28.3
8.11Selection of Specialised Agencies/ Institutions9.38.4
8.12Selection of Non-governmental Organisations (NGO)9.48.5
8.13Procurement Consultants/ Agents9.58.6
part III — consultancy-only
8.14Financial Advisors9.6
8.15Auditors9.7
8.16Public Competition for Design of Symbols/ Logos9.8
8.17Procurement of Integrated IT Projects9.9(8.12.1)
8.18Hiring Consultants for Digital India Projects9.10
part IV — non-consultancy-only
8.19Inspection Agents8.7
8.20Housekeeping Services8.8
8.21Manpower Outsourcing Services8.9
8.22Private Security Manpower Services8.10
8.23Vehicle Hiring for Office Use8.11
8.24IT Hardware as a Service (HaaS)8.12

Part I — Procurements with Unique Features [GOODS ONLY]

8.1 Handling Procurement in Emergencies and Disaster Management

8.1.1Procurements in Emergencies/ Urgencies

"there are sufficient fast-track procurement modes and flexibilities in the procurement guidelines to tackle procurements in operational emergencies/ urgencies. Enhanced delegations of procurement powers May be incorporated in SoPP to handle such situations."

the four modes, in order of speed:

A) procurement through the GeM PORTAL;

b) direct procurement without quotation;

c) direct procurement by Purchase Committee;

d) SLTE/ limited/ Single Tender Enquiry — with reduced time for submission of bids.

8.1.2Procurement in Crisis Situations — Disaster Management/ Pandemic

1. The declaration order: "an order May be issued by the Competent Authority — declaring the crisis, and promulgating the start of procurement procedures under the crisis, with an estimated validity period till which these would apply."

2. NEED ASSESSMENT — the aggregation task: "the most crucial task is to consolidate and aggregate the requirements from all jurisdictions. Specifications should be rationalised considering the market situation. A centralised list May be prepared containing the quantities (unit-wise) and specifications of each item. Such lists May be preserved for future use."

3. Prolonged or endemic crises: "if a crisis is likely to extend over a prolonged period — or if such disasters are endemic to the region (floods/ cyclones) — rate contracts May be entered into to cater to such situations."

4. "this is not the time for complex methods" — the eight dispensations:

a) procurement through the GeM portal — which responds to such situations as COVID-19;

B) direct procurement without quotation;

C) direct procurement by Purchase Committee;

D) SLTE/ limited/ Single Tender Enquiry, with reduced time for submission of bids;

e) "other than these, unlisted but fast modes of procurement — e.g., enhancement of quantity or repeat orders at the same terms in existing contracts — May be pursued. All contracts May be placed with clauses for quantity enhancements and repeat orders.";

f) "all procurement May be done using single-stage, single-envelope tendering systems.";

g) "even if pre-qualification is felt necessary, self-declaration in a single envelope May be called for — instead of a time-consuming pre-qualification bid.";

h) "pre-bid conferences May be replaced by informal market research."

5. Enhanced delegations: "enhanced delegations of procurement powers in SoPP May be considered, with the approval of the Secretary of the Department."

6. "deliveries that suit the urgent/ emergent and disaster management situation May only be allowed."

7. Reasonableness of prices in a crisis: "the reasonableness of prices in such situations May be judged by keeping in mind that prices in such situations May be higher than in normal procurement — to cater to express deliveries/ disruptions, etc."

8. Model documents disapplied: "model tender documents or general conditions of contract should not apply to emergency procurements."

9. Shortened timelines and alternative bid channels: "minimum timelines for bid submission May be shortened (say 1–3 days). Bids by phone, email, and in-person May also be considered."

10. Single offer acceptable, no re-tender: "norms of minimum bids in a tender May be relaxed — and even a single offer May be accepted without re-tendering. No tender should normally be allowed to be discharged or re-invited."

11. The seven norms that May be dispensed with or relaxed:

12. Minimal documentation: "documents required for various stages — bids, qualification, eligibility, inspection, and payment — must be barely minimum."

13. Inspection: "instead of physical inspections, vendors' self-declaration of quality May be accepted."

14. THE GeM exception in a crisis — a rare permitted departure:

15. Ensuring transparency, integrity, and accountability:

A) as far as feasible, procurement May be done on the GeM portal.

B) the separate record-keeping team: "all procuring agencies should constitute a separate team (without hampering people involved in procurement) to keep a record of justification and quantum of emergency procurements — for future accountability."

c) after the crisis is over — the four closing actions:

16. Getting ready for future disasters: "such emergency procurement systems and lists May be formalised for future disasters — e.g., the enhanced delegations May be integrated into the normal SoPP as delegations in defined crisis."

8.2 Buy Back OfferG

(Rule 176 of GFR 2017)

when it is decided to replace an existing old item(s) with a new/ better version, the Department May trade the existing old item while purchasing the new one, by issuing suitable tender documents for this purpose.

What the tender document must incorporate:

8.3 Capital Goods/ Equipment (Machinery and Plant — M&P, IT Systems, etc.)G

8.3.1What Counts as Capital Goods

"capital goods are machinery and plants (m&p) which create new fixed assets/ utility/ functionality or benefits for the organisation, and have a long and useful life.

This also refers to it procurements of IT systems — comprising one or more of: Hardware · networking · tailor-made and customised software · installation/ commissioning · training · AMC/ CMC · cloud services · and other services."

8.3.2The Seven Distinctive Features

1. Investment decision and item-specific budget:

2. The alternatives to outright purchase — with the staff-car illustration:

3. The embedded works and services:

The procurement involves elements of works and services like:

"all such elements have costs that May be quoted explicitly or implicitly.

A suitable warranty clause should indicate the period of warranty and service levels, as well as penalties for delays in the restoration of defects.

Clauses for including essential initial spares for two years' maintenance, to be supplied along with equipment, May be provided.

If necessary, an appropriate number of years — say three to five or more years, depending on the lifespan of the equipment — AMC May be included in the procurement, detailing its conditions."

4. Total Cost of Ownership:

5. When a turnkey contract is better: "in case the plant and equipment (or an IT system) consists of several machines/ components/ systems that work in tandem — or if it includes services/ works to be done by a third party — an all-encompassing turnkey contract May be a better alternative."

6. The evaluation complexity and its three remedies:

7. Fit for pre-qualification bidding: "experience, capacity, and financial strength of a supplier are important determinants of quality and after-sales support for capital goods; Such procurements are a fit for pre-qualification bidding."

8.4 Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC)G

(Rule 169 of GFR 2017)

1. When an AMC starts: "some goods — especially sophisticated equipment and machinery — need proper maintenance for trouble-free service. For this purpose, the purchase organisation May enter into a maintenance contract.

2. With whom: "the maintenance contract May be entered into either with the OEM manufacturer/ supplier of the goods, or with a competent and eligible firm — not necessarily the manufacturer/ supplier of the goods in question. The purchase organisation should decide this aspect on a case-to-case basis on merit."

3. AMC as part of the equipment procurement — the NPV evaluation rule:

4. AMC procured separately — and the OEM-authorisation rule:

"if the maintenance contract is to be entered into with a competent and eligible supplier separately, then a separate tender enquiry is to be floated… here, the OEM supplier of the goods May also quote — and his quotation, if received, is to be considered along with other quotations received.

5. Payment periodicity: "the terms of payment for the maintenance service will depend on the nature of the goods to be maintained as well as the nature of the services desired. Generally, payment for maintenance is made on a half-yearly or quarterly basis."

6. The Service Level Agreement (SLA) — what it must contain:

A SLA May be incorporated in complex and large maintenance contracts. SLA should indicate guaranteed levels of service parameters LIKE:

this would also include:

the maintenance contract May also include penalties (Liquidated Damages) for unacceptable delays in responses and degradation in the performance output of machines — including provisions for terminations.

7. What is included in the maintenance charge — the four ambiguities to resolve:

8. The most-favoured-customer clause: "a suitable provision should be incorporated in the tender enquiry document and the resultant maintenance contract, indicating that the prices charged by the maintenance contractor should not exceed the prevailing rates charged by him from others for similar services. While claiming payment, the contractor is also to give a certificate to this effect in his bill."

9. Performance security: If the goods to be maintained are sophisticated and costly, the tender enquiry document should also have a provision for obtaining Performance Security. The amount will depend on the nature of the goods, the period of maintenance, and so on.

10. Goods taken away for repair — the Rs 1 lakh BG rule:

11. Withdrawal of the maintenance contract — and the model clause:

"sometimes, during the tenure of a maintenance contract — especially with a longer tenure — it May become necessary for the purchase organisation to withdraw the maintenance contract due to some unforeseen reasons.

8.5 Net Present Value (NPV)G

8.5.1The Concept and the Formula

"net Present Value (NPV) — or net present worth (npw) — of equipment procurement is the sum of the present values of the net cash flows for all the years of the equipment's economic life.

The net cash flows are discounted to arrive at the NPV of equipment, by applying a predetermined discount rate."

SymbolMeaning
rTHE discount rate (in fraction)
CF₀THE quoted price
CF₁, CF₂, CF₃ … CFₙTHE Costs in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd … nth YEARS

8.5.2Two Practical Rules

1. Terminal disposal value: "the terminal disposal value of the equipment is also to be taken as negative expenditure — but since these are most likely to be the same for all bidders, and there is uncertainty in estimating this — it is usually not included in calculating NPV in procurement decisions."

2. Calculation: "the above formula for NPV need not be manually calculated; It can be calculated using the NPV function in excel."

8.5.3THE SOLVED EXAMPLE — where the HIGHEST-priced offer becomes L1

RowExpensesOffer 1Offer 2Offer 3
2Initial investment, including costs of initial spares, installation/ commissioning, Training, etc.₹ 4,00,000₹ 5,00,000₹ 6,00,000
3Annual expenditure on operation (fuel, consumables)₹ 1,50,000₹ 1,00,000₹ 50,000
4Free Warranty — 1st Year₹ 0₹ 0₹ 0
5Free Warranty — 2nd Year₹ 0₹ 0₹ 0
6AMC in 3rd Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
7AMC in 4th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
8AMC in 5th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
9AMC in 6th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
10AMC in 7th Year₹ 40,000₹ 50,000₹ 60,000
11NPV₹ 13,51,644.26₹ 12,17,992.50₹ 10,84,340.74

The excel formula (for column B; mutatis mutandis for C and D):

8.6 Turnkey ContractG

"in the context of the procurement of goods, a turnkey contract May include:

what the Procuring Entity specifies:

the contractor's four responsibilities:

  1. Supplying the required goods, machinery, equipment, etc., needed for the plant;
  2. Assembling, installing, and erecting the same at the site as needed;
  3. Commissioning the plant to meet the required output, etc., as specified in the tender enquiry documents.

8.7 Procurement of Books and Print MediaG

1. The categories and the selection factors:

"the procurement of print media encompasses various categories such as books, journals, magazines, and newspapers — each serving distinct purposes like knowledge dissemination and education.

the six factors for deciding procurement:

2. The method — net discount over published price:

3. The one-year onboarding and Rate Contract:

Part II — Common to Consultancy and NON-CONSULTANCY

8.8 Expression of Interest (EoI) for Shortlisting of Service ProvidersNC

8.8.1Why NC Normally Does NOT Use EoI — and When It Does

8.8.2The Two-Phase Process

"these considerations can be best addressed through competition exclusively between qualified shortlisted firms or individuals — in which selection is based on the quality of the proposal and, where appropriate, on the cost of services to be provided.

Such procurement needs to be done in a two-phase process:

Care should be taken to avoid formation of unreasonable qualification criteria prior to shortlisting of bidders, that May lead to restricted participation."

8.8.3The Modes — Rule 183(ii) of GFR 2017

for procurement above Rs. 50 (rupees fifty) lakh, shortlisting is done in an openly advertised competitive shortlisting process called Expression of Interest (EoI).

THE "Request for Expression of Interest" (REoI) is advertised on CPPP and on GeM. An organisation having its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website.

"a complete services and activities Schedule should be ready before requesting EoI. Attention of known reputed service providers May also be separately drawn wherever possible."

GTE route:"in case it is felt that likely service providers May not be available in India — the EoI process May be done on Global Tender Enquiry (GTE) process, by sending REoI notice to foreign embassies in India and Indian embassies in relevant countries."(Subject to the Rs. 200 crore GTE restriction — Chapter 4 Part B, para 4.9.2.)

8.9 Single Source Selection (SSS)CNC

8.9.1The Three Objections to SSS

8.9.2Continuity for Downstream Work — the pre-declaration rule

8.9.3the Two Cases Where SSS is NOT Permitted for Downstream Work

8.9.4The Justification, the Qualification Check and the Monthly Report

4. For selecting a consultant under this method, the Procuring Entity should prepare a full justification and take the approval of the Competent Authority as per the SoPP.

5. The shortlisting-criteria test: "while selecting the consultant under this method, the Procuring Entity shall ensure that the consultant has the requisite qualification and experience to undertake the assignment. Normally the Procuring Entity shall adopt the same short-listing criteria as applied to similar assignments while evaluating the EoI."

6. The monthly reporting duty:

8.10 Selection of Individual Consultants / Individual Service ProvidersCNC

8.10.1The Three Conditions for Employing an Individual

"individual consultants are normally employed on assignments for which:

a) teams of personnel are not required;

b) no additional outside professional support is required; and

c) the experience and qualifications of the individual are the paramount requirement."

8.10.2The Selection Process — Five Steps

"the procedures for selecting individual consultants are similar to, but much simpler than, those for selecting teams of consultants from a firm."

a) the package: Preparing a consultancy services package including:

B) advertising: Advertisement should be given on CPPP AND ON GeM. An organisation having its own website should also publish all its advertised tender enquiries on the website.

c) method of selection — comparison of at least three candidates:

d) DIRECT NEGOTIATION — the three exceptional cases:

e) staff or associates of consultancy firms — the conflict-of-interest extension:

8.10.3Retired Government Servants

a) the GFR bar: "Rule 177 of GFR, 2017 says that consulting services do not include direct engagement of retired Government servants. They should not be engaged as consultants against regular vacant posts under this Rule. Such engagements should be handled as a personnel matter."

b) the governing instruction: "engagement/ hiring of retired Government servants should be regulated as per doe's OM f.no. 3-25/2020-E.IIIA dated 9TH December 2020."

8.11 Selection of Specialised Agencies / InstitutionsCNC

1. Who they are: "from time to time, ministries/ departments May need to recruit a specialised agency or institution to undertake a specific consultancy/ non-consultancy service, for which it is particularly well suited.

2. When SSS is worth considering: "in some cases, the agency or institution has access to special expertise or special back-up and support facilities — that make it worthwhile considering recruitment on an SSS basis.

3. The government-agency Rule: "in cases of Government and semi-government agency, SSS would be an appropriate method of recruitment."

4. "individual consultants recruited from agencies and institutions May be selected in the same way as any other individual consultants."

8.12 Selection of Non-Governmental Organisations (NGO)CNC

1. When an ngo-only shortlist is permitted — and the mandatory QCBS:

the five ngo-unique qualification criteria:

a) history of work with grassroots communities, and evidence of satisfactory performance;

b) familiarity with participatory development approaches and low-cost technologies;

c) experienced staff conversant with the cultural and socioeconomic dimensions of beneficiaries;

d) committed leadership and adequate management;

e) capacity to co-opt beneficiary participation.

2. When SSS May be used for an NGO — with the worked illustration:

8.13 Procurement Consultants / Procurement AgentsCNC

8.13.1Consultancy or Non-Consultancy — THE 30% QUALITY-WEIGHTAGE TEST

"hiring of procurement agents (pas) can either be done as a consultancy service or non-consultancy service — depending on the objectives and scope of assignment."

AS CONSULTANCYAS NON-CONSULTANCY
Whenif the role primarily involves intellectual analysis, strategic planning, spend analysis, cost control, and advisory functionsif their responsibilities are only outsourcing of routine procedures, without intellectual decision-making
Illustration"when they are asked to design/ implement a new system, or improve Value for Money, or develop strategic procurement, or carry out market building/ sourcing""when they only operate the existing procedures, and crucial decisions are made by the client himself"
the testWHERE quality weightage of more than 30% is called forWHERE quality weightage can be 30% or less

8.13.2Procurement of Specific Items

"when procurement consultants are specifically used for handling the procurement of specific items, and generally working from their own offices — they are paid:

C — the cost-weightage cap and its reason:

NC — the shorter version: "Procurement Agents as outsourcing of Non-consultancy services may be hired… they are paid a percentage (either fixed or inversely proportional) of the value of the procurements handled, or a combination of a percentage and a fixed fee. In such cases, they may be selected under QCBS."

8.13.3Outsourcing of the Whole Procurement Function

  • C:"when procurement agents provide services for procurement for a whole project in a specific unit of the Procuring Entity — it is usually a non-consultancy service, unless the intellectual-analysis criterion is met."
  • NC:"when pas provide support for a whole project in a specific unit of the Procuring Entity — they are usually paid based on the staff-months of effort provided, and they shall be selected following the appropriate procedures using QCBS and time-based contracts."

Part III — CONSULTANCY-ONLY Engagements

8.14 Financial Advisors [C ONLY]

8.14.1The Two Types of Assignment

"procuring entities May hire financial institutions to implement two main types of assignment:

a) in the preparation of studies and financial consultancy; or

b) as advisers on financial restructuring, mergers and acquisitions (m&a), or demerger, etc."

8.14.2The Two Different Selection Regimes

TypeSelection method
TYPE (a) — studies and financial consultancythe advisers can be selected under any of the methods (whichever is considered most suitable, depending on the scope of work)
TYPE (b) — restructuring, M&A, demergerQCBS SHALL BE ADOPTED — whereby the RfP specifies technical evaluation criteria similar to those relevant to standard Consultancy assignments

8.14.3The Two-Part Remuneration — Retainer plus Success Fee

in type (b), the financial proposal would include two distinct forms of remuneration:

a) A lump-sum retainer fee — to reimburse the consultant for services made available; and

b) A success fee — which is either fixed or, preferably, expressed as a percentage of the value of the privatisation transaction.

The weighting between them:

8.14.4When a Success Fee Is Appropriate

8.15 Auditors [C ONLY]

1. The fiduciary rationale:

2. What the ToR and the technical qualifications must cover:

"auditors typically carry out auditing tasks under well-defined ToR and professional standards."

ElementWhat it must consider/ cover
THE ToRapplicable statutory, Government, organisational requirements · and applicable auditing and accounting standards
scope of auditthe jurisdiction · type of audit · contract period · and any additional services
technical qualificationslicensing requirement · general and similar experience · quality certifications · quality and adequacy of staffing · financial capability · auditing approach · and scheduling of the auditor

"a presentation or interview also May be part of the RfP process. A pre-proposal conference May also be considered."

3. The QCBS recommendation — with its stated reason:

8.16 Public Competition for Design of Symbols/ Logos [C ONLY]

(Rule 196 of GFR 2017)

1. The three governing principles:

"certain ministries/ departments are required to conduct competitions for the design of logos/ symbols for their use — which should be conducted in a transparent, fair, and objective manner.

The following guidelines shall be followed by all ministries/ departments, as well as their attached/ subordinate offices and the autonomous bodies/ organisations controlled by them:"

a) design competitions should be conducted in a transparent, fair, and objective manner;

b) wide publicity should be given to the competition — so as to ensure that the information is accessible to all possible participants. This should include publication on the website of the Ministry/ Department/ PSU/ organisation concerned, as also the Central Public Procurement Portal. THE existing e-publishing module can be utilised;

C) the two statutes to be kept in view: "Provisions of any applicable laws — including the official languages Act and the emblems and names (prevention of improper use) Act — should be kept in view while conducting the competition";

2. The eleven contents of the detailed competition notice:

"a detailed competition notice should be drawn up and made public. The notice should, inter alia, [give] details on the following:"

#Content of the Competition Notice
iTHE objectives of the design competition, and the key features expected in the proposed design
iiqualification criteria, if any, for participation
iiiTHE process of evaluation and evaluation criteria — whether it would be single or multi-stage.
"for symbols/ logos intended to represent a drive/ project/ entity of national importance — it May be decided to have the selection through public voting. If so, the modalities should be clearly specified."
ivTHE manner of submission of entries, and the format/ details etc. Expected with the design
vwhether one participant can submit multiple designs
viTHE last date and time for submission
viidetails of entry fees, if any, and the manner of submission
viiiexpected date for announcement of results, and the manner in which the results will be intimated
ixTHE number of prizes to be awarded, and the amount payable for the successful design(s)
x"it May be clearly stipulated that the intellectual property rights of the successful design(s) would rest with the sponsoring agency. The status of the unsuccessful designs — and whether it is intended to return them — should be indicated clearly."
xiif the selection is to be done by a jury of experts nominated for the purpose — the composition of the jury May also be notified

3. After the competition: "once the competition is over and the winning entry selected — this again should be notified in the public domain. If the selection has been by a jury of experts nominated for the purpose, the composition of the jury May be notified."

4. The customisation caveat: "it is evident that every competition would have distinct features — and therefore, the aforesaid guidelines should be used as a general principle while preparing the detailed procedure/ Rules for each such competition."

8.17 Procurement of Integrated IT Projects [C, with NC cross-reference]

8.17.1The Consultancy Characterisation and the Three Types

"procurement of integrated IT projects should normally be carried out as procurement of consultancy services — as the outcomes/ deliverables vary from one service provider to another."

the IT projects May include:

a) bespoke software development;

b) cloud-based services; and

c) composite IT system integration services — involving design, development, deployment, commissioning of IT system including supply of hardware, development of software, bandwidth, and operation/ maintenance of the system for a defined period after go-live, etc.

8.17.2QCBS with Quality Weightage up to 80%

8.17.3Caution against Restrictive and Discriminatory Qualification Conditions

The Three Categories of Restrictive and Discriminatory Conditions — with Named Examples

a) restrictive and discriminatory eligibility criteria in tender conditions:

#Example cited
imandatory presence in gartner magic quadrant — IT and Telecom Products
iimandatory USFDA/ European ce — Medical Devices
iiiexcessive turnover requirement — Rs. 1000 cr for procurement of Rs. 70 cr
ivexcessive past experience — 10 YEARS
vexport experience to G8 countries
viadditional requirement of bank Guarantee for local supplier
viidelayed payment terms to local suppliers

b) restrictive and discriminatory specifications — foreign brands specified:

CategoryBrands named in the Manual
Telecom productscisco · nec · alcatel · siemens
IT productshp · dell · lenovo
LIFTSotis · mitsubishi · schindler · kone · johnson

c) restrictive/ discriminatory specifications or pre-approved foreign brands in works/ turnkey projects:

i) local manufacturer not included in pre-approved list;

ii) specification tailor-made to suit foreign products;

iii) foreign technical standards indicated in the specification;

iv) technical parameters to favour foreign productsviz. "(–) 25-DEGREE temperature compatibility — for EPBX equipment being procured for an airport in Central India."

8.17.4Bespoke Software Development

"bespoke software development involves creating customised software solutions tailored to specific organisational needs. Unlike off-the-shelf software, bespoke applications are designed from scratch — considering unique requirements, workflows, and business processes."

a) DEFINING REQUIREMENTS — and the agile mandate: "engage stakeholders, gather functional and non-functional requirements, and define clear objectives. Stipulate an agile development approach that allows iterative development, frequent feedback, and adaptability. Agile ensures alignment with evolving requirements and minimises risks."

b) technical qualifications: Evaluate bidders based on expertise, track record, and ability to deliver custom solutions — considering technical proficiency, domain knowledge, scalability, security, and support and project management capabilities.

8.17.5Cloud-Based Services

A) defining requirements:

  • I) slas and data privacy: Define slas regarding uptime, performance, and support. Address data privacy and compliance requirements — especially if handling sensitive information.
  • ii) migration strategy: "plan the migration process carefully. Assess existing applications for cloud readiness, choose the right migration approach (lift-and-shift, re-architecting, or hybrid), and ensure minimal disruption."

b) the three cloud service models:

ModelMeaning
Software as a service (SaaS)ready-to-use applications hosted by the provider
platform as a service (PaaS)development platforms and tools for building custom applications
infrastructure as a service (IaaS)virtualised computing resources (servers, storage, networking)

c) technical qualifications: Evaluate cloud providers based on reliability, security, compliance, data sovereignty. Consider well-established cloud services providers.

8.17.6Composite IT System Integration Services

"composite IT system integration involves connecting disparate systems, applications, and data sources to create a cohesive ecosystem."

a) defining requirement:

  • I) integration strategy: Define the integration scope — APIs, middleware, and data synchronisation. Consider whether real-time or batch processing is required.
  • ii) interoperability and scalability: Ensure that integrated components can communicate seamlessly. Scalability is crucial to accommodate future growth and changing business needs.
  • iii) testing and maintenance: Specify testing requirements — unit, integration, and end-to-end testing. Also outline ongoing maintenance and support expectations.

B) technical qualification: Select vendors with expertise in integrating complex systems. Look for experience in integrating diverse technologies (ERP, CRM, legacy systems).

8.18 Hiring Consultants for Digital India Projects [C ONLY]

8.18.1Overview and the NeGD Framework

8.18.2Empanelment — the Three-plus-Two Year Validity

8.18.3The Three Pre-defined Categories

CategoryScope of services
category a — project/ programme management and advisory servicesi) developing project proposals, roadmaps, and templates;
ii) managing e-governance projects — including agile methodologies, bid processes, and change management;
iii) conducting audits (security, performance, and quality) and risk assessments
category b — digital ecosystem and architecture developmenti) designing digital ecosystem blueprints in line with national standards;
ii) preparing implementation plans — including business requirements, data governance strategies, and technology modernisation approaches;
iii) supporting the adoption of scalable and agile solutions
category c — technology management and emerging technologiesi) advising on emerging technologies such as AI, blockchain, IoT, and quantum computing;
ii) ensuring technology compliance, and managing cybersecurity and GIS solutions

8.18.4The Hiring Process — Four Steps

a) request for proposals or concept notes: "ministries, departments, and other Government organisations leveraging negd's empanelment notify empanelled agencies about specific assignments. Agencies submit technical proposals or concept notes, which are evaluated on merit."

b) selection and deployment: "selected agencies deploy consultants with expertise relevant to the project. Consultants are required to provide their own equipment, and work collaboratively with Government teams at designated project sites."

c) terms of engagement: "empanelled consultants operate on a time-limited project basis, without implying employment obligations by NeGD. Sub-contracting of services is prohibited."

d) compliance and terms — the four obligations:

#Obligation
iintellectual property rights: "all intellectual property generated during the project belongs to NeGD or the client organisation."
iiperformance standards: "consultants must adhere to timelines and quality benchmarks specified in the work order."
iiipenalties and termination: "delays or non-performance can result in penalties up to 10% of the project value — or termination of the engagement."
ivconfidentiality: "consultants must maintain confidentiality of all project-related data."

Part IV — NON-CONSULTANCY-ONLY Services

8.19 Inspection Agents [NC ONLY]

1. Why it is a non-consultancy service:

2. Selection and payment: "inspection agents May be selected using QCBS. Payment is usually based on a percentage of the value of goods inspected and certified."

8.20 Housekeeping Services [NC ONLY]

8.21 Manpower Outsourcing Services [NC ONLY]

(DoE, MoF's OM No. F.6/1/2023-PPD dated 06.01.2023)

8.21.1The Regularisation Caution — and the I-Card Rule

8.21.2LCS for High-Value Cases

" Least cost system (LCS) should be considered for procurement of manpower outsourcing service, wherever appropriate — especially in high-value cases."

8.21.3the Minimum and Maximum Service Charges — 3.85% to 7%

8.21.4The Two Clarifications

4. No bar on awarding above the minimum:"there is no bar on award of tenders to the lowest bidder, if he has quoted service charges more than the minimum prescribed service charges in the tender document (i.e., 3.85% to 7%)."(DoE OM No. 6/1/2023-PPD dated 17.01.2024)

5. When the floor price applies — the two limits:

8.22 Private Security Manpower Services [NC ONLY]

8.22.1What the Service Covers, and the PSARA Licence

"security services offer:

" This is one of the most frequently outsourced non-consultancy services.

The Private Security Agencies (regulation) Act, 2005 (PSARA) regulates the functioning of Private Security Agencies in India.

A PSARA licence and labour licence are required for any person or entity that wants to operate a private security agency in India. The State Government (in which the agency will be operating) issues these licences."

8.22.2The Ex-Servicemen (ESM) Resettlement Framework

8.22.3The DGR Empanelment Certificate — Five Years or Age Sixty

8.22.4The Sponsorship Requirement — and the Qualification Waiver

8.22.5The CPSE Mandate

"security manpower service for CPSEs is governed by orders from the Ministry of defence and the Department of public enterprises (DPE).

8.22.6The Mandatory GeM Route and the Three-Agency Sponsorship

8.22.7Selection — the 10% Negotiation Floor and the Seniority Tie-Breaker

8.23 Vehicle Hiring for Office Use [NC ONLY]

8.23.1Mode of Procurement and Type of Contract

8.23.2Contract Period

8.23.3Price Variation Clause (PVC)

8.23.4Bid Design

"appropriate eligibility, qualification, and selection criteria will be defined. Requirements for vehicle quality, technical specifications, and driver standards will also be specified. Different car specifications May be outlined for varying purposes.

A Service Level Agreement (SLA) will be included — which May cover:

8.23.5Basis of Payment — the Daily-Rate Formula

the payment periodicity and the quarterly kilometre adjustment:

ItemWhen paid
Basic monthly charges; Overtime/ night chargesPAID monthly
payments for extra kilometresprocessed on a quarterly basis

8.24 Procurement of IT Hardware as a Service (HaaS) [NC ONLY]

8.24.1The Distinction from an Integrated IT Project

CharacterisationSelection method
integrated IT projectinvolves considerable intellectual inputs, hence handled as procurement of consultancy servicesQCBS with 80%: 20% weightages for quality: Price
hardware as a service (HaaS)A non-consultancy service — hardware on a subscription or lease basis, with slas and maintenanceLCS (L1), OR QCBS with e.g. 30% technical and 70% financial

8.24.2Scope of Services — the Thirteen Elements

#ElementContent
adetailed specificationsclearly outline the specific IT hardware (desktops, laptops, servers, networking cabling/ equipment, ups, etc.) with configurations and performance standards. Specify what software packages (including anti-virus and firewall software) would be included — and that licence shall be kept valid during the contract period
bservice componentsinstallation · configuration · maintenance · repair/ replacement/ upgradation · and dismantling/ removal at the end of contract period
cdelivery and deploymentspecify timelines FOR delivery, installation, and commissioning of hardware at specified locations
dend-to-end supporthelp desk · remote support · on-site support · and any additional managed services
etraining and knowledge transfertrain the Procuring Entity's staff on using the hardware, managing configurations, basic troubleshooting and accessing support services
gdata protection"if any data is handled by the hardware or service provider, stringent data protection clauses must be included — ensuring compliance with relevant Indian regulations such as the information technology Act, 2000 and its associated Rules."
hcybersecurity standardsspecify the required cybersecurity measures and standards (e.g., iso/iec 27001 certification)
iaudit rights"include clauses allowing the procuring authority to audit the service provider's performance, data security, and compliance with the contract at regular intervals."
jrisk management planrequire the bidder to submit a plan to mitigate risks related to hardware failure, service disruptions, or cybersecurity threats
kownership model"clarify that the hardware is provided on a service model (HaaS) — and the ownership and risks remain with the service provider throughout the contract period."
linsurance"service provider would keep the hardware insured at his cost."
masset trackingrequirements for tracking and monitoring hardware assets — including provisions for upgrading hardware during the contract period

8.24.3Contract Period — and the Ten-Year QCBS Option

a) tenure: Specify the duration of the contract (e.g., 3 years, 5 years), indicating whether the contract is renewable and under what conditions.

b) exit clauses: Include provisions for early termination or contract extensions, based on performance.

8.24.4Service Level Agreement (SLA)

ElementRequirement
Uptime requirementsdefine minimum uptime guarantees (e.g., 99.9% availability) and penalties for breaches
response and resolution timesset clear expectations (e.g., 4-HOUR response time for critical failures)
maintenance & supportconditions for periodic preventive maintenance and replacement of faulty hardware at no additional cost
monitoring and reportingregular performance reports regarding hardware functionality, uptime, and SLA adherence
penalties for non-compliance"define penalties for failure to meet SLA requirements, delayed delivery, or non-compliance. Penalties could include financial deductions, contract termination, or blacklisting from future tenders."

8.24.5Payment Terms

a) subscription model: Outline the payment model — typically on a monthly or quarterly subscription basis, with provisions for penalties in case of non-compliance with slas.

B) cost inclusions: Define the total cost — including hardware, software, service charges, taxes, transportation, and any other related costs.

C) milestone-based payments: Payment May be linked to delivery · installation · successful commissioning · periodic payment · and dismantling/ removal at end of contract.

8.24.6Qualification and Evaluation Criteria

A) technical qualification:

#Requirement
iexperience and expertise: Bidders must have prior experience in providing HaaS to Government departments or large enterprises. Minimum of 3 to 5 years' experience in managing similar contracts
iicertifications: Relevant certifications such as ISO 9001 (quality management) and ISO 20000 (IT service management) May be required
iiiOEM authorisation: "if the bidder is not the OEM — an authorisation letter from the OEM must be submitted, to ensure genuine hardware, warranty, and after-sales support."

b) technical evaluation criteria:

i) compliance with specifications — hardware configuration requirements, SLAs, and support service expectations;

ii) scalability — the solution must be capable of accommodating future upgrades or expansions;

iii) vendor performance — past performance, compliance with SLAs, and customer satisfaction reports;

iv) demonstrations/ PoC — "proof of concept (PoC) or demonstrations May be required to assess functionality and performance of the proposed solution."

c) financial qualification: The bidder must demonstrate strong financial health — with required turnover and profitability over the last 3 to 5 years — to ensure financial stability for the duration of the contract.

d) financial evaluation criteria — the TCO basis and the two methods:

Appendix to Chapter 8 — Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1whether the Chapter exists at allG: Ch. 8 · C: Ch. 9 · NC: Ch. 8 · W: NONE
2Chapter titleG: Procurements with Unique Features… · C: Special Types of Engagements… · NC: *Special Types of Non-Consultancy Procurements…*
3Number of sectionsG: 7 · C: 10 · NC: 12
4Organising principleG: Transaction structures · C and NC: Categories of provider
5Overlap between G and the other twoZERO
6Overlap between C and NCOnly four topics: SSS · Individual providers · Specialised Agencies · NGOs
7Emergencies and Disaster Management(the 16 dispensations; crisis declaration order; single offer acceptable without re-tender; Rs 50,000 GeM exception; special time-bound audits after the crisis)G ONLY
8Buy Back Offer(the two-price with/without rebate mechanism)G ONLY
9Capital Goods(item-specific budget; wet-lease alternative; TCO; the three evaluation remedies)G ONLY
10AMC(starts after warranty; NPV discounting of future AMC; the Rs 1 lakh BG for goods taken to the factory; the model termination clause)G ONLY
11net Present Value(the formula, the GPF discount rate, the solved example where the HIGHEST-priced offer becomes L1)G ONLY
12Turnkey ContractG ONLY
13Books and Print Media(Net Discount over Published Price; one-year onboarding; Rate Contract)G ONLY
14EoI for shortlistingC: an entire chapter (Ch. 7) · NC: compressed into para 8.1 and framed as an EXCEPTION to its normal single-stage two-envelope process
15The seismic-survey/ airborne-data-acquisition illustration of when NC needs EoInc only
16SSS — the MONTHLY statement of all nomination selections to the Secretary/ HeadC(distinct from the QUARTERLY nomination report in Ch. 4)
17SSS — downstream continuity must be outlined in the INITIAL RfP; competitive process required if the initial award was non-competitive or the downstream assignment is substantially largerC + NC
18Individual Consultants — comparison of at least three candidates; CEC may interview and recommend remuneration; three direct-negotiation exceptions; COI extends to the parent firmC + NC
19Rule 177 GFR bar on retired Government servants; DoE OM F.No. 3-25/2020-E.IIIA dated 09.12.2020C
20NGOs — QCBS mandatory where the shortlist is all-NGO; the five NGO-unique criteria; SSS permitted for a remote-area single-NGO caseC + NC
21Procurement Consultants/ Agents — THE 30% QUALITY-WEIGHTAGE TEST distinguishing Consultancy from Non-ConsultancyC + NC(near-identical text)
22Cost weight less THAN 50% for procurement consultants handling specific items, with the stated reasonC ONLY(NC omits the 50% cap and its reasoning)
23Financial Advisors — retainer plus success fee; QCBS mandatory for M&A/ restructuring; cost may exceed 30% or LCS for large contracts; when success fees are appropriateC ONLY
24Auditors — QCBS preferred "since in recent times the quality of audit has been a matter of concern"C ONLY
25Logo/ Symbol Design Competitions — Rule 196; Official Languages Act and Emblems and Names Act; the 11-point Competition Notice; IPR rests with the sponsoring agency; public voting for matters of national importanceC ONLY
26Integrated IT Projects — quality weightageC: "even up to 80%" · NC (8.12.1): "80%: 20% for Quality: Price"
27The MeitY/ DPIIT list of restrictive and discriminatory conditions(Gartner Magic Quadrant; Rs 1000 Cr turnover for a Rs 70 Cr procurement; G8 export experience; named foreign brands; the −25°C EPBX-at-a-Central-India-airport example)C ONLY
28Digital India/ NeGD — empanelment valid three years extendable by two; Categories A, B, C; sub-contracting PROHIBITED; IPR belongs to NeGD or client; penalties up to 10% of project valueC ONLY
29Inspection Agents — generally NC because "they only inspect within the established protocols"; payment as a percentage of value inspectednc only
30Housekeeping — GeM offers floor-area-wise vs manpower-wise; "usually the floor area wise cleaning option is more cost effective"; reasons to be recorded on filenc only
31Manpower Outsourcing — the regularisation caution; I-cards must name the contractor; LCS for high-value; service charges floor 3.85% and ceiling 7% (both inclusive of GST); floor applies only to standalone manpowernc only
32Private Security — PSARA 2005; ~60,000 ESM retire annually; at least 90% ESM workforce; DGR certificate for 5 years or age 60 whichever earlier; DGR sponsorship mandatory; sponsored agencies exempt from minimum experience and turnover; mandatory GeM route; DGR sponsors at least three agencies; no negotiation below DGR rate (up to 10%); seniority tie-breakernc only
33Vehicle Hiring — Rate Contract through OTE; one year extendable twice; PVC on fuel and wages; 10 hours/ 100 km per day within 3,000 km monthly; night charges 11 PM–6 AM; extra km paid quarterly with shortfall carried forwardnc only
34HaaS — ownership and risk remain with the service provider; provider insures at his own cost; up to 10-year contract if QCBS; ISO 9001 and ISO 20000; TCO-based evaluation via L1 or QCBS 30:70nc only

end of Chapter 8

Chapter 9 — Part a

Contract Management, Administration, Scope Control and Quality Assurance

Part IAdministration, Scope Control and Quality Assurance

Merging: Goods Ch. 9 (Contract Management) · Works Ch. 7 (Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance) · Consultancy Ch. 10 (Monitoring Consultancy Services Contract) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 9 (Monitoring Non-consultancy Services Contract)

Structural Notes

1. Four different Chapter numbers and four different titles:

ManualChapterTitle
G GoodsChapter 9Contract Management
W WorksChapter 7Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance
C ConsultancyChapter 10Monitoring Consultancy Services Contract
NC Non-ConsultancyChapter 9Monitoring Non-consultancy Services Contract

2. This is the largest Chapter in the entire Manual family — 640 kb across the four Manuals. The Works chapter alone runs to some 50 sub-sections and is by far the most elaborate treatment of contract management anywhere in the four Manuals.

3. The three bodies of material that exist in one Manual only:

Body of materialExists only in
Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue of GoodsGOODS
Aligning stakeholder interests · Monitoring Team and System · Prerequisites to Commencement · Commencement of Work · Mobilisation · Monitoring Resources Deployed · Enforcing Contractor's Obligations · Safeguarding Assets · ESHS · Monitoring Variations/ Extra/ Substituted Items · Revised DPR · Compensation Events · Time at Large · e-Bill · Closure of Contract with its four reconciliationsWORKS
Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC) · Review of Inception Phase · Incentives for Excellence in Contract Execution · Concluding the Assignment and Post-Contract ReviewCS + NC

4. Because of the volume, this chapter is issued in three parts:

  • PART A (this document) — Purpose of Contract Management · CMC · Contract Administration · Scope and Quantity Control · Quality Assurance and Inspections.
  • PART B — Time Control (delays, EOT, Force Majeure, Denial Clause, LD, Performance Notice, Compensation Events, Time at Large) · Cost Control (prices, taxes, payments) · Logistics · Closure of Contract · Post-Contract Review.
  • PART C — Breach of Contract, Remedies and Termination · Dispute Resolution (Excepted Matters, Adjudication, Mediation, Arbitration, Foreign Arbitration, Appointment of Arbitrator, Arbitral Procedure, Challenging Awards, the CPSE mechanism).

Concordance for Chapter 9 — Part A

UnifiedTopicGWCNC
9.1The Purpose of Contract Management9.1.17.110.1.19.1.1
9.2Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC)10.1.29.1.2
9.3Aligning the Interest of the Stakeholders7.2.1
9.4Monitoring Team and System7.2.2
9.5Notice to Proceed, Kick-off Meeting and Prerequisites7.2.310.2.19.2.1
9.6Commencement of Work7.2.4
9.7Mobilisation7.2.5
9.8Review of Inception Phase10.2.29.2.2
9.9Reporting and Monitoring of Progress7.2.2-410.2.39.2.3
9.10Issuing Contract Amendments/ Variations9.7.27.2.810.2.49.2.4
9.11Obligations Control — Deployment of Resources9.7.57.2.6, 7.2.710.2.59.2.5
9.12Incentives for Excellence in Contract Execution10.2.69.2.6
9.13Safeguards for Handing Over Materials/ Equipment9.7.37.2.910.2.79.2.7
9.14Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS)7.2.10
9.15Scope and Quantity Control9.27.3.1–7.3.310.39.3
9.16Quality Assurance and Inspections9.47.3.410.3.29.3.2–9.3.3
9.17Warranty Clause9.4.8

9.1 The Purpose of Contract Management

9.1.1The Governing Proposition — common to all four

W, C and NC add: "implementation of the contract should be strictly monitored — and notices issued promptly whenever a breach of provisions occurs."

9.1.2What Is Handled During This Phase — the four lists compared

G GOODS (8 heads)W WORKS (7 heads)C CONSULTANCY / NC NON-CONSULTANCY (5 heads)
a) Scope of Supply and Quantity Controla) Contract Administrationa) Contract Administration
b) Time Control – Monitoring Delaysb) Monitoring Scope of Work and Quality Assuranceb) Scope Control and Quality Assurance
c) Quality Assurance and Inspectionsc) Time Monitoringc) Time Control
d) Cost Control – Prices, Taxes and Paymentsd) Financial Monitoringd) Cost Control
e) Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue of Goodse) Closure of Contracte) Post-contract evaluation
f) Contract AdministrationPerformance Security · Amendments · Safeguards for handing over materials · Monitoring Supplier Performance · Monitoring Supplier Obligations · Contract closuref) Resolving Disputes and Conflicts
g) Breach of Contract, Remedies and Terminationg) Breach and Termination of Contract
h) Dispute resolution

THE C AND NC Sub-heads of contract administration (nine items): I) issuing the notice to proceed; ii) meetings and reviews; iii) amendments/ variations to the contract; iv) obligations control: Monitoring that key experts and contracted resources are actually employed; v) safeguards for handing over materials/ equipment; vi) resolving problems faced by consultants; vii) dispute resolution and arbitration; viii) breach of contract, remedies, and termination of services prior to the end of the contract; ix) contract closure upon completion.

THE C AND NC Sub-heads of scope control and quality assurance: I) deciding on possible modifications to scope of work and issuing contract variations; ii) monitor that all deliverables are delivered as per contract — reports including draft final report and the final report; iii) quality assurance: Review quality of outcomes at inception phase, mid-term, and final phase.

9.1.3Why Services Contracts Need MORE Intense MonitoringCNC

9.1.4Why Poor Contract Management Costs the Nation [W ONLY]

#The cost
aadditional expenditure burden due to increased costs — crowding out more deserving schemes and projects
baffects viability of projects due to increase in construction [cost] — causing losses to the CPSE or agency concerned
ceconomic burden, due to delayed return on investments
dimposes unnecessary economic burden on affected stakeholders
e"creates a culture of acceptance of delay and avoidable costs — breeding more cases."
f"increased costs of procurement due to monetisation of higher risks, perceived by contractors, of delays and scope creep associated with public-funded projects."

9.2 Contract Monitoring Committee (CMC) [C + NC ONLY]

(Rule 205 of GFR 2017)

9.2.1Constitution

9.2.2The Six Responsibilities of the CMC

"the CMC shall be responsible for:"

  1. monitoring the progress of the assignment;
  2. To oversee that the assignment is carried out as per the contract;
  3. To assess the quality of the deliverables;
  4. To accept/ reject any part of the assignment;
  5. To levy appropriate Liquidated Damages or penalty — if the assignment is not carried out as per the contract, and if the quality of services is found inferior;
  6. And for any such deficiency related to the completion of the assignment.

9.2.3The Expert-Assistance Provision

9.3 Aligning the Interest of the Stakeholders [W ONLY]

9.3.1The Incentive-Structure Principle

9.3.2The Recognition Devices — including naming at work sites

9.3.3The Closing Aphorism

9.4 Monitoring Team and System [W ONLY]

9.4.1The Principle of Proportionality for Contract Management

9.4.2Role of Apex and Management Levels

"procurement and contract management require various levels of authorisation or approvals for technical, administrative, and financial decisions. Many of these approvals are at apex/ managerial levels — which are responsible for macro management of the contract, but May not be involved in day-to-day contract management. However, their roles are important for efficiency of the contract management process."

9.4.3The Contract Manager

The scale Rule:

Contract typeWho the Contract Manager is
Small, routine contractsA single person, who has a portfolio of contracts to manage
large, complex, high-value contractsnormally a team or entity

the five attendant requirements:

  1. "a competent project management team should be set up — including training on project management to the team, if required.";
  2. "a system of project monitoring for each work shall be prepared before start of the work — and the same shall be available at site of work.";
  3. "'Deadlines' or 'contractual milestones' should be set up and tabulated to facilitate monitoring of the progress of work.";
  4. "the work shall be monitored on a quarterly/ monthly basis by the Works Committee — and a status report should be submitted to the Secretary in charge of the concerned Ministry/ Department.";
  5. "execution of the work shall primarily be the responsibility of the nominated Contract Manager. However, for large contracts, senior officers shall also review the progress and quality of the work at various stages of construction."

9.4.4Progress Reporting and Review — the Fourteen-Point MIS ReportW

"there should be a stipulation in the contract for large-value works (magnitude to be specified) — for the contractor to submit a project-specific monthly progress report of the work in a computerised form (management information system reports — MIS reports)."

#Content of the Monthly MIS Progress Report
iproject information — giving the broad features of the contract
iiintroduction — giving a brief scope of the work and the broad structural or other details
iiiconstruction Schedule of the various components — through a bar chart for the next three quarters (or as specified) — showing the milestones, targeted tasks and up-to-date progress
ivprogress chart of the various components planned and achieved — for the month as well as cumulative — with reasons for deviations, if any, in a tabular format
vplant and machinery statement — indicating those deployed in the work, and their working status
viman-power statement — indicating individually the names of all the staff deployed in the work, along with their designations
viifinancial statement — gross value of work done · advances taken · recoveries effected · amounts withheld · net payments · details of cheque payments received
viiia statement showing the extra and substituted items submitted by the contractor and payments received against them · broad details of the bank guarantees, indicating clearly their validity periods · broad details of the insurance policies · advances received and adjusted
ixprogress photographs, in colour, of the various items/ components of the work done up to date — to indicate visually the actual progress
xquality assurance and quality control tests conducted during the month, with the results thereof
xiany hold-up shall be specified
xiidispute, if any, shall also be highlighted
xiiimonthly or fortnightly progress review by Contract Manager and Procuring Entity with contractor May be necessary — to ensure that the contractor deploys sufficient resources to meet the deadlines
xivthe photograph-and-video system — see below

9.4.5Project Management SoftwareW

9.5 Notice to Proceed, Kick-off Meeting, and Ensuring Prerequisites to Commencement

9.5.1Ensuring Prerequisites to Commencement of Work W — the Six Prerequisites

1. Land acquisition: "the process of land acquisition shall be started by the Procuring Entity well ahead, and completed entirely — or at least substantially — by the time the contract is awarded."

2. PERMITS/ APPROVALS — and the delay-claim warning:

The Procuring Entity shall seek requisite statutory approvals/ permission/ clearances/ certificates From concerned local bodies and statutory authorities — including:

the illustrative list of what such clearances cover:

the contractor's side: "the contractor shall give all notices and obtain all other necessary permits and approvals as May be required for the construction — and shall pay for all such permits and approvals."

3. Approval of quarries, borrow areas and materials:

4. Safety at work site — the hazardous substances and the public-protection list:

The SHE/ ESHS apparatus: "most large contracts have a well-defined safety, health & environment (SHE) — also called environmental, social, health and safety (ESHS, with addition of the social factor) — guideline embedded in the agreement.

5. Advance payments: "to enable mobilisation, advance payment(s) are to be given after the signing of the contract — if provided in the contract — on the contractor's submission of an unconditional BG in an acceptable form."

6. INSURANCES — the four checks:

"insurance provisions are valuable risk management tools. The contracting entity must ensure the following:"

a) the insurance policies are in place in accordance with the contract;

b) the coverages are adequate and within the thresholds specified in the contract;

c) the insurance policies contain the essential information — such as coverage, duration, applicability;

d) due diligence is applied to checking the authenticity of the insurance document and payment of insurance premiums.

9.5.2Issuing the Notice to Proceed and the Kick-off MeetingCNC

The Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals frame the same stage as "Issuing Notice to Proceed, Kick-off Meeting and Pre-requisites" — the service analogue of the Works "Work Order" at para 9.6 below.

9.6 Commencement of Work [W ONLY]

The contractor's three submissions: "within the stipulated time, the contractor should submit to the Contract Manager for his consent:

a) THE work program — including the measures proposed by him for work zone safety and mitigation of environmental impact;

b) THE methods statement which the contractor proposes to adopt for execution of the works; and

c) THE quality assurance plan."

9.7 Mobilisation [W ONLY]

Mobilisation of key resources:"the Contract Manager must ensure that the technical [and other key resources are mobilised]…"(and see para 9.11 below on Monitoring Resources Deployed).

9.8 Review of Inception Phase [C + NC ONLY]

The Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals provide for a distinct Review of Inception Phase — the point at which the Procuring Entity satisfies itself, on the strength of the Inception Report (due about six weeks after the commencement date — see Chapter 2, para 2.6.3(c)), that the assignment can be carried out as planned, and that any major inconsistency in the ToR, staffing problems, or deficiency in the Procuring Entity's assistance has been surfaced early.

9.9 Reporting and Monitoring of Progress [C + NC; and W at para 9.4.4]

Common to all four is the requirement of periodic progress reporting, but the instruments differ:

ManualThe reporting instrument
W WORKSThe fourteen-point monthly MIS progress report — see para 9.4.4 above
C ConsultancyThe inception · progress · interim · and final reports — see Chapter 2, para 2.6.3(c)
NC Non-consultancyReporting against the service Level Agreement (SLA) and key performance indicators — see para 9.15.4 below
G GOODSMonitoring of supplier performance and obligations — see para 9.11 below

9.10 Issuing Contract Amendments / Variations

All four Manuals provide for amendment of the contract during execution. The Works treatment is the most detailed, and is set out at Chapter 6, para 6.10.3-1 of this Unified Manual (Variations in Works Contracts, the Variations Register, and the requirement of the Engineer's prior approval from the Procuring Entity).

9.11 Obligations Control — Monitoring Resources Deployed and Enforcing Obligations

9.11.1The Common Object

" Monitoring that key experts and contracted resources are actually employed"(the C and NC formulation) — corresponding to W paras 7.2.6 (Monitoring Resources Deployed by Contractor) and 7.2.7 (Enforcing Contractor's Obligations), and G paras 9.7.4 and 9.7.5 (Monitoring Supplier Performance and Obligations).

9.11.2The Works Apparatus

The Works Manual treats this in two distinct sections:

  • 7.2.6 — monitoring resources deployed by contractor(plant, machinery, and manpower — cross-referenced to the Plant and Machinery Statement and Man-power Statement in the monthly MIS report at para 9.4.4 items (v) and (vi) above);
  • 7.2.7 — enforcing contractor's obligations.

9.12 Incentives for Excellence in Contract Execution [C + NC ONLY]

The Consultancy and Non-Consultancy Manuals carry a short section providing for incentives for excellence in contract execution — the services counterpart of the Works provisions on aligning stakeholder interests at para 9.3 above (bonus, better rating, public recognition, and naming at work sites).

9.13 Safeguards for Handing Over Procuring Entity Materials/ Equipment to Contractors

9.13.1What May Be Handed Over

9.13.2The Bank Guarantee Requirement — and the Rs 1 lakh waiver

9.13.3The Contractor's Obligations in Respect of Loaned Assets

9.13.4The Transparency Requirement and the Closing Certificate

9.14 Environmental, Social, Health, and Safety (ESHS) Concerns [W ONLY]

9.14.1The ESHS Obligation and Its Staffing Consequence

9.14.2What ESHS Monitoring Involves During Implementation

9.14.3Safety of the Public and Labour

"the safety of all activities (including traffic safety) in and around the site, and safety of the public and labour, should be ensured by the contractor — as per prevalent labour laws/ regulations and the conditions of contract.

the hazardous substances: "special precautions must be used if hazardous chemicals are used or stored at the workplace — lead, silica, asbestos, and wood/ stone that will be cut and generate dust; And construction materials containing zinc, cadmium, beryllium, and mercury."

the public-protection list: "besides protecting the public from noise and environmental pollution — they must be safeguarded from:

9.15 Scope and Quantity Control

9.15.1Quantity Tolerance — Minor Short/ Excess Deliveries [G ONLY]

9.15.2The Option Clause at the Contract Management Stage [G ONLY]

1. The right: "under this clause, the purchaser retains the right to place orders for an additional quantity up to a specified percentage of the originally contracted quantity — at the same rate and terms of the contract — during the currency of the contract.

2. The eight conditions governing operation of the option clause:

#Condition
a"if the quantity has been increased under the option clause — the negative option clause should not be invoked thereafter, or vice versa."
b"in case of a decrease in the ordered quantity — it would be fair to allow the firm to supply work-in-progress or goods already put up for inspection."
c"there should be no declining trend in the price of the stores — as evidenced by the fact that no order has since been placed at lower rates, and no tender has been opened since the time offers have been received at lower rates — even if not finalised."
d"if the option clause exists during the provisioning of the next cycle, and tender evaluation in the next cycle shows an increasing price trend — the application of the option clause must be positively considered. The contract management authority must also keep an eye on delivery against the contract. If other conditions are satisfied, the option clause must be exercised."
e"the option clause is normally exercised after receipt of 50 (fifty) per cent quantity. If the delivery period is going to expire and other conditions are fulfilled — it can be exercised even earlier."
f"the option clause shall be exercised during the currency of the contract — so that the contractor has reasonable time/ notice for executing such an increase. It can be exercised even if the quantity of the original order is completed before the original last date of delivery. If not already agreed upon, the delivery period shall be fixed for the additional quantity on the lines of the delivery period in the original order — this will satisfy the requirement of giving reasonable notice to the supplier."
g"this provision can also be exercised in case of PAC/ single supplier OEM cases."
h"however, where parallel contracts on multiple suppliers are available — care should be taken in exercising the option clause, so that the original tender decision of splitting quantities and differential pricing is not upset or vitiated. Other things being equal, the supplier with the lower rate should first be considered for the option quantity."

9.15.3Scope of ServicesCNC

1. The performance obligation:

2. The standard of performance:

9.15.4Performance Standards and Quality Control CNC — and the 0.5% damages

1. The notification of defects:

2. The cost-of-correction deduction:

3. Damages for shortfall in performance — the 0.5% Rule:

9.15.5Service Level Agreement (SLA) [NC ONLY]

The Non-Consultancy Manual carries a distinct section on the Service Level Agreement (para 9.3.3), which has no counterpart in the Consultancy Manual's scope-control section — consistent with the NC emphasis on measurable performance standards and KPIs (see Chapter 2, para 2.7.2(d)).

9.16 Quality Assurance and InspectionsGfullest text

9.16.1The Three Components of Quality Assurance

#ComponentHow it is done
adefining quality standards"the description and TS define the quality standards expected from the product."
bplanning assurance of quality"by specifying the qualification criteria for the suppliers — to ensure that they have the technical, infrastructure and financial capabilities to meet the required quality standards. Specifications also lay down quality control requirements — to indicate parameters, target values, tolerances, and methods of measurement. This also involves laying down the type of inspection agency for inspection."
cmeasurement of quality"done through a scheme of inspections at the contract management stage — which lays down the actual process of inspection."

9.16.2Inspections — Measuring Quality Standards

"the stages and modes of inspection May vary depending on:

9.16.3Types of Inspection

A. Pre-dispatch Inspection

a) stage inspection and its purpose:

B) who inspects: "inspection of the materials before dispatch shall be carried out by the inspection agency nominated in the contract, or by its representative, at the premises of the supplier — in accordance with the inspection procedure laid down and incorporated in the purchase order."

c) who pays for testing: "the supplier should bear the testing charges for samples — and this should be made clear at the enquiry stage itself, to avoid claims later or affect his position in the comparative statement of offers. Any special testing involving significant financial implications shall be settled prior to placement of the order — and such costs should form part of the evaluation."

d)–g) offshore supplies and the waiver route:

  • "the Procuring Entity May depute its representative or a third-party inspection agency to the supplier's manufacturing premises to carry out/ witness inspection and testing, performance testing — at its discretion";
  • "alternatively, the Procuring Entity shall retain an option to waive the above and accept the material based on the supplier's internal test report, guarantee and fitment certificate. In this regard, the written approval of the hod of the indenting Department should be obtained, and the reasons for it should be recorded";
  • "whenever the inspection is carried out at the supplier's manufacturing premises — an inspection on receipt of goods at the Procuring Entity shall also be carried out by an officer of the indenting Department or a third-party inspection agency."

h) the inspector-hospitality prohibition — a direct instruction from DoE:

B. Inspection of Goods on Receipt at Consignee/ User's Site

9.16.4Types of Inspection Agencies

1.Internal Inspection Authorities

2.External Inspecting Authorities

A) third-party inspection and the reserved right:

b) external laboratory testing — the approved list and the five guidelines:

#Guideline
i"external testing May invariably be done by nationally accredited or reliable laboratories — preference being given to the National Test House (NTH). For testing the samples drawn from the lots offered by the supplier — an inspection agent qualified to conduct random sampling in accordance with quality assurance requirements should make the selection of samples."
ii"test reports must contain the values obtained in the tests — besides fail/ pass results. The laboratory must preserve the sample and test records for a period of three years."
iii"the Department should lay down a liability statement for costs expended on tests, dispatch of samples, transportation costs, test charges, and so on."
iv"in cases where the samples are to be tested at the supplier's cost because of the non-availability of his own testing arrangements — the responsibility of depositing the testing fees would rest with the supplier."
vthe default cost-allocation Rule and its exception — see below

3.Joint Inspection on Complaint

9.16.5Issue of Inspection Report

"after satisfactory inspection and tests — the acceptable goods shall be stamped, labelled…"(and the Inspection Report issued accordingly; see also the Goods Receipt and Inspection Report at Annexure 25 of the Goods Manual.)

9.16.6Material Put Up for Inspection Towards the End of Delivery

A distinct sub-section of the Goods Manual (9.4.6) governs the treatment of material offered for inspection at or near the expiry of the delivery period — read with para 9.3.11 (Handling Deliveries at the Last Moment or after Expiry of the Delivery Period), covered in Part B of this chapter.

9.16.7Approval of Acceptable Deviations

Goods para 9.4.7 provides for the formal approval of acceptable deviations discovered at inspection — the contract-management counterpart of the minor vs substantive deviation test at the evaluation stage (Chapter 7 Part A, para 7.15.4).

9.17 Warranty Clause [G ONLY]

9.17.1The Warranty and Its Survival

9.17.2Notification of Defect

9.17.3The 14-Day Rectification Obligation

9.17.4THE WARRANTY PENALTY REGIME — 0.5% per week, capped at 5%

9.17.5Warranty on Rectified/ Replaced Goods — the no-extension rule

9.17.6The 21-Day Breach Trigger

Appendix to Chapter 9 — Part a: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Chapter number and titleG: Ch. 9 Contract Management · W: Ch. 7 *Execution and Monitoring of Works and Quality Assurance · C: Ch. 10 Monitoring… · NC: Ch. 9 *Monitoring…
2Number of heads under contract managementG: 8 · W: 7 · C and NC: 5 (with nine sub-heads under Contract Administration)
3"Post-contract evaluation" as a distinct headc + nc only
4The six ways poor project management "costs the nation"(incl. "creates a culture of acceptance of delay" and "monetisation of higher risks perceived by contractors")W ONLY
5Why services contracts need more intense monitoring — "lack of physically/ tangibly measurable outcomes"; Management by Exception; counterpart Project Managerc + nc only
6contract Monitoring Committee (CMC) — Rule 205; at least three members; CEC members may be reused; outside experts at Procuring Entity's cost; six responsibilities incl. power to levy LD and accept/ reject any partc + nc only
7Appointing another qualified consultant to assist the CMC in complex assignmentsc + nc only
8Aligning the interest of the stakeholders — incentive structure; pecuniary and non-pecuniary; naming the contractor and project-in-charge publicly at work sites; recognition with "long shelf life"W ONLY
9Principle of Proportionality — "one size does not fit all"; too many checks stifle innovation, too little control produces "an undisciplined crisis management culture"W ONLY
10The Contract Manager — the six alternative titles; single person for small contracts, team for large; quarterly/ monthly monitoring by the Works Committee with status report to the SecretaryW ONLY
11The fourteen-point monthly MIS Progress Report — incl. named manpower statement, colour progress photographs, hold-ups and disputes to be highlightedW ONLY
12The photograph/ video system as "a permanent record of the project for posterity… in case needed for litigation or enquiry/ investigation"W ONLY
13Project management software named — MS PPM and Oracle Primavera P6; PMI-certified contract managersW ONLY
14The six prerequisites to commencement — land acquisition, permits (with the delay-claim warning), quarries and borrow areas, safety at work site, advance payments, insurancesW ONLY
15"All or most pre-requisites shall be fulfilled before award of the LoA"W ONLY
16Commencement of Work — Work Order within 2 weeks but not later than 6 weeks from LoA; the three contractor submissions (Work Program, Method Statement, QA Plan); possession of siteW ONLY
17Mobilisation as a distinct pre-construction phaseW ONLY
18Review of Inception Phasec + nc only
19Incentives for Excellence in Contract Executionc + nc only
20Safeguards for handing over materials — the Rs 1 lakh BG waiver and indemnity bond alternative; certificate on return of ID cards and gate passes; payment for electricity/ water/ craneCommon — W text fullest
21ESHS/ SHE — mandatory skills in Bid Documents; site safety engineer mandatory; frequent SHE audits; the hazardous-substances list; the public-protection listW ONLY
22Quantity tolerance — 5% of contract value or Rs 5 lakh whichever is less; not applicable to indivisible items or machinery and plantG ONLY
23The eight conditions governing the Option Clause — no reverse invocation; exercise normally after 50% receipt; no declining price trend; must be exercised during currency; care with parallel contractsG ONLY
24Scope of Services — "such other work-elements not mentioned explicitly but that can be reasonably inferred"c + nc only
25Damages for shortfall in performance — 0.5% of delivered price "but not as a penalty", without having to prove actual lossc + nc only
26Service Level Agreement as a distinct sectionnc only
27The three components of Quality Assurance (defining, planning, measuring)G ONLY
28Stage inspection; "even after pre-dispatch inspections, materials should be inspected again upon receipt as a matter of abundant precaution"G ONLY
29The prohibition on suppliers paying for inspectors' travel, stay and hospitalityG ONLY
30"The consignee should be the final authority for the acceptance of goods"G ONLY
31"The Procuring Entity retains the right to reject the consignment even if third-party inspection authorities have cleared it"G ONLY
32External testing — preference to the National Test House; test reports must contain values not just fail/pass; laboratory must preserve sample and records for three YEARS; referral/ appellate laboratoriesG ONLY
33The default testing-cost rule (supplier pre-dispatch, procuring agency post-receipt) — and the exception that if the material FAILS, the charges become the seller'sG ONLY
34Joint Inspection on Complaint — the three-member team; if the firm fails to associate, it is held with the pre-inspecting agencyG ONLY
35Warranty Clause — 24 months after delivery or 18 months from placement in service whichever sooner; obligations survive acceptance and even termination; 14-day rectification; 0.5% per week capped at 5%; replacement warranty runs only to the ORIGINAL warranty period; 21-day failure = breachG ONLY

end of Chapter 9 — part a

Part IITime Control, Cost Control, Logistics and Closure

Merging: Goods Ch. 9 (paras 9.3, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7.6) · Works Ch. 7 (paras 7.4, 7.5, 7.6) · Consultancy Ch. 10 (paras 10.4, 10.5, 10.6) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 9 (paras 9.4, 9.5, 9.6)

Concordance for Chapter 9 — Part B

UnifiedTopicGWCNC
9.18Delivery Period; Terms of Delivery9.3.1, 9.3.27.4.1, 7.4.29.4.1
9.19Delays in Delivery/ Execution9.3.37.4.510.4.19.4.2
9.20Extension of Delivery / Extension of Time (EOT)9.3.47.4.610.4.29.4.3
9.21Performance Notice9.3.57.4.910.4.39.4.4
9.22Force Majeure (FM)9.3.67.4.410.4.99.4.10
9.23Denial Clause (DC)9.3.77.4.810.4.49.4.5
9.24Liquidated Damages, Quantum and Waiver9.3.8–9.3.107.4.710.4.5–10.4.89.4.6–9.4.9
9.25Handling Deliveries at the Last Moment/ After Expiry9.3.11
9.26Compensation Events7.4.10
9.27Time At Large7.4.11
9.28Cost Control — Prices, Taxes and Payments9.57.510.59.5
9.29Electronic Bill (e-Bill) Processing System7.5.8
9.30Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue9.6
9.31Closure of Contract9.7.67.610.69.6
9.32Concluding the Assignment and Post-Contract Review10.69.6

9.18 Delivery Period and Terms of Delivery

9.18.1The Delivery Period Must Be SpecificG

9.18.2Terms of Delivery Determine When Title PassesG

9.18.3Contract Effective Date and Work ProgramW

The Works Manual replaces "delivery period" with Contract Effective Date (7.4.1) and the Work Program (7.4.2) — the latter being the contractor's submission approved by the Contract Manager at the commencement stage (see Part A, para 9.6).

9.18.4Contract Period and OptionsNC

The Non-Consultancy Manual carries a distinct opening section on Contract Period and Options (9.4.1) — governing the initial contract term and the exercise of extension options in service contracts.

9.19 Delays in Delivery / Execution

9.19.1The Governing Principle — Time is the Essence

The two remedies: The Procuring Entity May, without prejudice to his other rights:

a) recover from the contractor Liquidated Damages; or

b) treat the delay as a breach of contract and avail all the remedies therein.

C adds the notification duty: "the consultant should notify the Procuring Entity and explain the causes of such delays."

9.19.2INORDINATE DELAYS — the 25% test and its consequence

9.19.3Delay for Which the Supplier is NOT Responsible — the four cases

"in cases where there is a delay for which the supplier is not responsible — the delivery period needs to be re-fixed without imposing any penalty on the supplier — i.e., without LD and without a Denial Clause.

Normally, in the following circumstances, the supplier May not be considered responsible for the delay:"

#Case
icases where the supplier is dependent on the approval of the pre-production sample — and the delay occurs in approving the sample, though submitted by the supplier in time
iiwhere extension is granted on account of some omission on the part of the purchaser, which affects the due performance of the contract by the supplier
iiicases where the purchaser controls the entire production Schedule of the supplier
ivcases where production and/ or delivery has been affected by force Majeure, or statutory change, or specific executive instructions issued by govt.

9.20 Extension of Delivery / Extension of Time (EOT)

9.20.1THE TWO DISTINCT CONCEPTS — Re-fixation vs ExtensionWthe clearest statement

RE-FIXATION OF DELIVERYEXTENSION OF TIME (EOT)
Whenthe delay is not attributable to the contractor (or in case of Force Majeure)the delay is attributable (fully or partly) to the contractor
What it is"a fresh completion period, treated like the original completion period — which is arrived at by recasting the original contractual completion period, after taking care of the lost period for which the contractor was not responsible"the completion Schedule is extended
LDwithout LDwith LD
Denial ClauseWithout the denial clauseWith the denial clause
Approvalwith the approval of Competent Authority(as above)

9.20.2The Contractor's Duty to Give Notice

9.20.3The Two Pre-conditions for Granting ExtensionG

on approval from the ca, the Procuring Entity May agree to extend the delivery Schedule — with or without LD, and with or without the Denial Clause — provided:

A) the earlier-delivery test: "that a higher rate in the original tender was not accepted against other lower quotations in consideration of the earlier delivery."

b) the falling-price test: "in the case of fixed price contracts — there is no falling trend in prices for this item, as evidenced by the fact that, in the intervening period, neither orders have been placed at rates lower than this contract, nor any tender has been opened where such rates have been received — even though the tender is not yet decided.

9.20.4Extension Amounts to an Amendment — and Requires Consent

9.20.5EXTENSION AFTER EXPIRY — Section 63 of the Indian Contract Act [W ONLY]

9.20.6THE CORRESPONDENCE TRAP — and the mandatory closing sentence

9.20.7THE LD WARNING TRAP — why "without prejudice" is NOT enough

9.21 Performance Notice (Notice-cum-Extension Letter)

9.22 Force Majeure Clause (FM)

9.22.1The Definition and Its Exclusions

9.22.2What the FM Clause Does — suspension, NOT excuse

9.22.3The Notice Requirement — 14 days, and no ex post facto claim

FM affecting the purchaser: "there May be an FM situation affecting the purchase organisation only. In such a situation, the purchase organisation is to communicate with the supplier along similar lines as above for further necessary action."

9.22.4the 90-DAY Termination Option

9.22.5The Immunity from Punitive Provisions

9.23 Denial Clause (DC)

9.23.1What It Is and Why It Exists

9.23.2the Asymmetric Operation of the Denial Clause

| ANY downward Revision in statutory duties, PVC, and foreign exchange rate | the purchaser reserves his right to get the benefit During such period |

9.24 Liquidated Damages (LD) — Concept, Quantum and Waiver

9.24.1The Legal Concept

9.24.2Quantum of LD — the Rates Compared

ManualRate per week of delayMaximum
G GOODS0.5 (half) per cent of the delivered price (including elements of GST, freight and variations) of the delayed Goods and/ or incidental Works/ Services — for each week of delay or part thereof, until actual delivery or performance5% of the total contract value(or any other percentage if prescribed)
10% in case of INORDINATE DELAY
W WORKS — repair works costing UP TO Rs. 20 LAKH1 PER CENT (1%) of the contract value(that includes variations, taxes and duties)per week5% of contract value
10% in case of inordinate delays
W Works — all other works0.5 PER CENT (0.5%) of the contract value per week of delay5% of contract value
10% in case of inordinate delays

9.24.3LD on the VARIED Price — and the no-supply rule

9.24.4the GST Treatment of LD

9.24.5Incentives / Bonus for Early CompletionW

the seven-day reporting condition: "to avail of the incentive clause, it shall be mandatory on the part of the contractor to report the actual date of completion to the concerned Contract Manager.

9.24.6WAIVER OF LD — the three rules

1. The general Rule:

2. GOVERNMENT ESTABLISHMENTS — the special dispensation:

3. Development/ indigenisation contracts:

9.25 Handling Deliveries at the Last Moment or After the Expiry of the Delivery Period [G ONLY]

9.25.1the VOLUNTARY-ABROGATION Trap

9.25.2LOCAL SUPPLIES — the Franking Clause

"if the contractor makes supplies locally after the expiry of the delivery period — the supplies May be provisionally retained under a franking clause reserving right — and the contractor May be asked to obtain an extension of the delivery period from an authorised officer, with or without any LD/ Denial Clause."

9.25.3Supplies from Outside Contractors — the consignee's intimation

9.25.4IMPORTS — and the Letter of Credit safeguard

9.26 Compensation Events [W ONLY]

9.26.1The Definition and the Four Categories

These can be due to delays or default by the contracting entity in:

#Category
aproviding of encumbrance-free possession or access to site
bdischarging of obligations by the contracting entity — drawings · specifications · instruction · encumbrance-free site · approving of sub-contractor · payment · and completion certificates
cinfructuous additional or tests, works · delays due to the contracting entity's orders, default, or risks
dunforeseen adverse conditions — than could reasonably have been assumed after due diligence

9.26.2THE 'EARLY WARNING' REQUIREMENT — and the consequence of failure

9.26.3Payment May Continue While the EOT Proposal is Pending

9.27 Time at Large [W ONLY]

How to avoid it — the four-step prescription:

9.28 Cost Control — Prices, Taxes and Payments

9.28.1Prices Must Be Firm and As QuotedG

The controlled-price recovery right:"if the prices charged are discovered to be higher than any controlled or regulated price — the Procuring Entity shall have the right to either recover [the excess]…"(see Chapter 6, para 6.14.1-2 on undue profiteering and the MRP ceiling).

9.28.2Payment of Taxes and Duties; Statutory Variation Clause

Covered in full at Chapter 6, paras 6.16.1 to 6.16.4 of this Unified Manual — GST registration and HSN rules, the three bidder-borne taxes, customs duty, and the Statutory Variation Clause with its asymmetric operation (increases borne by the Procuring Entity only during the original/ re-fixed period; reductions passed on during the original and extended period).

9.28.3Financial MonitoringW

9.28.4Payments to Contractors and Handling of Securities

The payment machinery — Interim Payment Certificates, the Measurement Book regime, the 75%-within-10-working-days rule, and final bills within three months — is set out at Chapter 6, para 6.10.3 of this Unified Manual.

9.29 Electronic Bill (e-Bill) Processing System [W ONLY]

The Works Manual carries a distinct section (7.5.8) on the e-Bill Processing System — the electronic submission and processing of contractors' running account bills, integrated with the Public Financial Management System. It has no counterpart in the other three Manuals.

9.30 Logistics: Transportation, Receiving, Storage and Issue of Goods [G ONLY]

9.30.1Special Instructions for Transportation, Packaging and Storage

#Instruction
aWHERE critical equipment of high value is involved — suitable special instructions shall be conveyed to the supplier about the mode of transport, loading, avoidance of transhipment — and, if necessary, provision of escorts
bin the case of chemicals, powdery materials, liquid materials — parties May be advised on proper packaging to avoid spillage en route, pollution problems — and conforming to the ISO 14001 standard
cspecial attention should be paid to perishable goods, considering their time-sensitive nature — regarding packaging · transportation · handling · storage (cold storage/ cold chain) · and fifo (first in first out) system of delivery
din case the Procuring Entity arranges transport — suitable instructions May be incorporated in the transportation contract

9.30.2Full Truck Loads and the "Not to Self" Rule

9.30.3Shipping Arrangements — the six-week notice

9.30.4Transfer of Title of Goods

1. The intention Rule: "the title of goods, and resultant rights and liabilities, is transferred to the buyer at such time as the parties to the contract intend this to happen — as recorded in the terms of the contract."

2. The risk Rule — and the "notwithstanding" chain:

3. Claims against the carrier: "the contractor shall alone be entitled and responsible for making claims against any carrier — in respect of non-delivery, short delivery, mis-delivery, loss, destruction, damage, or deterioration of the goods entrusted to such carrier by the contractor for transmission to the ultimate consignee or the interim consignee."

9.30.5Insurance in Transit

BasisWho insures
DOMESTIC GOODS supplied on a CIF/ FOR destination basisthe contractor is responsible until all the goods contracted arrive in good condition at the destination. The contractor May, at its option, cover the transit risk by getting the goods duly insured in his own name at his own cost
IMPORT of goods on FOB and CFR offersTHE procuring Entity shall arrange the insurance

9.30.6Distribution of Dispatch Documents — the 24-hour rule

9.30.7Receipt of Consignment

A. Preliminary Inspection and Receipt

What the preliminary inspection covers:

B. the SHELF-LIFE Rule — 75%

C. Detailed Inspection on Receipt

D. CONSIGNEE'S Right of Rejection of PRE-INSPECTED Goods — the 90-Day Rule

9.30.8Goods Receipt and Inspection Report (GRIR)

A. What a GRIR Is — and how it differs from a preliminary receipt

The two functions of the GRIR:

when a GRIR is prepared: "accounting of the material received shall be based on the GRIR prepared after inspection and acceptance of the material, which the concerned officers will sign.

B. THE REJECTION GRIR — and the yellow paint mark

The 21-DAY removal Rule and the risk-and-cost position:

C. Ground Rent on Unlifted Rejected Goods

9.30.9Storage and Issue of Inspected Goods

Goods para 9.6.7 governs the storage and issue of inspected goods — the handover to the warehouse against the GRIR, and the subsequent issue of stores to indenting sections.

9.31 Closure of Contract

9.31.1Completion of Construction W — the seven closing steps

1. The completion certificate and its two accompanying documents:

2. The joint inspection and "as built" drawings:

3. Occupancy certificates and nocs: "the contractor/ PWO/ PSU would be responsible for obtaining completion/ occupancy certificates/ clearances and no-objection-certificates (nocs), if applicable, from the local civic authorities — for completed work and facilities, before handing over the same to the 'Procuring Entity' for putting them to functional use."

4. Restoration of auxiliary services:

5. What must be handed over: The contractor/ PWO/ PSU shall hand over the completed work — including all services and facilities constructed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications, fulfilling all agreed techno-functional requirements — along with:

6. The Project Completion Report (PCR) — and the one-month deadline:

7. Record keeping: "record keeping should be created at every work centre, to facilitate proper stacking of records pertaining to the completed works. The records should be preserved in such a manner that the same can be retrieved whenever required."

9.31.2Completion of CONTRACT — and the single Defects Liability Certificate

9.31.3RECONCILIATION 1 — Material and Works ReconciliationW

9.31.4RECONCILIATION 2 — Reconciliation with the User DepartmentW

"besides works reconciliation — the user Department should certify in writing that the following activities (wherever applicable) have been completed by the contractor, to the department's satisfaction, as per the contract:"

#Item to be certified
aachievement of performance standards of work
binstallation and commissioning, if any
csupport service during the defect liability period — which has ended on ______
das made drawings
ereturn of all id cards, gate passes, documents, drawings, protective gear, material, equipment, facilities and assets loaned to contractor

9.31.5RECONCILIATION 3 — Payment ReconciliationW

9.32 Concluding the Assignment and Post-Contract Review [C + NC ONLY]

The Consultancy Manual (para 10.6) and the Non-Consultancy Manual (para 9.6) both carry a section titled "Concluding the Assignment and Post Contract review" — giving effect to the fifth head of contract management in those Manuals, "Post contract evaluation" (see Part A, para 9.1.2).

It governs:

  • THE acceptance of the final deliverables — including the Final Report, in respect of which (see Chapter 2, para 2.6.3(c)) "the consultants alone are responsible for their findings; although changes may be suggested in the course of the discussions, consultants should not be forced to make such changes";
  • THE release of final payment and guarantees (if any), and closing the contract; and
  • THE post-contract review — the retrospective evaluation of how the assignment performed, feeding back into future need assessment, ToR drafting and shortlisting criteria.

Appendix to Chapter 9 — Part B: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1Delivery Period "deemed to be the essence of the contract"; terms of delivery determine when TITLE passesG ONLY
2Contract Effective Date and Work Program as the opening time-control provisionsW ONLY
3Contract Period and Options as the opening time-control provisionnc only
4INORDINATE DELAY — the 25% test; show-cause notice; deficient performance recorded for future tenders; LD cap rises from 5% to 10%G + W
5The four cases where the supplier is not responsible for delay(pre-production sample approval; purchaser's omission; purchaser controls the production schedule; FM/ statutory change/ executive instructions)G ONLY
6RE-FIXATION (no LD, no denial clause) vs extension of time (with LD, with denial clause)W states the distinction most clearly; G and C/NC apply the same substance
7"EOT must not be left to the end… interim EOT may be awarded"; EOT and LD reviewed after the Final Taking-Over CertificateW ONLY
8The two pre-conditions for extension — the earlier-delivery test and the falling-price test; PVC-linked raw materials may be extended even on a falling trend but with the denial clauseG ONLY
9Extension after expiry permissible under SECTION 63 of the Indian Contract Act with mutual consent — "the contract does not automatically terminate upon expiry"W ONLY
10The correspondence trap and the mandatory closing sentenceG + W
11Why "without prejudice" alone does not preserve the right to LDG + W
12Graded authority structure for granting extensionsW ONLY
13Performance Notice (notice-cum-extension letter)All four
14Force Majeure — expressly EXCLUDES "predictable/ seasonal rain"; notice within 14 days; cannot be claimed ex post facto; 90-day termination option without financial repercussionG ONLY(fullest); W, C, NC carry shorter versions
15The Denial Clause and its asymmetric operation — "PVC, other variations and foreign exchange clauses operate only during the ORIGINAL delivery period"G + W
16LD quantumG: 0.5% per week, max 5% (10% if inordinate) · W: 1% per week for repair works up to Rs 20 lakh; 0.5% for all other works; max 5% (10% if inordinate)
17LD applies on the price AS VARIED by PVC; LDs accrue only on delayed supplies; on cancellation only the loss occasioned can be recoveredG + W
18For GST, LD to be shown as a DEDUCTION on the invoice value by the contractorG + W
19Incentive/ bonus for early completion — 1% of contract value per month, max 5%; actual completion date to reach the CA within seven daysW ONLY
20Waiver of LD — "strictly an exception rather than a rule"; Government establishments as distinct from PSUs not to be penalised and risk-purchase claims not enforced; NO LD in development/ indigenisation contractsG ONLY
21Handling deliveries after expiry — the voluntary-abrogation trap; the FRANKING CLAUSE text; the consignee's intimation on demurrage and wharfage; the LC safeguard for importsG ONLY
22COMPENSATION EVENTS — four categories; the 'EARLY WARNING' requirement failing which no compensation; EOT to be finalised within two months; payment continues without LD recovery while the EOT proposal is pendingW ONLY
23Time At Large — the contractor is freed from his obligation to complete within the specified time; the four-step prescription to avoid itW ONLY
24Quarterly update of cash flow projections, cost estimates and milestones by the Contract ManagerW ONLY
25Electronic Bill (e-Bill) Processing SystemW ONLY
26LOGISTICS — ISO 14001 packaging for chemicals; FIFO and cold chain for perishables; "booked to the Procuring Entity and not 'self'"; six weeks' notice for shipping; 24-hour dispatch notificationG ONLY
27Transfer of title — risk remains with the contractor notwithstanding inspection, dispatch or payment; contractor alone entitled to claim against the carrierG ONLY
28The 75% shelf-life rule and the right to rejectG ONLY
29Consignee's right to reject pre-inspected goods within 90 days of the original Inspection ReportG ONLY
30GRIR vs preliminary receipt (quality AND quantity vs quantity only); the yellow paint/ chisel mark on rejected material; 21 days to lift at supplier's risk and cost; removal only after recovery of advance/ freight; ground rent 0.2%–0.5% per dayG ONLY
31Closure of contract — completion certificate with completion drawings and videography; restoration of auxiliary services including removal of garbage and debris; Maintenance Manual/ sop; Project Completion Report within one MONTH of settlement of final billsW ONLY
32"There will be only one DLC"; no-claim certificate before releasing the BG; the Rs 25 lakh threshold for the three reconciliationsW ONLY
33The three reconciliations — Material and Works · User Department · PaymentW ONLY
34Concluding the Assignment and POST-CONTRACT REVIEWc + nc only

end of Chapter 9 — part b

Part IIIBreach, Termination and Dispute Resolution

Merging: Goods Ch. 9 (paras 9.8–9.10) · Works Ch. 7 (paras 7.7–7.9) · Consultancy Ch. 10 (paras 10.7–10.9) · Non-Consultancy Ch. 9 (paras 9.7–9.9)

A Note on this Part — the Most NEARLY-UNIFORM Block in the Entire Manual Family

Unlike every other chapter, the dispute-resolution apparatus is substantially COMMON to all four Manuals, running to roughly the same 800 lines in each.

The reason is that it does not derive from the character of the procurement at all. It derives from a single set of statutes and a single set of DoE instructions applying uniformly:

SourceInstrument
StatuteIndian Contract Act, 1872 · Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 (amended 2015 and 2021) · Mediation Act, 2023 · msmed Act, 2006 · Indian evidence Act (replaced by Bhartiya Sakshya Adhiniyam 2023 from 1 July 2024)
DoE instructionsOM No. F.11/21/2024-PPD dated 03.06.2024 (the governing instruction on arbitration, mediation and challenging awards) · OM No. F.1/1/2021-PPD dated 29.10.2021 (General Instructions on Procurement and Project Management, incl. Rule 227A of GFR)

The only substantial divergences are noted in the Appendix at the end.

Concordance for Chapter 9 — Part C

UnifiedTopicGWCNC
9.33Breach of Contract9.8.17.8.110.8.19.8.1
9.34Termination of Contract for Default9.8.27.8.210.8.29.8.2
9.35Determination for Convenience / Frustration9.8.3, 9.8.47.8.310.8.39.8.3
9.36Limitation of Liabilities9.8.57.8.410.8.49.8.4
9.37Disputes9.9.17.7.110.7.19.7.1
9.38Excepted Matters9.9.27.7.210.7.29.7.2
9.39Adjudication9.9.37.7.310.7.39.7.3
9.40Mediation9.9.47.7.410.7.49.7.4
9.41Arbitration9.9.57.7.510.7.59.7.5
9.42Foreign Arbitration9.9.67.7.610.7.69.7.6
9.43Notice for and Reference to Arbitration9.9.7, 9.9.87.7.7, 7.7.810.7.7–89.7.7–8
9.44Appointment of Arbitrator9.9.97.7.910.7.99.7.9
9.45The Arbitral Procedure9.9.107.7.1010.7.109.7.10
9.46Challenging Arbitration/ Judicial Awards9.9.117.7.1110.7.119.7.11
9.47AMRCD — CPSE Disputes Mechanism7.7.12
9.48Contract Management — Risks and Mitigations9.107.910.99.9

9.33 Breach of Contract

9.33.1What Constitutes a Breach

The three named categories of default:

#CategoryContent
adefault in performance and obligations"if the contractor fails to deliver any or all the goods, or fails to perform any other contractual obligations — including Code of Integrity, or the obligation to maintain production capability (equipment & manufacturing facilities) based on which the contract was awarded — within the period stipulated in the contract, or within any extension thereof granted by the Procuring Entity — it shall be treated as a breach of contract."
binsolvencyif the contractor or any partner shall at any time be adjudged insolvent · or shall have a receiving order or order for the administration of his estate made against him · or shall take any proceeding for composition under any insolvency Act · or make any conveyance or assignment of his effects · or enter into any assignment or composition with his creditors · or suspend payment · or if the firm be dissolved under the partnership Act — the Procuring Entity May consider it as a breach of contract
cliquidationif the contractor is a company being wound up voluntarily or by order of a court · or a receiver, liquidator or manager on behalf of the debenture-holders is appointed · or circumstances shall have arisen which entitle the court or debenture-holders to appoint a receiver, liquidator or manager — the Procuring Entity May consider it as a breach of contract

9.33.2THE 'NOTICE OF DEFAULT' — two weeks, and the withholding of payments

9.34 Termination of Contract for Default

9.34.1The Notice of Termination and the Three Savings

Such termination shall not:

a) prejudice or affect the rights and remedies which have accrued and/ or shall accrue to the Procuring Entity after that;

b) affect the performance of the contract to the extent not terminated — unless otherwise instructed by the Procuring Entity;

c) extinguish warranty obligations of the contractor for the goods already supplied, if any.

9.34.2the Seven Additional Recourses on Termination

"if the contract is terminated in whole or in part — additionally, recourse May be taken to any one or more of the following actions:"

#Recourse
atemporarily withhold payments due to the contractor — till recoveries due to invocation of other contractual remedies are complete
bcall back any loaned property or advances of payment, if any — with the levy of interest rate (e.g., the interest rate of the general provident fund — GPF) prevailing on the date of release of advance payment, plus 2%, to be compounded quarterly
crecover Liquidated Damages and invoke the Denial Clause for delays
dprefer claims against insurance, if any
eencash and/ or forfeit Performance Security
finvoke any other contractual securities
ginitiate proceedings in a court of law — for the transgression of the law, tort, and loss, which are not addressable by the above means

9.35 Determination of Contract for Convenience of the Procuring Entity, or Frustration of Contract

9.35.1The 'Notice for Determination of Contract'

The three savings:

  • "such termination shall not prejudice or affect the rights and remedies accrued, and/ or that shall accrue after that, to the parties";
  • "unless otherwise instructed, the contractor shall continue to perform the contract to the extent not terminated";
  • "all warranty obligations, if any, shall continue to survive despite the termination."

9.35.2THE CRITICAL LEGAL POINT — determination for convenience is NOT a legal right

9.35.3The Thirty-Day Rule on Completed Goods

9.35.4FRUSTRATION OF CONTRACT — the 60-day mutual-agreement window

9.36 Limitation of Liabilities

9.36.1The Aggregate Cap — and its three exclusions

9.36.2The Consequential-Loss Exclusion — and the LD carve-out

9.37 Disputes

9.37.1The Definition of a "Dispute"

The formal definition — note the four elements:

9.37.2THE DoE DIRECTIVE ON CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES — a passage worth memorising

9.37.3THE SEQUENTIAL RULE — and the three mechanisms

The THREE-STEP Ladder:

StepMechanismGoverning instrument
1adjudication(contractual)
2mediationthe Mediation Act, 2023
3arbitrationthe Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996

the legal-advice duty: "while processing a case for dispute resolution/ litigation/ arbitration — the Procuring Entity is to take legal advice at appropriate stages."

9.38 Excepted Matters

9.38.1The Definition and the Reciprocity Exception

9.38.2What Excepted Matters Include

"unless otherwise stipulated in the contract — Excepted Matters shall include, but not be limited to:"

#Excepted matter
1ANY controversies or claims brought by a third party for bodily injury, death, [or] property [damage]
(and the further heads specified in the contract)
6provisions incorporated in the contract which are beyond the purview of the Procuring Entity, or are in pursuance of policies of Government — including but not limited to:
6(a)provisions of restrictions regarding local content and purchase preference to local suppliers In terms of the Make in India policy
6(b)provisions regarding restrictions on entities from countries having land-borders with India
6(c)purchase preference policies regarding MSEs and start-ups

9.39 Adjudication — Step 1

9.39.1The Notice of Adjudication

High-value matters:"where necessary — e.g., matters of high value — the Procuring Entity May proceed with adjudication by a high-level committee"(constituted on the lines of the HLC described at para 9.40.3 below).

9.39.2The 60-Day Decision and the Stay on Other Proceedings

9.39.3Escalation to Mediation

9.40 Mediation — Step 2

(The Mediation Act, 2023)

9.40.1Invoking Mediation

9.40.2THE DoE GUIDELINES ON MEDIATION — the High-Level Committee (HLC)

"Government departments/ entities/ agencies are encouraged to adopt mediation under the Mediation Act 2023, and/ or negotiate amicable settlements to resolve disputes."

a) the HLC and its composition:

B) the three ways an HLC May be used:

#Mode
inegotiate directly with the other party, and place a tentative proposed solution before the HLC
iiconduct mediation through a mediator, and then place the tentative mediated agreement before the HLC
iiiuse the HLC itself as the mediator

c) THE RATIONALE — arm's length scrutiny:

D) renegotiation in long-duration works contracts:

e) APPROVAL: "approval of the appropriate authority will need to be obtained for the final accepted solution. Section 49 of the Mediation Act 2023 is also relevant in this regard."

f) the non-routine Rule:

g) "disputes not covered in an arbitration clause — and where the methods outlined above are unsuccessful — should be adjudicated by the courts."

h) the modification authority: "general or case-specific modification in the application of the above guidelines May be authorised by:

9.40.3Appointment of Mediator(s)

9.40.4Confidentiality — and the recording prohibition

Online mediation: "the Act allows parties to opt for online/ virtual mediation — which shall be deemed to occur within the jurisdiction of a competent court. The Act also requires online mediation communication mechanisms to ensure confidentiality."

9.40.5How the Mediator Works

9.40.6Termination of Mediation — 120 Days Plus 60

9.40.7Mediated Settlement Agreement (MSA)

a) what it is: "if the parties resolve the dispute and execute a mediated settlement agreement ("MSA") — then the mediation is successful.

b) challenge to MSA — 90 days, four grounds only:

c) EXECUTION — enforceable as a decree:

9.40.8Costs and the Interest Moratorium

a) COSTS: "the parties shall equally bear all costs of mediation — including the fees of the mediator and the charges of the mediation service provider."

b) no claim of interest during mediation:

C) the stay on other proceedings: "the parties shall not initiate, during the mediation proceedings, any arbitral or judicial proceedings in respect of a dispute that is the subject matter of the mediation proceedings."

9.41 Arbitration — Step 3

(The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 — amended 2015 and 2021)

9.41.1The Arbitration Agreement and Its Survival

9.41.2the Msmed Override

9.41.3the Government Guidelines on Arbitration — the Rs 10 Crore Rule

(OM No. F.11/21/2024-PPD dated 03.06.2024)

"DoE has issued the following guidelines for arbitration in contracts of domestic procurement by the Government and by its entities and agencies — including CPSEs, public sector banks (PSBs), and Government companies:"

#Guideline
a## "arbitration as a method of dispute resolution should not be routinely or automatically included in procurement contracts/ tenders — especially in large contracts."
b## "as a norm — arbitration (if included in contracts) May be restricted to disputes with a value less than Rs. 10 crores.
This figure is regarding the value of the dispute — not the [value of the contract]."
d"*In matters where arbitration is to be resorted to — institutional arbitration May be given preference (where appropriate, after considering the reasonableness of the cost of arbitration relative to the value involved)."
egeneral or case-specific modification May be authorised by the Secretary concerned (or an officer not below Joint Secretary to whom delegated) for Ministries/ Departments/ attached and subordinate offices/ autonomous bodies — or by the managing director for CPSEs, Banks and Financial Institutions

9.42 Foreign Arbitration

9.43 Notice for Arbitration and Reference to Arbitration

9.43.1The Appointing Authority

9.43.2the 60–120 Day Window for the Notice for Arbitration

9.43.3Reference to Arbitration — the jurisdictional limit

9.44 Appointment of Arbitrator

9.44.1Qualification of Arbitrators — the five rules

#Rule
aRETIRED OFFICERS of the Procuring Organisation: Must HAVE retired in the rank of Senior Administrative Grade (or equivalent) · must have retired at least 1 year prior · AND must not be over 70 years of age on the date of notice for arbitration
bserving officers: Shall not be below ja grade level
c## the no-prior-involvement Rule: "he/ they shall not have had an opportunity to deal with the matters to which the contract relates — or who, in the course of his/ their duties as an officer of the procuring organisation, expressed views on any or all the matters under dispute or differences.
*A declaration to this effect shall be taken from the arbitrators."
d"an arbitrator May be appointed notwithstanding the total number of arbitration cases in which he has been appointed in the past."
e## "not be other than the person appointed by the appointing authority — and if for any reason that is not possible, the matter shall not be referred to arbitration at all."

9.44.2Panel of Arbitrators — and the two caps

9.44.3Replacement of Arbitrators

9.44.4THE FOUR APPOINTMENT REGIMES — turning on Section 12(5) waiver and value

A. Where Section 12(5) Has Been Waived

Value of all claims added togetherComposition of the Arbitral Tribunal
Does not exceed ₹ 1,00,00,000 (one crore)A sole arbitrator — who shall be a serving officer of the procuring organisation, not below Junior Administrative Grade, nominated by the appointing authority.
Appointed within 60 days From the day when a written and valid demand for arbitration is received
all other casesa panel of three serving officers not below Junior Administrative Grade — OR two serving officers not below jag and one retired officer (retired not below the rank of Senior Administrative Grade)

The four-name panel procedure (for the three-member tribunal):

B. Where Section 12(5) Has not Been Waived

Value of all claims added togetherComposition
does not exceed ₹ 50,00,000 (fifty lakh)A retired officer — retired not below the rank of Senior Administrative Grade officer — as the sole arbitrator
exceeds ₹ 50,00,000 (fifty lakh)a panel of three (3) retired officers — retired not below the rank of Senior Administrative Grade officer

The same four-name panel / 60-day / 30-day / 30-day procedure applies, but drawn entirely from RETIRED officers, with their retirement dates duly indicated.

9.44.5FAILURE TO APPOINT — who designates the institution

9.45 the Arbitral Procedure

9.45.1Effective Date of Entering Reference

9.45.2SEAT vs VENUE of Arbitration — the critical distinction

9.45.3The Duty to Send Parties Back if Earlier Steps Were Skipped

9.45.4Pleadings — the 30 / 60 / six-month timetable

StepTime limit
CLAIMANT to submit claims(stating the facts supporting the claims, with all relevant documents, and the relief or remedy sought against each claim)within 30 DAYS From the date of appointment of the arbitral tribunal — unless it has granted an extension
RESPONDENT to submit defence statement and counter-claim(s), if anywithin 60 DAYS Of receipt of the copy of claims — unless the Tribunal has granted an extension
COMPLETION of statements of claims, counter-claims and defence## within six months From the effective reference date

9.45.5Oral Arguments on a Day-to-Day Basis — and exemplary costs

9.45.6AWARD WITHIN 12 MONTHS — and the extension ladder

9.45.7Cost of Arbitration and Fees of the Arbitrators

#Fee entitlement
1A sole arbitrator shall be entitled to a 25% extra fee Over the prescribed fee
2the arbitrator shall be entitled to a 50 per cent extra fee if the award is made within 6 months — in terms of section 29(A)(2) of the Arbitration Act
3the arbitrator shall also be entitled to this extra fee where the fast track procedure in terms of section 29(B) is followed

9.45.8FAST TRACK PROCEDURE — four salient features

#Feature
a## "the dispute is to be decided based on written pleadings only. Procuring entities May encourage fast track procedure based on written pleadings only."
b"the arbitral tribunal shall have the power to call for clarifications in addition to the written pleadings where it deems necessary."
c"an oral hearing May be held only if all the parties request, or the arbitral tribunal considers it necessary."
d"the parties are free to decide the fees of the arbitrator(s) for a fast-track procedure."

9.45.9Powers of the Arbitral Tribunal to Grant Interim Relief

9.45.10THE AWARD — reasons, no pre-award interest, and corrections

finality and corrections:

  • "the award of the arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to this contract";
  • "a party May apply for corrections of any computational errors, typographical or clerical errors, or any other error of a similar nature occurring in the award — or interpretation of a specific point of the award — to the tribunal within 60 days of receipt of the award";
  • "a party May apply to the tribunal within 60 days of receiving the award to make an additional award — as to claims presented in the arbitral proceedings but omitted from the arbitral award."

9.46 Challenging Arbitration / Judicial Awards

9.46.1The Non-Routine Rule

9.46.2the 75% Payment Rule — Rule 227A of GFR, 2017

9.46.3the Escrow Account and the Waterfall

9.46.4the Candid Passage on Casual Appeals

9.46.5The Monitoring, Delegation and Board/ Committee Requirements

9.46.6THE STATISTICAL JUSTIFICATION — why the 75% risk is worth taking

9.46.7the Personal Accountability Provision

9.47 Mechanism for Resolution of Commercial Disputes Between Cpses and Government Agencies (AMRCD) [W ONLY]

9.47.1Introduction — and what AMRCD superseded

SCOPE — it applies to all commercial disputes concerning the interpretation and application of provisions in contracts between:

a) CPSEs inter se; and

b) CPSEs and Government departments/ organizations

9.47.2the TWO-TIER Structure

TierComposition / Authority
First level (tier 1)disputes are initially referred to a committee comprising:
• THE secretaries of the respective administrative ministries/ departments involved; AND
• THE Secretary of the Department of legal affairs.

THE financial advisors (fas) of the concerned ministries/ departments represent the issues before this committee
second level (tier 2)if the dispute remains unresolved at the first level — it is escalated to the Cabinet Secretary.

## WHOSE decision is final and binding

9.47.3Procedure — the three-month and 15-day rules

9.47.4Inclusion in Contracts — mandatory, including retrospectively

9.48 Contract Management — Risks and Mitigations

#RISKMITIGATION
1advance payments: "this is an area of risk in Public Procurement with undue and unintended benefits to the contractor — which vitiates the original selection criteria."any mobilisation or other advance payments should be as per the tender document/ contract, and only for justifiable cases.
Terms of such advances should be expressly stated in the NIT/ tender documents.
The advance payment May be released in not less than two stages, depending upon the progress of the contract.
The advance should be progressively adjusted against bills cleared for payment.
## "interest should be charged on delayed recoveries irrespective of the reason stated."
2contract changes and renegotiations: "this is also a risk area where the Procuring Entity May not get what it contracted and paid for, or May pay for what it has not received. On the other hand, the contractor May not get timely or proper amendments due to changes asked by the procuring entities."## "contract modifications and renegotiations should not substantially alter the nature of the contract. It should not vitiate the basis of the selection of the contractor. It should not give undue or unintended benefits to the contractor.
*However, for any changes caused by the Procuring Entity — the contractor should be adequately and timely compensated within the contractual terms."
3"supervising agencies/ individuals are unduly influenced to alter the contents of their reports — so changes in quality, performance, equipment, and characteristics go unnoticed."A contract management Manual or operating procedure should be prepared for large-value contracts.
There should be built-in systems for checks and balances
4"the contractor's claims are false or inaccurate — and are protected by the person in charge of revising them."## "all large contracts should be formally reconciled for closure — to ensure that the scope of the work and warranty/ defect liability period is completed.
*This should include the dispute resolution forum for resolving disputes in a fixed timeframe, with the provision of escalation level."
5"payment to the contractor is delayed intentionally or otherwise.""all payments/ recoveries should also be reconciled."
6"the contractor gets the final payment — but contract closure has not been formally done. As a result, material/ assets loaned to him are not accounted for."## "*it should also be ensured that material/ assets loaned to him — including security passes — are accounted for."
7## "every dispute lands up in arbitration or court cases — since the Procuring Entity is reluctant to grant compensation for its lapses to the contractor."(addressed by the dispute-resolution ladder at paras 9.37–9.46, and by the DoE directive at para 9.37.2)
8"agents/ sub-contractors and partners — chosen in a non-transparent way — are unaccountable, or are used to channel bribes.""agents should only be as per the terms of the contract.
## *sub-contracting of the contract should normally not be allowed in the procurement of goods."

Appendix to Chapter 9 — Part C: Points of Difference

#Point of differencePosition
1AMRCD — the Administrative Mechanism for Resolution of CPSEs Disputes(effective 22 May 2018, superseding the Permanent Machinery of Arbitration; two-tier structure ending with the Cabinet Secretary; three-month decision; 15-day appeal; excludes Railways, Income Tax, Customs and Excise)W ONLY
2Definition of breachG/C/NC: framed around insolvency, receivership, neglect, default, or disinclination to honour obligations — expressly including ETHICAL STANDARDS and the obligation to maintain production capability · W: framed around *inability to honour important stipulations*, noting that breaches mostly relate to inability to complete the Work within stipulated time
3"Obligation to maintain production capability (equipment & manufacturing facilities) based on which contract was awarded"G(a goods-specific default)
4Warranty obligations survive terminationG(consistent with the Goods-only Warranty Clause at Part A, para 9.17)
5Sub-contracting "should normally not be allowed in the procurement of GOODS"G(contrast the Works and NC positions permitting sub-contracting subject to limits — Chapter 3, para 3.3.3 and Chapter 4 Part A, para 4.3.3-E)
6Excepted matters head 6 — Make in India, land-border restrictions, MSE and Start-up preferences excluded from arbitrationCommon to all four
7The three-step ladder — Adjudication → Mediation → Arbitration, with the sequential ruleCommon to all four
8The Mediation Act 2023 replacing the conciliation part of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996Common footnote in all four
9Rs 10 crore norm restricting arbitration; institutional arbitration preferred; arbitration not to be routinely includedCommon to all four(OM dated 03.06.2024)
10The four appointment regimes turning on Section 12(5) waiver — Rs 1 crore / Rs 50 lakh thresholds; the four-name panel; the Finance/ Accounts member requirementCommon to all four
1175% payment against BG on challenging an award; the escrow waterfall; personal accountability for non-adherenceCommon to all four(Rule 227A of GFR 2017)
12Risk row 8 mitigation — "sub-contracting should normally not be allowed"G(the other Manuals' risk tables address agents differently)

end of Chapter 9 (parts a, b and c)

Gateway to Promotion Exams

Single Device Policy: You can only be logged in on one device at a time. Logging in here will end any existing session.
Forgot Password?

Enter your email to receive a password reset link.

Back to Login

Chat with us